Schneider Electric UPS

Specifier’s
Guide
By Building & IT Buisness
www.schneider-electric.com
Specifiers Guide Table of Contents
Introduction .................................................................... 2
Application Chapters ...................................................... 3

Key Factors in UPS Installs .................................................................3
Selection of the UPS ...........................................................................56
Elimination of Harmonics .....................................................................79
Theoretical Review ...............................................................................100
Specification guides ....................................................... 167

MGE Galaxy 300 & 300i (10 to 80 kVA) ...............................................169
MGE Galaxy 3500 (10 to 40 kVA) ........................................................206
MGE Galaxy 5500 (20 to 120 kVA) ......................................................228
Galaxy VM (160 to 200 kVA) ................................................................259
MGE Galaxy 7000 (250 to 1000 kVA) ..................................................281
Galaxy VX (1250 to 1500 kVA)...............................................................303
Gutor PxC (10 to 80 kVA) .....................................................................318
Smart UPS On-Line (1 to 20 kVA) ........................................................329
Smart UPS VT(10 to 40) ......................................................................342
Symmetra LX (8 to 16 kVA) ..................................................................364
Symmetra PX (16 to 500 kW) ...............................................................377
Symmetra MW (400 to 1600 kW) .........................................................409
AccuSine Power Filtering (20 to 120 A)................................................451
Modular Power Distribution (144 to 277 kW) ........................................460
Static Transfert Switch (30 to 1600 A)...................................................473
Glossary........................................................................... 485
Bibliography .................................................................... 494
07/2016 edition p. 1
Introduction
Electrical
Specifiers Guide – IEC 50 Hz Version
Dear Designer, Specifier, Consulting or Prescription Engineer,
Thank you for considering Schneider Electric. We are pleased to provide

you with the most comprehensive set of products, software, and systems
for highly efficient power and cooling solutions. These systems are
backed by the strength, experience, and wide network of Schneider
Electric Critical Power & Cooling Services.
In this engineering binder, you will find information on Schneider

Electric products, the most innovative offering of solutions for data center
and critical space applications. For the most up to date information and to
assist with your project applications and designs, I encourage you to
contact and work with your local sales representative.
CONTENTS AND DRAWINGS MAY BE REVISED FROM TIME TO TIME.
TO ENSURE YOU ARE USING THE LATEST INFORMATION, PLEASE VISIT
HTTP://WWW.SCHNEIDER-ELECTRIC.COM
OR INQUIRE WITH YOUR SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC REPRESENTATIVE.
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC IS NOT LIABLE FOR ERRORS INCURRED BY USE OF OUT OF DATE MATERIAL
Key factors in UPS installations
Key factors in UPS installations
Contents
Introduction ..................................................................... 5
Using this guide .............................................................. 6
Overview of protection solutions .................................. 7
Protection solutions ..............................................................................7
Accompanying software and services ..................................................8
UPSs in electrical installations ...................................... 9
Function of each component in the installation.....................................9
Sources of information in setting up installation specifications .............10
Basic notions on installations with UPSs ..................... 11
Need for high-quality and high-availability power .................................11
Supply systems with UPSs ...................................................................12
UPS power quality ................................................................................14
UPS power availability..........................................................................16
Selection of the configuration ...............................................................21
Power calculations.......................................................... 22
Elements required for power calculations .............................................22
Ratings of single-UPS configurations ...................................................24
Ratings of parallel-UPS configurations .................................................27
Control of upstream harmonics ..................................... 30
Role of the input rectifier ......................................................................30
PFC type transistor based controlled active rectifier ............................30
Combination of UPSs and generator ....................................................31
System earthing arrangements...................................... 32
Background information on system earthing arrangements .................32
Applications in UPS installations ..........................................................34
Protection ........................................................................ 35
Protection using circuit breakers ..........................................................37
Selection of circuit breakers .................................................................40
Cables ............................................................................. 45
Selection of cable sizes ........................................................................45
Example of an installation ....................................................................46
Energy storage ............................................................... 47
Storage technologies ............................................................................47
Selection of a battery............................................................................49
Battery monitoring ................................................................................50
Human-machine interface and communication ........... 51
Human-machine interface (HMI) ..........................................................51
Communication ....................................................................................51
Preliminary work ............................................................ 53
Installation considerations ....................................................................53
Battery room .........................................................................................54
Introduction
Growing needs for high-quality and high-availability power
Problems related to the quality and availability of electrical power have become
vitally important due to the key role of computers and electronics in the development
of many critical applications.
Disturbances in distribution systems (micro-outages, outages, voltage sags, etc.) can
result in major losses or safety hazards in a number of activities such as:
Sensitive process industries, where a malfunction in the control/monitoring systems
can result in production losses.
Airports and hospitals where faulty operation of equipment can represent a serious
danger to human life.
Information and communication technologies, where the necessary level of
reliability and dependability is even higher. Data centers require high-quality, "no-
break" power 24/365, year after year and without halts for maintenance.
UPS protection systems are now an integral part of the value chain of many
companies. Their level of availability and power quality have a direct effect on the
service continuity of operations. Productivity, the quality of products and services, the
competitiveness of the company and site security depend on the smooth operation of
the UPS. Failure is not an option.
Schneider Electric - a complete solution covering all needs

Schneider Electric offers a complete range of power-protection solutions to meet the
needs of all sensitive applications.
These solutions implement communicating software and products incorporating
state-of-the-art technology offering the highest levels of reliability. They are backed
by complete services based on unique expertise, worldwide presence and use of the
TM
most advanced techniques and technologies. Schneider Electric Global Services ,
with 40 years of experience on customer sites, accompanies your installation
throughout its life cycle, from design and start-up to operation and upgrades,
wherever they may be.
Uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs) are of course a central part of these solutions.
They supply high-quality, high-availability continuous power with built-in, advanced
communication interfaces that are compatible with both electrical and computer
environments
They are often used in conjunction with other communicating products such as active
harmonic conditioners, transfer switches, distribution switchboards, battery-
monitoring systems and supervision software. Taken as a whole, this offering
provides a complete and effective answer to the protection problems that arise in
sensitive installations.
For data centers, on-demand solutions integrate the physical infrastructure including
server racks, UPSs, electrical distribution, cooling and security along with the
associated software.
A guide to assist professionals dealing with electrical

installations for critical applications
Schneider Electric has made a large part of its know-how available in this design
guide.
Its purpose is to assist in designing and installing complete, optimised power-
protection solutions, from the utility line through to the final load, corresponding to the
quality and availability requirements of your critical applications.
It is intended for all professionals dealing with this type of installation, including:
Independent design offices and engineering firms,
End-user design departments,
Installers,
Project managers,
Facility managers,
Computer system managers,
Financial or purchasing managers.
Using this guide
Structure of this document
 Finding information
Information may be located in a number of ways:

The general contents at the start of the guide,
The overview on pages 4 and 5 of chapter” Key factors in UPS installation”,
which presents the products, communication systems, software and services that
are all part of protection solutions.
 Chapters
Chapter” Key factors in UPS installation” presents on pages 9 and 10 the role of
UPSs in electrical installations and indicates the main parameters that must be
taken into account. The remainder of the chapter guides you through the selection
process for a solution by determining the main elements of an installation with a
UPS.
Chapter “Selection of the UPS configuration” presents a number of practical
examples in view of selecting a configuration, from a simple, single-UPS unit
through to installations offering exceptionally high levels of availability.
Chapter “eliminate harmonic currents” presents solutions to eliminate
harmonic currents in installations.
Chapter” Technical review” provides background technical information for
devices and notions mentioned in other parts of the guide.
Finally, to facilitate the preparation of projects:
 Cross references
The various chapters contain cross references (indicated by the symbol ) to
other parts of the design guide presenting more in-depth information on specific
topics.
Refererences to technical articles (White Papers - WP) are indicated by the

following symbol together with the number of the White Paper in question.
See WP no. 
Chap. 1: Key factors in UPS installation

Chap. 2 : Selection of the UPS configuration
Chap. 3 : Eliminate harmonic currents
Chap. 5 : Technical review
Overview of protection solutions
Power protection solutions
Fig. 1.1. Schneider Electric products.
Schneider Electric 07/2012 edition p. 7

Overview of protection solutions
Accompanying software and services
Fig. 1.2. Schneider Electric software and services.

UPSs in electrical installations
Function of each component in the installation
AccuSine
AccuSine
Fig. 1.3. Functions of the components in installations with UPSs.

UPSs in electrical installations (cont.)
Sources of information in setting up installation specifications

The diagrams on the previous pages provide a general overview of the components and various parameters in installations with
UPSs.
It is now time to go into more detail.
The table below indicates:
● the order in which the subjects are presented in this chapter
● the choices that must be made
● the purpose of each decision with the indication of the pages concerning the relevant elements in this chapter
● where additional information on each subject may be found in the other chapters of this design guide.
Choices Purpose See Additional information See

Mono or multi- Determine the installation architecture Selection of Examples and comparison of 13 Selection of
source and UPS configuration best suited to the UPS typical installations, from single- the UPS
architecture and your requirements in terms of energy configuration UPS units to high-availability configuration
configuration of availability, upgrades, operation and architectures. p. 58
UPS sources budget. Supplying sensitive loads. Theoretical
review
p. 102
UPS configurations. Theoretical
review
p. 129
Engine generator sets. Theoretical
review
p. 150
UPS power rating Determine the rating of the UPS unit Key factors in UPS make-up and operation. Theoretical
or parallel units (for redundancy or UPS review
capacity) required, taking into account installations p. 122
the distribution-system and load p. 22
characteristics.
Control of Reduce voltage distortion on the Key factors in Elimination of harmonics in Eliminate
upstream upstream busbars to acceptable UPS installations. harmonic
harmonics levels, depending on the power installations currents
sources likely to supply the UPS p. 30 Harmonics Theoretical
system. review
p. 153
System earthing Ensure installation compliance with Key factors in
arrangements applicable standards for the UPS
protection of life and property and installations
correct operation of devices. Which p. 32
system earthing arrangements are
required for which applications?
Upstream and Determine the breaking capacity and Key factors in
downstream the ratings of the circuit breakers UPS
protection using upstream and downstream of the installations
circuit breakers UPS, solve any discrimination p. 37
problems.
Connections Limit voltage drops and temperatureKey factors in
rise in the cables, as well as harmonic UPS
distortion at the load inputs. installations
p. 45
Battery Operation on battery power (backup Key factors in Energy-storage solutions and Theoretical
time) must last long enough to meet UPS batteries. review
user requirements. installations p. 143
p. 47
Communication Define UPS communication with the Key factors in
electrical and computer environment. UPS
installations
p. 51
Preliminary work Construction work and ventilation Key factor in
(if any) must be planned, notably if there is a UPS
special battery room. installations
p. 53
Standards Be aware of the main applicable UPS Theoretical Electromagnetic compatibility Theoretical
standards. review review
p. 140 p. 135

Basic notions on installations with UPSs
Need for high-quality

Disturbances andpower
in distribution-system
high-availability power Public and private utilities supply electricity whose quality may be reduced by a
number of disturbances. These disturbances are inevitable due to the distances
involved and the wide variety of connected loads.
The origin of disturbances includes:
 the distribution system itself (atmospheric conditions, accidents, switching of
protection or control devices, etc.),
 user equipment (motors, disturbing devices such as arc furnaces, welding
machines, systems incorporating power electronics, etc.).
These disturbances include micro-outages, voltage sags, overvoltages, frequency
variations, harmonics, HF noise, flicker, etc. through to extended outages.
 Disturbances in distribution-system power, see Ch Theoretical review p. 102.
Requirements of sensitive loads

Digital equipment (computers, telecom systems, instruments, etc.) use
microprocessors that operate at frequencies of several mega or even giga
Hertz, i.e. they carry out millions or even billions of operations per second. A
disturbance in the electrical supply lasting just a few milliseconds can affect
thousands or millions of basic operations. The result may be malfunctions and loss of
data with dangerous (e.g. airports, hospitals) or costly consequences (e.g. loss of
production).
That is why many loads, called sensitive or critical loads, require a supply that is
protected against distribution-system disturbances.
Examples.
 industrial processes and their control/monitoring systems - risk of production
losses.
 airports and hospitals - risks for the safety of people.
 information and communication technologies - risk of halts in processing at a very
high hourly cost.
Many manufacturers of sensitive equipment specify very strict tolerances (much
stricter than those for the distribution system) for the supply of their equipment, one
example being CBEMA (Computer Business Equipment Manufacturer’s Association)
for computer equipment.
 Sensitive loads, see Theoretical review p.102 "Supply of sensitive loads".
Costs incurred by the quality of electrical power

Over 50% of failures for critical loads are due to the electrical supply and the hourly
cost of downtime for the corresponding applications is generally very high (fig. 1.5).
It is therefore vital for the modern economy, which is increasingly dependent on
digital technologies, to solve the problems affecting the quality and the availability of
the power supplied by the distribution system when it is intended for sensitive loads.
Examples of hourly costs of failures

15 %
Human
● mobile telephones - 40 kEuros.
● airline reservation systems - 90 kEuros.
error ● credit-card transactions - 2.5 MEuros.
45 % 20 %
● automotive assembly line - 6 MEuros
● stock-market transactions - 6.5 MEuros.
Supply Equipment
problems failure
20 %
Nuisance tripping
(circuit breaker, etc.)
Fig. 1.5. Origin and cost of system failures due to the electrical supply.

(cont .)
Supply systems with Purpose of UPSs

UPSs
UPSs (uninterruptible power supply) are designed to meet the needs presented
above. First launched in the 1970s, their importance has grown in step with the
development of digital technologies.
UPSs are electrical devices that are positioned between the distribution system and
sensitive loads. They supply power that is much more reliable than the distribution
system and corresponds to the needs of sensitive loads in terms of quality and
availability.
 UPSs, see Theoretical review p. 104 "The UPS solution".
Types of UPSs
The term UPS covers products with apparent power ratings from a few hundred VA
up to several MVA, implementing different technologies.
That is why standard IEC 62040-3 and its European equivalent ENV 62040-3 define
three standard types (topologies) of UPS.
UPS technologies include:
 Passive standby,
 Interaction with the distribution system,
 Double conversion.
For the low power ratings (< 2 kVA), the three technologies coexist. For higher
ratings, virtually all static UPSs (i.e. implementing semiconductor components, e.g.
IGBTs) implement the double-conversion technology.
Rotary UPSs (with rotating mechanical parts, e.g. flywheels) are not included in the
standards and remain marginal on the market.
 Types of UPSs, see Theoretical review p. 109 "Types of static UPSs".
Double-conversion static UPSs
This is virtually the only type of UPS used in high-power installations due to their
unique advantages over the other types:
 complete regeneration of the power supplied at the output,
 total isolation of the load from the distribution system and its disturbances,
 no-break transfer (where applicable) to a bypass line.
 The operating principle (fig. 1.6.1) is presented below.
 during normal operation, a rectifier/charger turns the AC-input power into DC
power to supply an inverter and float charge a battery.
 the inverter completely regenerates a sinusoidal signal, turning the DC power back
into AC power that is free of all disturbances and within strict amplitude and
frequency tolerances.
 if the AC-input power fails, the battery supplies the power required by the inverter
for a specified backup time.
 a static bypass can transfer the load without a break in the supply of power to a
bypass line to continue supplying the load if need be (internal fault, short-circuit
downstream, maintenance). This "fault-tolerant" design makes it possible to continue
supplying power to the load in "downgraded mode" (the power does not transit the
inverter) during the time required to re-establish normal conditions.
 Double-conversion UPSs, see Theoretical review p. 119 "Components and
operation".

(cont .)
Fig. 1.6.1. Double-conversion static UPS

ECONversion mode in static UPSs
Unique to the market patented ECOnversion, based on several patents from Schneider Electric, brings both advantages of
Double Conversion (voltage quality) and interaction with the distribution system. High efficiency is met by still keepingload in safe
area thanks to the zero transfer time downstream the UPS (Class 1 output voltage as per 62040-3). Active harmonic filtering
brings also insurance to the customer that no pollution is brought upstream the UPS when supplying very disturbant loads.
ECOnversion mode can be used in both Data Centre (in a 2N, 2N+1 or 2N+2 architecture for example) and also for supplying
industrial loads.
As a summary :
High efficiency
Harmonic mitigation
Upstream Power Factor equal to unity
No break transfer time => Class 1 voltage quality
Upstream short-circuit handling
 High efficiency modes in UPSs, see Application Note AN187 on Galaxy VM
homepage
Fig. 1.6.2. ECOnversion mode principle
ECO mode in static UPSs
This is the economy mode available on most of the UPSs today. The load is powered through the static bypass branch via the
unconditioned grid. Load current directly affects the upstream grid, as a consequence, in this mode of operation, potential
harmonic content has to be taken into account in the overall installation (see page 27)
Fig. 1.6.3. ECO Mode principle

(cont .)
Power quality of UPSs

Power quality of double-conversion UPSs
By design, double-conversion solid-state UPSs supply to the connected loads a

sinusoidal signal that is:
 high quality because it is continuously regenerated and regulated (amplitude  1%,
frequency  0.5%),
 free of all disturbances from the distribution system (due to the double conversion)
and in particular from micro-outages and outages (due to the battery).
This level of quality must be ensured, whatever the type of load.
Voltage quality for linear loads

What is a linear load?
A linear load supplied with a sinusoidal voltage draws a sinusoidal current having the
same frequency as the voltage. The current may be displaced (angle ) with respect
to the voltage (fig. 1.7).
Examples of linear loads

Many loads are linear, including standard light bulbs, heating units, resistive loads,
motors, transformers, etc. They do not contain any active electronic components,
only resistors (R), inductors (L) and capacitors (C).
UPSs and linear loads

For this type of load, the UPS output signal is very high quality, i.e. the voltage and
current are perfectly sinusoidal, 50 or 60 Hz.
Purely resistive load Load with inductor and/or capacitor

Fig. 1.7. Voltage and current for linear loads.
Voltage quality for non-linear loads

What is a non-linear load?
A non-linear (or distorting) load supplied with a sinusoidal voltage draws a periodic
current that has the same frequency as the voltage, but is not sinusoidal.
The current drawn by the load is in fact the combination (fig. 1.8) of:
 a sinusoidal current called the fundamental, at the 50 or 60 Hz frequency,
 harmonics, which are sinusoidal currents with an amplitude less than that of the
fundamental, but a frequency that is a multiple of the fundamental and which defines
the harmonic order (e.g. the third order harmonic has a frequency 3 x 50 Hz
(or 60 Hz) and the fifth order harmonic has a frequency 5 x 50 Hz (or 60 Hz)).
The harmonic currents are caused by the presence of power-electronic components
(e.g. diodes, SCRs, IGBTs) which switch the input current.
Examples of non-linear loads

Non-linear loads include all those that have a switch-mode power supply at their
input to supply the electronics (e.g. computers, variable-speed drives, etc.).
Voltage and current drawn by a single-phase

Effect of harmonics (H3 and H5 in this switch-mode power supply (computers).
example).
Fig. 1.8. The current drawn by non-linear loads is distorted by the harmonics.

(cont .)
Harmonic spectrum of the current drawn by a non-linear load

The harmonic analysis of a non-linear current consists in determining (fig. 1.9):
 the harmonic orders present in the current,
 the relative importance of each order, measured as the percentage of the order.
rms value of harmonick
Hk% = distortion of harmonic k =
rms value of the fundamental
Voltage and current harmonic distortion

Non-linear loads cause both current and voltage harmonics. This is because for each
current harmonic, there is a voltage harmonic with the same frequency. The 50 Hz
(or 60 Hz) sinusoidal voltage of the UPS is therefore distorted by the harmonics.
The distortion of a sine wave is presented as a percentage:
rms value of all the harmonic k
THD* % = total distortion =
rms value of the fundamental
* Total Harmonic Distortion.
The following values are defined:
 TDHU % for the voltage, based on the voltage harmonics,
 TDHI % for the current, based on the current harmonics (fig. 1.9).
The higher the harmonic content, the greater the distortion.
Practically speaking, the distortion in the current drawn by the load is much higher
(THDI approximately 30%) than that of the voltage at the input (THDU approximately
5%).
Harmonic distortion levels
H5 = 33%
H7 = 2.7%
H11 = 7.3%
H13 = 1.6%
H17 = 2.6%
H19 = 1.1%
H23 = 1.5%
H25 = 1.3%
THDI = 35% (see calculation ch. 5, p. 41)

Harmonic spectrum and corresponding THDI.
Input current of a three-phase rectifier.
Fig. 1.9. Example of the harmonic spectrum of the current drawn by a non-linear load.
 Non-linear loads, see "Elimination of harmonics in installations" and

Technical review p. 38 "Harmonics".
UPSs and non-linear loads

Harmonics affect the sinusoidal voltage at the UPS output. Excessive distortion can
disturb the linear loads connected in parallel on the output, notably by increasing the
current they draw (temperature rise).
To maintain the quality of the UPS output voltage, it is necessary to limit its distortion
(THDU), i.e. limit the current harmonics that produce voltage distortion.
In particular, it is necessary that the impedance (at the UPS output and in the cables
supplying the load) remain low.
Limiting the distortion of the output voltage

Due to the free-frequency chopping technique employed, the impedance at the
output of UPSs from Schneider Electric is very low, whatever the frequency (i.e.
whatever the harmonic order). This technique virtually eliminates all distortion in the
output voltage when supplying non-linear loads. The quality of the output voltage is
thus constant, even for non-linear loads.
Practically speaking, installation designers must:
 check UPS output values for non-linear loads and, in particular, make sure that the
announced level of distortion, measured for standardised non-linear loads as per
standard IEC 62040-3, is very low (THDU < 2 to 3%),
 limit the length (impedance) of the output cables supplying the loads.
 UPS performance for non-linear loads, see Theoretical review p. 158.

(cont .)
UPS power availability What is meant by availability?

Availability of an electrical installation
Availability is the probability that the installation will be capable of supplying energy
with the level of quality required by the supplied loads.
It is expressed as a percentage.
MTTR
Availability (%) = (1 )  100
MTBF
The MTTR is the mean time to repair the supply system following a failure (including
the time to detect the cause of the failure, repair it and start the system up again).
The MTBF is the mean time between failures, i.e. the time the supply system is
capable of ensuring correct operation of the loads.
 Example.
An availability of 99.9% (called thee nines) corresponds to a 99.9% chance that the
system will effectively carry out the required functions at any given time. The
difference between this probability and 1 (i.e. 1 - 0.999 = 0.001) indicates the level of
non-availability (i.e. one chance out of 1000 that the system will not carry out the
required functions at any given time).
Fig. 1.10. MTTR and MTBF.
What is the practical signification of availability?

Down-time costs for critical applications are very high (see fig. 1.5).
These applications must obviously remain in operation as long as possible.
The same is true for their electrical supply.
The availability of the energy supplied by an electrical installation corresponds to a
statistical measurement (in the form of a percentage) of its operating time.
The MTBF and MTTR values are calculated or measured (on the basis of sufficiently
long observations) for the components. They can then be used to determine the
availability of the installation over the period.
What are the factors contributing to availability?

Availability depends on the MTBF and the MTTR.
 Availability would be equal to 100% if the MTTR is equal to zero (instantaneous
repair) or if the MTBF is infinite (operation with no breakdowns). This is statistically
impossible.
 Practically speaking, the lower the MTTR and the higher the MTBF, the greater the
availability.
From "3 nines" to "6 nines"

The critical nature of many applications has created the need for much higher levels
of availability for electrical power.
 The "traditional" economy uses power from the public utility. An average-quality
distribution system with HV backup offers 99.9% availability (3 nines), which
corresponds to eight hours of non-availability per year.
 Sensitive loads require an electrical supply capable of providing 99.99% availability
(4 nines), which corresponds to 50 minutes of non-availability per year.
 The computer and communication equipment in data centres requires 99.9999%
availability (6 nines), which corresponds to 30 seconds of non-availability per year.
This level is the means to ensure, without risk of major financial loss, operation of
infrastructures 24/365, without shutdown for maintenance. It is a step toward a
continuous supply.

(cont .)
 The "traditional" economy uses

public-utility power offering 99.9%
availability, i.e. 3 nines.
 Sensitive loads require a 99.99%
level of availability, i.e. 4 nines.
 Data centres require 99.9999%,
i.e. 6 nines.
Fig. 1.11. Evolution in the level of availability required by applications.
How can availability be improved?

To improve availability, it is necessary to reduce the MTTR and increase the
MTBF.
Reduce the MTTR

Real-time fault detection, analysis by experts to ensure a precise diagnosis and rapid
repair all contribute to reducing the MTTR.
In addition to this, the architecture of the UPS itself can also contribute to lower the
MTTR value.
The Galaxy V series, Symmetra PX and Symmetra MW for example are based on
several innovations that drastically participate to the reduction of the MTTR :
- modular type of internal architecture (power blocks) : easiness of replacement
(VM, VX, PX and MW)
- redundant and user replaceable fans, without even bypassing the unit (VM &
VX)
- internal redundancy & fault tolerance (VX, PX and MW)
Quality of service
 International presence of the manufacturer.
 International availability of services.
 The number, the qualification and the experience of service teams.
 The installed product base and the experience gained.
 Easy to maintain, modular UPSs
 The resources and the proximity of the technical support.
 Local availability of original spare parts.
 High-performance manufacturer methods and tools.
 Remote diagnostics.
 Training in courses adapted to customer needs.
 Quality and availability of documentation in the local language.
TM
Schneider Electric Global Services offers a complete range of consulting
services, training and audits to provide users with the knowledge required
for system operation, diagnostics and level-one maintenance.
Schneider Electric Global

TM
Services
Reduce the MTTR

Increase availability
Fig. 1.12. The quality of service is an essential factor in high availability.

(cont .)
UPS communication capabilities

 User-friendly interface providing easy operating diagnostics.
 Communication with the electrical and computer environment.
 Communication and supervision of UPSs from Schneider Electric, see . UPS
communication.
Increase the MTBF

This goal depends primarily on the factors listed below.
Selection of components with proven reliability
 Products with certified design, development and manufacturing processes.
 Performance levels certified by recognised, independent organisations.
 Compliance with international standards on electrical safety, EMC
(electromagnetic compatibility) and performance measurement.
With 40 years experience and protecting 350 GVA of critical power, solutions
from Schneider Electric have proven their value to the major industrial
companies. All products comply with the main international standards and their
level of performance is certified by recognised organisations.
Certified quality and reliability

Increase the MTBF
Increase availability
Fig. 1.13. The proven reliability of products increase the MTBF and availability.
Built-in fault tolerance

Fault tolerance makes possible operation in a downgraded mode following faults that
may occur at different levels of the installation (see fig. 1.14). During the time
required to repair, the load continues to be supplied and generates revenues.
Immediate tripping:
- detection and alarms
- identification of causes
- corrective action
Fig. 1.14. Fault tolerance increases availability.
New power electronic architecture

The core of the UPS when we have to deal with MTBF, is without any doubt the
power converter. Schneider Electric has brought another step in innovation and
customer experience with the patented 4 level technology, embedded in both Galaxy
VM and Galaxy VX.

(cont .)
Fig. 1.15. 4 level inverter technology in Galaxy V series
This technology allows to strongly reduce the stress at the component level (IGBT)
which result in a much higher reliability of the converter, and as a consequence to a
significant increase of the MTBF.
Fig. 1.15. Probability of IGBT failure versus voltage stress.
Installation maintainability
This is the capacity to isolate (de-energise) parts of the installation for maintenance
under safe conditions, while continuing to supply the load. It should be possible:
 in the UPS, due to the static bypass and maintenance bypass,
 in other parts of the installation, depending on the architecture.
Direct supply of the load during

maintenance.
Automatic, no-break transfer of the

load to the bypass line following a
downstream internal fault or
overload.
Fig. 1.15. Static bypass and manual maintenance bypass (Galaxy 7000 parallel with CSS)

(cont .)
Direct supply of the load during

maintenance.
Automatic, no-break transfer of the

load to the bypass line following a
downstream internal fault or
overload.
Fig. 1.15. Static bypass and manual maintenance bypass (Galaxy VX 750kVA)
Schneider Electric solutions ensure fault tolerance and maintainability by

implementing:
 double-conversion UPSs capable of transferring the load to the Bypass AC input
via the automatic bypass and equipped with a maintenance bypass,
 redundant, multi-source UPS configurations with STS units.
Key factors to the availability of installations with UPSs

A few years ago, most installations were made up of single-UPS units and the
number of parallel systems was small. The applications requiring this type of
installation still exist.
However, the shift toward high availability requires use of configurations offering
redundancy at a number of levels in the installation (see fig. 1.16).
Source redundancy:
availability even during long
utility outages.
UPS redundancy:
reliability, easier and safer
maintenance.
Redundant distribution
with STS units: maximum
availability.
Fig. 1.16. The required levels of availability have resulted in the use of redundancy on a
number of levels in the installation.
This trend has led designers, depending on the criticality of the loads and the
operating requirements, to take into account some or all of the key factors listed
below.
Reliability and availability
Propose a configuration corresponding to the level of availability required by the
load, comprising components with proven levels of reliability and backed up by a
suitable level of service quality.
Maintainability
Ensure easy maintenance of the equipment under safe conditions for personnel and
without interrupting operation.
Upgradeability
It must be possible to upgrade the installation over time, taking into account both the
need to expand the installation gradually and operating requirements.
Discrimination and non propagation of faults
It must be possible to limit faults to as small a part of the installation as possible,
while enabling servicing without stopping operations.
Installation operation and management

(cont .)
Make operations easier by providing the means to anticipate events via installation
supervision and management systems.
Selection of the Prerequisite step in establishing installation specifications

configuration
The selection of a configuration determines the level of availability that will be
created for the load. It also determines the possible solutions for most of the factors
listed above.
The configuration may be single or multi-source, with single or parallel UPS units and
with or without redundancy.
Selection of the configuration is the initial step in establishing installation
specifications. To assist in making the right decision, chapter 2 is entirely devoted to
this subject. It compares the various configurations in terms of availability, protection
of the loads, maintainability, upgradeability and cost.
 Configuration selection based on typical installations corresponding to different
levels of availability, see Selection of the UPS configuration

Power calculations
Installation considerations
Elements required for
power
Type calculations
of load supplied
Linear loads (cos ) or non-linear loads (power factor).
These characteristics determine the power factor at the UPS output.
Maximum power drawn by the load under steady-state conditions

For a load, this is the power rating. If a number of loads are connected in parallel on
the UPS output, it is necessary to calculate the total load when all the loads operate
at the same time. Otherwise, it is necessary to use diversity to calculate the most
unfavourable operation in terms of the power drawn.
In-rush currents under transient conditions or for a short-circuit

downstream
The overload capacity of a UPS system depends on the time the overload lasts.
If this time limit is exceeded, the UPS transfers the load to the Bypass AC input, if its
voltage characteristics are within tolerances. In this case, the load is no longer
protected against disturbances on the distribution system.
Depending on the quality of the Bypass AC power, it is possible to:
 use the Bypass AC input to handle current spikes due to switching of devices or
downstream short-circuits. This avoids oversizing the system,
 disable automatic transfer (except for internal faults), while maintaining the
possibility of manual transfers (e.g. for maintenance).
UPSs from Schneider Electric operate in current-limiting mode. By spacing switching
of devices over time, it is generally possible to handle in-rush currents without having
to transfer to the Bypass AC power. If the in-rush current exceeds the limiting
threshold (e.g. 2.33 In for MGE Galaxy 9000 UPSs) for a few periods (but less than
one second), the UPS current limits for the necessary time. This downgraded
operating mode may be acceptable, for example, for a cold start (on battery power,
utility power absent).
Power of a UPS
Rated power of a UPS

This rating, indicated in the catalogues, is in the output power. It is indicated as an apparent power S n in kVA, with the
corresponding active power Pn in kW, for a:
 linear load,
 load with a cos  = 0.8.
However, last-generation UPSs from Schneider Electric can supply loads with a cos  = 0.9 leading.
Calculation of the rated power

Pn (kW) = 0.8 Sn (kVA). rated active power
This calculation depends on the output voltage of the UPS and the current drawn by
the load, where:
Sn (kVA) = UnIn 3 in three-phase systems
Sn (kVA) = VnIn in single-phase systems
For a three-phase UPS, U and I are rms line values, for a single-phase UPS, V is a
phase-to-neutral voltage, where:
Un = phase-to-phase voltage
Vn = phase-to-neutral voltage
3
Un = Vn
For example, if Un = 400 volts, Vn = 230 Volts.
Power and type of load

The two tables below present the equations linking the power, voltage and current,
depending on the type of load (linear or non-linear).
The following symbols are used:
 instantaneous voltage u(t) and current i(t) values,
 the corresponding rms values U and I,
  = angular frequency = 2  f where f is the frequency (50 or 60 Hz),
  = displacement between the voltage and the current under sinusoidal conditions.

Power calculations (Cont.)
Linear loads
Three-phase Single-phase
Sinusoidal voltage u(t) = U 2 sin t between phases v(t) = V 2 sin t phase to neutral
3
U=V
Displaced sinusoidal current i(t) = I 2 sin (t - ) phase current
Current crest factor 2

Apparent power 3 S (kVA) = VI
S (kVA) = UI cos 
Active power P (kW) = UI 3 cos  = S (kVA) cos  P (kW) = VI cos  = S (kVA) cos 
Reactive power Q (kvar) = UI 3 sin  = S (kVA) sin  Q (kvar) = VI sin  = S (kVA) sin 
P 2 +Q 2
S=
Non-linear loads
Sinusoidal voltage u(t) = U 2 sin t between phases v(t) = V 2 sin t phase to neutral
The regulated UPS voltage remains
sinusoidal (low THDU), whatever the type 3
U=V
of load.
Current with harmonics i(t) = i1(t) + ihk(t) total phase current
i1(t) = I1 2 sin (t - 1) fundamental current
ik(t) = Ihk 2 sin (kt - k) k-order harmonic
I= I12 + I22 + I32 + I42 +.... rms value of the total current
C = peak current value / rms value Current crest factor
I12 + I22 + I32 + I42 +....

THDI = Current total harmonic distortion
I1
Apparent power 3 S (kVA) = VI

S (kVA) = UI
Active power P (kW) =  UI 3 =  S (kVA) P (kW) =  VI =  S (kVA)
Power factor P(kW )
 = S(kVA )
UPS percent load

This is the percentage of the rated power that is effectively drawn by the load.
Sload (kVA)
Load (%) = Sn (kVA)
 Recommendation: take into account growth in loads

It is advised to leave a margin (excess power) when setting the rated power, particularly if a site expansion is planned. In this
case, make sure the percent load on the UPS is still acceptable after the expansion.
UPS efficiency
This factor determines the power drawn by the UPS on the upstream distribution system, i.e. the consumption. It may be
calculated as:
PUPSoutput (kW )
P (kW )
 (%) = UPSinput
For a given power rating, a high level of efficiency:
 reduces power bills,
 reduces heat losses and, consequently, ventilation requirements.

It is possible to calculate the efficiency at full rated load, i.e. with a 100% load.
Pn (kW )
n (%) = PUPSinput (kW )

The rated active power of the UPS is obtained by multiplying the rated apparent power S n (kVA) by 0.8 (if  > 0.8) or by  (if <
0.8).
The efficiency can vary significantly depending on the percent load and the type of load.
The installation designer must therefore pay attention to two aspects of efficiency.
 Recommendation 1: check the efficiency for non-linear loads

The presence of non-linear loads tends to reduce the power factor to values below 0.8. It is therefore necessary to check the
efficiency value for standardised non-linear loads. This check is recommended by standards IEC 62040-3 / EN 62040-3.
 Recommendation 2: check the efficiency at the planned percent load

Manufacturers generally indicate the efficiency at full rated load. However, its value
may drop if the percent load is lower (1). Attention must therefore be paid to UPSs
operating in an active-redundancy configuration, where the units share the total load
and often operate at 50% of their full rated load, or less.
(1) A UPS is optimised to operate at full rated load. Even though losses are at their
maximum at full rated load, the efficiency is also at its maximum. In a standard UPS,
losses are not proportional to the percent load and the efficiency drops sharply when
the percent load drops. This is because a part of the losses is constant and the
relative percentage of this part increases when the load decreases. To obtain high
efficiency at low load levels, the constant losses must be very low.
Due to their design, UPSs from Schneider Electric have very low constant losses
and as a result, the efficiency is virtually stable for loads from 30 to 100%.
 UPS efficiency, see Technical review p. 20.
Ratings of single-UPS Single-UPS configurations

configurations
These configurations comprise a single, double-conversion UPS unit (see fig. 1.17).
The overload capacity at the UPS output is indicated by a diagram (the example
below is for the Galaxy VM range).
In the event of an internal fault or an overload exceeding UPS capacity, the system
automatically transfers to the Bypass AC input. If transfer is not possible, UPSs from
Schneider Electric current limit for overloads greater than the maximum value (e.g.
2.2 In peak for 60ms second for Galaxy VM, which corresponds to a maximum sine
wave with an rms value of 2.2 / 2 = 1.55 In). Beyond 60ms second, the UPS
reduces the current value down to 2.1 In peak 60ms is enough as the corresponding
breaker has to open within max 20ms in order to avoid any voltage disturbance in the
rest of the installation (principle of selectivity)
A set of disconnection switches is available to isolate the UPS for maintenance in
complete safety.
Regarding ik1, ik2 and ik3, values are given and available in each UPS range
technical specification.
Fig. 1.17. Single double-conversion static UPS unit and example of an overload curve.

Power levels under steady-state conditions

A UPS is sized using the apparent rated output power Sn (kVA) and an output power
factor of 0.8. These conditions correspond to an active rated power of P n (kW) = 0.8
Sn (kVA).
In real-life situations, a UPS supplies a number of loads with an overall power factor
 that is often not 0.8 due to the presence of non-linear loads and means to improve
the power factor;
 If   0.8, the UPS is still limited to Pn (kW),
 If  < 0.8, the UPS is limited to  Sn (kW) < Pn (kW).
Consequently, selection of the power rating in kVA must take into account the active
power supplied to the loads.
The active power is determined by following the four steps below.
1 - Apparent and active power drawn by the loads

The first step is to evaluate the power requirements of the load.
The table below must be drawn up for the k loads to be supplied.
Load Apparent rated Input power factor  Active rated power
power (kVA) (or cos ) (kW)
Load 1 S1 1 P 1 = 1 S 1
Load 2 S2 2 P 2 = 2 S 2
…
Load i Si i P i = i S i
…
Load k Sk k Pk =  k S k
Total S  P = S
(1) S is not the sum of (2)  must be (3) P =  S =  i S i
Si. measured or
calculated.
(1) S is not the sum of Si because:
- it would be necessary to calculate the vectoral sum if all the loads were linear, using the
angles of the different cos ,
- some of the loads are not linear.
(2)  must be measured on site or evaluated on the basis of past experience.
(3) P =  S =  i S i because the active power is added (no displacement).
2 - Rated apparent power of the UPS (Sn)

The second step is to select a UPS with an apparent-power rating sufficient to cover
the load requirements (in kVA).
Under the given conditions, the suitable rated apparent power for the UPS is:
Sn(kVA) > S. where S = P / .
In the UPS range, select the UPS with a rated power Sn (kVA) just above S. If
reserve power is required and the selected rating is too close to S, select the next
highest rating.
3 - Check on the active power

The third step is a check to ensure that the selected power rating can cover
the load requirements in kW under the stipulated operating conditions.
For the selected rating, the UPS will supply the rated active power
Pn (kW) = 0.8 Sn (kVA)
 If   0.8, make sure that Pn (kW) > P, i.e. that the UPS can supply the additional
power required, otherwise select the next highest rating.
 If  < 0.8, the power supplied by the UPS is sufficient because Pn (kW) >  Sn
(kVA), i.e. the selection is correct.
4. - Percent load
The fourth step is a check to ensure that the percent load is acceptable now and in
the future, given the desired operating conditions.
The percent load is:
Load = S / Sn(kVA) .
It must be sufficient to cover any increases in the load or if there are plans to expand
the system to become redundant.

Power levels under transient conditions

Load in-rush currents
It is necessary to know the in-rush current of each load and the duration of the
transient conditions. If a number of loads risk being turned on at the same time, it is
necessary to sum the in-rush currents.
Necessary checks
It is then necessary to check that the planned UPS power rating can handle the in-
rush currents. Note that the UPS can operate for a few periods in current-limiting
mode (e.g. 2.2 In for 60ms for a Galaxy VM). If the UPS cannot handle the in-rush
currents, it is necessary to decide whether it is acceptable to transfer to the Bypass
AC input when the transient conditions occur. If transfer is not acceptable, it is
necessary to increase the power rating.
 Review of in-rush currents, see Technical review p. 37.
Example
The example below is simply to illustrate the point and does not correspond to a real situation. The purpose is to indicate the
required steps. The installation is made up of three 400 V three-phase loads connected in parallel:
 Computer system - S1 = 4 x 10 kVA (4 identical 10 kVA loads),  = 0.6 for all the
loads, in-rush current 8 In over four periods 50 Hz (80 ms) for each load,
 Variable-speed drive - S2 = 20 kVA,  = 0.7, in-rush current 4 In over five periods
(100 ms),
 Isolation transformer - S3 = 20 kVA,  = cos  = 0.8, in-rush current 10 In over six
periods (120 ms).
Rated apparent output

power Sn(kVA)
Active power
Pn(kW) = 0.8 Sn(kVA)
Power factor  at UPS

output for all loads
Maximum active output

Total power consumed by power (that the UPS can
the loads 4 x 10 kVA 20 kVA 20 kVA supply to the loads)
P (kW) = 54 kW 1 = 0.6 2 = 0.7 cos  = 0.8  Sn (kVA)
Fig. 1.18. Example of an installation.
Power levels under steady-state conditions

Below is the table that should be drawn up.
Load Rated apparent Input power factor Rated active power
power (kVA) (kW)
Computer system 40 0.8* 32*
Variable-speed drive 20 0.7 14
LV/LV transformer 20 0.8 16
Total S  = 0.68 P = 54 kW
measured or estimated
* average of new top of the range systems with power factor 0.9 and older equipment
with power factor between 0.7 and 0.8.
2 - Rated apparent power of the UPS
S = 54 / 0.68 = 79.4 kVA
A Galaxy 5500 UPS with a sufficient rating should be selected. The 80 kVA rating
would not be sufficient, i.e. the 100 kVA rating should be selected or higher if a site
extension is planned.


 The UPS can supply the loads 100 x 0.68 = 68 kW > 54 kW.
4 - Checks on the percent load and rated current
 The percent load is therefore 79.4 / 100 = 79.4%.
 Rated current of the UPS - Sn (kVA) = UI 3 , i.e. I = 100 / (400 x 1.732) = 144 A.
In-rush currents under transient conditions
The loads should be started up one after the other to avoid combining the in-rush
currents. It is necessary to check that the UPS can handle the in-rush currents.
The rated currents are calculated as S (kVA) = UI 3 , i.e.:
 Computer system - In = 10 / (400 x 1.732) = 14.4 A, i.e. 8 In  115 A for 80 ms
 Variable-speed drive - In = 20/(400 x 1.732) = 28.8 A, i.e. 4 In  115 A for 100 ms
 Transformer - In = 20 / (400 x 1.732) = 28.8 A, i.e. 10 In = 288 A for 120 ms
 A 100 kVA MGE Galaxy 5500 UPS has an overload capacity of 125%, i.e. 151 A x
1.2 = 189 A for 10 minutes and 150%, i.e. 151 A x 1.5 = 226 A for 1 minute
 Operation in current-limiting mode at 2.33 In, i.e. 335 A for one second.
If the four computer loads (10 kVA each) are started one after the other, the 20%
overload capacity of the UPS is sufficient (173 A -1mn > 115 A - 80 ms).
If the four loads are started simultaneously, the in-rush current would be
4 x 115 = 460 A > 335 A. The system would current limit for 80 ms.
For the variable-speed drive, the overload capacity is sufficient. For the isolation
transformer (288 A for 120 ms), the overload capacity is again sufficient.
Ratings of parallel-UPS Parallel-UPS configurations

configurations
Purpose of parallel connection
Parallel connection of a number of identical units is the means to:
 increase the power rating,
 establish redundancy that increases the MTBF and availability.
Types of parallel connection
Two types of UPS units can be connected in parallel.
 Integrated parallel UPS units - each UPS unit includes an automatic bypass and
a manual maintenance bypass. The manual bypass may be common to the entire
system (in an external cubicle).
 Parallel UPS units with an SSC - the static-switch cubicle comprises an
automatic bypass and a maintenance bypass that are common for a number of
parallel units without bypasses (see fig. 1.19).
This configuration is available on MGE Galaxy 7000, up to 2000kVA in standard
(800kVA, 1200kVA & 2000kVA CSS), 8 UPSs can be connected in parallel.
Fig. 1.19.1. UPS system with parallel-connected units and a static-switch cubicle (SSC).

 Multiple Power Cabinets with a central I/O – this is the case on Galaxy VX,
where several Power Cabinets (equivalent of UPS in a Parallel with CSS
configuration) are internally connected (busbars) to a central Input/Output Cabinet
(I/O cabinet) which contains Static Bypass, mechanical bypass, customer landing
connections and display
It offers the advantage of having internal connection (busbars) between Power
Cabinets and I/O, lower risks in terms of power cables management, and also a
much simpler power distribution for the upstream supply scheme of the UPS :
- One input for the AC Normal
- One input for the AC Bypass
- One output for critical load
This concept also allows a very easy set-up for :
- Redundancy : use of 4 Power Cabinets if 3 are needed to supply => thanks to
fault-tolerance, if one Power Cabinet fails the 3 other ones will continue to
support the load.
- Power increase : if the right I/O Cabinet power rating is chosen day 1, then
additional Power Cabinets can be connected later to support the growth of the
installation
This configuration is available on Galaxy VX, and the I/O Cabinet is available in 4
sizes (750kVA, 1000kVA, 1250kVA & 1500kVA)
- Fig. 1.19.2 UPS system with Multiple Power Cabinets with a central I/O (Galaxy VX,
here 750kVA).
There are two types of parallel configurations:

 Without redundancy - all the UPS units are required to supply the load. Failure of
one unit means the entire system shuts down (not recommended),
 With redundancy N+1, N+2, etc. - the number of UPS units required for the load
is equal to N. All the UPS units (N+1, N+2, etc.) share the load. If one UPS unit shuts
down, the remaining units (at least equal in number to N) continue to share the load.
 Typical configurations and characteristics, see “Selection of the UPS”.

Power levels in redundant parallel configurations
In a redundant parallel configuration made up of identical units, the units share the
load. The power rating of each unit does not depend on the level of redundancy, but
must be calculated to continue supplying the load even if redundancy is completely
lost.
Active redundancy:
 improves availability,
 increases the overload capacity,
 reduces the percent load on each UPS unit.
The power level is determined by following the same four steps as for a single-UPS
configuration.

The same type of table is used as that for a single UPS (see p. 22).
The result is the apparent power S that must be supplied to the load.
2 - Rated apparent power of the UPS units (Sn) in the configuration

Consider a level of redundancy N + K (e.g. 2 + 1), which means:
- N units (e.g. 2) are required to supply the load,
- K units (e.g. 1 extra unit) ensure redundancy.
Each UPS unit must be sized to enable the system as a whole to operate without
redundancy, i.e. with N operational units and K units shut down.
In this case, the N units must each have an apparent power rating S n (kVA) such
that:
Sn(kVA) > S / N.
Select in the UPS range the power rating Sn (kVA) just above S/N. If reserve power
is required or the selected rating is too close to S, select the next highest rating.

For the selected rating, the UPS will supply the active rated power
Pn (kW) = 0.8 Sn (kVA)
 if   0.8, make sure that Pn (kW) > P, i.e. that the UPS can supply the additional
power required, otherwise select the next highest rating.
 if  < 0.8, the power supplied by the UPS is sufficient because Pn (kW) >  Sn
(kVA), i.e. the selection is correct.
4 - Percent load
With redundancy, the UPS units share the load according to the equation
S / (N+K). The percent load for each unit when there is redundancy is therefore:
TL = S / (N + k) Sn(kVA) .
In a non-redundant system, it is calculated as:
TL = S / N Sn(kVA).
It must be sufficient to cover any increases in the load.
Example
This example will use the results from the last example and we will suppose that the
loads are critical, i.e. redundancy is required.
 The total load is 54 kW with an overall power factor for all the loads of 0.68, i.e. S
= 54 / 0.68 = 79.4 kVA.
 If 2+1 redundancy is used, two units must be capable of supplying the load. Each
must will have to supply S / 2 = 79.4 / 2 = 39.7 kVA.
 An MGE Galaxy 5500 UPS with a sufficient rating should be selected. The 40 kVA
rating would not be sufficient, i.e. the 60 kVA rating should be selected or higher if a
site extension is planned.
 If redundancy is not available, the two UPS units must be capable of supplying the
load.
 This is the case because 2 x 60 x 0.68 = 81.6 kW > 54 kW.
 During operation, the percent load will be:
- with redundancy, i.e. with 3 UPS units sharing the load: 79.4 / 3 x 60 = 44.1%,
- without redundancy, i.e. with only 2 UPS units sharing the load: 79.4 / 2 x 60 =
66.2%.

Control of upstream harmonics
UPSs
Role and
of the upstream
input rectifier
harmonics UPS units draw power from the AC distribution system via a rectifier. All UPS ranges
from Schneider Electric use PFC type controlled active rectifier technologies and
therefore do not generate harmonics.
However, a specific attention must be paid, considering the overall installation and
architecture, and also the possible case where the critical load might be connected
directly to the upstream of the UPS, in case for example of using the electronic static
bypass or the mechanical bypass. In this case of operation, the possible harmonic
content generated by the critical loads will not be anymore filtered by the UPS, and
might generate some disturbances upstream.
PFC-type transitor-based controlled active rectifiers
These transistor-based active rectifiers have a regulation system that adjusts the
input current to a reference sine wave. This technique ensures an input current that
is :
 perfectly sinusoidal, i.e. free of harmonics,
 in phase, i.e. with a power factor close to 1.
With this type of rectifier, no filters are required.
 Figure 1.20 input PFC rectifier and harmonics
Fig. 1.20. Input PFC rectifier and harmonics.

Control of upstream harmonics (Cont.)
Combination of UPSs and generator
The generator can supply only relatively low capacitive currents (10 to 30% of In).
When an UPS is installed with an upstream generator, the main difficulty lies in the
gradual start-up of the PFC rectifier on generator power, but also the fact that the
critical load, in some situation, might be directly connected to the generator in the
case of using the bypass branch (static or mechanical bypass)
Consequently, the sizing of the generator must take into account not only the fact
that upstream UPSs offer an unity power factor, but also the fact that (depending on
the type of load) the generator must be able to support a certain amount of reactive
power.
Below is an example of a derating curve of a choosen generator.
Fig. 1.21. Derating curve for a generator, as a function of the installation power factor.
The curve in the figure above, provided as one example among many, shows the
power derating as a function of the operating point, for a given generator. For a
purely capacitive load (= 0), the power available is equal to only 30% of the rated
power (point A). If we assume an apparent power rating such that Pn generator = Pn
rectifier, the meaning of points A, B, C, D, E and F is the following:
A: reactive power corresponding to the capacitive current of a non-compensated
filter,
B: reactive power corresponding to the capacitive current of a compensated filter,
C: operating point at start-up with a non-compensated filter with contactor,
D: operating point at the rated load with a non-compensated filter,
E: operating point at the rated load with a compensated filter,
F: operating point at the rated load, without a filter or with a phase-shift filter.

System earthing arrangements
Protection
Background of persons against electrical contact
information
on system earthing International standards require that electrical installations implement two types of
arrangements protection of persons against the dangers of electrical currents.
Protection against direct contacts

The purpose of this form of protection is to avoid "direct" contact between persons
and intentionally live parts (see fig. 1.24).
It includes the points listed below.
 isolation of live parts using barriers or enclosures offering a degree of protection
at least equal to IP2X or IPXXB.
 opening of the enclosure (doors, racks, etc.) must be possible only using a key or
a tool, or following de-energising of the live parts or automatic installation of a
screen.
 connection of the metal enclosure to a protective conductor.
Protection against indirect contacts and system earthing arrangements
The purpose of this form of protection is to avoid "indirect" contact between persons
and exposed conductive parts (ECP) that have become live accidentally due to
an insulation fault. The fault current creates in the exposed conductive parts (ECP)
a potential that may be sufficient to cause a dangerous current to flow through the
body of the person in contact with the exposed conductive parts (see fig. 1.24).
This protection includes the points listed below.
 mandatory earthing of all exposed conductive parts (ECP) that may be accessed
by the user.
The protective conductor is used for connection to the earth. It must never be
interrupted (no breaking devices on the protective conductor).
The interconnection and earthing techniques for the exposed conductive parts (ECP)
determine the system earthing arrangement (SEA) for the installation.
 disconnection of the supply when the potential of the ECPs risks reaching
dangerous levels. Interruption is carried out by a protection device that depends on
the selected system earthing arrangement (SEA). It often requires residual-current
devices (RCD) because the insulation-fault currents are generally too low to be
detected by standard overcurrent protection devices.
Fig. 1.24. Direct and indirect contacts.
Types of system earthing arrangements (SEA)

There are three types of system earthing arrangements (SEA).
 Isolated neutral (IT).
 Earthed neutral (TT).
 Exposed conductive parts connected to the neutral (TN with TN-C and TN-S).
The first two letters indicate how the neutral and the ECPs of the loads are
connected.
First letter Second letter Third letter (for TN)

Connection of the neutral Connection of the ECPs Type of protective
conductor
T = earthed neutral T = exposed conductive parts C = Common neutral and
earthed protective conductor (PEN)
I = isolated neutral N = exposed conductive parts S = Separate neutral (N)
connected to the neutral and protective conductor
(PE)
IT, TT or TN systems TN-C or TN-S

Protection
System earthing arrangements (SEA)

Isolated neutral (IT)
● The source neutral is: E.g. Phase-to-ECP fault in a load.
- either isolated from the earth (isolated Uo is the phase-to-neutral voltage in the
neutral), distribution system (230 V).
- or connected to the earth via a high ● Current of the first fault
impedance res (impedant neutral). RA= 10  and Zres= 3500  (approximately),
● The exposed conductive parts (ECP), all Id = Uo / (RA + Zres) = 66 mA.
protected by the same breaking device, are
earthed (earth electrode resistance RA).
● Voltage of the first fault
Ud = Uo x RA / (RA + Zres) = 0.66 V.
This potential is not dangerous.
L1 The fault must be detected by an IMD
L2
L3
(insulation monitoring device), located by a
N fault-locating device and repaired.
● Current of the second fault
PE A second fault occuring before the first fault
has been repaired results in the flow of a
phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral short
Zres circuit. It must be cleared by the overcurrent
RA Ud protection devices within the time limits set by
Id
the standards.
Fig. 1.25. IT system.
Earthed neutral (TT)

● The source neutral is earthed. E.g. Phase-to-ECP fault in a load.
● The exposed conductive parts (ECP), all Uo is the phase-to-neutral voltage in the
protected by the same breaking device, are distribution system (230 V).
earthed (earth electrode resistance RA). ● Fault current
E.g. RA = 10  and RB = 5 
L1 Id = Uo / (RA + RB) = 15.3 A
L2 ● Fault voltage
L3
N
Ud = Uo x RA / (RA + RB) = 153 V
This potential is dangerous (> 50 V).
PE The fault must be cleared by the protection
devices within the times set by the standards.
The fault current is low and must therefore be
detected by a residual-current protection
device (RCD) that actuates the protective
RB RA Ud device immediately upstream. The operating
Id
current of the RCD and the time required to
clear the fault are set by the standards.
Fig. 1.26. TT system.
Exposed conductive parts connected to the neutral (TN)

● The source neutral is directly earthed. ● Impedance of the fault loop
● The installation ECPs are connected to the Zb = ZABCDEF (part of circuit ABCDEF)
neutral and consequently to the earth via the Zb  ZBCDE  2 ZDE because ZBC = ZDE (BC and
protective conductor (PEN). This arrangement DE are identical, the fault impedance is
transforms all insulation faults into phase-to- negligible)
neutral short-circuits. E.g. A load supplied by a 50 mm² copper cable
that is 50 metres long (phase and PE).
● The potential of the protective conductor is
Zb = 2  L / S where  = 22.5 . mm2/m
maintained close to that of the earth by
numerous connection points. Zb = 2 x 22.5 10-3 x 50 / 50 = 45 m.
● Fault voltage
A voltage drop of 20% is permissible for the
phase-to-neutral voltage Uo, i.e. UBE = 0.8 Uo.
In that ZBC = ZDE, the potential of the ECPs
L1
L2 rises to Ud = UBE / 2 = 0.8.Uo / 2 = 92 V
B
L3 ● Fault current
A Id E PEN Id = 0.8 Uo / Zb = 0.8 x 230 / 45 10-3 = 4089 A
F Breaking is carried out by the overcurrent
D protection devices within the times set by the
standards. The fault current depends on the
C impedance of the fault loop.
Care must be taken to ensure that at all
Ud points in the system, the fault current is
greater than the operating threshold of the
protection devices.
Fig. 1.27. TN-S system (the basic principle is identical for the TN-C system).

Protection
Comparison of system earthing arrangements (SEA)

Type of SEA IT (isolated neutral) TT (earthed neutral) TN-S (ECP to neutral) TN-C (ECP to neutral)
Operation ● Signalling of first insulation ● Disconnection for the first ● Disconnection for the first ● Disconnection for the first
fault. insulation fault. insulation fault occurs insulation fault.
● Location and elimination of ● Separate neutral (N) and ● Common neutral and
the first fault. protective conductor (PE). protective conductor (PEN).
● Disconnection for the
second fault.
Protection of ● Interconnection and ● Earthing of ECPs ● Interconnection and ● Interconnection and
persons earthing of ECPs. combined with use of earthing of ECPs and neutral earthing of ECPs and neutral
● First fault: residual-current devices imperative. imperative.
- very low current, (RCD). ● first fault: ● First fault:
- monitoring/indication by an ● First fault: - fault current, - fault current,
IMD. - leakage current is - interruption by overcurrent - interruption by overcurrent
● Second fault: dangerous, but too low to be protection devices (e.g. protection devices (e.g.
- potentially dangerous detected by the overcurrent circuit breaker). circuit breaker).
current, protection devices,
- interruption by overcurrent - detection by the RCDs
protection devices (e.g. combined with breaking
circuit breaker). devices.
Specific equipment Insulation-monitoring device Residual-current devices For long distances, RCDs
(IMD) and fault-locating (RCD). must be used.
device.
Advantages and ● Solution offering the best ● Easiest solution to design ● High installation costs for ● Reduced installation costs
disadvantages continuity of service (the first and install. high power ratings. (one less conductor).
EMC fault is signalled). ● Mandatory use of RCDs. ● Difficult to design ● Difficult to design
● Requires competent ● Different earth electrodes (calculation of the loop (calculation of the loop
surveillance personnel (distant sources). impedances). impedances).
(location of the first fault). ● Highly sensitive to ● Flow of high fault currents. ● Flow of high fault currents.
● High EMC performance, lightning strikes. ● High EMC performance, ● Low EMC performance,
very low currents in the earth low current in the PE during high currents in the PEN
cable. normal operation. (connections between
ECPs).
Use ● Installations requiring ● Commercial and ● Large commercial ● Large commercial
continuity of service, e.g. residential premises, public premises, tall buildings, etc. premises, tall buildings, etc.
hospitals, airports, industrial lighting, schools, etc. ● Industries without ● Industries without
processes, ships. continuous processes (IT continuous processes (IT
● Installations and premises system). system).
where there is a risk of fire or ● Supply of computer ● Supply of computer
explosion, i.e. mines, etc. systems. systems.
ECP = Exposed conductive parts.
Applications in UPS Specific aspects in systems with UPSs

installations
Implementation of the above protection systems in installations comprising a UPS
requires a number of precautions for a number of reasons:
 The UPS plays two roles:
- a load for the upstream system,
- a power source for the downstream system,
 When the battery is not installed in a cabinet, an insulation fault on the DC system
can lead to the flow of a residual DC component. This component can disturb
operation of certain protection devices, notably RCDs used for the protection of
persons.
Protection against direct contact

All Schneider Electric UPS installations satisfy the applicable requirements because
the equipment is installed in cabinets providing a degree of protection IP 20. This is
true even for the battery when it is housed in a cabinet.
When the battery is not installed in a cabinet (generally in a special room), the
measures presented at the end of this chapter should be implemented.

Protection
Protection against indirect contact

Selection of a system earthing arrangement
A basic protection measure required by the standards is the creation of a
standardised system earthing arrangement both upstream and downstream of the
UPS. The two systems can be the same or different if certain precautions are taken.
In an existing installation to which the UPS is added, the upstream system is already
determined. Selection of the downstream system, either the same or a different one,
depends on its compatibility with sensitive loads.
The table on the previous page provides the necessary elements to compare the
various standardised system earthing arrangements.
 Caution, local regulations may prohibit certain types of system earthing
arrangements.
Selection of the breaking devices

Above and beyond the interconnection and earthing of the exposed conductive parts
in compliance with a standardised system earthing arrangement, the protection of
persons must be ensured by breaking devices selected according to the system
earthing arrangement. These devices must cause tripping of the overcurrent
protection devices in the event of an insulation fault.
Tripping may:
 be directly provoked by suitable settings on the overprotection devices (circuit
breakers, fuses),
 or require (mandatory for the IT system) use of residual-current devices (RCD) that
may or may not be built into the circuit breaker.
The RCDs are required to detect the insulation-fault currents that are often too low to
trip standard overcurrent protection devices.
 Check local requirements concerning the safety of electrical installations.
Types of systems for UPSs
The possible systems depend on:
 the existing or selected system upstream of the UPS,
 the system downstream of the UPS for which selection may be determined by:
- reuse of the same system as upstream,
- the presence of isolation transformers upstream or downstream which make it
possible to change the system earthing arrangement,
- the loads (e.g. DataCenters computer rooms requires TN-s system, hospital
surgery room requires IT system),
- the organisation of the downstream distribution system, with static transfer switches
(STS),
 certain requirements imposed by standards, e.g. the protective conductor PE or
PEN must never be interrupted to ensure flow of the fault current. A TN-C system
(non-interrupted PEN) can be installed upstream of a TN-S system (separate N and
PE conductors), but not the contrary.
UPSs are increasingly designed without transformers, offering advantages in terms

of weight, size and efficiency. Transformerless technology also makes it possible to
modulate the voltage for improved adapatation to all types of loads, in particular non-
linear loads with harmonics.
Transformerless technology has an impact on the use of system earthing
See WP 98  arrangements. For more information see White Paper - WP 98: "The Elimination of
Isolation Transformers in Data Center Power Systems").
Many different cases may be encountered depending on the upstream and
downstream earthing arrangements and the type of UPS. Your Schneider Electric
representative has a complete set of diagrams for all system earthing arrangements
and UPS ranges concerned.
The following pages show some examples for Galaxy VM and MGE Galaxy 5500 or
MGE Galaxy 7000. For other cases, contact your Schneider Electric representative
to obtain the applicable diagram.
Additional information can be found in :
- Application Note AN 172 for both MGE Galaxy 5500 and MGE Galaxy 7000
- Galaxy VM Earthing Principle Guidelines (available on product homepage)

Protection

Protection
Protection using circuit The protection system for installations with UPS units presented here will implement
circuit breakers. Below is a presentation of the main characteristics of circuit
breakers breakers and their trip units. The part number mentioned as examples pertain to
Schneider Electric circuit breakers. Other characteristics, such as limiting thermal
stress and current, are among the strong points of the Compact NSX range of circuit
breakers, but will not be discussed here.
 For further information, see the Schneider Electric low-voltage and medium-
voltage distribution catalogue and the "Electrical installation guide".
Trip units
Technology
There are two types of trip units:
 thermal-magnetic,
 electronic.
Construction
 built-in (thermal-magnetic only).
 interchangeable.
Comparison
Thermal-magnetic trip units are simple and inexpensive.
Electronic trip units offer more precise and comprehensive settings for better
adaptation to installations and their requirements.
The table below sums up the characteristics of both types of trip units for circuit-
breakers from 1 to 630 A and should enable you to solve most of the problems
commonly encountered (from 1 to 400 kVA).
Figure 1.31 presents the characteristic curves for the trip units.
Protection Symb. Definition Availability

Overload protection Ir Overload current setting. All trip units.
(thermal or long
delay) (1)
Long delay (2) tr Applies a long tripping delay (e.g. Electronic trip units (e.g.
for motor starting). Micrologic 2, 5, 6).
Short-circuit Im Short-circuit current setting. On All trip units.
protection or electronic trip units, Isd is a function
(magnetic or short Isd of Ir (generally 2 to 10 Ir).
delay) (3)
Short delay (4) tm Applies a short tripping delay (e.g. Electronic trip units (e.g.
or for time discrimination with Micrologic 5, 6).
tsd downstream circuit breaker).
Short-circuit Ii Instantaneous short-circuit setting. Electronic trip units (e.g.
protection, Depends exclusively on trip-unit Micrologic 5, 6 ).
instantaneous trip rating (e.g. protection of static
(5) switches).
(1) Ir is the thermal protection threshold (sometimes written Ith) of thermal-magnetic trip units or
the long-delay protection threshold of electronic trip units. These thresholds are defined by an
inverse time curve that depends on the selected setting.
(2) tr is the time delay of the long-delay thermal protection for a given value of Ir.
(3) Im is the magnetic threshold of thermal-magnetic trip units and Isd the short-delay threshold
of electronic trip units.
(4) tm is the time delay (adjustable or fixed) of the magnetic protection of thermal-magnetic trip
units and tsd the time delay (generally adjustable) of the short-delay protection of electronic trip
units.
(5) Ii is the instantaneous tripping threshold.

Protection (Cont.)
Fig. 1.31. Circuit-breaker time/current curves (Icu is the ultimate breaking capacity).

Protection (Cont.)
Discrimination, cascading, current limiting

Discrimination
Discrimination results from correct circuit-breaker selection and setting such that, if a
fault occurs, it trips only the first upstream circuit breaker.
Discrimination thus limits the part of the installation affected by the fault to a strict
minimum. There are a number of types of discrimination summed up in the table
below and illustrated on the previous page.
Current limiting
When a high fault current hits the circuit breaker, the breaker contacts separate
under the electrodynamic forces, an arc is created and its resistance limits the short-
circuit energy.
Cascading
When a short-circuit occurs downstream of the installation (see fig. 1.32), the fault
current also flows through the upstream circuit breaker which current limits, thus
attenuating the current applied to the downstream circuit breaker. The breaking
capacity of the latter is thus reinforced.
Discrimination Concerns Principle

Current All types of trip The fault current is lower than the upstream
discrimination units threshold setting.
Ir upstream > Ir downstream and Im or Isd
upstream > Im or Isd downstream
Time discrimination Electronic trip Delays upstream tripping by the long-time
units only (Ir) and short-time (Im or Isd) delay.
(e.g. Micrologic)
Energy Compact NSX Arc pressure upstream is not sufficient to trip
discrimination and NS the upstream circuit breaker, but it is
sufficient to trip the downstream circuit
breaker.
Zone-selective Compact Delays upstream tripping if the short-circuit
interlocking NSX 100 to is also detected downstream.
Masterpact with A pilot wire connects the upstream and
Micrologic trip downstream trip units.
units
Fig. 1.32. Upstream/downstream discrimination and cascading.

Protection (Cont.)
Selection of Rating
circuit breakers
The selected rating (rated current) for the circuit breaker must be the one just above
the rated current of the protected downstream cable.
Breaking capacity
The breaking capacity must be selected just above the short-circuit current that can
occur at the point of installation.
Ir and Im thresholds
The table below indicates how to determine the Ir and Im thresholds to ensure
discrimination, depending on the upstream and downstream trip units.
Remark.
Time discrimination must be implemented by qualified personnel because time
2
delays before tripping increase the thermal stress (I t) downstream (cables, semi-
conductors, etc.). Caution is required if tripping of CB2 is delayed using the Im
threshold time delay.
Energy discrimination does not depend on the trip unit, only on the circuit breaker.
Ir and Im thresholds depending on the upstream and downstream trip units

Type of downstream Ir upstream / Ir Im upstream / Im Im upstream / Im
circuit downstream downstream ratio downstream ratio
ratio
downstream trip unit all types magnetic electronic
distribution > 1.6 >2 > 1.5
asynchronous motor >3 >2 > 1.5
Special case of generator short-circuits

Figure 1.33 shows the reaction of a generator to a short-circuit.
To avoid any uncertainty concerning the type of excitation, we will trip at the first
peak (3 to 5 In as per X"d) using the Im protection setting without a time delay.
Fig. 1.33. Generator during a short-circuit.

Protection (Cont.)
Example
Consider the example used to determine the UPS power rating (Ch. 1 p. 21) with a
number of parallel-connected 400 V three-phase loads, namely:
 Computer system - S1 = 4 x 10 kVA,  = 0.6, in-rush current 8 In over four periods
(80 ms),
 Variable-speed drive - S2 = 20 kVA,  = 0.7, in-rush current 4 In over five periods
(100 ms),
 Isolation transformer - S3 = 20 kVA,  = 0.8, in-rush current 10 In over six periods
(120 ms).
The three loads represent 54 kW with a power factor of 0.68.
In chapter 1, p. 21, an MGE Galaxy 5500 was selected, with a power rating of 100
kVA, I = 100 / (400 x 3 ) = 144 A.
630 kVA transformer 400 kVA generator
Determine CB1 and CB2
Rated apparent output

power
100 kVA
In = 144 A
Power factor at UPS

Determine the most output for all loads
powerful CB3 for  = 0.68
discrimination
Maximum active output
Total power consumed by power (that the UPS can
the loads 40 kVA 20 kVA 20 kVA supply to the loads)
P (kW) = 54 kW  = 0.6  = 0.7 cos  = 0.8  Sn (kVA) = 68 kW
Fig 1.34. Example of an installation.
The goal is to select circuit breakers CB1 and CB2, and the most powerful circuit
breaker CB3 compatible with discrimination requirements, given that the upstream
installation includes the following:
 20 kV / 400 V transformer with a power rating of 630 kVA,
 400 V engine generator set with a power rating of 400 kVA,
 Transformer to MLVS link, five meters of aluminium cable 4 x 240 mm 2 per phase,
 Busbars to circuit breaker link, four meters using three copper bars 400 mm² per
phase.
Calculation of CB1 and CB2 ratings and breaking

capacities
The breaking capacity depends on the short-circuit currents downstream of CB1 and
CB2 at the level of the main low-voltage switchboard (MLVS). Most often, this
upstream short-circuit value is supplied by the utility. It can also be calculated. It is
necessary to determine the sum R of the resistances upstream and the sum X of the
reactances upstream of the considered point.
The three-phase short-circuit current is calculated as:
U
Isc 3-ph =
3 R2  X 2
U is the phase-to-phase no-load voltage (load voltage + 3 to 5%).
R =  Rupstream and X =  Xupstream
In this example, we simply indicate the general method with a number of
simplifications to shorten the calculations.
 For more detailed information, see the Cahier Technique document no. 158
"Calculation of short-circuit currents" from Schneider Electric.

Protection (Cont.)
Upstream system
Ra, Xa
Sources
Rtr Xtr
Source output to MLVS cable link

Rc, Xc
General circuit breaker
Rd, Xd
MLVS busbars
Rb, Xb
Fig. 1.35. Calculation of short-circuit current for CB1 and CB2.
It is necessary to calculate the resistances and reactances upstream of CB1 and

CB2 in figure 1.34.
Distribution system upstream of the transformer

 Psc = upstream short-circuit power = 500 MVA = 500 x 106 VA
 U20 = phase-to-phase no-load voltage on the transformer secondary winding = 400
V, + 3%, i.e. 410 V
 Rup = resistance upstream  15% Xup, negligible given Xup
 Xup = reactance upstream with respect to transformer secondary winding
U20 2 4102
Xup = = = 0.288 m
Psc 500 x 106
Rup  0 and Xup = 0.33 m.
Transformer
 Sn = rated apparent power 630 kVA
 In = rated current = 630 / U 3 = 630 103 / (400 x 3 ) = 909 A
 Usc = transformer short-circuit voltage = 4%
 Pcu = transformer copper losses in VA
Pcu
Rtr = transformer resistance =  20% Xtr, negligible given Ztr
3 In2
U20 2
Xtr  Ztr = transformer impedance =
2 3
x Usc = 410 x 0.04 / 630 10 = 10.7 m
Sn
Rtr  0 and Xtr = 10.7 m.
Cables linking the transformer to the MLVS

 Length 5 meters
 Cross-section 240 mm²
  = resistivity at the normal temperature of the conductors
copper:  = 22.5 m.mm /m, aluminium:  = 36 m.mm /m
2 2
 Xc = conductor reactance (typically 0.08 m/m) = 0.08 x 5 = 0.4 m

L
Rc = cable resistance (copper) =  = 22.5 x 5 / (4 x 240) = 0.12 m
S
Rc = 0.12 m and Xc = 0.4 m.
General circuit breaker

Typical values
Rd  0 et Xd = 0.15 m.

Protection (Cont.)
Busbars
 Xb = busbar reactance (typically 0.15 m/m) = 0.15 x 4 = 0.6 m
 Rb = busbar resistance =  L / S= 22.5 x 4 / (3 x 400) = 0.075 m (negligible)
Rb  0 and Xb = 0.6 m.
Transformer Isc at the level of CB1 and CB2

 R = Total upstream resistance = 0.12 m
 X = Total upstream reactance = 0.33 + 10.7 + 0.4 + 0.15 + 0.6 =12.18 m
R can be neglected, given X.
U U 410
Isc 3-ph =  = = 19.4 kA
3 R X2 2 3 X . x 10  3
3 x 1218
Note. A rough estimate is provided by the short-circuit current on the transformer
terminals, assuming that the upstream short-circuit power is infinite.
ISCT = on transformer terminals = In / Usc = 20 In = 20 x 909 = 18.2 kA
Generator Isc at the level of CB1 and CB2

 rated apparent power of the generator = 400 kVA
 rated current of the generator = 400 / U 3 = 400 103 / (400 x 3 ) = 577 A
 X"d = short-circuit voltage of the generator = 10%
It is decided to trip at 5 In (see fig. 1.33).
ISCG = on the generator terminals = 5 In = 5 x 577 = 2.9 kA
Continuous current of CB1

This is the current at the UPS input. It is necessary to multiply the UPS rating by 1.2
to take into account the efficiency, i.e. 120 kVA.
Iinput = 120 / U 3 = 120 103 / (400 x 3 ) = 173 A
Continuous current of CB2

This is the continuous current of the loads supplied via the bypass, i.e. 54 kW with a
power factor of 0.68 for an apparent power S = 54 / 0.68 = 67.5 kVA.
3
Iload = 67.5 / U 3 = 120 10 / (400 x 3 ) = 97 A
Energising current of the largest load

The loads must be energised at different times. The highest inrush current is that of
the 20 kVA transformer, i.e. In = 28.8 A and 10 In = 288 A - 120 ms.
Calculation of the maximum static-switch current

This is the short-circuit current at the level of CB3, which is practically that of CB2.
Selection parameters
The table below sums up the various values calculated.
Parameter Value
transformer short-circuit current 19.4 kA
generator short-circuit current 2.9 kA
rectifier current (UPS input) 173 A
continuous load current downstream of the UPS 97 A
energising current of the largest load 288 A - 120 ms
maximum static-switch current 19.4 kA
Characteristics of CB1 and CB2

Characteristic D1 D2
Breaking capacity > 19.4 kA, i.e. 25 kA > 19.4 kA, i.e. 25 kA
Continuous current > 173 A, i.e. 200 A > 97 A, i.e. 125 A
Ir threshold > 173 A +20% > 97 A + 20%
Im threshold > 173 A + 20% and > 288 A +20% and
< 2.9 kA - 20% < 2.9 kA - 20%
20% represents here the typical tolerance range of circuit-breaker settings.

Protection (Cont.)
Characteristics of the most power circuit breaker CB3

possible
Sources
Incomer circuit breakers (input)
Static bypass
Negligible impedance
Outgoing circuit breakers (output)

Isc at CB3  Isc at CB2
Fig. 1.36. Calculation of the short-circuit current at CB3.
Operation with bypass power

 Breaking capacity
The highest short-circuit current downstream of CB3 is virtually that of CB2 because
it is assumed that the outgoing circuits are near the UPS.
Consequently, the breaking capacity of CB3 is also 25 kA.
 The rating is determined by the largest load, i.e. the 4 x 10 kVA of the computer
system with a continuous current of:
3
Iload = 40 / U 3 = 40 10 / (400 x 3 ) = 57 A
A 60 A device should be selected.
 Settings
A majority of the loads is of the distribution type, i.e. the Ir threshold of CB3 must be
less than 97 A / 1.6, i.e. < 61 A.
The Im threshold must be less than 1847 / 2, i.e. < 900 A.
Operation without bypass power

In this case, the short-circuited UPS limits its current to 3.33 In for 60ms.
For Schneider Electric UPSs of the MGE Galaxy range, experimental results have
determined that the highest rating of CB3 must be less than 0.5 In to ensure
discrimination.
This is the case for the circuit breaker for the computer loads.
60 A < 0.5 x 144= 72 A

Cables (Cont.)
Selection of cable sizes Cable temperature rise and voltage drops

The cross section of cables depends on:
 permissible temperature rise,
 permissible voltage drop.
For a given load, each of these parameters results in a minimum permissible cross
section. The larger of the two must be used.
When routing cables, care must be taken to maintain the required distances between
control circuits and power circuits, to avoid any disturbances caused by HF currents.
Temperature rise
Permissible temperature rise in cables is limited by the withstand capacity of cable
insulation.
Temperature rise in cables depends on:
 the type of core (Cu or Al),
 the installation method,
 the number of touching cables.
Standards stipulate, for each type of cable, the maximum permissible current.
Voltage drops
Maximum values
The maximum permissible voltage drops must be considered taking into account the
requirements from IEC 60364-5-52.
The table below gives the maximum values, depending on the type of installation :
Calculation formulas
Voltage drops may be determined using the formula below :

Cables (Cont.)
Difference between Copper and Aluminium cables => in this calculation proposal, the
difference between copper and aluminium is taken into account by the resistivity of
the material itself.
Additional information regarding the different ways to install cables (on trays or not,
multi cables regarding single cable etc...) are available on the UPSs installation
manuals.
Example of an installation
Fig. 1.37. Connection of cables.

Energy storage
Storage technologies Energy storage in UPSs

UPSs require an energy-storage system to supply the inverter with power if utility
power fails or is no longer within tolerances.
The stored energy must have the following characteristics:
 electricity that is immediately available to ride through micro-breaks, short voltage
drops and utility outages,
 sufficient power level to supply the entire load, i.e. a rating equivalent to that of the
UPS system itself,
 backup time, generally about ten minutes, suited to the needs of the loads and to
any other sources available (e.g. an engine generator set for long backup times).
Fig. 1.38. Simplified diagram of a UPS with backup energy storage.
Available technologies
The various technologies currently available are the following:

 batteries:
- sealed lead-acid,
- vented lead-acid,
- nickel cadmium,
- lithium-ion,
 ultracapacitors,
 flywheels:
- traditional units turning at low speeds (1500 rmp) and combined with engine
generator sets,
- medium-speed (7000 rpm) or high-speed (30 to 100 000 rpm) units.
Comparison of technologies
 Lead-acid batteries are by far the most commonly employed solution today.
They are the dominant solution due to low cost, proven effectiveness and storage
capacity, but nonetheless have a number of disadvantages in terms of size,
maintenance and the environment.
 Lithium-ion batteries can now offer an alternative solution to lead-acid, as they are
now based on a proven and mature technology, offering a real advantage in terms of
number of cycles, operating temperature, but also in terms of monitoring which is
much more reliable (State of Heath SoH, state of charge SoC etc...). It also offers an
embedded and dedicated monitoring system.
 Ultracapacitors do not yet offer the necessary performance levels.
 Flywheels operating at high speeds constitute a possible technology in terms of
their power ratings (40 to 500 kW), for short backup times (12 seconds to 1 minute).
Schneider Electric offers flywheel energy storage systems on request.
This solution is suitable to complement batteries in that it may be used to ride
through short disturbances without calling on battery power, thus preserving the
battery.
Use without a battery is possible, but the backup time is only a dozen seconds. For
certain applications, such a short backup time is insufficient to start an engine
generator set.

Energy storage
Figure 1.39 shows the fields of application for the different technologies.
See WP 65, WP229, WP 231   For more information on Lithium-ion solution, see White Paper WP 229: "Lithium-
ion Batteries vs. Lead-acid Batteries, and WP 231: “FAQs for using LIB witha UPS” .
 For more information, see White Paper WP 65: "Comparing Data Center
Batteries, Flywheels, and Ultracapacitors".
Fig. 1.39. Characteristics in terms of power ratings and backup times.
The table below compares the different solutions in terms of their capacity to meet
the energy-storage requirements of static UPSs.

Energy storage
Selection of a battery Types of batteries

The batteries most frequently used in UPSs are:
 sealed lead-acid, also called gas-recombination batteries,
 vented lead-acid,
 nickel cadmium.
 Lithium-ion
 Types of batteries, see p. 143 "Energy storage - Types of batteries".
For use in conjunction with its UPS ranges, Schneider Electric recommends sealed
lead-acid batteries.
Selection of a battery depends on the following factors:
 operating conditions and requirements (special room, battery cabinet, racks, etc.),
 required backup time,
 cost considerations.
Backup time
Schneider Electric offers:
 standard backup times of 5, 10, 15 or 30 minutes,
 custom backup times that can reach a number of hours.
Selection depends on:
 the average duration of power-system failures,
 any available sources offering long backup times (engine generator set, etc.),
 the type of application.The following general rules apply.
 Computer systems
Battery backup time must be sufficient to cover file-saving and system-shutdown
procedures required to ensure a controlled shutdown of the computer system.
Generally speaking, the computer department determines the necessary backup
time, depending on its specific requirements.
 Industrial processes
The backup-time calculation should take into account the economic cost incurred by
an interruption in the process and the time required to restart.
 Applications requiring long backup times
An engine generator set can back up a battery if long outages occur, thus avoiding
the need for very large batteries. Generally speaking, use of an engine generator set
becomes feasible for backup times greater than 30 minutes to one hour. The
combination must be carefully studied to optimise the generator rating and ensure
correct operation.
 Combination with an engine generator set, see Ch. 5 p. 35 "Engine generator set".
Service life
Schneider Electric offers batteries with service lives of 5 or 10 years, or longer.
 Battery service life, see p. 143.
Comparison between types of batteries

Sealed lead-acid batteries (gas-recombination)
These are the most commonly used batteries for the following reasons:
 no maintenance,
 easy implementation,
 installation in all types of rooms (computer rooms, technical rooms not specifically
intended for batteries, etc.).
Vented batteries
This type of battery (lead-acid or Ni/Cad) offers certain advantages:
 long service life,
 long backup times,
 high power ratings.
Vented batteries must be installed in special rooms complying with precise
regulations (see p. 53 "Preliminary work") and require appropriate maintenance.

Energy storage
Battery monitoring UPSs from Schneider Electric include advanced battery-monitoring systems.
TM TM
Battery monitoring on MGE Galaxy UPSs
TM
DigiBat
TM
The DigiBat battery-monitoring system is an assembly of hardware and software,
installed as standard on UPSs of the MGE Galaxy range from Schneider Electric and
offering the following functions:
 automatic entry of battery parameters,
 optimised battery service life,
 protection against excessive discharges,
 regulation of the battery floating voltage depending on the temperature,
 limitation of the battery current,
 continuous evaluation of available power taking into account the battery age, the
temperature and the percent load,
 forecast of battery service life,
 periodic, automatic tests on the battery, including a check on the battery circuit, an
open-circuit test, a partial-discharge test, etc.
Environment sensor unit

Battery operating parameters and particularly the temperature affect battery life.
The Environment Sensor, easy to install and combined with a Network Management
card (SNMP/Web), makes possible monitoring of temperature/humidity and the
status of two contacts via SNMP or the web. It also initiates equipment shutdown if
necessary.
Detection and prevention of battery failure for Schneider

Electric UPSs
In spite of the advantages of sealed lead-acid batteries, over time, all batteries will
fail due to ageing. Without rigorous monitoring, the true integrity and capacity of a
battery remains unknown.
Battery-monitoring techniques have a major impact on reliability and can be used to
define the best strategy for replacement, resulting in a better level of protection.
Schneider Electric also offers continuous, cell by cell, battery-monitoring systems
with software and communication capabilities.
Schneider Electric battery-monitoring system (AP9922 & AP9922S)

The Schneider Electric system offers a smart and optimized battery charging feature,
which helps extending the life of the batteries. It identifies undercharged batteries on
the string and is capable of charging these undercharged batteries to ensure a full
and equivalent state of charge within the entire string. Schneider Electric offer
introduces a new parameter : the individual Battery Current Response or BCR, which
is the best alternative to estimate the individual battery internal resistance.
PowerShield battery-monitoring system

The Powershield system offers continuous, overall monitoring of the main battery
parameters. That includes the voltage, current, temperature and any drift detected
during charge and discharge cycles. It issues an alarm when tolerance levels are
overrun. Automatic recording of discharges, whether planned or unplanned, is also
available for data analysis.
APC battery management system for SymmetraTM UPSs

The APC battery management system, available for UPSs of the Symmetra range
from Schneider Electric, ensures your batteries are optimally charged and ready for
use. This browser-accessible, 1U rackmountable system combines battery
monitoring and testing with individual boost charging for peak battery performance.
Integration into your preferred building management system or use of a Web browser
provides visibility of the health and status of your batteries. This system makes it
possible to solve battery problems before they affect availability.

Human-machine interface and
communication
Human-machine interface General characteristics

(HMI) The human-machine interface on the UPS must be user-friendly, easy to use and
multi-lingual (adjustable to the user's language).
It is generally made up of a mimic panel, a status and control panel, and an
alphanumeric display. A password-protected personalisation menu may be available
for entry of installation parameters and access to detailed information.
Example
The HMI typically offers the functions listed below.
On and Off buttons

 delayed to avoid erroneous operations.
 with an option for a remote EPO (emergency power off).
 independent with respect to the rest of the display
Status LEDs that clearly identify:
 normal operation (load protected),
 downgraded operating mode (malfunction),
 dangerous situations for the load (load not protected),
 operation on battery power.
Alarms
 alarm buzzer and buzzer reset button.
 battery shutdown warning.
 general alarm.
 battery fault.
A screen providing:
 access to measurements
- input power (voltage, current, frequency).
- battery (voltage, charge and discharge currents, remaining backup time,
temperature).
- inverter output (phase-to-neutral voltage, current, frequency, active and apparent
power, crest factor).
 access to history logs
- log containing time-stamped events.
- curves and bargraphs of the measured values.
High availability for critical applications requires communicating protection equipment

Communication
The UPS system, essential for mission-critical equipment, must include communication features that keep operators continously
informed, wherever they may be, of any risk of compromising the operating security of the system so that they can take
immediate action.
To ensure power availability, the UPS communication features provide the following four essential functions:
 Supervision / monitoring of all installed UPSs via software.
 Notification via the network and the Internet.
 Controlled shutdown (local or remote, automatic or manual) of protected applications.
 Teleservice via a modem and telephone line to a support centre.
Schneider Electric 07/2016 Edition p. 51

Human-machine interface and
communication (Cont.)
Schneider Electric solutions
Communication cards
 Network Management Card (Ethernet)
- Web monitoring
- Email notification
- SNMP MIB & Traps
- Server protection with Network Shutdown Module
- Supervision with Enterprise Power Manager or ISX Central
- Environment monitoring with Environment Sensor (T°, H%, Inputs)
 Modbus – Jbus card (RS232 & RS485)
- Monitoring
 Teleservice card (Modem)
- Alerts
- Monitoring
- Diagnostics
- Reporting
 Relay card (contacts)
- Indications
Management software
 Enterprise Power Manager & ISX Central (software & server)
Software solutions to manage all installed UPSs via IP networks, web compatible and accessible from any web browser.
 NMS Integration kits (Network Management System)
Integration in NMSs such as HP OpenView, IBM Tivoli, CA Unicenter, etc.
 Network Shutdown Module
- Software module for safe system shutdown.
Fig. 1.40. The communication cards combined with supervision software offer a wide range of
functions.

Preliminary work
Installation considerations The main elements that must be taken into account for the UPS installation are the
following:
 plans for site modifications, any preliminary work (notably for a battery room),
taking into account:
- the dimensions of equipment,
- operating and maintenance conditions (accessibility, clearances, etc.),
- temperature conditions that must be respected,
- safety considerations,
- applicable standards and regulations,
 ventilation or air-conditioning of rooms,
 creation of a battery room.
Dimensions
Layout of UPS cabinets and enclosures should be based on precise plans.
The physical characteristics of UPSs from Schneider Electric that may be used to
prepare the plans are presented in chapter 4.
They indicate, for each range:
 the dimensions and weights of:
- UPS and centralised-bypass cabinets;
- battery cabinets,
- any auxiliary cabinets (autotransformers, transformers, filters, etc.),
 minimum clearances required for cabinets and enclosures to ensure optimal
ventilation and sufficient access.
Ventilation, air-conditioning
Ventilation requirements
UPSs are designed to operate within a given temperature range (0 to 40°C for UPSs
from Schneider Electric ) that is sufficient for most operating conditions without
modifications.
However, UPSs and their auxiliary equipment produce heat losses that can, if no
steps are taken, increase the temperature of a poorly ventilated room.
What is more, the service life of a battery is heavily dependent on the ambient
temperature. The service life is optimal for temperatures between 15° C and 25° C.
This factor must be taken into account if the battery is installed in the same room as
the UPS.
A further consideration is the fact that UPSs may be installed in the same room as
computer equipment which often has more severe requirements concerning
operating-temperature ranges.
Selecting a type of ventilation

For all the above reasons, a minimum amount of ventilation is required, and where
applicable air-conditioning, to avoid any risk of excessive temperature rise in the
room due to the heat losses.
Ventilation can be by:
 natural convection,
 forced exchange by a ventilation system,
 installation of an air-conditioning unit.
Selection depends on:
 the heat losses that must be evacuated,
 the size of the room.
The thermal characteristics of UPSs from Schneider Electric are indicated in chapter
4 and may be used to calculate ventilation needs. They mention for each range:
 the heat losses of cabinets and any filters installed,
 the volume of air output by a ventilation system.

Preliminary work (Cont.)
IP degree of protection and noise level

Degree of protection (IP)
UPSs must operate in an environment that is compatible with their degree of
protection (IP 20 for UPSs from Schneider Electric), defined by standard IEC
60529/EN 60529. The presence of dust, water and corrosive substances must be
avoided.
Noise level
UPSs must produce a low level of noise, suited to the room where they are installed.
Measurement conditions for the level of noise indicated by the manufacturer must
comply with standard ISO 3746 (measurement of noise).
Battery room Where possible and if desired, the battery should be installed in a cabinet.
Battery-cabinet dimensions are indicated for each UPS range, depending on the
rated power.
However, for very high-power UPSs, batteries are generally installed in special
rooms (electrical room).
Batteries must be installed in compliance with international standards, local
regulations and standard IEC 60364.
Battery installation method

The criteria determining the battery-installation method are the following:
 available floor space,
 the weight that the floor can handle (kg/m2),
 ease of access and maintenance.
The following three methods are used.
Battery installed directly on floor

This is the most simple arrangement. However, a large battery room is required,
given:
 the large amount of floor space occupied by the battery,
 the insulated flooring (duck board), which is mandatory if the voltage exceeds 150
volts.
Battery on racks
The battery cells are installed on a number of different levels, off the floor.
When determining the height between each rack, it is necessary to take into account
the space required to check battery levels and fill the battery cells easily. A minimum
height of 450 mm is recommended.
Battery on tiers
This installation method is similar to the preceding. It is the most convenient method
for checking battery levels.
Battery-room features
Whatever the installation method selected, the battery installation must comply with
the following requirements (the numbers indicate the elements shown in figure 1.40).
Floor and walls (1)

 The floor must slope to an evacuation trough which leads to a holding tank.
 Protection coating against acid on the floor and walls, up to a height of at least 0.5
meters.
For example, asphalt for lead-acid batteries, PVC or chlorine-based paint for alkaline
batteries.

Preliminary work (Cont.)
Ventilation (2)
 calculation of throughput
The volume of air to be evacuated depends on the maximum load current and the
type of battery. In installations comprising a number of batteries, the quantities of air
that must be evacuated are cumulative.
- vented batteries
d = 0.05 x N x Im, where
d - throughput in cubic meters per hour,
N - number of battery cells,
Im - maximum load current in amperes.
- sealed battery
The ventilation conditions in a general-purpose room are sufficient.
 safety
An automatic device must stop battery charging if the ventilation system fails.
 location
Air must be drawn out from the top of the battery room.
Layout of cells (3)

Layout must inhibit simultaneous contact with two bare parts presenting a voltage
greater than or equal to 150 V. If the above condition cannot be met, terminal shields
must be installed and connections must be made using insulated cables.
Service flooring (4)

If the voltage exceeds 150 V, special flooring is required. It must offer sure footing,
be insulated from the floor and offer at least one meter of walkway around the
battery.
Battery connection (5)

Connections must be as short a possible.
Battery-protection circuit breaker (6)

The circuit breaker is generally installed in a wall-mounted enclosure. The circuit
breaker is preferred to fuses only, because of safety needs to be able to isolate
automatically the UPS from the energy storage in case of need. This cannot be
achieved when using only fuses.
Fire-fighting equipment (7)

Authorized fire extinguishers include power, CO2 or sand.
Safety equipment (8)

The safety equipment must include protective glasses, gloves and a source of water.
Inspection equipment (9)

 Hydrometer.
 Filling device.
 Thermometer.
Sensors (10)
 Hydrogen detector.
 Temperature sensor.
Fig. 1.41. Layout of battery room

Selection of the UPS configuration
07/2016 edition p. 56
Selection of the UPS configuration
Contents
Types of possible configurations .................................. 58
Selection table and corresponding ranges ................... 62
Diagram no. 1 .................................................................. 63

Single UPS
Diagram no. 2 .................................................................. 64

Active redundancy with two integrated parallel UPS units
Diagram no. 3 .................................................................. 65

Active redundancy with integrated parallel UPS units and external
maintenance bypass
Diagram no. 4 .................................................................. 66

Isolated redundancy with two UPS units
Diagram no. 5 .................................................................. 67

Active redundancy with parallel UPS units and centralised static-switch
cubicle (SSC)
Diagram no. 6 .................................................................. 68

Active redundancy with parallel UPS units and total isolation, single busbar
Diagram no. 7 .................................................................. 69

Active redundancy with parallel UPS units and total isolation, double busbar
Diagram no. 8 .................................................................. 70

Isolated redundancy with N+1 UPS units
Diagram no. 9 .................................................................. 71

Redundant distribution with static transfer switch (STS)  2N
Diagram no. 10 ................................................................ 73

Redundant distribution with static transfer switch (STS)  2N+1
Diagram no. 11 ................................................................ 75

Redundant distribution with static transfer switch (STS)  2N+2
Diagram no. 12 ................................................................ 77

Common battery in a parallel installation
Diagram no. 13 ................................................................ 78

Redundant distribution with STS 2N+1, common battery
07/2016 edition p. 57
Types of possible configurations
Basic diagrams
Single source
The load is supplied by a single set of UPSs.
Multi-source
The load is supplied by more than one set of UPSs.
Fig. 2.1. Basic diagrams.
UPS configurations
Single UPS
This is the standard double-conversion UPS (see fig. 2.2). Single UPSs can be used
to form redundant configurations as shown in diagrams 4 and 11.
 Single UPS, see p. 12 and p. 119 "UPS components and operation".
Fig. 2.2. Double-conversion single UPS.
Parallel UPS
Purpose of parallel connection
Parallel connection of a number of identical UPS units is the means to:
 increase the power rating,
 establish redundancy that increases MTBF and availability,
 make the installation scalable.
Three types of Galaxy UPS units can be connected in parallel:
 integrated parallel UPS units: each UPS unit includes an automatic bypass and a
manual maintenance bypass (fig. 2.2). The manual bypass may be common to the
entire system and located in an external cubicle (e.g. fig. 2.3).
 parallel UPS units with a centralised static-switch cubicle (SSC) (e.g. fig. 2.4).
 multiple Power Cabinet with a central Input/output Cabinet (I/O Cabinet) (e.g. fig.
2.5)
Modular UPS
TM
UPSs of the Symmetra range are true modular parallel systems. They are made
up of dedicated and redundant modules (power, intelligence, battery and bypass), all
engineered into a design that is easily and efficiently serviceable and scalable.
Identical plug-in power modules can be easily added in parallel as demand grows or
as higher levels of availability are required (e.g. up to four 16 kW modules for
Symmetra PX 48 with N+1 redundancy). The modules are hot-swappable.
Modular design with plug-in power modules improves dependability, in particular
maintainability and availability, as well the upgradeability of the installation.
07/2016 edition p. 58
Types of possible configurations (Cont.)
MGETM GalaxyTM parallel UPSs

Integrated parallel UPSs
This configuration is upgradeable, starting for instance with one integrated parallel
UPS unit equipped with an automatic bypass and a manual maintenance bypass.
When starting with two units or when expanding to two units or more, a common
maintenance bypass is installed in an external enclosure (see fig. 2.3).
Fig. 2.3. Installation with three integrated parallel UPS units and a common maintenance bypass.
Parallel UPS units with a centralised static-switch cubicle (SSC)

The static-switch cubicle comprises an automatic bypass and a maintenance bypass
that are common for a number of modules without a bypass (see fig. 2.4). It is
possible to have two redundant SSCs.
Upgrading of this configuration depends on the rating of the static switch. It offers the
highest level of reliability (SSC with independent UPS units).
Applicable range is MGE Galaxy 7000
Fig. 2.4. Three parallel UPS units with a centralised static-switch cubicle (SSC).
07/2016 edition p. 59
Multiple Power cabinets with a Central I/O

The I/O Cabinet comprises an automatic bypass and a maintenance bypass that are
common for a number of modules without a bypass (see fig. 2.5)
Upgrading of this configuration depends on the rating of the I/O cabinet, but can be
achieved easily by adding a Power Cabinet into the system (for redundancy or for
power increase)
Applicable range is Galaxy VX
Fig. 2.5. Galaxy VX multi power cabinets + central I/O concept
07/2016 edition p. 60
Parallel connection with redundancy

The parallel configurations presented above may or may not be redundant.
Without redundancy
All the UPS units are required to supply the load. Failure of one unit means the entire
system shuts down.
With active redundancy (N+1, N+2, etc.)
Only N UPS units are required to supply the load, even though N+1, N+2 or more
units are installed. This ensures a secure supply of power to the load even if one (for
N+1 redundancy) or two (for N+2 redundancy) UPS units fail or require maintenance.
Optimum redundancy of non-modular UPSs
For non-modular systems, differences in the lengths or tightening torques of cables
connecting the different units can lead to problems concerning the impedance
upstream and downstream of each UPS. For this reason, the highest MTBF is
obtained for redundant systems with just two UPSs (fig. 2.5). For modular UPS
systems, module interconnections are an integral part of the system, thereby
eliminating installation problems that can lower the MTBF as more units are added.
Fig. 2.6. For non-modular redundant UPS systems, the best MTBF is obtained with two units.
Redundant distribution with an STS

All the loads are supplied by more than one UPS source (two single UPS units in
figure 2.7). Each source can be made up of a number of parallel-connected units
offering active redundancy. Use of a static transfer switch (STS) ensures transfer of
the load between the sources in the event of a downstream fault (while avoiding any
risk of fault propagation) or for maintenance.
Power distribution units (PDUs) can be used to complete this distribution
configuration, offering:
 load management,
 multi-channel supply of power to the loads (dual attach),
 isolation of parts of the installation for maintenance or upgrading.
This type of configuration ensures a very high degree of availability and offers a
number of installation-upgrade possibilities.
Fig 2.7. Redundant distribution with an STS.
07/2016 edition p. 61
Selection table and corresponding ranges
Criteria for comparison

The table below compares the standard diagrams of this chapter, mainly related to
TM TM
MGE Galaxy UPSs, according to the following criteria.
Availability
A level of availability meeting the needs of the application. Figures are based on:
 an estimated level of utility-power availability of 99.9% (the European average),
 an MTTR of ten hours as per standard MIL-HDB-217-F level 2 (U.S. military) and
IEEE.
Maintainability
Ensure easy maintenance of the equipment under safe conditions for personnel and
without interrupting operation.
Upgradeability
It must be possible to upgrade the installation over time, taking into account both the
need to expand the installation gradually and operating requirements.
Discrimination and non propagation of faults
It must be possible to limit faults to as small a part of the installation as possible,
while enabling servicing without stopping operations.
Installation operation and management
Make operations easier by providing the means to anticipate events via installation
supervision and management systems.
Single-source configurations
Standard Criteria for comparison
diagram number Availability MTBF Maintainability Upgradeability Comment
1. Single UPS 99.99790% M1=475 000 h * 4 parallel-connected Reference for
UPS units calculations
2. Two integrated 99.99947% up to 4 x M1 ** 4 parallel-connected
parallel UPS units UPS units
3. Integrated 99.99947% up to 4 x M1 ** 4 parallel-connected
parallel units and UPS units
external
maintenance bypass
4. Isolated 99.99970% 6.8 x M1 ** Flexible
redundancy
5. Centralised 99.99968% 6.5 x M1 ** 6 parallel-connected
SSC UPS units
6. Total isolation, 99.99968% 6.5 x M1 *** 6 parallel-connected
single busbar UPS units
7. Total isolation, 99.99968% 6.5 x M1 *** 6 parallel-connected
double busbar UPS units
Multi-source configurations
Standard Criteria for comparison
diagram number Availability MTBF Maintainability Upgradeability Comment
8. Isolated 99.99970% 7 x M1 ** No limit
redundancy N+1
9. Redundant 2N 99.9999% 7 x M1 **** No limit to the No propagation
power rating of faults
10. Redundant 99.9999% 7 x M1 **** No limit to the + load
2N+1 power rating management
11. Redundant 99.99995% The highest ***** No limit to the + load
2N+2 availability! power rating management
**** excellent *** good ** fair * poor
07/2016 edition p. 62
Diagram no. 1. Single UPS
Fig. 2.8. Double-conversion single-UPS unit.
This is the basic solution for UPS installations. The double-conversion UPS unit
supplies high-quality voltage, whatever the level of disturbances in the utility power.
Availability of power for the load

99.99790% and an MTBF of 475 000 hours, compared to a utility MTBF of 96 hours.
UPS maintenance
Made easy due to the built-in bypass for supply of power to the load during servicing.
Possible upgrades
On site by connecting several identical UPS units in parallel.
Applicable ranges
Galaxy, Symmetra and Gutor

Diagram no. 2. Active redundancy with two
integrated parallel UPS units
Fig. 2.9. Active redundancy with two integrated parallel UPS units.
A simple solution where the UPS units share the load.

99.99947% and an MTBF up to four times higher than that for a single UPS.
UPS maintenance
During maintenance on one unit, the load remains protected by the other.
Possible upgrades
Several identical UPS units can be connected in parallel and equipped with an
external maintenance bypass.
Special characteristics
 The automatic-bypass function is ensured by managing the static switches.
 Centralised monitoring of the various modules.
 Can be used only with two identical units.
Applicable ranges

Diagram no. 3. Active redundancy with
integrated parallel UPS units and external
maintenance bypass
Fig. 2.10. Active redundancy with integrated parallel UPS units and external maintenance
bypass.
An upgradeable solution where the power rating can be increased up to 4000 kVA*.
Availability
UPS maintenance
During maintenance on one unit, the load remains protected by the other units.
Easy upgrades
Several identical UPS units can be connected in parallel for a low cost solution with
small dimensions.
 The UPS units share the load.
 Identical modules must be used.
Applicable ranges
* Power rating for N+1 redundancy.

Diagram no. 4. Isolated redundancy with
two UPS units
Fig. 2.11. Isolated redundancy with two UPS units.
An extremely flexible solution that can combine heterogeneous and distant UPS
units. It also offers improved backup time and is perfectly suited to the technology
implemented by MGE Galaxy UPSs from APC by Schneider Electric which provide
excellent withstand capacity for load step changes.
Availability
99.99970% and an MTBF 6.8 times higher than that of a single UPS.
UPS maintenance
During maintenance on one unit, the load remains protected.
 For a single load, the two UPS units have the same power rating, but if there is a
second load (possible load), the rating of the backup UPS unit must be adapted
correspondingly.
 No control wires between the UPS units.
Applicable ranges

parallel units and centralised static-switch
cubicle (SSC)
Fig. 2.12. Active redundancy with parallel units and centralised static-switch cubicle (SSC).
The solution for centralised installations up to 4 MVA*. Excellent reliability due to the
independence between the units and the static-switch cubicle (SSC).
Availability
99.99968% and an MTBF up to 6.5 times higher than that for a single UPS.
UPS maintenance
During maintenance on one unit, the load remains protected by the other units and
the SSC. During maintenance on the SSC, redundancy of the UPS units is
maintained.
Easy upgrades
Up to eight UPS units.
The UPS units share the load.
Applicable range
MGE Galaxy 7000, Symmetra MW
* Power rating for N+1 reduncancy.

parallel UPS units and total isolation, single
busbar
Fig. 2.13. Active redundancy with parallel UPS units and total isolation, single busbar.
A solution that can evolve with needs up to 4 MVA*. Excellent reliability and
improved maintainability due to the total independence between the UPS units and
the static-switch cubicle (SSC).
Availability
UPS maintenance
During maintenance on one unit, the load remains protected by the other units and
the SSC. During maintenance on the SSC, redundancy of the UPS units is
maintained.
Easy upgrades
 Total isolation of the UPS units or the SSC for maintenance.
 The UPS units can be tested using a test load.
 Isolation of each UPS unit and the SSC, thus eliminating the single point of failure
in the SSC.
Applicable range

parallel UPS units and total isolation, double
busbar
Fig. 2.14. Active redundancy with parallel UPS units, double SSC and total isolation, double busbar.
A solution that can evolve with needs up to 4 MVA*. Excellent reliability and
improved maintainability due to the total independence between the UPS units, the
static-switch cubicle (SSC) and the busbars.
Availability
UPS maintenance
During maintenance on the UPS units and one busbar, the load remains protected
by the other units and the SSC, which are parallel-connected to the second busbar.
During maintenance on the SSC, redundancy of the UPS units is maintained.
Easy upgrades
 Transfer from one busbar to the other without disturbing the load.
 Total isolation of the UPS units or the SSC for maintenance.
 Isolation of each UPS unit and the SSC, thus eliminating the single point of failure
in the SSC.
Applicable range

Diagram no. 8. Isolated redundancy N+1
Fig. 2.15. Isolated redundancy N+1.
Solution combining heterogeneous and distant UPS units to protect a number of

independent loads.

Greater than 99.99970% and an MTBF up to seven times higher than that for a single UPS.
UPS maintenance
During maintenance on one UPS unit, the load remains protected. However, the
UPS units are not totally isolated (servicing under energised conditions).
Possible upgrades
No limit to the power rating.
Short-circuit propagation
Impossible between the sources.
 Short-circuit capacity is lower than in a configuration with parallel UPS units
 (Isc, discrimination, crest factor, etc.).
 Sizing of the backup UPS must take into account the number of UPS units
downstream, their power ratings and their criticality, as well as any future plans for
the installation (generally speaking, the backup UPS has a parallel configuration).
 All the advantages of isolated redundancy (diagram no. 4).
Applicable ranges

Diagram no. 9. Redundant distribution with
STS => 2N diagram
Fig. 2.16. 2N configuration.

STS => 2N diagram (cont)
One of the best solution in terms of availability, site operation and safety. It is the
only solution that deals with power distribution through to the loads. It is particularly
flexible and made for easy adaptation of redundancy to the needs of the load.

Greater than 99.9999% !
UPS maintenance
Total distribution redundancy and servicing under no-load conditions make for
maximum safety during maintenance.
Easy upgrades
Using single-UPS units and with no limit to the total power rating, upgrading is made
easy by the capacity to partially isolate distribution subassemblies.
Fault propagation
Load segmenting and the technology employed in Upsilon STS units (break-before-
make source transfer with no interruption to the loads) ensures isolation of loads
from disturbances caused by other, faulty loads.
Easy operation
Automatic or manual source transfer.
Continuous monitoring of the sources (11 parameters and internal circuits).
Secure transfer of desynchronised sources.
 The synchronisation module ensures perfect source synchronisation under all
conditions (long outages, etc.).
 Selection of the load distribution for the UPS units.
 The UPS units can be heterogeneous and remote from the load.
Applicable ranges

STS => 2N+1 diagram
Fig. 2.17. Redundant distribution with STS units.

STS => 2N+1 diagram(Cont.)
The best solution in terms of availability, site operation and safety. It is the only
solution that deals with power distribution through to the loads. It is particularly
flexible and makes for easy adaptation of redundancy to the needs of the load.

Greater than 99.99999%, the highest level of availability!
UPS maintenance
Easy upgrades
Fault propagation
Easy operation
Applicable ranges

Fig. 2.18. 2N+2 configuration.

The highest availability, site operation and safety. It is the only solution that deals
with power distribution through to the loads. It is particularly flexible and made for
easy adaptation of redundancy to the needs of the load.

Greater than 99.999999%, the highest level of availability => the 6 nines concept !
UPS maintenance
Easy upgrades
Fault propagation
Easy operation
Applicable ranges

Diagram no. 12. Common battery in a
parallel installation
Fig. 2.19. Easy common battery solution on Galaxy V series.
The best solution to save money in a “+1” configuration in terms of energy storage.
When load would need only 2 UPSs to be supplied, we can in this case use only 2
battery strings, connected together in a single bank, shared between all the UPSs. 1
battery string is a consequence saved. All UPSs are connected to the common bank
through a dedicated battery breaker, and can be disconnect automatically in case of
need in order not to disturb the other UPSs.

UPS maintenance
During maintenance on one unit, the load remains protected by the other. Entire
Backup time is also available.
Possible upgrades
Several identical UPS units can be connected in parallel and equipped with an
external maintenance bypass.
 Can be used only with two identical units.
Applicable ranges
Galaxy V series (VM and VX)

STS, common battery => 2N+1 diagram
Fig. 2.20. 2N+1 configuration with STS and common battery.
Redundancy is built into each level, including the PDUs, the Upsilon STS units, the
Galaxy UPS units and the synchronisation modules.
Same advantages as diagram no. 10, plus:

 One battery string is saved thanks to the Galaxy V series capacity to accept easy
common battery set-up.
Applicable ranges
Galaxy V series (VM and VX)

Elimination of harmonics
in installations

Elimination of harmonics in installations
Contents
Harmonics ....................................................................... 81
Definition, origin and types of harmonics ..............................................81
Characteristic harmonic values ............................................................84
Effects of harmonics .............................................................................86
Elimination of harmonics ............................................... 90
Strategies against harmonics ...............................................................90
Living with harmonics ...........................................................................90
Schneider Electric solutions to eliminate harmonics.............................91
AccuSine
Active harmonic conditioners ........................................ 92
AccuSine active harmonic conditioner ranges .....................................92
Procedure for implementing active conditioning ...................................98

Harmonics
Definition, origin and Harmonics

types of harmonics Harmonics are sinusoidal currents or voltages with a frequency that is a whole
multiple (k) of the frequency of the distribution system, called the fundamental
frequency (50 or 60 Hz).
When combined with the sinusoidal fundamental current or voltage respectively,
harmonics distort the current or voltage waveform (see fig. 3.1).
Harmonics are generally identified as Hk, where k is the harmonic order.
 IHk or UHk indicate the type of harmonic (current or voltage).
 IH1 or UH1 designates the sinusoidal current or voltage at 50 or 60 Hz that exists
when there are no harmonics (the fundamental current or voltage).
H1 (50 Hz)
H3 (150 Hz)
H1 + H3
Fig. 3.1. Distortion of H1 (the fundamental) by H3 (third-order harmonic).
Non-linear loads are the cause

Equipment implementing power electronics is the main cause of harmonics. To
supply the electronics with DC power, the equipment has a switch-mode power
supply with a rectifier at the input that draws harmonic currents.
Examples are computers, variable-speed drives, etc.
Other loads distort the current due to their operating principle and also cause
harmonics.
Examples are fluorescent lamps, discharge lamps, welding machines and devices
with a magnetic core that can be saturated.
All the loads that distort the normal sinusoidal current cause harmonics and are
called non-linear loads.
PC. Variable-speed drive. Fluorescent lamp.

Fig. 3.2. Examples of non-linear loads that cause harmonics.
Linear and non-linear loads

Utility power supplies 50/60 Hz sinusoidal voltage to loads. The current waveform
supplied by the source in response to the needs of the load depends on the type of load.
Linear loads
The current drawn is sinusoidal with the same frequency as the voltage. The current
may be displaced (angle ) with respect to the voltage.
 Ohm's law defines a linear relation between the voltage and the current (U = ZI)
with a constant coefficient, the load impedance. The relation between the current
and the voltage is linear.
Examples are standard light bulbs, heating units, resistive loads, motors, transformers.
 This type of load does not contain any active electronic components, only resistors
(R), inductors (L) and capacitors (C).

Harmonics (Cont.)
Non-linear loads
 The current drawn by the load is periodic, but not sinusoidal. The current waveform
is distorted by the harmonic currents.
 Ohm's law defining the relation between the total voltage and current (1) is no
longer valid because the impedance of the load varies over one period (see fig. 3.3).
The relation between the current and the voltage is not linear.
 The current drawn by the load is in fact the combination of:
- a sinusoidal current called the fundamental, at the 50 or 60 Hz frequency,
- harmonics, which are sinusoidal currents with an amplitude less than that of the
fundamental, but a frequency that is a multiple of the fundamental and which defines
the harmonic order (e.g. the third order harmonic has a frequency 3 x 50 Hz (or 60 Hz)).
(1) Ohm's law applies to each voltage and current of the same harmonic order, Uk = Zk Ik,
where Zk is the load impedance for the given order, but is no longer valid for the total voltage
and current.
 Linear loads, non-linear loads, see p. 14 "UPS power quality".
An example is RCD loads (Resistance,

Capacitor, Diode) that are found in a majority
of power supplies used for electronic devices.
● The capacitor C, under steady-state
conditions, charges only when the
instantaneous line voltage is greater than the
voltage across its terminals.
● From that point on, the load impedance is
low (diode turned on). Before, the impedance
was high (diode turned off).
● The impedance of a non-linear load
therefore varies according to the voltage
across its terminals.
● The impedance is not constant and the
voltage and current are no longer sinusoidal.
● The form of the current is more complex and
can be represented, using the Fourier
theorem, by adding:
- a current with the same frequency f as the
voltage, called the fundamental,
- other currents with frequencies kf (k is a
whole number > 1) called harmonics.
● The figure provides a general idea of the
load current showing only two harmonic
orders, IH3 and IH5.
Fig. 3.3. Voltage and current for non-linear loads
Types of harmonics and specific aspects of zero-sequence

harmonics
Types of harmonics
Non-linear loads cause three types of harmonic currents, all in odd orders (because
the sinusoidal is an "odd" function).
 Harmonics H7 - H13 - …. : positive sequence.
 Harmonics H5 - H11 - …. : negative sequence.
 Harmonics H3 - H9 - …. : zero sequence.
Specific aspects of zero-sequence harmonics (H3 and multiples)
Zero-sequence harmonic currents (H3 and odd multiples, written 3(2k+1) where k is
an integer) in three-phase systems add up in the neutral conductor.
This is because their order 3(2k+1) is a multiple of the number of phases (3), which
means they coincide with the displacement (one third of a period) of the phase
currents.
Figure 3.4 illustrated this phenomenon over one period. The currents of the three
phases are displaced one third of a period (T/3), i.e. the respective IH3 harmonics
are in phase and the instantaneous values add up. Consequently:
 When there are no harmonics, the current in the neutral is equal to zero:
IN = I1+I2+I3 = 0
 When there are harmonics, the current in the neutral is equal to:
I1 + I2 + I3 = 3 IH3 .
It is therefore necessary to pay particular attention to this type of harmonics in
installations with a distributed neutral (commercial and infrastructure applications).

Harmonics (Cont.)
Fig. 3.4. The third-order harmonics and their multiples add up in the neutral.
Fig. 3.5. When there are H3 harmonics and their odd multiples, the current in the neutral is no longer equal to zero, it is the sum
of the zero-sequence harmonics.

Harmonics (Cont.)
Characteristic The harmonic analysis of a non-linear current consists in determining:

harmonic values  the harmonic orders present in the current,
 the relative importance of each harmonic order.
Below are a few characteristic harmonic values and fundamental relations used in
harmonic analysis.
See WP 17   Further information on harmonics, see “Theoretical review” and the explanations
in White Paper no. 17 "Understanding Power Factor, Crest Factor and Surge
Factor".
Rms value of harmonics

It is possible to measure the rms value of each harmonic order because the various
harmonic currents are sinusoidal, but with different frequencies that are multiples of
the fundamental frequency.
 IH1 is the fundamental component (50 or 60 Hz).
 IHk is the harmonic component where k is the harmonic order (k times 50 or 60 Hz).
Harmonic analysis is used to determine the values.
Total rms current
Irms  IH12  IH22  IH32  ...  IHk 2  ...
Individual harmonics
Each harmonic is expressed as a percentage, i.e. the ratio of its rms value to the rms
value of the fundamental. This ratio is the level of the individual harmonic.
IHk
Hk% = distortion of harmonic k = 100
IH1
Voltage and current harmonic distortion

Non-linear loads cause both current and voltage harmonics. This is because for each
load current harmonic, there is a supply voltage harmonic with the same frequency.
As a result, the voltage is also distorted by harmonics.
The distortion of a sine wave is presented as a percentage:
rms v alueof all harmonics
THD* % = total distortion = 100
rms v alueof f undamental
* Total Harmonic Distortion.
The following values are defined:
 TDHU % for the voltage, based on the voltage harmonics,
 TDHI % for the current, based on the current harmonics.
The THDI (or the THDU using the UHk values) is measured using the equation:
IH22  IH32  IH4 2  ...  Hk 2  ...

THDI %  100
IH1
Crest factor
The crest factor (Fc), used to characterise the form of the signal (current or voltage),
is the ratio between the peak value and the rms value.
peak v alue
Fc 
rms v alue
Below are typical values for different loads:
 linear load: Fc = 2 = 1.414
 main frame: Fc = 2 to 2.5
 microcomputers: Fc = 2 to 3.

Harmonics (Cont.)
Spectrum of the harmonic current

Defining the spectrum of a harmonic current consists in determining the current
waveform and the individual harmonics, as well as certain values such as the THDI
and Fc.
Individual harmonics
H5 = 33 %
H7 = 2.7 %
H11 = 7.3%
H13 = 1.6 %
H17 = 2.6 %
H19 = 1.1 %
H23 = 1.5 %
H25 = 1.3 %
THDI = 35%
Fc = 1.45
Input current of a three-phase rectifier. Harmonic spectrum and corresponding THDI.
Fig. 3.6. Harmonic spectrum of the current drawn by a non-linear load.
Power factor
Power factor
The power factor is the ratio between the active power (kW) and the apparent power
S (kVA) across the terminals of a given non-linear load.
P (kW )

S (kVA)
It is not the phase displacement between the voltage and the current, because they
are no longer sinusoidal.
Displacement between the fundamental current and voltage
The phase displacement 1 between the fundamental current and voltage, both
sinusoidal, can be defined as:
P1 (kW )
cos 1 
S1 (kVA)
where P1 and S1 are the active and apparent power, respectively, of the fundamental.
Distortion factor
The distortion factor is defined as:

v  1  THDI
1
2  (as defined by IEC 60146).
cos 1
When there are no harmonics, this factor is equal to 1 and the power factor is simply
the cos .
Power
Linear load
Across the terminals of a balanced, three-phase linear load, supplied with a phase-
to-phase voltage U and a current I, where the displacement between U and I is , the
power values are:
 P apparent = S = UI, in kVA,
 P active = S cos , in kW,
 P reactive = Q = S sin , in kVAr,
S P2  Q2
Non-linear load
Across the terminals of a non-linear load, the equation for P is much more complex
because U and I contain harmonics. It can however be expressed simply as:
 P = S  ( = power factor)
For the fundamentals U1 and I1, displaced by 1:
 P apparent fundamental = S1  U1 I1 3
 P active fundamental = P1 = S1 cos 1
 P reactive fundamental Q1 = S1 sin 1
S P12  Q12  D2 where D is the distortion power, due to the harmonics.

Harmonics (Cont.)
Effects of harmonics Loss of apparent power

Figure 3.7 shows that the product of a voltage at the fundamental frequency without
 In electrical devices, harmonics harmonics multiplied by a third-harmonic current is zero at the end of one period.
produce neither active nor reactive This is true whatever the phase and order of the harmonic.
power, only losses through the Joule
2
effect (ri ). This is expressed by the relation S  P12  Q12  D2
A part of the apparent power is consumed by the harmonics, to no effect.
 In rotating machines, the resulting motor torque is equal to zero and only a
parasitic pulsating torque exists, creating vibrations.
See WP 26   The only active power present during a voltage drop is the heating produced by
2
the harmonic current (Ihk) in a conductor with a resistance r (r IH k ).
 See White Paper no. 26 “Hazards of Harmonics and Neutral Overloads” for
further information.
Fig. 3.7. U x I products for fundamentals (top) and for fundamentals with harmonics (bottom).
 Temperature rise due to Temperature rise in cables

harmonic currents adds to Temperature rise in cables is expressed as:
the temperature rise due to 
the fundamental current. Losses = r IHn

n 1
2

Harmonics (Cont.)
Current in the neutral

 The neutral must be All third-order harmonic currents and their odd multiples add up in the neutral (see
oversized to take into fig. 3.8). The current in the neutral can reach 1.7 times that in the phases.
account the third-order Consequences
harmonic currents and their Significant losses in the neutral
2
multiples. r Ineutral = temperature rise in the neutral.
Fig. 3.8. The third-order harmonics and their multiples add up in the neutral.
Self-polluting loads
Current distortion THDI, caused by the load, results in voltage distortion THDU
 Voltage distortion mirrors caused by the harmonic currents flowing through the various impedances from the
that of the current and source on down. Figure 3.9 shows the various forms of distortion throughout a
increases in step with the common electrical installation.
sum of the impedances

upstream of the non-linear
load.
Fig. 3.9. Effects of harmonics throughout the installation.

Harmonics (Cont.)
Risk of capacitor breakdown

 In conclusion, the higher the The value of a current in a capacitor is equal to:
content of high-order components in .I = U C 
the voltage, the worse the situation for For a harmonic current of order k, the angular frequency is equal to  = 2 k f, and
the capacitor. It is often necessary to the current is equal to:
use reinforced capacitors.
.I = 2  k f U C
where f = the fundamental frequency and k = the harmonic order.
It follows that the value of the current increases with k.
What is more, for a harmonic frequency, there can also be resonance (1) of the
capacitor (capacitance C) with the equivalent inductance (L) of the source
(transformer, essentially inductive) in parallel with that of the other supplied loads.
This resonant circuit (see fig. 3.10) significantly amplifies the harmonic current of the
corresponding order, thus worsening the situation for the capacitor.
(1) This is the case if, for a harmonic order k, with a frequency fk = k x 50 (or 60) Hz, LCk2 ˜ 1,
where = 2 π fk.
IH
Source harmonic
currents
impedance
(transformer) in resonant
parallel with that L LC circuit C All
of other loads non-linear
supplied loads
Fig. 3.10. Effects of harmonics with capacitors, risk of resonance.
Consequences
 Risk of capacitor breakdown.
 Risk of resonance due to the presence of the inductors.
Certain limitations must be respected:
 U max = 1.1 Un
 I max = 1.3 In
 THDU max = 8%
 Selection of capacitor type, depending on the situation, i.e. standard, class h
(reinforced isolation), with harmonic inductors.
Derating of transformers
A number of effects are combined:
 Generally speaking,  due to the skin effect, the resistance of a transformer winding increases with the
harmonics result in source order of the harmonics,
derating that is inversely  losses due to hysteresis are proportional to the frequency,
 losses due to Foucault currents are proportional to the square of the frequency.
proportional to the load Consequences
power factor, i.e. the lower  In compliance with standard NFC 52-114, transformers must be derated by
the power factor, the more applying a coefficient k to their rated power, such that:
the source must be 1
k
n
derated.
H n
1  0,1
n2
2 1,6
n
This is an empirical equation.

Other national standards recommend derating using a similar k factor that depends
on the country (e.g. BS 7821 Part 4, IEE 1100-1992).
Example
A 1000 kVA transformer supplies a six-pulse rectifier bridge drawing the following
harmonics:
H5 = 25%, H7 = 14%, H11 = 9%, H13 = 8%.
The derating coefficient is k = 0.91.
The apparent power of the transformer is therefore 910 kVA.

Harmonics (Cont.)
Risk of disturbing generators
 Practically speaking, the THDI of Similar to transformers, generators suffer greater losses due to hysteresis and
the current in the generator must not Foucault currents.
exceed 20%. Above, derating is  The subtransient reactance X"d increases as a function of the frequency.
necessary.  The "harmonic" rotating field sweeps the rotor at a frequency other than the
synchronism frequency (50 or 60 Hz).
Consequences
 Creation of parasitic torque resulting in lower efficiency of the mechanical to
electrical conversion.
 Additional losses in the inductor windings and the rotor damper.
 Presence of vibration and abnormal noise.
Losses in asynchronous motors

Harmonics produce the following effects in asynchronous motors:
 increases in Joule and iron losses (stator losses),
 pulsating torque (rotor losses with a drop in mechanical efficiency).
 The THDU must be less than 10% to limit these phenomena.
Effects on other equipment

Harmonics can disturb operation of the following equipment as well:
 non-rms trip units, resulting in nuisance tripping of circuit breakers,
 automatic telephone exchanges,
 alarms,
 sensitive electronic equipment,
 remote-control systems.
Effect on recent UPS systems

Modern UPS systems have high chopping frequencies (PWM) and very low output
impedance (equivalent to a transformer five times more powerful).
When confronted with non-linear loads, these UPSs offer:
 limited losses,
 current-limiting operation,
 very low voltage distortion (THDU < 3%).
 UPSs are an excellent means to supply non-linear loads.
Conclusion
Harmonics may have damaging effects on electrical installations and on the quality
of operation.
That is why international standards stipulate increasingly precise harmonic-
compatibility levels for equipment and set limits for the harmonic content on public
distribution systems.
 Standards on harmonics, see p. 140 "UPS standards".
On the following pages are a presentation of the various strategies concerning

harmonics and the usefulness of AccuSine active harmonic conditioners.

Elimination of harmonics
Strategies against There are two strategies:

 accept and live with harmonics, which essentially means it is necessary to oversize
harmonics equipment to take the effects of harmonics into account,
 eliminate the harmonics, in part or in whole, using filters or active harmonic
conditioners.
Living with harmonics Oversizing of equipment

Given that the negative effects of harmonic currents increase with the cumulative
impedance of cables and sources, the obvious solution is to limit the total impedance
in order to reduce both voltage distortion and temperature rise.
Figure 3.11 shows the results when cable cross-sections and the power rating of the
source are doubled.
Given that the THDU depends primarily on the inductive component and thus on the
length of the cables, it is clear that this solution is not very effective and results
simply in limiting temperature rise.
Figure 3.12 shows that for the strongest harmonic currents (H3 to H7), the L/R ratio
is equal to 1 for cables with a cross-section of 36 mm². Consequently, above 36
mm², it is necessary to reduce the impedance by using multicore cable to create
parallel impedances.
See WP 38   For Data Centers, see “Harmonic Currents in the Data Center: A Case Study”.
Fig. 3.11. Increased cable cross-sections to limit distortion and losses.
Fig. 3.12. Influence of cable cross-section on L/R.

Elimination of harmonics (Cont.)
Schneider Electric solutions There are different types of solutions to eliminate harmonics.
to eliminate harmonics  Filters, see p. 30 “ Selection of a filter” .
Passive filters
LC passive filters are tuned to the frequency requiring elimination or attenuate a
band of frequencies. Harmonic recombination systems (double bridge, phase
shifting) can also be grouped in this category.
 On request, Schneider Electric can integrate this type of filter in its solutions.
Passive filters have two major disadvantages:
 elimination of harmonics is effective only for a specific installation, i.e. the addition
or removal of loads can disrupt the filtering system,
 it is often difficult to implement them in an existing installation.
Active filters / active harmonic conditioners

Active filters, also called active harmonic conditioners, such as AccuSine, cancel
harmonics by injecting exactly equal harmonic currents where they arise. This type of
filter reacts in real time (i.e. actively) to the existing harmonics in order to eliminate
them. More effective and flexible than passive filters, they avoid their disadvantages
and, in comparison, constitute a solution that:
 offers greater performance (total elimination of all harmonics is possible, up to the
th
50 order),
 is flexible, adaptable (action can be configured) and reusable.
Table summing up the possible strategies against harmonics

Strategy Advantages Disadvantages Schneider Electric solutions
Live with harmonics
Increase the ratings of Reduction in supply Difficult in existing solutions. Costly solution limited to
sources and/or the cross- THDU by reducing thereducing the resistive component for small cross-
sections of cables source impedance. sections (the inductance remains constant).
Reduction in Joule Requires parallel cables for large cross-sections. Does
losses. not avoid disturbances upstream of the installation.
Does not comply with standards.
Special supply for non- Limits disturbances to Same as above.
linear loads. neighbouring loads
through decoupling.
Partially eliminate harmonics
Tuned passive filters. Simple solution. Only for one or two harmonic orders. Wide-band filters Range of passive filters
are not very effective. Possibility of resonance. Costly Including double-bridge and phase-
design work is required. shifting solutions
Inductors upstream of the Reduction in harmonic Increase in THDU across the terminals of the load.
non-linear loads. currents. Limits the
effects of transient
overvoltages.
Special transformers. Elimination of only certain harmonic orders. Non-
standard construction.
Completely eliminate harmonics
Active harmonic Simple and flexible Total elimination of all harmonics is possible (up to the AccuSine
conditioners. solution. 25th order), adaptable (action configured) and reusable active conditioners
system.

AccuSine
Active harmonic conditioners
AccuSine AccuSine characteristics

active harmonic
AccuSine active harmonic conditioners
conditioners AccuSine active harmonic conditioners constitute a more general approach to the
problem of harmonics. These active filters are not only for a UPS unit, but are
designed to eliminate harmonics throughout the installation.
AccuSine is particularly well suited to medium-power industrial and infrastructure
applications, offering conditioning currents from 20 to 480 A in three-phase systems
with a neutral.
These solutions are presented in the following section.
The table below sums up the main characteristics.
Range Power 50/60 Hz Main characteristics Applications

level systems
AccuSine 20 to 380 to 415 ● Filtering up to H25 Filtering of medium-

480 A V ● Digital active power commercial,
3 Ph+N conditioning with: infrastructure and
and 3 Ph - analysis and industrial systems,
conditioning of individual 3Ph+N and 3 Ph,
orders single-phase loads
- response time 40 ms for
load fluctuations
Advantages of AccuSine active harmonic conditioning

 Wide-band solution from H2 to H25 with individual conditioning of each phase.
 It is possible to select individual harmonic orders for conditioning.
 No risk of overloads, conditioning limits to the maximum power rating, even if the
load power exceeds the rating.
 Automatically adapts to all types of loads, single-phase and three-phase.
 Compatible with all system earthing arrangements.
 Power factor correction.
 Economic, when harmonics are cut in half, losses are reduced by four.
 Can be reused in other installations.
 Upgradeable with parallel-connected units.
 Very compact.
 Simple installation, with current transformers upstream or downstream.
Operating principle
The source supplies exclusively the fundamental component (IF) of the load current.
The active conditioner measures in real time the harmonics (IH) drawn by the load
and supplies them.
Upstream of point A, where the conditioner is connected, the fundamental current IF
is not altered, downstream the load draws the non-linear current IF + IH.
IF IF + IH
A
Source Injection of
compensation IH Non-linear
current load
Active harmonic Measurement

conditioner of load
harmonics
Fig. 3.13. Harmonic conditioning by AccuSine.

AccuSine
Active harmonic conditioners (Cont.)
Operating modes
Digital mode, conditioning of individual orders
The basic operating mode of AccuSine is digital, with a current sensor,
analogue/digital conversion of the current measurements and real-time calculation of
the harmonic spectrum. This information is supplied to the inverter for compensation
of the individual harmonic orders.
The response time to load fluctuations is 40 ms (two cycles).
Operating diagram
The power required for conditioning is drawn on the three-phase distribution system
and stored in the inductor L and the capacitors charged to +Vm and -Vm respectively
(see fig. 3.14).
Depending on the sign of the harmonic current required, the pulse width of one
capacitor or the other is modulated. This means the same connection to the supply
system can be used to draw power and inject the harmonics.
The power sent to the load depends on:
 The harmonic values measured,
 User requirements, set during system configuration: harmonic orders to be
eliminated and power-factor correction (yes or no).
The current transformer, combined with an analogue/digital converter, determines
the spectrum (fundamental and harmonics) of the current supplying the load.
Depending on these values and the selecting program, a processor prepares the
commands for the inverter, for execution one phase after the measurements.
Power factor correction is obtained by generating a fundamental current +90° out of
phase with the voltage
Fig. 3.14. Operation of AccuSine.
Options
On 3Ph or 3 ph+N systems, the user can decide to condition:
 All or only certain harmonics up to H25.
 The power factor
 AccuSine is always supplied with three-phase power, but it can condition single-
phase loads, i.e. 3k zero-sequence harmonics.

AccuSine
Installation modes
Parallel mode
Up to four AccuSine active harmonic conditioners can be connected in parallel at the
same point of installation. This the means to increase harmonic-conditioning capacity
and/or system availability.
For parallel installations, a single set of sensors is required on the conditioned circuit
and a wire link is used to send the load-current measurements to the various
conditioners. If one conditioner shuts down, the remaining conditioners continue to
condition the harmonics, within the limits of their rated conditioning capacity.
Fig. 3.15. Parallel operation of three AccuSine active harmonic conditioners.
Cascade or in-series mode

"Cascade" or "in-series" operation is possible, but simply requires special settings to
avoid any interaction between the different conditioners.
The downstream conditioner generally conditions a high-power load. The upstream
device conditions other low-power outgoing circuits and, where applicable, any
residual harmonics not conditioned by the first conditioner.
Fig. 3.16. AccuSine active harmonic conditioners in cascade mode.
Multi-circuit mode
In this mode, a single conditioner can condition up to three outgoing circuits. A set of
sensors is required for each circuit conditioned and all are connected to AccuSine .
This configuration is very useful when the harmonics are concentrated on a small
number of circuits.
Fig. 3.17. One AccuSine active conditioner for several circuits.

AccuSine
Position in the installation

Total (or centralised) conditioning
The active harmonic conditioner is connected just downstream of the sources,
generally at the main low-voltage switchboard (MLVS) level.
Partial conditioning
The active harmonic conditioner is connected at the main or secondary switchboard
level and conditions a set of loads.
Local conditioning
The active harmonic conditioner is connected directly to the terminals of each load
Fig. 3.18. Three possible AccuSine installation points, depending on user requirements.
Comparison of installation possibilities

Type of conditioning Advantages Disadvantages Applications
Total Economical. Harmonics remain in the Compliance with utility requirements.
(MLVS level) Relieves generators (transformers, downstream part of the Avoid injecting harmonics upstream of the
generators). installation. installation.
Cables must be oversized.
Partial Avoids oversizing the cables Harmonics remain between the Large buildings.
(secondary-switchboard between the main and secondary secondary switchboard and the Conditioning regularly spaced on each
level) switchboards. non-linear load. floor or set of floors.
Recombination of certain Outgoing cable to the load must Several circuits supplying non-linear loads.
harmonics may make it possible to be oversized.
reduce conditioner rating.
Local Eliminates harmonics where they Costly when a number of For installations where non-linear loads
(load level) occur. conditioners are required. are few in number and high-powered with
Reduces losses in all cables, up to respect to the other loads. Example, large
the source. variable-speed drives, high-power UPSs.
Examples: server bays, lighting, high-
power UPSs, fluorescent lighting systems.

AccuSine
Practically speaking
 Total conditioning does not pose any calculation problems.
 Partial conditioning requires a few precautions.
 For all non-compensated RCD loads (high-power variable-speed drives without
inductors for variable-torque applications), local conditioning can guarantee only a
THDU not exceeding certain limits to ensure proper load operation.
Position of current transformers upstream or downstream

In most of the above installation modes, two different types of current-transformer
(CT) installation can be used with AccuSine.
CT upstream of the load

This is the most common situation.
Fig. 3.19. Installation with one CT upstream of the load.
Installation with one CT upstream of the AccuSine and one CT on the

switchboard incomer
This configuration simplifies matters when it is difficult to install a CT on the line just
upstream of the load. The two CTs must have compatible and complementary
characteristics. The difference between the measured currents determines the
necessary compensation current.
Fig. 3.20. Installation with two CTs, one on the switchboard incomer and the other upstream of
the conditioner.

AccuSine
Advantages of AccuSine
Elimination of the conditioned harmonic currents
For the selected harmonics, AccuSine is designed to provide a path for the harmonic
currents with virtually zero impedance with respect to that of the source. This
eliminates their flow upstream towards the source.
Figure 3.21 shows AccuSine between two line sections ZL1 and ZL2, supplying a
standard RCD load that can be either single or three-phase (switch-mode power
supply or variable-speed drive).
The harmonic currents IHn that previously flowed through impedances Zs and ZL1
upstream of the AccuSine point of installation, are eliminated.
The source now supplies exclusively the fundamental current If.
It is the AccuSine that supplies the harmonic currents IHn to the load, by
continuously measuring the harmonics drawn by the load.
Fig. 3.21. AccuSine modifies the current upstream of its point of installation.
Reduction in THDU at the point of installation

Upstream of AccuSine, the selected harmonic currents IHn (all or only some of the
th
harmonics up to the 25 ) are eliminated.
Total harmonic distortion upstream of the point of installation is calculated as (see
Ch. 4 p. 49):

 UH
n2
n
2
THDU %  100
UH1
where UHn is the voltage drop corresponding to harmonic IHn.

Elimination of the harmonic current for a given order eliminates the harmonic voltage
for the same order (1).
The result is a major reduction in the THDU, by selecting the most significant
harmonics.
th
Given that above the 25 order, individual harmonics are negligible, the THDU is
practically equal to zero and distortion is totally eliminated if it is decided to condition
th
all harmonics up to the 25 .
(1) In that UHn and IHn are sinusoidal components at frequency nf (where f is the frequency of
the fundamental), they are related by the Ohm law, taking into account the value of the
concerned impedances (Zs and ZL1) with an angular frequency n.
Therefore:
UHn = (Zs(n) + ZL1(n)) IHn.
For all the conditioned harmonics, IHn = 0 and consequently, UHn = 0.

AccuSine
Conclusion on active conditioning

Procedure for Precise conditioning calculations require:
implementing active  precise and in-depth knowledge on the installation (sources, lines and installation
conditioning method),
 precise knowledge on the loads (harmonic and displacement curves depending on
the source impedance),
 special calculation tools,
 analysis and simulation.
New installations
The standard rules governing electrical installations remain valid, but an evaluation
of the voltage distortion (THDU) is required where harmonic currents flow.
This evaluation is very complex and requires special calculation software as well as
in-depth knowledge of the non-linear loads, in particular the harmonic distribution as
a function of the upstream impedance.
APC by Schneider Electric has the simulation tools required for theses calculations.
Existing installations
For existing installations, a precise evaluation of the site is the indispensable
prerequisite to any corrective action. The mathematical relationship between current
and voltage distortion is complex and depends on the various components of the
installation.
Control over harmonic phenomena requires know-how and experience, as well as
specialised tools and software (spectrum analyser, calculation software for distortion
in cables, simulation software, etc.).
However, even if each solution is specific to a given site, proper professional
techniques and rigorous methods ensure maximum probability that the installation
will operate correctly.
Methodology
APC by Schneider Electric has mastered the entire harmonic-elimination process
and proposes a three-step approach:
1. site audit,
2. determination of the most suitable solution,
3. system installation and checks.
1. Site audit
Installation diagram
Before initiating a series of measurements, we suggest you draft a simplified diagram
of the installation, indicating the following.
 types of equipment
- generators: type, power rating, voltage, Usc, X"d (engine generator set).
- isolation transformers: voltage, power rating, type, Usc, coupling.
- distribution: type of cables, length, cross-section, installation method.
- loads: power rating, type.
- system earthing arrangements at the various points in the installation.
 operating modes
- on utility power.
- on engine generator sets (standby power or cogeneration).
- on UPSs.
 downgraded operating modes
- without redundancy.
- on engine generator set power.
This diagram should enable you to locate the different measurement points and
identify critical operating phases (for evaluation by simulation or calculation).

AccuSine
Measurements
Following the previous indispensable step, the measurement phase can begin, starting
preferably at the source and working downstream toward the loads drawing the
harmonics, in order to limit the number of measurements.
The quality of measurements is more important than their quantity and makes the next
step easier.
Preliminary installation study

This first step ends with a preliminary study of the installation:
 point(s) of installation of the conditioner(s),
 installation conditions for the protection circuit breakers,
 installation of sensors (energised conditions or not),
 possibility of shutting down the load,
 available space,
 evacuation of losses (ventilation, air-conditioning, etc.),
 environmental constraints (noise, EMC, etc.).
2. Determination of the most suitable solution

The previous elements are used to determine the optimum solution through:
 analysis of the measurement results,
 simulation of different solutions for the problem encountered,
 determination of the most suitable solution,
 drafting of a summary report with the proposed solutions.
3. System installation and checks

This last step includes:
 implementation of the selected solutions,
 checks on performance levels with respect to the guaranteed results,
 drafting of a system start-up report.
07/2016 edition p. 99
Theoretical review
07/2016 edition p. 100

Theoretical review
Contents
Supplying sensitive loads .............................................. 102

Types of electrical disturbances ...........................................................102
Main disturbances in low-voltage electrical power................................103
UPSs................................................................................. 104
The UPS solution .................................................................................104
UPS applications ..................................................................................105
Types of UPSs ................................................................. 108
Static or rotary UPS..............................................................................108
Types of static UPSs ............................................................................110
UPS components and operation .................................... 119
Components of a UPS ..........................................................................119
Main characteristics of UPS components .............................................122
Summary diagram for main characteristics ..........................................127
UPS operating modes ..........................................................................128
UPS configurations...............................................................................129
Technology ...................................................................... 132
Transformerless UPSs .........................................................................132
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ............................ 135
Electromagnetic disturbances ..............................................................138
EMC standards and recommendations ................................................139
UPS standards................................................................. 140
Scope and observance of standards ....................................................140
Main standards governing UPSs ..........................................................141
Energy storage ................................................................ 143
Possible technologies...........................................................................143
Batteries ...............................................................................................143
Flywheels .............................................................................................147
UPS / generator-set combination................................... 150
Use of a generator................................................................................150
UPS / generator-set combination .........................................................150
Transient load conditions .............................................. 152
Review of inrush currents .....................................................................152
Harmonics ....................................................................... 153
Harmonics ............................................................................................153
Characteristic harmonic values ............................................................154
Non-linear loads and PWM technology ......................... 158
Non-linear load performance of UPSs using PWM technology ............158
Comparison of different sources...........................................................161
Free-frequency chopping .....................................................................162
PFC rectifier ..................................................................... 1640
07/2016 edition p. 101

Supplying sensitive loads
Types of electrical Power distribution systems, both public and private, theoretically supply electrical
equipment with a sinusoidal voltage of fixed amplitude and frequency (e.g. 400 volts
disturbances rms, 50 Hz, on low-voltage systems).
In real-life conditions however, utilities indicate the degree of fluctuation around the
rated values. Standard EN 50160 defines the normal fluctuations in the LV supply
voltage on European distribution systems as follows:
 Voltage +10% to -15% (average rms values over 10-minute intervals),
of which 95% must be in the +10% range each week.
 Frequency +4 to 6% over one year with 1% for 99.5% of the time (synchronous
connections in an interconnected system).
Practically speaking, however, in addition to the indicated fluctuations, the voltage
sine-wave is always distorted to some degree by various disturbances that occur on
the system.
See WP 18   See White Paper WP 18 “The Seven Types of Power Problems”
Origins of disturbances
Utility power
Utility power can be disturbed or even cut by the following phenomena:
 Atmospheric phenomena affecting overhead lines or buried cables:
- lightning which can produce a sudden voltage surge in the system,
- frost which can accumulate on overhead lines and cause them to break,
 Accidents:
- a branch falling on a line, which may produce a short-circuit or break the line,
- cutting of a cable, for example during trench digging or other construction work,
- a fault on the utility power system,
 Phase unbalance,
 Switching of protection or control devices in the utility power system, for load
shedding or maintenance purposes.
User equipment
Some equipment can disturb the utility power system, e.g.:
 Industrial equipment:
- motors, which can cause voltage drops due to inrush currents when starting,
- equipment such as arc furnaces and welding machines, which can cause voltage
drops and high-frequency interference,
 Power electronics equipment (switch-mode power supplies, variable speed drives,
electronic ballasts, etc.), which often cause harmonics,
 Building facilities such as lifts which provoke inrush currents or fluorescent lighting
which causes harmonics.
Types of disturbances
Disturbances that are due to the above causes are summed up in the following table,
according to the definitions contained in standards EN 50160 and ANSI 1100-1992.
07/2016 edition p. 102

Supplying sensitive loads (Cont.)
Disturbances Characteristics Main causes Main consequences

Power outages
Micro-outages Total absence of voltage  10 ms. Atmospheric conditions, switching, Faulty operation and loss of data
faults, work on the utility. (computer systems) or interrupted
production (continuous
processes).
Outages Total absence of voltage for more Atmospheric conditions, switching, Depending on the duration,
than one period: faults, incidents, line breaks, work shutdown of machines and risks
- short outage:  3 minutes on the utility. for people (e.g. lifts), loss of data
(70% of outages last less than 1 s) (computer systems) or interrupted
- long outage: > 3 minutes production (continuous processes).
Voltage variations
Voltage sags Reduction in the rms value of Atmospheric phenomena, load Shutdown of machines,
voltage to less than 90% of the fluctuations, short-circuit on a malfunctions, damage to
rated value (but greater than 0%), neighbouring circuit. equipment and loss of data.
with return to a value greater than
90% within 10 ms to 1 minute.
Overvoltage Temporary increase to more than - Quality of utility generators and - For computer systems:
10% over the rated voltage, for a transmission systems. corruption of data, processing
duration of 10 ms to a few - Interaction between generators errors, system shutdown, stress
seconds. and load fluctuations on the utility on components.
power system. - Temperature rise and premature
- Switching on the utility power system. aging of equipment.
- Stopping of high-power loads
(e.g. motors, capacitor banks).
Undervoltage Drop in voltage lasting from a few Peak in consumption, when the Shutdown of computer systems.
minutes to days. utility cannot meet demand and Corruption or loss of data.
must reduce its voltage to limit Temperature rise.
power. Premature ageing of equipment.
Voltage spike Sudden, major jump in voltage Close lightning strikes, static Processing errors, corruption of
(e.g. 6 kV). discharges. data, system shutdown.
Damage to computers, electronic
boards.
Voltage unbalance Condition where the rms value of - Induction furnaces. - Temperature rise.
(in three-phase systems) the phase voltages or the - Unbalanced single-phase loads. - Disconnection of a phase.
unbalances between phases are
not equal.
Frequency variations
Frequency fluctuations Instability in the frequency. - Regulation of generators. These variations exceed the
Typically +5%, - 6% (average for - Irregular operation of generators. tolerances of certain instruments
ten-second time intervals). - Unstable frequency source. and computer hardware (often ±
1%) and can therefore result in the
loss or corruption of data.
Flicker Flicker in lighting systems due to a Welding machines, motors, arc Physiological disturbances.
drop in voltage and frequency furnaces, X-ray machines, lasers,
(< 35 Hz). capacitor banks.
Other disturbances
HF transients Sudden, major and very short Atmospheric phenomena Destruction of equipment,
jump in voltage. (lightning) and switching. accelerated aging, breakdown of
Similar to a voltage spike. components or insulators.
Short duration < 1 s Starting of small inductive loads,

Amplitude < 1 to 2 kV at repeated opening and closing of
frequencies of several tens of MHz. low-voltage relays and contactors.
Medium duration > 1 s and  100 s Faults (lightning) or high-voltage
Peak value 8 to 10 times higher than switching transmitted to the low-
the rated value up to several MHz. voltage by electromagnetic coupling.
Long duration > 100 s Stopping of inductive loads or
Peak value 5 to 6 times higher than high-voltage faults transmitted to
the rated value up to several the low-voltage system by
hundred MHz. electromagnetic coupling.
Harmonic distortion Distortion of the current and voltage Electric machines with magnetic Oversizing of equipment,
sine-waves due to the harmonic cores (motors, off-load temperature rise, resonance
currents drawn by non-linear loads. transformers, etc.), switch-mode phenomena with capacitors,
The effect of harmonics above the power supplies, arc furnaces, destruction of equipment
25th order is negligible. variable speed drives. (transformers).
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Electromagnetic or electrostatic Switching of electronic components Malfunctions of sensitive electronic
conducted or radiated disturbances. (transistors, thyristors, diodes), devices.
The goal is to ensure low emission electrostatic discharges.
and high immunity levels.
07/2016 edition p. 103

UPSs
The UPS solution Modern economic activities are increasingly dependent on digital technologies which
are very sensitive to electrical disturbances.
As a result, many applications require a backed up supply of power to protect against
the risk of disturbances in utility power:
 Industrial processes and their control/monitoring systems - risks of production
losses,
 Airports and hospitals - risks for the safety of people,
 Information and communication technologies related to the internet - risks of
processing shutdowns with very high hourly downtime costs due to the interruption in
the exchange of vital data, required by global companies.
UPSs
A UPS (uninterruptible power system) is used to supply sensitive applications with
secure power.
A UPS is an electric device positioned between the utility and the sensitive loads that
supplies voltage offering:
 High quality: the output sine-wave is free of any and all disturbances in utility
power and within strict amplitude and frequency tolerances,
 High availability: the continuous supply of voltage, within the specified tolerances,
is ensured by a backup supply of power. The backup supply is generally a battery
that, if necessary, steps in without a break in the supply to replace utility power and
provide the backup time required by the application.
These characteristics make UPSs the ideal power supply for all sensitive
applications because they ensure power quality and availability, whatever the state
of utility power.
Components of a UPS
A UPS generally comprises the main components listed below.
PFC Rectifier
It draws utility power, with unity power factor, to supply DC Bus (where DC caps are
connected) to supply the inverter.
Inverter
It completely regenerates a high-quality voltage output sine-wave:
 Free of all utility-power disturbances, notably micro-outages,
 Within tolerances compatible with the requirements of sensitive electronic devices
(e.g. tolerances in amplitude ± 0.5% and frequency ± 1%, compared to ± 10% and ±
5% in utility power systems, which correspond to improvement factors of 20 and 5,
respectively.
Note. The term inverter is sometimes used to designate a UPS, when in reality it is
only a part of the UPS.
Charger
It is also named ―chopper‖, and works in 2 modes, buck or boost :
- it charges the Batteries in normal operation (buck) => it limits the DC current to
0,1C10 to recharge the batteries, or keep the batteries in floating mode.
- It discharges the batteries in battery operation (boost) => it increases the battery
voltage to the DC bus level voltage in order to supply the inverter which is still
supplying the load.
Battery
The battery provides sufficient operating backup time (6 minutes to a number of
hours) by stepping in to replace utility power as needed.
Static bypass
The static bypass ensures no-break transfer of the load from the inverter to direct
utility power and back. No-break transfer is carried out by a device implementing
SCRs (sometimes called a static switch).
The static bypass makes it possible to continue supplying the load even if an internal
fault occurs or during maintenance on the rectifier/charger and inverter modules. It
can also serve for transfers to call on the full power available upstream in the event
of overloads (e.g. short circuits) exceeding UPS capacity.
During operation on the static bypass, the load is supplied directly by utility power
and is no longer protected (operation in downgraded mode).
Maintenance bypass
07/2016 edition p. 104
UPSs
This bypass may be used to supply the load directly with utility power, without calling
on the inverter or the static switch. Transfer to the maintenance bypass is user
initiated with switches. By actuating the necessary switches, it is the means to isolate
the static bypass and the inverter for maintenance, while continuing to supply the
load in downgraded mode.
07/2016 edition p. 105

UPSs (Cont.)
HV system
HV/LV
transformer
Normal utility power

(disturbances and
system tolerances)
UPS
Non-sensitive loads
Rectifier/
charger
Battery Maintenance
bypass
Inverter Static
bypass
Reliable power
(no disturbances, within
strict tolerances
and available due to
battery backup power)
Sensitive loads
Fig. 5.1. The UPS solution.
UPS applications UPSs are used for a wide range of applications requiring electrical power that is
available at all times and not affected by disturbances on the utility power system.
The table below presents a number of applications.
For each, it indicates the sensitivity of the application to disturbances and the type of
UPS that is suitable for protection.
The applications requiring this type of installation are:
 Computer systems,
 Telecommunications,
 Industry and instruments,
 Other applications.
The required UPS typologies are presented on page 9, "Types of static UPSs".
They include static UPSs implementing the following typologies:
 Passive standby,
 Interaction with the distribution system,
 Double conversion.
 ECOnversion (derivated from double conversion and ECO Mode)
 ECO Mode (economy mode from double conversion)
07/2016 edition p. 106

UPSs (Cont.)
UPS applications
Application Protected devices Protection required against UPS type
Micro- Outages Voltage Frequency Other (see p. 8)
outages variations variations
Computer systems
Data centres - Large bays for rack-mounted servers ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** - Double conversion
- Internet data centres - ECOnversion
- Mix of double
conversion +
ECOnversion in a 2N
configuration
Company networks - Sets of computers with terminals and ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** - Double conversion
peripheral devices (tape storage units, - ECOnversion
disk drives, etc.)
Small networks and - Networks made up of PCs or **** **** *** *** ** - Interaction with the
servers workstations, server networks (WAN, distribution system
LAN) - ECOnversion
Stand-alone computers - PCs, workstations ** ** * * ** Passive standby
- Peripheral devices: printers, plotters,
voice mail
Telecommunications
Telecommunications - Digital PABXs ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** Double conversion
Industry and instruments
Industrial processes - Process control *** ***** *** *** **** Double conversion
- PLCs
- Numerical control systems
- Control systems
- Robot control/monitoring systems
- Automatic machines
Medical and laboratories - Instrumentation **** ***** **** **** *** Double conversion
- Scanners (60 Hz)
Industrial equipment - Machine-tools *** **** *** *** *** Double conversion
- Welding robots
- Plastic-injection presses
- Precise regulation devices (textile,
paper, etc.)
- Heating equipment for manufacture of
semi-conductors, glass, pure materials
Lighting systems - Public buildings (elevators, safety ** **** *** *** ** - Double conversion
equipment) - Interaction with the
- Tunnels distribution system
- Runway lighting in airports - ECOnversion
Other applications
Special frequencies - Frequency conversion **** **** **** ***** *** Double conversion
- Power supplies for aircraft (400 Hz)
* low sensitivity to disturbances.
***** high sensitivity to disturbances.
07/2016 edition p. 107

Types of UPSs
Static or rotary UPS Static or rotary UPS solutions

There are two main types of UPSs (figure 5.2 and details in  White Paper WP 92 -
See WP 92  "Comparison of Static and Rotary UPS") which basically differ in the way the UPS
inverter function is implemented.
Static solution
These UPSs use only electronic components to perform the inverter function. A
"static-inverter function" is obtained.
Rotary solution
These UPSs use rotary machines to perform the inverter function.
A "rotary-inverter function" is obtained.
These UPSs in fact combine a motor and a generator with a highly simplified static
inverter.
The inverter filters out utility-power disturbances and regulates only the frequency of
its output voltage (generally in "square-wave" form) which supplies a regulated
motor/generator set that is sometimes combined with a flywheel.
The motor/generator set generates an output voltage sine-wave, taking the inverter
output frequency as the reference.
Fig. 5.2. Static and rotary UPSs.
Comparison
Rotary solution
The arguments often put forward in favour of this solution are as follows:
 High generator short-circuit current on the order of 10 In (ten times the rated
current) that makes setting of protection devices easier,
 150% overload capacity (of the rated current) over a longer period (two minutes
instead of one),
 Downstream installation galvanically isolated from upstream AC source due to the
motor/generator set,
 Internal impedance providing high tolerance to the non-linear loads frequently
encountered with the switch-mode power supplies used by computer systems.
07/2016 edition p. 108

Types of UPSs (Cont.)
Static solution
Compared to the advantages of rotary solutions
The static UPSs from Schneider Electric offer the advantages listed below.
 Operation in current-limiting mode (e.g. up to 2.33 In for MGE Galaxy 5000) with
discrimination ensured for circuits rated up to In/2.
These features, which are more than sufficient in practice, prevent the disadvantages
of rotary systems:
- overheating of cables,
- the effects of an excessive short-circuit current and the corresponding voltage drop
on sensitive devices, during the time taken by protective devices to clear the fault.
 150% overload capacity (of the rated current) for one minute.
The two-minute overload capacity is of no practical use because most overloads are
very short (less than one second, e.g. in-rush currents of motors, transformers and
power electronics).
 Galvanic isolation, when required, by means of an isolating transformer.
 Double-conversion operation which completely isolates the load from utility power
and regenerates the output voltage with precise regulation of the voltage amplitude
and the frequency.
 Very low internal impedance for higher performance with non-linear loads due to
the use of power-transistor technologies.
Other advantages
 Static solutions provide many other advantages as well, due to power-transistor
technology combined with a PWM chopping technique.
 Simplified overall design, with a reduction in the number of parts and connections,
and in the number of possible causes of failure.
 Capacity to react instantaneously to utility-power amplitude and frequency
fluctuations by means of microprocessor-controlled switching regulation based on
digital sampling techniques. The voltage amplitude returns to regulated conditions (±
0.5% or ± 1% depending on the model) in less than 10 milliseconds for load step
changes up to 100%. Within the indicated time interval, such a load step change
produces a load voltage variation of less than for example ± 2% for MGE Galaxy
5500 and Galaxy VM.
 High, constant efficiency whatever the percent load, which is a major advantage
for redundant UPS units with low percent loads. A static UPS unit with a 50% load
maintains high efficiency (94% to 96,5%), whereas the efficiency of a rotary UPS
drops to the 88-90% range (typical value), which directly impacts on operating costs.
 Redundant configurations providing high availability in the framework of ultra-
reliable supply systems (e.g. for data centres).
 Possible integration in redundant architectures with separate functions that
facilitate maintenance by isolating parts of the installation.
Rotary systems integrate the UPS, the backup power and the generator as a single
component, thus making it impossible to separate the functions.
 No single points of failure. Rotary systems incorporating flywheels depend on the
capacity of the motor to start quickly (typically in less than 12 seconds). This means
the motor must be in perfect condition and rigorously maintained. If it does not start,
there is no time to shut down the critical loads in an orderly manner.
 Consider also the following non-negligible advantages:
 reduced dimensions and weight,
 no wear on rotating parts, hence easier and faster maintenance. For example,
rotary systems require checks on the alignment of the rotating parts and the
replacement of the bearings after 2 to 6 years is a major operation (lifting equipment,
heating and cooling of the bearings during the replacement).
Conclusion
Given the advantages presented above, static UPSs are used in the vast majority of
cases, and for high-power applications in particular.
 In the following pages, the term uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is taken to
mean the static solution.
07/2016 edition p. 109

Types of static UPSs Standards

UPSs
Due to the vast increase in the number of sensitive loads, the term "UPS" now
includes devices ranging from a few hundred VA for desktop computers up to several
MVA for data centres and telecommunications sites.
At the same time, different typologies have been developed and the names used for
the products on the market are not always clear (or even misleading) for end users.
That is why the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) established
standards governing the types of UPSs and the techniques used to measure their
performance levels, and those criteria were adopted by Cenelec (European
standardisation commission).
Standard IEC 62040-3 and its European equivalent EN 62040-3 define three
standard types (topologies) of UPS and their performance levels.
UPS technologies include:
● Passive standby,
● Line interactive,
● Double conversion.
AC input power
These definitions concern UPS operation with respect to the power source including
the distribution system upstream of the UPS.
The standards define the following terms:
 Primary power: power normally continuously available which is usually supplied
by an electrical utility company, but sometimes by the user's own generation,
 Standby power: power intended to replace the primary power in the event of
primary-power failure,
Practically speaking, a UPS has one or two inputs:
 Normal AC input (or Mains 1), supplied by primary power,
 Bypass AC input (or Mains 2), supplied by standby power (generally speaking via
a separate cable from the same main low-voltage switchboard (MLVS).
UPS operating in passive-standby mode
 The UPS is installed in parallel to the utility and backs it up. The battery is
charged by a charger that is separate from the inverter.
Operating principle
 Normal mode
- The inverter operates in passive standby mode.
- The load is supplied by utility power via a filter which eliminates certain
disturbances and provides some degree of voltage regulation.
- The standards do not mention this filter and speak simply of a "UPS switch". They
also indicate that "additional devices may be incorporated to provide power
conditioning, e.g. ferroresonant transformer or automatic tap-changing transformer".
 Battery backup mode
- When the AC input voltage is outside specified tolerances for the UPS or the utility
power fails, the inverter and the battery step in to ensure a continuous supply of
power to the load following a very short transfer time (generally less than 10 ms).
The standards do not stipulate a time, but do indicate that "the load [is] transferred to
the inverter directly or via the UPS switch (which may be electronic or
electromechanical)".
- The UPS continues to operate on battery power until the end of battery backup time
or utility power returns to normal, which provokes transfer of the load back to the AC
input (normal mode).
07/2016 edition p. 110

Fig. 5.3. UPS operating in passive-standby mode.
Advantages
 Simple diagram.
 Reduced cost.
Disadvantages
 No real isolation of the load with respect to the upstream distribution system.
 Transfer time. It operates without a real static switch, so a certain time is required
to transfer the load to the inverter. This time is acceptable for certain individual
applications, but incompatible with the performance required by more sophisticated,
sensitive systems (large computer centres, telephone exchanges, etc.).
 No regulation of the output frequency, which is simply that of the utility power.
Usage
This configuration is in fact a compromise between an acceptable level of protection
against disturbances and cost.
The mentioned disadvantages mean that, practically speaking, this type of UPS can
be used only for low power ratings (< 2 kVA) and cannot be used as a frequency
converter.
UPS operating in line-interactive mode
 The inverter is connected in parallel with the AC input in a standby

configuration, and also charges the battery. It thus interacts (reversible operation)
with the AC-input source.
Operating principle
 Normal mode
The load is supplied with conditioned power via a parallel connection of the AC input
and the inverter. As long as the utility power is within tolerances, the inverter
regulates fluctuations in the input voltage. Otherwise (reversible operation), it
charges the battery. The output frequency depends on the AC-input frequency.
- When the AC input voltage is outside specified tolerances for the UPS or the utility
power to the load. The power switch (e.g. static switch) also disconnects the AC
input to prevent power from the inverter from flowing upstream.
07/2016 edition p. 111

 Bypass mode
This type of UPS may be equipped with a bypass. If one of the UPS functions fails,
the load can be transferred to the bypass AC input via the maintenance bypass.
Fig. 5.4. UPS operating in line-interactive mode.
Advantages
 The cost can be less than that for a double-conversion UPS with an equivalent
power rating because the inverter does not operate continuously.
Disadvantages
 No real isolation of the load with respect to the upstream distribution system, thus:
- sensitivity to variations in the utility voltage and frequent demands placed on the
inverter,
- influence of downstream non-linear loads on the upstream input voltage.
 No regulation of the output frequency, which is simply that of the utility power.
 Mediocre conditioning of the output voltage because the inverter is not installed in
series with the AC input. The standard speaks of "conditioned power" given the
parallel connection of the AC input and the inverter. Conditioning is, however, limited
by the sensitivity to upstream and downstream voltage fluctuations and the reversible
operating mode of the inverter.
 Efficiency depends on:
- the type of load. With non-linear loads, the current drawn comprises harmonics that
alter the fundamental. The harmonic currents are supplied by the reversible inverter
which regulates the voltage and efficiency is sharply reduced.
- the percent load. The power required to charge the battery becomes increasingly
significant as the percent load decreases.
 A single point of failure exists due to the absence of a static bypass, i.e. if a
malfunction occurs, the UPS shuts down.
Usage
This configuration is not well suited to regulation of sensitive loads in the medium to
high-power range because frequency regulation is not possible. For this reason, it
is rarely used other than for low power ratings.
07/2016 edition p. 112

Double-conversion UPSs
 The inverter is connected in series between the AC input and the application.
The power supplied to the load continuously flows through the inverter.
Operating principle : double-conversion

 Normal mode
During normal operation, all the power supplied to the load passes through the
rectifier/charger and inverter which together perform a double conversion (AC-DC-
AC), hence the name. The voltage is continuously regenerated and regulated.
- When the AC-input voltage is outside specified tolerances for the UPS or the utility
power to the load.
 Bypass mode
This type of UPS comprises a static bypass (sometimes called a static switch) that
ensures no-break transfer of the load from the inverter to direct utility power and
back.
The load is transferred to the static bypass in the event of the following:
- UPS failure,
- load-current transients (inrush or fault currents),
- overloads,
- end of battery backup time.
The presence of a static bypass assumes that the input and output frequencies are
identical, which means it cannot be used as a frequency converter. If the voltage
levels are not the same, a bypass transformer is required.
The UPS is synchronised with the bypass AC input to ensure no-break transfers from
the inverter to the bypass line.
Note. Another bypass line, often called the maintenance bypass, is available for
maintenance purposes. It is closed by a manual switch.
Fig. 5.5. Double-conversion UPSs, normal mode.
07/2016 edition p. 113

Advantages
 Complete regeneration of the output power, whether it comes from the utility or the
battery.
 Total isolation of the load from the distribution system and its disturbances.
 Very wide input-voltage range, yet precise regulation of the output voltage.
 Independence of the input and output frequencies, thus ensuring an output
frequency within strict tolerances. Capacity to operate as a frequency converter (if
planned as such), by disabling the static switch.
 Much higher performance levels under steady-state and transient conditions.
 Instantaneous shift to battery backup mode if utility power fails.
 No-break transfer to a bypass line (bypass mode).
 Manual bypass (generally standard) to facilitate maintenance.
Disadvantages
 Higher price, but compensated by the many advantages.
Usage
This configuration is the most complete in terms of load protection, regulation
possibilities and performance levels. It notably ensures independence of the output
voltage and frequency with respect to the input voltage and frequency.
Its many advantages mean that it is virtually the only configuration used for
medium and high power ratings (from 10 kVA upwards).
Operating principle : ECOnversion

Unique to the market patented ECOnversion, based on several patents from Schneider Electric, brings both advantages of
Double Conversion (voltage quality) and interaction with the distribution system. High efficiency is met by still keepingload in safe
area thanks to the zero transfer time downstream the UPS (Class 1 output voltage as per 62040-3). Active harmonic filtering
brings also insurance to the customer that no pollution is brought upstream the UPS when supplying very disturbant loads.
Fig. 5.5. Double-conversion UPSs, normal mode.

Advantages
 Complete harmonic compensation, unity power factor upstream AC Bypass
branch.
 Load voltage quality is kept within Class 1 limits (according to 62040-3).
 Inverter is kept on for both harmonic mitigation and battery charging
 Thanks to this, no break during transfer from ECOnversion to battery operation in
case of voltage drop or any upstream event
 Very high efficiency, up to 99%
Disadvantages
 Higher price, but compensated by the many advantages, mainly the very high
efficiency with guaranteed voltage quality
Usage
This configuration is the most advanced for customers looking for very high efficiency
without sacrifying the power quality downstream. It can be used in many
applications, knowing the most important usage can be in the Data Centre area, in a
mix use for example (in a 2N configuration, 1 branch can operate in double
conversion and the other branch in ECOnversion
Operating principle : Smart Power Test SPoT
This mode of operation allows to power test the UPS, without the need of connecting a load bank.
Each component of the UPS will be tested during this operation :
PFC
07/2016 edition p. 114
Inverter
Static bypass switch
Battery charger
Fig. 5.5. Smart Power Test operation, PFC/Inverter/Static Bypass test.
Fig. 5.5. Smart Power Test operation, Charger test.
Advantages
 Power test the UPS, at the commissioning, after a maintenance or after a break fix.
 No need of a reserve for a breaker to connect a load bank in the customer
switchgear.
 Can be done of both single units and parallel systems.
Disadvantages
 During this test, the load is supplied directly from the utility
 Smart Power Test, see Application Note AN188 on Galaxy VM homepage
07/2016 edition p. 115

Conclusion
Double-conversion UPSs represent the vast majority of the medium to high-
power systems sold (95% starting from a few kVA and 98% for 10 kVA and higher).
This is due to their numerous strong points in meeting the needs of sensitive loads
at these power ratings and is largely the result of the inverter positioned in series
with the AC input.
What is more, they have very few weak points except their high cost that is
required to offer a level of performance that is often indispensable given the critical
nature of the protected loads. A further weak point is slightly higher losses (a few
percent).
In the power ranges under consideration, the other technologies are marginal, in
spite of a significantly lower cost.
They have the disadvantages listed below.
 No voltage regulation for passive-standby UPSs.
 No frequency regulation for passive-standby UPSs and line-interactive UPSs.
 Mediocre isolation (often a surge arrestor) from the AC input due to the parallel
configuration of the inverter.
Conclusion
 For low power ratings (< 2 kVA), the three standardised technologies
coexist.
It is the cost effectiveness of the protection functions with respect to the
requirements of the loads and the risks run (for people, production, etc.) that
determines selection of one of the three typologies.
 Double-conversion UPSs are used almost exclusively for higher ratings.
07/2016 edition p. 116

The delta conversion on-line UPSs

This UPS design, illustrated in Figure 5.6, is a newer, 10 year old technology
introduced to eliminate the drawbacks of the double conversion on-line design and is
available in sizes ranging from 5 kVA to 1.6 MW. Similar to the double conversion
on-line design, the delta conversion on-line UPS always has the inverter supplying
the load voltage. However, the additional delta converter also contributes power to
the inverter output. Under conditions of AC failure or disturbances, this design
exhibits behavior identical to the double conversion on-line.
STATIC BYPASS
SWITCH
DELTA
TRANSFORMER
AC AC
DC DC
DELTA MAIN
CONVERTER INVERTER
BATTERY
Figure 5.6: Delta conversion on-line UPS
A simple way to understand the energy efficiency of the delta conversion topology is
to consider the energy required to deliver a package from the 4th floor to the 5th floor
of a building as shown in Figure 5.7. Delta conversion technology saves energy by
carrying the package only the difference (delta) between the starting and ending
points. The double conversion on-line UPS converts the power to the battery and
back again whereas the delta converter moves components of the power from input
to the output.
DOUBLE CONVERSION DELTA CONVERSION
X 5th
Floor
X 5th
Floor
4th 4th
Floor Floor
Figure 5.7: Analogy of double conversion vs. Delta conversion
07/2016 edition p. 117

In the delta conversion on-line design, the delta converter acts with dual purposes.
The first is to control the input power characteristics. This active front end draws
power in a sinusoidal manner, minimizing harmonics reflected onto the utility. This
ensures optimal utility and generator system compatibility, reducing heating and
system wear in the power distribution system. The second function of the delta
converter is to control input current in order to regulate charging of the battery
system.
The delta conversion on-line UPS provides the same output characteristics as the
double conversion on-line design. However, the input characteristics are often
different. Delta conversion on-line designs provide dynamically-controlled, power
factor corrected input, without the inefficient use of filter banks associated with
traditional solutions. The most important benefit is a significant reduction in energy
losses. The input power control also makes the UPS compatible with all generator
sets and reduces the need for wiring and generator over sizing. Delta conversion on-
line technology is the only core UPS technology today protected by patents and is
therefore not likely to be available from a broad range of UPS suppliers.
During steady state conditions the delta converter allows the UPS to deliver power to
the load with much greater efficiency than the double conversion design.
07/2016 edition p. 118

UPS components and operation
Components of a UPS The information presented below concerns double-conversion UPSs, the
technology most commonly used by Schneider Electric for power ratings greater than
10 kVA.
General diagram of a UPS

The various items in the diagram below have been assigned numbers that
correspond to the sections on the following pages.
Fig. 5.6. Components of a UPS.
Power sources and UPS inputs

Practically speaking, a UPS has one or two inputs:
 Normal AC input (or Mains 1), supplied by primary power,
 Bypass AC input (or Mains 2), supplied by standby power (generally speaking via
a separate cable from the same main low-voltage switchboard (MLVS).
 AC sources, see p. 9.
UPS connection to both the primary and standby-power sources (UPS inputs
supplied by two separate circuits from the MLVS) is recommended because overall
system reliability is increased. However, if two separate circuits from the MLVS are
not available, it is possible to have both AC inputs (normal and bypass) supplied by
primary power (second cable).
Management of transfers between the two input lines is organised as follows.
 The UPS synchronises the inverter output voltage with that of the bypass line as
long as the latter is within tolerances. It is thus possible, if necessary, for the static
switch to transfer the load to the bypass AC input, without a break (because the two
voltages are synchronised and in phase) or disturbances (because the standby
power is within tolerances) for the load.
 When standby power is not within tolerances, the inverter desynchronises and
transfer is disabled. It can, however, by carried out manually.
07/2016 edition p. 119
UPS components and operation (Cont.)
Components of a UPS
Rectifier/charger (1)
Transforms the AC power from the primary-power source into DC voltage and
current used to:
 Supply the inverter,
 Charge and float charge the battery.
Inverter (2)
Using the DC power supplied by the:
 Rectifier during normal operation,
 Battery during autonomous operation,
the inverter completely regenerates a sinusoidal output signal, within strict amplitude
and frequency tolerances.
Battery (3)
Makes the UPS autonomous with respect to the utility in the event of:
 A utility outage,
 Utility-power characteristics outside specified tolerances for the UPS.
Battery backup times range from 6 to 30 minutes as standard and can be extended
on request. Depending on the duration of the backup time, the battery is housed in
the UPS cabinet or in a separate cabinet.
Static bypass (4)

A static switch is used to transfer the load from the inverter to the bypass without any
interruption* in the supply of power to the load (no break because the transfer is
performed by electronic rather than mechanical components). The switch is possible
when the frequencies upstream and downstream of the UPS are identical.
Transfer takes place automatically for any of the following reasons:
 Voluntary shutdown of the UPS,
 An overload exceeding the limiting capacity of the inverter (this transfer can be
disabled),
 An internal fault.
It can also be carried out manually.
* No-break transfer is possible when the voltages at the inverter output and on the bypass AC
input are synchronised. The UPS maintains synchronisation as long as the standby power is
within tolerances.
Manual bypass (5)

A manual switch is used to transfer the load to the bypass for maintenance
purposes. The switch is possible when the frequencies upstream and downstream of
the UPS are identical.
The shift to manual-bypass mode is carried out using manual switches.
Manual switches and/or backfeed protection (6, 7, 8)

These devices isolate the rectifier/charger and inverter modules and/or the bypass
line for servicing or maintenance.
In addition to this, for safety reasons and to comply with 62040-3 standard, backfeed
protection is embedded in standard in all Schneider Electric UPSs.
Battery circuit breaker (9)

The battery circuit breaker protects the battery against excessive discharge, and the
rectifier/charger and inverter against a battery short-circuit.
Upstream isolating transformer (10)

(optional equipment)
Provides UPS input/output isolation when the downstream installation is supplied via
the bypass.
It is particularly useful when the upstream and downstream system earthing
arrangements are different. May be installed in the UPS cabinet in the MGE Galaxy
PW range.
Voltage-matching transformer (11)

Adapts the voltage to the desired value.
07/2016 edition p. 120

Filters (12)
 All UPSs of the Schneider Electric Galaxy and Symmetra ranges are equipped
with a PFC-type rectifier that eliminates the need for a filter (see ―Key factors in
UPS installation” p. 27).
 Downstream, UPSs implementing new PWM-chopping techniques may be directly
connected to non-linear loads. This technique makes it possible for UPSs from
Schneider Electric to maintain the THDU below 3%.
Built-in communication (13) (14)

In addition to the need for a user-friendly human/machine interface for effective
monitoring of UPS operation, it is today increasingly important for UPSs to
communicate with their electrical and computing environment (supervision systems,
building management systems (BMS), computer management systems, etc.).
UPSs from Schneider Electric are designed with built-in capacity for total
communication and include:
 A user-friendly human/machine interface (HMI) with an advanced graphic display
and mimic panel. The interface is built up around self-monitoring and self-diagnostic
systems that continuously indicate the status of the various UPS components, in
particular the batteries.
For example, for the MGE Galaxy ranges:
- the Digibat system continuously monitors the status of the battery with full battery
management features,
- the B2000 or Cellwatch battery-monitoring system immediately detects and locates
battery faults and provides predictive monitoring.
For the Symmetra ranges:
- The rack-mountable (1U) APC battery management system, accessible via a web
browser, combines battery monitoring and testing with individual boost charging for
peak battery performance.
 A large selection of communication cards compatible with market standards:
- Network Management Card (Ethernet)
- Modbus – Jbus card (RS232 & RS485)
- Relay card (dry contacts) for indications
- Teleservice modem card
These cards can be used to implement supervision, notification, controlled shutdown
and Teleservice functions.
 Human-machine interface and Communication: see “Key factors in UPS
installation” p. 51.
Upstream and/or downstream distribution and protection devices (15) (16)

The UPS can be supplied with the following equipment:
 Upstream LV circuit-breakers for the AC inputs (normal and bypass),
 Upstream LV switchboard with circuit-breaker protection for the AC inputs (normal
and bypass),
 Downstream LV switchboard with circuit-breaker protection for the different
outgoing circuits.
Schneider Electric can offer a selection of UPSs and protection devices that are
perfectly coordinated in terms of ratings and performance.
Complete solutions
Schneider Electric can provide complete solutions comprising all the components
listed above, including air-conditioning solutions for data centers, in conjunction with
Schneider Electric. For users, the result is a single partner and an installation that
offers optimum performance and reliability.
07/2016 edition p. 121

Main characteristics of UPS These characteristics are based on the main technical specifications presented in the
IEC 62040-3 / EN 62040-3 standards on UPS performance requirements.
components Certain terms used here differ from the common jargon and a number of new
features have not yet been assimilated by manufacturers. New terms or
characteristics used by the standard are indicated between parentheses and
preceded by an asterisk.
For example, the title of a section "input current during battery float charging", a
commonly used term, is followed by (*rated input current), the term used in the
standard.
Note that a number of numerical values are indicated as examples.
They are, for the most part, drawn from the technical characteristics of the
corresponding UPSs or indicated simply for the purposes of the example.
AC input power
Number of phases and system earthing arrangement
The AC-input supply (primary power) is three-phase + neutral. Single-phase inputs
are not used for the power levels dealt with here.
The system earthing arrangement is generally imposed by standards (IT, TT, TNS or
TNC).
Normal AC input
The normal AC input is supplied with utility power for the rectifier/charger, within the
specified tolerances.
 Example: 400 V rms ± 15% at a frequency of 50 or 60 Hz ± 5%, three-phase.
Bypass AC input
The bypass AC input is supplied with standby power. Practically speaking, this a
cable connected to a utility feeder in the MLVS other than the one supplying the
normal AC input.
In general, it supplies voltage with the same characteristics as that of the primary
power.
 Example: 400 V rms ± 15% at a frequency of 50 or 60 Hz ± 5%, and a short-circuit
current Isc2 = 12.5 kA. The short-circuit current is important information for the
downstream protection devices in the event of operation via the static or
maintenance bypass.
Supply of separate primary and standby power is recommended because it
increases overall system reliability, but is not mandatory. However, if two separate
circuits from the MLVS are not available, it is possible to have both AC inputs
(normal and bypass) supplied by primary power (second cable).
Rectifier/charger
Floating voltage
This is the voltage supplied by the rectifier/charger which keeps the battery fully
charged.
It depends on the batteries used and the manufacturer's recommendations.
Input current during battery float charging (* rated input current)

This is the current, under normal operating conditions, required to supply the inverter
at its rated power while float charging the battery.
 Example: for a 100 kVA MGE Galaxy 5500 with a battery backup time of 10
minutes, this current is I input float = 166 A while float charging the battery.
Input current during battery charging

This corresponds to the current required to supply the inverter at its rated power
while charging the battery. It is consequently higher than the previous current and is
used to size the charger input cables.
 Example: for the same UPS as above, the input current is I input float = 182 A, i.e.
higher than above because it is necessary to charge the battery.
07/2016 edition p. 122

Maximum input current

This is the input current with the UPS operating under worst-case conditions of
permitted overload, with the battery discharged. It is higher than the above input
current during battery charging (due to the overload current) but is limited in time (as
is the overload).
 Example: for the same UPS as above, the MGE Galaxy 5500 can accept a 25%
overload for ten minutes and a 50% overload for one minute. In the worst-case
situation with the battery charging, the input current can reach:
I input max. = 182 A x 1.25 = 227.5 A for ten minutes,
I input max. = 182 A x 1.5 = 273 A for one minute.
Beyond the above limits, the UPS initiates no-break transfer of the load to the bypass
line and automatically transfers back when the overload has ended or been cleared
by the corresponding protection devices.
Battery (* energy storage means)

Type
A battery is characterised by its type (vented or sealed lead acid, lithium-ion or
nickel/cadmium) and how it is installed. Schneider Electric proposes both sealed
lead-acid or lithium-ion batteries, mounted in cabinets.
Service life
This is defined as the operating period, under normal usage conditions, for which the
battery supplies at least 50% of the initial backup time.
 For example, Galaxy VM is supplied as standard with sealed lead-acid batteries
with a service life of ten years or more. This type of battery, rated for 5 to 30 minutes
of backup time, will contractually supply less than 5 to 30 minutes at the end of the
specified service life. This is defined at the specification by ―15 minutes end of life‖,
and this is according to Eurobat.
It may supply more if it has been used under optimum conditions (notably concerning
the temperature). However, it is contractually guaranteed not to supply less, unless
used improperly.
Operating modes
The battery may be:
 Charging. It draws a charge current (I1 charge) supplied by the rectifier/charger.
 Float charging. The battery draws a low, so-called floating current (I1 floating),
supplied by the rectifier/charger, which maintains its charge by compensating for
open-circuit losses.
 Discharging. The battery supplies the inverter until its shutdown voltage is
reached.
When this voltage, set by the battery manufacturer, is reached, the battery is
automatically disconnected (UPSs from Schneider Electric) to avoid damage by deep
discharge.
Rated voltage
This is the DC output voltage that the battery supplies to the Charger (buck/boost).
 Example: 500 V DC for the Galaxy VM range.
Capacity
Battery capacity is expressed in ampere/hours.
 Example: for a 160 kVA Galaxy VM equipped with a battery offering ten minutes
of backup time and a service life of five years, the capacity is 100 A/h.
Number of cells
Number of single battery cells making up the entire battery string.
 Example: the battery of a 160 kVA Galaxy VM comprises, for a given type of
battery, 40 cells providing 13.6 V each, for a backup time of ten minutes.
Floating voltage
This is the DC voltage used to maintain the battery charge, supplied by the charger.
 Example: for Galaxy VM, the floating voltage is 540 V DC.
07/2016 edition p. 123

Backup time (* stored energy time)

This is the time, specified at the beginning of the battery service life, that the battery
can supply the inverter operating at full rated load, in the absence of the AC-input
supply.
 Example: Galaxy VM offers as standard backup times of 5, 10, 15, and 30
minutes.
This time depends on the UPS percent load.
 For a UPS operating at full rated load (100% of rated power), the end of the battery
backup time is reached when the battery voltage drops to the shutdown voltage
specified by the manufacturer. This provokes automatic shutdown of UPSs from
Schneider Electric.
 For a UPS operating at a lower percent load (e.g. 75%), the actual backup time
may be longer. However, it always ends when the battery shutdown voltage is
reached.
Recharge time (* rated restored energy time)

This is the time required by the battery to recover 80% of its backup time (90% of its
capacity), starting from the battery shutdown voltage. The rectifier/charger supplies
the power.
 Example: for a Galaxy VM UPS, the recharge time is six to eight hours, depending
on the battery and the backup time. Note that the probability of the battery being
called on to supply power twice within such a short period is low. This means the
indicated recharge time is representative of actual performance.
Maximum battery current (Ib)

When discharging, the battery supplies the inverter with a current Ib which reaches
its maximum value at the end of discharging. This value determines battery
protection and cable dimensions.
 Example: for a 100 kVA MGE Galaxy 5500, this current is Ib max = 257 A.
Inverter
Rated power (Sn)
(* rated output apparent power)
This is the maximum apparent power Sn (kVA) that the inverter can deliver to a
linear load at a power factor of 0.8, during normal operation under steady-state
conditions.
The standards also define this parameter for operation on battery power.
Theoretically speaking, it is the same if the battery is correctly sized.
 Example: a MGE Galaxy 5500 with a rated power (Sn) of 100 kVA.
Active output power (Pa)

(* rated output active power for linear or reference non-linear load)
This is the active power Pa (kW) corresponding to the apparent output power Sn
(kVA), under the measurement conditions mentioned above. This value may also be
indicated for a standardised reference non-linear load.
 Example: the previous UPS, a MGE Galaxy 5500 with a rated power of 100 kVA
supplies an active power of Pa = Sn x 0.9 = 90 kW.
Rated current (In)

This is the current corresponding to the rated power.
 Example: again for a 100 kVA MGE Galaxy 5500 UPS and an output voltage of
400 V, this current is:
Sn 100000
In  = = 144.3 A
Un 3 400 x 1732
,
07/2016 edition p. 124

Apparent load power (Su) and percent load

This is the apparent power Sn (kVA) actually supplied by the inverter to the load,
under the selected operating conditions.
This value is a fraction of the rated power, depending on the percent load.
.Su  Sn. and .Tc = Percent load (%) = Su / Sn..
 Example: for the UPS mentioned above, if the inverter supplies 3/4 of its rated
power (75% load), it delivers an apparent power of 75 kVA, which under standard
operating conditions (PF = 0.8) corresponds to an active load power of
Pa = Su x PF = 75 x 0.8 = 60 kW.
Load current (Iu)

This is the current corresponding to the load power, that is, to the percent load in
question. It is calculated from Pu as for the rated current, where the voltage is the
rated voltage Un (value regulated by the inverter).
 Example: for the UPS mentioned above (75% load)
Su 75000
Iu  = = 108.2 A
Un 3 400 x 1732
,
which is the same as:
.Iu = In x Tc. = 144.3 x 0.75 = 108.2 A
Efficiency ()
This is the ratio of active power Pu (kW) supplied by the UPS to the load to the
power Pin (kW) that it draws at its input, either by the rectifier or from the battery.
.= Pu / Pin.
For most UPSs, efficiency is optimum at full rated load and drops sharply with lower
percent loads.
Due to their low output impedance and no-load losses, the efficiency of Galaxy V
series UPSs is virtually stable for loads from 25 to 100%. The Galaxy V series range
offers efficiency greater than 95% starting at 25% load, up to 96,5% at full rated load,
as well as in ECOnversion mode which increases efficiency up to 99%.
Practically speaking, for Galaxy V series UPSs, an efficiency value of 95,5% can be
used for all input-power calculations for loads from 30 to 100%.
Output voltage Un
Number of phases
The output can be three-phase (3ph-3ph UPS) or single-phase (3ph-1ph UPS),
depending on the situation. Note that the upstream and downstream system earthing
arrangements may be different.
Rated output voltage

In general, it is the same as that of the AC input. However, a voltage-matching
transformer may be installed.
Static characteristics
These are the tolerances (maximum permissible variations) for the amplitude and
frequency of the output voltage under steady-state conditions. Stricter than those
applying to utility power, they are measured for normal operation on AC-input power
and for operation in battery backup mode.
 Output voltage variation
The amplitude tolerance is expressed as a percentage of the nominal rms value and
may be adjustable.
 Example: for a MGE Galaxy, the voltage 400 V rms ± 1% may be adjusted to ±
3%.
The standards also stipulate a rated peak output voltage and the tolerance with
respect to the rated value.
 Output frequency variation
The tolerance is expressed as a percentage of the rated frequency.
 Example: for a Galaxy, 50 or 60 Hz ± 0.1% during normal operation on primary
power and ± 0.5% in battery backup mode.
07/2016 edition p. 125

Frequency synchronisation with primary power

The inverter supplies an output voltage within the above tolerances, regardless of
the disturbances affecting the upstream power.
To that end, the UPS:
 Monitors the voltage parameters (amplitude, frequency, phase) for the primary-
power source to determine whether they are within specified tolerances,
 Reacts to any drift in parameters so as to:
- readjust the inverter (phase and frequency) to the standby power, as long as the
drift remains within tolerances, in view of load transfer, if necessary,
- transfer the load to battery power as soon as the drift goes outside tolerances.
The new IGBT and PWM chopping technologies used in UPSs from Schneider
Electric allow an excellent adaptation to these variations.
 Example: for MGE Galaxy UPSs, the maximum variation in frequency
corresponding to the tolerance is 50 Hz x 0.5% = 0.25 Hz.
Frequency synchronisation with bypass AC power is possible from 0.25 to 2 Hz, in
0.25 Hz steps. Practically speaking, this signifies that frequency variations may be
monitored at dF/dt = 0.25 Hz/s and readjustment carried out within 0.25 to 1 second.
Dynamic characteristics
These are the tolerances under transient load conditions.
Galaxy UPSs are capable of withstanding the following conditions.
 Load unbalance
For unbalance in the load voltage (phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase) of:
- 30%, the output voltage variation is less than 0.1%,
- 100% (one phase at Pn and the others at 0), the output voltage does not vary more
than 0.2%.
 Load step changes (voltage transients)
For load steps from 0 to 100% or from 100 to 0% of the rated load, the voltage does
not vary more than:
± 2% on utility power;
+ 2% to -4 % on battery power.
Overload and short-circuit capacity

 Overloads
- 1.1 In for 2 hours,
- 1.5 In for 1 minute,
with no change in the output tolerances.
 Short-circuits
Beyond 1.65 In, Galaxy inverters operate in current-limiting mode up to 2.33 In for 1
second, corresponding to:
I peak max. = 2 x 1.65 In = 2.33 In.
Beyond this value, the inverter transfers the load to standby power or performs a
static shutdown (self-protection feature).
Total output-voltage distortion

UPSs must guarantee performance levels for all types of loads, including non-linear
loads.
 Example: Galaxy UPSs limit the voltage total harmonic distortion (THDU) in output
power to the following levels for:
 100% linear loads:
- THDU ph/ph < 1.5 %,
- THDU ph/N < 2%,
 100% non-linear loads:
- THDU ph/ph < 2 %,
- THDU ph/N < 3%.
MGE Galaxy UPSs operate in compliance with the specified characteristics for all
types of loads.
General note. The standard specifies certain of the previously mentioned

performance levels for output power during normal operation and operation on
battery power. In general, they are identical.
07/2016 edition p. 126

Summary diagram for main

characteristics
Fig. 5.7. Diagram showing the main characteristics (see the list below).
Normal AC input
● Voltage Un + 10% to - 15%
● Frequency f + 4% to - 6%
Bypass AC input
● Voltage Un + 10% to - 15%
● Frequency f + 4% to - 6%
● Short-circuit current Isc2 (withstand capacity of the static bypass)
Rectifier/charger
● Floating voltage
● Input currents
- rated (battery float charging)
- maximum (battery charging)
Battery
● Backup time: standard 5, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes, longer times on request)
● Service life: 10 years or longer
● Maximum current Ib max.
Inverter
● Apparent output power:
- rated: Sn (kVA)
- load power: Su (kVA) = Sn x Tc%
● UPS percent load Tc% = Su / Sn
● Active output power:
- rated: Pn (kW) = Sn (kVA) x 0.8
- load power: Pu (kW) = Su (kVA) x PF = Sn x Tc% x PF = Un Iu PF
● Efficiency:  Pu / Pn = 93% (97% in ECO mode).
● Static characteristics (output-voltage tolerances under steady-state conditions)
- amplitude: Un ± 1% adjustable to ± 3%
- frequency: f ± 1% during normal operation, f ± 0.5% in battery backup mode
- inverter output voltage synchronised (frequency and phase) with that of the standby
power as long as the latter is within tolerances.
● Dynamic characteristics (tolerances under transient conditions)
- maximum voltage and frequency variations for load step changes from 0% to 100%
or 100% to 0%: Un ± 2%, f ± 0.5%
● Output voltage distortion
- 100% non-linear loads THDU < 2%
● Overload and short circuit capacity:
- overloads: 1.5 In for 1 minute
- short-circuits: current limiting to 2.33 In for 1 second
Load
● Load current (Iu)
● Power factor PF
07/2016 edition p. 127

UPS operating modes Normal mode (on utility power, see fig. 5.8 on left-hand side)
The UPS draws the AC utility power required to operate via the rectifier/charger
which provides DC current.
Part of the utility power drawn is used to charge or float charge the battery:
 I1 floating, if the battery is already fully charged,
 I1 charge if the battery is not fully charged (i.e. charging following a recent
discharge).
The remaining current is supplied to the inverter with generates an output-voltage
sine-wave within the specified amplitude and frequency tolerances.
Battery backup mode (on battery power, see fig. 5.8 on right-hand side)
The battery steps in to replace primary power and supplies the power required by the
inverter for the load, with the same tolerances as in normal mode.
This takes place through immediate transfer (the battery is parallel connected) in the
event of:
 Normal AC-input failure (utility-power outage),
 Normal AC input outside tolerances (degradation of utility-power voltage).
Normal mode. Battery backup mode.

Fig. 5.8. Normal mode and battery backup mode.
Bypass mode (on static-bypass line, see fig. 5.9 on left-hand side)
A static switch (SS) ensures no-break transfer of the load to the bypass AC input for
direct supply of the load by standby power.
Transfer is automatic in the event of:
 An overload downstream of the UPS exceeding its overload capacity,
 An internal fault in the rectifier/charger and inverter modules.
Transfer always takes place for internal faults, but otherwise is possible only if the
voltage of the standby power is within tolerances and in phase with the inverter.
To that end:
 The UPS synchronises the inverter output voltage with that of the bypass line as
long as the latter is within tolerances. Transfer is then possible:
- without a break in the supply of power. Because the voltages are in phase, the
SCRs on the two channels of the static switch have zero voltage at the same time,
- without disturbing the load. The load is transferred to a bypass line that is within
tolerances.
 When standby power is not within tolerances, the inverter desynchronises and
operates autonomously with its own frequency. Transfer is disabled.
It can, however, by carried out manually.
Note 1. This function greatly increases reliability due to the very small probability of a
downstream overload and a standby-power failure occurring at the same time.
Note 2. To ensure correct operation of the bypass line, discrimination must be
ensured between the protection device upstream of the bypass AC input (on the
MLVS outgoer) and those on the UPS outgoing circuits (see information on
discrimination below).
07/2016 edition p. 128

Maintenance mode (on maintenance bypass, see fig. 5.9 right-hand side)
Maintenance is possible without interrupting load operation. The load is supplied with
standby power via the maintenance bypass. Transfer to the maintenance bypass is
carried out using manual switches.
The rectifier/charger, inverter and static switch are shut down and isolated from
power sources. The battery is isolated by its protection circuit breaker.
Bypass mode (static bypass). Maintenance mode (maintenance bypass).

Fig. 5.9. Bypass mode and maintenance mode.
UPS configurations Parallel UPS with redundancy

Chapter two is entirely devoted to a presentation of the various configurations. Below
is some additional information on parallel connection for redundancy.
TM TM TM
It concerns MGE Galaxy UPSs in particular. The modular Symmetra UPSs
also use parallel connection.
 Configurations, see “Selection of the UPS configuration”
Types of parallel configurations

There are two types of parallel configurations.
 Integrated parallel UPS units
This upgradeable configuration can be started using a single UPS unit with an
integrated static bypass and manual maintenance bypass. For configurations with
more than two UPS units, a common maintenance bypass is housed in an external
cubicle (see fig. 5.10).
 Parallel UPS units with a centralised static-switch cubicle (SSC)
The static-switch cubicle comprises an automatic bypass and a maintenance bypass
that are common for a number of UPS units without a bypass (see fig. 5.11).
This configuration, less upgradeable than the previous due to the rating of the
bypass, offers greater reliability (SSC and UPS units are independent).
 Multiple Power Cabinet with central I/O cabinet
Several Power Cabinets (equivalent of UPS in a Parallel with CSS configuration) are
internally connected (busbars) to a central Input/Output Cabinet (I/O cabinet) which
contains Static Bypass, mechanical bypass, customer landing connections and
display.
 Modular UPSs TM
UPSs of the Symmetra range are made up of dedicated and redundant modules
(power, intelligence, battery and bypass).
Modular design with plug-in power modules improves dependability, in particular
maintainability and availability, as well the upgradeability of the installation.
07/2016 edition p. 129

Redundancy
Redundancy in parallel configurations can be N+1, N+2, etc.
This means that N UPS units are required to supply the load, but N+1 or N+2 are
installed and they all share the load.
See the example below.
07/2016 edition p. 130

Example
 Consider a critical load with a 100 kVA rating.
 2+1 redundancy
- 2 UPS units must be capable of fully supplying the load if redundancy is lost.
- Each UPS unit must therefore have a 50 kVA rating.
- 3 UPS units normally share the 100 kVA load, i.e. each supplies 33.3 kVA.
- The 3 UPS units normally operate at a percent load of 33.3 / 50 = 66.6%.
- Integrated parallel UPS units are each equipped with a static bypass. Transfer is
managed such that the three UPS units transfer to the bypass simultaneously, if
necessary.
Fig. 5.10. Integrated parallel UPS units with common maintenance bypass and 2+1 redundancy. Operation with all units OK
(redundancy available).
 Loss of redundancy
- One UPS unit shuts down, the two remaining units operate at 100%.
- The faulty UPS unit can be serviced due to the maintenance bypass.
Fig. 5.11. Integrated parallel UPS units with common maintenance bypass and 2+1 redundancy. Operation following loss of
redundancy.
07/2016 edition p. 131

Technology: Transformerless UPSs
Transformerless UPS Principle

technology
Originally all UPSs included an output transformer that was used to adjust the output
voltage to the required value, recreate a neutral and ensure galvanic isolation
between the upstream and downstream power systems (Fig. 5.12).
Today, technological progress and lower IGBT semi-conductor costs makes it
possible to eliminate this transformer (Fig. 5.13).
Normal Bypass Normal Bypass

AC input AC input AC input AC input
UPS UPS
Q1 Q1
Q4S Q4S
Rectifier Rectifier
charger charger
Battery QF1
Battery QF1
Static Manual
Static Manual bypass bypass Q3BP
bypass bypass Q3BP
Inverter
Inverter
K3N
K3N
Q5N
Q5N
Loads
Loads
Fig. 5.12. UPS with output transformer. Fig. 5.13. Transformerless UPS.
Advantages
This technology offers users a number of key advantages.
● Smaller footprint: less space required with no transformer
● Less weight: weight reduction by eliminating the transformer
● Higher efficiency: elimination of transformer losses
● Voltage regulation by signal modulation for better matching with the load. The
electronics act directly on the output voltage for a for faster and more precise voltage
regulation.
The trend
The use of transformerless UPSs began in the early 1990s for ratings up to a few
hundred kVA. Given their many advantages, they are now widely used up to higher
ratings. The average power rating using the transformerless technique has increased
by a factor of 50 over the past 15 years.
07/2016 Edition p. 132

Galvanic isolation
One of the reasons cited for using output transformers is to provide galvanic
isolation.
However, three-phase UPSs above a certain power rating are equipped with a
bypass to ensure continuity of power. The presence of a bypass means that a UPS,
with or without an output transformer, cannot provide galvanic isolation between the
source and the loads. For this reason, transformerless UPS technology is gradually
becoming the preferred solution for high ratings.
This aspect will be discussed below by comparing the use of the two technologies
depending on the system earthing arrangement encountered.
Use with computer Review of system earthing arrangements

loads
Earthing arrangements refer to the earthing of:
● the neutral point of the distribution system,
● the exposed conductive parts (ECPs) of the loads.
These ECPs are always interconnected, either all together or in groups. Each
interconnected group is connected to an earthing terminal by a protective conductor
(PE or PEN depending on whether or not it is combined with the neutral conductor or
separate).
(1)
Standard IEC 60364 uses 2 letters to identify the different earthing arrangements.
● The 1st letter describes the earthing of the transformer neutral point:
- T: earthed,
- I: not earthed.
● The 2nd letter describes the earthing of the ECPs of load equipment:
- T: earthed,
- N: connected to the neutral which is earthed.
In this case (N), a 3rd letter indicates the relationship between the neutral (N) and
protective (PE) conductors:
- C: single conductor used for both functions,
- S: separate conductors.
(1) Replaced by the Power Transformer Loading Guide IECI 60076-7 Ed. 1.
The standard thus defines the following systems:

● IT: Isolated neutral
● TT: Earthed neutral
● TN-C: Combined protective earthing and neutral conductor (PEN)
● TN-S: Separate earthed neutral (N) and protective earthing (PE) conductors.
Earthing arrangement for computer rooms

Systematic use of the TN-S system
The TN-S system is the earthing arrangement recommended by manufacturers and

standards for computer systems. This is because it provides single-phase distribution
while ensuring a reference potential for the ECPs with the protective conductor.
Phases: L1, L2, L3

Neutral: N
Protective conductor: PE
Circuit breaker pole: x
Separate N and PE
Fig. 5.15. TN-S system for computer rooms.
IT and TT systems are poorly suited to computer systems
07/2016 Edition p. 133

● The IT system requires competent operating personnel and sophisticated

insulating monitoring to locate and clear insulation faults before a second fault with a
high tripping current can cause disturbances.
07/2016 Edition p. 134

● The TT system is too sensitive to lightning overvoltages for sensitive computer

devices.
● The TN-C system(1) (combined earthed neutral and PE conductor) does not offer a
reliable reference potential like the TN-S system.
Single-phase loads, frequent in computer systems, cause H3 harmonics and their
multiples of 3 (H6, H9, etc.) in the neutral. The harmonics then flow in the PEN
conductor where they can cause:
- loss of PEN equipotentiality which spreads through the shielding and can affect
computer-system operation.
- high unbalance currents in cable ways and the building structure due to frequent
PEN connections to earth. The resulting electromagnetic radiation in the cable ways
can disturb sensitive devices.
(1)
The TN-C system may be used upstream of a TN-S system, but the contrary is not allowed
because it can result in upstream interruption of the protective conductor, thus creating a safety
hazard for people downstream.
Computer manufacturer recommendations: Recreate a network with an

earthed neutral at the entry to the computer room
Computer manufacturers recommend that the TN-S system with earthed neutral be
created as close as possible to the loads. This is generally done at the entry to the
computer room).
Use of the TN-S system without this measure, i.e. with the earthed neutral created
far upstream) can create a potential difference between earth and neutral due to the
upstream distribution.
 In conclusion, it is advised to create a TN-S system at the entry to the computer

room with the neutral earthed at this point to ensure clean and suitable electrical
distribution to the computer system.
This is generally done using PDUs (Power Distribution Units) that include an input
transformer, making it possible to obtain a reliable neutral reference potential and
ensuring galvanic isolation in all UPS operating modes (on normal AC input or
bypass).
In addition, this solution uses standard transformers that offer very high reliability,
exceeding that of UPS output transformers. This solution with an input transformers
is used widely in the USA where a 3-phase 480 V distribution system is brought to
the computer room entry to supply 480 V/208 transformer (fig. 5.16).
UPS A UPS B
. .
PDU A PDU A
Isolating
transformers
used to recreate
a TN-S system
with neutral
x x
x x
Blade server
Fig. 5.16. Example of transformers used at the PDU input to create a TN-S distribution system
with a neutral.
07/2016 Edition p. 135

Comparison for IT or TT system upstream

different upstream
In this case, the system earthing arrangement must be changed to TN-S
earthing arrangements downstream of the UPS. Because the neutral cannot have two different references to
earth, galvanic isolation is required for all UPS operating modes (normal or bypass).
● For UPSs with an output transformer, a transformer is generally added at the input
to the bypass (see fig. 5.17).
This solution has two drawbacks:
- 4-pole protection devices must be used to wire and interrupt the neutral on the
bypass,
- the distance D2 from the UPS neutral lout and the loads can affect the neutral
potential because the isolating transformers are not located near the loads.
● Transformerless UPSs from Schneider Electric can operate on 3 phases without a
neutral. This makes it possible to use a 3-phase, 3-wire distribution system up to the
PDU or equivalent and recreate the TN-S system as close as possible to the
application (see right side of fig. 5.17). This arrangement ensures a "clean" reference
potential for the PE.
 In addition to its advantages in terms of efficiency, footprint, weight and voltage

matching, transformerless technology is simple and economical.
Solution with output transformer Transformerless solution

IT or TT upstream - TN-S downstream IT or TT upstream - TN-S downstream
Fig. 5.17. IT or TT upstream and TN-S downstream.
07/2016 Edition p. 136

TN-C or TN-S system upstream
These two situations may be dealt with in the same manner. With a TNH-C system
upstream, it is possible to separate the neutral and the PE upstream of the UPS (by
separating the wires) and thus create the situation with TN-S both upstream and
downstream. In the diagrams below, the upstream TN-C simplifies the distribution.
Fir. 5.18 illustrates the only case for an upstream TN-C system.
To provide a reference potential, it is necessary to create a "clean" distribution

system by installing a transformer at the entry to the computer room (generally using
a PDU or equivalent). The greater the distance D1 between the upstream
transformer and the UPS output, the more this solution is required because the
neutral potential can be affected by the upstream distribution
 In this case, solutions using UPSs with or without a transformer are identical,
however transformerless technology offers advantages in terms of efficiency,
footprint, weight and voltage regulation accuracy.
Solution with output transformer Transformerless solution

TN-C upstream and TN-S downstream TN-C upstream and TN-S downstream
Fig. 5.18. TN upstream and downstream.
07/2016 Edition p. 137

Results of the comparison

Solutions with an output transformer
● The transformer at the UPS output is of a specific type, more expensive and
requires more space.
● It is necessary to add a transformer at the bypass input, i.e. the installation
requires four-pole devices and a neutral cable, or an output transformer must be
installed.
● The added transformer is not located as close as possible to the loads.
Transformerless solutions
● The constraints caused by the UPS output transformer are avoided.
● A transformer is installed at the entry to the computer room, generally in a PDU.
There is no need for four-pole devices on the bypass or for upstream distribution of
the neutral.
A transformer must still be added, but there are advantages in terms of:
● UPS cost, i.e. no specific output transformer and no four-pole devices and neutral
on the bypass line,
● reduced footprint and weight,
● better output regulation for rapid load fluctuations.
 Given its many advantages, transformerless technology is rapidly becoming the

preferred solution for UPSs.
Electromagnetic Electromagnetic disturbances

disturbances
All electromagnetic disturbances involve three elements.
A source
A natural source (atmosphere, earth, sun, etc.) or, more often, an industrial source
(electrical and electronic devices).
The source generates disturbances through sudden (pulse) variations in electrical
values (voltage or current), defined by:
 A wave form,
 A wave amplitude (peak value),
 A spectrum of frequencies,
 A level of energy.
A coupling mode
Coupling enables transmission of disturbances and may be:
 Capacitive (or galvanic), for example via transformer windings,
 Inductive, by a radiating magnetic field,
 Conducted, by a common impedance, via an earthing connection.
A victim
This is any device likely to be disturbed, and which malfunctions due to the presence
of the disturbances.
Examples
Sources
In low-voltage installations, sources include suddenly varying currents resulting from:
 Faults or short-circuits,
 Electronic switching,
 High-order harmonics,
 Lightning or transformer breakdown.
Frequencies may be low (< 1 MHz) for power frequencies and their harmonics or
high (> 1 MHz) for lightning.
07/2016 Edition p. 138

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Coupling
 Capacitive: transmission of a lightning wave via a transformer.
 Inductive: radiation of a magnetic field created by one of the above currents.
Radiation creates an induced electromotive force, that is an induced disturbing
current, in the loops of conductors made up of the cables supplying devices and the
earthing conductors of the devices.
As in indication, a radiation of 0.7 A/m can disturb a video monitor.
That corresponds to the field created 2.2 m around a conductor carrying a current of
10 A.
 Conducted (common impedance): increase in the potential of an earthing
connection.
EMC standards and Disturbances

recommendations
Emission, immunity, susceptibility
An electric device is installed in an environment that may be more or less disturbed
electromagnetically. It must be seen as both a source and possible victim of
electromagnetic disturbances.
Depending on the point of view, on may speak of:
 The emission level for a source,
 The compatibility level for an environment,
 The immunity and susceptibility levels for a victim.
These notions are discussed on the next page in the section on disturbance levels
defined by the standards.
Disturbance levels
Standard IEC 6100-2-4 defines a number of disturbance levels for EMC:
 Level 0: no disturbance,
 Emission level: maximum level authorised for a user on a public utility or for a
device,
 Compatibility level: maximum disturbance level expected in a given environment,
 Immunity level: level of disturbance that a device can withstand,
 Susceptibility level: level starting at which a device or system malfunctions.
Consequently, for devices and equipment that are considered:
 Sources, limits (emission levels) must be set for disturbances emitted by devices
to avoid reaching compatibility levels,
 Victims, they must also withstand disturbance levels higher than the compatibility
levels, if they are exceeded, which is permissible on a transient basis. These higher
levels are the immunity levels.
EMC standards set these levels.
 List of EMC standards, see the section on page 135 on EMC standards.
Fig. 5.19 EMC disturbance levels for disturbing/disturbed devices.
Measured values
Devices are subjected to tests.
Five major values are measured:
 CE - conducted emissions,
07/2016 Edition p. 139
UPS standards (Cont.)


 RE - radiated emissions,
 ESD - electrostatic discharges,
 CS - conducted susceptibility,
 RS - radiated susceptibility.
The tests require major resources, namely a Faraday cage for conducted emissions
and susceptibility and an anechoic chamber for radiated emissions.
Schneider Electric has a certified anechoic test chambers.
Fig. 5.20 Five major measurement values.
Scope and observance of Scope of standards

standards
Standards cover the following aspects:
 UPS design,
 Safety of persons,
 Performance levels,
 Electrical environment (notably harmonic disturbances and EMC),
 Ecological environment.
Standards on UPSs have become much more precise, notably with the creation of
the European EN standards and their harmonisation with a part of the previously
existing IEC standards.
Observance of standards and certification

Observance of standards guarantees the reliability and the quality of a UPS, its
compatibility with the loads supplied as well as with the technical, human and natural
environment.
Statement by a manufacturer of conformity with standards is not, in itself, a sufficient
indication of quality. Only certification by recognised organisations is a true
guarantee of conformity.
To that end, performance levels of UPSs from Schneider Electric with respect to
standards are certified by organisations such as TÜV and Veritas.
CE marking
CE marking was created by European legislation.
It is mandatory for free circulation of goods in the EU.
Its purpose is to guarantee, through respect of the corresponding European
directives:
 That the product is not dangerous (Low-voltage Directive),
 That it does not pollute (Environment Directive) and its electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive).
Before placing the CE marking on a product, the manufacturer must run or have run
checks and tests which ensure conformity of the product with the requirements in the
applicable directive(s).
It is NOT a certification standard or mark of conformity.
It does not signify that the product complies with national or international standards.
07/2016 Edition p. 140
It is not a certification as defined by French law (law dated 3 June 1994).

What is more, the CE marking is placed on a product under the exclusive
responsibility of the manufacturer or the importer. It does not imply inspection by a
certified external organisation.
 Not all labels carry the same implications for manufacturers.
Conformity with standards and specified levels of performance must be certifiable by
an organisation. This is not the case for CE marking which authorises self-
certification.
Main standards governing UPSs from Schneider Electric comply (certified by TÜV and Veritas) with the main
UPSs applicable international standards.
Safety
 IEC 60950-1 / EN 60950-1
Information technology equipment - Safety - Part: General requirements
 IEC 62040-1/ EN 62040-1
Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) - General and safety requirements for UPS.
 IEC 62040-3 / EN 1000-3
Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) - Method of specifying the test and
performance requirements.
 IEC 60439
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies.
 LV directive: 2006/95/EC
Electrical environment, harmonics and electromagnetic

compatibility (EMC)
Harmonics
 IEC 61000-2-2 / EN 61000-2-2
Compatibility levels for low-frequency conducted disturbances and signalling in
public low-voltage power supply systems.
(see Table 5-A on the next page)
 IEC 61000-3-2 / EN 61000-3-2
Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current  16 A/ph).
 IEC 61000-3-4 / EN 61000-3-4
Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current > 16 A/ph).
 IEC 61000-3-5 / EN 61000-3-5
Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker.
 EN 50160
Voltage characteristics of public networks.
(see Table 5-B on the next page).
 IEEE 519
Recommended practices and requirements for harmonic control in electrical power
systems.
EMC
 EN 50091-2
UPS - EMC.
 IEC 62040-2/ EN 62040-2
Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) - Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
requirements.
 EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
For equipment liable to cause or be affected by electromagnetic disturbances.
Quality
 Design , production and servicing in compliance with standard ISO 9001 - quality
organisation.
Ecological environment
07/2016 Edition p. 141

 Manufacturing in compliance with standard ISO 14001.

Acoustic noise
 ISO 3746
Sound power levels.
 ISO 7779 / EN 27779
Measurement of airborne noise emitted by computer and business equipment.
Tables on harmonic-compatibility levels

Table 5-A. Compatibility levels for individual harmonic voltages in low voltage networks as
indicated in standards IEC 61000-2-2 / EN 61000-2-2.
Odd harmonics non multiple Odd harmonics multiple of 3 Even harmonics
of 3
Harmonic Harmonic Harmonic Harmonic Harmonic Harmonic
order n voltage as a % order n voltage as a % order n voltage as a %
of fundamental of fundamental of fundamental
5 6 3 5 2 2
7 5 9 1.5 4 1
11 3.5 15 0.3 6 0.5
13 3 21 0.2 8 0.5
17 2 >21 0.2 10 0.5
19 1.5 12 0.5
23 1.5 >12 0.2
25 1.5 0.2
>25 0.2+0.5x25/n
Resulting THDU < 8% (for all harmonics encountered among those indicated).
Table 5-B. Compatibility levels for harmonic voltages according to the type of equipment as
indicated in standard EN 50160.
Order of the voltage Class 1 Class 2 (1) Class 3
harmonic generated (sensitive systems and (industrial and public (for connection of
equipment) % of networks) % of major polluters) % of
fundamental fundamental fundamental
2 2 2 3
3 3 5 6
4 1 1 1.5
5 3 6 8
6 0.5 0.5 1
7 3 5 7
8 0.5 0.5 1
9 1.5 1.5 2.5
10 0.5 0.5 1
11 3 3.5 5
12 0.2 0.2 1
13 3 3 4.5
TDHU 5% 8% 10%
(1)
Class 2 corresponds to the limits of Table A of standards IEC 61000-2-2 / EN 61000-2-2.
07/2016 Edition p. 142

Energy storage
Possible technologies Energy storage in UPSs

The energy-storage systems used by UPSs to backup the primary source must have
the following characteristics:
Immediate availability of electrical power,
Sufficient power rating to supply the load,
Sufficient backup time and/or compatibility with systems providing long backup
times (e.g. an engine generator set or fuel cells).
Evaluation of the available technologies
The technical watch established by Schneider Electric resulted in in-depth

See WP 65, WP229, WP 231  examination of the following technologies:
Batteries (lead acid, lithium-ion)
Supercapacitors (ultracapacitors),
Flywheels,
Superconducting magnetic energy storage (SMES).
 For more information, see WP 65 (White Paper 65: "Comparing Data Center
Batteries, Flywheels, and Ultracapacitors".
 For more information on Lithium-ion solution, see White Paper WP 229: "Lithium-
ion Batteries vs. Lead-acid Batteries, and WP 231: “FAQs for using LIB witha UPS” .
Battery and flywheel solutions are discussed below.
Batteries The battery solution

Batteries are by far the most commonly employed solution today for energy storage
in UPSs. They are the dominant solution due to low cost, proven effectiveness and
storage capacity, but nonetheless have a number of disadvantages in terms of size,
maintenance and the environment. At the power ratings under consideration, they
offer backup times in the ten-minute range, enough to ride through long outages and
wait for start-up of an engine generator set for extended runtime.
TM
For its Symmetra PX range, Schneider Electric also offers extended runtime
solutions based on fuel cells, with the FCXR (Fuel Cell eXtended Run) product
range. This solution significantly reduces the environmental impact and floorspace
requirements with respect to solutions combining batteries and an engine generator
set.
 Electrochemical energy storage using batteries, where applicable backed up by a

thermal engine generator set, is the commonly used solution to protect critical loads
using UPSs.
Fig. 5.21. Energy storage using a battery and an engine generator set for long backup times.
07/2016 edition p. 143

Energy storage (Cont.)
Types of industrial batteries

Battery families
A battery is a set of interconnected cells.
Depending on the type of cell, there are two main families of batteries:
 Lead-acid batteries
 Lithium-ion batteries
 Nickel cadmium batteries.
Cells may also be of the :
 Recombination type  sealed batteries
The gas recombination rate is at least 95% and they therefore do not require water to
be added during service life (hence the term "sealed"),
 Vented type  vented batteries
They are equipped with ports to:
- release to the atmosphere the oxygen and hydrogen produced during the different
chemical reactions,
- top off the electrolyte by adding distilled or demineralised water.
Batteries used in UPSs

The main types of batteries used in conjunction with UPSs are:
 Sealed lead-acid batteries, used 95% of the time because they are easy to
maintain and do not require a special room, these batteries can be installed in office
environments and in any position,
 Vented lead-acid batteries,
 Lithium-ion batteries
 Vented nickel-cadmium batteries.
Vented batteries impose greater constraints in terms of maintenance (checks on the
electrolyte level) and their position (only in the vertical position).
.
 Battery selection, see ” Key factors in UPS installation” p. 49.
Installation modes
Depending on the UPS range, the battery capacity and backup time, the battery is:
 Sealed type and housed in the UPS cabinet,
 Sealed type and housed in one to three cabinets,
 Vented or sealed type and rack-mounted.
Cabinet mounting
This installation method (see fig. 5.15) is suitable for sealed batteries. It is easy to
implement and offers maximum safety.
Batteries installed on racks
 On shelves (figure 5.16)
This installation method is possible for sealed batteries or maintenance-free vented
batteries which do not require topping up of their electrolyte.
 Tier mounting (figure 5.17)
This installation method is suitable for all types of batteries and for vented batteries
in particular, as level checking and filling are made easy.
Fig. 5.22. Cabinet mounting. Fig. 5.23. Mounting on shelves. Fig. 5.24. Tier mounting.
07/2016 edition p. 144

Constraints on batteries
Atmospheric constraints
The batteries supplied with UPSs from Schneider Electric are designed to operate
under the following conditions:
 Optimum temperature range: 15°C to 25°C,
 Optimum relative humidity range: 5% to 95%,
 Atmospheric pressure: 700 to 1060 hPa (0.7 to 1.06 bars).
For other operating conditions, please consult us.
Access
Access must be provided for testing operations.
 Battery installed in UPS cabinet or other cabinet: comply with the clearances
indicated in the "Dimensions and weights" in chapter 4.
 Battery installed on racks: select an installation method suited to the type of
battery.
 Preliminary work: this aspect is important as it involves safety. It is discussed in ”
Key factors in UPS installation” p. 53.
Main battery parameters

Backup time
For a given battery, the backup time depends on:
 The power that must be supplied, a low value increases the available autonomy,
 The discharge conditions, a high discharge rate makes possible a lower shutdown
voltage and thus increases the backup time,
 Temperature, within the recommended operating limits, the backup time increases
with increasing temperature. Note, however, that a high temperature adversely
affects battery service life,
 Ageing, battery backup time decreases with the age of the battery.
Schneider Electric offers a range of standard backup times (5, 10, 15 or 30 minutes
and service lives (5 or 10 years or higher) and also caters to all specific
requirements.
Service life
A battery is considered to reach the end of its service life when its real backup time
has fallen to 50% of the specified backup time.
The service life of a battery is basically enhanced by:
 Providing protection against deep discharge,
 Correct charger settings, in particular the ripple factor of the charge or float current,
 An optimum operating temperature, maintained between 15°C and 25°C.
Recharge mode
The charge cycle takes place in two steps:
 Step 1, a constant current limited to 0.1 C10 (one tenth of the battery capacity for a
ten-hour discharge),
 Step 2, a constant voltage, at the maximum permissible value. The charge current
regularly decreases and reaches the floating value.
Fig. 5.25. Battery charge cycle.
07/2016 edition p. 145

Battery management for MGETM GalaxyTM ranges

TM
Digibat
TM TM
To manage the above parameters, all MGE Galaxy UPSs from Schneider
TM
Electric come as standard with the microprocessor-based Digibat battery-
monitoring system (dedicated DSP for real-time processing).
TM
Digibat , an easy-to-use system, offers advanced and flexible functions as well as
physical and computer-aided protection for the battery. It provides a high level of
safety, true measurement of the backup time and optimises battery service life. For
example, for an MGE Galaxy 5500 UPS, the functions include:
 Automatic entry of battery parameters,
 Measurement of the real backup time remaining, taking into account the age of the
battery, the temperature and the load level,
 Estimate of remaining battery life (1),
 Battery test to preventively detect battery-function faults (1),
 Regulation of battery voltage with respect to the temperature to optimise battery
life,
 Automatic battery-discharge test at adjustable time intervals.
Protection includes:
 Protection against deep discharge (depending on the discharge rate) and battery
isolation using a circuit breaker which automatically opens when the backup time,
multiplied by two plus two hours, has elapsed,
 Limiting of the recharge current in the battery (0.05 C10 to 0.1 C10),
 Progressive audio alarm signalling the end of the backup time,
 Numerous automatic tests.
(1) Schneider Electric exclusive patents.
Fig. 5.26. DigibatTM
Temperature monitoring
TM TM
MGE Galaxy UPSs can also be equipped with the Temperature Monitoring
module used to:
 Optimise the charger voltage depending on the temperature in the battery room,
 Warn the user if preset permissible temperature limits are exceeded,
 Refine the estimate on battery backup time carried out by the standard system.
Natural ventilation of battery cabinets avoids battery temperature rise.
Environment Sensor is also a simple means to monitor temperature and humidity. It
can be used to launch shutdown when combined with software running the module.
Battery monitoring
Schneider Electric has also its own offer (AP9922 and AP992S) and also offers
Powershield autonomous and communicating battery-monitoring systems which
immediately detect and locate all battery faults. These systems monitor each battery
block or cell and make possible predictive maintenance.
07/2016 edition p. 146

Flywheels Flywheel energy storage

Operating principle
A flywheel energy storage system is a ―mechanical battery‖ that stores energy
kinetically in the form of a rotating mass. When required during a utility outage, the
energy stored by the rotating mass is converted to electrical energy through the
flywheel’s integrated electric generator.
The amount of energy stored in a flywheel is given by:
2
E = kMω
where k depends on the shape of the rotating mass, M is the mass of the flywheel
and ω its angular velocity.
 Note that the energy stored is proportional to the square of the angular velocity.
This is one of the reasons that Schneider Electric proposes flywheels spinning at
relatively high speeds. This reduces both the weight and the footprint of the energy
storage system.
UPS applications
Flywheel units can replace traditional UPS batteries or work in tandem with batteries
to provide highly reliable, instantaneous backup power for today’s mission-critical
applications (data centres, hospitals, broadcast studios, airports and manufacturing
plants). They interface with the DC bus of the UPS, just like a battery, receiving
charging current from the UPS and providing DC current to the UPS inverter during
discharge.
UPS
AC input Critical
loads
Rectifier Inverter
Flywheel Battery
Fig. 5.27. Simplified diagram of a UPS with a flywheel energy storage connected in parallel with
a battery.
Flywheel energy storage systems have two applications depending on whether or

not the installation includes a genset.
Battery hardening for installations without gensets

For installations without gensets, a flywheel energy storage system can operate in
parallel with batteries. This flywheel application is often referred to as "battery
hardening".
In such a configuration, the flywheel is the first line of defence against power
anomalies – offering higher availability and saving the batteries for prolonged power
outages. By being first to provide the necessary energy to ride-through power
glitches, the flywheel system significantly increases battery life by absorbing over
98% of the discharges that would normally be supplied by batteries. Battery
hardening with flywheels offers a number of benefits.
 Fewer battery charge-discharge cycles, thereby extending battery life
 Less frequent battery replacement and associated lead acid disposal
 Higher availability of critical DC bus
07/2016 edition p. 147

Battery replacement for installations with gensets

Gensets are generally able to take on the load within 10 seconds of a utility failure.
While UPS batteries can provide power during this transition, their reliability is always
in question. Are they fully charged? Has a cell gone bad in the battery string? When
was the last time they were checked?
By contrast, flywheel systems provide reliable energy storage instantaneously to
assure a predictable transition to the standby genset, all in a compact footprint.
A flywheel system providing 10 or 20 seconds of energy offer a number of
advantages over batteries for installations with gensets.
 Highly reliable and predictable energy storage:
- estimated 54,000 hour MTBF
- continuous monitoring gives highly predictable performance
 Environment-friendly alternative to batteries:
- no lead, no acid, small carbon footprint
 Lower TCO:
- 20 years useful life time
- low maintenance
- small size and light weight
- capable of operating at temperatures up to 40°C
Types of flywheels
UPS flywheels can be divided into several types depending on their speed, flywheel
material and motor generator configuration.
Flywheel speed
 Low speed flywheels
- Angular velocity <10 000 rpm
- Energy for high power requires heavy steel flywheels (heavy and bulky)
- Periodic maintenance and replacement to the mechanical bearings
- High amount of parasite energy losses
- Requires special concrete slab specifications for installation
 High speed flywheels
- 30 000 to 60 000 rpm (potentially up to 100 000 rpm)
- Much lighter for high power needs (energy stored through higher spinning velocity)
- Full magnetic levitation
- Lower periodic maintenance
- Smaller footprint and lighter weight
- Easy commissioning, start up and shutdown
As already mentioned, flywheels supplied with Schneider Electric UPSs operate at

relatively high speeds (36 000 rpm when fully charge) and offer all the corresponding
advantages.
Flywheel materials
 Carbon fibre flywheels
Carbon fibber flywheels are typically made by winding great lengths of carbon-fibber
on a spindle. They are held together by an epoxy resin.
Imperfections in the process and gaps between the fibbers can lead to unbalancing
of the wheel over time due to the stresses applied as the wheel is spun from high
speed to low speed and back again, which occurs during every discharge event.
Once the carbon fibber flywheel becomes unbalanced, the entire flywheel module
much be replaced, a very costly and time consuming processes.
 Steel flywheels
The flywheels supplied with Schneider Electric UPSs are made of aerospace grade
4340 steel. The material properties are very well known, available from numerous
suppliers and this material is used in many high speed rotating applications. Most
important is the integrity of the material can be measured through core samples and
ultrasound to make sure it complies with the application specifications. The same
flywheel has been used not only in UPS applications, but also in high-cycling,
regenerating applications like in electric motors for cranes and electric rail. These
applications call on the flywheel to be charged and discharged up to 20 times per
hour. These applications prove the robustness of utilising aerospace grade steel as
the preferred flywheel material.
07/2016 edition p. 148

Motor generator configuration

The other difference found in flywheel energy storage systems lies in the motor
generator configuration.
 Flywheels systems supplied by Schneider Electric use a permanent magnet type

motor generator. The benefit of this is twofold:
- Higher efficiency of the motor generator when charging and discharging, providing
the high cycling capability of the flywheel
- The flywheel can generate its own power to maintain the flywheel levitation even if
control power is lost or a failure occurs in the power electronics.
 Other flywheel manufacturers use a synchronous reluctance motor that cannot
self generate power if a failure occurs in the power electronics.
- The unit therefore requires a back-up supply from a small UPS to provide backup
power to the magnetic bearings.
Installation
Flywheel cabinets
Flywheel energy storage systems are supplied in separate cabinets that connect to
the DC bus just like battery cabinets. Multiple flywheel cabinets can be installed in
parallel for higher power, longer run-time or redundancy.
Site preparation
Minimal site preparation is required for installation of flywheel cabinets. Before
installation, consideration must be given to a certain aspects.
 Wiring and cabling to UPS and other equipment
 Service access
 Clearances for cooling
 Floor mounting
Constraints on flywheels
Atmospheric constraints
The flywheel energy storage systems supplied with UPSs from Schneider Electric
are designed to operate under the following conditions:
 Operating temperature: -20°C to 40°C (without derating)
 Minimum cold start temperature: 0°C
 Relative humidity: up to 95% (non-condensing)
For other operating conditions, please consult us.
Main flywheel parameters

Output power and backup time
The flywheel energy storage systems supplied with UPSs from Schneider Electric
offer flexibility in selecting the best power level and runtime combination to meet
application requirements.
 Single units are available in 215kW and 300kW ratings.
 The 300kW model can deliver 160kW for ~18.75 seconds or 220kW for ~10
seconds, generally sufficient for battery hardening or genset startup applications.
 Multiple flywheel units can be paralleled for higher capacity, redundancy or
runtime.
Service life
 The service life of a flywheel energy storage time is typically much longer than that
of lead-acid batteries.
 The flywheel energy storage systems supplied with UPSs from Schneider Electric
has a service of life of 20 years for operating temperatures up to 40°C and frequent
charge-discharge cycles.
07/2016 edition p. 149

UPS / generator-set combination
Use of a generator Long backup times

An engine generator set is made up of an internal-combustion engine driving a
generator that supplies the distribution system. The backup time of an engine
generator set depends on the quantity of fuel available.
In some installations, the required backup time in the event of a utility outage is such
that it is preferable to use an engine generator set to back up utility power (figure
5.28).
This solution avoids using large batteries with very long backup times.
Though there is no general rule in the matter, a generator is often used for backup
times exceeding 30 minutes. Critical installations requiring very high availability
levels and with high down-time costs (e.g. data centres) systematically combine
UPSs and engine generator sets.
The battery backup time of the UPS must be sufficient for generator start-up and
connection to the electrical installation. Connection is generally carried out on the
main LV switchboard using an automatic source-changeover system. The time
required for changeover depends on the specific characteristics of each installation,
notably the start-up sequence, load shedding, etc.
Fig. 5.28. UPS / generator-set combination.
UPS / generator-set UPS / generator-set compatibility

combination
A number of factors must be taken into account when using an engine generator set
to provide long backup-time power to UPSs.
Load step changes

In the event of emergency conditions requiring connection of the installation to the
generator set, heavy loads can result in high inrush currents which can cause
serious generator-set operating problems. To avoid such phenomena, UPSs from
Schneider Electric are equipped with a system ensuring gradual start-up of the
charger. The walk-in lasts approximately ten seconds. What is more, when utility
power returns, the charger may be stopped gradually via an auxiliary switch in order
to avoid disturbing the other loads.
07/2016 edition p. 150

UPS / generator-set combination (Cont.)
Fig. 5.29. Gradual start of the UPS rectifier during operation on generator power.
Capacitive currents
The generator can supply only relatively low capacitive currents (10 to 30 % of In).
When an LC filter is installed, the main difficulty lies in the gradual start-up of the
rectifier on generator power, when active power is equal to zero and the generator
supplies only the capacitive current for the filter. Consequently, the use of LC filters
must be correctly analysed to ensure that operation complies with manufacturer
specifications.
Use of compensated LC filters with a contactor solves this problem. For UPSs with a
PFC rectifier, compatibility is total.
 LC filters and generators, see p. 30.
Respective UPS and generator power ratings

A UPS equipped with a PFC rectifier has a high input power factor (greater than 0.9).
The engine generator set can therefore be used to maximum effectiveness.
For LC filters, compensated filters with a contactor solve the problem concerning
capacitive currents.
 Compatibility of power ratings between modern UPSs and engine generator sets
avoids all problems of derating.
Stability of generator frequency

During operation on engine generator set power, fluctuation in the generator
frequency may occur due to variations in the speed of the thermal motor for which
the regulation functions are not instantaneous. These variations are due to changes
in the load. Examples are start-up of the engine generator set itself (until it reaches
its rated speed), start-up of other loads supplied by the engine generator set
(elevators, air-conditioning systems), or shedding of loads.
This may create problems with line-interactive UPSs whose output frequency is
identical to that of the input. Generator frequency variations may lead to multiple
transfers to battery power (frequency outside tolerances) and returns to utility power
(when the inverter has stabilised the frequency, but the generator itself has not yet
stabilised), resulting in "hunting" phenomena (instability around the frequency set-
point).
With double-conversion UPSs, the regulation of the output power by the inverter
avoids this problem.
 Double-conversion UPSs are totally compatible with the frequency fluctuations of
engine generator sets. This is not the case for line-interactive UPSs.
Harmonics
The subtransient reactance X"d of a generator is generally higher than the short-
circuit voltage Uscx of a transformer (two to four times higher). Any harmonic
currents drawn by the UPS rectifier may have greater impact on the voltage
harmonic distortion on the upstream busbars. With PFC rectifier technology, the
absence of upstream harmonics avoids this problem.
07/2016 edition p. 151

UPS / generator-set combination (Cont.)
Review of inrush currents

On start-up, a number of loads cause major inrush currents (switching surges, start-
up peaks), which last a certain time.
For the UPS, these currents represent an apparent load Sa (kVA) that is greater than
Sn (kVA), which can be supplied under steady-state conditions.
The value of Sa to be taken into account in sizing UPS power is calculated on the
basis of these inrush currents.
Below are indications on these currents caused by common load devices.
Motors
Motors are generally of the three-phase asynchronous type (95% of all motors). The
additional power requirement corresponds to the start-up current defined by (fig. 5.30):
 Id (5 to 8 In, rated rms value) for a time td (1 to 10 seconds),
 Imax = 8 to 12 In, for 20 to 30 milliseconds.
The power drawn that must be taken into account (neglecting the peak effect of
Imax) is:
Sa (kVA) = Un Id 3 during td.
LV/LV transformers
Transformer switching produces current peaks with amplitudes that are damped
according to an exponential decay with a time constant (see fig. 5.31).
 i = I1st peak exp -t/ where  is a few cycles (30 to 300 ms).
 I1st peak = k In (where k is given, generally 10 to 20).
Indications generally include the number of cycles the phenomenon lasts and the
value of the various peaks as a percentage of I1st peak.
The corresponding inrush current is generally calculated on the basis of (see
example):
 Sa (kVA) = Un I1st peak 3 , i.e. Sa (kVA) = k Un In 3 during the number of cycles.
 Example of an inrush current damped in four cycles with:
st
1 peak (100%): k In (k from 10 to 20),
nd
2 peak 30 %: 0.3 k In,
rd
3 peak 15 %: 0.15 k In.
The total of the rms values of the currents corresponding to the various peaks (I peak
(1)
/ 2 ) is:
k In (1  0,3  0,15 ) K In 1,45
  k In
2 2
This is roughly equivalent to the value of the first peak alone.
(1)
Considering the current peaks as sine waves; note that some manufacturers indicate an rms
value of Ipeak / 2.
Computer loads
Switch-mode power supplies are non-linear loads. The current for a single-phase
load has a wave form similar to that shown in figure 5.32. There can be a peak
during the first half wave of approximately 2 In. However, it is generally much lower
than this and can be neglected.
Fig. 5.30. Curve for direct on- Fig. 5.31. LV/LV transformer Fig. 5.32. Computer load
line starting of a three-phase switching current. starting current.
asynchronous motor.
07/2016 edition p. 152

Harmonics
Harmonics Origin of harmonics

The increasing use of computing, telecommunications and power-electronics devices
have multiplied the number of non-linear loads connected to power systems.
These applications require switch-mode power supplies which transform the voltage
sine wave into periodic signals of different wave forms. All these periodic signals of
frequency f are the product of superimposed sinusoidal signals with frequencies that
are multiples of f, known as harmonics (see the section "Characteristic harmonic
values" dealing with the Fourier theorem below, on page 40). Figure 5.32 illustrates
this showing the initial current (the fundamental) and the third-order harmonic.
This figure shows what happens when a third-

order harmonic (150/180 Hz) is superimposed
on the fundamental frequency (50/60 Hz). The
frequency of the resulting periodic signal is
that of the fundamental, but the waveform is
distorted.
Fig. 5.33. Example of harmonics.
The increased presence of harmonics is a phenomenon that concerns all electrical

installations, commercial and industrial, as well as residential. No modern electrical
environment is exempt from these disturbances caused by devices such as PCs,
servers, fluorescent tubes, air-conditioners, variable-speed drives, discharge lamps,
rectifiers, static power supplies, microwave ovens, televisions, halogen lamps, etc.
All these loads are termed "non-linear".
Consequences of harmonics
Harmonics disturb, increasingly severely, all sorts of activities, ranging from factories
producing electronic components and data-processing systems to pumping stations,
telecommunications systems, television studios, etc., because they represent a
significant part of the current drawn.
There are three types of negative consequences for users:
Impact on the electrical installation

Harmonics increase the value of the rms current with respect to that of the rated
sinusoidal current. The result is temperature rise (sometimes significant) in lines,
transformers, generators, capacitors, cables, etc. The hidden costs of accelerated
aging in such devices can be very high.
Impact on applications
Harmonic currents circulate in the source and line impedances, thus generating
voltage harmonics which lead to voltage distortion on the busbars upstream of the
non-linear loads (figure 5.34).
The distortion of the supply voltage (upstream THDU - Total harmonic distortion in
voltage) may disturb the operation of certain sensitive devices connected to the
these busbars.
What is more, for TNC systems where N and PE conductors are combined to form a
PEN conductor, the zero-sequence third-order harmonics cumulate in the neutral
conductor. This unbalance current in the neutral can disturb circuits interconnecting
low-current devices and may require oversizing of the neutral.
07/2016 edition p. 153

Harmonics (Cont.)
Fig. 5.34. Voltage distortion due to reinjection of harmonic currents by non-linear loads.
Impact on the available electrical power

Harmonics represent an outright loss of current (up to 30% more current consumed).
The user must pay more for less available power.
Precautions
General
There are a number of traditional solutions to limit harmonics:
 installation of tuned passive filters,
 installation in parallel of several cables with medium-sized cross sections,
 separation of non-linear loads and sensitive loads behind isolating transformers.
However, these solutions have two major disadvantages:
 limitation of harmonics is effective only in the existing installation (the addition or
removal of loads can render it ineffective),
 implementation is difficult in existing installations.
Accusine active harmonic conditioners (see chapter 3) avoid these disadvantages.
Much more effective than other solutions, they may be used with all types of loads
and can selectively eliminate harmonics ranging from the 2nd to the 25th order.
 Elimination of harmonics, see “eliminate harmonic currents”
Characteristic harmonic Current values

values
Harmonic expansion of a periodic current
The Fourier theorem indicates that any periodic function with a frequency f may be
represented as the sum of terms (series) composed of:
 a sinusoidal term with frequency f, called the fundamental frequency,
 sinusoidal terms with frequencies that are whole multiples of the fundamental
frequency, i.e. the harmonics,
 a DC component, where applicable.
Application of the Fourier theorem to the currents of non-linear loads indicates that a
periodic current I(t), of whatever form at frequency f (50 or 60 Hz), is the sum of
harmonic sinusoidal currents defined by:

I( t)  IH1 2 sin(t  1)   IHn
n 2
2 sin(nt  n)
where
 IH1 is the rms value of the fundamental current at frequency f (50 or 60 Hz),
  = 2  f is the angular frequency of the fundamental,
 1 is the phase displacement between the fundamental current and the voltage,
 IHn is the rms value of the nth harmonic, at frequency nf,
 n is the phase displacement between the nth harmonic current and the voltage.
It is important to evaluate the harmonics (n  2) with regards to the fundamental (n =
1) to determine to what degree the function differs from the fundamental.
To that end, the values below are taken into account.
Current individual harmonic content

This value expresses the ratio in percent between of the rms value of the given
harmonic and that of the fundamental.
07/2016 edition p. 154

Harmonics (Cont.)
IHn
Ihn %  100
IH1
All the harmonics present in a given current with the indication of their relative
importance (Ihn values) constitute the harmonic spectrum of the current. Generally
th
speaking, the influence of the orders above the 25 is negligible.
Current total harmonic distortion

This distortion is called THDI (Total Harmonic Distortion where I is for the current). It
expresses the ratio between the rms value of all harmonics (n  2) and that of the
fundamental. The THDI is also expressed in terms of the individual harmonics.

 IH n
2

 IHn 
2 
THDI%  100
n 2
IH1
 100  
n 2  1 
IH
   Ih %
n 2
n
2
Note. Harmonic contents are sometimes expressed with respect to the complete signal Irms,
and not the fundamental (IEC documents). Here, we use the definition of the CIGREE, which
uses the fundamental.
For the low harmonic contents analysed in the following pages, the two definitions produce
virtually identical results.
Rms value of a current with harmonics

The rms value of an alternating current with a period T is:
1 T 2
Irms 
T 0 I t dt
After calculation and using harmonic representation, this can be expressed as:

Irms   IH
n 1
n
2
th
where IHn = rms value of the n harmonic.
The rms value is also expressed as:

Irms  IH12  IH
n 2
n
2
or:
 2
 IH1
 IHn 
Ieff  IH1 1    hence:
 
n2

Irms  IH1 1   Ih
n 2
n
2
 IH1 1  THDI2
 Ihn = Ihn% / 100 (individual level expressed as a value and not as a percentage).
 THDI = THDI% / 100 (distortion expressed as a value and not as a percentage).
The rms value of the current is that of the fundamental, multiplied by a coefficient
which is due to the harmonics and is a function of the distortion.
 One effect of harmonics is therefore to increase the rms value of the current,
which can lead to temperature rise and therefore require oversizing of conductors.
The lower the distortion, the less need for oversizing.
Example
Input current of a three-phase rectifier.
07/2016 edition p. 155

Harmonics (Cont.)
Harmonic distortion levels
Ih5 = 33%
Ih7 = 2.7%
Ih11 = 7.3%
Ih13 = 1.6%
Ih17 = 2.6%
Ih19 = 1.1%
Ih23 = 1.5%
Ih25 = 1.3%
THDI = 35%
Fig 5.35. Example of the spectrum of a harmonic current.

THDI%   Ih %
n 2
n
2
The value under the square root sign is:

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
33 + 2.7 + 7.3 + 1.6 +2.6 + 1.1 + 1.5 +1.3 = 1164
consequently THDI%  34% and THDI = 0.34.
Ieff  IH1 1 THDI2 = IH1 1  0.342 = 1.056 x I1
The rms value of this current is therefore 5.6% higher than the rms value of the
fundamental, i.e. than the rated current containing no harmonics, with a
corresponding temperature rise.
Voltage values
At the terminals of a non-linear load, through which a distorted periodic AC current
flows, the voltage is also periodic with a frequency f and it is also distorted with
respect to the theoretical sinusoidal wave. The relation between voltage and current
is no longer governed by Ohm's linear law, because it is applicable only for
sinusoidal voltage and current. It is possible, however, to use a Fourier expansion for
the voltage and to define, similar to the current and with the same results, the
following values:
Voltage individual harmonic content

UHn
Uhn %  100
UH1
The harmonic spectrum can also be calculated for the voltage.
Voltage total harmonic distortion

 UH n
2

 UHn 
2 
THDU%  100
n 2
UH1
 100  
n 2 

UH1 
  Uh 
n 2
n
2
THDU for Total Harmonic Distortion, where U is for the voltage.
Rms value of a voltage with harmonics


Irms   IH
n 1
n
2
Which, similar to the current, can also be expressed as:


Urms  UH1 1 Uh
n2
n
2
 IH1 1THDU2
 The rms value of the voltage is that of the fundamental, multiplied by a coefficient
which is due to the harmonics.
Power values
Power factor in the presence of harmonics
07/2016 edition p. 156
Harmonics (Cont.)
On the basis of the active power at the terminals of a non-linear load P (kW) and the
apparent power supplied S (kVA), the power factor is defined by:
P (kW )

S (kVA)
This power factor does not express the phase displacement between the voltage and
the current because they are not sinusoidal. However, it is possible to define the
displacement between the voltage fundamental and the current fundamental (both
sinusoidal), by:
P1(KW )
cos 1 
S1(kVA)
where P1 and S1 are the active and reactive power, respectively, corresponding to
the fundamentals.
Standard IEC 146-1 defines the distortion factor:


cos1
When there are no harmonics, this factor is equal to 1 and the power factor is simply
the cos .
Power in the presence of harmonics

 Across the terminals of a balanced, three-phase linear load, supplied with a
phase-to-phase voltage u(t) and a current I(t), where the displacement between u
and i is , the apparent power in kVA, depending on the rms values U and I, is:
S  UI 3
The active power in kW is: P = S cos 
The reactive power in kvar is: Q = S sin 
Where:
S P2  Q2
 At the terminals of a non-linear load, the mathematical definition of P is much
more complex because U and I contain harmonics. It can however be expressed
simply as:
.P = S . ( = power factor)
If U1 and I1 are the fundamentals displaced by 1, it is possible to calculate the
corresponding apparent, active and reactive power by:
S1 U1 I1 3 P1 = S1 cos 1 and Q1 = S1 sin 1. The total apparent power is:
S  P12  Q12  D2
where D is the distortion power, due to the harmonics.
07/2016 edition p. 157

Non-linear loads and PWM technology
Non-linear load Importance of the UPS output impedance

performance of UPSs using
Equivalent diagram of an inverter output
PWM technology With respect to the load, an inverter is a perfect source of sinusoidal voltage V0 in
series with an output impedance Zs. Figure 5.36 shows the equivalent diagram of the
inverter output when a load is present.
The inverter output is a perfect voltage source Vc = impedance across the load terminals.
V0 in series with an output impedance Zs. Vs = impedance at the inverter output.
ZL = line impedance.
Zc = load impedance.
Fig. 5.36. Equivalent diagram of an inverter output.
Effects of different load types

 For a linear load, the impedances Zs, ZL, Zc are considered at the angular
frequency  = 2  f corresponding to the distribution frequency (f = 50 or 60 Hz),
giving
V0 = (Zs + ZL + Zc) I
 For a non-linear load, the harmonic currents drawn by the load flow through the
impedances. For the fundamental and each individual harmonic, the rms values of
the current and the voltage are related similarly and can be expressed as:
- for the fundamental: U1 = (Zs + ZL + Zc) I1
- for each harmonic order k: UK = [Zs(kf) + ZL(kf) + Zc(kf)] IK
The impedance values are considered at the frequency kf of the given order.
Voltage distortion decreases with the individual levels of the voltage harmonics U K /
U1.
These levels are related to those of the harmonic currents I K/ I1 by the equation:
[Zs(kf) + ZL(kf) + Zc(kf)] / (Zs + ZL + Zc).
 Consequently, for a given load current spectrum, the individual voltage harmonic
levels and the total distortion (THDU) decrease with the impedance of the source
and the cables at the given frequencies.
Consequences of non-linear loads

To reduce the effects of the harmonic currents (THDU at B and C), it is necessary, to
the greatest extent possible, to:
 reduce the line impedance,
 ensure a low source impedance at the various harmonic frequencies.
 Good behaviour on the part of a UPS supplying non-linear loads requires a low
output impedance at the various harmonic frequencies.
Below is a presentation of the advantages of the PWM (pulse width modulation)
chopping technique in this respect.
07/2016 edition p. 158

Non-linear loads and PWM technology (Cont.)
UPS operating principle

Chopping of the DC voltage by the inverter with filtering
An inverter is made up of a converter that transforms the DC power supplied by the
rectifier/charger or the battery into AC power. For example, on a single-phase UPS,
there are two ways to convert the DC power, using either a half bridge (see fig. 5.37)
or a full bridge (see fig. 5.38).
The square-wave voltage obtained between A and B is then filtered to produce a
sinusoidal voltage with a low level of distortion at the output.
The switches represented here to illustrate the principle are controlled IGBTs.
Fig. 5.37. Half-bridge DC/AC converter. Fig. 5.38. Full-bridge DC/AC converter.
Practically speaking, the switches shown in figures 5.37 and 5.38 are IGBTs for
which it is possible to control the relative on and off times.
By controlling the on and off times, it is possible to "distribute" the voltage over the
reference sinusoidal wave. This principle is known as PWM (pulse width modulation).
It is shown in a simplified manner, with five square-wave pulses, in figure 5.39. The
area of the voltage sinusoidal wave is equal to that of the square-wave pulses used
to generate it. These areas represent the power supplied by the inverter to the load
T
over a given time, i.e.
 VIdt
0
The higher the chopping frequency (the higher the number of square-wave pulses),
the better the regulation with respect to the reference wave. Chopping also reduces
the size of the internal filter required on the LC output (see fig. 5.40).
Fig. 5.39. DC/AC converter output voltage Fig. 5.40. Inverter output filter.
with five square-wave pulses per half-wave.
07/2016 edition p. 159

PWM inverters
PWM chopping
The PWM (pulse width modulation) chopping technique combines high-frequency
chopping (a few kHz) of the DC voltage by the inverter and regulation of the pulse
width for the inverter output, to comply with a reference sinusoidal wave.
This technique uses IGBTs (insulated gate bipolar transistors) offering the
advantages of voltage control and very short commutation times. Due to the high
frequency, the regulation system can react quickly (e.g. 333 nanoseconds for a
frequency of 3 kHz) to modify the pulse widths within a given period.
 Comparison with the reference voltage wave makes it possible to maintain the
inverter output voltage within strict distortion tolerances, even for highly distorted
currents.
Functional diagram of a PWM inverter

Figure 5.41 shows the functional diagram of a PWM inverter.
The output voltage is continuously compared to the reference voltage Vref which is a
sinusoidal wave with a very low level of distortion (< 1%).
The difference in the voltage  is processed by a corrector, according to a transfer
function C(p), intended to ensure the performance and stability of control.
The voltage from the corrector is then amplified by the DC/AC converter and its
control system with a gain A. The Vm voltage supplied by the converter is filtered by
the LC filter to supply the output voltage Vs.
Practically speaking, it is necessary to take into account the impedance of the output
transformer when it exists, to obtain the total inductance L. Often, the inductance is
built into the transformer, which is why it is not included in diagrams.
Fig. 5.41. Functional diagram of a PWM inverter.
Output impedance of a PWM inverter

It is possible to represent the above DC/AC converter and filter as a series
impedance Z1 and a parallel impedance Z2 (see the left-hand side of fig. 5.42).
The diagram can be modified to display the output impedance Zs.
The equivalent diagram (right-hand side of fig. 42) shows:
Z2
 V'm = voltage measured under no-load conditions, i.e. V'm = Vm
Z1  Z 2
 Zs = impedance measured at the output with V'm short-circuited, i.e.:
Z1 Z 2
Zs =
Z1  Z 2
Fig. 5.42. Equivalent diagram of an inverter as seen from the output.
07/2016 edition p. 160

Z2
The ratio is the transfer function of the filter, noted H(p).
Z1  Z 2
To simplify, C(p) x A is replaced by (p) which represents the transfer function of the
correction and amplification.
It is thus possible to replace fig. 5.41 by the functional diagram in fig. 5.43.
Fig. 5.43. Transformed functional diagram of a PWM-chopping inverter equipped with an

output-voltage regulation system with modulated chopping frequency.
It is possible to show that the inverter output impedance Zs in this case is equal to:
Z1
Z' s 
 (p)
(for further information, consult Schneider Electric Cahier Technique document no.
159).
This means that in the regulation pass band, the inverter output impedance is equal
to the filter series impedance divided by the correction and amplification gain.
Given the high gain in the regulation pass band, the output impedance is significantly
reduced compared to impedance Z1 of an inverter without this type of regulation.
Outside the regulation pass band, the inverter output impedance is equal to that of
the filter, but remains low because it corresponds to the impedance of a high-
frequency capacitor.
Consequently, the output impedance is a function of the frequency (see fig. 5.44).
 The free-frequency PWM (pulse width modulation) technique considerably limits
the output impedance.
Comparison of different Output impedance of various sources

sources
The curves in figure 5.44 show the output impedances for various sources with equal
output ratings as a function of the AC frequency. The impedances are plotted as a
percent of the load impedance Zc.
 Transformers and generators - the curve is a straight line corresponding to the
effect of the inductance L (the term which rapidly becomes dominant in the reactance
with respect to the resistance and which increases linearly as a function of the
frequency).
 Modern inverters implementing the PWM chopping technique with modulated
chopping frequency - at all harmonic frequencies, the Zs/Zc ratio is:
- less than that noted for other sources,
- low and virtually constant.
Conclusion
The PWM inverter is the source offering by far the lowest output impedance in the
presence of harmonics. It is clearly the best source on the market in terms of its
aptitude to minimise the voltage distortion caused by non-linear loads. It is five to six
times better than a transformer with an identical power rating.
 The new generation of UPSs implementing IGBTs and the PWM chopping
technique with frequency modulation are the best sources of sinusoidal voltage,
whatever the type of current drawn by the load.
07/2016 edition p. 161

Fig. 5.44. Output impedance of different sources depending on the frequency.
Free-frequency chopping Free-frequency chopping

Free frequency is an improvement to the PWM technique.
PWM chopping can use either of two techniques (fig. 5.45).
Fixed-frequency chopping
The chopping fronts occur at fixed, regular intervals corresponding to the chopping
frequency over one period.
The width of the pulses (square-wave pulses) can be modulated to conform to the
reference within the fixed time interval.
The two sine waves shown in the diagram correspond to the tolerance (< 1%)
around the reference sine wave.
Free-frequency chopping
The chopping fronts do not necessarily occur at fixed intervals. Chopping adapts to
the requirements of the regulation, i.e. the rate of change of the reference. The width
of the commutation fronts decreases (the chopping frequency increases) as the rate
of change of the reference sine wave increases. Conversely, the width of the
commutation fronts increases (the chopping frequency decreases) as the rate of
change of the reference decreases. On the whole, the average chopping frequency
is the same as that for the fixed-frequency technique (approximately 3 kHz). But
regulation is better because the commutation accelerates in the zones where the
rate of change is high (see fig. 5.46).
It can reach eight commutations per millisecond, i.e. a regulation time as low as 125
nanoseconds (compared to 300 ns for the fixed-frequency technique).
 The free-frequency technique increases the precision of the voltage regulation in
PWM inverters compared to the fixed-frequency technique.
07/2016 edition p. 162

The chopping frequency is fixed. The free chopping frequency increases where
Modulation takes place within fixed intervals, the rate of change of the reference is high.
whatever the rate of change of the reference Modulation therefore takes place within
sine wave. intervals that are shorter when the rate of
change of the reference sine wave increases.
Fixed frequency. Free frequency.
Fig. 5.45. PWM chopping with fixed-frequency and free-frequency regulation.
Free-frequency
switching
Quality
band with
variations
< 1%
Output voltage Up to 8 commutations
curve per millisecond
Fig. 5.46. Regulation employing free-frequency commutation.
07/2016 edition p. 163

PFC Rectifiers
Standard and PFC rectifiers

UPS units draw power from the AC distribution system via a rectifier/charger. With
respect to the upstream system, the rectifier is a non-linear load drawing harmonics.
In terms of harmonics, there are two types of rectifiers.
Standard rectifiers
These are three-phase rectifiers incorporating SCRs and using a six-phase bridge
with standard chopping of the current.
This type of bridge draws harmonic currents with orders of n = 6 k  1 (where k is a
whole number), mainly H5 and H7, and to a lesser degree H11 and H13.
Harmonics are controlled by using a filter.
"Clean" PFC (Power Factor Correction) rectifier

This type of rectifier comprises built-in IGBTs and a regulation system that adjusts
the input voltage and current to a reference sine wave. This technique ensures an
input voltage and current that are:
 perfectly sinusoidal, i.e. free of harmonics,
 in phase, i.e. an input power factor close to 1.
With this type of rectifier, no filters are required.
PFC rectifiers
Operating principle
The principle behind PFC rectifiers consists in forcing the current drawn to remain
sinusoidal. To that end, they use the PWM technique presented above.
The principle is that of a "voltage source" converter (see fig. 5.47), whereas the
SineWave active harmonic conditioner uses a "current source" converter.
The converter acts as a back-electromotive force (a "sinusoidal voltage generator")
on the distribution system and the sinusoidal current is obtained by inserting an
inductor between the utility power and the voltage source.
Even if other non-linear loads increase the voltage distortion on the distribution
system, the regulation can adapt to draw a sinusoidal current.
The frequency of low residual harmonic currents is the frequency of the modulation
and of its multiples. Frequency depends on the possibilities of the semiconductors
used.
Fig. 5.47. Operating principle of a clean "voltage generator" converter.
Implementation
Single-phase rectifier
Figure 5.48 shows the operation of a single-phase rectifier.
Voltage modulation is obtained by a controller that forces the current to follow a
sinusoidal current reference.
Transistor T and diode D make up the voltage modulator. The voltage u thus
changes between 0 and Vs according to whether transistor T is in the on or off state.
When transistor T conducts, the current in inductor L can only increase as the
voltage is positive and u = 0.
Therefore:
di e
 >0
dt L
07/2016 edition p. 164

PFC Rectifiers (Cont.)
When transistor T is off, the current in L decreases, provided that Vs is greater than
V, so that:
di e  Vs
 >0
dt L
For this condition to be fulfilled, voltage Vs must be greater than the peak voltage of
V, i.e. the rms value of the AC voltage multiplied by 2
If this condition is fulfilled, the current in L can be increased or decreased at any
time. The variation of the current in L with time can be forced by monitoring the
respective on and off times of transistor T. Figure 5.49 shows the evolution of current
IL with respect to a reference value.
From the source viewpoint, the converter must

act like a resistance, i.e. current i must be
sinusoidal and in phase with e (cos  = 1).
By controlling transistor T, the controller forces
IL to follow a sinusoidal current reference with
full-wave rectification. The shape of I is thus
necessarily sinusoidal and in phase with e.
What is more, to keep voltage Vs at its
nominal value at the output, the controller
adjusts the mean value of IL.
Fig. 5.48. Diagram of a clean, single-phase rectifier drawing a sinusoidal signal.
Fig. 5.49. Evolution of current IL with respect to the reference.
07/2016 edition p. 165

PFC Rectifiers (Cont.)
Three-phase rectifier/charger
The basic circuit arrangement is shown in fig. 5.50. It is similar to that in fig. 5.48,
with the inductor placed upstream of the rectifiers; the operating principle is also the
same. The monitoring system controls each power leg and forces the current drawn
on each phase to follow the sinusoidal reference.
Fig. 5.50. Diagram of a clean, three-phase rectifier drawing a sinusoidal signal.
07/2016 edition p. 166

Specifications Guides
07/2016 edition p. 167

Specifications Guides
Contents
MGE Galaxy 300 & 300i ................................................... 169
300 Bid Tender 3-1 ......................................................................170
300 Bid Tender 3-3 ......................................................................183
MGE Galaxy 3500 ............................................................ 206
3-1 Bid Tender .............................................................................207
3-3 Bid Tender .............................................................................217
MGE Galaxy 5500 ............................................................ 228
Bid Tender - Single ......................................................................229
Bid Tender - Parallel ....................................................................239
Bid Tender –Marine version .........................................................250
Galaxy VM ....................................................................... 259
Bid Tender ...................................................................................260
Bid Tender – Marine version ........................................................271
MGE Galaxy 7000 ............................................................ 281
Bid Tender - Single ......................................................................282
Galaxy VX ........................................................................ 303
Bid Tender ...................................................................................304
Gutor PXC ........................................................................ 318
Bid Tender ...................................................................................319
Smart UPS Online ........................................................... 329
Bid Tender ...................................................................................330
Smart UPS VT .................................................................. 342
Bid Tender - single .......................................................................343
Symmetra LX ................................................................... 364
Bid Tender ...................................................................................365
Symmetra PX .................................................................. 377
Bid Tender – 16/48 kW ................................................................378
Bid Tender – 96/160 kW ..............................................................387
Bid Tender – 250/ 500 kW ...........................................................395
Symmetra MW ................................................................ 409
Bid Tender - Single 400-600 ........................................................410
Bid Tender - Single 800-1600 ......................................................425
Bid Tender - Multi-Module ............................................................437
AccuSine .......................................................................... 451
Bid Tender ...................................................................................452
Modular Power Distribution ........................................... 460
Bid Tender – 144 kW ...................................................................461
Bid Tender – 277 kW ...................................................................467
STS Upsilon ..................................................................... 473
Bid Tender ..................................................................................474
07/2016 edition p. 168

MGE Galaxy 300 & 300i
3/3 Phase 10/15/20/30/40/60/80 kVA
3/1 Phase 10/15/20/30 kVA
07/2016 edition p. 169

MGE Galaxy 300 3:1- 10 to 40 kVA
APC by Schneider Electric

MGE GALAXY 300
Data Center Grade Three Phase Uninterruptible Power Supply
MGE Galaxy 300
Guide Specification for 3400 in / 1x 230V out Solutions
10kVA to 30Kva UPS
THIS GUIDE SPECIFICATION IS WRITTEN IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS INSTITUTE (CSI)
MASTERFORMAT. THIS SECTION MUST BE CAREFULLY REVIEWED AND EDITED BY THE ARCHITECT OR THE ENGINEER TO MEET THE
REQUIREMENTS OF THE PROJECT. COORDINATE THIS SECTION WITH OTHER SPECIFICATION SECTIONS IN THE PROJECT MANUAL AND
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
WHERE REFERENCE IS MADE THROUGHOUT THIS SECTION TO “PROVIDE”, “INSTALL”, “SUBMIT”, ETC., IT SHALL MEAN THAT THE
CONTRACTOR, SUBCONTRACTOR, OR CONTRACTOR OF LOWER TIER SHALL “PROVIDE”, “INSTALL”, SUBMIT”, ETC., UNLESS OTHERWISE
INDICATED.
THIS SECTION IS WRITTEN TO INCLUDE THE 2004 MASTERFORMAT AND THE 1995 MASTERFORMAT VERSIONS. WHERE APPLICABLE,
THESE ITEMS ARE BRACKETED AND, IN EACH CASE, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, THE FIRST CHOICE APPLIES TO THE 2004
MASTERFORMAT AND THE SECOND CHOICE APPLIES TO THE 1995 MASTERFORMAT.
SECTION [26 33 63] [16611]
SOLID STATE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
Part 1 GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, [Division 01 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS] [Division 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS], and other applicable specification sections
in the Project Manual apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2. SUMMARY
A.
Scope: Provide design and engineering, labor, material, equipment, related services, and supervision
required, including, but not limited to, manufacturing, fabrication, erection, and installation for a solid
state uninterruptible power supply (UPS) as required for the complete performance of the work, and as
shown on the Drawings and as herein specified.
B. Section includes: The work specified in this Section includes, but shall not be limited to, a three-
phase, on-line, continuous operation, solid-state uninterruptible power supply (UPS). The UPS shall
operate as an active power control system, working in conjunction with the building electrical system
to provide power conditioning and on-line power protection for the critical loads.
1.3. REFERENCES
A. General: The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The edition/revision of the
referenced publications shall be the latest date as of the date of the Contract Documents, unless
otherwise specified.
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

1. ANSI/IEEE C62.41, "Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits" (copyrighted by IEEE, ANSI approved).
C. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):

1. ISO 9001, "Quality Management Systems - Requirements."
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. NEMA PE 1, " Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) - Specification and Performance
Verification."
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
07/2016 edition p. 170

1. NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code" (copyrighted by NFPA, ANSI approved) - hereinafter referred
to as NEC.
F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. UL 1778, "Standard for Uninterruptible Power Supply Equipment" (copyrighted by UL, ANSI
approved).
1.4. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The UPS shall consist of the following easy to repair rectifier/inverter sections and easy to install
internal and external battery units.
B. The UPS shall be provided with separate feeds for rectifier/inverter section and the static bypass
switch.
C. Modes of operation: The UPS shall operate as an on-line system in the following modes:
i. Normal: The inverter and the rectifier shall operate in an on-line manner to continuously regulate
the power to the critical load. The rectifier shall derive power from the AC input source and
supply DC power to float charge the battery.
ii. Battery: Upon failure of the AC input source, the critical load shall continue being supplied by the
inverter without any switching. The inverter shall obtain its power from the battery. There shall be
no interruption in power to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the AC input source.
iii. Frequency converter: The output frequency will be fixed to 50Hz or 60Hz depending on the
output voltage setting which is fixed to 220Vac, 230Vac, or 240Vac for 50Hz and 220Vac or
230Vac for 60Hz.
iv. Recharge: Upon restoration of the AC input source, the UPS shall simultaneously recharge the
battery and regulate the power to the critical load.
v. Bypass: The static bypass switch shall be used for transferring the critical load to input supply
without interruption. Automatic re-transfer to normal operation shall also be accomplished with
no interruption in power to the critical load. The static bypass switch shall be fully rated and shall
be capable of manual operation.
The UPS shall be able to recharge the batteries while supplying full power to the load via the
static bypass switch.
vi. Internal maintenance bypass: The UPS shall be provided with an internal manual bypass to
simplify maintenance and shall be used for supplying the load directly from the mains supply,
while the UPS is taken out for maintenance.
D. The UPS shall be provided with RS-232 signaling and WEB/SNMP integration. This system must
provide a means for logging and alarming of all monitored points.
E. The UPS shall have nominal voltage of 3400/230V (adjustable for 3380/220V, 3415/240V), 50Hz
3 and 4-wire + earth configurations.
1.5. STANDARDS
A. Safety: IEC 62040-1-1

B. Emissions: EN62040-2/IEC 62040-2
C. Performance: EN/IEC 62040-3
1.6. CLASSIFICATION
A. Classification according to EN/IEC 62040-3: VFI-SS-112. The MGE Galaxy 300 Certificate of
Conformity lists the following classification: EN62040-1-1:2003 and EN62040-2: 2006.
1.7. SUBMITTALS
A. Proposal Submittals
i. System bill of materials (level one)

07/2016 edition p. 171
ii. Product catalogue sheets or equipment brochures

iii. Product specifications
iv. System operation diagram
v. Installation guide
vi. Drawings for requested optional accessories
B. Delivery Submittals
i. Unpacking manual, which includes instructions on storage, handling, examination, and

preparation of the system.
ii. Installation manual, which includes, installation of all systems.
iii. Operation manual, which includes start-up and operating instructions.
1.8. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications
1. Manufacturer experience: The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 20 years experience in

the design, manufacture, and testing of UPS systems.
2. ISO 9001 Certification: The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 & 14001 certified. Certification
assures that the vendor’s quality control & environmental measures have been certified by an
accredited registrar and meet internationally recognized standards.
3. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be a firm that shall have a minimum of five years of
successful installation experience with projects utilizing solid state UPS similar in type and
scope to that required for this Project.
B. Regulatory requirements
Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations of Federal,
State, and local authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from such authorities.
C. Factory testing
Prior to shipment the manufacturer shall complete a documented test procedure to test functions of the
UPS module and batteries (via a discharge test), when supplied by the UPS manufacturer, and
warrant compliance with this Section.
D. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct pre-installation conference in accordance with

[Section 01 31 19 - PROJECT MEETINGS] [Section 01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS]. Prior to
commencing the installation, meet at the Project site to review the material selections, installation
procedures, and coordination with other trades. Pre-installation conference shall include, but shall not
be limited to, the Contractor, the Installer, and any trade that requires coordination with the work. Date
and time of the pre-installation conference shall be acceptable to the Owner and the
Architect/Engineer.
E. Source Responsibility: Materials and parts comprising the UPS shall be new, of current
manufacture, and shall not have been in prior service, except as required during factory testing. Active
electronic devices shall be solid state and shall not exceed the manufacturer’s recommended
tolerances for temperature or current to ensure maximum reliability. Semiconductor devices shall be
sealed. Relays shall be provided with dust covers. The manufacturer shall conduct inspections on
incoming parts, modular assemblies, and final products.
1.9. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to the Project site in supplier’s or manufacturer’s original wrappings and containers,
labeled with supplier’s or manufacturer’s name, material or product brand name, and lot number, if
any.
B. Store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a well-ventilated area
protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
C. Products shall be packaged in a manner to prevent penetration by debris and to allow safe delivery by
modes of ground transportation and air transportation where specified.
07/2016 edition p. 172
D. Prior to shipping, products shall be inspected at the factory for damage.
E. Equipment shall be protected against extreme temperature and humidity and shall be stored in a
conditioned or protected environment.
F.Equipment containing batteries shall not be stored for a period exceeding three months without
powering up the equipment for a period of eight hours to recharge the batteries.
1.10. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental requirements
1. Storage ambient temperature: -10°C to 60°C (UPS), –10°C to 45°C (batteries).

2. Operating ambient temperature: 0°C to 35°C for batteries and UPS.
Up to 40°C with -12.5% load derating and 45°C with -25% load derating.
3. Relative humidity: 0 to 90%, non-condensing.
4. Storage altitude: 0 to 10000 m.
5. Operating altitude with no derating: 0 to 1000 m above sea level.
1.11. WARRANTY
A. General: See [Section 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES] [Section 01770 - CLOSEOUT
PROCEDURES].
B. Special Warranty: The Contractor shall warrant the work of this Section to be in accordance with the
Contract Documents and free from faults and defects in materials and workmanship for period
indicated below. This special warranty shall extend the one year period of limitations contained in the
General Conditions. The special warranty shall be countersigned by the Installer and the
manufacturer.
1. UPS Module: The UPS shall be covered by a full parts and labor warranty from the
manufacturer for a period of 12 months from date of installation or acceptance by the Owner or
18 months from date of shipment from the manufacturer, whichever occurs first.
2. Battery: The battery manufacturer’s warranty shall be passed through to the final Owner and
shall have a minimum period of one year.
C. Additional Owner Rights: The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent
with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.12. MAINTENANCE
A. The manufacturer shall, upon request, provide spare parts kits for the UPS module in a timely manner
as well as provide access to qualified factory-trained first party service personnel to provide
preventative maintenance and service on the UPS module when required.
B. UPS subassemblies, as well as the battery, shall be accessible from the front. UPS design shall
provide maximum reliability and minimum MTTR (mean time to repair). To that end, the UPS shall be
equipped with a self-test function to verify correct system operation. The self-test function shall identify
the subassembly requiring repair in the event of a fault. The electronic UPS control and monitoring
assembly shall therefore be fully microprocessor-based, thus doing away with potentiometer settings.
This shall allow:
1. Auto-compensation of component drift.
2. Self-adjustment of replaced subassemblies.
3. Extensive acquisition of information vital for computer-aided diagnostics (local or remote).
4. Socket connection to interface with computer-aided diagnostics system.
C. The UPS shall be repairable by replacing standard subassemblies requiring no adjustments.

Communication via a modem with a remote maintenance system shall be possible.
D. The manufacturer shall offer additional preventative maintenance and service contracts covering both
the UPS and the battery bank. Accredited professional service engineers employed exclusively in the
field of critical power systems service shall perform maintenance and service. The manufacturer shall
also offer extended warranty contracts.
07/2016 edition p. 173

Part 2 PRODUCT
2.1. MANUFACTURER
A. Provide APC by Schneider Electric: MGE GALAXY 300 system. No substitutes will be considered.
OR
B. APC by Schneider Electric: MGE GALAXY 300 system or approved equal. However, if a brand other
than APC by Schneider is proposed, the decision of the Engineer shall be final and a ―differentiation
report‖ must be submitted. This report shall address each paragraph of the specification individually
and list any and all differences from what is specified. If there are no differences, provide a report so
stating. If, after installation, omitted differences are found, the Contractor shall correct differences to
the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer or unsatisfactory equipment shall be removed and
equipment acceptable to the Owner and Engineer shall be installed at no additional cost to the
project. Also, make modifications to the facilities infrastructure as needed to accommodate the
substitute, at no additional cost to the project. Examples of modifications include, but are not limited
to the following:
i. Structural reinforcement to accommodate heavier equipment.

ii. Increased sizes of circuit breakers, raceways and wiring.
iii. Larger back-up generators (including upgraded accessories and wiring) to avoid instability
caused by most double conversion UPS systems.
iv. Larger HVAC equipment (including duct work and wiring) to accommodate increased heat
dissipation of less efficient UPS systems.
2.2. STATIC UPS
A. General
i. The UPS shall be housed in a freestanding enclosure. The cabinet shall be equipped for fork
truck lifting. Maintenance bypass shall be accessible from the front. Installation access shall be
from the backside of the system.
The maintenance bypass shall provide isolation of each part of the system individually: Input1,
Input 2, Output, Maintenance, Battery breaker.
ii. The UPS shall be in a self contained cabinet and comprise of a 10 kVA 15kVA, 20kVA and
30kVA power section; a bypass static switch; a battery for standard run time and an interface
LCD display. The power section shall be of the double conversion on-line topology with power
factor corrected inputs.
1. The UPS shall be sized for ______ kVA and ______ kW load.
2. The UPS battery shall be sized for ____ at a power factor of ____ for _____ minutes.
iii. The UPS shall have a short circuit withstand capability of 30kA
B. System input
i. Nominal Input voltage rating: 3×400/230V (adjustable for 3×380/220V or 3×415/240V)

ii. AC input voltage window: 100% load without charging at 342Vac input phase-phase voltage.
iii. AC input voltage window: 60% load at 285Vac input phase-phase voltage.
iv. Earthing principle: [TN-S] [TN-C] [TT] or [IT].
v. Input frequency: 45-65 Hz (auto sensing)
vi. Input power factor: 10 kVA: 0.92, 15-20 kVA: 0.98, 30-40 kVA: 0.99
vii. Input current distortion with no additional filters: < 9% THDI at 100% load
C. System output
i. Nominal Output voltage rating: 230V Single Phase

ii. Output voltage regulation for steady state and transient variations (at default parameter
settings):
1. ± 2% steady state for a static 100% balanced load.
2. ± 2% steady state for a static 100% unbalanced load.
07/2016 edition p. 174
3. ± 5% for a 0 to 100% load step.

iii. The system returns to +/- 4% range in rms value in less than 100 ms.
iv. Output frequency regulation:
1. The synchronized range is +/- 2% Hz while mains2 voltage is in tolerance
2. 50/60 Hz ± 0.1 Hz in battery operation.
v. Output voltage harmonic distortion:
1. <3.0% THD for linear load
2. <5% 100% unbalanced 100% non-linear loads
vi. Overload capability:
1. <=125%: 120 seconds.
2. <=150%: 10 seconds.
3. >150%: 100 milliseconds.
Note! Battery operation cannot support overload.
vii. Output Power Factor Rating: For loads exhibiting a power factor of 0.5 leading to 0.5 lagging, no
derating of the UPS shall be required.
viii. Short circuit withstand: The UPS must withstand a bolted-fault short circuit on the output without
damage to the UPS module.
ix. System AC-to-AC efficiency 100% load.
1. 10kVA 91.88%
2. 15kVA 91.99%
3. 20kVA 92.96%
4. 30kVA 92.75%
x. System AC-to-AC efficiency 50% load

1. 10kVA 89.63%
2. 15kVA 91.13%
3. 20kVA 92.89%
4. 30kVA 92.10%
xi. Acoustical noise at full RL load: dB(A) of noise, typically, measured at 1 meter from the operator
surface:
1. 10kVA 55
2. 15kVA 55
3. 20kVA 56
4. 30kVA 56
D. Components
i. Rectifier
1. The input current limiter must be designed to support 150% load at 342Va input voltage,
charge batteries at 10% of the UPS output rating, and provide regulation with mains
deviation of up/down to+/-15% of the nominal input voltage. During an overload condition the
input current must be limited to maximum 125% of the nominal output current.
2. Each UPS power module shall include an active power factor corrected, Insulated Gated
Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) rectifier.
3. DC Bus voltage shall be ± 360Vdc nominal. ±360/375/390 Vdc based on different input and
output voltage. If 230Vac is regarded as nominal value, the bus voltage should be ±375Vdc.
4. The battery charging shall keep the float voltage of +/- 218V (16 blocks), +/-204V (15
blocks).
5. The battery charging voltage shall be compensated against temperature variations (battery
temperature compensation) to always maintain optimal battery float charging voltage for
temperature excursions above or below 25°C. Temperature compensation rate shall be
3mV/degree/cell for ambient temperatures > 25°C and 0mV/°C for ambient temperatures <
25°C.
6. Input power factor shall be 0.98 lagging at 100% load with out the use of passive filters.
Rectifier shall employ electronic waveform control technology to maintain the current
sinusoidal.
7. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) current control shall be used. Digital Signal Processors
(DSP) shall be used for all monitoring and control tasks. Analog control is not acceptable.
8. Reflected input current Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) shall not exceed 9% at 100% load.
9. Typical battery recharge time per IEEE 485.
ii. Batteries
07/2016 edition p. 175
1. Standard battery technology shall be Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA).

2. Batteries shall be housed in the same rack as the power section. Batteries shall be on
shelves for quick replacement and servicing.
3. Battery voltage shall be battery temperature compensated as outlined in the rectifier section
above.
4. End of discharge: 158.4Vdc for 16*2 blocks, 148.5Vdc for 15*2 blocks.
5. For longer runtimes, external battery frames in the same design should be offered.
6. Battery charge current limit: Software and hardware current limit. The selection shall be
made from the UPS Soft Tuner.
7. The battery charging circuit shall remain active when the PFC operates normally.
iii. Inverter
1. The inverter shall consist of fast switching IGBT power module.
2. Inverter shall be PWM controlled using DSP logic. Analog control shall not be acceptable.
3. The inverter modules shall be rated for an output power factor at 0.8.
4. Nominal output voltage shall be 1×230V and adjustable for 1×240V, 50/60Hz, L1,N,PE.
5. Efficiency of each UPS at full load: Not less than
1. 10kVA 91.88%
2. 15kVA 91.99%
3. 20kVA 92.96%
4. 30kVA 92.75%
6. Output Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion at full load:

5. Less than 3% for 100% resistive load.
6. Less than 5% for computer load as defined by EN62040-3/IEC 62040-3.
7. Output voltage regulation
7. Static: +/- 2% at full linear load.
8. Dynamic for full linear load: +/- 5% at step load.
9. Dynamic for non-linear load: +/- 10%
8. Output frequency: 50Hz or 60Hz free running.
9. Crest factor: Unlimited but regulates it down to crest factor 2.0.
 Remote Emergency Power Off (EPO) is provided by a dry
connector.
iv. Static Bypass Switch
1. The static switch shall consist of fully rated Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCRs). Part rated
SCRs with a wrap around contactor are not acceptable.
2. The static bypass switch shall automatically transfer the critical load to bypass input supply
without interruption after the logic senses one of the following conditions:
10. Inverter overload beyond rating.
11. Battery runtime expired and bypass available.
12. Inverter failure.
13. Fatal error in control system.
3. The static bypass switch shall automatically retransfer from bypass to the inverter, when one
of the following conditions occurs:
14. The inverter is active (on).
4. The static bypass switch shall be equipped with a manual means of transferring the load to
bypass and back to inverter.
E. Mechanical
i. MGE GALAXY 300

1. MGE Galaxy 300 provides an external battery enclosure option. The UPS has an included
static bypass switch and a maintenance bypass switch. The enclosure shall have the
following specifications:
 Dead front construction.
 Heavy-duty design with an all-metal construction.
 Caster fitted for mobility.
 The cable entry shall be from the back of the UPS.
 The MGE GALAXY 300 UPS enclosure shall meet an ingress level of min. IP20.
G3HT10K3IB1 1300x400x860
G3HT10K3IB2 1300x400x860
G3HT10K3IS 1300x400x860
G3HT15K3IB1 1300x400x860
07/2016 edition p. 176
G3HT15K3IB2 1300x400x860
G3HT15K3I 1300x400x860
G3HT20K3IB1 1300x500x860
G3HT20K3IB2 1300x500x860
G3HT20K3I 1300x500x860
G3HT30K3IB1 1300x500x860
G3HT30K3IB2 1300x500x860
G3HT30K3I 1300x500x860
With CLA:
G3HT10K3IL 1300x400x860
G3HT15K3IL 1300x400x860
G3HT20K3IL 1300x500x860
G3HT30K3IL 1300x500x860
F. Display, controls, and alarms

i. A microprocessor controlled display unit shall be located on the front of the system. The display
shall consist of an alphanumeric display with backlight, an alarm LED, and a keypad consisting
of pushbutton switches.
ii. The following metered data, shall be available on the alphanumeric display:
1. Year, month, day, hour, minute, second of occurring events
2. Input AC voltage
3. Output AC voltage
4. Output AC current
5. Input Frequency
6. Battery voltage
7. Real-time battery temperature (internal or external)
iii. The display unit shall allow the user to display all active alarms and the 100 most recent status
and alarm events.
The following minimum set of alarm conditions shall be available:
1. AC bypass overload
2. AC normal is in derating
3. AC normal fault
4. AC normal voltage low
5. Battery breaker is open
6. Battery charger incompatible
7. Battery deep discharge
8. Battery fuse blown fault
9. Battery not connected
10. Battery SCR short circuit
11. Battery over voltage
12. Battery test fault
13. Battery temperature fault
14. Static bypass breaker is open
15. Output breaker is open
16. Bypass frequency out of tolerance
17. Bypass/Inverter sync fault
18. Bypass phase order fault
19. Bypass SCR fault
20. Bypass volt out of tolerance
21. Charger type setting conflict
22. Charger fault
23. Communication fault
24. DC bus fault
25. End of backup time
26. End of battery life
27. End of battery life (LCM)
28. End of wear part life
29. End of warranty
30. Entry service test mode
31. EPO active
32. Fan fault
33. Inverter SCR fault
07/2016 edition p. 177
34. Inverter thermal overload

35. Inverter current limitation
36. Inverter fault
37. Inverter overload
38. LCM has not been set
39. Load short circuit
40. Neutral loss fault
41. Normal frequency out of tolerance
42. Normal phase order fault
43. Nor voltage out of tolerance
44. Overload in battery mode
45. Personalization fault
46. PFC fault
47. PFC overload
48. PFC thermal overload
49. Power supply 2 fault
50. Pre end of backup time
51. Pre end of battery life
52. Pre end of warranty
53. Pre end of wear part life
54. Setting fault
55. Synchronization source fault
56. Transfer to bypass denied
57. Wrong batt +/- connection
58. Static bypass breaker closed in F-C mode
iv. The following controls or programming functions shall be accomplished by use of the display
unit. Push button membrane switches shall facilitate these operations.
1. Silence audible Alarm
2. Set the alphanumeric display language
3. Display or set the date and time
4. Enable or disable the automatic restart feature
5. Transfer critical load to and from static bypass
6. Test battery condition on demand
7. Set intervals for automatic battery tests
v. The following shall make up the UPS front panel user interface.
1. Indicating LED’s
15. Load When Green, this LED indicates that the inverter supports the load or
the load is supported by the AC bypass source. When Red, this LED
indicates that the inverter is not connected to the load and that the
load is not supported by the AC bypass source. When OFF, this LED
indicates that the maintenance bypass breaker is ON (closed).
16. Battery When Green, this LED indicates that the UPS is in battery operation.
When Red, this LED indicates that a major fault in the battery or the
charger has occurred, or the battery circuit breaker is OFF. When
OFF, this LED indicates that the batteries are charging or ready to
supply the load if the AC power fails.
17. Bypass When Green, this LED indicates that the load is supported by the AC
bypass source. When Red, this LED indicates that a major fault in the
bypass has occurred, the static bypass breaker is OFF in normal
mode, the static bypass breaker is ON in frequency converter mode,
or that a transfer to bypass is unavailable. When OFF, this LED
indicates that the load is not supported by the AC bypass source.
18. PFC When Green, this LED indicates that the power factor correction
works on normal AC input. When Red, this LED indicates that an AC
normal fault, a DC BUS fault, or a major PFC fault has occurred.
When OFF, this LED indicates that the PFC is not working.
19. Inverter When Green, this LED indicates that the inverter is operating. When
Red, this LED indicates that a major fault in the inverter or a fault in
the static switch has occurred. When OFF, this LED indicates that the
inverter is OFF.
07/2016 edition p. 178

20. Environment & minor fault LED: When Orange, this LED indicates that a minor fault
has occurred. When OFF, this LED indicates that no minor fault is
present.
21. Load unprotected: When Red, this LED indicates that a major fault has occurred, or
that the load is unprotected (and may be supplied by the AC bypass
source). When OFF, this LED indicates that no major faults are
present and that the load is protected.
22. Load protected: When Green, the load is protected. When OFF, the load is not
protected.
2. Push Button User Controls
23. Up Arrow
24. Down Arrow
25. Escape Key
26. Enter Key
27. ON Key
28. OFF Key
vi. For purposes of remote communications with the UPS the following shall be available and
contained within the UPS on a removable, ―hot swappable‖ ―smart slot‖ interface card:
1. RJ-11 Interface port for remote communications with a network via web browser or SNMP.
G. Battery
i. The batteries shall be of the YUASA or CSB type.
2.3. ACCESSORIES
A. StruxureWare Data Center Expert: A centralized infrastructure management platform hereafter
referred to as Data Center Expert shall be available for purposes of complete system monitoring and
management of all components outlined in this specification used as a single solution for small IT or
part of the StruxureWare software stack providing data to systems such as Data Center Operation.
1. Monitoring - Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring a PDU through a network of
Cat 5 cable and a switch supplied by the user. This switch shall relay information to Data
Center Expert, which in turn shall allow access to this information via the user’s public network
via a single IP address.
2. Monitored Values: Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring alarms, general status
parameters, voltage and current of the PDU.
3. Thresholds: For individualized customer needs, Data Center Expert shall allow for user
configurable thresholds for alarm notification. With this feature, Data Center Expert can notify
clients of reaching thresholds for PDU capacity, or branch circuit breaker capacity. Other
custom programmable alarm points for non-APC products shall also be available via dry
contact input signal.
4. Public Network Monitoring: Data Center Expert shall also be capable of monitoring other
APC devices that are connected to the client’s public network.
B. Battery cabinet option (only for CLA version)

i. For purposes of extending the UPS battery runtime, external extended runtime options shall be
available. The extended runtime option shall be housed in ―line up and match‖ type enclosures
and shall contain necessary hardware and cables to connect to the UPS, or between XR
enclosures. Each XR enclosure shall be equipped with removable batteries.
ii. The extended runtime system shall have a 250 VDC rated, thermal magnetic trip molded case
circuit breaker. Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with shunt trip mechanisms and 1A/1B
auxiliary contacts.
C. Software and connectivity

i. The Ethernet Web/SNMP Adaptor shall allow one or more network management systems (NMS)
to monitor and manage the UPS in TCP/IP network environments. The management information
base (MIB) shall be provided in DOS and UNIX "tar" formats. The SNMP interface adaptor shall
be connected to the UPS via the RS232 serial port on the standard communication interface
board.
ii. Unattended Shutdown
D. Remote UPS monitoring

07/2016 edition p. 179
i. Three methods of remote UPS monitoring shall be available:

1. Web Monitoring: Remote monitoring shall be available via a web browser such as Internet
Explorer.
2. RS232 Monitoring: Remote UPS monitoring shall be possible via either RS232 or contact
closure signals from the UPS.
3. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP): Remote UPS Monitoring shall be possible
through a standard MIB II compliant platform.
E. Software compatibility
i. The UPS manufacturer shall have available software to support graceful shutdown and or
remote monitoring for the following systems:
1. Microsoft Windows 95/98/XP
2. Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 SP6/2000
3. OS/2
4. Netware 3.2 – 5.1
5. MAC OS 9.04, 9.22, 10
6. Digital Unix/True 64
7. SGI 6.0-6.5
8. SCO UNIX
9. SVR4 2.3, 2.41
10. SCO Unix Ware 7.0 - 7.11
11. SUN Solaris 2.6-2.8
12. SUN OS 4.13, 4.14
13. IBM AIX 4.3x-4.33g, 5.1
14. HP-UX 9.x-11.i
Part 3 EXECUTION
3.1. EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed,
and notify the Contractor in writing, with a copy to the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, of any
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Beginning of the work shall indicate acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory by the
Installer.
3.2. INSTALLATION
Preparation and installation shall be in accordance with reviewed product data, final shop drawings,
manufacturer’s written recommendations, and as indicated on the Drawings.
3.3. FACTORY ASSISTED START-UP

A factory assisted UPS start-up shall be included with the product, factory trained service personnel shall
perform the following inspections, test procedures, and on-site training:
A. Visual Inspection:
1. Inspect equipment for signs of damage.
2. Verify installation per manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Inspect cabinets for foreign objects.
4. Inspect batteries.
5. Inspect the PFC, the AC caps and DC caps.
6. Measure board voltages.
B. Mechanical Inspection:
1. Check all UPS, external battery enclosures internal power wiring connections.
2. Check all UPS, external battery enclosures terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs for
tightness.
C. Electrical Inspection:
1. Verify correct input and bypass voltage.
2. Verify correct phase rotation of all mains connections.
07/2016 edition p. 180
3. Verify correct UPS control wiring and terminations.
4. Verify voltage of batteries.
5. Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly landed.
D. Site Testing:
1. Ensure proper system start-up.
2. Verify proper firmware control functions.
3. Verify proper firmware bypass operation.
4. Verify proper maintenance bypass switch operation.
5. Verify system set points.
6. Verify proper inverter operation and regulation circuits.
7. Simulate utility power failure.
8. Verify proper charger operation.
9. Document, sign, and date all test results.
E. On-Site Operational Training:

During the factory assisted start-up, operational training for site personnel shall include key pad
operation, LED indicators, start-up and shutdown procedures, maintenance bypass and AC
disconnect operation, and alarm information.
3.4. MANUFACTURER FIELD SERVICE
A. Worldwide service:
The UPS manufacturer shall have a worldwide service organization. Available, consisting of factory
trained field service personnel to perform start-up, preventative maintenance, and service of the
UPS system and power equipment. The service organization shall offer 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week, 365 days a year service support.
B. Replacement parts:
Parts shall be available through the worldwide service organization 24 hours a day, 7 days a week,
365 days a year. The worldwide service organization shall be capable of shipping parts within 4
working hours or on the next available flight, so that the parts may be delivered to the customer site
within 24 hours.
3.5. DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative of the manufacturer to provide

start-up service and to demonstrate and train the Owner’s personnel.
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
2. Train the Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
3. Review data in operation and maintenance manuals with the Owner’s personnel.
4. Schedule training with the Owner, through the Architect/Engineer, with at least seven day’s
advanced notice.
3.6. PROTECTION
Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the Installer, that shall ensure
that the solid state UPS shall be without damage at time of Substantial Completion.
07/2016 edition p. 181
3.7. MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS

A complete offering of preventative and full service maintenance contracts for the UPS system and the
battery system shall be available. All contract work shall be performed by APC factory trained service
personnel.
3.8. TRAINING
UPS service training workshop: A UPS service training workshop shall be available from the UPS
manufacturer. The service training workshop shall include a combination of lecture and practical
instruction with hands-on laboratory sessions. The service training workshop shall include instruction
about safety procedures, UPS operational theory, sub-assembly identification and operation, system
controls and adjustment, preventative maintenance, and troubleshooting.
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 182

MGE Galaxy 300 3:3 – 10 to 40 kVA

MGE GALAXY 300
3400/400-230V Solutions - Guide Specifications
10kVA to 40kVA UPS
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
SECTION [26 33 63] [16611]
Part 4 GENERAL
4.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, [Division 01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS] [Division 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS], and other applicable
specification sections in the Project Manual apply to the work specified in this Section.
4.2. SUMMARY
A. Scope: Provide design and engineering, labor, material, equipment, related services, and supervision
required, including, but not limited to, manufacturing, fabrication, erection, and installation for a solid
state uninterruptible power supply (UPS) as required for the complete performance of the work, and as
shown on the Drawings and as herein specified.
B. Section includes: This specification describes a three-phase, on-line, continuous operation, solid-
state uninterruptible power supply (UPS). The UPS shall operate as an active power control system,
working in conjunction with the building electrical system to provide power conditioning and on-line
power protection for the critical loads.
4.3. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The UPS shall consist of the following easy to repair rectifier/inverter sections and easy to install
internal and external battery units.
B. The UPS shall be provided with separate feeds for rectifier/inverter section and the static bypass
switch.
vii. Normal: The inverter and the rectifier shall operate in an on-line manner to continuously regulate
the power to the critical load. The rectifier shall derive power from the AC input source and
supply DC power to float charge the battery.
viii. Battery: Upon failure of the AC input source, the critical load shall continue being supplied by the
inverter without any switching. The inverter shall obtain its power from the battery. There shall be
no interruption in power to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the AC input source.
07/2016 edition p. 183

ix. Frequency converter: The output frequency will be fixed to 50Hz or 60Hz depending on the
output voltage setting which is fixed to 220Vac, 230Vac, or 240Vac for 50Hz and 220Vac or
230Vac for 60Hz.
x. Recharge: Upon restoration of the AC input source, the UPS shall simultaneously recharge the
battery and regulate the power to the critical load.
xi. Bypass: The static bypass switch shall be used for transferring the critical load to input supply
without interruption. Automatic re-transfer to normal operation shall also be accomplished with
no interruption in power to the critical load. The static bypass switch shall be fully rated and shall
be capable of manual operation.
The UPS shall be able to recharge the batteries while supplying full power to the load via the
static bypass switch.
xii. Internal maintenance bypass: The UPS shall be provided with an internal manual bypass to
simplify maintenance and shall be used for supplying the load directly from the mains supply,
while the UPS is taken out for maintenance.
D. The UPS shall be provided with RS-232 signaling and WEB/SNMP integration. This system must
provide a means for logging and alarming of all monitored points.
E. The UPS shall have nominal voltage of 3400/230V (adjustable for 3380/220V, 3415/240V), 50Hz
3 and 4-wire + earth configurations.
4.4. REFERENCES
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The edition/revision of the
referenced publications shall be the latest date as of the date of the Contract Documents, unless
otherwise specified.
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Inc. (IEEE):
1. ANSI/IEEE C62.41, "Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power
Circuits" (copyrighted by IEEE, ANSI approved).
1. ISO 9001, "Quality Management Systems Requirements."
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. NEMA PE 1, "Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) Specification and Performance
Verification."
1. NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code" (copyrighted by NFPA, ANSI approved) hereinafter
referred to as NEC.
1. UL 1778, "Standard for Uninterruptible Power Supply Equipment" (copyrighted by UL, ANSI
approved).
4.5. STANDARDS
A. Safety: IEC 62040-1-1

B. Emissions: EN62040-2/IEC 62040-2
C. Performance: EN/IEC 62040-3
4.6. CLASSIFICATION
A. Classification according to EN/IEC 62040-3: VFI-SS-112. The MGE Galaxy 300 Certificate of
Conformity lists the following classification: EN62040-1-1:2003 and EN62040-2: 2006.
4.7. SUBMITTALS
vii. System bill of materials (level one)

viii. Product catalogue sheets or equipment brochures
ix. Product specifications
x. System operation diagram
xi. Installation guide
07/2016 edition p. 184
xii. Drawings for requested optional accessories
iv. Unpacking manual, which includes instructions on storage, handling, examination, and
preparation of the system.
v. Installation manual, which includes, installation of all systems.
vi. Operation manual, which includes start-up and operating instructions.
4.8. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. QUALIFICATIONS
1. Manufacturer experience: The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 20 years experience in

the design, manufacture, and testing of UPS systems.
2. ISO 9001 Certification: The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 & 14001 certified. Certification
assures that the vendor’s quality control & environmental measures have been certified by an
accredited registrar and meet internationally recognized standards.
3. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be a firm that shall have a minimum of five years of
successful installation experience with projects utilizing solid state UPS similar in type and
scope to that required for this Project.
B. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations of Federal,
State, and local authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from such authorities.
C. FACTORY TESTING
Prior to shipment the manufacturer shall complete a documented test procedure to test functions of
the UPS module and batteries (via a discharge test), when supplied by the UPS manufacturer, and
D. PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
Conduct pre installation conference in accordance with [Section 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS]
[Section 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS]. Prior to commencing the installation, meet at the Project
site to review the material selections, installation procedures, and coordination with other trades.
Pre installation conference shall include, but shall not be limited to, the Contractor, the Installer, and
any trade that requires coordination with the work. Date and time of the pre installation conference
shall be acceptable to the Owner and the Architect/Engineer.
E. SOURCE RESPONSIBILITY
Materials and parts comprising the UPS shall be new, of current manufacture, and shall not have
been in prior service, except as required during factory testing. Active electronic devices shall be
solid state and shall not exceed the manufacturer’s recommended tolerances for temperature or
current to ensure maximum reliability. Semiconductor devices shall be sealed. Relays shall be
provided with dust covers. The manufacturer shall conduct inspections on incoming parts, modular
assemblies, and final products.
4.9. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the Project site in supplier’s or manufacturer’s original wrappings and containers,
labeled with supplier’s or manufacturer’s name, material or product brand name, and lot number, if
any.
B. Store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a well-ventilated area
C. Products shall be packaged in a manner to prevent penetration by debris and to allow safe delivery by
modes of ground transportation and air transportation where specified.

07/2016 edition p. 185
E. Equipment shall be protected against extreme temperature and humidity and shall be stored in a
conditioned or protected environment.
F. Equipment containing batteries shall not be stored for a period exceeding three months without
powering up the equipment for a period of eight hours to recharge the batteries.
4.10. PROJECT CONDITIONS

Do not install solid state UPS until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and
nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and
will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
A. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Storage ambient temperature: -10°C to 60°C (UPS), –10°C to 45°C (batteries).
2. Operating ambient temperature: 0°C to 35°C for batteries and UPS.
Up to 40°C with -12.5% load derating and 45°C with -25% load derating.
3. Relative humidity: 0 to 90%, non-condensing.
4. Storage altitude: 0 to 10000 m.
5. Operating altitude with no derating: 0 to 1000 m above sea level.
4.11. WARRANTY
A. General: See [Section 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES] [Section 01770 - CLOSEOUT
PROCEDURES].
B. Special Warranty: The Contractor shall warrant the work of this Section to be in accordance with the
Contract Documents and free from faults and defects in materials and workmanship for period
indicated below. This special warranty shall extend the one year period of limitations contained in the
General Conditions. The special warranty shall be countersigned by the Installer and the
manufacturer.
1. UPS Module: The UPS shall be covered by a full parts and labor warranty from the
manufacturer for a period of 12 months from date of installation or acceptance by the Owner or
18 months from date of shipment from the manufacturer, whichever occurs first.
2. Battery: The battery manufacturer’s warranty shall be passed through to the final Owner and
shall have a minimum period of one year.
C. Additional Owner Rights: The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent
with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
4.12. MAINTENANCE
A. The manufacturer shall, upon request, provide spare parts kits for the UPS module in a timely manner
as well as provide access to qualified factory-trained first party service personnel to provide
preventative maintenance and service on the UPS module when required.
B. UPS subassemblies, as well as the battery, shall be accessible from the front. UPS design shall
provide maximum reliability and minimum MTTR (mean time to repair). To that end, the UPS shall be
equipped with a self-test function to verify correct system operation. The self-test function shall identify
the subassembly requiring repair in the event of a fault. The electronic UPS control and monitoring
assembly shall therefore be fully microprocessor-based, thus doing away with potentiometer settings.
This shall allow:
C. The UPS shall be repairable by replacing standard subassemblies requiring no adjustments.

Communication via a modem with a remote maintenance system shall be possible.
D. The manufacturer shall offer additional preventative maintenance and service contracts covering both
the UPS and the battery bank. Accredited professional service engineers employed exclusively in the
field of critical power systems service shall perform maintenance and service. The manufacturer shall
also offer extended warranty contracts.
07/2016 edition p. 186

Part 5 PRODUCT
2.1. MANUFACTURER
A. Provide APC by Schneider Electric: MGE GALAXY 300 system. No substitutes will be considered.
OR
B. APC by Schneider Electric: MGE GALAXY 300 system or approved equal. However, if a brand
other than APC by Schneider is proposed, the decision of the Engineer shall be final and a
―differentiation report‖ must be submitted. This report shall address each paragraph of the
specification individually and list any and all differences from what is specified. If there are no
differences, provide a report so stating. If, after installation, omitted differences are found, the
Contractor shall correct differences to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer or unsatisfactory
equipment shall be removed and equipment acceptable to the Owner and Engineer shall be
installed at no additional cost to the project. Also, make modifications to the facilities infrastructure
as needed to accommodate the substitute, at no additional cost to the project. Examples of
modifications include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Structural reinforcement to accommodate heavier equipment.
b. Increased sizes of circuit breakers, raceways and wiring.
c. Larger back-up generators (including upgraded accessories and wiring) to avoid instability
Larger HVAC equipment (including duct work and wiring) to accommodate increased heat dissipation
of less efficient UPS systems.
2.2. STATIC UPS
A. General
iv. The UPS shall be housed in a freestanding enclosure. The cabinet shall be equipped for fork
truck lifting. Maintenance bypass shall be accessible from the front. Installation access shall be
from the backside of the system.
The maintenance bypass shall provide isolation of each part of the system individually: Input1,
Input 2, Output, Maintenance, Battery breaker.
v. The UPS shall be in a self contained cabinet and comprise of a 10 kVA 15kVA, 20kVA, 30kVA,
and 40kVA power section; a bypass static switch; a battery for standard run time and an
interface LCD display. The power section shall be of the double conversion on-line topology with
power factor corrected inputs.
vi. The UPS shall have a short circuit withstand capability of 40kA.
B. System input
viii. Nominal Input voltage rating: 3×400/230V (adjustable for 3×380/220V or 3×415/240V)
ix. AC input voltage window: 100% load without charging at 342Vac input phase-phase voltage.
x. AC input voltage window: 60% load at 285Vac input phase-phase voltage.
xi. Earthing principle: [TN-S] [TN-C] [TT] or [IT].
xii. Input frequency: 45-65 Hz (auto sensing)
xiii. Input power factor: 10 kVA: 0.92, 15-20 kVA: 0.98, 30-40 kVA: 0.99
xiv. Input current distortion with no additional filters: < 9% THDI at 100% load
C. System output
xii. Nominal Output voltage rating: 400V 3 Phase.
07/2016 edition p. 187

xiii. Output voltage regulation for steady state and transient variations (at default parameter settings):
xiv. The system returns to the +/- 4% range in rms value in less than 100 ms.
xv. Output frequency regulation:

3. Synchronized range is ± 2 Hz while mains2 is in tolerance.
4. 50/60 Hz ± 0.1 Hz in battery operation.
xvi. Output voltage harmonic distortion:

3. <3.0% THD for linear load.
4. <5% 100% unbalanced 100% non-linear loads.
xvii. Overload capability:

4. <=125%: 120 seconds.
5. <=150%: 10 seconds.
6. >150%: 100 milliseconds.
Note! Battery operation cannot support overload.
xviii. Output Power Factor Rating: For loads exhibiting a power factor of 0.5 leading to 0.5 lagging, no
de-rating of the UPS shall be required.
xix. Short circuit withstand: The UPS must withstand a bolted-fault short circuit on the output without
damage to the UPS module.
xx. System AC-to-AC efficiency 100% load.

5. 10kVA 92.42%
6. 15kVA 92.76%
7. 20kVA 92.70%
8. 30kVA 93.01%
9. 40kVA 92.81%
xxi. System AC-to-AC efficiency 50% load

5. 10kVA 90.47%
6. 15kVA 92.11%
7. 20kVA 92.42%
8. 30kVA 92.70%
9. 40kVA 93.05%
xxii. Acoustical noise at full RL load: dB(A) of noise, typically, measured at 1 meter from the operator
surface:
5. 10kVA 55
6. 15kVA 55
7. 20kVA 55
8. 30kVA 56
9. 40kVA 56
D. Components
v. Rectifier
07/2016 edition p. 188

11. The input current limiter must be designed to support 150% load at 342Va input voltage,
charge batteries at 10% of the UPS output rating, and provide regulation with mains
deviation of up/down to+/-15% of the nominal input voltage. The input current limiter must be
designed to support 150% load at 342 Va input voltage.
12. DC Bus voltage shall be ± 360Vdc nominal. ±360/375/390 Vdc based on different input and
output voltage. If 230Vac is regarded as nominal value, the bus voltage should be ±375Vdc.
13. The battery charging shall keep the float voltage of +/- 218V (16 blocks), +/-204V (15
blocks).
14. The battery charging voltage shall be compensated against temperature variations (battery
temperature compensation) to always maintain optimal battery float charging voltage for
temperature excursions above or below 25°C. Temperature compensation rate shall be
3mV/degree/cell for ambient temperatures > 25°C and 0mV/°C for ambient temperatures <
25°C.
sinusoidal.
vi. Batteries
9. Batteries shall be housed in the same rack as the power section. Batteries shall be on
10. Battery voltage shall be battery temperature compensated as outlined in the rectifier section
above.
11. End of discharge: 158.4Vdc for 16*2 blocks, 148.5Vdc for 15*2 blocks.
13. Battery charge current limit: The selection shall be made from the UPS Soft Tuner. The
battery charge current limit should be software and hardware current limit.
14. The battery charging circuit shall remain active when the PFC operates normally.
vii. Inverter
13. Nominal output voltage shall be 3×230V and adjustable for 1×240V, 50/60Hz, L1,N,PE.
14. Efficiency of each UPS at full load: Not less than
 10kVA 92.42%
 15kVA 92.76%
 20kVA 92.70%
 30kVA 93.01%
 40kVA 92.81%

31. Static: +/- 2% at full linear load .
32. Dynamic output voltage regulation for full linear load: +/- 5% at step
load.
33. Dynamic output voltage regulation for non-linear load: +/- 10%
18. Crest factor: Unlimited but regulates it down to crest factor 2.0.
 Remote Emergency Power Off (EPO) is provided by a dry
connector.
07/2016 edition p. 189

viii. Static Bypass Switch

5. The static switch shall consist of fully rated Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCRs). Part rated
SCRs with a wrap around contactor are not acceptable.
7. The static bypass switch shall automatically retransfer from bypass to the inverter, when one
of the following conditions occurs:
E. Mechanical
ii. MGE Galaxy 300

2. MGE Galaxy 300 provides an external battery enclosure option. The UPS has an included
static bypass switch and a maintenance bypass switch. The enclosure shall have the
following specifications:
 Dead front construction.
 Heavy-duty design with an all-metal construction.
 Caster fitted for mobility.
 The cable entry shall be from the back of the UPS.
 The MGE GALAXY 300 UPS enclosure shall meet an ingress level of min. IP20.
G3HT10KHB1 1300x400x860
G3HT10KHB2 1300x400x860
G3HT10KH 1300x400x860
G3HT15KHB1 1300x400x860
G3HT15KHB2 1300x400x860
G3HT15KH 1300x400x860
G3HT20KHB1 1300x400x860
G3HT20KHB2 1300x400x860
G3HT20KH 1300x400x860
G3HT30KHB1 1300x500x860
G3HT30KHB2 1300x500x860
G3HT30KH 1300x500x860
G3HT40KHB1 1300x500x860
G3HT40KHB2 1300x500x860
G3HT40KH 1300x500x860
With CLA:
G3HT10KHLS 1300x400x860
G3HT15KHLS 1300x400x860
G3HT20KHLS 1300x400x860
G3HT30KHLS 1300x500x860
G3HT40KHLS 1300x500x860
F. DISPLAY, CONTROLS AND ALARMS

vii. A microprocessor controlled display unit shall be located on the front of the system. The display
shall consist of an alphanumeric display with backlight, an alarm LED, and a keypad consisting
of pushbutton switches.
viii. The following metered data, shall be available on the alphanumeric display:
9. Input AC voltage
12. Input Frequency
13. Battery voltage
07/2016 edition p. 190
14. Real-time battery temperature (internal or external)
ix. The display unit shall allow the user to display all active alarms and the 100 most recent status
and alarm events.
59. AC bypass overload
60. AC normal is in derating
61. AC normal fault
62. AC normal voltage low
63. Battery breaker is open
64. Battery charger incompatible
65. Battery deep discharge
66. Battery fuse blown fault
67. Battery not connected
68. Battery SCR short circuit
69. Battery over voltage
70. Battery test fault
71. Battery temperature fault
72. Static bypass breaker is open
73. Output breaker is open
75. Bypass/Inverter sync fault
76. Bypass phase order fault
77. Bypass SCR fault
78. Bypass volt out of tolerance
79. Charger type setting conflict
80. Charger fault
81. Communication fault
82. DC bus fault
83. End of backup time
84. End of battery life
85. End of battery life (LCM)
86. End of wear part life
87. End of warranty
88. Entry service test mode
89. EPO active
90. Fan fault
91. Inverter SCR fault
92. Inverter thermal overload
93. Inverter current limitation
94. Inverter fault
95. Inverter overload
96. LCM has not been set
97. Load short circuit
98. Neutral loss fault
99. Normal frequency out of tolerance
100. Normal phase order fault
101. Nor voltage out of tolerance
102. Overload in battery mode
103. Personalization fault
104. PFC fault
105. PFC overload
106. PFC thermal overload
107. Power supply 2 fault
108. Pre end of backup time
109. Pre end of battery life
110. Pre end of warranty
111. Pre end of wear part life
112. Setting fault
113. Synchronization source fault
114. Transfer to bypass denied
07/2016 edition p. 191
115. Wrong batt +/- connection

116. Static bypass breaker closed in F-C mode
x. The following controls or programming functions shall be accomplished by use of the display
unit. Push button membrane switches shall facilitate these operations.
xi. The following shall make up the UPS front panel user interface.
39. Load When Green, this LED indicates that the inverter supports the load or
the load is supported by the AC bypass source. When Red, this LED
indicates that the inverter is not connected to the load and that the
load is not supported by the AC bypass source. When OFF, this LED
indicates that the maintenance bypass breaker is ON (closed).
40. Battery When Green, this LED indicates that the UPS is in battery operation.
When Red, this LED indicates that a major fault in the battery or the
charger has occurred, or the battery circuit breaker is OFF. When
OFF, this LED indicates that the batteries are charging or ready to
supply the load if the AC power fails.
41. Bypass When Green, this LED indicates that the load is supported by the AC
bypass source. When Red, this LED indicates that a major fault in the
bypass has occurred, the static bypass breaker is OFF in normal
mode, the static bypass breaker is ON in frequency converter mode,
or that a transfer to bypass is unavailable. When OFF, this LED
indicates that the load is not supported by the AC bypass source.
42. PFC When Green, this LED indicates that the power factor correction
works on normal AC input. When Red, this LED indicates that an AC
normal fault, a DC BUS fault, or a major PFC fault has occurred.
When OFF, this LED indicates that the PFC is not working.
43. Inverter When Green, this LED indicates that the inverter is operating. When
Red, this LED indicates that a major fault in the inverter or a fault in
the static switch has occurred. When OFF, this LED indicates that the
inverter is OFF.
44. Environment & minor fault LED: When Orange, this LED indicates that a minor fault
has occurred. When OFF, this LED indicates that no minor fault is
present.
45. Load unprotected: When Red, this LED indicates that a major fault has occurred, or
that the load is unprotected (and may be supplied by the AC bypass
source). When OFF, this LED indicates that no major faults are
present and that the load is protected.
46. Load protected: When Green, the load is protected. When OFF, the load is not
protected.
47. Up Arrow
48. Down Arrow
49. Escape Key
50. Enter Key
51. ON Key
52. OFF Key
xii. For purposes of remote communications with the UPS the following shall be available and
contained within the UPS on a removable, ―hot swappable‖ ―smart slot‖ interface card:
2. RJ-11 Interface port for remote communications with a network via web browser or SNMP.
07/2016 edition p. 192

G. Battery
1. The batteries shall be of the YUASA or CSB type.
H. ACCESSORIES
1. StruxureWare Data Center Expert: A centralized infrastructure management platform
hereafter referred to as Data Center Expert shall be available for purposes of complete system
monitoring and management of all components outlined in this specification used as a single
solution for small IT or part of the StruxureWare software stack providing data to systems such
as Data Center Operation.
a. Monitoring - Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring a PDU through a network
of Cat 5 cable and a switch supplied by the user. This switch shall relay information to
Data Center Expert, which in turn shall allow access to this information via the user’s
public network via a single IP address.
b. Monitored Values: Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring alarms, general
status parameters, voltage and current of the PDU.
c. Thresholds: For individualized customer needs, Data Center Expert shall allow for user
configurable thresholds for alarm notification. With this feature, Data Center Expert can
notify clients of reaching thresholds for PDU capacity, or branch circuit breaker capacity.
Other custom programmable alarm points for non- APC products shall also be available
via dry contact input signal.
d. Public Network Monitoring: Data Center Expert shall also be capable of monitoring other
2. Battery cabinet options (only for CLA version)

a. For purposes of extending the UPS battery runtime, external extended runtime options
shall be available. The extended runtime option shall be housed in ―line up and match‖
type enclosures and shall contain necessary hardware and cables to connect to the UPS,
or between XR enclosures. Each XR enclosure shall be equipped with removable
batteries.
b. The extended runtime system shall have a 250 VDC rated, thermal magnetic trip molded
case circuit breaker. Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with shunt trip mechanisms
and 1A/1B auxiliary contacts.
3. Software and connectivity

a. The Ethernet Web/SNMP Adaptor shall allow one or more network management systems
(NMS) to monitor and manage the UPS in TCP/IP network environments. The
management information base (MIB) shall be provided in DOS and UNIX "tar" formats.
The SNMP interface adaptor shall be connected to the UPS via the RS232 serial port on
the standard communication interface board.
b. Unattended Shutdown.
4. Remote UPS monitoring

Three methods of remote UPS monitoring shall be available:
a. Web Monitoring: Remote monitoring shall be available via a web browser such as Internet
Explorer.
b. RS232 Monitoring: Remote UPS monitoring shall be possible via either RS232 or contact
closure signals from the UPS.
c. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP): Remote UPS Monitoring shall be
possible through a standard MIB II compliant platform.
5. Software compatibility
The UPS manufacturer shall have available software to support shutdown and or remote
monitoring for the following systems:
a. Microsoft Windows 95/98/XP
b. Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 SP6/2000
c. OS/2
d. Netware 3.2 – 5.1
e. MAC OS 9.04, 9.22, 10
f. Digital Unix/True 64
g. SGI 6.0-6.5
h. SCO UNIX
i. SVR4 2.3, 2.41
07/2016 edition p. 193
j. SCO Unix Ware 7.0 - 7.11

k. SUN Solaris 2.6-2.8
l. SUN OS 4.13, 4.14
m. IBM AIX 4.3x-4.33g, 5.1
n. HP-UX 9.x-11.i
Part 6 EXECUTION
6.1. EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed,
and notify the Contractor in writing, with a copy to the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, of any
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Beginning of the work shall indicate acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory by the
Installer.
6.2. INSTALLATION
Preparation and installation shall be in accordance with reviewed product data, final shop drawings,
6.3. FACTORY ASSISTED START-UP
A factory assisted UPS start-up shall be included with the product, factory trained service personnel shall
perform the following inspections, test procedures, and on-site training:
A. Visual Inspection
i. Inspect equipment for signs of damage.

ii. Verify installation per manufacturer’s instructions.
iii. Inspect cabinets for foreign objects.
iv. Inspect batteries.
v. Inspect the PFC, the AC caps and DC caps.
vi. Measure board voltages.
B. Mechanical Inspection
i. Check all UPS, external battery enclosures internal power wiring connections.
ii. Check all UPS, external battery enclosures terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs for
tightness.
C. Electrical Inspection
i. Verify correct input and bypass voltage.

ii. Verify correct phase rotation of all mains connections.
iii. Verify correct UPS control wiring and terminations.
iv. Verify voltage of batteries.
v. Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly landed.
D. Site Testing
i. Ensure proper system start-up.

ii. Verify proper firmware control functions.
iii. Verify proper firmware bypass operation.
iv. Verify proper maintenance bypass switch operation.
v. Verify system set points.
vi. Verify proper inverter operation and regulation circuits.
vii. Simulate utility power failure.
viii. Verify proper charger operation
ix. Document, sign, and date all test results.
07/2016 edition p. 194
E. On-Site Operational Training: During the factory assisted start-up, operational training for site
personnel shall include key pad operation, LED indicators, start-up and shutdown procedures,
maintenance bypass and AC disconnect operation, and alarm information.
6.4. MANUFACTURER FIELD SERVICE

A. Worldwide service: The UPS manufacturer shall have a worldwide service organization. Available,
consisting of factory trained field service personnel to perform start-up, preventative maintenance,
and service of the UPS system and power equipment. The service organization shall offer 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year service support.
B. Replacement parts: Parts shall be available through the worldwide service organization 24 hours a
day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year. The worldwide service organization shall be capable of
shipping parts within 4 working hours or on the next available flight, so that the parts may be
delivered to the customer site within 24 hours.
6.5. DEMONSTRATION
Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative of the manufacturer to provide start-up
service and to demonstrate and train the Owner’s personnel.
A. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B. Train the Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
C. Review data in operation and maintenance manuals with the Owner’s personnel.
D. Schedule training with the Owner, through the Architect/Engineer, with at least seven day’s
advanced notice.
6.6. MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS

A complete offering of preventative and full service maintenance contracts for the UPS system and the
personnel.
6.7. TRAINING
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 195

Schneider Electric
GALAXY 300
3400/400 V Solutions - Guide Specifications
60 kVA to 80 kVA UPS
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
SECTION [26 33 63] [16611]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, [Division 01 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS] [Division 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS], and other applicable specification sections in the
Project Manual apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Scope: Provide design and engineering, labor, material, equipment, related services, and supervision required,
including, but not limited to, manufacturing, fabrication, erection, and installation for a solid state uninterruptible
power supply (UPS) as required for the complete performance of the work, and as shown on the Drawings and as
herein specified.
B. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section includes, but shall not be limited to, a three-phase, on-line,
solid state UPS. The UPS shall operate as an active power control system, working in conjunction with the
building electrical system to provide power conditioning and on-line power protection for the critical loads.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. General: The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The edition/revision of the referenced publications shall
be the latest date as of the date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise specified.
1. ANSI/IEEE C62.41, "Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits"
(copyrighted by IEEE, ANSI approved).
C. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC):
1. IEC 61000-4, ―Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards.‖
D. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):
1. NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code" (copyrighted by NFPA, ANSI approved) - hereinafter referred to as
NEC.
07/2016 edition p. 196

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: See [Section 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES] [Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS].

B. Product Data: Submit product data showing material proposed. Submit sufficient information to determine
compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. Product data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the
following:
1. Catalog sheets and technical data sheets to indicate physical data and electrical performance, electrical
characteristics, and connection requirements.
2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions indicating application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by
product inspecting and testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, installation, and starting of the product. Include equipment installation outline, connection
diagram for external cabling, internal wiring diagram, and written instruction for installation.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each product and accessory required. Include information not fully
detailed in manufacturer’s standard product data, including, but not limited to, complete electrical characteristics
and connection requirements. Provide detailed equipment outlines with cabinet dimensions and spacing
requirements; location of conduit entry/exit paths; location of floor/seismic mounting; available battery types/sizes;
cabinet weights; heat rejection and air flow requirements; single-line diagram; and control and external wiring.
D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams detailing power, signal, and control systems, clearly differentiating
between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring, and between components provided by the
manufacturer and those provided by others.
E. Contract Closeout Submittals:
1. Project Record Documents: Submit a complete set of installation drawings showing all the information
specified elsewhere in this Section.
2. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data to include in operation and
maintenance manuals specified in [Division 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS] [Division 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS], including, but not limited to, safe and correct operation of UPS functions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be a firm engaged in the manufacture of solid state UPS
of types and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for a
minimum of 20 years.
a. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 certified and shall be designed to internationally
accepted standards.
2. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be a firm that shall have a minimum of five years of successful
installation experience with projects utilizing solid state UPS similar in type and scope to that required for this
Project.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances, and
regulations of Federal, State, and local authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from such
authorities.
1. Safety: IEC 62040-1: 2008-06, 1st edition Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) - Part 1: General and
safety requirements for UPS EN 62040-1: 2013-01, 1st edition amendment 1
2. EMC: IEC 62040-2: 2005-10, 2nd edition Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) - Part 2: Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
3. Performance: 62040-3: 2011-03, 2nd edition Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) - Part 3: Method of
specifying the performance and test requirements
4. Environmental: IEC 62040-4: 2013-04, 1st edition Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) - Part 4:
Environmental aspects – Requirements and reporting
5. Markings: CE, EAC
6. Transportation: ISTA 2B
A. Factory Testing: Prior to shipment the manufacturer shall complete a documented test procedure to test
functions of the UPS module and batteries (via a discharge test), when supplied by the UPS manufacturer, and
B. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct pre-installation conference in accordance with

[Section 01 31 19 - PROJECT MEETINGS] [Section 01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS]. Prior to commencing the
installation, meet at the Project site to review the material selections, installation procedures, and coordination
with other trades. Pre-installation conference shall include, but shall not be limited to, the Contractor, the Installer,
07/2016 edition p. 197
and any trade that requires coordination with the work. Date and time of the pre-installation conference shall be
acceptable to the Owner and the Architect/Engineer.
C. Source Responsibility: Materials and parts comprising the UPS shall be new, of current manufacture, and shall
not have been in prior service, except as required during factory testing. Active electronic devices shall be solid
state and shall not exceed the manufacturer’s recommended tolerances for temperature or current to ensure
maximum reliability. Semiconductor devices shall be sealed. Relays shall be provided with dust covers. The
manufacturer shall conduct inspections on incoming parts, modular assemblies, and final products.
1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the Project site in supplier’s or manufacturer’s original wrappings and containers, labeled with
supplier’s or manufacturer’s name, material or product brand name, and lot number, if any.
B. Store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a well-ventilated area protected
from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
C. Products shall be packaged in a manner to prevent penetration by debris and to allow safe delivery by modes of
ground transportation and air transportation where specified.
E. Equipment shall be protected against extreme temperature and humidity and shall be stored in a conditioned or
protected environment.
F. Equipment containing batteries shall not be stored for a period exceeding three months without powering up the
equipment for a period of eight hours to recharge the batteries.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Do not install solid state UPS until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet
work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and
humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
1. The UPS shall operate under the following environmental conditions:
a. Temperature:
1) Storage ambient temperature: -25 °C to 55 °C (UPS), –15 °C to 40 °C (batteries).
2) Operating ambient temperature: 0°C to 40 °C for batteries and UPS.
b. Relative humidity (operating and storage): 0% to 95% non-condensing.
c. Storage altitude: ≤ 15000 m above sea level (or in an environment with equivalent air pressure).
d. Operating altitude with no derating: 0 to 1000 m above sea level.
e. Audible Noise: 65 dBA at 100% load.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. General: See [Section 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES] [Section 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES].
B. Special Warranty: The Contractor shall warrant the work of this Section to be in accordance with the Contract
Documents and free from faults and defects in materials and workmanship for period indicated below. This
special warranty shall extend the one year period of limitations contained in the General Conditions. The special
warranty shall be countersigned by the Installer and the manufacturer.
1. UPS Module: The UPS shall be covered by a full parts and labor warranty from the manufacturer for a
period of 12 months from date of installation or acceptance by the Owner or 18 months from date of
shipment from the manufacturer, whichever occurs first.
2. Battery: The battery manufacturer’s warranty shall be passed through to the final Owner and shall have a
minimum period of one year.
C. Additional Owner Rights: The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under
other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties
made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Schneider Electric: GALAXY 300 system. No substitutes will be considered.

or
07/2016 edition p. 198

B. Schneider Electric: GALAXY 300 system or approved equal. However, if a brand other than Schneider
Electric is proposed, the decision of the Engineer shall be final and a ―differentiation report‖ must be submitted.
This report shall address each paragraph of the specification individually and list any and all differences from
what is specified. If there are no differences, provide a report so stating. If, after installation, omitted differences
are found, the Contractor shall correct differences to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer or
unsatisfactory equipment shall be removed and equipment acceptable to the Owner and Engineer shall be
installed at no additional cost to the project. Also, make modifications to the facilities infrastructure as needed
to accommodate the substitute, at no additional cost to the project. Examples of modifications include, but are
not limited to the following:
1. Structural reinforcement to accommodate heavier equipment
2. Increased sizes of circuit breakers, raceways and wiring
3. Larger back-up generators (including upgraded accessories and wiring) to avoid instability caused by
most double conversion UPS systems
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. UPS Design Requirements:

1. The UPS shall be housed in a freestanding enclosure. The cabinet shall be equipped for fork truck lifting.
Maintenance bypass shall be accessible from the front.
2. Output power factor rating: 0.8 (0.9 when the temperature is below 25 °C in normal operation).
3. Input Voltage range: 342-477, three-phase, 4 wires plus ground.
4. Output Voltage: 380, 400, 415 volts AC, three-phase, 4 wires plus ground.
5. Battery Autonomy: UPS shall be capable of operating at 70% load for 5 or 10 minutes with internal battery
and 10, 15, or 30 minutes with external battery at 0.8 PF output at a temperature of 25° C (77° F) on battery
power.
6. Battery Type: Valve regulated sealed lead acid (VRLA).
B. AC Input Characteristics:
1. Input voltage: 3×400 V (adjustable for 3×380 V or 3×415 V).
2. Input frequency: 45-65 (auto sensing).
3. Input power factor at 100% load: 0.99.
4. Total Harmonic Distortion: < 5% THDI at 100% linear load
5. Inrush Current: Less than nominal input current for less than one cycle.
C. AC Output Characteristics:
1. Output voltage: 400 V.
2. Frequency: 50/60 Hz, ±1.0%.
3. Output voltage tolerance: ±2.0%.
4. Output voltage distortion:
a. < 3% at 100% linear load
b. < 5% at 100% non-balanced
5. Overload capability:
a. 125% for 10 minutes at 40 °C
b. 150% for 1 minute at 40 °C
c. >150% for 100 milliseconds at 40 °C
Note: Battery operation cannot support overload.
6. Power Factor: 0.8 (0.9 when the temperature is below 25 °C in normal operation).
7. Load power factor of 0.5 leading to 0.5 lagging without derating.
8. System AC-to-AC efficiency:
a. 60 kVA system:
1) At 25% load: 91.3
2) At 50% load: 93.2
3) At 75% load: 93.5
4) At 100% load: 93.3
b. 80 kVA system:
1) At 25% load: 92.3
2) At 50% load: 93.4
3) At 75% load: 93.3
4) At 100% load: 92.9
D. Battery:
1. Nominal battery voltage:
a. 192 VDC for 16 blocks
07/2016 edition p. 199
b. 180 VDC for 15 blocks

2. End of discharge voltage:
a. 158 VDC for 16 blocks
b. 148 VDC for 15 blocks
3. Battery voltage shall be battery temperature compensated.
4. The battery charging shall keep the float voltage of +/- 218 V (16 blocks), +/-206 V (15 blocks).
5. Batteries shall be housed in the same rack as the power section. Batteries shall be on shelves for quick
replacement and servicing.
7. The batteries shall be of the YUASA or Exide type.
8. Maximum DC Current: Maximum DC current at cutoff voltage shall be 236 amperes.
2.3 MODES OF OPERATION
A. UPS module shall be designed to operate as a double conversion, on-line reverse transfer system in the following
modes.
1. Normal: The inverter and the rectifier shall operate in an on-line manner to continuously regulate the
power to the critical load. The rectifier shall derive power from the AC input source and supply DC power
to float charge the battery.
2. Battery: Upon failure of the mains AC power source, the critical load shall be supplied by the inverter, which,
without any interruption, shall obtain its power from the battery.
3. Recharge: Upon restoration of the mains AC power source (prior to complete battery discharge), the PFC
rectifier shall power the inverter and simultaneously recharge the battery.
4. Bypass: The static bypass transfer switch shall be used to transfer the load to the bypass without
interruption to the critical power load. Automatic re-transfer to normal operation shall also be accomplished
without interruption to the critical load power. The static bypass switch shall be fully rated and shall be
capable of manual operation.
The UPS shall be able to recharge the batteries while supplying full power to the load via the static bypass
switch.
5. Maintenance bypass: In maintenance bypass the UPS shall keep the load supplied with mains power
during maintenance of the UPS. Mains power shall be sent directly to the connected load bypassing all
internal UPS functions and filters. Battery backup shall not be available in maintenance bypass operation.
6. Frequency converter: In frequency converter operation the output frequency will be fixed at 50 Hz or 60 Hz
depending on the output voltage setting.
7. ECO mode: In ECO mode the static bypass shall supply the load with power and shall be able to return to
normal operation immediately.
2.4 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
A. PFC Rectifier and Battery Charger: Each UPS power module shall include an active power factor corrected,
Insulated Gated Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) rectifier:
1. Input Power Factor Correction (PFC): The PFC rectifier shall be power factor corrected so as to maintain
an input power factor of 0.99 lagging to unity at 100% or above load levels to ensure generator compatibility
and avoid reflected harmonics from disturbing loads sharing the mains power.
2. Input Harmonic Current Suppression: The PFC rectifier shall produce a sinusoidal input AC current on
each phase with low harmonic content, limiting THD on the UPS input to below 5 % . This shall eliminate the
requirement for an input filter.
3. Battery Charger Current Limiting: The UPS shall be equipped with a system designed to limit the battery
recharge current (from 0.05 C10 to 0.1 C10).
4. Charging Levels: The battery charging circuitry shall be capable of being set for automatic battery recharge
operation, float service, manual battery charge service, and equalizing or commissioning operation.
5. Temperature Compensated Charging: The battery charger shall be equipped with a temperature probe to
enable temperature compensated charging and shall adjust the battery float voltage to compensate for the
ambient temperature using a negative temperature coefficient of 3 mV per cell per degree Celsius at a
nominal temperature of 25 °C.
6. Battery Capacity: The battery charger shall have sufficient capacity to support a fully loaded inverter and
shall fully recharge the battery to 90% of its full capacity within 8 hours.
B. Inverter:
3. The inverter modules shall be rated for an output power factor at 0.8 with temperature above 25 °C and
0.9 with temperature below 25 °C.
07/2016 edition p. 200

5. Crest factor: 3:1
C. Static Bypass – 100% Rated, Continuous Duty: The static switch shall consist of fully rated Silicon Controlled
Rectifiers (SCRs). Part rated SCRs with a wrap around contactor are not acceptable:
1. Uninterrupted Transfer: The static bypass transfer switch shall automatically cause the bypass source to
assume the critical load without interruption after the logic senses one of the following conditions:
a. Inverter overload exceeds unit's rating.
b. Battery protection period expired and bypass current is available.
c. Inverter inoperable.
d. Control system inoperable.
2. The static bypass switch shall automatically retransfer from bypass to the inverter, when one of the
following conditions occurs:
a. The inverter is active (on).
3. The static bypass switch shall be equipped with a manual means of transferring the load to bypass and
back to the inverter.
2.5 SYSTEM CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
A. Display: A microprocessor controlled display unit shall be located on the front of the system. The display shall
consist of an alphanumeric display with backlight, an alarm LED, and a keypad consisting of pushbutton
switches.
1. Measurements: The following metered data shall be available on the alphanumeric display:
a. Year, month, day, hour, minute, second of occurring events.
b. Input AC voltage.
c. Output AC voltage.
d. Output AC current.
e. Input frequency.
f. Battery voltage.
g. Real-time battery temperature (internal or external).
2. Alarms:
a. The display unit shall allow the user to display all active alarms and the 100 most recent status and
alarm events. The following minimum set of alarm conditions shall be available:
1) AC bypass overload
2) AC normal is in derating
3) AC normal out of range
4) AC normal voltage low
5) Ambient temp high
6) Battery breaker is open
7) Battery charger incompatible
8) Battery deep discharge
9) Battery fuse blown
10) Battery not connected
11) Battery SCR short circuit
12) Battery over voltage
13) Battery test incorrect
14) Battery temperature alarm
15) Breaker SSIB is open
16) Breaker UOB is open
17) Bypass frequency out of tolerance
18) Bypass/Inverter sync alarm
19) Bypass phase order alarm
20) Bypass SCR inoperable
21) Bypass voltage out of tolerance
22) Charger inoperable
23) Communication lost
24) DC bus inoperable
25) End of backup time
26) End of battery life
27) EPO active
28) Fan inoperable
29) Inverter SCR inoperable
30) Inverter thermal overload
07/2016 edition p. 201
31) Inverter current limitation

32) Inverter inoperable
33) Inverter overload
34) Load short circuit
35) Neutral lost
36) Normal frequency out of tolerance
37) Normal phase order alarm
38) Normal voltage out of tolerance
39) Overload in battery mode
40) Personalization incorrect
41) PFC inoperable
42) PFC overload
43) PFC thermal overload
44) Power supply 2 inoperable
45) Pre end of backup time
46) Synchronization source out of range
47) Transfer to bypass denied
48) UPS not calibrated
49) Voltage detected on bypass
50) Wrong batt +/- connect
3. Controls: The following controls or programming functions shall be accomplished by use of the display
unit. Push button membrane switches shall facilitate these operations:
a. Silence audible alarm
b. Set the alphanumeric display language
c. Display or set the date and time
d. Enable or disable the automatic restart feature
e. Transfer critical load to and from static bypass
f. Set intervals for automatic battery tests
4. Display keys:
a. Up arrow
b. Down arrow
c. Escape key
d. OK key
e. On key
f. Off key
B. LED Status Indicators:
1. Load: When Green, this LED indicates that the inverter supports the load or the load is supported by the
AC bypass source. When Red, this LED indicates that the inverter is not connected to the load and that
the load is not supported by the AC bypass source. When OFF, this LED indicates that the maintenance
bypass breaker is ON (closed)
2. Battery: When Green, this LED indicates that the UPS is in battery operation. When Red, this LED
indicates that a major fault in the battery or the charger has occurred, or the battery circuit breaker is OFF.
When OFF, this LED indicates that the batteries are charging or ready to supply the load if the AC power
fails.
3. Bypass: When Green, this LED indicates that the load is supported by the AC bypass source. When Red,
this LED indicates that a major fault in the bypass has occurred, the static bypass breaker is OFF in
normal mode, the static bypass breaker is ON in frequency converter mode, or that a transfer to bypass is
unavailable. When OFF, this LED indicates that the load is not supported by the AC bypass source.
4. PFC: When Green, this LED indicates that the power factor correction works on normal AC input. When
Red, this LED indicates that an AC normal fault, a DC BUS fault, or a major PFC fault has occurred. When
OFF, this LED indicates that the PFC is not working.
5. Inverter: When Green, this LED indicates that the inverter is operating. When Red, this LED indicates that
a major fault in the inverter or a fault in the static switch has occurred. When OFF, this LED indicates that
the inverter is OFF.
6. Environment or minor alarm: When Orange, this LED indicates that a minor alarm is present. When OFF,
this LED indicates that no minor alarm is present.
7. Load unprotected: When Red, this LED indicates that a major alarm is present, or that the load is
unprotected (and may be supplied by the AC bypass source). When OFF, this LED indicates that no major
alarms are present and that the load is protected
8. Load protected: When Green, the load is protected. When OFF, the load is not protected.
2.6 MECHANICAL DESIGN AND VENTILATION

07/2016 edition p. 202
A. Cabinet: The Galaxy 300 UPS cabinet shall meet an ingress level of minimum IP20.
B. Cable access: The standard UPS available shall accommodate bottom entry cables.
C. Cabinet Weights and Dimensions: The width of the UPS shall be 27.6 inches (700 mm) and shall have a
maximum weight of 1620 pounds (735) kg).
D. Heat dissipation:
1. 60 kVA system: 3.6 kW
2. 80 kVA system: 4.9 kW
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. StruxureWare Data Center Expert: A centralized infrastructure management platform hereafter referred to as
Data Center Expert shall be available for purposes of complete system monitoring and management of all
components outlined in this specification used as a single solution for small IT or part of the StruxureWare
software stack providing data to systems such as Data Center Operation.
1. Monitoring - Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring a PDU through a network of Cat 5 cable
and a switch supplied by the user. This switch shall relay information to Data Center Expert, which in turn
shall allow access to this information via the user’s public network via a single IP address
2. Monitored Values: Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring alarms, general status parameters,
voltage and current of the PDU.
3. Thresholds: For individualized customer needs, Data Center Expert shall allow for user configurable
thresholds for alarm notification. With this feature, Data Center Expert can notify clients of reaching
thresholds for PDU capacity, or branch circuit breaker capacity. Other custom programmable alarm points
for non- APC products shall also be available via dry contact input signal.
4. Public Network Monitoring: Data Center Expert shall also be capable of monitoring other APC devices
that are connected to the client’s public network.
B. Battery cabinet options.
1. For purposes of extending the UPS battery runtime, external extended runtime options shall be available.
The extended runtime option shall be housed in ―line up and match‖ type enclosures and shall contain
necessary hardware and cables to connect to the UPS, or between XR enclosures. Each XR enclosure
shall be equipped with removable batteries.
2. The extended runtime system shall have a 500 VDC /250A rated, thermal magnetic trip molded case
circuit breaker. Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with shunt trip mechanisms and 1A/1B auxiliary
contacts.
C. Software and connectivity:
1. The Ethernet Web/SNMP Adaptor shall allow one or more network management systems (NMS) to
monitor and manage the UPS in TCP/IP network environments. The management information base (MIB)
shall be provided in DOS and UNIX "tar" formats. The SNMP interface adaptor shall be connected to the
UPS via the RS232 serial port on the standard communication interface board.
2. Unattended Shutdown.
D. Remote UPS monitoring: Three methods of remote UPS monitoring shall be available:
1. Web Monitoring: Remote monitoring shall be available via a web browser such as Internet Explorer.
2. RS232 Monitoring: Remote UPS monitoring shall be possible via either RS232 or contact closure signals
from the UPS.
3. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP): Remote UPS Monitoring shall be possible through a
standard MIB II compliant platform.
E. The UPS manufacturer shall have available software to support shutdown and or remote monitoring for the
following systems:
1. Microsoft Windows 95/98/XP/Win7
3. OS/2
4. Netware 3.2 – 5.1
5. MAC OS 9.04, 9.22, 10
7. SGI 6.0-6.5
8. SCO UNIX
9. SVR4 2.3, 2.41
10. SCO Unix Ware 7.0 - 7.11
12. SUN OS 4.13, 4.14
13. IBM AIX 4.3x-4.33g, 5.1
14. HP-UX 9.x-11.i
07/2016 edition p. 203
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed, and notify the
Contractor in writing, with a copy to the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, of any conditions detrimental to the
proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
1. Beginning of the work shall indicate acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory by the Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Preparation and installation shall be in accordance with reviewed product data, final shop drawings,
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: See [Section 01 45 23 - INSPECTING AND TESTING SERVICES] [Section 01410 - INSPECTING
AND TESTING SERVICES].
B. Field Service Engineer Qualifications: The manufacturer shall employ a 7 x 24 nationwide (international where
applicable) field service organization with rapid access to all regions of the nation. The responding service
professionals shall be factory-trained engineers with an accredited and proven competence to service
three-phase UPS.
C. Spare Parts: Field Engineers shall have immediate access to recommended spare parts with additional parts storage
located in regional depots. Additional spare parts shall be accessible on a 7 x 24 basis from the national depot and shall be
expedited on a next available flight basis or via direct courier (whichever mode is quickest).
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative of the manufacturer to provide start-up service
and to demonstrate and train the Owner’s personnel.
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
2. Train the Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown,
troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
4. Schedule training with the Owner, through the Architect/Engineer, with at least seven day’s advanced notice.
B. The manufacturer shall make available to the Owner various levels of training ranging from basic UPS operation
to UPS maintenance.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the Installer, that shall ensure that the
solid state UPS shall be without damage at time of Substantial Completion.
3.6 MAINTENANCE
A. The manufacturer shall, upon request, provide spare parts kits for the UPS module in a timely manner as well as
provide access to qualified factory-trained first party service personnel to provide preventative maintenance and
service on the UPS module when required.
B. UPS subassemblies, as well as the battery, shall be accessible from the front. UPS design shall provide
maximum reliability and minimum MTTR (mean time to repair). To that end, the UPS shall be equipped with a
self-test function to verify correct system operation. The self-test function shall identify the subassembly requiring
repair in the event of a fault. The electronic UPS control and monitoring assembly shall therefore be fully
microprocessor-based, thus doing away with potentiometer settings. This shall allow:
C. The UPS shall be repairable by replacing standard subassemblies requiring no adjustments. Communication via
a modem with a remote maintenance system shall be possible.
07/2016 edition p. 204
D. The manufacturer shall offer additional preventative maintenance and service contracts covering both the UPS
and the battery bank. Accredited professional service engineers employed exclusively in the field of critical power
systems service shall perform maintenance and service. The manufacturer shall also offer extended warranty
contracts.
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 205

MGE Galaxy 3500
3/3 Phase 10/15/20/30/40 kVA
07/2016 edition p. 206


MGE GALAXY 3500
Uninterruptible Power Supply
Guide Specifications
15 kVA to 40 kVA
3400 in / 1x 230V out Solution
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
SECTION [26 33 63] [16611]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This specification describes a three-phase, on-line, continuous operation, solid-state

uninterruptible power supply (UPS). The UPS shall operate as an active power control
system, working in conjunction with the building electrical system to provide power conditioning and on-line
power protection for the critical loads.
1.2 STANDARDS
A. Safety: EN/ IEC 62040-1

B. EMC/IEC 62040-2 (Class C2 and C3)
C. Performance: EN/IEC 62040
1.3 CLASSIFICATION
A. Classification according to EN/IEC 62040-3: VFI-SS-112
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Submit product data showing material proposed. Submit sufficient information to determine
compliance with the Drawings and Specifications.
1. As bid system bill of materials
2. Product catalogue sheets or equipment brochures
3. Product guide specifications
4. System single-line operation diagram
5. Floor layout
6. Installation guide
7. Drawings for requested optional accessories
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data to include in operation and
maintenance manuals specified in [Division 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS] [Division 1 – GENERAL
1. Submit an installation manual, which shall include, but shall not be limited to, instructions for storage,
handling, examination, preparation, installation, and start-up of all systems.
07/2016 edition p. 207

2. Submit an operation and maintenance manual, which shall include, but shall not be limited to, operating
instructions.
3. Submit built equipment drawings.
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be a firm engaged in the manufacture ofsolid state UPS
a. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 & 14001 certified and shall be designed to
internationally accepted standards.
A. Environmental Requirements: Do not install solid state UPS until space is enclosed and
weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at
values near those indicated for final occupancy.
1. The UPS shall be capable of withstanding any combination of the following environmental conditions in
which it must operate without mechanical or electrical damage, or degradation of operating characteristics.
a. Storage Ambient Temperature: -15°C to 40°C with batteries; -30°C to 70°C without
batteries
b. Operating Ambient Temperature: 0°C to 40°C. 15°C to 25°C is ideal for batteries (if above, the
battery lifetime is reduced).
c. Relative humidity: 0 to 95%, non-condensing.
d. Storage elevation: 0 to 15000 m.
e. Altitude: Maximum installation with no derating of the UPS above sea level shall be:
1) 1000 m: 100% load
2) 1500 m: 95% load
3) 2000 m: 91% load
4) 2500 m: 86% load
5) 3000 m: 82% load
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Product specified is ―APC-MGE Galaxy 3500‖ system (for industrial
environment) as manufactured by APC by Schneider Electric. No substitutes will be considered.
OR
B. Basis of Design: Product specified is ―APC-MGE Galaxy 3500‖ system (for industrial
environment) or approved equal. Items specified are to establish a standard of quality for design, function,
materials, and appearance. Equivalent products by other manufacturers are acceptable. The
Architect/Engineer will be the sole judge of the basis of what is equivalent. Examples of modifications include,
but are not limited to the following:
1. Structural reinforcement to accommodate heavier equipment.
2. Increased sizes of circuit breakers, raceways and wiring.
3. Larger back-up generators (including upgraded accessories and wiring) to avoid instability
4. Larger HVAC equipment (including duct work and wiring) to accommodate increased heat
5. Filters to prevent input distortion, avoid upstream equipment malfunction and failure of power
factor equipment.
2.2 DESCRIPTION
A. The UPS shall consist of the following easy to repair modular rectifier/inverter sections and easy to install
internal and external modular battery units.
07/2016 edition p. 208

B. The UPS shall be provided with separate feeds for rectifier/inverter section and the static bypass switch.
xiii. Normal: The inverter and the rectifier shall operate in an on-line manner to continuously regulate the
power to the critical load. The rectifier shall derive power from the AC input source and supply DC power to
float charge the battery.
xiv. Battery: Upon failure of the AC input source, the critical load shall continue being supplied by the inverter
without any switching. The inverter shall obtain its power from the battery. There shall be no interruption in
power to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the AC input source.
xv. Recharge: Upon restoration of the AC input source, the UPS shall simultaneously recharge the battery
and regulate the power to the critical load.
xvi. Static Bypass: The static bypass switch shall be used for transferring the critical load to
input supply without interruption. Automatic re-transfer to normal operation shall also be
accomplished with no interruption in power to the critical load. The static bypass switch shall be fully rated
and shall be capable of manual operation. The UPS shall be able to recharge the batteries while supplying
full power to the load via the static bypass switch.
xvii. Internal maintenance bypass: The UPS shall be provided with an internal manual bypass to simplify the
installation and shall be used for supplying the load directly from the mains
supply, while the UPS is taken out for maintenance.
xviii. External maintenance bypass transformer [optional]: The external maintenance bypass transformer
shall be used for supplying the load directly from the mains supply (3 phase), if the UPS is to be replaced
or the load balance on the bypass input to the UPS is required. The bypass transformer must be housed in
a stand alone matching cabinet.
D. The UPS shall be provided with RS-232 signaling and WEB/SNMP integration. This system must provide a
means for logging and alarming of all monitored points plus email notification.
E. The UPS shall have nominal voltage of 3400/230 V (adjustable for 3380/220 V, 3415/240 V), 50 Hz 3 and
4-wire + earth configurations.
2.3 STATIC UPS
A. General: The UPS shall be housed in a freestanding enclosure. The enclosure shall be designed
to blend into an IT environment. The cabinet shall be equipped for fork truck lifting. The UPS cabinet shall be
painted with the manufacturer’s standard color. All service access shall be from the front. Installation access
shall be from the lower backside of the system.
1. The UPS shall be in a self contained cabinet and comprise 15kVA, 20kVA, 30kVA and 40kVA power
section; Bypass Static Switch; Battery for standard run time and interface LCD display all mounted in a
separate cabinet. The UPS shall permit user installable and removable battery units.
The power section shall be of the Double Conversion On-Line topology with power factor
corrected inputs.
a. The UPS shall be sized for ______ kVA and ______ kW load.
b. The UPS battery shall be sized for ____ at a power factor of ____ for _____ minutes.
2. The UPS shall have a short circuit withstand capability of 30 kA.
B. System Input
xv. Nominal Input voltage rating: 3×400/230 V (adjustable for 3×380/220 V or 3×415/240 V)
xvi. AC Input Voltage Window: -20% of nominal with without charging
xvii. AC Input Voltage Window: -50% of nominal at 50% load
xviii. Earthing Principle: [TN-S] [TN-C-S] [TN-C] [TT] or [IT].
xix. Input Frequency: 40-70 Hz (auto sensing)
xx. Input Power Factor: 0.98 at load > 50%
xxi. Magnetizing Inrush Current: NONE
xxii. Input Current Distortion with no additional Filters: < 5% THDI at 100% load
xxiii. Power Walk-in/Soft-Start: Shall be linear from 0 to 100% of the load over a 10-second
period
C. System Output
1. Nominal Output Voltage Rating: 1×230 V.
2. Earthing Principle: [TN-S] [TN-C-S] [TN-C] [TT] or [IT].
3. Output Voltage Regulation for Steady State and Transient Variations (at default
parameter settings):
07/2016 edition p. 209
a. ± 1% steady state for a static 100% balanced load.

b. ± 1% steady state for a static 100% unbalanced load.
c. ± 5% for a 0 to 100% load step.
4. Max. Voltage Transient Recovery Time: 50 milliseconds to nominal.
5. Output frequency Regulation:
a. Synchronized to mains over the range of 40-70 Hz in normal operation
b. 50 Hz ± 0.1 Hz in battery operation.
6. Output voltage Harmonic Distortion:
 <1.5% THD maximum and 1% single harmonic for a 100% linear load
 <3.5% THD maximum for a 100% non-linear load
7. Overload Capability:
a. 150% for 60 seconds in normal and battery operation.
b. 125% for 10 minutes in normal and battery operation.
c. 110% continuous in bypass operation.
d. 800% for 500 milliseconds in bypass operation.
8. Phase displacement:
a. 20 degrees ± 1 degree for balanced load.
b. 20 degrees ± 1 degree for 50% unbalanced load.
c. 20 degrees ± 3 degrees for 100% unbalanced load.
9. Output Power Factor Rating: For loads exhibiting a power factor of 0.5 leading to 0.5
lagging, no derating of the UPS shall be required.
10. Short Circuit Withstand: The UPS must withstand a bolted-fault short circuit on the output
without damage to the UPS module.
11. System AC-to-AC efficiency 100% load
a. 15 kVA 95.2%
b. 20 kVA 95.0%
c. 30 kVA 95.3%
d. 40 kVA 94.9%
a. 15 kVA 95.0%
b. 20 kVA 95.4%
c. 30 kVA 95.5%
d. 40 kVA 95.6%
13. Acoustical noise at full load: dB(A) of noise, typically, measured at 1 meter from the
operator surface:
a. 15 kVA 51
b. 20 kVA 51
c. 30 kVA 55
d. 40 kVA 55
19. Rectifier
2. The input current limiter must be design to support 100% load, charge batteries at 10% of
the UPS output rating, and provide regulation with mains deviation of up/down to+/-15% of the nominal
input voltage. During an overload condition the input current must be limited to maximum 125% of the
nominal output current.
3. DC buss voltage shall be ±192 V DC nominal.
4. The battery charging shall keep the DC bus float voltage of +/- 219 V, +/-1%
5. The DC buss voltage shall be compensated against temperature variations (Battery
Temperature Compensation) to always maintain optimal battery float charging voltage for temperature
excursions above or below 20°C. Temperature compensation rate shall be 320 mV/°C for ambient
temperatures > 20°C and 0 mV/°C for ambient temperatures
< 20°C.
6. DC ripple voltage shall be less than ±1% of nominal with no battery connected.
sinusoidal.
07/2016 edition p. 210
9. Reflected input current Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) shall not exceed 5% at 100%
load.
20. Batteries
2. Batteries shall be housed in the same rack as the power section. Batteries shall be
modular on pull out shelves for quick replacement and servicing.
3. Battery voltage shall be Battery Temperature Compensated as outlined in the rectifier
section above.
4. End of discharge: 154 VDC.
6. Battery Charge Current Limit: The UPS shall be capable of limiting the energy sourced
from the mains for purposes of battery charging. As a default setting, the battery charge
energy will be set to 100% of its nominal value. When signaled by a dry contact, (such as from an
emergency generator) the UPS shall be capable of limiting the battery charge energy taken from the
mains. This shall take place in user selectable increments of 75%, 50%, 25%, 10% and 0% of the nominal
charge power. The selection shall be made from the UPS front panel display/control unit.
7. The battery charging circuit shall remain active when in Static Bypass and in Normal
Operation.
8. The batteries charger shall allow cyclic charging when system is running in normal
operation and batteries are full charged to extend the battery life. This operation shall be
selectable in the display. Cyclic charge should be 10 hours on and 48 hours off. The
Cyclic charge shell end if UPS is overloaded, switch to battery operation, battery voltage drops below 200
V or are deactivated by user.
21. Inverter
4. Nominal output voltage shall be 1×230 V and adjustable for 1×220 V or 1×240 V, 50 Hz,
L1,N,PE.
5. Efficiency of each module at full load: Not less than
a. 15 kVA 94.9%
b. 20 Kva 94.7%
c. 30 kVA 94.9%
d. 40 kVA 94.8%
a. Less than 1.5% for 100% resistive load.
b. Less than 3.5% for computer load as defined by EN50091-3/IEC 62040-3.
7. Output voltage regulation:
a. Static: Less than 1% at full linear load.
b. Dynamic: 5% at 100% step load.
8. Output frequency: 50 Hz free running.
9. Crest factor: Unlimited but regulates it down to 2.7.
a. Remote Emergency Power Off (EPO) shall be standard (wall switch and wiring shall be
provided by the electrical contractor).
22. Static Bypass Switch
1. The static switch shall consist of fully rated Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCRs). Part rated SCRs with a
wrap around contactor are not acceptable.
a. Inverter overload beyond rating.
b. Battery runtime expired and bypass available.
c. Inverter failure.
d. Fatal error in control system.
a. After an instantaneous overload-induced transfer has occurred and the load current has returned to
less than 100% of the system rating.
b. The inverter is active (on).
07/2016 edition p. 211

5. If more than 10 transfers from and to inverter occur in a 1 minutes period, the load shall be locked on static
bypass. An alarm communicating this condition shall be annunciated.
E. Mechanical
1. The MGE Galaxy 3500 UPS power section, Static Bypass Switch, internal manual bypass switch and the
VRLA batteries (for standard runtimes) shall be housed in a freestanding
enclosure. The enclosure shall be designed to blend into an industrial environment. The UPS cabinet shall
be painted with the manufacturer’s standard color (Gray ANSI 61). All service access shall be from the
front. The enclosure shall have the following specifications:
a. Dead front construction
b. Heavy-duty design with an all-metal construction.
c. Caster fitted for mobility. Leveling feet shall be supplied as standard.
d. Electrostatic applied paint.
e. The cable entry shall be from the bottom on the back of the UPS.
f. The MGE Galaxy 3500 UPS enclosure shall meet an ingress level of min. IP51
g. The MGE Galaxy 3500 UPS should be fitted with dust filter in the air inlet to filter dust, molds and
spores with particles larger than 3 m.
2. The UPS module dimensions: HeightWidthDepth
[Choose one, depending on UPS kVA and required backup time:]
G35T15K3I2B2S 1500×353×854
G35T15K3I2B4S 1500×523×854
G35T15K3I3B4S 1500×523×854
G35T15K3I4B4S 1500×523×854
G35T15K3IS 1500x523x854
G35T20K3I2B2S 1500×353×854
G35T20K3I2B4S 1500×523×854
G35T20K3I3B4S 1500×523×854
G35T20K3I4B4S 1500×523×854
G35T20K3IS 1500x523x854
G35T30K3I3B4S 1500×523×854
G35T30K3I4B4S 1500×523×854
G35T30K3IS 1500×523×854
G35TT40K3I4B4S 1500×523×854
G35T40K3IS 1500×523×854
A. General: A microprocessor controlled display unit shall be located on the front of the system. The display shall
consist of an alphanumeric display with backlight, an alarm LED, and a keypad
consisting of pushbutton switches.
1. The following metered data, shall be available on the alphanumeric display:

a. Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second of occurring events
b. Input AC Voltage
c. Output AC voltage
d. Output AC current
e. Input Frequency
f. Battery voltage
g. Highest Internal Battery temperature
2. The display unit shall allow the user to display an event log of all active alarms and of the 64 most recent
status and alarm events.
a. Static bypass switch on
b. EPO Active
c. Mechanical bypass activated
d. External bypass switch (Q3) activated
e. Battery discharged
f. Return from low battery
g. Low battery
h. Load not powered from UPS
07/2016 edition p. 212
i. UPS in bypass
j. Runtime calibration aborted
k. Runtime calibration started
l. Runtime calibration complete
m. Battery self test aborted
n. Battery self test started
o. Battery self test completed
p. Number of battery modules decreased
q. Number of battery modules increased
r. Fan fault
s. SBS fault
t. System not in sync.
u. Bypass not available, frequency/voltage out of range
v. Mains voltage/frequency out of range
w. Site wiring fault
x. Low battery voltage shut down
y. XR battery breaker or fuse open
z. Defective battery detected
aa. Runtime is below alarm threshold
bb. Load is above alarm threshold
cc. Battery over-voltage warning
dd. Battery over-temperature warning
ee. Emergency power supply fault
ff. Output overloaded
3. The following controls or programming functions shall be accomplished by use of the display unit.
Pushbutton membrane switches shall facilitate these operations.
a. Silence audible Alarm
b. Set the alphanumeric display language
c. Display or set the date and time
d. Enable or disable the automatic restart feature
e. Transfer critical load to and from static bypass
f. Test battery condition on demand
g. Set intervals for automatic battery tests
h. Adjust set points for different alarms
i. Program the parameters for remote shutdown.
j. Cyclic charging
4. The following shall make up the UPS front panel user interface.
a. Indicating LED’s
1) Load On When Green, this LED indicates the load is being
supported by the UPS output
2) On Battery When Yellow, this LED indicates the UPS is running
from Battery power
3) Bypass When Yellow, this LED indicates the load is being supported by static
bypass/mechanical bypass
4) Fault When Red, this LED indicates there is a fault condition present in the
UPS.
b. Push Button User Controls
1) Up Arrow
2) Down Arrow
3) Help Key
4) Escape Key
5) Enter Key
5. For purposes of remote communications with the UPS the following shall be available and
contained within the UPS on a removable, “hot swappable” “smart slot” interface card:
3. RJ-45 Interface port for remote communications with a network via web browser or
SNMP.
4. Environmental monitoring feature, capable of locally monitoring temperature and humidity
as well as two additional generic set of user determined dry contacts capable of taking an input signal
from any APC or third party on/off signal, such as water detection, smoke
detection, motion, or fire detection.
2.5 BATTERY
07/2016 edition p. 213
A. The UPS battery shall be of modular construction made up of user replaceable, hot swappable, fused, battery
modules. Each battery module shall be monitored to determine the highest battery unit temperature for use by
the UPS battery diagnostic, and temperature compensated charger circuitry.
B. The battery blocks housed within each removable battery module shall be of the Valve Regulated Lead Acid
(VRLA) type.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Extended runtime (XR) option

The extended runtime option shall be housed in ―line up and match‖ type enclosures and shall contain
necessary hardware and cables to connect to the UPS, or between XR enclosures. Each XR enclosure
shall be equipped with removable, hot swappable, battery units housed in draw-out cartridges.
2. The extended runtime system shall have a 250 V DC rated, thermal magnetic trip molded case circuit
breaker. Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with shunt trip mechanisms and 1A/1B auxiliary contacts.
The circuit breakers are to be equipped as part of a line-up-and-match type battery enclosure.
B. StruxureWare Data Center Expert: A centralized infrastructure management platform hereafter referred to as
a. Monitoring - Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring a PDU through a network of Cat 5
cable and a switch supplied by the user. This switch shall relay information to Data Center Expert,
which in turn shall allow access to this information via the user’s public network via a single IP address.
b. Monitored Values: Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring alarms, general status
c. Thresholds: For individualized customer needs, Data Center Expert shall allow for user configurable
thresholds for PDU capacity, or branch circuit breaker capacity. Other custom programmable alarm
points for non- APC products shall also be available via dry contact input signal.
d. Public Network Monitoring: Data Center Expert shall also be capable of monitoring other APC
devices that are connected to the client’s public network.
C. Software and connectivity

2. Unattended Shutdown
3. The UPS, in conjunction with a network interface card, shall be capable of gracefully shutting down one or
more operating systems during when the UPS is on reserve mode.
4. The UPS shall also be capable of using an RS232 port to communicate by means of serial
communications to gracefully shut down one or more operating systems during an on battery situation.
D. Remote UPS monitoring: The following three methods of remote UPS monitoring shall be
available:
4. Web Monitoring: Remote monitoring shall be available via a web browser such as Intern
Explorer.
from the UPS.
E. Software compatibility: The UPS manufacturer shall have available software to support graceful shutdown
and or remote monitoring for the following systems:
3. OS/2
4. Netware 3.2 – 5.1
5. MAC OS 9.04, 9.22, 10
07/2016 edition p. 214
7. SGI 6.0-6.5
8. SCO UNIX
9. SVR4 2.3, 2.41
10. SCO Unix Ware 7.0 - 7.11
12. SUN OS 4.13, 4.14
13. IBM AIX 4.3x-4.33g, 5.1
14. HP-UX 9.x-11.i
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.6 EXAMINATION
corrected.
3.7 INSTALLATION
A. General: Preparation and installation shall be in accordance with reviewed product data, final shop drawings,
B. Factory-Assisted Start-Up: If a factory-assisted UPS start-up is requested, factory-trained service personnel

shall perform the following inspections, test procedures, and on-site training:
1. Visual Inspection:
a. Inspect equipment for signs of damage.
b. Verify installation per manufacturer's instructions.
c. Inspect cabinets for foreign objects.
d. Inspect battery units.
e. Inspect power modules.
2. Mechanical Inspection:
a. Check UPS and external MBC internal power wiring connections.
b. Check UPS and external MBC terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs for tightness.
3. Electrical Inspection:
a. Verify correct input and bypass voltage.
b. Verify correct phase rotation of mains connections.
c. Verify correct UPS control wiring and terminations.
d. Verify voltage of battery modules.
e. Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly landed.
4. Site Testing:
a. Ensure proper system start-up.
b. Verify proper firmware control functions.
c. Verify proper firmware bypass operation.
d. Verify proper maintenance bypass switch operation.
e. Verify system set points.
f. Verify proper inverter operation and regulation circuits.
g. Simulate utility power failure.
h. Verify proper charger operation.
i. Document, sign, and date test results.
5. On-Site Operational Training: During the factory-assisted start-up, operational training for site personnel
shall include, but shall not be limited to, key pad operation, LED indicators, start-up and shutdown
procedures, maintenance bypass and AC disconnect operation, and alarm information.
a. Key pad operation
b. LED indicators
c. Start-up and shutdown procedures
d. Maintenance bypass
e. AC disconnect operation
f. Alarm information.
07/2016 edition p. 215
B. Manufacturer Field Service:

1. Worldwide Service: The UPS manufacturer shall have a worldwide service organization available,
consisting of factory-trained field service personnel to perform start-up, preventative maintenance, and
service of the UPS system and power equipment. The service organization shall offer 24 hours a day,
7 days a week, 365 days a year service support.
2. Replacement Parts: Parts shall be available through the worldwide service organization 24 hours a day,
7 days a week, 365 days a year. The worldwide service organization shall be capable of shipping parts
within four working hours or on the next available flight, so that the parts may be delivered to the Owner
within 24 hours.
C. Maintenance contracts:
1. A complete offering of preventative and full service maintenance contracts for the UPS
system and the battery system shall be available. All contract work shall be performed by APC factory
trained service personnel.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. General: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative of the manufacturer to provide
B. UPS Training Workshop: A UPS training workshop shall be available from the UPS manufacturer. The training
workshop shall include, but shall not be limited to, a combination of lecture and practical instruction with hands-on
laboratory sessions. The training workshop shall include, but shall not be limited to, instruction about safety
procedures, UPS operational theory, sub-assembly identification and operation, system controls, adjustments,
preventative maintenance, and troubleshooting.
3.10 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 216


MGE GALAXY 3500
10 kVA to 40 kVA
3400 in / 400-230 V Solution
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
SECTION [26 33 63] [16611]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. This specification describes a three-phase, on-line, continuous operation, solid-state

uninterruptible power supply (UPS). The UPS shall operate as an active power control system, working in
conjunction with the building electrical system to provide power conditioning and on-line power protection for
the critical loads.
1.2 STANDARDS
D. Safety: EN/ IEC 62040-1

E. EMC/IEC 62040-2 (Class C2 and C3)
F. Performance: EN/IEC 62040-3
1.3 CLASSIFICATION
a. Classification according to EN/IEC 62040-3: VFI-SS-112
1.4 SUBMITTALS
compliance with the Drawings and Specifications.
14. As bid system bill of materials
15. Product catalogue sheets or equipment brochures
16. Product guide specifications
17. System single-line operation diagram
18. Floor layout
19. Capacity data
20. Piping connection drawing
21. Installation guide
22. Drawings for requested optional accessories
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data to include in
operation and maintenance manuals specified in [Division 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS] [Division 1 –
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS], including, but not limited to, safe and correct
operation of UPS functions.
07/2016 edition p. 217

handling, examination, preparation, installation, and start-up of all systems.
instructions.
6. Submit built equipment drawings.
A. Qualifications:
a. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 & 14001 certified and shall be designed to
internationally accepted standards.
D. Environmental Requirements: Do not install solid state UPS until space is enclosed and
weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at
values near those indicated for final occupancy.
1. The UPS shall be capable of withstanding any combination of the following environmental conditions in
which it must operate without mechanical or electrical damage, or degradation of operating characteristics.
a. Storage Ambient Temperature: -15°C to 40°C with batteries; -30°C to 70°C without
batteries
b. Operating Ambient Temperature: 0°C to 40°C. 15°C to 25°C is ideal for batteries (if above, the
battery lifetime is reduced).
c. Relative humidity: 0 to 95%, non-condensing.
d. Storage elevation: 0 to 15000 m.
e. Altitude: Maximum installation with no derating of the UPS above sea level shall be:
6) 1000 m: 100% load
7) 1500 m: 95% load
8) 2000 m: 91% load
9) 2500 m: 86% load
10) 3000 m: 82% load
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.5 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Product specified is ―APC-MGE Galaxy 3500‖ system (for industrial
environment) as manufactured by APC by Schneider Electric. No substitutes will be considered.
OR
B. Basis of Design: Product specified is ―APC-MGE Galaxy 3500‖ system (for industrial
environment) or approved equal. Items specified are to establish a standard of quality for design, function,
materials, and appearance. Equivalent products by other manufacturers are acceptable. The
Architect/Engineer will be the sole judge of the basis of what is equivalent. Examples of modifications include,
but are not limited to the following:
6. Structural reinforcement to accommodate heavier equipment.
7. Increased sizes of circuit breakers, raceways and wiring.
8. Larger back-up generators (including upgraded accessories and wiring) to avoid instability
9. Larger HVAC equipment (including duct work and wiring) to accommodate increased heat
10. Filters to prevent input distortion, avoid upstream equipment malfunction and failure of power
factor equipment.
2.6 DESCRIPTION
07/2016 edition p. 218

ii. Normal: The inverter and the rectifier shall operate in an on-line manner to continuously regulate the
power to the critical load. The rectifier shall derive power from the AC input source and supply DC power to
iii. Battery: Upon failure of the AC input source, the critical load shall continue being supplied by the inverter
without any switching. The inverter shall obtain its power from the battery. There shall be no interruption in
power to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the AC input source.
iv. Recharge: Upon restoration of the AC input source, the UPS shall simultaneously recharge the battery
and regulate the power to the critical load.
v. Static Bypass: The static bypass switch shall be used for transferring the critical load to
input supply without interruption. Automatic re-transfer to normal operation shall also be
accomplished with no interruption in power to the critical load. The static bypass switch shall be fully rated
and shall be capable of manual operation. The UPS shall be able to recharge the batteries while supplying
full power to the load via the static bypass switch.
vi. Internal maintenance bypass switch: The UPS shall be provided with an internal manual bypass switch
for supplying the load directly from the mains supply, while the UPS is taken out for maintenance. The
switch should be removable when the individual UPS unit has to run in parallel with other units.
vii. External maintenance bypass transformer [optional]: The external Maintenance Bypass Panel shall be
used for paralleling of multiple UPS units (optional for single UPS unit) to
supply the load directly from the mains supply, if the UPS system has to undergo
maintenance or service. An UPS input, output, common output and bypass breaker shall be housed in the
same low-voltage assembly. The manual bypass breaker must be monitored by each UPS via an auxiliary
contact. The Maintenance Bypass Panel must be housed in a wall mounted low-voltage assembly.
E. The UPS shall have nominal voltage of 3400/230 V (adjustable for 3380/220 V, 3415/240 V), 50 Hz, L1, L2,
L3, N, PE.
F. The UPS will be capable of paralleling up to max 4 like kVA and type UPS systems for capacity.
G. The UPS shall be compatible with all types of data centers, data rooms and facilities. Dedicated service to one
specific environment shall not be acceptable.
2.3 STATIC UPS
A. General: The UPS shall be housed in a freestanding enclosure. The enclosure shall be designed
to blend into an IT environment. The cabinet shall be equipped for fork truck lifting. The UPS cabinet shall
be painted with the manufacturer’s standard color. All service access shall be from the front. Installation
access shall be from the lower backside of the system.
3. The UPS shall be in a self contained cabinet and comprise 10 kVA, 15kVA, 20kVA, 30kVA and 40kVA
power section; Bypass Static Switch; Battery for standard run time and interface LCD display all mounted
in a separate cabinet. The UPS shall permit user installable and removable battery units.
The power section shall be of the Double Conversion On-Line topology with power factor corrected inputs.
a. The UPS shall be sized for ______ kVA and ______ kW load at power factor 0.8.
b. The UPS battery shall be sized for ____ at a power factor of ____ for _____ minutes.
4. The UPS shall have a short circuit withstand capability of 30 kA.
E. System Input
xxiv. Nominal Input voltage rating: 3×400/230 V (adjustable for 3×380/220 V or 3×415/240 V)
xxv. Input Voltage Range: 304-477 V
xxvi. Earthing Principle: [TN-S] [TN-C-S] [TN-C] [TT] or [IT].
xxvii. Input Frequency: 40-70 Hz (auto sensing).
xxviii. Input Power Factor: 0.98 at load > 50%.
Magnetizing Inrush Current: NONE, if optional input isolating transformer is installed then 500% of
nominal input current for less than one cycle.
07/2016 edition p. 219
xxx. Input Current Distortion with no additional Filters: < 5% THDI at 100% load.
xxxi. Power Walk-in/Soft-Start: Shall be linear from 0 to 100% of the load over a 15-second
Period.
F. System Output
1. Nominal Output Voltage Rating: 3×400/230 V (adjustable for 3×380/220 V or 3×4240 V).
2. Earthing Principle: [TN-S] [TN-C-S] [TN-C] [TT] or [IT].
3. Output Voltage Regulation for Steady State and Transient Variations (at default
parameter settings):
a. ± 1% steady state for a static 100% balanced load.
d. ± 1% steady state for a static 100% unbalanced load.
e. ± 5% for a 0 to 100% load step.
4. Max. Voltage Transient Recovery Time: 50 milliseconds to nominal.
5. Output frequency Regulation:
c. Synchronized to mains over the range of 40-70 Hz in normal operation
d. 50 Hz ± 0.1 Hz in battery operation.
6. Output voltage Harmonic Distortion:
 <1.5% THDI maximum and 1% single harmonic for a 100% linear load
 <3.5% THD maximum for a 100% non-linear load
7. Overload Capability:
a. 150% for 60 seconds in normal and battery operation.
b. 125% for 10 minutes in normal and battery operation.
c. 110% continuous in bypass operation.
d. 800% for 500 milliseconds in bypass operation.
23. Phase displacement:
a. 20 degrees ± 1 degree for balanced load.
b. 20 degrees ± 1 degree for 50% unbalanced load.
c. 20 degrees ± 3 degrees for 100% unbalanced load.
24. Output Power Factor Rating: For loads exhibiting a power factor of 0.5 leading to 0.5
lagging, no derating of the UPS shall be required.
25. Short Circuit Withstand: The UPS must withstand a bolted-fault short circuit on the output
without damage to the UPS module.
a. 10 kVA 94.9%
b. 15 kVA 95.5%
c. 20 kVA 95.4%
d. 30 kVA 96.1%
e. 40 kVA 95.5%
a. 10 kVA 94.8%
b. 15 kVA 95.3%
c. 20 kVA 95.5%
d. 30 kVA 96.0%
e. 40 kVA 96.0%
28. Acoustical noise at full load: dB(A) of noise, typically, measured at 1 meter from the
operator surface:
a. 10 kVA 51
b. 15 kVA 51
c. 20 kVA 51
d. 30 kVA 55
e. 40 kVA 55
23. Rectifier
12. DC buss voltage shall be ±192 V DC nominal.
13. The battery charging shall keep the DC bus float voltage of +/- 220 V, +/-1%
14. The DC buss voltage shall be compensated against temperature variations (Battery
07/2016 edition p. 220

Temperature Compensation) to always maintain optimal battery float charging voltage for temperature
excursions above or below 25°C. Temperature compensation rate shall be 320 mV/°C for ambient
temperatures > 20°C and 0 mV/°C for ambient temperatures
< 20°C.
sinusoidal.
19. Input voltage window: 304-477 V.
24. Batteries
10. Batteries shall be housed in the same rack as the power section. Batteries shall be
modular on pull out shelves for quick replacement and servicing.
11. Battery voltage shall be Battery Temperature Compensated as outlined in the rectifier
section above.
12. End of discharge: 154 V DC.
14. Battery Charge Current Limit: The UPS shall be capable of limiting the energy sourced
from the mains for purposes of battery charging. As a default setting, the battery charge
energy will be set to 100% of its nominal value. When signaled by a dry contact, (such as from an
emergency generator) the UPS shall be capable of limiting the battery charge energy taken from the
mains. This shall take place in user selectable increments of 75%, 50%, 25%, 10% and 0% of the nominal
charge power. The selection shall be made from the UPS front panel display/control unit.
15. The battery charging circuit shall remain active when in Static Bypass and in Normal
Operation.
16. The batteries charger shall allow cyclic charging when system is running in normal
operation and batteries are full charged to extend the battery life. This operation shall be
selectable in the display. Cyclic charge should be 10 hours on and 48 hours off. The
Cyclic charge shell end if UPS is overloaded, switch to battery operation, battery voltage drops below 200
V or are deactivated by user.
25. Inverter
13. Nominal output voltage shall be 3×400/230 V and adjustable for 3×380/220 V or 3×415/240 V, 50 Hz,
L1,L2,L3,N,PE.
e. 10 kVA 94.7%
f. 15 kVA 95.1%
g. 20 Kva 94.9%
h. 30 kVA 95.0%
i. 40 kVA 94.8%
a. Less than 1.5% for 100% resistive load.
b. Less than 3.5% for computer load as defined by EN50091-3/IEC 62040-3.
16. Output voltage regulation:
a. Static: Less than 1% at full linear load.
b. Dynamic: 5% at 100% step load.
17. Output frequency: 50 Hz free running.
a. Remote Emergency Power Off (EPO) shall be standard (wall switch and wiring shall be
provided by the electrical contractor).
26. Static Bypass Switch

3. The static switch shall consist of fully rated Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCRs). Part rated SCRs with a
wrap around contactor are not acceptable.
07/2016 edition p. 221
e. Inverter overload beyond rating.
f. Battery runtime expired and bypass available.
g. Inverter failure.
h. Fatal error in control system.
a. After an instantaneous overload-induced transfer has occurred and the load current has returned to
less than 100% of the system rating.
b. The inverter is active (on).
5. If more than 10 transfers from and to inverter occur in a 10 minutes period, the load shall be locked on
static bypass. An alarm communicating this condition shall be annunciated.
E. Mechanical
1. The MGE Galaxy 3500 UPS power section, Static Bypass Switch, internal manual bypass switch and the
VRLA batteries (for standard runtimes) shall be housed in a freestanding
enclosure. The enclosure shall be designed to blend into an industrial environment. The UPS cabinet shall
be painted with the manufacturer’s standard color (Gray ANSI 61). All service access shall be from the
front. The enclosure shall have the following specifications:
h. Dead front construction
i. Heavy-duty design with an all-metal construction.
j. Caster fitted for mobility. Leveling feet shall be supplied as standard.
k. Electrostatic applied paint.
l. The cable entry shall be from the bottom on the back of the UPS.
m. The MGE Galaxy 3500 UPS enclosure shall meet an ingress level of min. IP51
n. The MGE Galaxy 3500 UPS should be fitted with dust filter in the air inlet to filter dust, molds and
spores with particles larger than 3 μm.
2. The UPS module dimensions: HeightWidthDepth
G35T10KH1B2S 1500×353×854
G35T10KH2B2S 1500×353×854
G35T10KH1B4S 1500×523×854
G35T10KH2B4S 1500×523×854
G35T10KH3B4S 1500×523×854
G35T10KH4B4S 1500×523×854
G35T10KHS 1500×523×854
G35T15KH2B2S 1500×353×854
G35T15KH2B4S 1500×523×854
G35T15KH3B4S 1500×523×854
G35T15KH4B4S 1500×523×854
G35T15KHS 1500×523×854
G35T20KH2B2S 1500×353×854
G35T20KH2B4S 1500×523×854
G35T20KH3B4S 1500×523×854
G35T20KH4B4S 1500×523×854
G35T20KHS 1500×523×854
G35T30KH3B4S 1500×523×854
G35T30KH4B4S 1500×523×854
G35T30KHS 1500×523×854
G35T40KH4B4S 1500×523×854
G35T40KHS 1500×523×854
F. General: A microprocessor controlled display unit shall be located on the front of the system. The display shall
consist of an alphanumeric display with backlight, an alarm LED, and a keypad
07/2016 edition p. 222
consisting of pushbutton switches.

1. The following metered data, shall be available on the alphanumeric display:
h. Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second of occurring events
i. Input AC Voltage
j. Output AC voltage
k. Output AC current
l. Input Frequency
m. Battery voltage
n. Highest Internal Battery temperature
2. The display unit shall allow the user to display an event log of all active alarms and of the 64 most recent
gg. Static bypass switch on
hh. EPO Active
ii. Mechanical bypass activated
jj. External bypass switch (Q3) activated
kk. Battery discharged
ll. Return from low battery
mm.Low battery
nn. Load not powered from UPS
oo. UPS in bypass
pp. Runtime calibration aborted
qq. Runtime calibration started
rr. Runtime calibration complete
ss. Battery self test aborted
tt. Battery self test started
uu. Battery self test completed
vv. Number of battery modules decreased
ww. Number of battery modules increased
xx. Fan fault
yy. SBS fault
zz. System not in sync.
aaa. Bypass not available, frequency/voltage out of range
bbb. Mains voltage/frequency out of range
ccc.Site wiring fault
ddd. Low battery voltage shut down
eee. XR battery breaker or fuse open
fff. Defective battery detected
ggg. Runtime is below alarm threshold
hhh. Load is above alarm threshold
iii. Battery over-voltage warning
jjj. Battery over-temperature warning
kkk.Emergency power supply fault
lll. Output overloaded
k. Silence audible Alarm
l. Set the alphanumeric display language
m. Display or set the date and time
n. Enable or disable the automatic restart feature
o. Transfer critical load to and from static bypass
p. Test battery condition on demand
q. Set intervals for automatic battery tests
r. Adjust set points for different alarms
s. Program the parameters for remote shutdown.
4. The following shall make up the UPS front panel user interface.
c. Indicating LED’s
5) Load On When Green, this LED indicates the load is being
supported by the UPS output
6) On Battery When Yellow, this LED indicates the UPS is running
from Battery power
07/2016 edition p. 223

7) Bypass When Yellow, this LED indicates the load is being supported by static
8) Fault When Red, this LED indicates there is a fault condition present in the
UPS.
d. Push Button User Controls
6) Up Arrow
7) Down Arrow
8) Help Key
9) Escape Key
10) Enter Key
5. The following potential free contacts shall be available on an optional relay interface board:
a. Potential Free (Dry) Contacts.
1) Normal Operation
2) Battery Operation
3) Bypass Operation
4) Common Fault
5) Low Battery
6) UPS Off
6. For purposes of remote communications with the UPS the following shall be available and
contained within the UPS on a removable, “hot swappable” “smart slot” interface card:
5. RJ-45 Interface port for remote communications with a network via web browser or
SNMP, or APC by Schneider InfraStruXure Manager..
6. Environmental monitoring feature, capable of locally monitoring temperature and humidity
as well as two additional generic set of user determined dry contacts capable of taking an input signal
from any APC or third party on/off signal, such as water detection, smoke
detection, motion, or fire detection.
2.7 BATTERY
C. The UPS battery shall be of modular construction made up of user replaceable, hot swappable, fused, battery
modules. Each battery module shall be monitored to determine the highest battery unit temperature for use by
the UPS battery diagnostic, and temperature compensated charger circuitry.
D. The battery blocks housed within each removable battery module shall be of the Valve Regulated Lead Acid
(VRLA) type.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Extended runtime (XR) option

The extended runtime option shall be housed in ―line up and match‖ type
enclosures and shall contain necessary hardware and cables to connect to the UPS, or
between XR enclosures. Each XR enclosure shall be equipped with removable, hot
swappable, battery units housed in draw-out cartridges.
4. The extended runtime system shall have a 250 V DC rated, thermal magnetic trip molded case circuit
breaker (MCCB). Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with shunt trip
mechanisms and 1 NO/NC auxiliary contacts. The circuit breakers are to be equipped as part of a line-up-
and-match type battery enclosure.
G. StruxureWare Data Center Expert: A centralized infrastructure management platform hereafter referred to as
a. Monitoring - Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring a PDU through a network of Cat 5
which in turn shall allow access to this information via the user’s public network via a single IP address.
b. Monitored Values: Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring alarms, general status
c. Thresholds: For individualized customer needs, Data Center Expert shall allow for user configurable
07/2016 edition p. 224

points for non- APC products shall also be available via dry contact input signal.
d. Public Network Monitoring: Data Center Expert shall also be capable of monitoring other APC
H. Maintenance bypass panel (MBP)

1. A MBP should be offered as a standard option either for single module or multi module
configurations. The maintenance bypass panel shall provide power to the critical load bus from the bypass
source, during times where maintenance or service of the UPS system is
required. The MBP shall provide a mechanical means of complete isolation of the UPS
system from the mains supply. The MBP shall be constructed in a free-standing or wallmounted IP20
enclosure unless otherwise stated in this specification.
2. As a minimum, the MBP shall contain the following features and accessories:
3. Current limiting breakers of the appropriate size – limiting the short circuit level to max. Icc = 30 kA for the
system.
4. Minimum 1 NO/NC auxiliary contact per unit in the parallel system for the purpose of relaying status
information of the manual maintenance bypass switch to the UPS.
5. In the case of parallel operation sufficient APC CAN bus PCB’s to provide adequate communications of the
MBP status to the UPS system parallel control system.
6. CE marked according to at least EN/IEC60439.
7. The MBP shall be made to Form 3b
8. The MBP shall be made to IP2XC
I. Parallel operation
i. For purposes of paralleling UPS units in the event of increased capacity or redundancy, the UPS shall
contain as a standard feature, the ability to parallel up to 4 modules. In this mode of operation the output
voltage, output frequency, output phase angle, and output impedance of each module shall operate in
uniformity to ensure correct load sharing. This control function shall not require any additional footprint and
shall be an integral function of each UPS.
ii. Multi-drop Bus Network: Communication between modules shall be connected in a multi-drop bus network
comprising two parallel redundant busses so that the removal of any single cable shall not jeopardize the
integrity of the parallel communication system.
iii. Load Sharing: A load sharing circuit shall be incorporated into the parallel control circuits to ensure that
under no load conditions, no circulating current exists between modules. This feature also allows each
UPS to share equal amounts of the total critical load bus. Load sharing communications shall be
galvanically isolated for purposes of fault tolerance between UPS modules. A UPS module's influence over
load sharing shall be inhibited in any mode where the UPS inverter is not supporting its output bus.
J. Software and connectivity

6. Unattended Shutdown
7. The UPS, in conjunction with a network interface card, shall be capable of gracefully shutting down one or
8. The UPS shall also be capable of using an RS232 port to communicate by means of serial
communications to gracefully shut down one or more operating systems during an on battery situation.
K. Remote UPS monitoring: The following three methods of remote UPS monitoring shall be
available:
7. Web Monitoring: Remote monitoring shall be available via a web browser such as Intern
Explorer.
from the UPS.
L. Software compatibility: The UPS manufacturer shall have available software to support graceful shutdown
and or remote monitoring for the following systems:
07/2016 edition p. 225
17. OS/2
18. Netware 3.2 – 5.1
19. MAC OS 9.04, 9.22, 10
21. SGI 6.0-6.5
22. SCO UNIX
23. SVR4 2.3, 2.41
24. SCO Unix Ware 7.0 - 7.11
26. SUN OS 4.13, 4.14
27. IBM AIX 4.3x-4.33g, 5.1
28. HP-UX 9.x-11.i
3.11 EXAMINATION
corrected.
3.12 INSTALLATION

a. Check UPS and external MBC internal power wiring connections.
b. Check UPS and external MBC terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs for tightness.
f. Inspect external maintenance bypass switch for proper terminations and phasing.
4. Site Testing:
g. Key pad operation
07/2016 edition p. 226
h. LED indicators
i. Start-up and shutdown procedures
j. Maintenance bypass
k. AC disconnect operation
l. Alarm information.
B. Manufacturer Field Service:

1. Worldwide Service: The UPS manufacturer shall have a worldwide service organization available,
consisting of factory-trained field service personnel to perform start-up, preventative maintenance, and
service of the UPS system and power equipment. The service organization shall offer 24 hours a day,
7 days a week, 365 days a year service support.
2. Replacement Parts: Parts shall be available through the worldwide service organization 24 hours a day,
7 days a week, 365 days a year. The worldwide service organization shall be capable of shipping parts
within four working hours or on the next available flight, so that the parts may be delivered to the Owner
within 24 hours.
C. Maintenance contracts:
2. A complete offering of preventative and full service maintenance contracts for the UPS
system and the battery system shall be available. All contract work shall be performed by APC factory
3.14 DEMONSTRATION
3.15 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 227

MGE Galaxy 5500
3/3 Phase 20/30/40/60/80/100/120 kVA
07/2016 edition p. 228

Single UPS

MGE GALAXY 5500
20 kVA to 120 kVA
Single UPS, three-phase
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
SECTION [26 33 63] [16611]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 UPS DEFINITIONS
A. Purpose: The purpose of this specification is to define the design, manufacture and testing characteristics
required in view of supplying, putting into operation and maintaining an Uninterruptible Power Supply
(referred to as a UPS in the rest of this document).
1. The Single-UPS unit with static bypass shall be designed to supply dependable electric power to: 475.000
-5
MTBF in hours/Non availability: 2.1x10
B. Brief description: The UPS shall be a single-UPS unit, operating in double-conversion mode (also called on-
line mode); it shall be a VFI-type UPS (as per standard IEC 62040-2), made up of the following components,
described in detail in this specification:
1. PFC rectifier
2. Battery charger
3. Inverter
4. Battery
5. Static bypass (via a static switch)
6. Manual maintenance bypass
7. User and communications interface
8. Battery management system
9. Any and all other devices required for safe operation and maintenance, including circuit breakers,
switches, etc.
C. The UPS shall ensure continuity of electric power to the load within the specified tolerances,
without interruption upon failure or deterioration of the normal AC source (utility power) for a maximum
protection time determined by the capacity of the backup batteries installed.
1.2 WARRANTY
A. The rectifier/charger and inverter subassemblies shall be guaranteed (parts and labour on site) for one year
following the start-up date.
B. The sealed lead-acid battery shall be covered by the same warranty as the UPS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.8 OPERATING PRINCIPLES
07/2016 edition p. 229

Single UPS
A. The UPS shall operate in double-conversion mode (also called on-line mode); it shall be a VFI
type UPS (as per standard IEC 62040-2), made up of the following components, described in de-
tail in this specification:
B. Normal operation (normal AC source available): The rectifier supplies the inverter with DC cur-
rent while the charger simultaneously float charges the battery. The load is continuously supplied
with dependable electrical power by the inverter.
C. Operation on battery power (normal AC source not available or outside tolerances): Upon fai-
lure or excessive deterioration of the normal AC source, the inverter shall continue to supply the
load from battery power without interruption or disturbance, within the limits imposed by the spe-
cified battery backup time.
D. Battery recharge (normal AC source restored): When the normal AC source is restored, the rec-
tifier shall again power the inverter, without interruption or disturbance to the load, while the
charger automatically recharges the battery.
E. Transfer to bypass AC source:

1. In the event of an overload exceeding system capabilities or UPS shutdown, the static by-
pass switch shall instantaneously transfer the load to the bypass AC source without interruption, on the
condition that bypass power is available and within tolerances.
2. Transfer of the load back to the UPS-unit output, synchronised with the bypass AC source, shall be
automatic or manual. During transfer, the load shall not suffer an outage or disturbance in the supply of
power.
3. On request, the UPS system may automatically transfer the load with a micro-interruption if a major fault
occurs on the UPS system and if synchronisation with the bypass source has not been established.
F. UPS maintenance:
1. For maintenance purposes, the UPS shall include a mechanical maintenance bypass system with one-
button operation. For personnel safety during servicing or testing, this system shall be designed to isolate
the UPS while continuing to supply power to the load from the bypass AC source. The UPS shall also
include a device making it possible to isolate the rectifiers and the chargers from the normal AC source.
2. All electronic components shall be accessible from the front of the UPS.
G. Battery maintenance: For safe maintenance on the battery, the system shall include a circuit
breaker to isolate the battery from the rectifier, the charger and the inverter. When the battery is
isolated from the system, the UPS shall continue to supply the load without interruption or distur-
bance, except in the event of a normal AC source outage.
H. Cold start (normal AC source absent): The battery shall be capable of ensuring UPS start-up
even if normal AC power is not available and continuing operation within the specified backup time (start on
battery power shall be possible on the condition that the system was already started with AC power present ).
2.9 SIZING AND GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
A. Technology: The UPS shall be based on sixpack IGBT technology with built-in thermal monitoring and a free-
frequency chopping mode to dynamically optimise efficiency and power quality.
B. Rating: The UPS shall be sized to continuously supply a load of…[ 20 / 30 / 40 / 60 / 80 / 100 / 120  kVA. The
rated active power must be constant for loads at a power factor (pf) of 0.9 lagging.
C. Battery backup time:

1. The battery backup time in the event of a normal AC source outage shall be _______ minutes, for a load
power factor of 0.8.
2. Battery service life shall be equal to at least … 5 / 10 …years. It shall be selected and sized
correspondingly, for a load power factor of 0.8.
D. Types of loads accepted:

1. The UPS shall accept high crest factors (3:1) without derating to ensure correct operation with computer
loads.
2. The total harmonic voltage distortion at UPS output (THDU downstream) shall respect the following limits:
07/2016 edition p. 230
Single UPS
a. THDU downstream ph/ph and ph/N  1.5% for linear loads.

b. THDU downstream ph/ph and ph/N  3.5 % for non-linear loads.
E. Limitation of harmonics upstream of the UPS:

1. The UPS system shall not draw a level of harmonic currents that could disturb the upstream AC system,
i.e. it shall comply with the stipulations of guide IEC 61000-3-4.
2. As such, the UPS shall have a controlled IGBT input rectifier drawing sinusoidal current.
3. In particular, the UPS shall respect the following characteristics at the normal AC input:
a. Total harmonic current distortion (THDI) upstream of the rectifier not exceeding:
1) 3% at full rated load for an RCD (computer) load.
2) 5% from 25% to 75% of the full rated load.
b. Input power factor (pf) greater than or equal to 0.99.
F. Efficiency: Overall efficiency shall be greater than or equal to: 91% @ full load
G. Noise level: The noise level, measured as per standard ISO 3746, shall be less than: 66 dBA.
2.10 AC SOURCES
A. Normal AC source (rectifier input): The normal AC source supplying the UPS shall, under normal operating
conditions, have the following characteristics:
1. Rated voltage: 380 - 470 V at full rated load and with load derating for lower vltages as shown in diagram
below, with backfeed option. Rated voltage must be higher than 342 V.
2. Number of phases: 3 ph + earth. The neutral is not necessary.
3. Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz ± 8%.
B. Bypass AC source (static-bypass input, if separate from rectifier input):

1. The bypass AC source shall continue to supply the load, without interruption, if its characteristics remain
within voltage tolerances (rated voltage +/- 10%).
2. Outside these tolerances, it shall be possible to supply the load, but in downgraded mode.
2.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
A. Rectifier and charger

1. Supply: The rectifier and charger module shall be supplied via the normal AC input. It must be capable of
operating without a neutral. In order to protect the battery and maximise its service life, the charger shall be
separate from the rectifier and shall provide the battery with a voltage that is independent of the voltage
supplied to the inverter.
2. Inrush current: A device shall be provided to limit inrush currents. When AC power fails and during genset
start, the rectifier shall limit the power drawn to 70% of its rating for ten seconds. The remaining 30% shall
be supplied by the battery.
3. Operating mode: The standard charger shall be sized to recharge the battery rapidly:
a battery with a backup time of…5 / 10 minutes in less than 11 hours] 15 minutes in less than 13 hours]
(following a discharge to Pn/2 to recover 90% of backup time).
4. Battery-current limiting: For long battery life, an electronic device shall automatically limit the charging
current to the maximum value specified by the battery supplier (0.1 x C10 for a sealed lead-acid battery).
5. Voltage regulation: Rectifier/charger regulation shall take into account the ambient temperature of the
battery and shall ensure DC output voltage fluctuations of less than 1% irrespective of load and AC input
voltage variations (within the specified limits).
B. Batteries: The battery shall be of the sealed lead-acid type, mounted and wired, with a service life of … 5 / 10
… years. It must be sized to supply, in the event of the normal AC source failure, the rated power of the
inverter at a power factor PF of 0.8.
07/2016 edition p. 231

Single UPS
1. (Batteries in the UPS cabinet)

a. To facilitate installation and reduce the overall footprint, it must be possible to lodge the battery in the
UPS cabinet.
b. Consequently, backup times of:
1)  5  minutes for the  40 / 60 kVA ratings
2)  10  minutes for the  40  kVA ratings
shall be ensured by batteries installed in the UPS cabinet.
2. (Batteries in a separate cabinet)
a. The battery shall be installed in a cabinet identical in appearance to that of the UPS.
b. The battery shall be sized to ensure continuity in the supply of power to the inverter for at least  5 / 10
/ 15 / 30  minutes for the  40 / 60 / 80 / 100 / 120  kVA ratings.
3. Sizing calculations shall assume an ambient temperature between 0° C and 40° C
4. The UPS shall include devices to ensure:
a. Effective battery protection;
b. Battery management.
C. Inverter: The inverter shall be sized to supply a rated load of … 20 / 30 / 40 / 60 / 80 / 100 / 120… kVA at 0.9
pf and shall satisfy the specifications listed below.
1. Output voltage
a. Rated voltage: … 380 / 400 / 415 … volts rms, adjustable via the user interface, within tolerances of
+/- 3%.
b. Number of phases: 3 phases + neutral + earth.
c. Steady-state conditions: The variation in the rated voltage shall be limited to ± 1% for a balanced
load between 0 and 100% of the rated power, irrespective of normal AC input and DC voltage levels,
within the specified limits.
d. Voltage variations for load step changes: Output voltage transients shall not exceed ± 1% of rated
voltage for 0 to 100% or 100 to 0% step loads. In all cases, the voltage shall return to within steady-
state tolerances in less than 100 milliseconds.
2. Output frequency
a. Rated frequency: - 50 or 60 Hz.
b. Variations: - ± 0.5 Hz,
3. Synchronisation with bypass power
a. When bypass power is within tolerances: To enable transfer to bypass power, the inverter output
voltage shall be synchronised with the bypass source voltage whenever possible. To that end, during
normal operation, a synchronisation system shall automatically limit the phase deviation between the
voltages to 3 degrees, if the bypass source frequency is sufficiently stable (within adjustable tolerances
of ± 0.5% to ± 8% with respect to the rated frequency).
b. Synchronisation with an external source: It shall be possible to synchronise with all types of
external source. For example, if the bypass source is a generator set, the synchronisation tolerances
shall be approximately ± 8% (adjustable) with respect to the rated frequency.
c. Autonomous operation following loss of synchronisation with bypass power: When the bypass
source frequency deviates beyond these limits, the inverter shall switch over to free-running mode with
internal synchronisation, regulating its own frequency to within ± 0,1 %. When bypass power returns to
within tolerances, the inverter shall automatically resynchronise.
d. Variation in frequency per unit time: To avoid transmitting to the inverter any excessive frequency
variations on the bypass AC source when it is within tolerances, inverter frequency variations per unit
time (dF/dt) shall be limited to 1 Hz/s or 2 Hz/s (user defined).
4. Overload capacity: The UPS shall be capable of supplying for at least:
a. 10 minutes at a load representing 125% of the rated load.
b. 1 minutes at a load representing 150% of the rated load.
b. 0.1 second at a load representing 220% of the rated load.
c. If necessary, the UPS shall operate as a generator (current limiting) with a peak capacity of 270% for
150 milliseconds, to allow highly disturbed transient operating states (high overloads, very high crest
factors, etc.) without transferring the load to the bypass.
D. Static bypass
1. Load transfer to the static bypass:
a. The UPS shall be equipped with a static bypass comprising a static switch. Instantaneous transfer of
the load from the inverter to bypass power and back shall take place without a break or disturbance in
the supply of power to the load, on the condition that the bypass source voltage and frequency are
within the specified tolerances and that the inverter is synchronised.
07/2016 edition p. 232
Single UPS
b. Transfer shall take place automatically in the event of a major overload or an internal in-
verter fault.
c. Manually initiated transfer shall also be possible.
d. If the bypass power is outside the specified tolerances or is not synchronised with the in-
verter, automatic transfer of the load from the inverter to bypass power shall take place after a
calibrated interruption adjustable from 13 to 1000 ms.
2. Static-switch protection: The static switch shall be equipped with an RC filter for protection against
switching overvoltages and lightning strikes.
E. Discrimination and short-circuit capacity

1. If the bypass power is within the specified tolerances, the presence of the static switch shall make it
possible to use the short-circuit power of the bypass source to trip the downstream protection devices of
the inverter.
2. To ensure tripping in a selective manner, the available power shall be sufficient to trip protection devices
with high ratings (circuit breaker rated In/2 or UR fuses rated In/4, where In is the rated inverter current).
3. If the bypass source is outside the specified tolerances, the inverter on its own shall, for the same
discrimination requirements, be capable of tripping circuit breakers rated In/2 or UR fuses rated In/4,
irrespective of the type of short-circuit.
F. System earthing arrangement: The UPS shall be compatible with the following system earthing
arrangements:
1. Upstream source: …[ TT/ IT / TNS / TNC ]…
2. Downstream installation: …[ TT/ IT / TNS / TNC ]…
3. If the upstream and downstream earthing arrangements are different, galvanic isolation shall be provided
on the static-bypass line.
2.5 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
A. Mechanical structure: The UPS and batteries shall be installed in cabinet(s) with a degree of protection IP20
(standard IEC 60529). Access to the subassemblies making up the system shall be exclusively through the
front.
B. Scalable design (Concerns only UPSs with the battery installed in a separate cabinet):
1. The UPS shall be designed to allow the installed power to be easily increased on site by connection of
additional UPS units, either to meet new load requirements or to enhance system availability by introducing
redundancy.
2. This transformation shall be possible directly on site, without returning the equipment to the factory and
without causing excessive system downtime.
C. Dimensions: The UPS shall require as little floor space as possible. To gain space, it shall be possible to
install the UPS with the back to the wall.
D. Connection:
1. To facilitate connections, all terminal blocks must be easily accessible from the front when
the UPS is installed with the back to the wall. Entry of upstream and downstream power ca-
bles, as well as any auxiliary cables, shall be possible through the bottom for a false floor.
2. The UPS shall be equipped with an earth-circuit connector, in compliance with the listed standards.
3. The cables shall comply with the listed standards and be mounted in compliance with the stipulations.
E. Safety:
1. For the safety of maintenance personnel, the cabinet shall be provided with a manually operated
mechanical bypass designed to isolate the rectifier, charger, inverter and static switch while continuing to
supply the load from the bypass AC source.
2. It shall be possible to send to the UPS an external EPO order resulting in opening of the battery circuit
breaker and the upstream circuit breaker.
2.6 ENVIRONMENT CONDITIONS
A. UPS (not including battery)

1. Operation: The UPS, not including the battery, shall be capable of operating under the following
environmental conditions without loss of performance:
07/2016 edition p. 233
Single UPS
a. Ambient temperature range: 0° C to +40° C.

b. Recommended temperature range: +20° C to + 25° C.
c. Maximum relative humidity: 95%.
d. Maximum altitude: 1000 meters.
2. Storage
a. The UPS, not including the battery, shall be designed for storage under the follow-
ing conditions: ambient temperature range: -20° C to +45° C.
2.7 BATTERY MANAGEMENT
A. Battery meter: A battery-meter function shall estimate the available backup time as a function of the battery
charge and the percent load. It shall be possible to set the battery meter so that it can take into account the
exact battery configuration installed with the UPS.
B. Digital battery monitoring

1. The UPS shall be equipped with a system for battery digital management.
2. Based on a number of parameters (percent load, temperature, battery type and age), the system shall
control the battery charge voltage and continuously calculate:
a. The true available backup time
b. The remaining service life.
C. Block by block monitoring

1. To further optimise battery availability and service life, it shall be possible to equip the UPS with an optional
system to continuously monitor all battery strings and display a block by block failure prediction.
2. The system shall include the functions listed below.
a. Continuous measurement of the voltage of each block.
b. Continuous measurement of the internal resistance.
c. Identification of faulty blocks (trend curves).
d. Possibility of replacing individual blocks.
e. Remoting of all information via Ethernet, dry contacts or JBus.
2.8 DISPLAY
A. User interface: UPS operation shall be facilitated by a user interface comprising:

1. A graphic display (at least quarter VGA and high resolution are preferable);
2. Controls;
3. Status indications with mimic panel.
B. Graphic display: The graphic display shall facilitate operation by offering the functions listed below.
1. Operating language: It shall be possible to display in the _________________ language
all the operating information supplied on the screens.
2. Step by step operating help: The graphic display shall assist the user by providing step by step help in
the user's language.
3. Animated colour mimic diagram: The mimic diagram shall enable display of installation parameters,
configuration, operating status and alarms and indication of operator instructions for switching operations
(e.g. bypass).
4. Display of measurements: It shall be possible to display the following measurements:
a. Inverter output phase-to-phase voltages
b. Inverter output currents
c. Inverter output frequency
d. Voltage across battery terminals
e. Battery charge or discharge current
f. Rectifier/charger input phase-to-phase voltages
g. Rectifier/charger input currents
h. Crest factor
i. Active and apparent power
j. Power factor of the load
k. Battery temperature
5. Display of status conditions and events: It shall be possible to display the following indications:
a. Load on battery power
b. Load on UPS
07/2016 edition p. 234

Single UPS
c. Load on automatic bypass

d. General alarm
e. Battery fault
f. Remaining battery backup time
g. Low battery warning
h. Bypass AC source outside tolerances
i. Battery temperature
j. Additional information shall be provided in view of accelerating servicing of the system.
6. Display of operating graphs: It shall be possible to graphically display the measurements mentioned
above on the screen over significant periods.
7. Log of time-stamped events: This function shall store in memory and make available, for automatic or
manually initiated recall, time-stamped logs of all important status changes, faults and malfunctions,
complete with an analysis and display of troubleshooting procedures. It shall be possible to time stamp
and store at least 2 000 events.
C. Controls: The UPS shall comprise the following controls:

1. Two ON and OFF buttons: Located on the front panel of the UPS, they shall control UPS-unit ON/OFF
status. It shall be possible to turn OFF the UPS externally via an isolated dry contact.
2. EPO terminal block: The UPS shall be equipped with an emergency power off terminal block for
complete system shutdown following reception of an external control signal. The EPO command shall
result in:
a. Shutdown of UPS units;
b. Opening of the static switch on the bypass line and of the battery circuit breaker;
c, Opening of an isolated dry contact on the programmable card.
3. Alarm reset button: This button shall turn off audio alarms (buzzer). If a new alarm is detected after
clearing the first, the buzzer sounds again.
D. Status indications with mimic panel: Indication of status conditions shall be distinct of the graphic display.
1. Three LEDs on the control panel indicate the following status conditions:
a. Load protected;
b. Minor fault;
c. Major fault.
2. The mimic panel shall represent the UPS and indicate the status of the load supply using five two-colour
(red and green) LEDs:
a. Load supplied (LED at UPS output on mimic panel),
b. Inverter on (inverter LED on mimic panel),
c. Operation on battery power (LED between battery and inverter on mimic panel),
d. Bypass activated (bypass LED on mimic panel),
e. PFC rectifier on (rectifier LED on mimic panel).
3. A buzzer shall warn the user of faults, malfunctions or operation on battery power.
2.9 COMMUNICATION
A. Standard communication: It shall be possible to remote the following controls, indications and
measurements. To that end, the UPS shall have as standard equipment:
1. A programmable card for input/output information. This card shall provide a total of eight dry contacts:
six for incoming information and two for outgoing information.
2. At least three communication ports for later addition, without interrupting operation, of communication
cards implementing different protocols, e.g. SNMP, JBus/ModBus, RS232, USB.
B. Communications options: The UPS system shall be designed to enable the extension of communications,
without system shutdown, to the following types of cards:
1. An SNMP communication card for connection to an Ethernet network, for connection to a computer-
network management system.
2. An RS485 serial-link communication card capable of implementing the JBus/ModBus protocol for
connection to a building management system (BMS).
3. Remote Monitoring Service (RMS modem) or Teleservice
4. Relay Communication Card (Input / Output Dry contact card
5. A Network Management Card (NMC2) for direct UPS connection to an intranet network, without
connection to a server, capable of supplying information via a standard web browser.
The UPS shall be detectable by supervision software for large UPS systems.
Shutdown and administration software shall be available in addition to the communication cards.
07/2016 edition p. 235
Single UPS
3.1 PROTECTION
A. UPS: The UPS shall include protection against AC-source overvoltages (as per standard IEC
60146), excessive external or internal temperature rise and vibrations and impacts during transport.
B. Rectifier and charger: The rectifier and charger shall automatically shut down if the DC voltage reaches the
maximum value specified by the battery manufacturer or if the temperature exceeds the limits specified above.
C. Inverter: Inverters shall self-protect against overloads and short-circuits, irrespective of the operating mode
(AC power or battery power).
D. Batteries:
1. Protection against deep discharge and self-discharge: The UPS shall comprise a device designed to
protect the battery against deep discharges, taking into account the characteristics of the discharge cycles,
with isolation of the battery by a circuit breaker.
2. Independent regulation and monitoring systems:
a. A regulation system shall regulate the battery voltage and the charge current.
b. A second system, independent of the regulation, shall monitor the battery voltage and the charge
current. Consequently, if the regulation system fails, the monitoring system steps in to shut down the
charger and avoid overcharging.
3. Regulation of the battery voltage depending on the ambient temperature:
a. A temperature sensor adapts the charge voltage to the ambient temperature.
b. This regulation system takes into account the chemical reaction and prolongs the battery service life.
c. The permissible temperature range is set in the personalisation parameters.
d. An alarm shall be issued for temperatures outside the permissible range.
4. Self-test:
a. Battery monitoring shall be carried out by an automatic device. Self-test intervals shall be set to one
month by default, but shall be adjustable.
b. This self-test system shall, where necessary, initiate indications via LEDs on the front panel or a
message to a remote monitoring system.
5. Possibility of backfeed protection: If backfeed protection is necessary, it must be possible to install two
independent systems on the normal and bypass AC inputs.
6. Possibility of battery circuit-breaker management: The UPS shall be capable of receiving and
managing two battery circuit breakers. Battery availability is improved by dividing it into two sections. If one
section is disconnected for servicing or any other reason, the second shall remain available and provide
approximately half of the backup time. In such a case, the UPS shall regulate the charge accordingly.
3.2 MAINTAINABILITY
B. For optimum safety during servicing, a maintenance bypass shall be available to completely isolate the UPS.
B. Local and remote diagnostics and monitoring - E. Services: The UPS shall be equipped with a self-test
system to check operation of the system as a whole each time it is started. To that end, the supply
control/monitoring electronics shall offer:
2. Acquisition of information vital for computer-aided diagnostics or monitoring (local or remote).
3. Overall readiness for remote supervision services provided by the manufacturer.
3.3 STANDARD AND TESTS
A. Standards
1. All equipment shall be designed and built in accordance with accepted engineering practice and applicable
international standards, in particular the standards listed below.
b. IEC 62040-1 and EN 62040-1: UPS - Safety.
c. IEC 62040-2 and EN 62040-2: UPS - Electromagnetic compatibility - [level C3 / C2 class A is optional].
d. IEC 62040-3 and EN 62040-3: UPS - Performance.
e. IEC 60950 / EN 60950: Safety of IT equipment, including electrical business equipment.
f. IEC 61000-2-2: Compatibility levels for low-frequency conducted disturbances and signalling in public
07/2016 edition p. 236
Single UPS
low-voltage power supply systems.

g. IEC 61000-4: EMC - serie for EMC according to IEC/EN 62050-2.
h. IEC 60439: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies.
i. IEC 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
j. ISO 3746: Sound power levels.
k. CE marking.
2. What is more, the equipment must comply with environmental-protection standards, with production taking
place on premises certified ISO 14001. The UPS design procedure shall be covered by an ISO 9001
quality system as well as a dependability study to ensure maximum reliability.
3.4 SERVICES
A. Maintenance: The supplier shall propose contracts covering four levels of maintenance.
1. Level one: simple checks and settings, procedures accessible without any dismounting and involving no
risk.
2. Level two: preventive maintenance, checks not inhibiting continuous operation of the system and
preparing operators for Manufacturer services.
3. Level three: trouble-shooting. Repairs by standard exchange of subassemblies and functional power and
control components. Preventive-maintenance operations, both systematic and when indicated by qualified
diagnosis.
4. Level four: major preventive and corrective maintenance operations or technical upgrades during start-
up, operation or renovation of the UPS installation and recycling of equipment or components representing
a risk. These operations require the use of devices and means that have been calibrated by certified
organisations.
B. Technical competency:
1. Customer operators: the supplier shall offer a level 2 training program.
2. Service personnel: the supplier shall ensure that service personnel are qualified for level 4.
C. Functional components - organisation of supplier services:

1. Sufficient geographical proximity of the supplier or an authorised agent shall ensure reasonable access
times to the customer site in view of reducing the mean time to repair (MTTR). The supplier shall be in a
position to offer a contract limiting the response time to four hours.
2. The supplier's logistics system and the availability 24 hours a day of original replacement parts shall
similarly contribute to reducing to the greatest extent possible the mean time to repair (MTTR).
D. System start-up: The system and equipment shall be started up on site by the supplier or its authorised
agent. The procedure shall include checks on the characteristics of the upstream and downstream protection
devices and on the UPS installation parameters.
E. StruxureWare Data Center Expert: A centralized infrastructure management platform hereafter referred to as
and a switch supplied by the user. This switch shall relay information to Data Center Expert, which in turn shall
allow access to this information via the user’s public network via a single IP address.
thresholds for alarm notification. With this feature, Data Center Expert can notify clients of reaching thresholds
for PDU capacity, or branch circuit breaker capacity. Other custom programmable alarm points for non- APC
products shall also be available via dry contact input signal.
4. Public Network Monitoring: Data Center Expert shall also be capable of monitoring other APC devices that
are connected to the client’s public network.
F. Replacement parts: The suppler shall undertake to provide certified original replacement parts for at least ten
years following the date of delivery.
07/2016 edition p. 237

Single UPS
G. Recycling and renovation/substitution: At the end of the UPS service life, the supplier shall guarantee the
continuity of service of the customer's installations if necessary, including dismantling of equipment and
replacement of equipment, in compliance with applicable standards on environmental protection.
3.5 INSTALLATION SERVICES
A. Required services include:

1. Supply of the UPS and any accessory parts or elements.
2. Carriage-paid UPS transportation and delivery to the site.
B. Options:
1. UPS handling and installation on the site.
2. Connections between the battery and the UPS.
3. Connection of the normal AC source to the rectifier/charger.
4. Connection of the bypass AC source to the input transformer or bypass input.
5. Connection of the load circuits to the UPS output.
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 238

parallel UPS

MGE GALAXY 5500
20 kVA to 120 kVA
Parallel UPS, three-phase
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
SECTION [26 33 63] [16611]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.3 UPS DEFINITIONS
required in view of supplying, putting into operation and maintaining an Uninterruptible Power Supply system
(referred to as a UPS in the rest of this document). The UPS system shall be designed to supply dependable
electric power to:
1. The Single-UPS unit with static bypass shall be designed to supply dependable electric power to:
-5
475.000 MTBF in hours/Non availability: 2.1x10 .
2. Active redundancy N+1:
6 -6
a. 2 UPS units (1+1): 1.88x10 MTBF in hours/Non availability: 5.32x10
6 -6
b. 3 UPS units (2+1): 1.25x10 MTBF in hours/Non availability: 7.98x10
6 -6
c. 4 UPS units (3+1): 9.39x10 MTBF in hours/Non availability: 1.07x10
The total load supplied by the UPS system shall be equal to .kVA, at
a power factor pf = 0.9.
B. Brief description:
1. The UPS system shall be made up of …[ 2 / 3 / 4 /5 / 6 ]… identical parallel-connected single-
UPS units (same power rating), operating in double-conversion mode (also called on-line mode); it shall be
a VFI-type UPS (as per standard IEC 62040-2).
2. Each UPS unit shall have a unit rating of …[ 20 / 30 / 40 / 60 / 80 / 100 / 120 ]… and shall comprise the
following components, described below in this specification:
10. PFC rectifier
11. Battery charger
12. Inverter
13. Battery
switches, etc.
(for a system with 2 UPSs in an active redundancy configuration)
a. Static bypass (via a static switch) for each UPS unit
b. Manual maintenance bypass for each UPS unit
(for all other cases)
a. User and communications interface
b. Battery management system
c. Any and all other devices required for safe operation and maintenance, including circuit breakers,
07/2016 edition p. 239
parallel UPS
switches, etc.
1.2 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Each single-UPS unit shall operate in double-conversion mode (also called on-line mode); it shall be a VFI-
type UPS (as per standard IEC 62040-2), made up of the following components, described in detail in this
specification.
charger automatically recharges the battery. The UPS system shall ensure equal sharing of the total load
between the various parallel-connected units.
E. Parallel operation and redundancy

1. Without redundancy: The system shall not be redundant. The …[ 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 ]… UPS units must
operate in parallel to supply the load. Shutdown of a UPS unit shall result in load transfer to the bypass AC
source via the various static bypass switches.
2. With redundancy:
a. The units shall operate in parallel with redundancy, with the load shared equally between the units.
b. Redundancy shall be of the "n+1" (or n+2) type, i.e. "1" (or 2) units shall be redundant in the total of n
units. If a major fault occurs on a unit, it shall automatically disconnect.
c. If the remaining unit(s) are sufficient to supply the load, it/they shall remain in operation.
d. If the total available power is insufficient, the load shall be automatically transferred, without
interruption, to the bypass AC source, if it is within tolerances.
F. Transfer to bypass AC source:

1. In the event of an overload exceeding system capabilities (short-circuits, heavy inrush currents, etc.) the
load shall be automatically transferred, instantaneously and without interruption, to the bypass AC source,
on the condition that bypass power is available and within tolerances.
2. To that end, synchronisation of each inverter in phase and frequency with the bypass source shall be
automatic. Transfer of the load back to the UPS-unit outputs shall be automatic or manual. During
transfer, the load shall not suffer an outage or disturbance in the supply of power.
3. To ensure transfer in complete safety, the system shall simultaneously control the static switches.
G. UPS maintenance:
1. For maintenance purposes, all electronic components shall be accessible from the front of the UPS.
2. In addition, a built-in manually-operated mechanical bypass system shall be:
a. Installed in each UPS unit; (for a system with 2 UPS units with active redundancy)
07/2016 edition p. 240
parallel UPS
b. Installed separately in an external bypass enclosure or cubicle (other cases).

3. For personnel safety during servicing or testing, this system shall be designed to isolate the UPS units
while continuing to supply power to the load from the bypass AC source. Transfer to the manual bypass
mode and back shall be possible without interruption to the load.
4. The UPS shall also include a device making it possible to isolate the rectifiers and the chargers from the
normal AC source.
H. Battery maintenance: For safe maintenance on the battery of each UPS unit, the system shall include a
circuit breaker to isolate the battery from the corresponding rectifier/charger and inverter. When the battery is
isolated from the system, the UPS shall continue to supply the load without interruption or disturbance, except
in the event of a normal AC source outage.
I. Cold start (normal AC source absent): The battery of each UPS shall be capable of ensuring UPS start-up
even if normal AC power is not available and continuing operation within the specified back-up time (start on
battery power shall be possible on the condition that the system was already started with AC power present).
A. Technology: The UPS shall be based on sixpack IGBT technology with built-in thermal monitoring and a high
free-frequency chopping mode to dynamically optimise efficiency and power quality.
B. Rating:
1. The UPS system shall be sized to continuously supply a load of kVA, at a power factor
(pf) of 0.9.
2. It shall be made up of ...[ 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 ]... UPS units, each with an identical rating of ...[ 20 /
30 / 40 / 60 / 80 / 100 / 120 ]... kVA.
3. The total installed power rating shall thus be kVA. ...[Consequently, 1 (or 2) unit(s) may be redundant.]
D. Battery backup time:

1. The backup time of each battery in the event of a normal AC source outage shall be … 5 /
10 / 15 / 30 / 60…… minutes.
2. The service life of each battery shall be equal to at least …5 / 10]… years.
3. Batteries shall be selected and sized accordingly.
D. Reliability and MTBF: The active redundancy type architecture shall allow the installation to reach an MTBF
6 6 5 -6 -6 -5
of …[1.88x10 /1.25x10 /9.39x10 hours] corresponding to an unavailability of [5.32x10 /7.98x10 /1.07x10 ].
F. Types of loads accepted:

1. If all the connected loads are non-linear (100% non-linear loads), each UPS unit shall accept high crest
factors (3:1) without derating of output.
2. For both linear and non-linear loads, the voltage total harmonic distortion at UPS output:
a. THDU downstream ph/ph and ph/N  1.5% for linear loads;
b. THDU downstream ph/ph and ph/N  3.5% for non-linear loads.
F. Limitation of harmonics upstream of the UPS system:
i.e. it shall comply with the stipulations of guide IEC 61000-3-4 (formerly IEC 1000 3-4).
1) - 3% at full rated load for an RCD (computer) load, at Pn;
2) - 5% from 30% to 100% of the full rated load;
3. These performance levels, due to the "clean" input rectifier drawing sinusoidal current, limit upstream
distortion and avoid oversizing of upstream equipment (cables, circuit breakers, etc.), without requiring
additional filters.
G. Efficiency: Overall efficiency of each UPS unit shall be greater than or equal to: 91% @ full load.
H. Noise level: The noise level, measured as per standard ISO 3746, shall for each unit be less than: 66 dBA.
2.13 AC SOURCES
07/2016 edition p. 241
parallel UPS

1. Rated voltage: 380 - 470 V at full rated load and with load derating for lower voltages as shown in diagram


operating without a neutral.
B. Batteries: Each UPS unit shall be equipped with its own battery of the:
1. (batteries in the UPS cabinet)

a. sealed lead-acid type, with a service life of … 5 / 10 … years, factory mounted and wired in the UPS
cabinet. Battery mounting in the UPS cabinet is intended to facilitate installation and reduce the overall
footprint.
b. Consequently, backup times of:
1)  5  minutes for the  40 / 60  kVA ratings
shall be ensured by batteries installed in the UPS cabinet
2. (batteries in a separate cabinet)
a. …sealed lead-acid type, factory mounted and wired in a cabinet identical to that of the UPS, …
sealed lead-acid type, mounted on shelves,…vented lead-acid type, mounted on a rack,... with a
service life of …5 / 10… years.
b. The battery shall be installed in a cabinet identical in appearance to that of the UPS.
c. The battery shall be sized to ensure continuity in the supply to the inverter for at least  5 / 10 / 15 / 30 
minutes for a power rating of  40 / 60 / 80 / 100 / 120  kVA.
3. Each battery shall be sized to ensure continuity in the supply of power to the corresponding inverter for at
least …5 / 10 / 15 / 30 … minutes, in the event of a normal AC source failure, with the inverter operating
at full rated load, i.e. kVA at a power factor (pf) of 0.9.
4. Sizing calculations shall assume an ambient temperature between 0° C and 40° C.
5. The UPS system shall include devices to ensure:
a. effective battery protection;
b. battery management.
07/2016 edition p. 242
parallel UPS
C. Inverter: Each inverter shall be sized to supply a load rated …20 / 30 / 40 / 60 / 80 / 100 / 120… kVA at a
power factor (pf) of 0.9, taking into account the characteristics presented below.
1. Output voltage
a. Rated voltage: … 380 / 400 / 415 … volts rms, adjustable via the user interface (see section 10),
within tolerances of +/- 3%.
2. Output frequency
external source. For example, if the bypass source is a generator set, the synchronisation tolerances
internal synchronisation, regulating its own frequency to within ± 0,1 %. When bypass power returns to
within tolerances, the inverter shall automatically resynchronise.
d. Variation in frequency per unit time: During the switch to free-running mode and the switch back to
synchronised mode, frequency variations per unit time (dF/dt) shall be limited to 1 Hz/s or 2 Hz/s (user
defined).
a. 10 minutes at a load representing 125% of the rated load;
b. 1 minutes at a load representing 150% of the rated load;
c. 0.1 second at a load representing 220% of the rated load.
d. If necessary, the UPS shall operate as a generator (current limiting) with a peak capacity of 270% for
D. Static bypass
a. Each UPS unit shall be equipped with a static bypass comprising a static switch. The static bypasses
shall be controlled simultaneously by a built-in system. Instantaneous transfer of the load from the
inverters to bypass power and back shall take place without a break or disturbance in the supply of power
to the load, on the condition that the bypass source voltage and frequency are within the specified
tolerances and that the inverters are synchronised.
verter fault.
d. If the bypass power is outside the specified tolerances or is not synchronised with the in-
2. Static-switch protection: Each static switch shall be equipped with an RC filter for protection against

common inverter output.
with high ratings (circuit breaker rated In/2 or UR fuses rated In/4, where In is the rated UPS-system
07/2016 edition p. 243
parallel UPS
current).
3. If the bypass source is outside the specified tolerances, the UPS-system on its own shall, for the same
4. Parallel connection of a number of UPS units significantly improves discrimination.
arrangements:
front.
B. Scalable design (Concerns only UPSs with the battery installed in a separate cabinet):
1. The UPS shall be designed to allow the installed power to be easily increased on site by connection of
additional UPS units, either to meet new load requirements or to enhance system availability by introducing
redundancy.
2. This transformation shall be possible directly on site, without returning the equipment to the factory and
without causing excessive system downtime.
C. Dimensions: The UPS shall require as little floor space as possible. To gain space, it shall be possible to
install the UPS with the back to the wall.
D. Connection:
3. The cables shall comply with the listed standards and be mounted in compliance with the stipulations. The
neutral conductor shall be oversized for any third-order harmonic currents and their multiples (the size of
the neutral shall be 1.5 times that of each phase).
E. Safety:
1. The equipment shall meet the requirements of degree of protection index IP21, in compliance with
standard IEC 60529.

b. Recommended temperature range: +20° C to + 25° C;
c. Maximum relative humidity: 95%;
2. Storage
a. The UPS, not including the battery, shall be designed for storage under the follow
07/2016 edition p. 244

parallel UPS
A. Battery meter: A battery-meter function shall estimate the available backup time of the UPS system as a
function of the battery charge and the percent load. It shall be possible to set the battery meter so that it can
take into account the exact battery configuration installed with the UPS.

C. Block by block monitoring

2.8 DISPLAY
A. User interface: UPS operation shall be facilitated by a user interface, on each UPS unit, comprising:
1. a graphic display (at least quarter VGA and high resolution are preferable);
2. controls;
3. status indications with mimic panel.
4. The information and controls shall be centralised by a system (electronic board) built into one of the UPS
units.
(e.g. bypass).
h. Crest factor
b. Load on UPS
d. General alarm
e. Battery fault
07/2016 edition p. 245

parallel UPS


result in:
a. Load protected;
b. Minor fault;
c. Major fault.
2.9 COMMUNICATION
measurements. To that end, each UPS unit shall have as standard equipment:
cards implementing different protocols, e.g. SNMP, JBus/ModBus, RS232, USB, XML.
3.1 PROTECTION
A. UPS: The UPS shall include protection against AC-source overvoltages (as per standard IEC
07/2016 edition p. 246
parallel UPS
D. Batteries:
4. Self-test:
5. Possibility of backfeed protection: If backfeed protection is necessary, it must be possible to install two
independent systems on the normal and bypass AC inputs.
7. Possibility of battery circuit-breaker management: Each UPS shall be capable of receiving and
managing two battery circuit breakers. Battery availability is improved by dividing it into two sections. If one
section is disconnected for servicing or any other reason, the second shall remain available and provide
approximately half of the backup time. In such a case, the UPS shall regulate the charge accordingly.
3.2 MAINTAINABILITY
A. Local and remote diagnostics and monitoring - E. Services: The UPS shall be equipped with a self-test
1. Auto-compensation of component drift;
2. Acquisition of information vital for computer-aided diagnostics or monitoring (local or remote);
A. Standards
a. IEC 62040-1 and EN 62040-1: UPS - Safety.
b. IEC 62040-2 and EN 62040-2: UPS - Electromagnetic compatibility - [level C3 / C2 class A is optional].
c. IEC 62040-3 and EN 62040-3: UPS - Performance.
d. IEC 60950 / EN 60950: Safety of IT equipment, including electrical business equipment.
e. IEC 61000-2-2: Compatibility levels for low-frequency conducted disturbances and signalling in public
f. IEC 61000-3-4: Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current > 16 A/ph).
k. CE marking.
07/2016 edition p. 247
parallel UPS
3.4 SERVICES
risk.
diagnosis.
organisations.

E. StruxureWare Data Center Expert: A centralized infrastructure management platform hereafter referred to as
for PDU capacity, or branch circuit breaker capacity. Other custom programmable alarm points for non- APC
F. Replacement parts: The suppler shall undertake to provide certified original replacement parts for at least ten

07/2016 edition p. 248
parallel UPS
B. Options:
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 249

Marine

MGE GALAXY 5500 Marine
20 kVA to 120 kVA
Single UPS, three-phase
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
SECTION [26 33 63] [16611]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.4 UPS DEFINITIONS
B. Purpose: The purpose of this specification is to define the design, manufacture and testing characteristics
required in view of supplying, putting into operation and maintaining an Uninterruptible Power Supply
(referred to as a UPS in the rest of this document).
1. The Single-UPS unit with static bypass shall be designed to supply dependable electric power to: 475.000
-5
MTBF in hours/Non availability: 2.1x10
B. Brief description: The UPS shall be a single-UPS unit, operating in double-conversion mode (also called on-
line mode); it shall be a VFI-type UPS (as per standard IEC 62040-2), made up of the following components,
described in detail in this specification:
17. PFC rectifier
18. Battery charger
19. Inverter
20. Battery
21. Static bypass (via a static switch)
22. Manual maintenance bypass
switches, etc.
26. Marine skid
27. Cubicle color RAL 7035
1.2 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
07/2016 edition p. 250

Marine
A. The UPS shall operate in double-conversion mode (also called on-line mode); it shall be a VFI
type UPS (as per standard IEC 62040-2), made up of the following components, described in de-
tail in this specification:
charger automatically recharges the battery.
F. Transfer to bypass AC source:

1. In the event of an overload exceeding system capabilities or UPS shutdown, the static by-
pass switch shall instantaneously transfer the load to the bypass AC source without interruption, on the
condition that bypass power is available and within tolerances.
2. Transfer of the load back to the UPS-unit output, synchronised with the bypass AC source, shall be
automatic or manual. During transfer, the load shall not suffer an outage or disturbance in the supply of
power.
F. UPS maintenance:
1. For maintenance purposes, the UPS shall include a mechanical maintenance bypass system with one-
button operation. For personnel safety during servicing or testing, this system shall be designed to isolate
the UPS while continuing to supply power to the load from the bypass AC source. The UPS shall also
include a device making it possible to isolate the rectifiers and the chargers from the normal AC source.
2. All electronic components shall be accessible from the front of the UPS.
G. Battery maintenance: For safe maintenance on the battery, the system shall include a circuit
breaker to isolate the battery from the rectifier, the charger and the inverter. When the battery is
isolated from the system, the UPS shall continue to supply the load without interruption or distur-
bance, except in the event of a normal AC source outage.
I. Cold start (normal AC source absent): The battery shall be capable of ensuring UPS start-up
even if normal AC power is not available and continuing operation within the specified backup time (start on
battery power shall be possible on the condition that the system was already started with AC power present ).
A. Technology: The UPS shall be based on sixpack IGBT technology with built-in thermal monitoring and a free-
frequency chopping mode to dynamically optimise efficiency and power quality.
B. Rating: The UPS shall be sized to continuously supply a load of…[ 20 / 30 / 40 / 60 / 80 / 100 / 120  kVA. The
rated active power must be constant for loads at a power factor (pf) of 0.9 lagging.
E. Battery backup time:

2. Battery service life shall be equal to at least … 5 / 10 …years. It shall be selected and sized
D. Types of loads accepted:

1. The UPS shall accept high crest factors (3:1) without derating to ensure correct operation with computer
07/2016 edition p. 251
Marine
loads.
a. THDU downstream ph/ph and ph/N  1.5% for linear loads.
b. THDU downstream ph/ph and ph/N  3.5 % for non-linear loads.
G. Limitation of harmonics upstream of the UPS:

2. As such, the UPS shall have a controlled IGBT input rectifier drawing sinusoidal current.
1) 3% at full rated load for an RCD (computer) load.
2) 5% from 25% to 75% of the full rated load.
F. Efficiency: Overall efficiency shall be greater than or equal to: 91% @ full load
G. Noise level: The noise level, measured as per standard ISO 3746, shall be less than: 66 dBA.
2.16 AC SOURCES
1. Rated voltage: 380 - 470 V at full rated load and with load derating for lower voltages as shown in diagram


operating without a neutral. In order to protect the battery and maximise its service life, the charger shall be
separate from the rectifier and shall provide the battery with a voltage that is independent of the voltage
supplied to the inverter.
B. Batteries: The battery shall be of the sealed lead-acid type, mounted and wired, with a service life of … 5 / 10
07/2016 edition p. 252

Marine
… years. It must be sized to supply, in the event of the normal AC source failure, the rated power of the
inverter at a power factor PF of 0.8.
1. (Batteries in a separate cabinet)
a. The battery shall be installed in a cabinet specially designed for marine application.
b. The battery shall be sized to ensure continuity in the supply of power to the inverter for at least  5 / 10
/ 15 / 30  minutes for the  40 / 60 / 80 / 100 / 120  kVA ratings.
2. Sizing calculations shall assume an ambient temperature between 0° C and 40° C
3. The UPS shall include devices to ensure:
a. Effective battery protection;
b. Battery management.
C. Inverter: The inverter shall be sized to supply a rated load of … 20 / 30 / 40 / 60 / 80 / 100 / 120… kVA at 0.9
pf and shall satisfy the specifications listed below.
1. Output voltage
+/- 3%.
2. Output frequency
3. Synchronization with bypass power
voltage shall be synchronized with the bypass source voltage whenever possible. To that end, during
normal operation, a synchronization system shall automatically limit the phase deviation between the
b. Synchronization with an external source: It shall be possible to synchronize with all types of
external source. For example, if the bypass source is a generator set, the synchronization tolerances
c. Autonomous operation following loss of synchronization with bypass power: When the bypass
internal synchronization, regulating its own frequency to within ± 0,1 %. When bypass power returns to
within tolerances, the inverter shall automatically resynchronize.
a. 10 minutes at a load representing 125% of the rated load.
b. 1 minutes at a load representing 150% of the rated load.
b. 0.1 second at a load representing 220% of the rated load.
c. If necessary, the UPS shall operate as a generator (current limiting) with a peak capacity of 270% for
D. Static bypass
a. The UPS shall be equipped with a static bypass comprising a static switch. Instantaneous transfer of
the load from the inverter to bypass power and back shall take place without a break or disturbance in
the supply of power to the load, on the condition that the bypass source voltage and frequency are
within the specified tolerances and that the inverter is synchronized.
verter fault.
d. If the bypass power is outside the specified tolerances or is not synchronized with the in-
07/2016 edition p. 253
Marine
switching overvoltage and lightning strikes.

the inverter.
with high ratings (circuit breaker rated In/2 or UR fuses rated In/4, where In is the rated inverter current).
3. If the bypass source is outside the specified tolerances, the inverter on its own shall, for the same
arrangements:
front.
B. Dimensions: The UPS shall require as little floor space as possible.
C. Connection:
3. The cables shall comply with the listed standards and be mounted in compliance with the stipulations.
E. Safety:
F. Specific Marine design:

1. Triangle door lock, Door blocking device, specific reinforcement

b. Recommended temperature range: +20° C to + 25° C.
c. Maximum relative humidity: 95%.
2. Storage

07/2016 edition p. 254
Marine
A. Battery meter: A battery-meter function shall estimate the available backup time as a function of the battery
charge and the percent load. It shall be possible to set the battery meter so that it can take into account the
exact battery configuration installed with the UPS.

2.8 DISPLAY

2. Controls;
(e.g. bypass).
h. Crest factor
b. Load on UPS
d. General alarm
e. Battery fault

07/2016 edition p. 255

Marine
result in:
a. Load protected;
b. Minor fault;
c. Major fault.
2.9 COMMUNICATION
cards implementing different protocols, e.g. SNMP, JBus/ModBus, RS232, USB.
3.1 PROTECTION
A. UPS: The UPS shall include protection against AC-source overvoltage (as per standard IEC
D. Batteries:
07/2016 edition p. 256
Marine

c. The permissible temperature range is set in the personalization parameters.
4. Self-test:
5. Possibility of battery circuit-breaker management: The UPS shall be capable of receiving and
managing two battery circuit breakers. Battery availability is improved by dividing it into two sections. If
one section is disconnected for servicing or any other reason, the second shall remain available and
provide approximately half of the backup time. In such a case, the UPS shall regulate the charge
accordingly.
3.2 MAINTAINABILITY
C. For optimum safety during servicing, a maintenance bypass shall be available to completely isolate the UPS.
B. Local and remote diagnostics and monitoring - E. Services: The UPS shall be equipped with a self-test
2. Acquisition of information vital for computer-aided diagnostics or monitoring (local or remote).
A. Standards
c. IEC 62040-2 and EN 62040-2: UPS - Electromagnetic compatibility - [level C3 / C2 class A is optional].
f. IEC 61000-2-2: Compatibility levels for low-frequency conducted disturbances and signalling in public
k. CE marking.
l. Marine type approval
3.4 SERVICES
risk.
07/2016 edition p. 257
Marine
diagnosis.
organizations.
C. Functional components - organization of supplier services:

1. Sufficient geographical proximity of the supplier or an authorized agent shall ensure reasonable access
E. Replacement parts: The suppler shall undertake to provide certified original replacement parts for at least ten
F. Recycling and renovation/substitution: At the end of the UPS service life, the supplier shall guarantee the

B. Options:
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 258

Galaxy VM
3/3 Phase 160/200 kVA
07/2016 edition p. 259

Galaxy VM 3:3 – 160 to 200 kVA
Schneider Electric
GALAXY VM
160-200 kVA UPS
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
SECTION [26 33 63] [16611]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.6 SUMMARY
herein specified.
B. Section includes: The work specified in this Section includes, but shall not be limited to, a three-phase, on-line,
double conversion, solid state UPS. The UPS shall operate in conjunction with the existing building electrical
system to provide high quality power conditioning, back-up power protection, and distribution for electronic
equipment loads. The system shall consist of a solid state IGBT rectifier/inverter, power factor corrected rectifier,
a 100 percent rated for continuous duty static switch, battery plant, graphical status/control panel, and
synchronizing circuitry as described herein.
1.7 [Parallel] SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General characteristics
1. Double Conversion – Transformerless Design
2. Integrated Parallel capability
a. Up to five UPS units for redundancy
b. Up to four UPS units for capacity
3. Front access only required for service
4. Top or bottom cable entry
5. High efficiency (96% at low load levels from 25% to 75%)
6. Battery charging in bypass operation
B. Design requirements:
INSERT APPLICABLE VALUES IN PARAGRAPHS BELOW.
1. The UPS shall be sized for [___] kVA load.

2. [The parallel system shall be comprised of [___] UPSs for N+[___] system-level redundancy.]
3. [The parallel system shall be sized for [___] kVA load.]
4. The UPS battery system shall be sized for [___] kVA at power factor 0.9 for [___] minutes.
C. System characteristics:
07/2016 edition p. 260

1. Input: The system input shall be configurable for either single or dual utility derived from a three phase wye
source. The system should facilitate both top and bottom cable entry.
a. Input voltage: [___] volts AC three-phase, 3-wire (L1, L2, L3 + PE).
b. Frequency: 40-70 Hertz
c. Input power factor correction:
1) 0.97 > 25% load
2) 0.99 > 50% load
3) 0.99 > 75% load
4) 0.99 > 100% load
d. Total Harmonic Distortion (THDI):
1) < 3% @ 100% load
2) < 4% @ 50% load
3) < 6% @ 25% load
e. Generator ramp-in adaptable: 10-40 seconds
f. Rated conditional short-circuit current Icc: 65 kA RMS at required breaker.
g. Rated peak withstand current Ipk: Icc x 2.2
h. Protection: Built-in backfeed contactor.
i. Inrush Current: Less than nominal input current for less than one cycle. Shall not exceed 800% of the
rectifier/battery charger full load current.
2. Bypass:
a. Bypass voltage: [___] volts AC three-phase, 3-wire (L1, L2, L3 + PE) or 4-wire (L1, L2, L3 + N + PE).
b. Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz
3. UPS output:
a. Output voltage: [___] volts AC, ±1 percent steady state variation phase-to-phase voltage volts AC,
three- phase, 3-wire (L1, L2, L3 + PE) or 4 wire.
b. Frequency: 50/60 hertz, ±1.0 percent (free running)
c. Output voltage range
1) Symmetric load (0-100%):
a) ± 1% static
b) ± 5% after 2 ms
c) ± 1% after 50 ms
d. Output Voltage Transient Response: The output voltage returns to within ±1% of the steady state
value within 50ms.
e. Output power factor: 0.9
f. Ouput Voltage Transient Characteristics:
1) 20% load step change +3%
g. Total Harmonic Distortion (THDU):
1) < 2% at 100% linear load
2) < 3% at 100% non-linear load
h. Slew rate (Hz/sec): Programmable 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4 ,6
i. Load power factor: 0.7 leading to 0.5 lagging without derating
j. Overload rating:
1) Normal operation:
a) 150% for 1 minute at 40 °C
b) 125% for 10 minutes at 40 °C
2) Battery operation:
a) 150% for 1 second
b) 125% for 1 minute at 40 °C
3) Bypass operation:
a) 1000% for 100 ms
k. System AC-AC efficiency:
1) Up to 96.5% in normal operation
2) Up to 99.3% in ECO mode
4. Battery: The battery system should consist of [____] [modular battery cabinets/classic battery
cabinets/battery breaker box]
a. Battery voltage: 480 volts DC nominal
b. Charging power in % of output power:
07/2016 edition p. 261
1) 40% charge ≤ 80% load

c. Battery test: Manual or automatic (selectable)
d. Deep discharge protection
e. Recharge according to battery temperature
f. Cold start without additional equipment
g. Battery type: Valve regulated sealed lead acid (VRLA). Either in traditional top terminal or modular
cabinet
h. Maximum DC current: Maximum DC current at cutoff voltage shall be [____] amperes.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
following:
B. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings for each product and accessory required. Include information not fully
cabinet weights; heat rejection and air flow requirements; single line diagram; and control and external wiring.
C. Wiring diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams detailing power, signal, and control systems, clearly differentiating
between manufacturer installed wiring and field installed wiring, and between components provided by the
D. Contract closeout submittals:

1. Project record documents: Submit a complete set of installation drawings showing all the information
2. Operation and maintenance data: Submit operation and maintenance data to include in operation and
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer qualifications: Manufacturer shall be a firm engaged in the manufacture of solid state UPS
a. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified and shall be designed to internationally accepted
standards.
B. Regulatory requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations
of Federal, State, and local authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from such authorities.
1. The UPS shall meet the requirements of the following standards:
a. Safety:
1) IEC 62040-1: 2008-06, 1st edition Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) - Part 1: General and
safety requirements for UPS
2) EN 62040-1: 2013-01, 1st edition amendment 1
b. EMC/EMI/RFI:
1) IEC 62040-2: 2005-10, 2nd edition Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) - Part 2: Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) requirements
c. Performance:
1) IEC 62040-3: 2011-03, 2nd edition Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) - Part 3: Method of
d. Environmental:
07/2016 edition p. 262
1) IEC 62040-4: 2013-04, 1st edition Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) - Part 4: Environmental
aspects – Requirements and reporting
e. Markings: CE, C-Tick
f. Transportation: ISTA 2B
g. Seismic: OSHPD IBC 2012 and CBC 2013 to California roof level
maximum reliability.
B. The customer shall store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a well ventilated
area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

a. Temperature:
1) Operating ambient temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C.
2) Storage ambient temperature with batteries: -15 °C to 40 °C.
3) Storage ambient temperature without batteries: -25 °C) to 55 °C.
b. Relative humidity (operating and storage): 0 percent to 95 percent non-condensing.
c. Elevation:
1) Operating:
a) 1000 m: 1.000
b) 1500 m: 0.975
c) 2000 m: 0.950
d) 2500 m: 0.925
e) 3000 m: 0.900
2) Non-operating: 0-15000 m
d. Audible noise:
1) 65 dBA at 100% load and 1 m from surface
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Factory Warranty: The Contractor shall warrant the work of this Section to be in accordance with the Contract
warranty shall extend the one year period of limitations contained in the General Conditions. The warranty shall
be countersigned by the Installer and the manufacturer.
1. UPS cabinets: The UPS shall be covered by a full parts and labor warranty from the manufacturer for a
2. Battery cabinets: The battery manufacturer’s warranty shall be passed through to the final Owner and shall
have a minimum period of one year.
07/2016 edition p. 263

B. Additional owner rights: The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under
1.13 MAINTENANCE
A. A complete offering of preventative and full service maintenance contracts for the UPS system and the battery
system shall be available from the manufacturer.
B. The manufacturer shall, upon request, provide spare parts kits for the UPS system in a timely manner as well as
provide access to qualified factory trained first party service personnel to provide preventative maintenance and
service on the UPS when required.
C. UPS subassemblies, as well as the battery, shall be accessible from the front. UPS design shall provide
self test function to verify correct system operation. The electronic UPS control and monitoring assembly shall
therefore be fully microprocessor based, thus doing away with potentiometer settings. This shall allow:
1. Auto compensation of component drift.

2. Self adjustment of replaced subassemblies.
3. Extensive acquisition of information vital for computer aided diagnostics (local or remote).
4. Socket connection to interface with computer aided diagnostics system.
D. The UPS shall be repairable by replacing standard subassemblies requiring no adjustments. Communication via
E. The manufacturer shall offer additional preventative maintenance and service contracts covering both the UPS
contracts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of design: Product specified is Galaxy VM by Schneider Electric. Items specified are to establish a
standard of quality for design, function, materials, and appearance.
A. UPS shall be designed to operate as a double conversion, on-line reverse transfer system in the following modes.
1. Normal: The UPS system shall continuously supply power to the critical load.
2. Battery: Upon failure of the utility AC power source, the critical load shall be supplied by the inverter, which,
3. Recharge: Upon restoration of the utility AC power source (prior to complete battery discharge), the PFC
4. Static bypass: The static bypass switch shall be used to transfer the load to the bypass without interruption
to the critical power load. This shall be accomplished by turning the inverter off. Automatic re-transfer or
forward transfer of the load shall be accomplished by turning the inverter on.
5. Maintenance bypass: In maintenance bypass the load is supplied with unconditioned power from the
bypass input included in the UPS.
6. ECO mode: The UPS system is configured to use static bypass operation as the preferred mode under
predefined. Transfers to battery operation upon utility failure. Efficiency up to 99%.
7. ECOnversion: ECOnversion allows the system to supply the active part of the load through the bypass. The
inverter is kept running in parallel with the bypass source and supplies the reactive part of the load. The
input power factor of the UPS is, regardless of the load power factor, maintained close to unity as the
reactive part of load is significantly reduced in the UPS input current. In case if an interruption to the
utility/mains supply, the inverter immediately maintains the output voltage so that breaks or drops during
this transfer are practically eliminated. UPS operates with static bypass in parallel with main inverter. Main
inverter actively corrects power factor, and harmonics to provide sinusoidal main input current without
interruptions.
8. Parallel operation: The system shall have the option to install up to 4 UPSs in parallel for capacity and up to
4+1 for redundancy.
a. The parallel UPSs shall be of the same design, kVA-size, voltage, and frequency.
07/2016 edition p. 264

b. Output control: A load sharing circuit shall be incorporated into the parallel control circuits to ensure
that under no-load conditions, no circulating current exists between the UPSs. This feature also allows
each UPS to share equal amounts of the total critical load bus. The output voltage, output frequency,
output phase angle, and output impedance of each UPS shall operate in uniformity to ensure correct
load sharing.
c. Parallel system control: The UPS shall have no single dedicated control system designed to control of
the parallel system.
d. Communication: Communication between the UPSs shall be connected so that the removal of any
single cable shall not jeopardize the integrity of the parallel communication system. Load sharing
communications shall be galvanically isolated for purposes of fault tolerances between UPSs. A UPS’s
influence over load sharing shall be inhibited in any mode where the UPS inverter is not supporting its
output. Transfer to and from bypass can be initiated from any online UPS.
e. Battery runtime: Each UPS shall have its own battery solution
f. Switchgear: Either a Galaxy VM system bypass cabinet or a custom switchgear shall be required for
capacity parallel operation.
9. External synchronization: Synchronization of the output of the UPS with any other independent source for
use with downstream transfer switches. The synchronization at the UPS is controlled from an input on the
interface boards.
A. PFC rectifier and battery charger: Incoming AC power shall be converted to a regulated DC output voltage by
an IGBT (insulated gate bipolar transistor) power factor correction (PFC) rectifier. The PFC rectifier shall provide
high quality DC power to charge the batteries and power the inverter and shall have the following characteristics:
an input power factor of 0.99 @ loads > 40% to unity to ensure generator compatibility and avoid reflected
harmonics from disturbing loads sharing the utility power. The rectifier output shall be filtered with a ripple
current not exceeding 1% rms over the allowable continuous input voltage range.
2. Input harmonic current suppression: The PFC rectifier shall produce a sinusoidal input AC current on
each phase with low harmonic content, limiting THD on the UPS input to below 3 percent @ 100% load.
3. Battery charger current limiting: The UPS shall be equipped with a system designed to limit the battery
recharge current.
a. 40% charger up to 80% load
b. 20% charger 80% - 100% load
4. Wide input voltage window: 320-600 V. The system can operate at 600 V for 1 minute.
B. Inverter: The UPS output shall be derived from a variable frequency Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) IGBT
inverter design. The inverter shall be capable of providing the specified precise output power characteristics
while operating over the battery voltage range. Inverter shall be individually fused with fast-acting fuses. UPS
display shall indicate inoperable fuses.
1. Transient Response
a. The inverter transient voltage shall not exceed the following parameters:
1) ±5% for a 10% to 100% step load application and removal with 10% initial load or 100% initial load.
2) ±5% for transfer of rated load from the bypass source to the UPS inverter output during automatic
forward transfer of the static bypass transfer switch.
3) 0% for loss of or return of main AC input.
2. Transient Recovery
a. The output voltage returns to within ±1% of the steady state value within 50ms.
3. Fault Clearing
a. The inverter shall electronically be turned off to protect against excessive overload conditions which
exceed the parameters defined.
b. UPS systems shall sense an overload condition and automatically transfer to the bypass input source
which shall be used to provide the necessary fault clearing current required.
4. Inverter DC Protection
a. The inverter shall be protected by the following features that shall be independently adjustable for
maximum system flexibility.
1) DC Over-voltage Trip.
2) DC Under-voltage Shutdown.
3) DC Under-voltage Disconnect annunciated by an internal visual alarm and relay contact closure.
5. Output Protection
07/2016 edition p. 265

a. The inverter shall be electronically turned off to protect against overloads and abnormal load conditions
which exceed the units rating.
which shall be used to provide the necessary current required.
6. Over-current Protection
a. The inverter shall be protected from excessive overloads, including reverse currents, by fast acting fuses
to prevent damage to power semiconductors. All fuses shall be provided with a blown fuse indicator
with alarm indication on the control panel.
C. Static bypass - 100 percent rated, continuous duty: The static bypass transfer switch shall be solid state,
rated for 100 percent continuous duty without mechanical contactor device in parallel for higher reliability and
consistent response time and shall operate under the following conditions:
1. Uninterrupted transfer: The static bypass transfer switch shall automatically cause the bypass source to
c. Inoperable inverter.
2. Interrupted transfer: If the bypass source is beyond the conditions stated below, the UPS shall make an
interrupted transfer (not less than 100 milliseconds in duration in ECO mode).
a. Bypass voltage greater than +10 percent, -10 percent from the UPS rated output voltage.
b. Bypass frequency tolerance is user selectable to ±0.1Hz, ±3Hz, and ±10Hz.
3. Automatic uninterrupted forward transfer: The static bypass transfer switch shall automatically forward
transfer power, without interruption, after the UPS inverter is turned on after an instantaneous overload
induced reverse transfer has occurred and the load current returns the UPS’s nominal rating or less.
4. Manual transfer: A manual static transfer shall be initiated from the UPS control panel by turning the UPS
inverter off.
5. Overload Ratings: Each static bypass transfer switch shall have the following overload characteristics:
a. 1,000% of UPS output rating for 100 milliseconds.
b. 150% of UPS output rating for one (1) minute.
c. 100% of UPS ouput rating indefinitely.
d. Each switch shall be suitable for all load conditions permitted by the upstream protective devices such
that no damage is sustained during operation.
A. Microprocessor controlled logic:

1. The full UPS operation shall be provided through the use of microprocessor controlled logic. Operation and
parameters shall be firmware controlled, thus eliminating the need for manual adjustments or
potentiometers. The logic shall include, but shall not be limited to, a self test and diagnostic circuitry. Every
printed circuit assembly or plug-in power assembly shall be monitored. Diagnostics shall be performed via a
PC through the local diagnostics port on the UPS. UPS shall be microprocessor controlled.
2. The UPS shall include, but shall not be limited to, a standard easy to use control and indicator panel.
Included shall be a backlit, color graphic animated LCD display and LED indicators. The UPS panel shall
include UPS on and UPS off pushbuttons that shall permit the Owner to command the UPS on or off.
B. Front Panel 7” Color Graphical Display: The UPS control panel shall provide a backlit, color graphic display
with choice of 18 operating languages for indication of UPS status, metering, battery status, alarm/event log, and
advanced operational features.
1. Access: The display shall provide access to:
a. Mimic diagram indicating UPS power flow.
b. Measurements, status indications, and events.
c. Personalization menu protected by a password, used to make specific settings.
d. Event log with time stamping.
e. Access to measurements.
2. System parameters monitored: The visual display shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following
system parameters based on true RMS metering:
a. Measurements:
1) Input voltage (Ph-Ph and PH-N).
2) Input current per phase.
3) Bypass voltage.
4) Bypass input frequency.
5) UPS output voltage (Ph-Ph and Ph-N).
07/2016 edition p. 266
6) UPS output current per phase.

7) UPS output frequency.
8) UPS output percent load.
9) UPS output kVA.
10) UPS output power factor.
11) Battery voltage.
12) Crest factor.
13) Battery current.
14) Battery backup time and remaining service life.
b. Status indications and events:
1) Load on battery.
2) Load on UPS.
3) Load on bypass.
4) Low battery warning.
5) General alarm.
6) Inoperable battery.
7) Remaining back-up time during operation on battery power.
8) Bypass source outside tolerances.
9) Additional indications shall provide maintenance assistance.
3. Time-stamped historical events: This function shall time stamp and store important status changes and
anomalies.
C. LED status indicators: The UPS control panel shall provide three LEDs that shall signal the following status
conditions:
1. Green: The Load is protected.
2. Green + orange: The load is protected, but the system reports a warning alarm.
3. Orange + red: The load is unprotected and the system reports a warning and a critical alarm
4. Red: The load is unprotected and the system reports a critical alarm.
D. Buttons:
1. Inverter off
2. Inverter on
E. Audible alarm reset: The UPS shall provide an audible alarm that can be stopped using the user interface.
F. Emergency Power Off (EPO): The UPS shall be equipped with provisions for remote emergency power off and
dry contact input that shall be used to command UPS and battery system shutdown remotely.
G. USB port: shall be provided for field diagnostics.
H. Dry contacts: The UPS shall be provided standard with a programmable input/output relay board. This board
shall have six dry contacts for inputs and six relays for output.
1. Input Contacts: Programmable as:
a. Custom Input 1
b. Custom Input 2
c. Ground Fault
d. External Battery Monitor Detected Fault
e. Battery Room Ventilation Inoperable
f. Supplied By Genset
2. Output Relays: Programmable as:
a. Common Alarm
b. Normal Operation
c. Battery Operation
d. Maintenance Bypass
e. Static Bypass
f. ECO Mode
g. Output Overload
h. Fan Inoperable
i. Battery is not Working Correctly
j. Battery Disconnected
k. Battery Voltage Low
l. Input Out of Tolerance
07/2016 edition p. 267
m. Bypass Out of Tolerance

n. UPS Warning
o. UPS Critical
p. Parallel Redundancy Lost
q. External Fault
r. UPS Maintenance Mode
s. System Critical
t. System Warning
u. System Common Alarm
3. The contacts shall be normally open and shall change state to indicate the operating status. The contacts
shall be rated at 2.0 amperes (250 volts AC/30 volts DC).
A. Cabinet: The UPS shall be housed in a freestanding cabinet with dead front construction. The mechanical
structure of the UPS shall be sufficiently strong and rigid to withstand handling and installation operations. The
sheet metal elements in the structure shall be protected against corrosion by a suitable treatment, such as zinc
electroplating, bi-chromating, or an equivalent.
B. Cable access: The standard UPS available shall accommodate top or bottom cable entry in standard cabinet..
C. Cabinet weights and dimensions: The width of the UPS shall be [_____] mm and shall have a maximum
weight of [_____] kg.
INSERT WIDTH AND WEIGHT IN PARAGRAPH ABOVE. INSERT BTUs PER HOUR IN PARAGRAPH BELOW.
D. Ventilation and Heat Rejection: The UPS shall be designed for forced air cooling. Air inlets shall be provided
from the front of the UPS cabinet. Air exhaust shall be from the top portion of the unit, and a minimum of 530 mm
free space above the UPS is required. Full load heat rejection shall be [_____] BTUs per hour.
2.7 BATTERY
A. General: The UPS shall use a valve-regulated sealed lead acid heavy duty industrial battery, designed for
auxiliary power service in an UPS application. The primary battery shall be furnished with impact-resistant plastic
cases and housed in a matching cabinet(s) next to the UPS.
B. Protection against Deep Discharge and Self-Discharge: The UPS shall be equipped with a device designed
to protect the battery against deep discharge, depending on discharge conditions, with isolation of the battery by
a circuit breaker. In particular, a monitoring device shall adjust the battery shutdown voltage as a function of a
discharge coefficient to avoid excessive discharge at less than the rated output. A second device shall avoid
self-discharge of the battery into the UPS control circuits during an extended shutdown of the UPS (over two
hours).
C. Battery self-tests:
1. Battery test: This feature performs a number of tests on the batteries, such as fuse-blown check, weak
battery detection, and symmetry error. The battery self-test can be setup to run automatically in different time
intervals between weekly and up to a year.
2. Runtime calibration: This feature is used for re-calibrating the estimated remaining runtime value.
2.8 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
1. Monitoring - Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring a system through a network of Cat 5 cable
shall allow access to this information via the user’s public network via a single IP address.
07/2016 edition p. 268

2. Monitored values: Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring alarms, general status parameters,
thresholds for alarm notification. With this feature, Data Center Expert can notify clients of reaching.
4. Public network monitoring: Data Center Expert shall also be capable of monitoring other Schneider
Electric devices that are connected to the client’s public network.
B. Battery Cabinets: Matching battery cabinets shall be furnished in adjacent versions.
C. External control and communications devices: The UPS shall contain two smart slots for the following
optional control and communications devices:
1. Dry contacts/I/O accessory (AP9810 + AP9631 or AP9635): Customizable input and output contacts for
the UPS network management card 2 with environmental monitoring (2 inputs/ 1 output)..
2. Temperature sensor (AP9631 or AP9635): The temperature Sensor enables the UPS environment to be
monitored by taking regular measurements of temperature. Its connection to the Network Management Card
enables monitoring or notification of alarms via your computer network. If an additional temperature sensor
is needed, procure (AP9335T)
3. Temperature and humidity sensor(AP9335TH + AP9631 or AP9635): The temperature and humidity
Sensor enables the UPS environment to be monitored by taking regular measurements of temperature and
humidity. Its connection to the Network Management Card enables monitoring or notification of alarms via
your computer network.
4. Network Management Card (AP9630): The UPS NMC display has possibility to connect to SNMP, Web,
Data Center Expert, Modbus, RMS over ethernet. But in the standard display NMC it is not possible to
connect sensors.
D. Seismic anchors: ship included with the system.
E. Dual input: Provide dual input to accommodate a separate input source
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.16 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed, and notify the
corrected.
3.17 INSTALLATION
B. Field service engineer qualifications: The manufacturer shall employ a 7 x 24 nationwide (international where
three-phase UPS.
C. Spare parts: Field Engineers shall have immediate access to recommended spare parts with additional parts storage
3.19 DEMONSTRATION
07/2016 edition p. 269

3.20 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the Installer that shall ensure that the
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 270

Galaxy VM 3:3 – 160 to 200 kVA Marine
Schneider Electric
GALAXY VM MARINE
Marine Grade Three Phase Uninterruptible Power Supply
160-200 kVA UPS
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
SECTION [26 33 63] [16611]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.14 SUMMARY
herein specified.

a. Up to five UPS units for redundancy (n+1)
4. Bottom cable entry

07/2016 edition p. 271
a. Input voltage: [___] volts AC three-phase, 3-wire (L1, L2, L3 + PE).

b. Frequency: 40-70 Hertz
1) 0.97 > 25% load
2) 0.99 > 50% load
3) 0.99 > 75% load
4) 0.99 > 100% load
1) < 3% @ 100% load
2) < 4% @ 50% load
3) < 6% @ 25% load
e. Generator ramp-in adaptable: 10-40 seconds
f. Rated conditional short-circuit current Icc: 65 kA RMS at required breaker.
g. Rated peak withstand current Ipk: Icc x 2.2
i. Inrush Current: Less than nominal input current for less than one cycle. Shall not exceed 800% of the
rectifier/battery charger full load current.
2. Bypass:
a. Bypass voltage: [___] volts AC three-phase, 3-wire (L1, L2, L3 + PE) or 4-wire (L1, L2, L3 + N + PE).
3. UPS output:
a. Output voltage: [___] volts AC, ±1 percent steady state variation phase-to-phase voltage volts AC,
three- phase, 3-wire (L1, L2, L3 + PE) or 4 wire.
a) ± 1% static
b) ± 5% after 2 ms
c) ± 1% after 50 ms
value within 50ms.
e. Output power factor: 0.9
h. Slew rate (Hz/sec): Programmable 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4 ,6
i. Load power factor: 0.7 leading to 0.5 lagging without derating
j. Overload rating:
a) 150% for 1 second
b) 125% for 1 minute at 40 °C
a) 1000% for 100 ms
1) Up to 96.5% in normal operation
2) Up to 99.3% in ECO mode
b. Charging power in % of output power:
07/2016 edition p. 272

g. Battery type: Valve regulated sealed lead acid (VRLA).
1.16 SUBMITTALS
following:
requirements; location of conduit entry/exit paths; location of floor; available battery types/sizes; cabinet weights;
heat rejection and air flow requirements; single line diagram; and control and external wiring.

A. Qualifications:
standards.
a. Safety:
b. EMC/EMI/RFI:
c. Performance:
d. Environmental:
07/2016 edition p. 273
Marine: Type approval

a. Temperature:
1) Operating ambient temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C.
2) Storage ambient temperature with batteries: -15 °C to 40 °C.
3) Storage ambient temperature without batteries: -25 °C) to 55 °C.
c. Elevation:
1) Operating:
a) 1000 m: 1.000
b) 1500 m: 0.975
c) 2000 m: 0.950
d) 2500 m: 0.925
e) 3000 m: 0.900
2) Non-operating: 0-15000 m
d. Audible noise:
1.20 WARRANTY
07/2016 edition p. 274

1.21 MAINTENANCE

contracts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.9 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of design: Product specified is GALAXY VM Marine by Schneider Electric. Items specified are to
establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, and appearance.
4. Static bypass: The static bypass switch shall be used to transfer the load to the bypass without interruption
6. ECO mode: The UPS system is configured to use static bypass operation as the preferred mode under
predefined. Transfers to battery operation upon utility failure. Efficiency up to 99%.
7. ECOnversion: ECOnversion allows the system to supply the active part of the load through the bypass. The
inverter is kept running in parallel with the bypass source and supplies the reactive part of the load. The
input power factor of the UPS is, regardless of the load power factor, maintained close to unity as the
reactive part of load is significantly reduced in the UPS input current. In case if an interruption to the
utility/mains supply, the inverter immediately maintains the output voltage so that breaks or drops during
this transfer are practically eliminated. UPS operates with static bypass in parallel with main inverter. Main
inverter actively corrects power factor, and harmonics to provide sinusoidal main input current without
interruptions.
4+1 for redundancy.
load sharing.
07/2016 edition p. 275
f. Switchgear: Either a GALAXY VM Marine system bypass cabinet or a custom switchgear shall be
required for capacity parallel operation.
9. External synchronization: Synchronization of the output of the UPS with any other independent source for
use with downstream transfer switches. The synchronization at the UPS is controlled from an input on the
interface boards.
harmonics from disturbing loads sharing the utility power. The rectifier output shall be filtered with a ripple
current not exceeding 1% rms over the allowable continuous input voltage range.
recharge current.
4. Wide input voltage window: 320-600 V. The system can operate at 600 V for 1 minute.
3. Fault Clearing
07/2016 edition p. 276

2. Interrupted transfer: If the bypass source is beyond the conditions stated below, the UPS shall make an
interrupted transfer (not less than 100 milliseconds in duration in ECO mode).
inverter off.

include UPS on and UPS off pushbuttons that shall permit the Owner to command the UPS on or off.
B. Front Panel 7” Color Graphical Display: The UPS control panel shall provide a backlit, color graphic display
with choice of 18 operating languages for indication of UPS status, metering, battery status, alarm/event log, and
advanced operational features.
a. Measurements:
1) Input voltage (Ph-Ph and PH-N).
3) Bypass voltage.
5) UPS output voltage (Ph-Ph and Ph-N).
9) UPS output kVA.
07/2016 edition p. 277
11) Battery voltage.

12) Crest factor.
1) Load on battery.
2) Load on UPS.
3) Load on bypass.
5) General alarm.
6) Inoperable battery.
3. Time-stamped historical events: This function shall time stamp and store important status changes and
anomalies.
C. LED status indicators: The UPS control panel shall provide three LEDs that shall signal the following status
conditions:
2. Green + orange: The load is protected, but the system reports a warning alarm.
3. Orange + red: The load is unprotected and the system reports a warning and a critical alarm
4. Red: The load is unprotected and the system reports a critical alarm.
D. Buttons:
1. Inverter off
2. Inverter on
E. Audible alarm reset: The UPS shall provide an audible alarm that can be stopped using the user interface.
H. Dry contacts: The UPS shall be provided standard with a programmable input/output relay board. This board
a. Custom Input 1
b. Custom Input 2
c. Ground Fault
d. External Battery Monitor Detected Fault
e. Battery Room Ventilation Inoperable
a. Common Alarm
b. Normal Operation
d. Maintenance Bypass
e. Static Bypass
f. ECO Mode
g. Output Overload
h. Fan Inoperable
i. Battery is not Working Correctly
n. UPS Warning
o. UPS Critical
p. Parallel Redundancy Lost
q. External Fault
07/2016 edition p. 278
r. UPS Maintenance Mode

s. System Critical
t. System Warning
u. System Common Alarm
B. Cable access: The standard UPS available shall accommodate bottom cable entry in standard cabinet..
from the front of the UPS cabinet. Air exhaust shall be from the top portion of the unit, and a minimum of 530 mm
free space above the UPS is required. Full load heat rejection shall be [_____] BTUs per hour.
2.14 BATTERY
A. General: The UPS shall use a valve-regulated sealed lead acid heavy duty industrial battery, designed for
auxiliary power service in an UPS application. The primary battery shall be furnished with impact-resistant plastic
cases and housed in a matching cabinet(s) next to the UPS.
hours).
1. Battery test: This feature performs a number of tests on the batteries, such as fuse-blown check, weak
1.
F. Battery Cabinets: Matching battery cabinets shall be furnished in adjacent versions.
G. External control and communications devices: The UPS shall contain two smart slots for the following
1. Dry contacts/I/O accessory (AP9810 + AP9631 or AP9635): Customizable input and output contacts for
the UPS network management card 2 with environmental monitoring (2 inputs/ 1 output)..
2. Temperature sensor (AP9631 or AP9635): The temperature Sensor enables the UPS environment to be
3. Temperature and humidity sensor(AP9335TH + AP9631 or AP9635): The temperature and humidity
07/2016 edition p. 279

connect sensors.
H.
I. Dual input: Provide dual input to accommodate a separate input source
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.21 EXAMINATION
corrected.
3.22 INSTALLATION
3.24 DEMONSTRATION
3.25 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 280

MGE Galaxy 7000
3/3 Phase 160/200/250/300/400/500 kVA
07/2016 edition p. 281

MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 1000 kVA
Single UPS

MGE GALAXY 7000
160 kVA to 500 kVA
Single UPS 3-phase system
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
SECTION [26 33 63] [16611]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.5 UPS DEFINITIONS
electric power to:
C. Brief description:
1. The UPS shall be a single UPS, operating in double-conversion mode (also called on-line mode); it shall
be a VFI-type UPS (as per standard IEC 62040-2), made up of the following components, described in
detail in this specification:
28. Rectifier
29. Battery charger
30. Inverter
31. Battery
32. Automatic bypass (via a static switch)
2. What is more, the UPS system shall include:
a. Any and all other devices required for safe operation and maintenance, including circuit breakers,
switches, etc.
1.2 WARRANTY
A. The components making up each modular UPS unit (rectifier, charger and inverter subassemblies) shall be
guaranteed (parts and labour on site) for one year following the start-up date.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
07/2016 edition p. 282

MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 1000 kVA
Single UPS
A. The UPS system shall operate in double-conversion mode, described in detail in this specification.
B. Normal operation (normal AC source available): The rectifier shall supply the inverter and the charger with DC
current. The inverter shall continuously supply the load with backed up electrical energy and the charger shall
C. Operation on battery power (normal AC source not available or outside tolerances): Upon failure or
excessive deterioration of the normal AC source, the inverter shall continue to supply the load from battery
power without interruption or disturbance, within the limits imposed by the battery backup time.
D. Battery recharge (normal AC source restored): When the normal AC source is restored, the rectifier shall
again power the inverter, without interruption or disturbance to the load, while the charger automatically
recharges the battery.

1. In case of a major overload or if the UPS shuts down, the static switch shall instantaneously transfer the
load, without a break in the supply of power, to the bypass AC source if it is available and within
tolerances.
2. Transfer of the load back to the UPS output, synchronized with the bypass AC source, shall be automatic
or manual. During transfer, the load shall not suffer an outage or disturbance in the supply of power.
3. On request, the UPS system may automatically transfer the load with a micro-interruption (adjustable from
15 to 1000 ms) if a major fault occurs on the UPS system and if synchronization with the bypass source
has not been established.
4. In all cases, to ensure load transfer in complete safety, the system shall simultaneously control all the
static switches.
G. UPS maintenance:
1. All power and control electronics of the modular UPS units making up the UPS system shall be accessible
from the front of the UPS.
2. For maintenance purposes, the UPS system shall include an external, mechanical, manual bypass system
with one-button operation, common to all modular UPS units.
3. For personnel safety during servicing or testing, this system shall be designed to isolate the UPS system
while continuing to supply power to the load from the bypass AC source. The UPS shall also include a
device making it possible to isolate the rectifier and the charger of each modular UPS unit from the normal
AC source.
H. Battery maintenance: For safe maintenance on the battery, the system shall include a circuit breaker to
isolate the battery from the rectifier, the charger and the inverter. When the battery is isolated from the system,
the UPS shall continue to supply the load without interruption or disturbance, except in the event of a normal
AC source outage.
I. Cold start (normal AC source absent): The battery shall be capable of starting the UPS if the normal AC
source is absent and continue supplying power to the load within the specified backup time. Cold start on
battery power shall be possible on the condition that the system shall have started at least once on normal AC
power.
A. Technology: UPS technology shall be based on IGBT transistors for all the power converters (rectifier,
charger and inverter with variable chopping frequency).
C. Rating: The UPS shall be sized to continuously supply a load of…[160/200250 / 300 / 400 / 500] kVA at a
F. Battery backup time:

2. The battery shall be designed for a service life of … 10 / 12 …years. It shall be selected and sized
G. Types of loads accepted:

07/2016 edition p. 283
MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 1000 kVA
Single UPS
1. The UPS system shall accept high crest factors without derating (kW) to ensure correct operation with
computer loads and loads where the leading power factor can reach 0.9.
a. THDU downstream ph/ph  2% for non-linear loads.
E. PFC sinusoidal-current input rectifiers:

1. The UPS shall not draw a level of harmonic currents that could disturb the upstream AC system, i.e. it shall
comply with the stipulations of guide IEC 61000-3-4.
2. The PFC input rectifiers of the modular UPS units, using sinusoidal-current IGBTs, shall have the following
performance levels:
a. Total harmonic current distortion (THDI) upstream of the rectifier not exceeding 5%
b. Input power factor (PF) greater than 0.99 from 50% load upwards.
.
F. Outputs without a transformer: To reduce losses, dimensions and weight, the output of each UPS unit shall
be of the transformerless type and the neutral shall be recreated electronically.
G. Efficiency: Overall efficiency (between the rectifier inputs and the UPS output) shall be greater than or equal
to:
1. 94.5% from 50% load to full rated load (In);
H. Noise level: The noise level, measured as per standard ISO3746, shall be less than …[75 dBA (for 160, 200,
250, 300, 400, 500 kVA)]
2.19 AC SOURCES
1. Rated voltage: 380, 400 or 415 V at full rated load Pn.
2. Input voltage range: 250 V (at 30% load) to 470 V.
2. Number of phases: 3, a neutral is not necessary.
3. Frequency: Hz ± 10%.
B. Bypass AC source (automatic-bypass input):

1. The characteristics of the bypass AC source supplying the UPS in the event of an inverter shutdown
(maintenance, failure) or an overload (short-circuit, very high inrush current) shall be the following:
a. Voltage: / volts, ± 10%
b. Number of phases: 3 ph + N + earth (a non-distributed neutral is possible)
c. Frequency: Hz ± 8% (adjustable up to  2 Hz)

1. Supply: The PFC rectifier, drawing sinusoidal current, shall be supplied by the normal AC source, without
a neutral. It shall provide power for the load as well as charge or float charge the battery. The battery
charger shall be supplied by the rectifier to avoid transmitting any AC fluctuations to the battery.
2. Inrush current: A device shall be provided to limit the inrush currents. When AC power fails and during
genset start, the rectifier shall limit the power drawn by implementing a walk-in for ten seconds.
3. Phase sequence: A device shall check that the phase sequence is correct to protect the power system
from the effects of incorrect connections. The device shall also check the bypass AC input.
4. Operating mode: The standard charger shall be sufficient to charge the battery rapidly. For a backup time
of …5 / 10 / 15 / 20 / 30] … minutes, battery recharging shall take less than …4 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 hours]…
(values after discharge to Pn/2 and recovery of 90% of total battery charge for a recent battery).
5. Input power factor > 0.99 @ 100% load.
6. Charger regulation and monitoring:
a. The battery recharge system shall include independent regulation and monitoring devices to ensure
conformity with standard NFC 58311.
b. The battery recharge voltage shall be a function of the ambient temperature in the battery room.
B. Batteries: Each modular UPS unit shall be equipped with its own battery of the:
1. The UPS shall be equipped with a battery of the …sealed lead-acid type, mounted and wired in a cabinet
identical in aspect to that of the UPS…sealed lead-acid type, mounted on shelves …vented lead-acid
07/2016 edition p. 284
MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 1000 kVA
Single UPS
type mounted on racks… and shall have a service life of …10 / 12… years.
2. The battery shall be sized to ensure a continuous supply to the inverter for at least …5 / 10 / 15 / 20 /
30…… minutes, in the event the normal AC source fails, given that the inverter is at full rated load, i.e.
kVA for a power factor PF = 0.9.
3. Sizing calculations shall assume an ambient temperature between 0°C and 35°C.
C. Inverter: The inverter shall be sized to supply a rated load of …160/200/250 / 300 / 400 / 500… kVA at 0.9
PF and shall satisfy the specifications listed below.
1. Output voltage
+/- 3% in order to take into account voltage drops in the cables.
c. Steady-state conditions: Variations in the rated voltage shall be limited to ± 2% for a balanced load
between 0 and 100% of the rated load, whatever the voltage level on the normal AC source and the
DC voltage level, within the defined limits.
e. Unbalanced conditions: For a load unbalance between phases, the variation in the output voltage
shall be less than 1%.
2. Output frequency
b. Variations in the free-running frequency: - ± 0.5 Hz,
of 0.5% to 8% with respect to the rated frequency).
external source.
internal synchronisation, regulating its own frequency to within ± 0.02 Hz. When bypass power returns
to within tolerances, the inverter shall automatically resynchronise.
4. Overload and short-circuit capacity: The UPS shall be capable of supplying for at least:
a. 10 minutes a load representing 125% of the rated load
b. 30 second a load representing 150% of the rated load.
c. For the specified power rating of …[ 160 / 200 /250 / 300 / 400 / 500 ]… kVA, the inverter shall be
capable of current limiting to a peak capacity of ... 290 / 235 / 277 / 230 / 234 / 245% ] ... for 150 ms to
allow highly disturbed transient operating states without transferring the load to the bypass.
d. The overload capacity shall be capable of taking into account temperature conditions for more than ten
minutes, by allowing a continuous, 10% overload when the temperature is less than or equal to 20°C.
5. Higher power ratings for lower temperatures: It shall be possible to increase the power rating when the
temperature is less than 35°C. The rating can be raised by +3% for 30°C, +5% for 25°C and +8% for 20°C.
D. Automatic bypass
a. The UPS shall be equipped with an automatic bypass comprising a static switch
b. Instantaneous transfer of the load from the inverter to bypass power and back shall take place without
a break or disturbance in the supply of power to the load, on the condition that the bypass source
voltage and frequency are within the specified tolerances and that the inverter is synchronised.
c. Transfer shall take place automatically in the event of a major overload or an internal inverter fault.
Manually initiated transfer shall also be possible.
d. If the bypass power is outside the specified tolerances or is not synchronised with the inverter,
automatic transfer of the load from the inverter to bypass power shall take place after a calibrated
interruption adjustable from 15 to 1 000 milliseconds.
07/2016 edition p. 285
MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 1000 kVA
Single UPS
3. Static-switch withstand: For the specified power rating of …[ 500 / 400 / 300 / 250 / 200 / 160 ]… kVA,
the static switch shall be capable of handling an over current of …[ 16 / 16 / 21 / 25 / 18 / 23 ]…. times the
rated current of the UPS to facilitate discrimination within the electrical installation.

1. If the bypass power is within the specified tolerances, the static switch shall make it possible to use the
short-circuit power of the bypass source to trip the downstream protection devices of the inverter.
2. To ensure tripping in a selective manner, the total available power shall be sufficient to trip protection
devices with high ratings (circuit breaker rated In/2 or UR fuses rated In/4, where In is the rated inverter
current).
3. If the bypass source is outside the specified tolerances, all the inverters in operation shall, for the same
F. System earthing (grounding) arrangement (SEA): The UPS shall be compatible with the following system
earthing arrangements (SEA):
1. Upstream source SEA: …[ TT/ IT / TNS / TNC ]…
2. Downstream installation SEA: …[ TT/ IT / TNS / TNC ]…
3. If the upstream and downstream SEAs are different, galvanic isolation shall be provided on the normal and
bypass lines.
A. Mechanical structure: The UPS and batteries shall be installed in cabinet(s) with an [ IP 20 / IP 32 ] degree of
protection (standard IEC 60529). Access to the subassemblies making up the system shall be exclusively
through the front.
B. Dimensions: The UPS shall require as little floor space as possible. To gain space, it shall be possible to
install the UPS with the back to the wall or back to back.
C. Connection:
1. To facilitate connections, all terminal blocks must be easily accessible from the front when the modular
UPS units are installed with the back to the wall. Entry of upstream and downstream power cables, as well
as any auxiliary cables, shall be possible through the bottom without requiring a false floor.
2. The UPS shall be equipped with an earth-circuit connector, in compliance with the listed standards. The
cables shall comply with the listed standards and be mounted in compliance with the safety stipulations.
D. Ventilation:
1. System cooling of shall be by forced-air ventilation. To facilitate layout (particularly when installed back to
the wall), air input shall be through the front and bottom, exit through the top.
2. All power electronics shall be equipped with a redundant ventilation system including fault detection.
E. Safety:
2. The UPS shall be equipped with a terminal block for reception of an external EPO order resulting in
opening of the battery circuit breaker and shutdown of all converters.

1. Operation: The UPS, not including the batteries, shall be capable of operating under the following
b. Maximum temperature: 40°C for eight hours
c. Recommended temperature range: +20° C to + 25° C;
d. Maximum relative humidity: 95% at 25° C;
e. Maximum altitude without derating: 1000 meters.
2. Storage
07/2016 edition p. 286
MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 1000 kVA
Single UPS
A. Batteries are components whose service life is sensitive to operating conditions, i.e. particular care is
required for their management. In addition to the protective systems, battery management shall included
the systems listed below.
B. Measurement of actual backup time: The battery function shall be equipped with the means to know at
all times the real backup time available (AC power available) or remaining (AC power not available), taking
into account the true load on the inverter, the battery temperature and battery ageing.
C. Digital battery monitoring

D. Block by block monitoring

2.8 DISPLAY

2. ON and OFF control buttons (independent of the display);
B. Graphic display: The mimic diagram shall enable display of installation parameters, configuration, operating
status and alarms and indication of operator instructions for switching operations (e.g. bypass). It shall be
capable of supervising a single UPS unit or a parallel system (up to eight UPS units with the external bypass).
1. Display of measurements: It shall be possible to display the following measurements for any one of the
modular UPS units or for the entire system:
h. Crest factor
l. Battery percent charge
m. Available backup time
n. The remaining battery service life
b. Load on UPS
d. General alarm
e. Battery fault
07/2016 edition p. 287

MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 1000 kVA
Single UPS

7. Statistics: Number of overloads, number of transfers to battery power, cumulative time on battery power,
maximum power levels, demand power levels.

2. EPO terminal block: The UPS shall be equipped with an emergency power off (EPO) terminal block for
result in:
b. Opening of the static switches on the bypass line and of the battery circuit breaker;
1. Three LEDs on the control panel on each modular UPS unit indicate the following status conditions:
a. Load protected;
b. Minor fault;
c. Major fault.
2. The mimic panel shall represent the modular UPS and indicate the status of the load supply using five
two-colour (red and green) LEDs:
2.9 ACCESSORIES
for PDU capacity, or branch circuit breaker capacity. Other custom programmable alarm points for non-APC
2.10 COMMUNICATION
1. A programmable card with four inputs and six outputs.
07/2016 edition p. 288

MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 1000 kVA
Single UPS
B. Communications options: The UPS shall be designed to enable the extension of communications, without
system shutdown, to the following types of cards:
1. Multi-standard communications card with two outputs:
a. An RS485 serial-link implementing the JBus/ModBus protocol for connection to a building
management system (BMS)
b. Ethernet 10/100 Mbps using one of the protocols below:
2. XML-Web for direct UPS connection to an intranet network, without connection to a server, capable of
supplying information via a standard web browser SNMP for connection to a computer-network
management system
a. Multi-standard communications card with three outputs:
1) The two outputs listed above
2) Plus a modem output for communication with a tele-maintenance system.
b. The UPS shall be detectable by supervision software for large UPS systems.
c. Shutdown and administration software shall be available in addition to the communication cards.
3.1 PROTECTION
A. UPS: The UPS shall include protection against AC-source overvoltages (as per standard IEC 60146),
excessive external or internal temperature rise and vibrations and impacts during transport.
B. Rectifier and charger:

1. The rectifier shall automatically shutdown if the temperature exceeds the specified limits.
2. The charger shall automatically shut down if the DC voltage reaches the maximum value specified by the
battery manufacturer or if the temperature exceeds the specified limits.
D. Batteries:
1. Protection against deep discharge: The UPS shall comprise a device designed to protect the battery
against deep discharges, taking into account the characteristics of the discharge cycles, with isolation of
the batteries by a circuit breaker.
a. A temperature sensor adapts the charge voltage of each charger to the ambient temperature.
4. Self-test:
a. The battery shall be equipped with a self-test that can be run:
1) On request via a manual control
2) automatically according to user-set time intervals.
b. The self-test shall enable updating of battery parameters and detection of all abnormal conditions in
view of preventive maintenance.
3.2 MAINTAINABILITY
A manual bypass shall be available to completely isolate the UPS for maintenance purposes.
07/2016 edition p. 289

MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 1000 kVA
Single UPS
A. Standards
a. IEC 60140-4: UPS - Performance.
c. IEC 62040-2 and EN 62040-2: UPS - Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), level B.
f. IEC 61000-2-2: EMC, levels of compatibility..
g. IEC 61000-3-4: Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current > 16 A/ph).
h. IEC 61000-4: EMC – Immunity tests.
j. IEC 439: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies.
k. IEC 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
l. ISO 3746: Sound power levels.
m. CE marking.
2. What is more, the equipment shall comply with eco-design and eco-manufacturing criteria in view of
sustainable development and to that end, the manufacturer shall be able to demonstrate:
a. R&D and production on an ISO 14001 certified site
b. Manufacture with over 90% recyclable materials
c. Capacity to recover products at the end of their service life and provide proof of destruction by a
certified organisation
d. The environmental profile of the product, which shall be supplied with the sales offer.
B. Certification of conformity: The manufacturer shall provide, on request, a complete qualification file
demonstrating compliance with the above standards. What is more, the indicated levels of performance shall
be confirmed by certification from independent laboratories (e.g. TÜV or Veritas).
3.4 QUALITY SYSTEM AND TEST PROCEDURES
A. Test procedures:
1. The manufacturer shall provide proof of a quality-assurance system. In particular, the main manufacturing
steps must be subject to suitable tests such as:
a. Inspection of incoming components, tests on discrete subassemblies
b. Complete functional checks on termination of manufacture.
2. The equipment shall be subject to burn-in under load conditions prior to shipping.
3. Final checks and adjustments shall be recorded in a report drafted by the quality-inspection department of
the supplier.
4. Certification of the industrial facilities in compliance with ISO 9001 or 9002 shall be required.
B. Quality system: The UPS must be designed using an ISO 9001 quality system and a dependability study to
ensure maximum reliability.
3.5 SERVICES
risk.
diagnosis.
organisations.
07/2016 edition p. 290
MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 1000 kVA
Single UPS

F. Recycling and renovation/substitution: At the end of the UPS service life, the supplier shall guarantee the

B. Options:
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 291

MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 4000 kVA
Parallel UPS

MGE GALAXY 7000
160 kVA to 4000 kVA
Parallel UPS system with external bypass
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
SECTION [26 33 63] [16611]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.6 UPS DEFINITIONS
electric power to:
D. Brief description:
1. The UPS system shall be made up of …[ 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 ]… identical, parallel-connected modular
UPS units, all having the same power rating. Each modular UPS unit shall operate in double-conversion
mode and shall be of the VFI-type as per standard IEC 62040-2. The system shall … [ not provide
redundancy ] …[ include 1 / 2 / 3 redundant modular UPS units among the total ].
2. Each modular UPS unit shall have a rating of …[250 / 300 / 400 / 500]… kVA and shall be made up of the
following components, described in detail in this specification:
35. Rectifier
36. Battery charger
37. Inverter
38. Battery
39. Automatic bypass (via a static switch)
3. What is more, the UPS system shall include:
a. A common external bypass for all the modular UPS units, that shall be installed in a cabinet
b. Any and all other devices required for safe operation and maintenance, including circuit breakers,
switches, etc.
1.2 WARRANTY
A. The components making up each modular UPS unit (rectifier, charger and inverter subassemblies) shall be
guaranteed (parts and labour on site) for one year following the start-up date.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
07/2016 edition p. 292

MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 4000 kVA
Parallel UPS
A. The UPS system shall operate in double-conversion mode, described in detail in this specification.
B. Normal operation (normal AC source available): The rectifier of each modular UPS unit shall supply its
inverter and charger. Each modular UPS unit shall continuously contribute, in parallel with the other modular
UPS units via a common bus, to supplying the load with backed up electrical energy and the charger shall float
charge the battery.
lure or excessive deterioration of the normal AC source, the inverter of each modular UPS shal
continue to supply the load from battery power without interruption or disturbance, within the limits
imposed by the specified battery backup time.
tifier of each modular UPS shall again power its inverter, without interruption or disturbance to the
load, while the charger automatically recharges the battery.

1. (system without redundancy modules)
a. The system does not provide redundancy. The inverters of the [2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8] modular UPS
units shall operate in parallel to supply the load. The automatic bypasses of each modular UPS unit
shall be connected to the same bypass AC source.
b. Voluntary shutdown or a major fault on a modular UPS unit shall result in automatic transfer, without
interruption, of the load to the bypass AC source via the bypass of each modular UPS unit, including
the unit shut down, if the AC bypass is within tolerances and synchronised with the inverter outputs.
c. On request, the UPS system may automatically transfer the load with a micro-interruption (adjustable
from 15 to 1000 ms) if synchronisation with the bypass source has not been established, to enable
operation in downgraded mode and enhance supply of power to the load.
d. In all cases, to ensure load transfer in complete safety, the system shall simultaneously control all the
static switches.
2. (system with redundancy)
a. The modular UPS units shall operate in parallel, providing redundancy and sharing the load.
b. Redundancy shall be of the ….[n+1] [n+2] [n+3]… type, i.e. …[1] [2] [3]… modular UPS units will be
redundant out of the total of …[2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8]… modular UPS units. The automatic bypasses of
each modular UPS unit shall be connected to the same bypass AC source.
1) If a major fault occurs on a modular UPS unit, it shall automatically disconnect and its inverter shall
no longer supply the load. Given that the system is redundant, the remaining modular UPS units
shall continue to supply the load.
c. However the initial level of redundancy shall be reduced by one unit, falling from …[n+1 to non-
redundant operation] [n+2 to n+1] [n+3 to n+2].
1) If another modular UPS unit shuts down, the resulting level of redundancy shall determine whether
inverter operation is still possible.
2) Loss of redundancy is in all cases signalled by an alarm.
3) If redundancy has been lost, shutdown of another modular UPS unit shall result in automatic
transfer, without interruption, of the load to the bypass AC source via the bypass of each modular
UPS unit, including the units shut down, if the AC bypass is within tolerances and synchronised
with the inverter outputs.
d. On request, the UPS system may automatically transfer the load with a micro-interruption (adjustable
from 15 to 1000 ms) if synchronisation with the bypass source has not been established, to enable
operation in downgraded mode and enhance supply of power to the load.
e. In all cases, to ensure load transfer in complete safety, the system shall simultaneously control all the
static switches.
F. UPS maintenance:
1. All power and control electronics of the modular UPS units making up the UPS system shall be accessible
from the front of the UPS.
2. For maintenance purposes, the UPS system shall include an external, mechanical, manual bypass system
with one-button operation, common to all modular UPS units.
3. For personnel safety during servicing or testing, this system shall be designed to isolate the UPS system
while continuing to supply power to the load from the bypass AC source. The UPS shall also include a
device making it possible to isolate the rectifier and the charger of each modular UPS unit from the normal
AC source.
4. (system with redundancy): In a redundant system, with the above device, it shall be possible to shut
07/2016 edition p. 293
MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 4000 kVA
Parallel UPS
down a modular UPS unit and isolate its charger and inverter for maintenance, with the other inverters in
the UPS system continuing to supply the load.
G. Battery maintenance: For safe maintenance, the battery of each modular UPS unit shall include a circuit
breaker to isolate the battery from the rectifier, the charger and the inverter. When the battery is isolated from
the system, the UPS shall continue to supply the load without interruption or disturbance, except in the event of
a normal AC source outage.
H. Cold start (normal AC source absent): The battery of each modular UPS unit shall be capable of starting the
UPS if the normal AC source is absent and continue supplying power to the load within the specified backup
time. Cold start on battery power shall be possible on the condition that the system shall have started at least
once on normal AC power.
A. Technology: The battery of each modular UPS unit shall be capable of starting the UPS if the normal AC
source is absent and continue supplying power to the load within the specified backup time. Cold start on
battery power shall be possible on the condition that the system shall have started at least once on normal AC
power.
D. Rating:
1. The UPS system shall be sized to continuously supply a load of kVA, at a power factor
(pf) of 0.9.
2. The UPS system shall be made up of …[2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8]… identical, parallel-connected modular UPS
units, each having a power rating of …[250 / 300 / 400 / 500]… kVA.
3. The total installed power rating shall be kVA. It shall be possible to use …[1] [2] [3]… modular UPS units
for redundancy.
H. Battery backup time:

2. The battery of each modular UPS unit shall be designed for a service life of …10 / 12… years. It shall be
selected and sized correspondingly, for a load power factor of 0.9.
I. Types of loads accepted:

1. The UPS system shall accept high crest factors (3:1) without derating (kW) to ensure correct operation with
computer loads and loads where the leading power factor can reach 0.9.
a. THDU downstream ph/ph  2% for non-linear loads.
E. PFC sinusoidal-current input rectifiers:

2. The PFC input rectifiers of the modular UPS units, using sinusoidal-current IGBTs, shall have the following
performance levels:
a. Total harmonic current distortion (THDI) upstream of the rectifier not exceeding 5%
b. Input power factor (PF) greater than 0.99 from 50% load upwards.
.
F. Outputs without a transformer: To reduce losses, dimensions and weight, the output of each UPS unit shall
be of the transformerless type and the neutral shall be recreated electronically.
G. Efficiency: Overall efficiency (between the rectifier inputs and the UPS output) shall be greater than or equal
to:
1. 94.5% from 50% load to full rated load (In);
H. Noise level: The noise level, measured as per standard ISO3746, shall be less than …[75 dBA (for 250, 300,
400, 500 kVA)].
2.22 AC SOURCES
A. Normal AC source (rectifier input): The normal AC source supplying the UPS system shall, under normal
operating conditions, have the following characteristics:
07/2016 edition p. 294
MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 4000 kVA
Parallel UPS
1. Rated voltage: 380, 400 or 415 V at full rated load Pn.

2. Input voltage range: 250 V (at 30% load) to 470 V.
2. Number of phases: 3, a neutral is not necessary.
3. Frequency: Hz ± 10%.
B. Bypass AC source (automatic-bypass input):

1. The characteristics of the bypass AC source supplying the UPS system in the event of an inverter
shutdown (maintenance, failure) or an overload (short-circuit, very high inrush current) shall be the
following:
a. Voltage: / volts, ± 10%
b. Number of phases: 3 ph + N + earth (a non-distributed neutral is possible)
c. Frequency: Hz ± 8% (adjustable up to  2 Hz)

1. Supply: The PFC rectifier of each modular UPS unit, drawing sinusoidal current, shall be supplied by the
normal AC source, without a neutral. It shall provide power for the load as well as charge or float charge
the battery. The battery charger shall be supplied by the rectifier to avoid transmitting any AC fluctuations
to the battery. Each unit is independent in terms of its input module, i.e. one unit can operate on battery
power, the others on AC power.
2. Inrush current: A device shall be provided to limit the inrush currents of each charger. When AC power
fails and during genset start, the rectifier shall limit the power drawn by implementing a walk-in for ten
seconds.
3. Sequential start: An adjustable device shall make it possible to stagger start-up of the PFC rectifiers when
the normal AC source returns to within tolerances (transfer from battery power to normal AC power). By
ensuring sequential start, this device shall avoid overloading a genset picking up the supply to all the
rectifiers.
4. Phase sequence: A device shall check that the phase sequence is correct to protect the power system
from the effects of incorrect connections.
5. Operating mode: The standard charger of each modular UPS unit shall be sufficient to charge the battery
rapidly. For a backup time of …5 / 10 / 15 / 20 / 30] … minutes, battery recharging shall take less than
…4 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 hours]… (values after discharge to Pn/2 and recovery of 90% of total battery charge for a
recent battery).
6. Input power factor: > 0.99 @ 100% load.
7. Charger regulation and monitoring:
a. The battery recharge system shall include independent regulation and monitoring devices to ensure
conformity with standard NFC 58311.
b. The battery recharge voltage shall be a function of the ambient temperature in the battery room.
B. Batteries: Each modular UPS unit shall be equipped with its own battery of the:
1. Each modular UPS unit shall be equipped with its own battery of the …sealed lead-acid type, mounted
and wired in a cabinet identical in aspect to that of the UPS…sealed lead-acid type, mounted on shelves
…vented lead-acid type mounted on racks… and shall have a service life of …10 / 12… years.
2. The battery shall be sized to ensure a continuous supply to the inverter for at least …5 / 10 / 15 / 20 /
30…… minutes, in the event the normal AC source fails, given that the inverter is at full rated load, i.e.
kVA for a power factor PF = 0.9.
3. Sizing calculations shall assume an ambient temperature between 0°C and 35°C.
C. Inverter: Each inverter shall be sized to supply a rated load of …250 / 300 / 400 / 500… kVA at 0.9 PF and
shall satisfy the specifications listed below.
1. Output voltage
+/- 3% in order to take into account voltage drops in the cables.
c. Steady-state conditions: Variations in the rated voltage shall be limited to ± 2% for a balanced load
between 0 and 100% of the rated load, whatever the voltage level on the normal AC source and the
DC voltage level, within the defined limits.
07/2016 edition p. 295

MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 4000 kVA
Parallel UPS

e. Unbalanced conditions: For a load unbalance between phases, the variation in the output voltage
shall be less than 1%.
2. Output frequency
b. Variations in the free-running frequency: - ± 0.5 Hz,
of 0.5% to 8% with respect to the rated frequency).
external source.
internal synchronisation, regulating its own frequency to within ± 0.02 Hz. When bypass power returns
to within tolerances, the inverter shall automatically resynchronise.
4. Overload and short-circuit capacity: The UPS shall be capable of supplying for at least:
a. 10 minutes a load representing 125% of the rated load
b. 30 second a load representing 150% of the rated load.
c. For the specified power rating of …[ 250 / 300 / 400 / 500 ]… kVA, the inverter shall be capable of
current limiting to a peak capacity of ... 277% / 230% / 234% / 245% ... for 150 ms to allow highly
disturbed transient operating states without transferring the load to the bypass.
d. The overload capacity shall be capable of taking into account temperature conditions for more than ten
minutes, by allowing a continuous, 10% overload when the temperature is less than or equal to 20°C.
5. Higher power ratings for lower temperatures: It shall be possible to increase the power rating when the
temperature is less than 35°C. The rating can be raised by +3% for 30°C, +5% for 25°C and +8% for 20°C.
D. Automatic bypass
a. Each modular UPS unit in the UPS system shall be equipped with an automatic bypass comprising a
static switch. The automatic bypasses of each modular UPS unit shall be connected to the same
bypass AC source.
b. Instantaneous transfer of the load from the inverter to bypass power and back shall take place without
a break or disturbance in the supply of power to the load, on the condition that the bypass source
voltage and frequency are within the specified tolerances and that the inverter is synchronised.
c. Transfer shall take place automatically in the event of a major overload or an internal inverter fault.
Manually initiated transfer shall also be possible.
d. If the bypass power is outside the specified tolerances or is not synchronised with the inverter,
automatic transfer of the load from the inverter to bypass power shall take place after a calibrated
interruption adjustable from 15 to 1 000 milliseconds.
3. Automatic-bypass withstand: For the specified power rating of …[ 500 / 400 / 300 / 250 ]… kVA for each
modular UPS units, each static switch shall be capable of handling an overcurrent of …[ 16 / 16 / 21 / 25
]…. times the rated current of the modular UPS unit to facilitate discrimination within the electrical
installation.
E. External maintenance bypass: The UPS system shall include an external, mechanical, manual bypass
system with one-button operation, common to all modular UPS units. This system shall be designed to isolate
the UPS system while continuing to supply power to the load from the bypass AC source and shall be sized to
supply the full load.
F. Discrimination and short-circuit capacity

1. If the bypass power is within the specified tolerances, the static switches shall make it possible to use the
short-circuit power of the bypass source to trip the downstream protection devices of the inverter.
2. Each static switch shall be sized to handle the overcurrent corresponding to the short-circuit power divided
07/2016 edition p. 296
MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 4000 kVA
Parallel UPS
by the number of modular UPS units in parallel and any redundant units.
3. To ensure tripping in a selective manner, the total available power shall be sufficient to trip protection
devices with high ratings (circuit breaker rated In/2 or UR fuses rated In/4, where In is the rated inverter
current).
4. If the bypass source is outside the specified tolerances, all the inverters in operation shall, for the same
F. System earthing (grounding) arrangement (SEA): The UPS system shall be compatible with the following
system earthing arrangements (SEA):
1. Upstream source SEA: …[ TT/ IT / TNS / TNC ]…
2. Downstream installation SEA: …[ TT/ IT / TNS / TNC ]…
3. If the upstream and downstream SEAs are different, galvanic isolation shall be provided on the normal and
bypass lines.
A. Mechanical structure: The inverter and batteries of each modular UPS unit shall be installed in cabinet(s)
with an [ IP 20 / IP 32 ] degree of protection (standard IEC 60529). Access to the subassemblies making up the
system shall be exclusively through the front.
B. Modular design: The UPS system shall be designed to allow the installed power to be easily increased on site
by connection of additional modular UPS units, either to meet new load requirements or to enhance system
availability by introducing or increasing redundancy. This transformation shall be possible directly on site,
without returning the equipment to the factory and without causing excessive system downtime.
C. Dimensions: The UPS system shall require as little floor space as possible. To gain space, it shall be possible
to install the modular UPS units with the back to the wall or back to back.
D. Connection:
1. To facilitate connections, all terminal blocks must be easily accessible from the front when the modular
UPS units are installed with the back to the wall. Entry of upstream and downstream power cables, as well
as any auxiliary cables, shall be possible through the bottom without requiring a false floor.
2. The UPS shall be equipped with an earth-circuit connector, in compliance with the listed standards. The
cables shall comply with the listed standards and be mounted in compliance with the safety stipulations.
E. Ventilation:
1. Cooling of each modular UPS unit shall be by forced-air ventilation. To facilitate layout of the modular UPS
units (particularly when installed back to the wall), air input shall be through the front and bottom, exit
through the top.
2. All power electronics shall be equipped with a redundant ventilation system including fault detection.

1. Operation: The UPS, not including the batteries, shall be capable of operating under the following
b. Maximum temperature: 40°C for eight hours
c. Recommended temperature range: +20° C to + 25° C;
d. Maximum relative humidity: 95% at 25° C;
e. Maximum altitude without derating: 1000 meters.
2. Storage
A. Batteries are components whose service life is sensitive to operating conditions, i.e. particular care is
required for their management. In addition to the indicated protective systems, battery management shall
included the systems listed below.
07/2016 edition p. 297

MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 4000 kVA
Parallel UPS
B. Measurement of actual backup time: The battery function of each modular UPS unit shall be equipped
with the means to know at all times the real backup time available (AC power available) or remaining (AC
power not available) for the battery of the unit, taking into account the true load on the inverter, the battery
temperature and battery ageing.
C. Digital battery monitoring

1. Each modular UPS shall be equipped with a system for battery digital management.
D. Block by block monitoring

1. To further optimise battery availability and service life, it shall be possible to equip the UPS system with an
optional system to continuously monitor all battery strings and display a block by block failure prediction.
2.8 DISPLAY
A. User interface: UPS system operation shall be facilitated by a user interface, on each of the modular UPS
units, comprising:
2. ON and OFF control buttons (independent of the display);
B. Graphic display: The mimic diagram shall enable display of installation parameters, configuration, operating
status and alarms and indication of operator instructions for switching operations (e.g. bypass). It shall be
capable of supervising a given modular UPS unit or a parallel system (up to eight UPS units with the external
bypass).
1. Display of measurements: It shall be possible to display the following measurements for any one of the
modular UPS units or for the entire system:
h. Crest factor
l. Bettery percent charge
m. Available backup time
n. The remaining battery service life
b. Load on UPS
d. General alarm
e. Battery fault
07/2016 edition p. 298

MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 4000 kVA
Parallel UPS
7. Statistics: Number of overloads, number of transfers to battery power, cumulative time on battery power,
maximum power levels, demand power levels.
C. Controls: Each modular UPS unit shall comprise the following controls:
2. EPO terminal block: The UPS shall be equipped with an emergency power off (EPO) terminal block for
result in:
b. Opening of the static switches on the bypass line and of the battery circuit breaker;
1. Three LEDs on the control panel on each modular UPS unit indicate the following status conditions:
a. Load protected by the modular UPS unit;
b. Minor fault;
c. Major fault.
2. The mimic panel shall represent the modular UPS and indicate the status of the load supply using five
two-colour (red and green) LEDs:
2.9 ACCESSORIES
1. Monitoring - Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring a PDU through a network of Cat 5
cable and a switch supplied by the user. This switch shall relay information to Data Center Expert, which
in turn shall allow access to this information via the user’s public network via a single IP address.
thresholds for PDU capacity, or branch circuit breaker capacity. Other custom programmable alarm points
for non- APC products shall also be available via dry contact input signal.
4. Public Network Monitoring: Data Center Expert shall also be capable of monitoring other APC
2.10 COMMUNICATION
measurements. To that end, each modular UPS unit shall have as standard equipment:
1. A programmable card with four inputs and six outputs.
without system shutdown, to the following types of cards that may be installed on each modular UPS unit:
1. Multi-standard communications card with two outputs:
07/2016 edition p. 299
MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 4000 kVA
Parallel UPS
a. An RS485 serial-link implementing the JBus/ModBus protocol for connection to a building

management system (BMS)
b. Ethernet 10/100 Mbps using one of the protocols below:
2. XML-Web for direct UPS connection to an intranet network, without connection to a server, capable of
supplying information via a standard web browser SNMP for connection to a computer-network
management system
a. Multi-standard communications card with three outputs:
1) The two outputs listed above
2) Plus a modem output for communication with a tele-maintenance system.
b. The UPS shall be detectable by supervision software for large UPS systems.
c. Shutdown and administration software shall be available in addition to the communication cards.
3.1 PROTECTION
A. UPS: Each modular UPS unit in the UPS system shall include protection against AC-source overvoltages (as
per standard IEC 60146), excessive external or internal temperature rise and vibrations and impacts during
transport.
B. Rectifier and charger:

1. Each rectifier and the corresponding battery charger shall accept external orders provoking automatic
shutdown in the following cases:
a. EPO (emergency power off), in which the battery circuit breaker also opens
b. If the temperature exceeds the specified limits.
2. The rectifier shall automatically shut down if the DC voltage reaches the maximum value specified by the
battery manufacturer or if the temperature exceeds the specified limits.
C. Inverter:
1. The load shall be protected against overvoltages resulting from a loss of voltage regulation at the output of
the inverters.
2. Each inverter (and the corresponding rectifier and charger) shall shut down automatically when the DC
voltage reaches the minimum voltage specified by the battery manufacturer.
3. In the event of an overload exceeding system capacity (AC bypass absent), each inverter shall be
equipped with an automatic shutdown system to protect its power circuits. A load short-circuit shall provoke
the static shutdown of each inverter without fuse destruction.
D. Batteries:
1. Protection against deep discharge: The UPS shall comprise a device designed to protect each battery
against deep discharges, taking into account the characteristics of the discharge cycles, with isolation of
the batteries by a circuit breaker.
a. A regulation system shall regulate the battery voltage and the charge current of each modular UPS
unit.
a. A temperature sensor adapts the charge voltage of each charger to the ambient temperature.
4. Self-test:
a. The battery shall be equipped with a self-test that can be run:
1) On request via a manual control
2) automatically according to user-set time intervals.
b. The self-test shall enable updating of battery parameters and detection of all abnormal conditions in
view of preventive maintenance.
3.2 MAINTAINABILITY
07/2016 edition p. 300

MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 4000 kVA
Parallel UPS
A common external bypass shall be available to completely isolate the UPS.
A. Standards
a. IEC 60140-4: UPS - Performance.
c. IEC 62040-2 and EN 62040-2: UPS - Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), level B.
f. IEC 61000-2-2: EMC, levels of compatibility..
g. IEC 61000-3-4: Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current > 16 A/ph).
h. IEC 61000-4: EMC – Immunity tests.
j. IEC 439: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies.
k. IEC 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
l. ISO 3746: Sound power levels.
m. CE marking.
2. What is more, the equipment shall comply with eco-design and eco-manufacturing criteria in view of
sustainable development and to that end, the manufacturer shall be able to demonstrate:
a. R&D and production on an ISO 14001 certified site
b. Manufacture with over 90% recyclable materials
c. Capacity to recover products at the end of their service life and provide proof of destruction by a
certified organisation
d. The environmental profile of the product, which shall be supplied with the sales offer.
C. Certification of conformity: The manufacturer shall provide, on request, a complete qualification file
demonstrating compliance with the above standards. What is more, the indicated levels of performance shall
be confirmed by certification from independent laboratories (e.g. TÜV or Veritas).
3.4 QUALITY SYSTEM AND TEST PROCEDURES
A. Test procedures:
1. The manufacturer shall provide proof of a quality-assurance system. In particular, the main manufacturing
steps must be subject to suitable tests such as:
a. Inspection of incoming components, tests on discrete subassemblies
b. Complete functional checks on termination of manufacture.
2. The equipment shall be subject to burn-in under load conditions prior to shipping.
3. Final checks and adjustments shall be recorded in a report drafted by the quality-inspection department of
the supplier.
4. Certification of the industrial facilities in compliance with ISO 9001 or 9002 shall be required.
B. Quality system: The UPS must be designed using an ISO 9001 quality system and a dependability study to
3.5 SERVICES
risk.
07/2016 edition p. 301

MGE Galaxy 7000 3:3 – 250 to 4000 kVA
Parallel UPS
diagnosis.
organisations.


B. Options:
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 302

Galaxy VX
3/3 Phase 1250/1500 kVA
Galaxy VX 3:3 – 1250 to 1500 kVA
Schneider Electric
GALAXY VX 1250/1500kW
Three Phase Uninterruptible Power Supply

THIS SECTION MUST BE CAREFULLY REVIEWED AND EDITED BY THE ARCHITECT OR THE ENGINEER TO MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF
THE PROJECT. COORDINATE THIS SECTION WITH OTHER SPECIFICATION SECTIONS IN THE PROJECT MANUAL AND WITH THE
DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.22 SUMMARY
including, but not limited to, manufacturing, fabrication, erection, and installation for a static uninterruptible power
supply (UPS) as required for the complete performance of the work and as shown on the Drawings and as herein
specified.
B. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section includes, but shall not be limited to, a continuous duty,
three-phase, solid state, static UPS.
1. The UPS control logic shall incorporate state of the art digital signal processing. The inverters shall utilize
high speed pulse width modulation and shall be constructed of IGBTs. The UPS shall be part of a
multi-module system, and function as described in this Section.
2. The UPS and associated equipment shall operate in conjunction with a primary power supply (utility and/or
on-site generation) and an output distribution system to provide quality uninterrupted power for mission
critical, electronic equipment load.
A. General Characteristics
1. Double Conversion – Transformer-less Design
2. Unity Power Factor – output
3. Scalable Architecture
4. N+1 Redundant capability
a. 1250kVA / 1500kVA UPS:
1) Up to 3 UPS units in N+1 configuration, where N is 2, 1 for redundancy
2) Up to Two UPS units for capacity
6. Only front access required for service
7. Top or bottom cable entry without increase in dimensions or configuration
8. High efficiency in double conversion mode (96% efficiency @ 50% load)
9. Battery charging in ECOnversion and ECO mode
10. Higher efficiency modes of operations such as ECOnversion and ECO mode
11. 4-level inverter technology
B. Design Requirements:

1. The UPS shall be sized for [___] KW load.
2. The UPS shall include [___] power modules for N+[___] unit internal redundancy.
3. The parallel system shall be comprised of [___] UPSs for N+[___] system-level redundancy.
07/2016 edition p. 304

4. The parallel system shall be sized for [___] KW load.

5. The individual UPS’ battery system shall be sized for [___] KW at power factor 1.0 for [___] minutes.
C. System Characteristics:
1. Input: The system input shall be configurable for either single or dual inputs derived from a three phase wye
source.
1) Input voltage: 400 volts, 50Hz three-phase,
4-wire 3P+PEN
5-wire 3P+N+GND
b.
1) -15 percent to +20 percent continuous @ 100% Load
c. Frequency: 40 to 70 Hz
d. Input Power Factor Correction:
1) 0.97 @ 10% load
2) 0.98 @ 20% load
3) 0.99 @ greater than 40% load
e. Walk in duration: Each UPS module shall have programmable and adaptive walk in duration 1-40 sec
f. Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion (THDI):
1) < 3% @ 100% load
g. Short-circuit Withstand Rating:

1) Galaxy VX UPS Module: 65 kAIC capability
h. Backfeed Protection: Static Bypass backfeed protection provided

i. Input Surge Protection: UPS shall be equipped to withstand surges per ANSI/IEEE C62.41.
2. UPS Output:
1) Output Voltage: 400 volts, 50Hz, 3 PH, 4-wire 3P+PEN or 5-wire 3P+N+GND
b. Frequency: 50 hertz, ±0.1% (free running)

1) Output voltage regulation
a) ±1% for 100% balanced linear load.
b) ±3% for 100% unbalanced linear load
c. Output Voltage Transient Response: The output voltage returns to within ±1% of the steady state
value within 50ms.
d. Output Power Factor: 1.0
e. Output Voltage Transient Characteristics:
f. Output Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion (V-THD):
g. Crest Factor: 3:1 with THD <5%
h. Slew Rate (Hz/sec): Programmable 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6
i. Load Power Factor: 0.7 leading to 0.5 lagging without de-rating
j. Overload Rating:
1) Normal Operation:
a) 150% for 1 minute @ 40°C ambient
b) 125% for 10 minutes @ 40°C ambient
2) Battery Operation:
a) 115% for 1 minute @ 40°C ambient
3) Bypass Operation:
a) 1000% for 100 ms
b) 150% for 1 minute
c) 110% continuous
07/2016 edition p. 305

k. System AC-AC Efficiency:

1) Up to 96% in normal operation between 30-100% load
2) Up to 99% in ECONversion Mode
3) Up to 99% in ECO mode
3. DC Bus: Battery system should consist of [____] [classic battery cabinets][battery breaker box (cabinet)].
a. Battery Voltage: 480 volts DC nominal
b. Battery Blocks: Minimum (38) 12V blocks, Maximum (42) 12V blocks
c. Charge current:
1) 35% of UPS Output Power @ ≤ 80% load
2) 12% of UPS Output Power @ ≤ 100% load
d. Battery Test: Manual or automatic (selectable)
e. Deep Discharge Protection
1) Battery Protection: The inverter shall be provided with monitoring and control circuits to limit the
level of discharge on the battery system. These control circuits shall be capable of varying the
shutdown level to accommodate any type of battery recommended for UPS application. These logic
and control circuits shall automatically adjust shutdown level to 1.75 volts per cell for any discharge
lasting longer than 60 minutes.
f. Recharge according to Battery Temperature
g. Cold Start: If DC bus is already energized, UPS shall be able to start from battery power if no utility
power is available at the UPS input.
h. Battery Type: Valve regulated sealed lead acid (VRLA), Lead Acid, LI ION, or NI CAD
i. Maximum DC Current: Maximum DC current at cutoff voltage shall be
1250kW: 3255A
1500kW: 3906A
j. End of discharge voltage: 384V
1.24 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data showing material proposed. Submit sufficient information to determine
following:
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each product and accessory required. Include information not fully
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams detailing power, signal, and control systems, clearly differentiating
D. Contract Closeout Submittals:

1. Project Record Documents: Submit a complete set of installation drawings showing all the information
2. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data to include in operation and
maintenance manuals including, but not limited to, safe and correct operation of UPS functions.
07/2016 edition p. 306

A. Qualifications:
standards.
authorities.
a. Safety:
b. EMC/EMI/RFI:
c. Performance:
d. Environmental:
maximum reliability. Semiconductor devices shall be sealed. Relays shall be provided with dust covers. The
manufacturer shall conduct inspections on incoming parts, modular assemblies, and final products.
Equipment containing batteries shall not be stored for a period exceeding three months without powering up the

a. Temperature:
1) Operating ambient temperature: 0 to 40°C
2) Storage ambient temperature with batteries: -15 to 40°C
3) Storage ambient temperature without batteries: -25 to 55°C
07/2016 edition p. 307
b. Relative Humidity (Operating and Storage): 0 percent to 95 percent non-condensing.

c. Elevation:
1) Operating: Maximum installation with no derating of the UPS output shall be 3300 feet (1000 m) above
sea level.
2) Non-Operating: 0-15000 m
d. Audible Noise:
1) 1250kW: 74dBA
2) 1500kW: 75dBA
1.28 WARRANTY
1. UPS Cabinets: The UPS shall be covered by a full parts and labor warranty from the manufacturer for a
2. Battery Cabinets: The battery shall have warranty of minimum period of one year
1.29 MAINTENANCE
B. The manufacturer shall, upon request, provide spare parts kits for the UPS module in a timely manner as well as
service on the UPS module when required.
maximum reliability and minimum MTTR (mean time to repair). To that end, the UPS shall be equipped with a self
test function to verify correct system operation. The self test function shall identify the subassembly requiring
repair. The electronic UPS control and monitoring assembly shall therefore be fully microprocessor based, thus
doing away with potentiometer settings. This shall allow:

D. The UPS shall be repairable by replacing standard subassemblies requiring no adjustments.

contracts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.16 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Product specified is Galaxy VX by Schneider Electric. Items specified are to establish a
A. UPS module shall be designed to operate as a double conversion, on-line system in the following modes.
07/2016 edition p. 308

4. Static Bypass: The static bypass switch shall be used to transfer the load to the bypass without interruption
5. Maintenance Bypass: In maintenance bypass the load is supplied with unconditioned power from the
bypass input.
6. ECO Mode: The UPS system is configured to use static bypass operation as the preferred mode under
predefined. Efficiency up to 99%.
7. ECOnversion:
a. In ultra high efficiency ECOnversion mode, an advanced method of bypass operation shall be used to
avoid reversal of power from the inverter to utility mains in case of upstream utility fault.
b. The UPS system shall ensure a class 1 output voltage regulation according to IEC62040-3.
c. In case if an interruption to the utility/mains supply, the inverter immediately maintains the output voltage
so that output breaks or drops during this transfer are practically eliminated. UPS operates with static
bypass in parallel with main inverter.
d. It shall be possible to schedule the high efficiency mode up to seven different time intervals, each with
start day, start time, stop day and stop time.
e. The suppression of harmonic content shall be able to enable/disable via UPS display as per user need.
f. The input power factor of the UPS is, regardless of the load power factor, maintained close to unity as
the reactive part of load is significantly reduced in the UPS input current.
g. While on ECOnversion mode, UPS shall have the ability to recharge batteries.
h. During downstream faults, UPS shall remain in ECOnversion mode initially, to allow fault to clear. If
output voltage is not stable, UPS shall transfer to double conversion mode.
8. Parallel Operation: The system shall have the option to install up to 3 UPSs in parallel. This can be done
for capacity (2+0) or for redundancy (2+1) with an external system bypass cabinet.
a. The parallel UPSs shall be of the same kVA rating, voltage, and frequency.
b. Output Control: A load sharing circuit shall be incorporated into the parallel control circuits to ensure
load sharing.
c. Parallel System Control: To avoid single points of failure, the UPS system shall have no single
dedicated control system designed to control the operation of the parallel UPS system. Control of and
direction of parallel UPSs shall take place via a master/slave relationship, where the first UPS to receive
logic power asserts itself as a master. In the event of a master failure, a slave UPS shall take the role of
master and assume the responsibility of the previous master UPS.
output bus. Transfer to and from bypass can be initiated from any online UPS.
e. Battery Runtime: Each UPS shall have its own battery solution. Each UPS battery solution shall consist
of multiple battery strings with a nominal bus voltage of 480VDC.
f. Switchboard: Either a Galaxy VX System Bypass Cabinet or a custom switchgear cabinet shall be
required for parallel operation following Schneider Electric system control guidelines.
9. Critical Bus Sync of single module: Synchronization of the output of the UPS with any other independent
source for use with downstream transfer switches. The synchronization at the UPS is controlled from an
input on the interface boards, and is included as a standard feature of the UPS, eliminating the need for a
wall-mounted CBS or Sync Box.
10. Synchronization of Parallel UPS modules:
a. Synchronization shall be required to keep the outputs of both independent UPS systems in sync during
all operating conditions including when:
1) Bypass power of one or both UPS systems is not available.
2) Bypass power is available but they are out-of-sync.
3) UPS systems are operating on battery.
b. The Synchronization shall be a parallel connected circuit that shall monitor the bypass and system
output of UPS systems and it shall activate a sync signal under pre-determined and specific conditions.
The Sync shall not affect the standard and specified performance of the UPS system detailed in this
Section.
c. The External Synchronization (Critical Bus Sync) Mode shall operate under the following conditions:
1) Bypass source in tolerance: When a common bypass source (utility or generator set) is used for
both UPS systems supplying the static transfer switch and when this source is present and within
frequency and amplitude tolerances, both UPS automatically synchronize with it and are therefore
07/2016 edition p. 309
normally synchronized between themselves. The control simply checks that this is the case and the
external synchronization function remains in sleep mode.
2) Bypass source out of tolerance: When the common bypass source disappears or is out of
tolerance, the function initiates and controls one of the UPS system to stay synchronized with the
other UPS system. The position of the reference source shall be configured as "PREFERRED
MASTER" determines which source is controlled.
3) Both bypass sources in tolerance: If the Synchronization function detects any phase deviation
between the UPS outputs, it steps in and controls one of the UPS systems to stay synchronized with
the other. If information on the type of UPS bypass source (utility or generator) is available, the UPS
with the generator-supplied bypass will be controlled. If this information is not available, the position
of the reference source "PREFERRED MASTER" determines which source is controlled.
4) One of the two UPS bypass sources out of tolerance: When the bypass source of one UPS
system disappears or goes out of tolerance, the synchronization function steps in and controls that
UPS to stay synchronized with the other UPS.
5) Both UPS bypass sources out of tolerance: When the bypass sources of both UPS systems
disappear or go out of tolerance, the Synchronization function initiates and controls one of the UPS
systems to stay synchronized with the other. The position of the reference source ("PREFERRED
MASTER") determines which source is controlled
A. PFC Rectifier and Battery Charger: Incoming AC power shall be converted to a regulated DC output voltage by
an input power factor of 0.99 @ loads > 40%. The rectifier input shall be filtered with a ripple current not
exceeding 1% rms over the allowable continuous input voltage range.
2. Input Harmonic Current Suppression: The PFC rectifier shall produce a sinusoidal input AC current on
each phase with low harmonic content, limiting THD on the UPS input to below 3 percent @ 100% load to
ensure generator compatibility and avoid reflected harmonics from disturbing loads sharing utility power.
3. Battery Charger Current Limiting: The UPS shall be equipped with a system designed to limit the battery
recharge current.
4. Dry Contact Operation: When signaled by a dry contact, this shall signal the UPS to turn off battery
charging. This option is useful if the UPS is auxiliary powered from a restricted or minimally sized on-site
generator
3. Fault Clearing
a. The inverter shall be protected by the following features that shall be adjustable for maximum system
flexibility.
07/2016 edition p. 310

7. Smart Power (SPoT) Test: The Smart Power Test in normal operation is conducted by circulating power
from the inverter back through the static bypass switch and into the power factor correction module. By
circulating the power, each of the UPS converters is energized and loaded in the same way as though a
UPS was feeding a load bank. The test shall be configurable for 100% rated power continuously or 120% of
rated power for 10 minutes. During Smart Power Test, the UPS shall draw only enough power from utility to
make up for system losses during the test procedure.
C. Static Bypass - 100 Percent Rated, Continuous Duty: The static bypass transfer switch shall be solid state,
rated for 110% percent continuous duty without mechanical contactor device in parallel for higher reliability and
1. Uninterrupted Transfer: The static bypass transfer switch shall automatically cause the bypass source to
b. Battery runtime expired and bypass current is available.
2. Interrupted Transfer: If the bypass source is beyond the conditions stated below, the UPS shall make an
interrupted transfer
3. Automatic Uninterrupted Forward Transfer: The static bypass transfer switch shall automatically forward
4. Manual Transfer: Single Module: A manual static transfer shall be initiated from the UPS control panel by
turning the UPS inverter off. Parallel Module: A manual static transfer shall be initiated from control panel
of UPS that will upon user command shall simultaneously transfer all modules to static bypass switches or
back to inverters
a. 1000% of UPS output rating for 100 milliseconds.
c. 110% of UPS output rating indefinitely.
A. Microprocessor Controlled Logic:

include UPS on and UPS off pushbuttons that shall permit the operator to command the UPS on or off.
B. Front Panel 7” Color Graphical Display: The UPS control panel shall provide a backlit, color graphic display for
indication of UPS status, metering, battery status, alarm/event log, and advanced operational features.
1. Built-in communication
a. Web interface
b. SNMP
c. Modbus over TCP/IP over Ethernet
d. Modbus RS-485: Requires optional Modbus card
2. Monitoring:
a. E-mail notification
07/2016 edition p. 311
b. StruxureWare
c. Remote monitoring service
4. System Parameters Monitored: The visual display shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following
a. Measurements:
1) Input voltage (Ph-Ph and Ph-G).
3) Bypass voltage.
5) UPS output voltage (Ph-Ph and Ph-G).
9) UPS output kVA.
11) Crest factor.
b. Status Indications and Events:
1) Load on battery.
2) Load on UPS.
3) Load on bypass.
5) General alarm.
6) Battery fault.
5. Time-Stamped Historical Events: This function shall time stamp and store important status changes,
anomalies, and faults.
C. LED Status Indicators: The UPS control panel shall provide three LEDs that shall signal the following status
conditions:
2. Green + Orange: The load is protected, but the system reports a warning alarm.
3. Orange + Red: The load is unprotected, and the system reports a warning alarm and a critical alarm
4. Red: The load is unprotected, and the system reports a critical alarm.
D. Buttons:
1. Inverter off (or transfer to bypass)
2. Inverter on (or transfer to UPS)
E. Audible Alarm Reset: The UPS shall provide an audible alarm that can be stopped using the user interface.
dry contact input that shall be used to command UPS shutdown remotely.
H. Dry Contacts: The UPS shall be provided standard with a programmable input/output relay board. This board
a. Custom Input 1
b. Custom Input 2
c. Ground Fault (ie, input for an external ground fault detector)
07/2016 edition p. 312
d. External Battery Monitor Fault

e. Battery Room Ventilation Fault
a. Common Alarm
b. Normal Operation
d. Maintenance Bypass operation
e. Static Bypass standby
f. ECO Mode
g. Output Overload
h. Fan Fault
i. Battery Fault
n. Output Out of Tolerance
o. UPS Warning alarm
p. UPS Critical alarm
q. Parallel Redundancy Lost
r. External Fault
s. UPS Maintenance Mode
t. System Critical alarm
u. System Warning alarm
v. System Common Alarm
I. Alarms: The following alarms shall be available through the 7-inch touchscreen display. The display unit shall
allow the Owner to display a log of active alarms. The following minimum set of alarm conditions shall be
available:
6. Abnormal state at input contact zone A
7. Abnormal state at input contact zone B
8. Air Filter technical check recommended
9. Ambient temperature high
10. Ambient temperature out of tolerance
11. Batteries are discharging
12. Battery breaker BB1 open
13. Battery breaker BB2 open
14. Battery capacity is below minimum acceptable level
15. Battery breakers tripped
16. Battery condition is poor
17. Battery condition is weak
18. Battery is below minimum acceptable runtime
19. Battery is not working correctly
20. Battery room ventilation inoperable
21. Breaker MBB closed
22. Breaker SIB open
23. Breaker SSIB open
24. Breaker UIB open
25. Breaker UOB open
27. Bypass phase missing
28. Bypass phase sequence incorrect
29. Bypass voltage out of tolerance
30. Charge power is reduced
31. Communication cable termination missing or damaged
32. Confirm redundancy lost and/or transfer to Forced Static Bypass
33. Confirm Turn Load Off
34. Customer Input 1 activated
35. Customer Input 2 activated
07/2016 edition p. 313
36. Display communication is lost

37. Display firmware incompatibility detected
38. EPO Switch Activated
39. External battery monitoring detected fault
40. External sync frequency out of tolerance
41. External sync phase missing
42. External sync phase sequence incorrect
43. External sync temporarily disabled
44. External sync voltage out of tolerance
45. Fan inoperable
46. Firmware update - Incorrect UPS operation mode
47. Firmware versions in parallel UPS units are not identical
48. Flywheel inoperable
49. General parallel system event
50. Ground fault detected
51. High Battery Temperature Level
52. High humidity threshold violation at remote sensor
53. High temperature threshold violation at remote sensor
54. Input frequency out of tolerance
55. Input phase missing
56. Input phase sequence incorrect
57. Input voltage out of tolerance
58. Inverter is Off due to a request by the user
59. Inverter output is not in phase with bypass input
60. Lost communication to remote sensor
61. Lost parallel redundancy
62. Low Battery Temperature Level
63. Low humidity threshold violation at remote sensor
64. Low temperature threshold violation at remote sensor
65. Maximum humidity threshold violation at remote sensor
66. Maximum temperature threshold violation at remote sensor
67. Minimum humidity threshold violation at remote sensor
68. Minimum temperature threshold violation at remote sensor
69. NMC 1 firmware incompatibility detected
70. NMC 2 firmware incompatibility detected
71. Not enough UPS units ready to turn on inverter
72. Output frequency out of tolerance
73. Output voltage out of tolerance
74. Overload on UPS due to high ambient temperature
75. Overload or short circuit on UPS
76. Parallel communication lost on PBUS cable 1
77. Parallel communication lost on PBUS cable 2
78. Parallel mixed operation mode
79. Parallel unit not present
80. Restricted air flow
81. Self-test - Did not pass
82. Startup recommended
83. Static bypass switch inoperable
84. Static bypass switch warning
85. Surveillance detected fault
86. Synchronization unavailable - system is freerunning
87. System locked in bypass operation
88. System operation mode - Forced Static Bypass
89. System operation mode - Maintenance Bypass
90. System operation mode - Off
91. System operation mode - Requested Static Bypass
92. System operation mode - Static Bypass Standby
93. Technical Check recommended
94. UPS configuration incorrect
95. UPS operation mode - Battery
96. UPS operation mode - Battery Test
97. UPS operation mode - Forced Static Bypass
07/2016 edition p. 314
98. UPS operation mode - Initialize

99. UPS operation mode - Inverter Standby
100. UPS operation mode - Maintenance Bypass
101. UPS operation mode - Off
102. UPS operation mode - Requested Static Bypass
103. UPS operation mode - Static Bypass Standby
104. UPS settings reset to default
105. Warranty expiring soon
A. Cabinet: The UPS shall be housed in multiple freestanding cabinets with dead front construction. The
mechanical structure of the UPS shall be sufficiently strong and rigid to withstand handling and installation
operations. The sheet metal elements in the structure shall be protected against corrosion by a suitable
treatment, such as zinc electroplating, bi-chromating, epoxy paint, or an equivalent.
B. Cable Access: The standard UPS available shall accommodate top or bottom cable entry in standard cabinet.
C. Cabinet Weights and Dimensions:

1. The height of the UPS shall be 1970mm.
2. The width of the UPS shall be [_____] mm
3. The depth of the UPS shall be 900mm.
4. The UPS shall have a maximum weight of [_____] kg.
from the front bottom of the UPS enclosure. Air exhaust shall be from the top portion of the unit. Full load heat
rejection shall be [_____] BTUs per hour.
2.21 BATTERY
A. Protection against Deep Discharge and Self-Discharge: The UPS shall be equipped with a device designed
hours).
B. Battery Self-Tests:
1. Battery Test: This feature performs a number of tests on the batteries, such as fuse-blown check, weak
3. Charger Power Test: The Charger Power Test will test the functionality of the UPS charger. During the
charger power test, the charger is forcing a DC current to the batteries. The PFC module draws a similar
current from the batteries, with the addition of the related losses in the system. The result is a full charger
test with only a small current drawn from the batteries covering the losses.
A. BATTERY
07/2016 edition p. 315

1. General: The UPS module shall use a valve-regulated sealed lead acid heavy duty industrial battery,
designed for auxiliary power service in an UPS application. The primary battery shall be furnished with
impact-resistant plastic cases.
B. Battery Breaker Cabinet (BBC):

1. Floor-mount battery breaker cabinet available for purchase separately. Cabinet will include DC breaker rated
for specific UPS maximum current draw. Battery Breaker Cabinet shall support top or bottom entry. Battery
breaker shall include UVR and Aux contacts to support monitoring by UPS modules.
C. Maintenance Bypass Cabinet (MBC): for single UPS system

1. Maintenance Bypass Cabinet shall be available for purchase separately. It shall allow user to bypass the
single UPS system for a maintenance or repair.
D. System Bypass Cabinet (SBC) : for parallel UPS systems

1. Common parallel configurations shall be supported by an available system bypass cabinet.
2. SBC shall come with AUX contacts to support UPS monitoring. System Bypass Cabinet shall be available
for purchase separately.
E. External Control and Communications Devices: The UPS shall contain two Smart Slots for the following
1. Dry Contacts/I/O accessory (AP9810+ AP9631 or AP9635): Customizable input and output contacts for
the UPS network management card 2 with environmental monitoring (2 inputs/ 1 output).
2. Temperature Sensor (AP9631 or AP9635): The Temperature Sensor enables the UPS environment to be
3. Temperature and Humidity Sensor (AP9335TH + AP9631 or AP9635): The temperature and Humidity
connect sensors.
F. Seismic Anchors: Shipped with modules and included with the system.
G. StruxureWare Data Center Expert: A centralized infrastructure management platform hereafter referred to as
software stack providing data to systems such as Data Center Operation
1. Monitoring - Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring a system through a network of Cat 5 cable
thresholds for alarm notification. With this feature, Data Center Expert can notify clients of reaching.
4. Public Network Monitoring: Data Center Expert shall also be capable of monitoring other Schneider
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.26 EXAMINATION
corrected.
3.27 INSTALLATION
07/2016 edition p. 316
A. Field Service Engineer Qualifications: The manufacturer shall employ a 7 x 24 nationwide field service
organization with rapid access to all regions of the nation. The responding service professionals shall be
factory-trained engineers with an accredited and proven competence to service three-phase UPSs.
B. Spare Parts: Field Engineers shall have immediate access to recommended spare parts with additional parts storage
3.29 DEMONSTRATION
2. Train the Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown
and troubleshooting.
3.30 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 317

Gutor PXC
3/3 Phase 10/20/30/40/50/60/80 kVA
3/1 Phase 10/20/30/40/50/60/80 kVA
07/2016 edition p. 318

Gutor PXC 3:3 or 3:1 – 10 to 80 kVA
Schneider Electric
Gutor PXC
Industrial one and three Phase Uninterruptible Power Supply
10 - 80 kVA UPS
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
SECTION [26 33 63] [16611]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.30 SUMMARY
herein specified.
a. Up to five UPS units for redundancy
4. Top or bottom cable entry

07/2016 edition p. 319

a. Input voltage: [___] volts AC
1) one-phase, 3-wire (L, N + PE)
2) three-phase, 4-wire (L1, L2, L3 + PE) or 5-wire (L1, L2, L3, N + PE)
b. Frequency: 50/60 Hertz
1) 0.96 – 0.98 full range
1) < 5% @ 100% load
e. Generator ramp-in: 10% nominal power/sec.
f. Rated conditional short-circuit current Icc: 65 kA
g. Rated peak withstand current Ipk: N/A
i. Inrush Current: Less than nominal input current for less than one cycle. Shall not exceed 1000% of
nominal rating (only with input transformer).
2. Bypass:
a. Bypass voltage: [___] volts AC
1) one-phase, 3-wire (L, N + PE) or (L1, L2 + PE)
2) three-phase, 4-wire (L1, L2, L3 + PE)
3. UPS output:
a. Output voltage: [___] volts AC, ±1 percent steady state variation phase to neutral / phase-to-phase
voltage volts AC
1) one-phase, 3-wire (L, N + PE)
2) three- phase, 5-wire (L1, L2, L3, N + PE).
a) ± 1% static
value within 60ms.
e. Output power factor: 0.8 rated
1) 100% load step change ±5%
h. Slew rate (Hz/sec): Programmable
1) one-phase 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4
2) three-phase 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4 ,6
i. Load power factor: 0.5 leading to 0.5 lagging without de-rating (PF 0.8 rated)
j. Overload rating:
a) 1000% for 100 ms
c) 125% for 10 minutes
1) Up to 95% in normal operation
b. Charging power is 20% of output power (reduced charging power by using a output transformer)
07/2016 edition p. 320

g. Battery type: Valve regulated sealed lead acid (VRLA), vented lead acid (VLA) and NiCd. Separate
battery cabinet or rack
1.32 SUBMITTALS
following:

A. Qualifications:
standards.
a. Safety:
b. EMC/EMI/RFI:
c. Performance:
d. Markings: CE
e. Transportation: ISTA 2B
f. Seismic: IBC 2012 (sds=1.00g)
07/2016 edition p. 321

a. Temperature:
1) Operating ambient temperature: -10 °C to 40 °C.
2) Storage ambient temperature without batteries: -30 °C to 80 °C.
c. Elevation:
1) Operating:
a) 1000 m: 1.000
b) 1500 m: 0.975
c) 2000 m: 0.950
d) 2500 m: 0.925
e) 3000 m: 0.900
2) on-operating: 0-15000 m
d. Audible noise:
1) 65 dBA at 100% load and 1 m (39 in) from surface
1.36 WARRANTY
1.37 MAINTENANCE
07/2016 edition p. 322


contracts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.23 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of design: Product specified is Gutor PXC by Schneider Electric. Items specified are to establish a
4. Static bypass: The static bypass switch shall be used to transfer the load to the bypass without
interruption to the critical power load. This shall be accomplished by turning the inverter off. Automatic
re-transfer or forward transfer of the load shall be accomplished by turning the inverter on.
1+1 for redundancy.
load sharing.
07/2016 edition p. 323
harmonics from disturbing loads sharing the utility power. The battery charger output shall be filtered with a
ripple current not exceeding 1% rms over the allowable continuous input voltage range.
recharge current.
a. 20% charger 0% - 100% load
4. Wide battery voltage window: 335-540V.
3. Fault Clearing
07/2016 edition p. 324

inverter off.

Included shall be a backlit, liquid crystal displays (LCD) with a keypad driven menu and light-emitting diodes
(LEDs). The UPS panel shall include UPS on and UPS off pushbuttons that shall permit the Owner to
command the UPS on or off.
B. Front Panel:
1. Human-machine interface: The front panel includes a comprehensive and flexible human-machine
interface. It is divided into three sections:
a. Control and display consists of a liquid-crystal display screen, indication LEDs for operating modes, and
pushbuttons to navigate through the display menus and control the UPS. The user can access
measurement data and system information via display menus, including the event and alarm logs.
b. Mimic diagram with multi-color LED indicates the current operational status of the system and its
components. It clearly indicates the power path currently supplying the load and the availability of the
other supplies.
c. System alarms and external signals can be flexibly assigned to LEDs for visualization.
a. Auto start
b. Auto boost charge
c. Set date/time
d. Charge mode
e. Bypass operation
f. Battery capacity test
g. Battery monitor test (optional)
h. Display settings
i. Menu language
a. Measurements:
1) AC rectifier line power input voltage, current, and frequency.
2) AC bypass line power input voltage, current and frequency (optional).
3) AC output voltage, current and frequency
4) Load in kVA, kW and percentage of nominal rating
5) Battery voltage and current.
6) Battery capacity percentage and expected runtime
7) Total system status in parallel/redundant operation.
8) Three temperature measurements (with optional sensors).
9) Runtime and switchover statistics
10) Maximum and minimum voltages and currents
1) Rectifier input supply available.
2) Alternative/bypass supply available.
3) Battery supply available.
4) Rectifier on.
5) Rectifier failure.
6) Battery on high rate charge (if specified).
07/2016 edition p. 325
7) Battery on initial charge.

8) Battery on float charge.
9) Battery operation.
10) Inverter on.
11) Inverter failure.
12) Inverter/bypass synchronised.
13) Load on inverter.
14) Load on static bypass.
15) Load on manual bypass.
16) Inverter output within tolerance.
17) Status of input-, battery- and output MCCBs or switches.
18) Common alarm
c. Time-stamped historical events: This function shall time stamp and store important status changes
and anomalies.
C. Buttons:
1. UPS off
2. UPS on
D. Audible alarm reset: The UPS shall provide an audible alarm that can be stopped using the user interface.
E. Emergency Power Off (EPO): The UPS shall be equipped with provisions for remote emergency power off and
F. RS232 port: shall be provided for field diagnostics.
G. Dry contacts: The UPS shall be provided standard with a programmable input/output relay board. This board
shall have three dry contacts for inputs and three relays for output.
a. Custom Input 1
b. Custom Input 2
c. Emergency Shutdown
a. Common Alarm
b. Programmable
c. Programmable
B. Cable access: The standard UPS available shall accommodate top or bottom cable entry in standard cabinet.
from the front of the UPS cabinet. Air flow shall be from the front to the back. Minimum distance from back wall
shall not be less than 100 mm.
2.28 BATTERY
07/2016 edition p. 326

A. General: The UPS shall use vented lead acid or valve-regulated sealed lead acid or NiCd heavy duty industrial
battery, designed for auxiliary power service in an UPS application. The primary battery shall be furnished with
impact-resistant plastic cases and housed in a matching cabinet(s) next to the UPS.
discharge coefficient to avoid excessive discharge at less than the rated output.
1. Battery test: This feature performs tests on the batteries with weak or defective battery detection. The
battery self-test can be setup to run automatically in different time intervals between weekly and up to a year.
J. Battery Cabinets: Matching battery cabinets shall be furnished in adjacent versions.
K. External control and communications devices: The UPS shall contain two smart slots for the following
1. Battery/Ambient temperature monitoring: Up to three temperature sensor (PT100) can be connected to
the external connection board for monitoring or battery temperature compensation purposes.
connect sensors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.31 EXAMINATION
corrected.
3.32 INSTALLATION
B. Field service engineer qualifications: The manufacturer shall employ a 7 x 24 nationwide (international where
three-phase UPS.
C. Spare parts: Field Engineers shall have immediate access to recommended spare parts with additional parts storage
3.34 DEMONSTRATION
07/2016 edition p. 327

3.35 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 328

Smart UPS online
1/1 Phase 1/2/2.2/3/5/6/8/10/15/20 kVA
07/2016 edition p. 329

Smart UPS online 1:1 – 1 to 20 kVA

Smart-UPS RT
1 kVA, 2 kVA, 2.2 kVA, 3 kVA, 5 kVA, 6 kVA, 8 kVA, 10 kVA, 15 kVA, and 20 kVA,
230 V Solution
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.38 SUMMARY
A. Scope: This specification describes the operation and functionality of a continuous duty, single-phase, solid-state,
static Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) hereafter referred to as the UPS.
B. Included Features of the UPS:

1. The UPS utilizes double conversion online topology designed to protect electronic equipment by supplying
reliable, network-grade power featuring extremely tight voltage and frequency regulation.
2. The UPS features internal bypass and input power factor correction.
3. The primary sections of the UPS are: input disconnect and filter stage, input PFC power stage, energy storage
stage (DC bus capacitor bank), output power (inverter) stage, bypass, and a battery charger. The control of
power module and fault detection logic is microcontroller-based.
a. The input disconnect and filter stage contains an input back-feed relay, input filter, transient suppression,
and battery select switches (mechanical relay or solid-state).
b. The Input PFC power stage contains non-isolated power-factor-correcting AC/DC converters. These
converters are capable of full power operation in a very wide input voltage range or from a nominal DC
battery voltage.
c. The energy storage stage is a split DC bus capacitor handling seamless transitions from battery to online
and vice versa as well as the low and high frequency power stages ripple.
d. The output power (inverter) stage operates directly from the DC bus and produces a configurable AC
output voltage of 200, 208, 220, 230 or 240 Vac output, 1 kVA and 2 kVA models produce 220, 225, 230
or 240 Vac, 15 kVA and 20 kVA models produce 220, 230, 240 Vac (single phase) or 380, 400, 415 Vac
(three phase). The output of the UPS is connected either to the inverter or through a bypass relay or static
switch to the filtered input line.
e. The UPS contains a battery charger, which operates from the DC bus. The UPS batteries are modular,
hot-swappable, and user-replaceable.
C. Performance, Design, and Configurations: The UPS and associated equipment operates in conjunction
with a primary power supply and an output distribution system to provide quality uninterrupted power for a
mission-critical, electronic equipment load.
1. This specification describes the performance, functionality, and design of the UPS Service Bypass
Panel, hereafter referred to as the SBP, the external Battery Systems, and connectivity solutions.
2. All programming and miscellaneous components for a fully operational system as described in this
specification are available as part of the UPS.
07/2016 edition p. 330

3. The UPS is available in the following configurations:

TYPE MODEL SKU
APC Smart-UPS RT 1000 VA RM 230 V SURT1000XLI
APC Smart-UPS RT 2000 VA 230 V SURT2000XLI
APC Smart-UPS RT 3000 VA 230 V with Pre- SURT3000XLI-ET
Tower installed Input/Output Hardwire Kit
APC Smart-UPS RT 3000 VA 230 V SURTD3000XLI
APC Smart-UPS RT 5000 VA 230 V SURTD5000XLI
APC Smart-UPS RT 5000 VA 230 V with Pre- SURTD5000XLI-ET
installed Input/Output Hardwire Kit
APC Smart-UPS RT 6000 VA 230 V with SURT6000XLI-ET
Pre-installed Input/Output Hardwire Kit
APC Smart-UPS RT 10,000 VA 230 V SURT10000XLI
APC Smart-UPS RT 1000 VA RM 230 V SURT1000RMXLI
APC Smart-UPS RT 1000 VA 230 V – Marine SURT1000XLIM
Rack APC Smart-UPS RT 2200 VA 230 V – Marine SURTD2200XLIM
Mount
APC Smart-UPS RT 3000 VA RM 230 V SURTD3000RMXLI
APC Smart-UPS RT 3000 VA 230 V – Marine SURTD3000XLIM
APC Smart-UPS RT 6000 VA 230 V – SURT6000XLIM
Marine
APC Smart-UPS RT 10,000 VA RM 230 V SURT10000RMXLI
APC Smart-UPS RT 15 kVA RM 230 V SURT15KRMXLI
APC Smart-UPS RT 20 kVA RM 230 V SURT20KRMXLI
1.39 REFERENCES
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The edition/revision of the referenced
publications is the latest date as of the date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise specified.

1. ANSI/IEEE 519, "Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of Static Power
Converters" (copyrighted by IEEE, ANSI-approved).

2. ISO 14001, ―Environmental Management Systems - Requirements with Guidance for Use.‖
07/2016 edition p. 331

1.40 STANDARDS
A. Regulatory Compliance:
1. By model:
Model SKU Approvals
C-tick, CE, EN 50091-1,
APC Smart-UPS RT 2000 VA RM 230 V SURT2000RMXLI EN 50091-2, EN 55022
APC Smart-UPS RT 2000 VA 230 V SURT2000XLI Class A, EN 60950, EN
61000-3-2, GOST, VDE
APC Smart-UPS RT 10,000 VA 230 V SURT10000XLI
APC Smart-UPS RT 1000 VA 230 V – SURT1000XLIM
Marine CE, DNV1, EN 50091-1,
APC Smart-UPS RT 2200 VA 230 V – SURTD2200XLIM EN 50091-2, EN 55022
Marine Class A, EN 60950, EN
61000-3-2
APC Smart-UPS RT 3000 VA 230 V – SURTD3000XLIM
Marine
APC Smart-UPS RT 3000 VA 230 V with SURT3000XLI-ET BSMI, C-tick, CE, CSA,
Pre-installed Input/Output Hardwire Kit EN 50091-1, EN 50091-2,
EN 55022 Class A, EN
APC Smart-UPS RT 3000 VA 230 V SURTD3000XLI 60950, EN 61000-3-2,
GOST, JEON, UL 1778,
VCCI, VDE
APC Smart-UPS RT 5000 VA RM 230 V SURTD5000RMXLI C-tick, CE, EN 50091-1,
EN 50091-2, EN 55022
APC Smart-UPS RT 5000 VA 230 V SURTD5000XLI Class A, EN 60950, EN
61000-3-2, GOST, UL
1778, VDE
APC Smart-UPS RT 5000 VA 230 V with SURTD5000XLI-ET C-tick, CE, EN 50091-1,
Pre-installed Input/Output Hardwire Kit EN 50091-2, EN 55022
Class A, EN 60950, EN
APC Smart-UPS RT 6000 VA RM 230 V SURT6000RMXLI 61000-3-2, GOST, VDE
APC Smart-UPS RT 6000 VA 230 V SURT6000XLI C-tick, CE, CSA, EN

50091-1, EN 50091-2, EN
APC Smart-UPS RT 6000 VA, 230 V with SURT6000XLI-ET 55022 Class A, EN 60950,
Pre-installed Input/Output Hardwire Kit EN 61000-3-2, GOST, UL
Listed, VDE
APC Smart-UPS RT 6000 VA 230 V – SURT6000XLIM CE, DNV2, EN 50091-1,
Marine EN 50091-2, EN 55022
Class A, EN 60950, EN
61000-3-2
APC Smart-UPS RT 10,000 VA RM 230 V SURT10000RMXLI C-tick, CE, EN 50091-1,
EN 50091-3
APC Smart-UPS RT 15 kVA RM 230 V SURT15KRMXLI EN/IEC 62040-2, EN/IEC
62040-1-1, VDE
APC Smart-UPS RT 20 kVA RM 230 V SURT20KRMXLI BSMI,EN/IEC 62040-2,
EN/IEC 62040-1-1, VDE
1
For compliance with DNV certification, the Smart-UPS On-Line marine models SURT1000XLIM,
SURTD2200XLIM, and SURTD3000XLIM must be used with the APC 3000 VA Filter – Marine
(SURT023M).
2
For compliance with DNV certification, the Smart-UPS On-Line marine model SURTD6000XLIM
must be used with the APC 6000 VA Filter – Marine (SURT024M).
07/2016 edition p. 332

2. OSHPD Pre-approval: In addition to the preceding regulatory approvals, the APC Smart-UPS RT 3 kVA
RM 230 V model (SURTD3000RMXLI) and the APC Smart-UPS RT 5 kVA RM 230 V model
(SURTD5000RMXLI) have OSHPD pre-approval (pre-approval by California Office of Statewide Health
Planning and Development) when used in any of three APC NetShelterTM enclosures:
a. APC NetShelter SX 42 U Enclosure (Commercial), AR3100SP1
b. APC NetShelter VX Seismic 42 U Enclosure (Seismic), AR3100SP1
c. APC NetShelter 2-Post Rack 45 U (Commercial), AR201
A. Mechanical Design
1. The UPS is contained in a rugged steel cabinet with plastic front bezels:
2. The UPS dimensions are:
UPS Cabinet SKU Height Width Depth
in mm in mm in mm
APC Smart-UPS RT 1000 VA RM 230 V SURT1000RMXLI 85 432 483
APC Smart-UPS RT 1000 VA 230 V SURT1000XLI 432 85 483
APC Smart-UPS RT 1000 VA 230 V – SURT1000XLIM 85 432 483
Marine
APC Smart-UPS RT 2200 VA 230 V – SURTD2200XLIM 130 432 660
Marine
APC Smart-UPS RT 3000 VA 230 V with SURT3000XLI-ET 432 130 660
APC Smart-UPS RT 3000 VA RM 230 V SURTD3000RMXLI 130 432 660
APC Smart-UPS RT 3000 VA 230 V SURTD3000XLI 432 130 660
APC Smart-UPS RT 3000 VA 230 V – SURTD3000XLIM 130 432 660
Marine
APC Smart-UPS RT 5000 VA RM 230 V SURTD5000RMXLI 130 432 660
APC Smart-UPS RT 5000 VA 230 V SURTD5000XLI 432 130 660
APC Smart-UPS RT 5000 VA 230 V with SURTD5000XLI-ET 432 130 660
APC Smart-UPS RT 6000 VA, 230 V with SURT6000XLI-ET 432 130 660
APC Smart-UPS RT 6000 VA 230 V – SURT6000XLIM 130 432 660
Marine
APC Smart-UPS RT 10,000 VA RM 230 V SURT10000RMXLI 263 432 736
APC Smart-UPS RT 10,000 VA 230 V SURT10000XLI 432 263 736
APC Smart-UPS RT 15 kVA RM 230 V SURT15KRMXLI 553 432 773
APC Smart-UPS RT 20 kVA RM 230 V SURT20KRMXLI 553 432 773
3. The UPS cabinet is capable of conversion between Tower and Rack-Mount configurations.
B. System Characteristics:
1. System Capacity: The system is rated to be capable of supporting:
a. 1 kVA or 700 W, whichever limit is reached first (for the 1 kVA models).
b. 2 kVA or 1400 W, whichever limit is reached first (for the 2 kVA models).
c. 2.2 kVA or 1540 W, whichever limit is reached first (for the 2.2 kVA model).
d. 3 kVA or 2100 W, whichever limit is reached first (for the 3 kVA models).
07/2016 edition p. 333

e. 5 kVA or 3500 W, whichever limit is reached first for the 5 kVA models).
f. 6 kVA or 4200 W, whichever limit is reached first (for the 6 kVA models).
g. 8 kVA or 6400 W, whichever limit is reached first (for the 8 kVA models).
h. 10 kVA or 8000 W, whichever limit is reached first (for the 10 kVA models).
i. 15 kVA or 12000 W, whichever limit is reached first (for the 15 kVA model).
j. 20 kVA or 16000 W, whichever limit is reached first (for the 20 kVA model).
2. Efficiency: The UPS full-load efficiency stated here is without degradation of output regulation as
specified:
a. Efficiency is at least 88% for the 1 kVA models.
b. Efficiency is at least 90% for the 2 kVA models.
c. Efficiency is at least 92% for the 2.2 kVA, 3 kVA, 5 kVA, 6 kVA, 8 kVA and 10 kVA models.
d. Efficiency is at least 94% for the 15 kVA and 20 kVA models.
3. Input:
a. AC Input Nominal Voltage:
1) 220/230/240 Vac, single phase, 3 wire (L + N + G), connected via IEC-320 C14 connector (1
kVA models)
kVA models)
kVA models).
4) 220/230/240 Vac, single phase, 3 wire (L + N + G), connected via hardwire (5 kVA and 6 kVA
models)
5) 220/230/240 Vac, single phase, 3 wire (L + N + G) or 380/400/415 Vac, three phase, 5 wire
(L1+L2+L3+N+G) (8 kVA,10 kVA, 15 kVA and 20 kVA models)
b. AC Input Voltage Window:
1) For 1 kVA to 6 kVA non-marine models, 160 – 280 Vac (L-N) at full load, while providing
nominal charging to the battery system; or 100 – 280 Vac (L-N) at 50% load, while providing
nominal charging to the battery system.
2) For 8 kVA to 20 kVA non-marine models, 160 – 280 Vac (L-N) for single phase input or 277 –
485 Vac for three phase input at full load while providing nominal charging to the battery
system.
3) For the 1 kVA and 2.2 kVA marine models, 180 V to 280 V.
4) For the 3 kVA and 6 kVA marine models, 180 V to 270 V.
c. Input Frequency Range: 45-65 Hz, auto-selecting.
d. Input Power Factor: Minimum 0.95 at 100% load at 230 Vac.
e. Input Current Distortion:
1) Maximum 6% at 100% load at 230 Vac (1 kVA, 2 kVA, 8 kVA, 10 kVA, 15 kVA, and 20 kVA
models)
2) Maximum 8% at 100% load at 230 Vac (2.2 kVA 3 kVA, 5 kVA, and 6 kVA models)
4. UPS Output:
a. AC Nominal Output Voltage: Single Phase, 3-wire (Phase + N + G)
1) 220 Vac, 225 Vac, 230 Vac, or 240 Vac, user-selectable - 1 kVA and 2 kVA models
2) 200 Vac, 208 Vac, 220 Vac, 230 Vac or 240 Vac, user-selectable - 3 kVA to 10 kVA models
3) 220 Vac, 230 Vac or 240 Vac, user-selectable, Single Phase -15 kVA and 20 kVA models
b. Output Connectors:
1) (6) IEC 320 C13 (1 kVA and 2 kVA models)
2) (8) IEC 320 C13 and (2) IEC 320 C19 (2.2 kVA model and 3 kVA to 6 kVA models)
3) Hardwire 3 wire (Phase + N + G), (4) IEC 320 C13 and (4) IEC 320 C19
(8 kVA and10 kVA)
4) Hardwire 3 wire (Phase + N + G), (8 ) IEC 320 C19 or Hardwire 5 wire (3 Phase + N + G), (15 kVA
and 20 kVA models)
c. Output Frequency: 50/60 +/- 3 Hz tracking or 50/60 +/- 0.1 Hz tracking
(user-selectable).
d. AC output voltage distortion:
1) Maximum 3% @ 100% linear load; maximum 8% @ 100% non-linear (1 kVA and 2 kVA
models)
2) Maximum 2% @ 100% linear load; Maximum 5% @ 100% non-linear load (3 kVA to 20 kVA
models)
e. AC output static voltage regulation: +/-1%.
f. AC output dynamic voltage regulation: +/- 8% maximum for 100% load step at less than 10
ms recovery time
g. Overload Rating:
07/2016 edition p. 334
1) Normal Operation (Online):

a) 150% for 30 seconds
c) 105% continuous
2) Bypass Operation: Overload is limited by the upstream branch protection feeding the UPS.
a) Typically a 10 A 2-pole circuit breaker should be fitted at the input of the 1 kVA models.
b) Typically a 16 A 2-pole circuit breaker should be fitted at the input of the 2 kVA, 2.2 kVA,
and 3 kVA models.
c) Typically a 32 A 2-pole circuit breaker should be fitted at the input of the 5 kVA and 6 kVA
models.
d) For the 8k VA models, typically a 50 A 2-pole circuit breaker should be fitted at the input
with a single phase supply, and a 50 A 4-pole circuit breaker should be fitted at the input
with a three phase supply.
e) For the 10 kVA models, typically a 63 A 2-pole circuit breaker should be fitted at the input
with a single phase supply, and typically a 63 A 4-pole circuit breaker should be fitted at
the input with a three phase supply.
f) For the 15 kVA model, typically a 100 A circuit breaker should be fitted at the input for
each Phase plus Neutral with single phase input and output or with three phase input and
single phase output. Typically a 35 A or 40 A circuit breaker should be fitted at the input
for each Phase and Neutral with three phase input and three phase output.
g) For the 20 kVA model, typically a 125 A circuit breaker should be fitted at the input for
each Phase plus Neutral with single phase input and output or with three phase input and
single phase output. Typically a 50 A circuit breaker should be fitted at the input for each
Phase plus Neutral with three phase input and three phase output.
h. Output Power Factor Rating:
1) 0.2 –1.0 lagging
2) Nominal: 0.7 lagging.
i. Crest Factor: 3:1.
1.42 SUBMITTALS
A. Proposal Submittals:
1. As bid system bill of materials.
2. Product catalog sheets or equipment brochures.
3. Product guide specifications.
4. System single-line operation diagram.
5. Installation information, including weights and dimensions.
6. Information about terminal locations for power and control connections.
B. Delivery Submittals:
1. Installation manual, which includes instructions for storage, handling, examination, preparation,
installation, and start-up of UPS.
2. User manual, which includes operating instructions.
A. Environmental Requirements: Do not install the solid state UPS until space is enclosed and
weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those
indicated for final occupancy.
1. The UPS is capable of withstanding any combination of the following environmental conditions in
which it must operate without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating
characteristics.
a. Storage Ambient Temperature: -4F to 140F (-20C to 60C)..
b. Operating Ambient Temperature: 0C to 40C (32F to 104F). 25C (77F) is ideal for most
battery types.
c. Relative Humidity: 0% to 95% non-condensing.
d. Altitude:
1) Storage Altitude: 50,000 feet (15000 meters) above sea level
2) Operating Altitude: 10,000 feet (3000 meters) above sea level. At altitude of 10,000 feet the UPS
must be loaded only up to 90% of its nominal capacity.
e. Audible Noise: Less than 55 dBA at 3 feet (1 meter)
07/2016 edition p. 335
1.44 WARRANTY
A. Limited Warranty: American Power Conversion (APC) warrants the UPS to be free from defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of two years from the date of purchase,
1. Warranty Limitations:
a. The obligation of APC under this warranty is limited to repairing or replacing, at its own sole option, any
defective product.
b. This warranty does not apply to equipment that has been damaged by accident, negligence, or
misapplication or has been altered or modified in any way.
c. This warranty applies only to the original purchaser who must have properly registered the product
within 10 days of purchase.
d. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, AMERICAN POWER CONVERSION MAKES NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not permit
limitation or exclusion of implied warranties; therefore, the aforesaid limitation(s) or exclusion(s) may
not apply to the purchaser.
e. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL APC BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS PRODUCT, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Specifically, APC is not liable for any costs, such as lost profits or revenue, loss of equipment, loss of use
of equipment, loss of software, loss of data, costs of substitutes, claims by third parties, or otherwise.
f. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have other rights that vary from state to state.
2. Warranty Procedures:
a. To obtain service under warranty the purchaser must obtain a Returned Material Authorization (RMA)
number from customer support.
b. Products must be returned with transportation charges prepaid and must be accompanied by a brief
description of the problem encountered and proof of date and place of purchase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.30 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Products specified are Smart-UPS On-Line Uninterruptible Power Supplies as manufactured
by APC by Schneider Electric and as listed on page 2 of this specification. Items specified are to establish a
standard of quality for design, function, materials, and appearance. Equivalent products by other manufacturers
are acceptable. The Architect/Engineer will be the sole judge of the basis of what is equivalent.
A. Normal: The UPS output power stage (inverter) constantly recreates the UPS output voltage waveform by converting the
DC bus voltage to AC voltage through a set of IGBT switches. In both online operation and battery operation, the output
power stage (inverter) creates an output voltage waveform independent of the mains input voltage waveform. Input
voltage anomalies such as brown-outs, spikes, surges, sags, and outages do not affect the amplitude or sinusoidal nature of
the recreated output voltage sine wave of the output power stage (inverter). The input PFC power stage and the output
power stage (inverter) shall operate in an on-line manner to continuously regulate power to the critical load. The input
PFC stage shall be capable of full battery recharge while simultaneously providing regulated power to the load for all line
and load conditions within the range of the UPS specifications.
1. Overload Capability: The output power stage (inverter) is capable of withstanding 150% overload for 30 seconds
or 125% overload for 1 minute or 105% overload for an indefinite length of time.
2. Output Contactor: The output power stage (inverter) is equipped with an output mechanical relay to provide
physical isolation of the inverter from the critical bus. With this feature a failed inverter will be removed from the
critical bus.
3. Battery Protection: The inverter is provided with monitoring and control circuits to limit the level of discharge on
the battery system.
B. Battery: Upon failure of the AC input source, the critical load continues being supplied by the output inverter, which
derives its power from the battery system. There is no interruption in power to the critical load during both transfers to
battery operation and retransfers from battery to normal operation.
07/2016 edition p. 336
1. The UPS battery system is comprised of battery modules. Replacement batteries are user-replaceable, hot-swappable
battery cartridges. For 8 kVA, 10 kVA, 15 kVA, and 20 kVA models, a minimum of two battery cartridges must be
installed, one providing 192 VDC nominal for the positive DC bus rail, the other providing 192 VDC nominal for the
negative DC bus rail. Each cartridge consists of two 96 VDC battery modules in series.
2. The batteries of the UPS models in this specification are maintenance-free, leak-proof, valve-regulated lead-acid
(VRLA) batteries with suspended electrolyte.
3. The UPS incorporates the Intelligent Battery Management system to continuously monitor the health of each
removable battery module as well as external battery packs installed in extended run battery cabinets. This system
notifies the user in the event that a failed or weak battery module is found.
4. Additional battery packs may be added to increase runtime. The battery packs and the battery modules within them
are hot-pluggable, allowing for easy and quick installation or replacement without the need for electrical wiring,
electrician services or powering down of the UPS. The maximum number of external battery packs that may be
connected to the UPS is 10 for all units except the 15 kVA and 20kVA units which are limited to 9.
5. The UPS is shipped with battery modules preinstalled but disconnected.
C. Charging: Upon restoration of the AC input source, the UPS simultaneously recharges the battery and provides
regulated power to the critical load.
1. The intelligent battery management system contains a temperature monitoring circuit and compensation algorithm
that regulates the battery charging current and voltage so as to optimize battery life.
2. The battery charging circuit remains active when in bypass and online states.
D. Bypass: The system automatic bypass provides a transfer of the critical load from the Inverter output to the
automatic bypass input source during times when the inverter cannot support the load. Such times may be due to
prolonged or severe overloads or to UPS failure. The UPS constantly monitors the output current as well as the
bypass source voltage and inhibits potentially unsuccessful transfers to automatic bypass from taking place. The
design of the automatic bypass switch power path consists of a bypass relay for 1 kVA to 6 kVA models, a heavy-
duty electromechanical bypass contactor for 8 kVA and 10 kVA models, and a static switch for 15 kVA and 20
kVA models. For models of 2.2 kVA through10 kVA, a system bypass switch is provided on the rear of the UPS.
1. Automatic Transfers: An automatic transfer of load to bypass takes place whenever the load on the critical
bus exceeds the overload rating of the UPS. Automatic transfers of the critical load from bypass back to
normal operation takes place when the overload condition is removed from the critical bus output of the
system. Automatic transfers of load to bypass also take place if for any reason the UPS cannot support the
critical bus.
2. Manual Transfers: Manually initiated transfers to and from bypass may be initiated for models 2.2 kVA
through 10 kVA by engaging the bypass switch on the rear panel of the unit, or for the 15 kVA and 20 kVA
models via the front panel user display.
2.32 INPUT PFC POWER STAGE
A. General: The input PFC power stage of the UPS constantly rectifies the power imported from the mains input of
the system, converting input mains AC power to DC power for precise regulation of the DC bus voltage, battery
charging, and output power stage (inverter) regulated output power.
B. Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion: The input current THDI will be held to 8% or less for 1 kVA and 2 kVA
models and 6% or less for all other models at full system load, while providing conditioned power to the critical
load bus and charging the batteries under steady-state operating conditions. This is true while the UPS is
supporting loads of either a linear or non-linear type. This will be accomplished with no additional filters, magnetic
devices, or other components.
C. Input Current Limit:

1. The input converter controls and limits the input current draw from utility to 150% of the UPS output. During
conditions where input current limit is active, the UPS is able to support 100% load, charge batteries at 10% of the
UPS output rating, and provide voltage regulation with mains deviation of up to +/-20% of the nominal input
voltage.
2. In cases where the source voltage to the UPS is nominal and the applied UPS load is equal to or less than 100% of
UPS capacity, input current will not exceed 130% of UPS output current, while providing full battery recharge
power and importing necessary power for system losses.
D. Charging:
1. The battery charging circuit shall contain a temperature compensation circuit, which shall regulate the
battery charging to optimize battery life.
2. The battery charging circuit shall remain active when in bypass and in normal operation.
07/2016 edition p. 337
2.33 OUTPUT POWER STAGE (INVERTER)
A. General: The UPS output power stage (inverter) constantly recreates the UPS output voltage waveform by
converting the DC bus voltage to AC voltage through a set of IGBT driven power converters. In both normal
operation and battery operation, the output power stage (inverter) creates an output voltage independent of the
mains input voltage. Input voltage anomalies such as brown-outs, spikes, surges, sags, and outages, shall not
affect the amplitude or sinusoidal nature of the recreated output voltage sine wave of the output power stage
(inverter).
B. Overload Capability: The output power stage (inverter) is capable of withstanding 150% overload for 30 seconds or
125% overload for 1 minute or 105% overload for indefinite length of time.
C. Output Contactor: The output power stage (inverter) is equipped with an output mechanical contactor to provide
physical isolation of the inverter from the critical bus. With this feature a failed inverter will be removed from the
critical bus.
D. Battery Protection: The inverter is provided with monitoring and control circuits to limit the level of discharge on
the battery system.
2.34 DISPLAY AND CONTROLS
A. Control Logic: The UPS is controlled by an embedded microcontroller which performs the following functions:
1. Monitoring the quality of the output voltage
2. Monitoring vital parameters of the UPS
3. Executing the state machine
4. Intelligent battery management
5. Remaining runtime calculation
6. Self-diagnostics, self-test, and proactive fault detection
7. Communication to the host server via a serial port
8. Communication to the Network Management Card or another SmartSlot accessory card, if the UPS is
equipped with such a card
B. Display/Control Unit: Located on the front of the UPS is a display/control unit comprised of 16 LEDs and 2
pushbutton switches (for 1 kVA to 10 kVA models) or an LCD display (for 15 kVA and 20 kVA models).
1. Orientation: The display/control unit may be turned 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise to
accommodate the mounting orientation of the UPS as a tower UPS or as a rack-mounted UPS.
2. Control Functions: The following controls functions can be accomplished by use of the pushbutton
switches or LCD display.
a. Turn the UPS on
b. Turn the UPS off
c. Initiate a self-test to test the battery condition
d. Silence an audible alarm
e. Cold-start the UPS.
f. Display the input RMS voltage.
C. Data displayed on the Display/Control Unit: The following indicators are available on the Display/Control
Unit (1000 VA to 10,000 VA models):
1. The UPS load LED bar
2. The UPS is online
3. The UPS is on battery
4. The UPS is in bypass
5. The UPS is overloaded
6. The UPS is in fault state
7. The battery needs to be replaced
8. The battery capacity/utility voltage LED bar
D. Bypass switch: On the rear panel of the UPS (models rated 2.2 kVA to 10 kVA) there is a switch that, when
engaged, forces the UPS into bypass state if the input voltage and frequency are within acceptable limits. For
the 15 kVA and 20 kVA units the bypass can be engaged through the user interface display at the front of the
unit. All units, 1 kVA to 20 kVA, can be put into manual bypass via software control.
07/2016 edition p. 338
E. EPO switch: All UPS models documented in this specification, except the 1 kVA and 2 kVA models, are
equipped with an Emergency Power Off (EPO) terminal that can be wired so as to provide the means to
instantaneously de-energize the UPS and its load from a remote location in case of emergency.
F. Audible Alarms: Using audio signal, the UPS will notify the user about important events. The following is the
list of distinct audio alarms:
2. The UPS is on battery and the remaining battery capacity is low
3. The UPS has shut down due to low battery capacity
5. The UPS is overloaded
6. The UPS is in fault state
G. Potential Free (Dry) Contacts: The following potential free contacts are available on an optional APC
SmartSlot Relay I/O Card (Not available on 2.2 kVA, 3 kVA ,and 5 kVA units):
2. The UPS is on battery and the remaining battery capacity is low
3. The UPS is off
5. The UPS is in bypass
6. The UPS is overloaded;
7. The UPS is in fault state.
H. Communication Interface: For purposes of remote communications with the UPS the following are available
and contained within the UPS:
1. All models have a serial port to allow communications with a host computer to gracefully shut down one or
more operating systems. All models can also accommodate a Network Management Card, which allows
communications over a network via web browser or SNMP or with APC StruxureWareTM management
software.
2. All models 5 kVA and higher have a pre-installed Network Management Card 2 with Environmental
Monitoring (AP9631)
2.35 BATTERY
A. The UPS battery is of modular construction made up of owner-replaceable, hot swappable, fused, battery
modules. Each battery module is monitored to determine the highest battery unit temperature for use by the UPS
battery diagnostic, and temperature compensated charger circuitry.
B. The batteries are of the valve regulated lead acid (VRLA) type.
2.36 ACCESSORIES
A. Service Bypass Panel (SBP): The service bypass panel provides power to the critical load from the bypass
source, during times where maintenance or service of the UPS is required. The SBP provides a mechanical
means of complete isolation of the UPS from the electrical wiring of the installation. The SBP is constructed in a
free-standing, rack mounted or wall-mounted enclosure unless otherwise stated in this specification.
B. Software and Connectivity:

1. Network Management Card: The Network Management Card allows one or more network management
systems (NMSs) to monitor and manage the UPS in TCP/IP network environments. Models of 5 kVA and
higher are equipped with a SmartSlot Network Management Card 2 with Environmental Monitoring (AP9631) as
standard (pre-installed), which is available as an option on the 1 kVA to 3 kVA units.
2. Unattended Shutdown: The UPS, in conjunction with a network interface card, is capable of gracefully
shutting down one or more operating systems during the time when the UPS is in on-battery mode. The
UPS is also capable of using an RS-232 port to communicate with the host computer by means of serial
communications to gracefully shut down one or more operating systems during an on-battery situation. The
TM TM
PowerChute Business Edition software is provided with 1 kVA to 3 kVA models, and PowerChute
Network Shutdown software is provided with 5 kVA to 20 kVA models for use with the Network Management
Card.
C. Remote UPS Monitoring: The following three methods of remote UPS monitoring are available:
07/2016 edition p. 339
1. Web Monitoring: Remote monitoring is available via a web browser such as Internet Explorer.
2. Dry Contact Monitoring and Control: The UPS must be equipped with the APC SmartSlot Relay I/O Card to
implement this type of monitoring. This card is not compatible with following models (all SURTD models):
a. Tower models: APC Smart-UPS RT 3000 VA 230 V (SURTD3000XLI), APC Smart-UPS RT 5000 VA
230 V (SURTD5000XLI), and APC Smart-UPS RT 5000 VA 230 V with Pre-installed Input/Output
Hardwire Kit (SURTD5000XLI-ET)
b. Rack-Mount models: APC Smart-UPS RT 2200 VA 230 V – Marine SURTD2200XLIM), APC Smart-
UPS RT 3000 VA RM 230 V (SURTD3000RMXLI), APC Smart-UPS RT 3000 VA 230 V – Marine
(SURTD3000XLIM), and APC Smart-UPS RT 5000 VA RM 230 V (SURTD5000RMXLI)
D. Software Compatibility:
1. PowerChuteTM Business Edition Basic (5-node) Software (PCBE): This software is included with the 1 kVA to
3 kVA models. It supports graceful shutdown and remote monitoring for the following systems. (For more detailed
information on Operating System compatibility, see http://www.apcmedia.com/salestools/ASTE-
6Z5QEV_R32_EN.pdf.)
a. Microsoft Windows® Server 2011
b. Microsoft Windows® Server 2008
c. Microsoft Windows® Server 2003
d. Microsoft Windows® Storage Server 2008
e. Microsoft Windows HPC Server 2008
f. Microsoft Windows® 7
g. Microsoft Windows® Vista
h. Microsoft Windows® XP
i. Red Hat® Enterprise Linux®
j. SuSE® Linux®.Enterprise Server 11
TM
k. Solaris 10
2. PowerChute Network Shutdown: This software is provided with the pre-installed Network Management
Card 2 with Environmental Monitoring (AP9631) for models of 5 kVA and higher. It is compatible with the
following operating systems.
a. IBM® AIX
b. HP/UX
c. Linux
d. Mac OS X
e. Novell NetWare
f. Solaris
g. Windows® 2003
h. Windows® 2008
i. Windows® 7
j. Windows® Vista
k. Windows® XP
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.36 FACTORY-ASSISTED STARTUP

If a factory-assisted UPS start-up is requested, factory-trained service personnel will perform the following
inspections, test procedures, and on-site training.
2. Verify installation per manufacturer s instructions.
3. Inspect battery modules.
1. Check all UPS and external service bypass panel internal power wiring connections.
2. Check all UPS and external service bypass panel terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs for tightness.
3. Verify voltage of all battery modules.
4. Verify that neutral and ground conductors are properly landed.
5. Inspect external service bypass panel for proper terminations.
07/2016 edition p. 340
D. Site Testing:
4. Verify proper bypass switch operation (where applicable).
E. On-Site Operational Training: During the factory assisted start-up, operational training for site personnel
includes key pad operation, LED indicators, start-up and shutdown procedures, maintenance bypass and AC
A. Manufacturer Field Service:

1. Worldwide Service: The UPS manufacturer has a worldwide service organization available, consisting of
factory-trained field service personnel to perform startup, preventive maintenance, and service of the UPS system
and power equipment. The service organization offers service support 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a
year.
2. Replacement Parts: Parts are available through the worldwide service organization 24 hours a day, 7 days a week,
365 days a year. The worldwide service organization is capable of shipping parts within four working hours or on the
next available flight, so that the parts may be delivered to the customer site within 24 hours.
3.6 MAINTENANCE
system are available from APC by Schneider Electric. Contract work is performed by Schneider Electric factory-
END OF GUIDE SPECIFICATION
07/2016 edition p. 341

Smart UPS VT
3/3 Phase 10/15/20/30/40 kVA
07/2016 edition p. 342

Smart UPS VT 3:1 or 3:3 – 10 to 40 kVA
Single UPS
Smart-UPS VT
Guide Specification
3400/230V Solutions
Part 7 GENERAL
7.1. SUMMARY
A. This specification describes a three-phase, on-line, continuous operation, solid-state uninterruptible power
supply (UPS). The UPS shall operate as an active power control system, working in conjunction with the
building electrical system to provide power conditioning and on-line power protection for the critical loads.
7.2. DESCRIPTION
ii. Normal: The inverter and the rectifier shall operate in an on-line manner to continuously regulate the
iii. Battery: Upon failure of the AC input source, the critical load shall continue being supplied by the main
inverter without any switching. The inverter shall obtain its power from the battery. There shall be no
interruption in power to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the AC input source.
iv. Recharge: Upon restoration of the AC input source, the UPS shall simultaneously recharge the battery and
regulate the power to the critical load.
v. Bypass: The static bypass switch shall be used for transferring the critical load to input supply without
interruption. Automatic re-transfer to normal operation shall also be accomplished with no interruption in
power to the critical load. The static bypass switch shall be fully rated and shall be capable of manual
operation.
The UPS shall be able to recharge the batteries while supplying full power to the load via the static bypass
switch.
vi. Internal maintenance bypass: The UPS shall be provided with an internal manual bypass to simplify the
installation and shall be used for supplying the load directly from the mains supply, while the UPS is taken
out for maintenance.
E. The UPS shall have nominal voltage of 3400/230V (adjustable for 3380/220V, 3415/240V), 50Hz,
L1,L2,L3,N,PE or L1,L2,L3,PEN.
F. The UPS shall be compatible with all types of data centers, data rooms and facilities. Dedicated service to one
7.3. STANDARDS
A. Directives for CE marking 89/336/EDC

73/237EEC
B. Safety EN/IEC62040-1-1
C. Emissions EN50091-2 / IEC62040-2
07/2016 edition p. 343

Single UPS
D. Performance EN/IEC62040-3
E. Electro Static Discharge EN/IEC 61000-4-2 level 3, performance criteria A
F. Continuous Electromagnetic Susceptibility EN/IEC 61000-4-3 level 2, performance criteria A
G. Electrical Fast Transient Compatibility EN/IEC 61000-4-4 level 2, performance criteria A
H. AC Surge Susceptibility EN/IEC 61000-4-5 Level 3 criteria A
7.4. CLASSIFICATION
7.5. SUBMITTALS
xiii. Bid system bill of materials

xiv. Product catalogue sheets or equipment brochures
xv. Product guide specifications
xvi. System single-line operation diagram
xvii. Floor layout
xviii. Capacity data
xix. Installation guide
xx. Drawings for requested optional accessories
vii. Installation manual, which includes instructions for storage, handling, examination, preparation,
installation, and start-up of all systems.
viii. User manual, which includes operating instructions.
ix. As built equipment drawings.
x. InfraStruXure Welcome Package.
7.6. QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer experience: The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 20 years experience in the design,
manufacture, and testing of UPS and cooling systems.
B. ISO 9001 Certification: The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 & 14001 certified. Certification assures that the
vendor’s quality control & environmental measures have been certified by an accredited registrar and meet
internationally recognized standards.
7.7. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Storage ambient temperature: –50°C to 40°C
B. Operating ambient temperature: 0°C to 40°C. 15°C to 25°C is ideal for batteries (above the battery lifetime is
reduced).
C. Relative humidity: 0 to 95%, non-condensing.
D. Storage elevation: 0 to 15000m.
E. Operating altitude with no de-rating: 0 to 1000m feet above sea level.
7.8. MANUFACTURER
A. Provide American Power Conversion: APC Smart-UPS VT system. No substitutes will be considered.
OR
v. American Power Conversion: APC Smart-UPS VT or approved equal. However, if a brand other than
APC is proposed, the decision of the Engineer shall be final and a “differentiation report” must be
submitted. This report shall address each paragraph of the specification individually and list any and all
07/2016 edition p. 344
Single UPS
differences from what is specified. If there are no differences, provide a report so stating. If, after
installation, omitted differences are found, the Contractor shall correct differences to the satisfaction of the
Owner and Engineer or unsatisfactory equipment shall be removed and equipment acceptable to the
Owner and Engineer shall be installed at no additional cost to the project.
Part 8 PRODUCT
2.3. STATIC UPS
A. GENERAL
vii. The UPS shall be housed in a free standing enclosure. The enclosure shall be designed to blend into an IT
environment. The cabinet shall be equipped for fork truck lifting. The UPS cabinet shall be painted with
the manufacturer’s standard color, black. All service and installation access shall be from the front and top
viii. The UPS shall be in a self contained cabinet and comprise 30kVA/24kW or 40kVA/32kW power section;
Bypass Static Switch; Battery for standard run time and interface LCD display all mounted in a separate
cabinet. The UPS shall permit user installable and removable battery units.
The power section shall be of the Double Conversion On-Line topology with power factor corrected
inputs.
ix. The UPS shall have a short circuit withstand capability of 30kA
B. SYSTEM INPUT
xxxii. Nominal Input voltage rating: 3×400/230V (adjustable for 3×380/220V or 3×415/240V)
xxxiii. Input Voltage range: 304-477V
xxxiv. Earthing principle: [TN-S] [TN-C-S] [TN-C] [TT] or [IT].
xxxv. Input frequency: 40-70 Hz (auto sensing)
xxxvi. Input power factor: 0.98
xxxvii. Magnetizing inrush current: NONE, if optional input isolating transformer is installed then 500% of
nominal input current for less than one cycle
xxxviii. Input current distortion with no additional filters:
xxxix. < 5% THD at 100% load
xl. Power walk-in/Soft-Start: Shall be linear from 0 to 100% of the load over a 15-second period
C. SYSTEM OUTPUT
xxiii. Nominal Output voltage rating: 3×400/230V.

xxiv. Earthing principle: [TN-S] [TN-C-S] [TN-C] [TT] or [IT].
xxv. Output voltage regulation for steady state and transient variations (at default parameter settings):
xxvi. Max. voltage transient recovery time: 50 milliseconds to nominal.
xxvii. Output frequency regulation:
5. Synchronized to mains over the range of 47-53Hz or 57-63Hz in normal operation
6. 50 Hz ± 0.1 Hz in battery operation.
xxviii. Output voltage harmonic distortion:
5. <2% THD maximum and 1% single harmonic for a 100% linear load
6. <5% THD maximum for a 100% non-linear load
xxix. Overload capability:
7. 150% for 30 seconds in normal operation.
8. 110% continuous in bypass operation
9. 800% for 500 milliseconds in bypass operation
xxx. Phase displacement:
1. 20 degrees ± 1 degree for balanced load.
2. 20 degrees ± 1 degree for 50% unbalanced load.
3. 20 degrees ± 3 degrees for 100% unbalanced load.
xxxi. Output Power Factor Rating: For loads exhibiting a power factor of 0.5 leading to 0.5 lagging, no de-rating
of the UPS shall be required.
07/2016 edition p. 345

Single UPS
xxxii. Short circuit withstand: The UPS must withstand a bolted-fault short circuit on the output without damage
to the UPS module.
xxxiii. System AC-to-AC efficiency 100% load
10. 30kVA 94.6%
11. 40kVA 96.0%
xxxiv. System AC-to-AC efficiency 50% load
10. 30kVA 94.6%
11. 40kVA 96.5%
xxxv. Acoustical noise: dB(A) of noise, typically, measured at 1 meter from the operator surface:
10. 30kVA 58@70% load
11. 40kVA 58@70% load
D. COMPONENTS
ix. Rectifier
27. Each UPS power module shall include an active power factor corrected, Insulated Gated Bipolar
Transistor (IGBT) rectifier.
28. DC buss voltage shall be ±192Vdc nominal.
29. The battery charging shall keep the DC bus float voltage of +/- 220v, +/-1%
30. The DC buss voltage shall be compensated against temperature variations (Battery Temperature
Compensation) to always maintain optimal battery float charging voltage for temperature excursions
above or below 25°C. Temperature compensation rate shall be 320mV/°C for ambient temperatures >
20°C and 0mV/°C for ambient temperatures < 20°C.
32. Input power factor shall be 0.98 lagging at 100% load with out the use of passive filters. Rectifier
shall employ electronic waveform control technology to maintain the current sinusoidal.
33. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) current control shall be used. Digital Signal Processors (DSP) shall
be used for all monitoring and control tasks. Analog control is not acceptable.
35. Input voltage window: 304-477V.
36. Typical battery charge time per IEEE 485.
x. Batteries
16. Batteries shall be housed in the same rack as the power section. Batteries shall be modular on pull out
17. Battery voltage shall be Battery Temperature Compensated as outlined in the rectifier section above.
18. End of discharge: ±160Vdc.
20. Battery Charge Current Limit: The UPS shall be capable of limiting the energy sourced from the
mains for purposes of battery charging. As a default setting, the battery charge energy will be set to
100% of its nominal value. When signaled by a dry contact, (such as from an emergency generator)
the UPS shall be capable of limiting the battery charge energy taken from the mains. This shall take
place in user selectable increments of 75%, 50%, 25%, 10% and 0% of the nominal charge power.
The selection shall be made from the UPS front panel display/control unit.
21. The battery charging circuit shall remain active when in Static Bypass and in Normal Operation.
xi. Inverter
22. Nominal output voltage shall be 3×400/230V and adjustable for 3×380/220V or 3×415/240V, 50Hz,
L1,L2,L3,N,PE.
53. 30kVA 94.5%
54. 40kVA 94.8%
57. Static: Less than 1% at full linear load.
58. Dynamic: 5% at 100% step load.
26. Output frequency: 50Hz free running.
07/2016 edition p. 346
Single UPS

 Remote Emergency Power Off (EPO) shall be standard (wall switch and
wiring shall be provided by the electrical contractor).
xii. Static Bypass Switch
9. The static switch shall consist of fully rated Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCRs). Part rated SCRs
with a wrap around contactor are not acceptable.
10. The static bypass switch shall automatically transfer the critical load to bypass input supply without
interruption after the logic senses one of the following conditions:
63. After an instantaneous overload-induced transfer has occurred and the load
current has returned to less than 100% of the system rating.
back to inverter.
E. MECHANICAL
iii. SUVT
1. The UPS power section, Static Bypass Switch, internal manual bypass switch and the VRLA batteries
shall be housed in a free standing enclosure in a matching black color having the following
specifications:
 Color finish. Black
 Dead front construction
 Caster fitted for mobility. Leveling feet shall be supplied as standard.
 The cable entry shall be from the bottom on the back of the UPS.
 The SUVT UPS enclosure shall meet an ingress level of min. IP20.
F. DISPLAY, CONTROLS AND ALARMS
xiii. A microprocessor controlled display unit shall be located on the front of the system. The display shall
switches.
xiv. The following metered data, shall be available on the alphanumeric display:
15. Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second of occurring events
16. Input AC Voltage
19. Input Frequency
20. Battery voltage
21. Highest Internal Battery temperature
xv. The display unit shall allow the user to display an event log of all active alarms and of the 64 most recent
117. Static bypass switch on
118. EPO Active
119. Mechanical bypass activated
120. External bypass switch (Q3) activated
121. Battery discharged
122. Return from low battery
123. Low battery
124. Load not powered from UPS
125. UPS in bypass
126. Runtime calibration aborted
127. Runtime calibration started
128. Runtime calibration complete
07/2016 edition p. 347
Single UPS
129. Battery self test aborted

130. Battery self test started
131. Battery self test completed
132. Number of battery modules decreased
133. Number of battery modules increased
134. Fan fault
135. SBS fault
136. System not in sync.
137. Bypass not available, frequency/voltage out of range
138. Mains voltage/frequency out of range
139. Site wiring fault
140. Low battery voltage shut down
141. XR battery breaker or fuse open
142. Defective battery detected
143. Runtime is below alarm threshold
144. Load is above alarm threshold
145. Battery over-voltage warning
146. Battery over-temperature warning
147. Emergency power supply fault
148. Output overloaded
157. Adjust set points for different alarms
158. Program the parameters for remote shutdown.
xvi. The following shall make up the UPS front panel user interface.
65. Load On When Green, this LED indicates the load is being supported by the UPS
output
66. On Battery When Yellow, this LED indicates the UPS is running from Battery power
67. Bypass When Yellow, this LED indicates the load is being supported by static
68. Fault When Red, this LED indicates there is a fault condition present in the UPS.
69. Up Arrow
70. Down Arrow
71. Help Key
72. Escape Key
73. Enter Key
xvii. Potential Free (Dry) Contacts
74. Normal Operation
75. Battery Operation
76. Bypass Operation
77. Common Fault
78. Low Battery
79. UPS Off
xviii. For purposes of remote communications with the UPS the following shall be available and contained
within the UPS on a removable, “hot swappable” “smart slot” interface card:
7. RJ-45 Interface port for remote communications with a network via web browser or SNMP, or APC
InfraStruXure Manager.
8. Environmental monitoring feature, capable of locally monitoring temperature and humidity as well as
one additional generic set of user determined dry contacts capable of taking an input signal from any
APC or third party on/off signal, such as water detection, smoke detection, motion, or fire detection.
07/2016 edition p. 348

Single UPS
G. BATTERY
ii. The UPS battery shall be of modular construction made up of user replaceable, hot swappable, fused,
battery modules. Each battery module shall be monitored to determine the highest battery unit temperature
for use by the UPS battery diagnostic, and temperature compensated charger circuitry.
iii. The battery blocks housed within each removable battery module shall be of the Valve Regulated Lead
Acid (VRLA) type.
Part 2 ACCESSORIES
2.1. EXTENDED RUNTIME (XR) OPTION
A. For purposes of extending the UPS battery runtime, external extended runtime options shall be available. The
extended runtime option shall be housed in “line up and match” type enclosures and shall contain necessary
hardware and cables to connect to the UPS, or between XR enclosures. Each XR enclosure shall be equipped
with removable, hot swappable, battery units housed in draw-out cartridges.
B. The extended runtime system shall have a 250 VDC rated, thermal magnetic trip molded case circuit breaker.
Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with shunt trip mechanisms and 1A/1B auxiliary contacts. The circuit
breakers are to be equipped as part of a line-up-and-match type battery enclosure.
2.2. RACK MOUNT POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
A. For purposes of distributing power within an IT enclosure, rack mount power distribution
units shall be available. The rack mount power distribution units shall be capable of being
installed in the back of the accompanying enclosure.
B. Output Connections - The output of the Rack Mount PDU shall be fed from 3×400/230V,
L1,L2,L3,N,PE., and shall be distributed to receptacles capable of supplying power to cord
connected equipment.
2.3. RACK MOUNT TRANSFER SWITCHED
A. For purposes of providing redundancy (to single corded loads) as far as the equipment rack,
and the load itself, 1U rack mount transfer switches shall be available. Rack mount transfer
switches shall be capable of switching a combination of single-phase and three-phase loads
up to 3.7kW. The Rack Mount Transfer Switch shall be designed to be fed from a 1 pole
16A circuit breaker via a IEC 309 receptacle or cord cap.
2.4. OVERHEAD DISTRIBUTION
A. Flexible Distribution Conductors - For purposes of overhead distribution wiring of data

center branch circuits from the output distribution panel, flexible conductors of either an
SJO type, or TC type shall be available as a distribution means. Flexible conductors shall be
equipped with NEMA or IEC style cord caps and shall be agency approved under
EN/IEC60950-1 as part of the InfraStruxureTM system.
B. Cable Ladder - For purposes of routing data and power cables between rows in a data center
aisle layout, cable ladders shall be available to span the gap between rows. Cable ladders
shall be agency approved under EN/IEC60950-1 as part of the InfraStruXureTM system.
The use of over head cable management shall minimize the need to run data and power
cable beneath a raised floor, thus minimizing potential air flow obstructions for down-flow
type precision cooling solutions. This means of cable management shall also facilitate ease
of installation of power and data cabling in data centers not utilizing raised floor. Optional
covers shall be available for ladders as a means of adhering to local codes requiring such.
07/2016 edition p. 349

Single UPS
C. Cable Trough - For purposes of routing data and power cable along the length of a row of
IT enclosures in a data center environment, cable troughs shall be available as a means of
separating and housing data and power cable. Optional covers shall be available for troughs
as a means of adhering to local codes requiring such. The use of over head cable
management shall minimize the need to run data and power cable beneath a raised floor,
thus minimizing potential air flow obstructions for down-flow type precision cooling
solutions. This means of cable management shall also facilitate ease of installation of power
and data cabling in data centers not utilizing raised floor.
2.5. INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY (IT) ENCLOSURE
A. IT enclosures shall be available for housing of customer supplied IT equipment. Enclosures

shall be listed under the same EN/IEC60950-1 agency approval as other products outlined
within this specification.
2.6. General Requirements
A. The Enclosure shall be designed to provide a secure, managed environment for computer
and networking equipment.
B. The Enclosure shall conform to EIA-310 Standard for Cabinets, Racks, Panel and
Associated Equipment and accommodate industry standard 19” rack mount equipment.
C. The Enclosure shall be designed with four (4) vertical posts to allow rack mount equipment
installation utilizing four (4) vertical mounting rails.
D. The Enclosure shall be available with a vertical equipment mounting space of 25U, 42U or
47U. (1U=1.75” or 44.45mm)
E. A four-post open frame configuration shall be available with 42U vertical equipment
mounting space.
2.7. Physical Requirements
A. External Width Dimensions shall be 597mm (23.5”) for 19” rack enclosures, and 747mm
(29.4”) for 23” rack enclosure.
B. External Depth Dimensions shall be 900mm (35.4”) or 1070mm (42.2”)
C. Rack enclosures of a 42U design shall have a maximum external height of 2070mm (81.5”)
to allow passage through a standard 7ft. (84”) doorway without tipping.
D. Rack enclosure shall support a dynamic load (rolling on castors) of 909kG (2000 lbs.) total
weight.
E. Rack enclosure shall also be designed and manufactured to be matching in both color and
construction to the UPS, PDU/System bypass and extended runtime battery enclosures to
provide a uniform and consistent appearance in a data center environment.
2.8. Equipment Access and Mounting
A. The enclosure shall provide [25U] [42U] [47U] of equipment vertical mounting space.
B. The vertical mounting rails shall be adjustable to allow different mounting depths.
07/2016 edition p. 350
Single UPS
C. Front and rear doors of the enclosure shall be designed with quick release hinges allowing
for easy detachment without the use of tools.
2.9. FLOOR ANCHOR BRACKETS
A. Floor Anchor brackets shall be available to solidly connect UPS and Battery Enclosure to
minimize unintended moving of the equipment.
2.10. SEISMIC FLOOR STANDS
A. Seismic rated floor stands shall be available to take the place of supporting the system on a raised
floor environment. Floor Stands shall be available in custom heights to maintain a flush mount
installation adjacent to the raised floor, and shall be designed in accordance to the equipment weight
and contact points.
2.11. SOFTWARE AND CONNECTIVITY
A. The Ethernet Web/SNMP Adaptor shall allow one or more network management systems (NMS) to monitor
and manage the UPS in TCP/IP network environments. The management information base (MIB) shall be
provided in DOS and UNIX "tar" formats. The SNMP interface adaptor shall be connected to the UPS via the
RS232 serial port on the standard communication interface board.
B. Unattended Shutdown
C. The UPS, in conjunction with a network interface card, shall be capable of gracefully shutting down one or
D. The UPS shall also be capable of using an RS232 port to communicate by means of serial communications to
gracefully shut down one or more operating systems during an on battery situation.
2.12. REMOTE UPS MONITORING
i. The following three methods of remote UPS monitoring shall be available:

ii. Web Monitoring: Remote monitoring shall be available via a web browser such as Internet Explorer.
iii. RS232 Monitoring: Remote UPS monitoring shall be possible via either RS232 or contact closure signals
from the UPS.
iv. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP): Remote UPS Monitoring shall be possible through a
N. SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY
i. The UPS manufacturer shall have available software to support graceful shutdown and or remote monitoring
for the following systems:
ii. a. Microsoft Windows 95/98/XP
iii. b. Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 SP6/2000
iv. c. OS/2
v. d. Netware 3.2 – 5.1
vi. e. MAC OS 9.04, 9.22, 10
vii. g. Digital Unix/True 64
viii. h. SGI 6.0-6.5
ix. j. SCO UNIX
x. k. SVR4 2.3, 2.41
xi. m. SCO Unix Ware 7.0 - 7.11
xii. n. SUN Solaris 2.6-2.8
xiii. o. SUN OS 4.13, 4.14
xiv. p. IBM AIX 4.3x-4.33g, 5.1
xv. q. HP-UX 9.x-11.i
Part 9 EXECUTION
FACTORY ASSISTED START-UP
07/2016 edition p. 351

Single UPS
If a factory assisted UPS start-up is requested, factory trained service personnel shall perform the following
inspections, test procedures, and on-site training:
i. Visual Inspection:

4. Inspect Battery Units.
5. Inspect Power Module(s).
ii. Mechanical Inspection:
1. Check all UPS and external maintenance bypass cabinet internal power wiring connections.
2. Check all UPS and external maintenance bypass cabinet terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs
for tightness.
iii. Electrical Inspection:

6. Inspect external maintenance bypass switch for proper terminations and phasing.
iv. Site Testing:

v. On-Site Operational Training: During the factory assisted start-up, operational training for site
personnel shall include key pad operation, LED indicators, start-up and shutdown procedures,
maintenance bypass and AC disconnect operation, and alarm information.
4.2 MANUFACTURER FIELD SERVICE
A. Worldwide service: The UPS manufacturer shall have a worldwide service organization available, consisting of
factory trained field service personnel to perform start-up, preventative maintenance, and service of the UPS system
and power equipment. The service organization shall offer 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year service
support.
B. Replacement parts: Parts shall be available through the worldwide service organization 24 hours a
day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year. The worldwide service organization shall be capable of
shipping parts within 4 working hours or on the next available flight, so that the parts may be
delivered to the customer site within 24 hours.
4.3 MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS

07/2016 edition p. 352
Single UPS
A complete offering of preventative and full service maintenance contracts for the UPS system and the battery
system shall be available. All contract work shall be performed by APC factory trained service personnel.
4.4 TRAINING
manufacturer. The service training workshop shall include a combination of lecture and practical instruction
with hands-on laboratory sessions. The service training workshop shall include instruction about safety
procedures, UPS operational theory, sub-assembly identification and operation, system controls and
adjustment, preventative maintenance, and troubleshooting.
07/2016 edition p. 353

Parallel UPS
Smart-UPS VT, w/Parallel Operation

Guide Specification for
10kVA to 40kVA
3400/400-230V Solutions
Uninterrupted Power Supply
Part 10 GENERAL
10.1. SUMMARY
A. This specification describes a three-phase, on-line, continuous operation, solid-state uninterruptible power
supply (UPS) with the option to run in parallel with identical units. The UPS shall operate as an active power
control system, working in conjunction with the building electrical system to provide power conditioning and
on-line power protection for the critical loads.
10.2. DESCRIPTION
vii. Normal: The inverter and the rectifier shall operate in an on-line manner to continuously regulate the
viii. Battery: Upon failure of the AC input source, the critical load shall continue being supplied by the main
inverter without any switching. The inverter shall obtain its power from the battery. There shall be no
interruption in power to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the AC input source.
ix. Recharge: Upon restoration of the AC input source, the UPS shall simultaneously recharge the battery and
regulate the power to the critical load.
x. Static Bypass: The static bypass switch shall be used for transferring the critical load to input supply
without interruption. Automatic re-transfer to normal operation shall also be accomplished with no
interruption in power to the critical load. The static bypass switch shall be fully rated and shall be capable
of manual operation. The UPS shall be able to recharge the batteries while supplying full power to the load
via the static bypass switch.
xi. Internal maintenance bypass switch: The UPS shall be provided with an internal manual bypass switch for
supplying the load directly from the mains supply, while the UPS is taken out for maintenance. The switch
should be removable when the individual UPS unit has to run in parallel with other units.
xii. External Maintenance Bypass Panel (MBP): The external Maintenance Bypass Panel shall be used for
paralleling of multiple UPS units (optional for single UPS unit) to supply the load directly from the mains
supply, if the UPS system has to undergo maintenance or service. An UPS input, output, common output
and bypass breaker shall be housed in the same low-voltage assembly. The manual bypass breaker must be
monitored by each UPS via an auxiliary contact. The Maintenance Bypass Panel must be housed in a wall
mounted low-voltage assembly and painted in a black colour that complements the appearance of the UPS.
D. The UPS shall be provided with RS-232 signalling and WEB/SNMP integration. This system must provide a
E. The UPS shall have nominal voltage of 3400/230V (adjustable for 3380/220V, 3415/240V), 50Hz,
L1,L2,L3,N,PE.
F. The UPS will be capable of paralleling up to max 4 like kVA and type UPS systems for capacity.
07/2016 edition p. 354

Parallel UPS
G. The UPS shall be compatible with all types of data centres, data rooms and facilities. Dedicated service to one
10.3. STANDARDS
A. Directives for CE marking 89/336/EDC

73/237EEC
B. Safety EN/IEC62040-1-1
C. Emissions EN50091-2 / IEC62040-2
D. Performance EN/IEC62040-3
E. Electro Static Discharge EN/IEC 61000-4-2 level 3, performance criteria A
F. Continuous Electromagnetic Susceptibility EN/IEC 61000-4-3 level 2, performance criteria A
G. Electrical Fast Transient Compatibility EN/IEC 61000-4-4 level 2, performance criteria A
H. AC Surge Susceptibility EN/IEC 61000-4-5 Level 3 criteria A
10.4. CLASSIFICATION
10.5. SUBMITTALS
xxi. Bid system bill of materials

xxii. Product catalogue sheets or equipment brochures
xxiii. Product guide specifications
xxiv. System single-line operation diagram
xxv. Floor layout
xxvi. Capacity data
xxvii. Piping connection drawing
xxviii. Installation guide
xxix. Drawings for requested optional accessories
xi. Installation manual, which includes instructions for storage, handling, examination, preparation,
installation, and start-up of all systems.
xii. User manual, which includes operating instructions.
xiii. As built equipment drawings.
10.6. QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer experience: The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 20 years experience in the design,
manufacture, and testing of UPS and cooling systems.
B. ISO 9001 Certification: The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 & 14001 certified. Certification assures that the
vendor’s quality control & environmental measures have been certified by an accredited registrar and meet
internationally recognized standards.
10.7. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Storage ambient temperature: –50°C to 40°C

B. Operating ambient temperature: 0°C to 40°C. 15°C to 25°C is ideal for batteries (above the battery lifetime is
reduced).
C. Relative humidity: 0 to 95%, non-condensing.
D. Storage elevation: 0 to 15000m.
E. Operating altitude with no de-rating: 0 to 1000m feet above sea level.
10.8. MANUFACTURER
A. Provide American Power Conversion: APC Smart-UPS VT system. No substitutes will be considered.
07/2016 edition p. 355

Parallel UPS
OR
B. American Power Conversion: APC Smart-UPS VT or approved equal. However, if a brand other than APC is
proposed, the decision of the Engineer shall be final and a “differentiation report” must be submitted. This
report shall address each paragraph of the specification individually and list any and all differences from what
is specified. If there are no differences, provide a report so stating. If, after installation, omitted differences are
found, the Contractor shall correct differences to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer or unsatisfactory
equipment shall be removed and equipment acceptable to the Owner and Engineer shall be installed at no
additional cost to the project.
Part 11 PRODUCT
2.13. STATIC UPS
A. GENERAL
x. The UPS shall be housed in a free standing enclosure. The enclosure shall be designed to blend into an IT
environment. The cabinet shall be equipped for fork truck lifting. The UPS cabinet shall be painted with
the manufacturer’s standard colour, black. All service and installation access shall be from the front and
top
xi. The UPS should be able to line up and match and bolt together with other similar kVA and type UPS’ to
have the appearance of one entity.
xii. The UPS shall be in a self contained cabinet and comprise 10kVA, 15kVA, 20kVA, 30kVA or 40kVA
power section; Bypass Static Switch; Battery for standard run time and interface LCD display all mounted
in a separate cabinet. The UPS shall permit user installable and removable battery units.
The power section shall be of the Double Conversion On-Line topology with power factor corrected input.
1. The UPS shall be sized for ______ kVA and ______ kW load at power factor 0.8.
xiii. The UPS shall have a short circuit withstand capability of 30kA
B. SYSTEM INPUT
xli. Nominal Input voltage rating: 3×400/230V (adjustable for 3×380/220V or 3×415/240V)
xlii. Input Voltage range: 304-477V
xliii. Earthing principle: [TN-S] [TT] or [IT].
xliv. Input frequency: 40-70 Hz (auto sensing)
xlv. Input power factor: 0.98
xlvi. Magnetizing inrush current: NONE, if optional input isolating transformer is installed then 500% of
nominal input current for less than one cycle
xlvii. Input current distortion with no additional filters.
xlviii. < 5% THD at 100% load
xlix. Power walk-in/Soft-Start: Shall be linear from 0 to 100% of the load over a 15-second period
C. SYSTEM OUTPUT
xxxvi. Nominal Output voltage rating: 3×400/230V.

xxxvii. Earthing principle: [TN-S] [TT] or [IT].
xxxviii. Output voltage regulation for steady state and transient variations (at default parameter settings):
xxxix. Max. Voltage transient recovery time: 50 milliseconds to nominal.
xl. Output frequency regulation:
7. Synchronized to mains over the range of 47-53Hz or 57-63Hz in normal operation
8. 50 Hz ± 0.1 Hz in battery operation.
xli. Output voltage harmonic distortion:
7. <2% THD maximum and 1% single harmonic for a 100% linear load
8. <5% THD maximum for a 100% non-linear load
xlii. Overload capability:
10. 150% for 1 minute in normal operation
11. 125% for 10 minutes in normal operation
12. 110% continuous in bypass operation
07/2016 edition p. 356
Parallel UPS
13. 800% for 500 milliseconds in bypass operation

xliii. Phase displacement:
4. 20 degrees ± 1 degree for balanced load.
5. 20 degrees ± 1 degree for 50% unbalanced load.
6. 20 degrees ± 3 degrees for 100% unbalanced load.
xliv. Output Power Factor Rating: For loads exhibiting a power factor of 0.5 leading to 0.5 lagging, no de-rating
of the UPS shall be required.
xlv. Short circuit withstand: The UPS must withstand a bolted-fault short circuit on the output without damage
to the UPS module.
xlvi. System AC-to-AC efficiency >95.3% for loads greater than 100% of system load.
xlvii. System AC-to-AC efficiency >94% for loads greater than 50% of system load.
xlviii. Acoustical noise: dB(A) of noise, typically, measured at 1 meter from the operator surface:
1. < 54dBA - 10kVA – 15kVA
2. < 58dBA - 20kVA – 40kVA
D. COMPONENTS
xiii. Rectifier
37. Each UPS power module shall include an active power factor corrected, Insulated Gated Bipolar
Transistor (IGBT) rectifier.
38. DC buss voltage shall be ±192Vdc nominal.
39. The battery charging shall keep the DC bus float voltage of ±220v, ±1%
40. The DC buss voltage shall be compensated against temperature variations (Battery Temperature
Compensation) to always maintain optimal battery float charging voltage for temperature excursions
above or below 25°C. Temperature compensation rate shall be 320mV/°C for ambient temperatures >
20°C and 0mV/°C for ambient temperatures < 20°C.
42. Input power factor shall be 0.98 lagging at 100% load with out the use of passive filters. Rectifier
shall employ electronic waveform control technology to maintain the current sinusoidal.
43. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) current control shall be used. Digital Signal Processors (DSP) shall
be used for all monitoring and control tasks. Analogue control is not acceptable.
45. Input voltage window: 304-477V.
46. Typical batteries recharge time per IEEE 485.
xiv. Batteries
23. Batteries shall be housed in the same rack as the power section. Batteries shall be modular on pull out
24. Battery voltage shall be Battery Temperature Compensated as outlined in the rectifier section above.
25. End of discharge: ±160Vdc.
27. Battery Charge Current Limit: The UPS shall be capable of limiting the energy sourced from the
mains for purposes of battery charging. As a default setting, the battery charge energy will be set to
100% of its nominal value. When signalled by a dry contact, (such as from an emergency generator)
the UPS shall be capable of limiting the battery charge energy taken from the mains. This shall take
place in user selectable increments of 75%, 50%, 25%, 10% and 0% of the nominal charge power.
The selection shall be made from the UPS front panel display/control unit.
28. The battery charging circuit shall remain active when in Static Bypass and in Normal Operation.
xv. Inverter
29. Inverter shall be PWM controlled using DSP logic. Analogue control shall not be acceptable.
31. Nominal output voltage shall be 3×400/230V and adjustable for 3×380/220V or 3×415/240V, 50Hz,
L1,L2,L3,N,PE.
80. 10kVA 94.7%
81. 15kVA 94.7%
82. 20kVA 94.7%
83. 30kVA 94.5%
84. 40kVA 94.8%
07/2016 edition p. 357
Parallel UPS

87. Static: Less than 1% at full linear load.
88. Dynamic: 5% at 100% step load.
35. Output frequency: 50Hz free running.
37. Remote Emergency Power Off (EPO) shall be standard (wall switch and wiring shall be provided by
the electrical contractor).
xvi. Static Bypass Switch
14. The static switch shall consist of fully rated Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCRs). Part rated SCRs
with a wrap around contactor are not acceptable.
15. The static bypass switch shall automatically transfer the critical load to bypass input supply without
interruption after the logic senses one of the following conditions:
93. After an instantaneous overload-induced transfer has occurred and the load
current has returned to less than 100% of the system rating.
back to inverter.
E. MECHANICAL
iv. SUVT
2. The UPS power section, Static Bypass Switch, internal manual bypass switch and the VRLA batteries
shall be housed in a free standing enclosure in a matching black colour having the following
specifications:
 Colour finish. Black
 Dead front construction
 Caster fitted for mobility. Levelling feet shall be supplied as standard.
 The cable entry shall be from the bottom on the back of the UPS.
 The SUVT UPS enclosure shall meet an ingress level of min. IP20.
v. UPS module dimensions: HeightWidthDepth
SUVT10KH1B2 1490×352×928
SUVT10KH2B2 1490×352×928
SUVT10KH1B4 1490×523×928
SUVT10KH2B4 1490×523×928
SUVT10KH3B4 1490×523×928
SUVT10KH4B4 1490×523×928
SUVT15KH2B2 1490×352×928
SUVT15KH2B4 1490×523×928
SUVT15KH3B4 1490×523×928
SUVT15KH4B4 1490×523×928
SUVT20KH2B2 1490×352×928
SUVT20KH2B4 1490×523×928
SUVT20KH3B4 1490×523×928
SUVT20KH4B4 1490×523×928
SUVT30KH3B4 1490×523×928
SUVT30KH4B4 1490×523×928
SUVT40KH4B4 1490×523×928
07/2016 edition p. 358

Parallel UPS
F. 2.9 DISPLAY, CONTROLS AND ALARMS

xix. A microprocessor controlled display unit shall be located on the front of the system. The display shall
switches.
xx. The following metered data, shall be available on the alphanumeric display:
23. Input AC Voltage
26. Input Frequency
27. Battery voltage
28. Highest Internal Battery temperature
xxi. The display unit shall allow the user to display an event log of all active alarms and of the 64 most recent
159. Static bypass switch on
160. EPO Active
161. Mechanical bypass activated
162. External bypass switch (Q3) activated
163. Battery discharged
164. Return from low battery
165. Low battery
166. Load not powered from UPS
167. UPS in bypass
168. Runtime calibration aborted
169. Runtime calibration started
170. Runtime calibration complete
171. Battery self test aborted
172. Battery self test started
173. Battery self test completed
174. Number of battery modules decreased
175. Number of battery modules increased
176. Fan fault
177. SBS fault
178. System not in sync.
179. Bypass not available, frequency/voltage out of range
180. Mains voltage/frequency out of range
181. Site wiring fault
182. Low battery voltage shut down
183. XR battery breaker or fuse open
184. Defective battery detected
187. Battery over-voltage warning
188. Battery over-temperature warning
189. Emergency power supply fault
190. Output overloaded
xxii. The following controls or programming functions shall be accomplished by use of the display unit.
xxiii. The following shall make up the UPS front panel user interface.
95. Load On When Green, this LED indicates the load is being supported by the UPS
output
07/2016 edition p. 359
Parallel UPS
96. On Battery When Yellow, this LED indicates the UPS is running from Battery power
97. Bypass When Yellow, this LED indicates the load is being supported by static
98. Fault When Red, this LED indicates there is a fault condition present in the UPS.
99. Up Arrow
100. Down Arrow
101. Help Key
102. Escape Key
103. Enter Key
xxiv. Potential Free (Dry) Contacts
104. Normal Operation
106. Bypass Operation
107. Common Fault
108. Low Battery
109. UPS Off
xxv. For purposes of remote communications with the UPS the following shall be available and contained
within the UPS on a removable, “hot swappable” “smart slot” interface card:
9. RJ-45 Interface port for remote communications with a network via web browser or SNMP, or APC
InfraStruXure Manager.
10. Environmental monitoring feature, capable of locally monitoring temperature and humidity as well as
one additional generic set of user determined dry contacts capable of taking an input signal from any
APC or third party on/off signal, such as water detection, smoke detection, motion, or fire detection.
G. BATTERY
iv. The UPS battery shall be of modular construction made up of user replaceable, hot swappable, fused,
battery modules. Each battery module shall be monitored to determine the highest battery unit temperature
for use by the UPS battery diagnostic, and temperature compensated charger circuitry.
v. The battery blocks housed within each removable battery module shall be of the Valve Regulated Lead
Acid (VRLA) type.
Part 12 ACCESSORIES
A. EXTENDED RUNTIME (XR) OPTION
i. For purposes of extending the UPS battery runtime, external extended runtime options shall be
available. The extended runtime option shall be housed in “line up and match” type enclosures and
shall contain necessary hardware and cables to connect to the UPS, or between XR enclosures. Each
XR enclosure shall be equipped with removable, hot swappable, battery units housed in draw-out
cartridges.
ii. The extended runtime system shall have a 250 VDC rated, thermal magnetic trip moulded case circuit
breaker (MCCB). Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with shunt trip mechanisms and 1 NO/NC
auxiliary contacts. The circuit breakers are to be equipped as part of a line-up-and-match type battery
enclosure.
B. MAINTENANCE BYPASS PANEL (MBP)
i. A MBP should be offered as a standard option either for single module or multi module
configurations. The maintenance bypass panel shall provide power to the critical load bus from the
bypass source, during times where maintenance or service of the UPS system is required. The MBP
shall provide a mechanical means of complete isolation of the UPS system from the mains supply.
The MBP shall be constructed in a free-standing or wall-mounted IP20 enclosure unless otherwise
stated in this specification.
ii. As a minimum, the MBP shall contain the following features and accessories:
iii. Current limiting breakers of the appropriate size – limiting the short circuit level to max. Icc = 30 kA
for the system.
iv. Minimum 1 NO/NC auxiliary contact per unit in the parallel system for the purpose of relaying status
information of the manual maintenance bypass switch to the UPS.
v. In the case of parallel operation sufficient APC CAN bus PCB’s to provide adequate communications
of the MBP status to the UPS system parallel control system.
vi. CE marked according to at least EN/IEC60439.
vii. The MBP shall be made to Form 3b
viii. The MBP shall be made to IP2XC
07/2016 edition p. 360

Parallel UPS
C. PARALLEL OPERATION
i. For purposes of paralleling UPS units in the event of increased capacity or
redundancy, the UPS shall contain as a standard feature, the ability to parallel up to 4
modules. In this mode of operation the output voltage, output frequency, output
phase angle, and output impedance of each module shall operate in uniformity to
ensure correct load sharing. This control function shall not require any additional
footprint and shall be an integral function of each UPS.
ii. Multi-drop Bus Network: Communication between modules shall be connected in a
multi-drop bus network comprising two parallel redundant busses so that the removal
of any single cable shall not jeopardize the integrity of the parallel communication
system.
iii. Load Sharing: A load sharing circuit shall be incorporated into the parallel control
circuits to ensure that under no load conditions, no circulating current exists between
modules. This feature also allows each UPS to share equal amounts of the total
critical load bus. Load sharing communications shall be galvanically isolated for
purposes of fault tolerance between UPS modules. A UPS module's influence over
load sharing shall be inhibited in any mode where the UPS inverter is not supporting
its output bus.
B. SOFTWARE AND CONNECTIVITY
iii. The Ethernet Web/SNMP Adaptor shall allow one or more network management systems (NMS) to
iv. Unattended Shutdown
v. The UPS, in conjunction with a network interface card, shall be capable of gracefully shutting down one
or more operating systems during when the UPS is on reserve mode.
vi. The UPS shall also be capable of using an RS232 port to communicate by means of serial communications
to gracefully shut down one or more operating systems during an on battery situation.
C. REMOTE UPS MONITORING

iii. The following three methods of remote UPS monitoring shall be available:
11. RS232 Monitoring: Remote UPS monitoring shall be possible via either RS232 or contact closure
signals from the UPS.
D. SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY
ii. The UPS manufacturer shall have available software to support graceful shutdown and or remote
monitoring for the following systems:
110. a. Microsoft Windows 95/98/XP
111. b. Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 SP6/2000
112. c. OS/2
113. d. Netware 3.2 – 5.1
114. e. MAC OS 9.04, 9.22, 10
115. g. Digital Unix/True 64
116. h. SGI 6.0-6.5
117. j. SCO UNIX
118. k. SVR4 2.3, 2.41
119. m. SCO Unix Ware 7.0 - 7.11
120. n. SUN Solaris 2.6-2.8
121. o. SUN OS 4.13, 4.14
122. p. IBM AIX 4.3x-4.33g, 5.1
123. q. HP-UX 9.x-11.i
Part 13 EXECUTION
07/2016 edition p. 361

Parallel UPS
A. FACTORY ASSISTED START-UP
If a factory assisted UPS start-up is requested, factory trained service personnel shall perform the
following inspections, test procedures, and on-site training:
i. Visual Inspection:
 Inspect equipment for signs of damage.
 Verify installation per manufacturer’s instructions.
 Inspect cabinets for foreign objects.
 Inspect Battery Units.
 Inspect Power Module(s).
ii. Mechanical Inspection:

 Check all UPS and external maintenance bypass cabinet internal power wiring
connections.
 Check all UPS and external maintenance bypass cabinet terminal screws, nuts, and/or
spade lugs for tightness.
iii. Electrical Inspection:

 Verify correct input and bypass voltage.
 Verify correct phase rotation of all mains connections.
 Verify correct UPS control wiring and terminations.
 Verify voltage of all battery modules.
 Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly landed.
 Inspect external maintenance bypass switch for proper terminations and phasing.
iv. Site Testing:
 Ensure proper system start-up.

 Verify proper firmware control functions.
 Verify proper firmware bypass operation.
 Verify proper maintenance bypass switch operation.
 Verify system set points.
 Verify proper inverter operation and regulation circuits.
 Simulate utility power failure.
 Verify proper charger operation.
 Document, sign, and date all test results.
v. On-Site Operational Training:
During the factory assisted start-up, operational training for site personnel shall include
 key pad operation
 LED indicators
 start-up and shutdown procedures
 Maintenance Bypass Panel operation
 Battery breaker operation
 Alarm information.
i. Worldwide service: The UPS manufacturer shall have a worldwide service organization available,
consisting of factory trained field service personnel to perform start-up, preventative maintenance, and
service of the UPS system and power equipment. The service organization shall offer 24 hours a day, 7
days a week, 365 days a year service support.
07/2016 edition p. 362

Parallel UPS
ii. Replacement parts: Parts shall be available through the worldwide service organization 24 hours a
day, 7 days a week, and 365 days a year. The worldwide service organization shall be capable of
shipping parts within 4 working hours or on the next available flight, so that the parts may be delivered
to the customer site within 24 hours.
4.3 MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS
i. A complete offering of preventative and full service maintenance contracts for the UPS system and the
personnel.
4.4 TRAINING
i. UPS service training workshop: A UPS service training workshop shall be available from the UPS
07/2016 edition p. 363

Symmetra LX
1/1 Phase 8/12/16 kVA
07/2016 edition p. 364

Symmetra LX 1:1 – 4 to 16 kVA

Symmetra LX
4 kVA to 16 kVA 230 V Solution
230 V Solution
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.45 SUMMARY
A. Scope: This specification describes the operation and functionality of a continuous duty, solid-state, static
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) hereafter referred to as the UPS.
B. Included Features of the UPS:

1. The UPS utilizes modular power protection technology designed to allow internal redundancy, scalability of
power and runtime, and fast mean time to repair (MTTR). The UPS is configured from five basic
components:
a. UPS frames
b. Extended run battery frames (XR frames)
c. Power modules
d. Battery modules
e. Intelligence modules.
2. UPS and XR frames are capable of shipping with modules installed.
3. XR frames are capable of communicating battery and runtime status to intelligence modules.
4. Power, battery, and intelligence modules are hot-swappable and user-replaceable for fast MTTR.
5. The system power train consists of hot-swappable, user-replaceable 2.8 kW/4 kVA and 10% battery charger
circuit power modules, which operate in parallel and are configurable for N+1 redundant operation at rated
load.
6. The system includes
a. A field-replaceable internal automatic and manual bypass system module
b. Field-replaceable output power distribution panels
c. Removable input/output wiring tray
d. Standard redundant intelligent modules
e. Battery disconnects
f. An LCD interface display
g. Emergency Power Off (EPO)
h. An integrated UPS network management card with environmental monitoring.
C. Performance, Design, and Configurations: The UPS and associated equipment operates in conjunction
with a primary power supply and an output distribution system to provide quality uninterrupted power for
mission-critical, electronic equipment load.
1. This specification describes the performance, functionality, and design of the UPS Service Bypass
Panel, hereafter referred to as the SBP, the external Battery Systems, and connectivity solutions.
2. The UPS and associated equipment operates in conjunction with a primary power supply and an
output distribution system to provide quality uninterrupted power for a mission-critical, electronic
equipment load.
3. All programming and miscellaneous components for a fully operational system as described in this
guide specification are available as part of the UPS.
4. The UPS is available in the following configurations:
TYPE MODEL SKU

APC Symmetra LX 4 kVA scalable to 8 kVA SYA4K8I
07/2016 edition p. 365

N+1 Tower, 230 V

APC Symmetra LX 8 kVA scalable to 16 kVA SYA8K16I:
N+1 Tower, 230 V
Tower
APC Symmetra LX 8 kVA scalable to 16 kVA SYA8K16IXR
N+1 Ext. Run Tower, 230 V
N+1 Tower, 230 V
N+1 Tower, 230 V
N+1 Tower, 230 V
APC Symmetra LX 4 kVA scalable to 8 kVA SYA4K8RMI
N+1 Rack-mount, 230 V
Rack APC Symmetra LX 8 kVA scalable to 8 kVA SYA8K8RMI
Mount N+1 Rack-mount, 230 V
1.46 REFERENCES
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The edition/revision of the referenced
publications is the latest date as of the date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise specified.

1. ANSI/IEEE 519, "Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of Static Power
Converters" (copyrighted by IEEE, ANSI-approved).

1.47 STANDARDS
A. Regulatory Compliance:
1. C-tick
2. CE
3. EN 50091-1
4. EN 50091-2
5. EN 55022 Class A
6. EN 55024
7. EN 60950
8. GOST
9. IEC 60950
10. VDE
A. Mechanical Design
1. The UPS weights and dimensions are:
07/2016 edition p. 366

SKU UPS Cabinet Weight Height Width Depth

in kg in mm in mm in mm
SYA4K8I 4 kVA scalable to 8 157.7 671 483 726

kVA N+1 Tower
SYA4K8RMI 4 kVA scalable to 8 134.1 572 472 688

kVA N+1 Rack-mount (Rack
Height
13 U)

kVA N+1, Tower
SYA8K16IXR 8 kVA scalable to 16 473.7 1516 483 726

kVA N+1 Ext. Run
Tower

Height
19 U)

kVA N+1 Tower

Height
13 U)

kVA N+1 Tower
SYA12K16IXR 12 kVA Scalable to 16 488.7 1516 483 726

kVA N+1 Ext. Run
Tower
SYA12K16RMI 12 kVA Scalable to 16 242.7 836 472 688

Height
19 U)
SYA16K16I 16 kVA Scalable to 16 307.7 937 483 726

kVA N+1 Tower
SYA16K16IXR 16 kVA Scalable to 16 503.6 1516 483 726

kVA N+1 Ext. Run
Tower
SYA16K16RMI 16 kVA Scalable to 16 286.9 836 472 688

Height
19 U)
2. The UPS cabinet can be coverted between Tower and Rack-Mount configurations.
1. System Capacity: The system is rated for .8 Pf output in the following frame sizes:
07/2016 edition p. 367
a. 8 kVA/ 5.6 kW - Can be configured with up to (3) 2.8 kW power modules for N+1.
b. 16 kVA/ 11.2 kW - Can be configured with up to (5) 2.8 kW power modules for N+1.
2. System AC-AC Efficiency: >89.7% at 100% load.
3. Input:
a. AC Input Nominal Voltage: 220/230/240 Vac 1:1 (configured for single-phase AC input and
output) or 380/400/415 Vac 3:1 (configured for 3-phase input and single-phase output).
b. AC Input Voltage Window: Full Load, 155-276 Vac for single phase input or 290-480 Vac for
three-phase input (while providing nominal charging to the battery system).
c. Input Frequency Range: 45-65 Hz
d. Input Power Factor: 0.98 lagging @ 1:1 (single-phase input and output) at 100% load; or 0.90
lagging @ 3:1 (three-phase input and single-phase output) at 100% load.
e. Input Current Distortion with No Additional Filters: < 5% at 100% load at 230 V.
4. UPS Output:
a. AC Output Nominal Output: User-selectable 220, 230 or 240 Vac L-N
b. Output Connections:
Output Connections: Tower and Rack-Mount UPS
Maximum Method Voltage Circuit Connection

Load (Vac) Breaker
Rating
(Recom-
mended)
8 kVA Hardwired 220, 230 50 A  External circuit breaker

2
(Standard or 240 #6 AWG (16 mm )
on tower  Torque to 40 in-lb (4.5 N-m)
and rack-  1-phase: 3-Wire (L1-N-G)*
mount)
Output 220, 230  6 (IEC 320 C19) sockets
sockets or 240 with 6 (15 A, 250 V) circuit
(Standard breakers
on rack-  8 (IEC 320 C13) sockets
mount) with 2 (10 A, 250 V) circuit
breakers
16 kVA Hardwired 220, 230 100 A  External circuit breaker


2
(Standard or 240 #3 AWG (25 mm )
on tower  Torque to 40 in-lb (4.5 N-m)
and rack-  1-phase: 3-Wire (L1-N-G)*
mount)
Output 220, 230  10 (IEC 320 C19) sockets

sockets or 240 with 10 (15 A, 250 V) circuit
(Standard breakers
on rack-  8 (IEC 320 C13) sockets
mount) with 2 (10 A, 250 V circuit
breakers
* Wire connection “G” represents protective earth ground.
c. Output Frequency:
1) On-Line (synchronized to mains if possible): 50 +/-3.0 Hz and 60 +/- 3.0 Hz auto-sense;
60 +/- 0.1 Hz; 50 +/- 0.1 Hz; 60 +/- 3.0 Hz; 50 +/- 3.0 Hz
2) On Battery: 50 or 60 Hz
3) In Bypass: 45 - 65 Hz (can be restricted to 47-53 or 57-63 Hz windows)
d. AC output voltage distortion: Maximum 5% @ 100% linear load, phase to neutral loads.
e. AC static output voltage regulation: +/- 3% for 100% linear or nonlinear load, phase to neutral loads.
f. Voltage Transient Response: +/- 5% maximum for 100% load step
g. Voltage Transient Recovery: <60 milliseconds
h. Output Voltage Harmonic Distortion:
07/2016 edition p. 368

1) <2% THD maximum and 1% single harmonic for a 100% linear load
2) <5% THD maximum for a 100% nonlinear load
i. Overload Rating:
1) Normal Operation (Online):
a) >130% for 4 seconds
b) 105% continuous
c) <130% continuous at N+1
2) Bypass Operation: 50 A continuous (8 kVA frame models) and 100 A continuous (16 kVA
frame models)
j. Output Power Factor Rating: 0.7
1.49 SUBMITTALS
A. Proposal Submittals:
A. Environmental Requirements: Do not install solid state UPS until space is enclosed and weatherproof,
wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is completed, and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those
indicated for final occupancy.
1. The UPS is capable of withstanding any combination of the following environmental conditions in
which it must operate without mechanical or electrical damage or without degradation of operating
characteristics.
a. Storage Ambient Temperature: -15°C to 45°C (5°F to 113°F)
b. Operating Ambient Temperature: 0C to 40C (32F to 104F). 25C (77F) is ideal for most
battery types.
c. Relative Humidity: 0% to 95% non-condensing.
d. Altitude:
1) Storage Altitude: 15,000 meters (50,000 feet) above sea level
2) Operating Altitude: Maximum installation with no derating of the UPS output is 3000 meters
(10,000 feet) above sea level.
e. Audible Noise: 62 dBA at 1 meter from the surface of the unit.
1.51 WARRANTY
A. Limited Warranty: American Power Conversion (APC) warrants the UPS to be free from defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of two years from the date of purchase,
1. Warranty Limitations:
a. The obligation of APC under this warranty is limited to repairing or replacing, at its own sole option, any
defective product.
b. This warranty does not apply to equipment that has been damaged by accident, negligence, or
misapplication or has been altered or modified in any way.
c. This warranty applies only to the original purchaser who must have properly registered the product
within 10 days of purchase.
d. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, AMERICAN POWER CONVERSION MAKES NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not permit
limitation or exclusion of implied warranties; therefore, the aforesaid limitation(s) or exclusion(s) may
not apply to the purchaser.
07/2016 edition p. 369

e. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL APC BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT,

INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS PRODUCT, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Specifically, APC is not liable for any costs, such as lost profits or revenue, loss of equipment, loss of use
of equipment, loss of software, loss of data, costs of substitutes, claims by third parties, or otherwise.
f. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have other rights that vary from state to state.
2. Warranty Procedures:
a. To obtain service under warranty the purchaser must obtain a Returned Material Authorization (RMA)
number from customer support.
b. Products must be returned with transportation charges prepaid and must be accompanied by a brief
description of the problem encountered and proof of date and place of purchase.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.37 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Products specified are Symmetra LX Uninterruptible Power Supply as manufactured by
APC by Schneider Electric and as listed on page 2 of this specification. Items specified are to establish a
standard of quality for design, function, materials, and appearance. Equivalent products by other
manufacturers are acceptable. The Architect/Engineer will be the sole judge of the basis of what is
equivalent.
A. Normal: The input converter and output inverter operate in an on-line manner to regulate power
continuously to the critical load. The input and output converters are capable of full battery recharge while
simultaneously providing regulated power to the load for all line and load conditions within the range of the
UPS specifications.
B. Battery: Upon failure of the AC input source, the critical load continues being supplied by the output
inverter, which derives its power from the battery system. There is no interruption in power to the critical
load during both transfers to battery operation and retransfers from battery to normal operation.
C. Recharge: Upon restoration of the AC input source, the input converter and output inverter
simultaneously recharge the battery and provide regulated power to the critical load.
D. Automatic Bypass: The automatic bypass is used to provide transfer of critical load from the Inverter
output to the bypass source. In an emergency, this transfer is an automatic function.
E. Manual Bypass: The system is equipped with an internal make-before-break two-pole switch to isolate
the UPS electrically from the input and output during preventive maintenance, module upgrades, or limited
frame service. The manual bypass is also considered a partial ―wrap-around‖ bypass, configured to wrap
around the power modules (rectifier, battery charger, inverter) and battery modules in the same manner as
the automatic bypass while still supplying surge and EMI filtering and overcurrent protection. There is a
positional sensor supplied to alert users that the UPS is in manual bypass.
F. External Service Bypass Panel (SBP): The maintenance service bypass cabinet provides power to the
critical load bus from the bypass source, during times when maintenance or service of the UPS frame is
required or when removal of the frame is desired. The SBP provides a mechanical means of complete
isolation of the UPS from the electrical wiring of the installation. The SBP is constructed in a freestanding,
rack-mounted or wall-mounted enclosure unless otherwise stated in this specification. It is designed for
either three phase input or single phase input with a ―no-break‖ transfer between bypass and UPS power.
G. Charging: Upon restoration of the AC input source, the UPS simultaneously recharges the battery and
provides regulated power to the critical load.
1. The battery charging shall keep the DC bus float voltage of +/137v, +/-1%.
2. The intelligent battery management system contains a temperature monitoring circuit that regulates
the battery charging current so as to optimize battery life.
3. The battery charging circuit remains active when in bypass and online states.
H. Bypass: As part of the UPS, a system automatic bypass switch is provided. The system automatic
bypass provides a break <11 ms transfer of the critical load from the Inverter output to the automatic
07/2016 edition p. 370
bypass input source during times when maintenance is required or when the inverter cannot support the
critical bus. Such times may be due to prolonged or severe overloads, or UPS failure. The additional
manual bypass switch has a no break transfer of critical loads from Inverter output to the manual bypass
switch, which will correspondingly engage the automatic bypass switch, driving it into bypass position. The
UPS will constantly monitor the output current, as well as the bypass source voltage, and inhibit potentially
unsuccessful transfers to automatic bypass from taking place. The design of the automatic bypass switch
power path consists of a heavy duty electromechanical bypass contactor with a continuous duty rating up
to 100 A.
1. Automatic Transfers: An automatic transfer of load to bypass takes place whenever the load on the
critical bus exceeds the overload rating of the UPS. Automatic transfers of the critical load from
bypass back to normal operation take place when the overload condition is removed from the critical
bus output of the system. Automatic transfers of load to bypass also take place if for any reason the
UPS cannot support the critical bus.
2. Manual Transfers: Manually initiated transfers to and from bypass are initiated through the UPS
display interface or by engaging the manual bypass switch on the front of the unit.
3. Overloads: The automatic bypass is rated for and capable of handling overloads equal to or less
than 100 A continuously. For instantaneous overloads caused by inrush current from magnetic
devices or from short-circuit conditions, the automatic bypass is capable of sustaining overloads of
1000% of the continuous rating system capacity for sub-cycle fault clearing.
4. Modular: The automatic bypass switch is of a modular design and easily field-replaceable by
certified technicians.
2.39 INPUT POWER CONVERTER
A. General: The input power converters of the system are housed within the parallel connected, removable power
modules. The converters constantly control the power imported from the mains input of the system to provide the
necessary UPS power for precise regulation of the DC bus voltage, battery charging, and Main Inverter-regulated
output power.
B. Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion: When configured for single phase AC input, the input current
THDI will be held to 7% or less at full system load, while providing conditioned power to the critical load
bus and charging the batteries under steady-state operating conditions. This is true while the UPS is
supporting loads of both a linear or nonlinear type. This will be accomplished with no additional filters,
magnetic devices, or other components.
.
C. Input Current Limit:
1. The input converter controls and limits the input current draw from utility to 150% of the UPS output.
During conditions where input current limit is active, the UPS is able to support 100% load, charge batteries
at 10% of the UPS output rating, and provide voltage regulation with mains deviation of up to +/-20% of the
nominal input voltage.
2. In cases where the source voltage to the UPS is nominal and the applied UPS load is equal to or less than
100% of UPS capacity, input current will not exceed 130% of UPS output current, while providing full
battery recharge power and importing necessary power for system losses.
D. Redundancy: The UPS is configured with redundant input converters, each with semiconductor fusing,
and logic-controlled contactors to remove a failed module from the input bus.
E. Charging:
1. The battery charging will keep the DC bus float voltage of +/137v, +/-1%.
2. The battery charging circuit contains a temperature monitoring circuit, which regulates the battery
charging current to optimize battery life.
3. The battery charging circuit remains active when in automatic bypass and in normal operation.
2.40 OUTPUT INVERTER
A. General: The UPS output inverter constantly recreates the UPS output voltage waveform by converting
the DC bus voltage to AC voltage through a set of IGBT-driven bidirectional power converters. In both
normal operation and battery operation, the output inverters create an output voltage independent of the
mains input voltage. Input voltage anomalies such as brown-outs, spikes, surges, sags, and outages will
not affect the amplitude or sinusoidal nature of the recreated output voltage sine wave of the output
inverters.
07/2016 edition p. 371

B. Overload Capability: The output power converters are capable of 200% for short-circuit clearing. Steady-
state overload conditions of up to 130% of system capacity (N+1) will be sustained by the inverter
continuously in normal and battery operation. If overloads persist past the outlined limitation, the critical
load will be switched to the automatic bypass output of the UPS, which is based upon the rating of 50 A (8
kVA frame models) and 100 A (16 kVA frame models).
C. Output Contactor: The output power stage (inverter) is equipped with an output mechanical contactor to
provide physical isolation of the inverter from the critical bus. With this feature a failed inverter will be
removed from the critical bus.
D. Battery Protection: The inverter is provided with monitoring and control circuits to limit the level of
discharge on the battery system.
E. Redundancy: The UPS is configured with redundant output inverters, each with semiconductor fusing,
and logic-controlled relays to remove a failed component from the critical bus.
A. Control Logic: The UPS is controlled by two fully redundant, user-replaceable, hot-swappable
intelligence modules. These modules have separate, optically-isolated, communication paths to the
power modules and the automatic bypass contactor. Logic power for the control modules is derived
from internal regulated power supplies, each having a separate AC and DC input and output. The
communication of the control modules is of Inter IC Communication (IIC).
B. Display Unit: A microprocessor-controlled display unit is located on a hinged door in the front of the
system. The display unit consists of an alphanumeric display with backlight, an alarm LED, and a
keypad consisting of pushbutton switches.
C. Metered Data: The following metered data is available on the alphanumeric display:
1. Year, month, day, hour, minute, and second of occurring events
2. Source Input Voltage
5. Input Frequency
6. Battery voltage
7. Internal temperature
D. Event log: The display unit allows the user to display a time- and date-stamped log of the 64 most
recent status and alarm events.
E. Alarms: The display unit allows the user to display a log of all active alarms. The following minimum set
of alarm conditions is available:
1. Input Frequency outside configured range
2. AC adequate for UPS but not for Bypass
3. Low/No AC input, startup on battery
4. Intelligence Module inserted
5. Intelligence Module removed
6. Redundant Intelligence Module inserted
7. Redundant Intelligence Module removed
8. Number of Batteries changed since last ON
9. Number of Power Modules changed since last ON
10. Number of Batteries increased
11. Number of Batteries decreased
12. Number of Power Modules increased
13. Number of Power Modules decreased
14. Redundancy Restored
15. Need Battery Replacement
16. The Redundant Intelligence Module is in control
17. UPS Fault
18. On Battery
07/2016 edition p. 372
19. Shutdown or unable to transfer to battery due to overload

20. Load Shutdown from Bypass. Input Frequency Volts outside limits
21. Fault, Internal Temp exceeded system normal limits
22. Input Circuit Breaker Open
23. System level fan failed
24. Bad Battery Module
25. Bad Power Module
26. Intelligence Module is installed and failed
27. Redundant Intelligence Module is installed and failed
28. Redundancy has been lost
29. Redundancy is below alarm threshold
32. Load is no longer above alarm Threshold
33. Minimum Runtime restored
34. Bypass is not in range (either frequency or voltage)
35. Bypass contactor stuck in OFF position
36. Bypass contactor stuck in ON position
37. UPS in Bypass due to Internal Fault
38. UPS in Bypass due to overload
39. Low Battery Shutdown
40. Low Battery Warning
F. Controls: The following controls or programming functions are accomplished by use of the display unit.
Pushbutton membrane switches facilitate these operations.
4. Transfer critical load to and from bypass
G. Potential Free (Dry) Contacts: The following potential free contacts are available on an optional relay
interface board:
1. Normal Operation
3. Bypass Operation
4. Common Fault
5. Low Battery
6. UPS Off
H. Communication Interface Board: A communication interface board provides the following

communication ports, which can be used simultaneously:
1. RS232 Serial Port #1
2. RJ-45 Interface port for a Remote Display
3. Extended runtime external battery communication port
2.42 BATTERY
A. The UPS battery is of modular construction made up of user-replaceable, hot-swappable, fused battery
modules. Each battery module shall be monitored for voltage and temperature for use by the UPS battery
diagnostic and battery charger circuitry
B. The batteries are of the valve-regulated lead acid (VRLA) type.
C. The UPS incorporates a battery management system to continuously monitor the health of each
removable battery module as well as external battery modules installed in extended run battery cabinets.
This system notifies the user if a failed or weak battery module is found.
07/2016 edition p. 373

D. Additional battery modules may be added to increase runtime by utilizing up to seven extended run battery
cabinets. These cabinets will be hot-pluggable, allowing for easy and quick installation without the need
for electrical wiring, electrician, or powering down of the UPS. The battery modules are monitored by each
individual frame and this information passed upstream to the main intelligence modules.
E. Battery modules have an embedded EEprom that supplies the serial number as well as some diagnostic
information to the user to help in the local, network, or out-of-band management of these modules.
F. Each UPS Battery Module has a built-in DC disconnect switch for transportation and to disconnect the
battery module completely from the internal bus while installed in the UPS system.
PART 3 – ACCESSORIES
3.1 SERVICE BYPASS PANEL (SBP)
A. The service bypass panel provides power to the critical load from the bypass source, during times where
maintenance or service of the UPS is required. The SBP provides a mechanical means of complete
isolation of the UPS from the electrical wiring of the installation. The SBP is constructed in a free-standing,
rack-mounted or wall-mounted enclosure unless otherwise stated in this specification.
3.2 REMOVABLE INPUT/OUPUT ELECTRICAL TERMINAL
A. The input and output terminal connections are a removable tray for easy electrical connection.
3.3 SOFTWARE AND CONNECTIVITY
A. Network Management Card: The Network Management Card 2 with Environmental Monitoring
(AP9631) allows one or more network management systems (NMSs) to monitor and manage the UPS in
TCP/IP network environments. The management information base (MIB) is provided in DOS and UNIX
"tar" formats.
B. Unattended Shutdown: The UPS, in conjunction with the Network Management Card, is capable of
gracefully shutting down one or more operating systems during the time when the UPS is on battery
mode. The UPS is also capable of using an RS232 port to communicate with the host computer by
means of serial communications to gracefully shut down one or more operating systems during an on-
battery situation.
3.4 REMOTE UPS MONITORING
A. The following three methods of remote UPS monitoring are available:

1. Web Monitoring: Remote monitoring via a web browser.
2. RS232 Monitoring: Remote UPS monitoring via either RS232 or contact closure signals from the UPS.
3. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP): Remote UPS Monitoring can through a standard MIB
II compliant platform.
3.5 SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY
A. PowerChute Network Shutdown: This software is provided with the pre-installed Network Management
Card 2 with Environmental Monitoring (AP9631). It is compatible with the following operating systems.
1. IBM® AIX
2. HP/UX
3. Linux
4. Mac OS X
5. Novell NetWare
6. Solaris
7. Windows® 2003
8. Windows® 2008
9. Windows® 7
10. Windows® Vista
11. Windows® XP
07/2016 edition p. 374
B. StruxureWareTM management software: All Symmetra LX Rack-Mount models are also certified for
use with StruxureWare management software. Any of the following products can be purchased as an
option:
1. StruxureWare Central Basic (AP9465)
2. StruxureWare Central Standard (AP9470)
3. StruxureWare Central Enterprise (AP9475)
4. StruxureWare Central Standard Management Pack (AP9480)
5. StruxureWare Central Basic Management Pack (AP9482)
6. StruxureWare Central Enterprise Management Pack (AP9485)
4.1 FACTORY-ASSISTED STARTUP
If a factory-assisted UPS start-up is requested, factory-trained service personnel will perform the following
inspections, test procedures, and on-site training.
B. Visual Inspection:
4. Inspect battery modules.
5. Inspect power modules.
C. Mechanical Inspection:
1. Check all UPS and external service bypass panel internal power wiring connections.
2. Check all UPS and external service bypass panel terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs for
tightness.
D. Electrical Inspection:
4. Verify that neutral and ground conductors are properly landed.
5. Inspect external service bypass panel for proper terminations.
E. Site Testing:
4. Verify proper bypass switch operation (where applicable).
F. On-Site Operational Training: During the factory assisted start-up, operational training for site
personnel includes key pad operation, LED indicators, startup and shutdown procedures, maintenance
bypass and AC disconnect operation, and alarm information.

1. Worldwide Service: The UPS manufacturer has a worldwide service organization available, consisting of
factory-trained field service personnel to perform start-up, preventive maintenance, and service of the UPS
system and power equipment. The service organization offers service support 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week, 365 days a year.
2. Replacement Parts: Parts are available through the worldwide service organization 24 hours a day, 7 days
a week, 365 days a year. The organization is capable of shipping parts within four working hours or on the
next available flight, so that the parts may be delivered to the customer site within 24 hours.
07/2016 edition p. 375

B. Maintenance: A complete offering of preventive and full service maintenance contracts for the UPS
system and battery system are available from APC by Schneider Electric. Schneider Electric factory-
trained service personnel perform the contract work.
END OF GUIDE SPECIFICATION
07/2016 edition p. 376

Symmetra PX
3/3 Phase 16/48/96/160/250/500 kVA
07/2016 edition p. 377

Symmetra PX 3:3 – 48 kW
Schneider Electric
Symmetra PX 48kW
16-48 kW, 3x400/230V Solutions
Uninterruptible Power System
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
SECTION [26 33 63] [16611]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This specification describes the operation and functionality of a continuous duty, three-phase, solid-state,
static Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) hereafter referred to as the UPS. The UPS shall utilize rack-
mounted redundant, scalable array architecture. The system power train shall be comprised of
swappable/trained user-replaceable 16 kVA/16 kW power modules, which shall operate in parallel. Each
16 kVA/16 kW power module contains a full rated input rectifier/boost converter (hereafter referred to as
Input Converter), full rated output inverter, and battery charging circuit. The system shall also comprise of
a continuous duty swappable bypass static switch module, swappable/trained user-replaceable battery
modules, redundant control modules, redundant logic power supplies, and LCD interface display. All of
the above system components are housed in a standard, 600 mm wide, 1070 mm deep, and 2000 mm
high equipment rack.
B. In addition, this specification describes the performance, functionality, and design of the Maintenance
Bypass Panel, Power Distribution board and extended Runtime cabinet, the Battery System, and
connectivity solutions.
C. The UPS and associated equipment shall operate in conjunction with a primary power supply and an
output distribution system to provide quality uninterrupted power for mission critical, electronic equipment
load.
D. All programming and miscellaneous components for a fully operational system as described in this
specification shall be available as part of the UPS.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Proposal submittals:
2. Product catalogue sheets or equipment brochures.
7. Drawings for requested optional accessories.
3. As built equipment drawings for the standard solution.
07/2016 edition p. 378

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. The UPS shall be sized for _____ kVA and _____ kW load.
B. The UPS battery shall be sized for _____ at a Power Factor of_____ for _____ minutes.
C. Short Circuit Withstand Rating: 30 kA Symmetrical with gL/gG fuse in front of system.
2.2 SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
A. System Capacity: The system shall be rated for full kW output in the following frame sizes:
1. 48 kVA/kW - Can be configured with up to 3 power modules 16 kW for no fault tolerance.
B. Input:
1. AC Input Nominal Voltage: 3x380 V/220 V, 3x400 V/230 V or 3x415 V/240 V with L1,L2,L3,N, PE
2. AC Input Voltage Window: 340 - 477 at 100% load and 200 - 477 at 50% load
3. Maximum Frequency Range: 40-70Hz (autosensing)
4. Input Power Factor: > .99 at load greater than 25%.
5. Input Current Distortion with no additional filters:.< 5% at 100% load
6. Soft-Start: Shall be linear from 0-100% input current and shall not exhibit inrush. This shall take place
over a 10 seconds time period
C. Battery:
1. Nominal Battery voltage: +/-192 VDC (2×96 cells at 2 V)
2. Float voltage: +/-218 VDC (2×96 cells at 2.27 V)
3. End of discharge voltage (full load): +/-154 VDC (2×96 cells at 1.6 V)
4. End of discharge voltage (no load): +/-168 VDC (2×96 cells at 1.75 V)
5. Battery Design Life: 5-8 years
6. Battery Service Life: 3-5 years
D. Battery Charging
1. 10% of output power at low input voltage and 100% load.
2. 20% of output power at nominal voltage and 100% load (optional).
E. UPS Output:
1. AC Output Nominal Output: 3x380 V/220 V, 3x400 V/230 V or 3x415 V/240 V with L1, L2, L3, N, PE
2. Output frequency regulation: Frequency is synchronized to bypass input when available over the
standard range of 47 to 53 Hz. Optional +/-0.1 Hz and
+/-10 Hz setting from front panel.
3. At no bypass input present output frequency is 50 Hz.
4. AC Output Voltage Regulation: +/- 1%. For 100% linear load
+/- 3% for 100% non-linear load.
5. Voltage Transient Response: +/- 5% maximum for 100% load step
6. Voltage Transient Recovery within <50 milliseconds
7. Output Voltage Harmonic Distortion:
i. <2% THD maximum for a 100% linear load
ii. <5% THD maximum for a 100% non-linear load as defined by EN50091-3/IEC 62040-3
8. Overload Rating:
i. Normal and battery Operation:
a. 150% for 60 seconds in normal and battery operation
b. 125% for 10 minutes in normal and battery operation
ii. Bypass Operation:
a. 125% continuous
b. 1000% for 100 milliseconds
9. System AC-AC Efficiency: >95% at 35 - 100% load
10. Output Power Factor Rating: For loads exhibiting a power factor of 0.5 leading to 0.5 lagging no
derating of the UPS shall be required.
07/2016 edition p. 379

A. Normal operation: The input converter and output inverter shall operate in an on-line manner to
continuously regulate power to the critical load. The input and output converters shall be capable of full
battery recharge while simultaneously providing regulated power to the load for all line and load conditions
within the range of the UPS specifications.
B. Battery: Upon failure of the AC input source, the critical load shall continue being supplied by the output
inverter, which shall derive its power from the battery system. There shall be no interruption in power to
the critical load during both transfers to battery operation and retransfers from battery to normal operation.
C. Recharge: Upon restoration of the AC input source, the input converter and output inverter shall
simultaneously recharge the battery and provide regulated power to the critical load.
D. Static Bypass: The static bypass shall be used to provide transfer of critical load from the Inverter output
to the bypass source. This transfer, along with its retransfer, shall take place with no power interruption to
the critical load. In the event of an emergency, this transfer shall be an automatic function.
E. Maintenance Bypass: The system shall be equipped with a Maintenance Bypass Panel (MBP) used to
electrically isolate the UPS and supply the load directly from the mains supply, if the UPS system has to
undergo maintenance or service.
A. Input power converter:

1. The input power converters of the system are housed within the parallel connected, removable power
modules, and shall constantly control the power imported from the mains input of the system, to
provide the necessary UPS power for precise regulation of the DC bus voltage, battery charging, and
Main Inverter regulated output power.
2. Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion: The input current THDI shall be held to 5% or less at full
system, while providing conditioned power to the critical load bus, and charging the batteries under
steady-state operating conditions. This shall be true while supporting loads of both a linear or non-
linear type. This shall be accomplished with no additional filters, magnetic devices, or other
components.
3. Soft-Start Operation: As a standard feature, the UPS shall contain soft-start functionality, capable of
limiting the input current from 0-100% of the nominal input over a default 10 seconds period, when
returning to the AC utility source from battery operation. The change in current over the change in
time shall take place in a linear manner throughout the entire operation. (di/dt= constant)
4. Magnetization Inrush Current: The UPS shall exhibit 0 inrush current as a standard product.
5. Input Current Limit:

i. The input converter shall control and limit the input current draw from utility to 135% of the UPS
output. During conditions where input current limit is active, the UPS shall be able to support
100% load, charge batteries, and provide voltage regulation.
ii. In cases where the source voltage to the UPS is nominal and the applied UPS load is equal to or
less than 100% of UPS capacity, input current shall not exceed 110% of UPS output current,
while charging the batteries.
6. Charging
i. The battery charging circuit shall contain a temperature compensation circuit, which will regulate
the battery charging to optimize battery life.
ii. The battery charging circuit shall remain active when in requested Static Bypass and in Normal
Operation.
iii. Back-feed Protection: The above-mentioned logic controlled contactor also provides the back-
feed protection.
B. Output inverter
07/2016 edition p. 380

1. The UPS output inverter shall constantly recreate the UPS output voltage waveform by converting the
DC bus voltage to AC voltage through a set of IGBT driven bi-directional power converters. In both
normal operation and battery operation, the output inverters shall create an output voltage
independent of the mains input voltage. Input voltage anomalies such as brown-outs, spikes, surges,
sags, and outages shall not affect the amplitude or sinusoidal nature of the recreated output voltage
sine wave of the output inverters.
2. Overload Capability: Steady-state overload conditions, of up to 150% of system capacity, shall be

sustained by the inverter for 60 seconds in normal and battery operation. Should overloads persist
past the outlined time limitation the critical load will be switched to the automatic static bypass output
of the UPS.
3. Output Contactor: The output inverter shall be provided with an output mechanical contactor to
provide physical isolation of the inverter from the critical bus. With this feature a failed inverter shall be
removed from the critical bus.
4. Battery Protection: The inverter shall be provided with monitoring and control circuits to limit the level
of discharge on the battery system.
5. Redundancy: The UPS shall be configured with redundant output inverters, each with semiconductor
fusing, and logic controlled contactors to remove a failed component from the critical bus.
C. Static bypass:
1. As part of the UPS, a system static bypass switch shall be provided. The system static bypass shall
provide no break transfer of the critical load from the Inverter output to the static bypass input source
during times where maintenance is required, or the inverter cannot support the critical bus. Such
times may be due to prolonged or severe overloads, or UPS failure. The UPS and static bypass
switch shall constantly monitor the auxiliary contacts of their respective circuit breakers, as well as the
bypass source voltage, and inhibit potentially unsuccessful transfers to static bypass from taking
place.
2. The design of the static switch power path shall consist of Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCR) with a
continuous duty rating of 125% of the UPS output rating.
3. Automatic Transfers: An automatic transfer of load to static bypass shall take place whenever the load
on the critical bus exceeds the overload rating of the UPS. Automatic transfers of the critical load from
static bypass back to normal operation shall take place when the overload condition is removed from
the critical bus output of the system. Automatic transfers of load to static bypass shall also take place
if for any reason the UPS cannot support the critical bus.
4. Manual Transfers: Manually initiated transfers to and from static bypass shall be initiated through the
UPS display interface.
5. Overloads: The static bypass shall be rated and capable of handling overloads equal to or less than
125% of the rated system output continuously. For instantaneous overloads caused by inrush current
from magnetic devices, or short circuit conditions, the static bypass shall be capable of sustaining
overloads of 1000% of system capacity for periods of up to 100 milliseconds.
6. Modular: The static bypass switch shall be of a modular design.
7. System Protection: As a requirement, back-feed protection in the static bypass circuit shall also be
incorporated in the system design. To achieve back-feed protection, a mechanical contactor in series
with the bypass SCR(s) shall be controlled by the UPS/static switch, to open immediately upon
sensing a condition where back-feeding of the static switch by any source connected to the critical
output bus of the system is occurring. One such condition could be a result of a shorted SCR.
A. Storage Ambient Temperature: -15 ºC to 40 ºC.
B. Operating Ambient Temperature: 0 ºC to 40 ºC. (25 ºC is ideal for most battery types).
C. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95% non-condensing.
07/2016 edition p. 381

D. Altitude: Maximum installation with no derating of the UPS output shall be 1000 m above sea level.
1. 1000 m: 100% load
2. 1500 m: 95% load
3. 2000 m: 91% load
4. 2500 m: 86% load
5. 3000 m: 82% load
E. Audible noise, nominal max at 1 m from surface of unit

1. < 57 dBA at < 70% load
2. < 63 dBA at 100% load
2.6 BATTERY
A. The UPS battery shall be of modular construction made up of trained user-replaceable, swappable, fused,
battery modules. Each battery module shall be monitored for voltage and temperature for use by the UPS
battery diagnostic, and temperature compensated charger circuitry.
B. The battery block housed within each removable battery module shall be of the Valve Regulated Lead
Acid (VRLA) type.
C. The UPS shall incorporate a battery management system to continuously monitor the health of each
removable battery module. This system shall notify the user in the event that a failed or weak battery
module is found.
A. Control Logic: The UPS shall be controlled by two fully redundant,

user-replaceable/swappable control modules. These modules shall have separate, optically isolated,
communication paths to the power and static switch modules. Logic power for the control modules shall
be derived from redundant power supplies, each having a separate AC and DC input and output. The
communication of the control modules shall be of Controller Area Network (CAN Bus).
B. Display Unit: A microprocessor controlled display unit shall be located on a hinged door in the front of the
system. The display shall consist of an alphanumeric display with backlight, four LEDs for quick status
overview, and a keypad consisting of pushbutton switches.
C. Metered Data: The following metered data, shall be available on the alphanumeric display:
D.
5. Input Frequency
6. Battery voltage
E. Event log: The display unit shall allow the user to display a time and date stamped log of the most recent
F. Alarms: The display unit shall allow the user to display a log of all active alarms. The following minimum
set of alarm conditions shall be available:
07/2016 edition p. 382

14. Number of External Battery Cabinets increased
15. Number of External Battery Cabinets decreased
19. On Battery
36. Backfeed contactor stuck in OFF position
37. Backfeed contactor stuck in ON position
40. System in Forced Bypass
41. Fault, Bypass Relay Malfunction
42. High DC Warning
43. High DC Shutdown
G. Controls: The following controls or programming functions shall be accomplished by use of the display
unit. Pushbutton membrane switches shall facilitate these operations.
H. Potential Free (Dry) Contacts: The following potential free contacts shall be available on an optional relay
interface board:
1. Normal Operation
3. Bypass Operation
4. Common Fault
5. Low Battery
6. UPS Off
I. Communication Interface Board: A communication interface board shall provide the following
communication port:
1. RS232 Serial Port #1: Enables local access to the UPS for management and monitoring, and provides
UPS data and simple signaling support.
07/2016 edition p. 383

A. Network Adaptor: The Network Management Card shall allow one or more network management systems
(NMS) to monitor and manage the UPS in TCP/IP network environments. The management information
base (MIB) shall be provided in DOS and UNIX "tar" formats.
B. Unattended Shutdown
1. The UPS, in conjunction with the network adaptor, shall be capable of gracefully shutting down one or
more operating systems.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Battery disconnect breaker: Each UPS system shall have a 250 A 500 VDC rated, thermal magnetic trip
molded case circuit breaker. Each circuit breaker shall be equipped a shunt trip mechanism and 1A/1B
auxiliary contacts (1 AUX contact for the internal DC circuit breaker). The circuit breakers are to be
located within the UPS enclosure or as part of a line-up-and-match type battery cabinet.
B. Maintenance bypass: The maintenance bypass shall provide power to the critical load bus from the
bypass source, during times where maintenance or service of the UPS is required.
100 A gL/gG fuse must be in front of the Mains input and for dual mains an 80A gL fuse on the bypass
input must be installed.
C. Maintenance bypass panel (MBP): The maintenance bypass panel is to be housed within the same UPS
cabinet shall enable the UPS system to be transferred to a maintenance bypass mode and to be isolated
for essential maintenance. The maintenance bypass panel to contain protection of all UPS/external static-
switch feeder and outgoing busbars and all necessary ACB/isolating switch interlocking to allow fail-safe
start-up, shutdown and transfer to maintenance bypass.
D. PDU (Power distribution unit):

1. GENERAL: A 100 A rated Modular Power Distribution Unit shall be contained within the UPS frame.
The PDU shall have 18 pole positions available for the installation of modular output distribution
breakers. Single or three pole 16 A or 32 A circuit breakers will provide the feeds to the server racks.
The power to the cabinets from the PDU will be channeled via overhead power feeds exiting through
the top of the PDU. They will lie across the top of the cabinets via an overhead troughing system.
These troughs will sit on top of the cabinets and will be of tool less installation. The PDU shall have
branch circuit monitoring that links to the management system interface.
2. ELECTRICAL: The PDU functionality is contained within the same frame as the UPS, all in a standard
600 mm IT equipment rack.
The PDU shall contain at least (1) 3-phase distribution panel standard. The panel shall be fed by the
output of the 3-phase Symmetra modular UPS system and shall be shall be rated for 3-phase 3x380
V/220 V, 3x400V/230 V or 3x415 V/240 V, L1,L2,L3,N, PE, 50 Hz. The PDU should be populated with
standard modular distribution breakers either as 1p (18) or 3p (6) or with RCD breakers either as 1p
(9) or 3p (3).
The panel should have Input and Output distribution from the top and power cables shall be provided
by the UPS vendor connecting the distribution breakers cited above to, Schneider Electric supplied
equipment rack. Each cable shall include an IEC-309 plug that connects to a rack PDU (outlet strip).
The layout of the IT room equipment racks shall determine power cable length.
E. StruxureWare Data Center Expert: A centralized infrastructure management platform, hereafter referred to
as Data Center Expert, shall be sold separately and shall be available for purposes of complete system
monitoring and management of all components outlined in this specification used as a single solution for
small IT or part of the StruxureWare software stack providing data to systems such as Data Center
Operation.
1. Monitoring - Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring a PDU through a network of Cat 5
which in turn shall allow access to this information via the user’s public network via a single IP
address.
points for non-Schneider Electric products shall also be available via dry contact input signal.
07/2016 edition p. 384
4. Public Network Monitoring: Data Center Expert shall also be capable of monitoring other Schneider
PART 3 - EXECUTION

The following three methods of remote UPS monitoring shall be available:
A. Web Monitoring: Remote monitoring shall be available via a web browser such as Internet Explorer.
B. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP): Remote UPS Monitoring shall be possible through a
3.2 SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY

The UPS manufacturer shall have available software to support graceful shutdown and remote monitoring with
PowerChute Network Shutdown (PCNS) for the following operating system families for:
A. Windows
B. Hyper-V
C. VMware
D. Linux
E. Unix
F. Mac OS X
The full and updated supported OS compatibility chart can be found here:
http://www.apc.com/whitepaper/?um=200
A. Standards: All equipment shall be designed and built in accordance with accepted engineering practice
and applicable international standards, in particular the standards listed below:
1. 89/336/EEC
2. 73/23EEC
3. EN/IEC62040-1-1, EN/IEC/UL60950-1
4. EN50091-2/IEC62040-2 (class A), FCC15A
5. EN/IEC62040-3 (VFI-SS-111)
6. IEC62040-2/EN/IEC 61000-4-2 level 3, performance criteria B
7. IEC62040-2/EN/IEC 61000-4-4 level 2, performance criteria A
9. IEC62040-2/EN/IEC 61000-4-5 Level 3, performance criteria A
3.4 FACTORY ASSISTED START-UP

i. Inspect cabinets for foreign objects.
ii. Inspect Battery Units.
iii. Inspect Power Modules.
1. Check all UPS and external maintenance bypass cabinet internal control wiring connections.
3. Check all UPS and external maintenance bypass cabinet terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs for
tightness.
07/2016 edition p. 385

D. Site Testing:
E. On-Site Operational Training: During the factory assisted start-up, operational training for site personnel
shall include key pad operation, LED indicators, start-up and shutdown procedures, maintenance bypass
and AC disconnect operation, and alarm information
A. Worldwide service: The UPS manufacturer shall have a worldwide service organization. Available,
consisting of factory trained field service personnel to perform start-up, preventative maintenance, and
service of the UPS system and power equipment. The service organization shall offer 24 hours a day, 7
days a week, and 365 days a year service support.
B. Replacement parts: Parts shall be available through the worldwide service organization: 24 hours a day, 7
days a week, and 365 days a year. The worldwide service organization shall be capable of shipping parts
within 4 working hours or on the next available flight, so that the parts may be delivered to the customer
site within 24 hours.
C. Maintenance contracts: A complete offering of preventative and full service maintenance contracts for the
UPS system and the battery system shall be available. All contract work shall be performed by Schneider
Electric factory trained service personnel.
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 386

Symmetra PX 3:3 – 96 to 160 kW
Schneider Electric
Symmetra PX
96/160 kW
Uninterruptible Power System
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
SECTION [26 33 63] [16611]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.7 SUMMARY
A. This specification describes the operation and functionality of a continuous duty, three-phase, solid-state,
static Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) hereafter referred to as the UPS. The UPS shall utilize a rack-
mounted redundant, scalable array architecture. The system power train shall be comprised of
swappable/trained-user replaceable 16 kVA/16 kW power modules, which shall operate in parallel. Each 16
kVA/16 kW power module contains a full rated input rectifier/boost converter (hereafter referred to as Input
Converter), full rated output inverter, and battery charging circuit. The system shall also comprise of a user-
replaceable continuous duty swappable bypass static switch module, swappable/trained-user replaceable
battery modules, redundant control modules, redundant logic power supplies, and LCD interface display. All of
the above system components are housed in a standard, 600 mm wide, 1070 mm deep, and 2000 mm high
equipment rack.
B. In addition, this specification describes the performance, functionality, and design of the Maintenance Bypass,
Power Distribution and extended Runtime cabinet, hereafter referred to as the PDU-XR, the Battery System,
and connectivity solutions.
C. The UPS and associated equipment shall operate in conjunction with a primary power supply and an output
distribution system to provide quality uninterrupted power for mission critical, electronic equipment load.
D. All programming and miscellaneous components for a fully operational system as described in this
specification shall be available as part of the UPS.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
1.8.1.1.1 Proposal Submittals:

1.8.1.1.1.1 As bid system bill of materials.
1.8.1.1.1.2 Product catalog sheets or equipment brochures.
1.8.1.1.1.3 Product guide specifications.
1.8.1.1.1.4 System single-line operation diagram.
1.8.1.1.1.5 Installation information, including weights and dimensions.
1.8.1.1.1.6 Information about terminal locations for power and control connections.
1.8.1.1.1.7 Drawings for requested optional accessories.
1.8.1.1.2 Delivery Submittals:
07/2016 edition p. 387

1.8.1.1.2.1 Installation manual, which includes instructions for storage, handling, examination, preparation,
1.8.1.1.2.2 User manual, which includes operating instructions.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. The UPS shall be sized for _____ kVA and _____ kW load.
B. The UPS battery shall be sized for _____ at a Power Factor of_____ for _____ minutes.
2.2 SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
A. System Capacity: The system shall be rated for full kW output in the following frame sizes:
1. 160 kVA/kW - Can be configured with up to (10), 16 kW power modules for N+0
B. Input:
1. AC Input Nominal Voltage: 380 V, 400 V or 415 V with 3 Phase 4 wire, with ground 50/60 Hz
2. AC Input Voltage Window: 200 V - 477 V
(If 100% load: 340 V-477 V providing charging to the battery system, depending on load - -system can be
recharged from as low as 200 V)
3. Short Circuit Withstand Rating: 30,000 Symmetrical Amperes with gG fuse in front of system
4. Maximum Frequency Range: 40-70 Hz
5. Input Power Factor: > .99 at greater than 25% load
6. Input Current Distortion with no additional filters: < 5% at 100% load
7. Soft-Start: Shall be linear from 0-100% input current and shall not exhibit inrush. This shall take place over
a 15 second time period
C. UPS Output:
1. AC Output Nominal Output: 380V/400V/415V, 3 Phase 4 wire with ground, 50/60 Hz.
2. AC Output Voltage Regulation:
+
a. /- 1% For 100 % linear load
+
b. /- 3% for 100% non-linear load
+
3. Voltage Transient Response: /- 5% maximum for 100% load step
4. Voltage Transient Recovery within <50 milliseconds
5. Output Voltage Harmonic Distortion according to IEC/EN62040-3:
a. <2% THD maximum for a 100% linear load
b. <6% THD maximum for a 100% non-linear load
6. Overload Rating:
a. Normal Operation:
1) 150% for 60 seconds in normal operation
2) 125% for 10 minutes in normal operation
3) 150% for 60 seconds in battery operation
b. Bypass Operation:
1) 110% continuous (with PDU-XR)
2) 1000% for 100 milliseconds
7. System AC-AC Efficiency: >95% at 35 - 100% load
8. Output Power Factor Rating: For loads exhibiting a power factor of .5 leading to .5 lagging no derating of
the UPS shall be required.
A. Normal operation: The input converter and output inverter shall operate in an on-line manner to continuously
regulate power to the critical load. The input and output converters shall be capable of full battery recharge
while simultaneously providing regulated power to the load for all line and load conditions within the range of
the UPS specifications.
07/2016 edition p. 388

B. Battery: Upon failure of the AC input source, the critical load shall continue being supplied by the output
inverter, which shall derive its power from the battery system. There shall be no interruption in power to the
critical load during both transfers to battery operation and retransfers from battery to normal operation.
C. Recharge: Upon restoration of the AC input source, the input converter and output inverter shall simultaneously
recharge the battery and provide regulated power to the critical load.
D. Static Bypass: The static bypass shall be used to provide transfer of critical load from the Inverter output to
the bypass source. This transfer, along with its retransfer, shall take place with no power interruption to the
critical load. In the event of an emergency, this transfer shall be an automatic function.
E. Maintenance Bypass: The system shall be equipped with an external make-before-break Maintenance Bypass
Cabinet (MBC) to electrically isolate the UPS during routine maintenance and service of the UPS. The MBC shall
completely isolate both the UPS input and output connections.
A. Input power converter:

1. The input power converters of the system are housed within the parallel connected, removable power
modules, and shall constantly control the power imported from the mains input of the system, to provide the
necessary UPS power for precise regulation of the DC bus voltage, battery charging, and Main Inverter
regulated output power.
2. Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion: The input current THD shall be held to 5% or less at full system,
while providing conditioned power to the critical load bus, and charging the batteries under steady-state
operating conditions. This shall be true while supporting loads of both a linear or non-linear type. This shall be
accomplished with no additional filters, magnetic devices, or other components
3. Soft-Start Operation: As a standard feature, the UPS shall contain soft-start functionality, capable of limiting
the input current from 0-100% of the nominal input over a default 15 second period, when returning to the AC
utility source from battery operation. The change in current over the change in time shall take place in a linear
manner throughout the entire operation. (di/dt= constant).
4. Magnetization Inrush Current: The UPS shall exhibit 0 inrush current as a standard product. If provided
with an optional isolation transformer, inrush shall be limited to 6 times the nominal input current of the
transformer.
5. Input Current Limit:
a. The input converter shall control and limit the input current draw from utility to 150% of the UPS output.
During conditions where input current limit is active, the UPS shall be able to support 100% load, charge
batteries, and provide voltage regulation.
b. In cases where the source voltage to the UPS is nominal and the applied UPS load is equal to or less
than 100% of UPS capacity, input current shall not exceed 125% of UPS output current, while importing
necessary power for system losses.
6. Charging:
a. The battery charging shall keep the DC bus float voltage of +/- 218v, +/-1%.
b. The battery charging circuit shall contain a temperature compensation circuit, which will regulate the
c. The battery charging circuit shall remain active when in requested Static Bypass and in Normal
Operation.
7. Back-feed Protection: The above-mentioned logic controlled contactor also provides the back-feed
protection.
B. Output inverter:
1. The UPS output inverter shall constantly recreate the UPS output voltage waveform by converting the DC
bus voltage to AC voltage through a set of IGBT driven bi-directional power converters. In both normal
operation and battery operation, the output inverters shall create an output voltage independent of the mains
input voltage. Input voltage anomalies such as brown-outs, spikes, surges, sags, and outages shall not affect
the amplitude or sinusoidal nature of the recreated output voltage sine wave of the output inverters.
2. Overload Capability: The output power converters shall be capable of 1000% for short-circuit clearing.
Steady-state overload conditions, of up to 150% of system capacity, shall be sustained by the inverter for 60
seconds in normal and battery operation. Should overloads persist past the outlined time limitation, the critical
load will be switched to the automatic static bypass output of the UPS.
3. Output Contactor: The output inverter shall be provided with an output mechanical contactor to provide
physical isolation of the inverter from the critical bus. With this feature a failed inverter shall be removed from
the critical bus.
4. Battery Protection: The inverter shall be provided with monitoring and control circuits to limit the level of
07/2016 edition p. 389

5. Redundancy: The UPS shall be configured with redundant output inverters, each with semiconductor fusing,
and logic controlled contactors to remove a failed component from the critical bus.
C. Static Bypass:
1. As part of the UPS, a system static bypass switch shall be provided. The system static bypass shall provide
no break transfer of the critical load from the Inverter output to the static bypass input source during times
where maintenance is required, or the inverter cannot support the critical bus. Such times may be due to
prolonged or severe overloads, or UPS failure. The UPS and static bypass switch shall constantly monitor the
auxiliary contacts of their respective circuit breakers, as well as the bypass source voltage, and inhibit
potentially unsuccessful transfers to static bypass from taking place. a. Rated voltage: … 380/400/415 …
volts rms, adjustable via the user interface (see section 10), within tolerances of +/- 3% in order to take into
account voltage drops in the cables.
2. As design of the static switch power path shall consist of Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCR) with a
continuous duty rating of 125% of the UPS output rating.
3. Automatic Transfers: An automatic transfer of load to static bypass shall take place whenever the load on
the critical bus exceeds the overload rating of the UPS. Automatic transfers of the critical load from static
bypass back to normal operation shall take place when the overload condition is removed from the critical
bus output of the system. Automatic transfers of load to static bypass shall also take place if for any reason
the UPS cannot support the critical bus.
4. Manual Transfers: Manually initiated transfers to and from static bypass shall be initiated through the UPS
display interface.
5. Overloads: The static bypass shall be rated and capable of handling overloads equal to or less than 125% of
the rated system output continuously. For instantaneous overloads caused by inrush current from magnetic
devices, or short circuit conditions, the static bypass shall be capable of sustaining overloads of 1000% of
system capacity for periods of up to 100 milliseconds.
6. Modular: The static bypass switch shall be of a modular design.
7. System Protection: As a requirement, back-feed protection in the static bypass circuit shall also be
incorporated in the system design. To achieve back-feed protection, a mechanical contactor in series with the
bypass SCR(s) shall be controlled by the UPS/static switch, to open immediately upon sensing a condition
where back-feeding of the static switch by any source connected to the critical output bus of the system is
occurring. One such condition could be a result of a shorted SCR.
A. Storage Ambient Temperature: -15 °C to +40 °C.
B. Operating Ambient Temperature: 0 °C to +40 °C (+25 °C is ideal for most battery types.
C. Relative humidity: 0 to 95% non-condensing.
D. Altitude: Maximum installation with no derating of the UPS output shall be 1000 meters above sea level:
1. 1000 m: 100% load

2. 1500 m: 95% load
2. 2000 m: 91% load
3. 2500 m: 86% load
4. 3000 m: 82% load
2.6 BATTERY
A. The UPS battery shall be of modular construction made up of trained-user replaceable, swappable, fused, battery
modules. Each battery module shall be monitored for voltage and temperature for use by the UPS battery
diagnostic, and temperature compensated charger circuitry.
E. The battery jars housed within each removable battery module shall be of the Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA)
type.
F. The UPS shall incorporate a battery management system to continuously monitor the health of each removable
battery module. This system shall notify the user in the event that a failed or weak battery module is found.
07/2016 edition p. 390

G. The batteries shall have design life of 5 to 8 years and a battery service life of 3 to 5 years. The battery casing
shall be flame retardant type.
A. Control Logic: The UPS shall be controlled by two fully redundant,

user-replaceable/swappable control modules. These modules shall have separate, optically isolated,
communication paths to the power and static switch modules. Logic power for the control modules shall be
derived from redundant power supplies, each having a separate AC and DC input and output. The
communication of the control modules shall be of Controller Area Network (CAN Bus).
B. Display Unit: A microprocessor controlled display unit shall be located on a hinged door in the front of the
system. The display shall consist of an alphanumeric display with backlight, four LEDs for quick status overview,
and a keypad consisting of pushbutton switches.
C. Metered Data: The following metered data, shall be available on the alphanumeric display:
5. Input Frequency
6. Battery voltage
D. Event log: The display unit shall allow the user to display a time and date stamped log of the most recent status
and alarm events.
E. Alarms: The display unit shall allow the user to display a log of all active alarms. The following minimum set of
alarm conditions shall be available:
14. Number of External Battery Cabinets increased
15. Number of External Battery Cabinets decreased
19. On Battery
07/2016 edition p. 391

36. Backfeed contactor stuck in OFF position
37. Backfeed contactor stuck in ON position
40. System in Forced Bypass
41. Fault, Bypass Relay Malfunction
42. High DC Warning
43. High DC Shutdown
F. Controls: The following controls or programming functions shall be accomplished by use of the display unit.
1. Silence audible Alarm.
2. Display or set the date and time.
3. Enable or disable the automatic restart feature.
4. Transfer critical load to and from static bypass.
5. Test battery condition on demand.
6. Set intervals for automatic battery tests.
7. Adjust set points for different alarms.
G. Potential Free (Dry) Contacts: The following potential free contacts shall be available on an
optional relay interface board:
1. Normal Operation.
2. Battery Operation.
3. Bypass Operation.
4. Common Fault.
5. Low Battery.
6. UPS Off.
H. Communication Interface Board: A communication interface board shall provide the

following communication ports which can be used simultaneously:
1. RS232 Serial Port #1.
A. Network Adaptor: The Ethernet Web/SNMP Adaptor shall allow one or more network management systems
(NMS) to monitor and manage the UPS in TCP/IP network environments. The management information base
(MIB) shall be provided in DOS and UNIX "tar" formats.
B. Unattended Shutdown:
1. The UPS, in conjunction with the network adaptor, shall be capable of gracefully shutting down one or more
operating systems.
2. The UPS shall also be capable of using an RS232 port to communicate by means of serial communications
to gracefully shut down one or more operating systems during an on battery situation.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Battery Disconnect Breaker: Each UPS system shall have a 320 A 500 V DC rated, thermal magnetic trip
molded case circuit breaker. Each circuit breaker shall be equipped shunt trip mechanisms and 1A/1B auxiliary
contacts. The circuit breakers are to be located within the UPS enclosure or as part of a line-up-and-match
type battery cabinet.
B. PDU-XR: The maintenance bypass cabinet shall provide power to the critical load bus from the bypass source,
during times where maintenance or service of the UPS is required. 315A GL fuse must be in front of the mains
input and if dual mains a 250 A gL fuse on the bypass input must be installed.
C. Wall-mount Maintenance Bypass Panel: The wall-mount maintenance bypass panel provides maintenance
bypass without modular power distribution or batteries.
07/2016 edition p. 392
The following three methods of remote UPS monitoring shall be available:
A. Web Monitoring: Remote monitoring shall be available via a web browser such as Internet
Explorer.
B. RS232 Monitoring: Remote UPS monitoring shall be possible via either RS232 or contact closure signals from
the UPS.
C. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP): Remote UPS Monitoring shall be possible through a
3.39 Software Compatibility: The UPS manufacturer shall have available software to support graceful shutdown
and remote monitoring with PowerChute Network Shutdown (PCNS) for the following operating system families:
4. Microsoft Windows
5. MAC OS X
6. Hyper-V
7. VMware
8. Linux
9. Unix
The full and updated supported OS compatibility chart can be found here:
http://www.apc.com/whitepaper/?um=200
A. Standards: All equipment shall be designed and built in accordance with accepted engineering practice and
applicable international standards, in particular the standards listed below.
1. 89/336/EEC
2. 73/23EEC
3. EN/IEC62040-1-1, EN/IEC/UL60950-1
4. EN50091-2/IEC62040-2 (class A), FCC15A
5. IEC EN/IEC62040-3
6. VFI-SS-111
10. IEC62040-2/EN/IEC 61000-4-5 Level 3, performance criteria A
3.4 FACTORY ASSISTED START-UP
2. Verify installation per manufacturer s instructions.
4. Inspect Battery Units.
5. Inspect Power Modules.
1. Check all UPS and external maintenance bypass cabinet internal control wiring connections.
3. Check all UPS and external maintenance bypass cabinet terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs for
tightness.
07/2016 edition p. 393

D. Site Testing:
E. On-Site Operational Training: During the factory assisted start-up, operational training for site personnel shall
include key pad operation, LED indicators, start-up and shutdown procedures, maintenance bypass and AC
A. Worldwide service: The UPS manufacturer shall have a worldwide service organization
Available, consisting of factory trained field service personnel to perform start-up, preventative maintenance, and
service of the UPS system and power equipment. The service organization shall offer 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week, 365 days a year service support.
B. Replacement parts: Parts shall be available through the worldwide service organization 24 hours a day, 7 days
a week, and 365 days a year. The worldwide service organization shall be capable of shipping parts within 4
working hours or on the next available flight, so that the parts may be delivered to the customer site within 24
hours.
B. Maintenance contracts: A complete offering of preventative and full service maintenance contracts for the
UPS system and the battery system shall be available. All contract work shall be performed by Schneider Electric
factory trained service personnel.
3.6 TRAINING
A. UPS service training workshop: A UPS service training workshop shall be available from the UPS manufacturer.
The service training workshop shall include a combination of lecture and practical instruction with hands-on
laboratory sessions. The service training workshop shall include instruction about safety procedures, UPS
operational theory, sub-assembly identification and operation, system controls and adjustment, preventative
maintenance, and troubleshooting.
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 394

Symmetra PX 3:3 – 100 kW to 2 MW
Schneider Electric
SYMMETRA PX 250/500 kW [Parallel]
[Single UPS (100 kW to 500 kW)] [Parallel UPSs (100 kW to 2 MW)]
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
SECTION [26 33 53] [16611]
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.52 SUMMARY
supply (UPS) as required for the complete performance of the work, and as shown on the Drawings and as
herein specified.
three-phase, solid state, on-line double conversion static UPS.
1. The UPS shall utilize a rack-mounted N+1 redundant, scalable array architecture. The system power train
shall be comprised of 25 kVA/25 kW power modules and shall be capable of being configured for N+X
redundant operation at the rated system load.
[In parallel systems operating at a load where the system has N+1 system-level redundancy or greater, the
parallel configuration shall facilitate the replacement of individual UPSs while the system remains in normal
operation, without the requirement to transfer to bypass.]
2. Each swappable/trained-user replaceable 25 kVA/25 kW power module shall contain a fully rated, power
factor corrected input rectifier/boost converter hereafter referred to as the PFC input stage, a fully rated
output inverter, battery charging circuit and field replaceable fans. Power module fans shall be variable
speed controlled and capable of maintaining the system in the event of a single fan failure. The system shall
also be comprised of a swappable continuous duty bypass static switch module, redundant control modules,
redundant logic power supplies, and touch screen user interface/display. Swappable/trained-
user-replaceable battery modules shall be available as an option.
3. All of the above system components shall be housed in standard NetShelter SX Racks with one of the
following dimensions:
a. 600 mm wide by 1070 mm deep by 2000 mm high (I/O Frame or Power Frame)
b. 750 mm wide by 1070 mm deep by 2000 mm high (Battery Frame]
c. 300 mm wide by 1070 mm deep by 2000 mm high (optional Battery Side Car or optional Bottom Feed
Frame)
d. 1000 mm wide by 1070 mm deep by 2000 mm high (optional I/O Frame with Maintenance Bypass with
Distribution). [Maintenance Bypass Panels for parallel systems will be customized and will have custom
dimensions based on the configuration.]
The racks shall require no rear access for maintenance.
07/2016 edition p. 395

4. In addition, this Section describes the performance, functionality, and design of the optional maintenance
bypass cabinet with output distribution, hereafter referred to as the maintenance bypass and the battery
system. The maintenance bypass shall not be included or supported by UPSs in parallel configurations.
5. The UPS and associated equipment shall operate in conjunction with a primary power supply and an output
6. All programming and miscellaneous components for a fully operational system as described in this Section
shall be available as part of the UPS.
1.53 REFERENCES

1. ANSI/IEEE 519, "Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of Static Power Converters"

1.54 [SINGLE][PARALLEL] SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
INSERT APPLICABLE VALUES IN SUBPARAGRAPHS BELOW.
1. The UPS shall be sized for [____] kVA and [____] kW load.
2. [The parallel system shall be comprised of [____] UPSs for N+ [____] system-level redundancy.]
3. [The parallel system shall be sized for [____] kVA and [____] kW load.]
4. The UPS battery shall be sized for [____] kVA at a power factor of [____] for [____] minutes.
1. System Capacity: The system shall be rated for full kW output in the following frame sizes:
a. 250 kVA/kW—can be configured with up to ten (10) 25 kW power modules for 250 kW N+0 or 225 kW
N+1 module-level redundancy.
b. 500 kVA/kW—can be configured with up to twenty (20) 25 kW modules for 500 kW N+0 or 475 kW N+1
module-level redundancy
c. [2MW—can be configured with 25kW power modules for up to 2MW N+0 redundancy or up to 1.5MW
N+1 system-level redundancy]
2. Input: The system input shall be configurable as either single or dual mains derived from a three phase wye
source. Standard cable entry shall be through the top. Bottom cable entry shall also be facilitated.
Depending on the specific configuration, the use of the bottom feed enclosure may be required. An option
shall be available to facilitate the connection of NEMA 2 compression lugs for main input, bypass input, DC
input, and output cable connections.
a. AC Input Nominal Voltage: System voltage shall support 3-phase + neutral + ground or 3-phase +
ground in a dual or single mains configuration and be selectable at the front panel by service personnel
with the following options:
1) 380 volts, 400 volts, 415 volts, and 480 volts.
b. AC Input Voltage Window:
1) ±15 percent for full performance (340 to 460 volts at 400 volts, 408 volts to 552 volts at 480 volts).
2) -50 percent for reduced load (200 volts at 400 volts, 240 volts at 480 volts).
c. Short Circuit Withstand Rating:
1) UPS: 65,000 Symmetrical Amperes
2) Optional Maintenance Bypass with Distribution Panel: 50,000 Symmetrical Amperes or lowest
rated subfeed circuit breaker
3) Custom Switchgear: 65,000 Symmetrical Amperes or as specified
4) Lowest Rated Subfeed Circuit Breaker (60-100A) for Maintenance Bypass: 22,000
Symmetrical Amperes
07/2016 edition p. 396
5) Lowest Rated Subfeed Circuit Breaker (125-400A) for Maintenance Bypass: 25,000
Symmetrical Amperes
6) Custom Subfeed Circuit Breakers for Maintenance Bypass: Subfeed circuit breakers with a
short circuit withstand rating greater than 22,000 Symmetrical Amperes or 25,000 Symmetrical
Amperes shall be available as a custom option.
d. Maximum Frequency Range: 40 to 70 hertz.
1) Frequency shall be synchronized to bypass input when available over the standard range of 57 to
63 hertz. Optional frequency tolerance range shall be configurable from 0.5 percent to 8 percent
from front panel. Default shall be +/-1% (+/-0.6Hz at 60Hz).
e. Input Power Factor:
1) Greater than 0.995 with load at 100 percent.
2) Greater than 0.99 with loads above 50 percent.
3) Greater than 0.97 with loads above 25 percent.
f. Input Current in Normal Operation:
1) As a percentage of output current, with no charging, will be limited to a maximum of 105 percent of
system capacity
g. Input Current Distortion with No Additional Filters:
1) Less than 5 percent.
h. Soft-Start:
1) Shall be linear from 0 percent to 100 percent input current and shall not exhibit inrush. This shall
take place over an owner-selectable 1 second to 40 second time period with a factory default of
15 seconds.
i. Symmetra PX 250/500 kW 480 V is OSHPD pre-approved when the seismic anchoring kits are installed
3. UPS Output:
a. AC Output Nominal Output: System voltage shall support 3-phases + neutral + ground or 3-phases +
ground be selectable at the graphical user interface by service personnel with the following options:
1) 380 volts, 400 volts, 415 volts, and 480 volts.
b. AC Output Voltage Distortion: Less than 2 percent at 100 percent linear load, less than 3 percent for
SMPS load as defined by IEC 62040-3.
c. AC Output Voltage Regulation: ±1 percent for 100 percent linear or non-linear load.
d. Voltage Transient Response: ±5 percent maximum RMS change in a half cycle at load step 0 percent
to 100 percent or 100 percent to 0 percent.
e. Voltage Transient Recovery: Within less than 50 milliseconds.
f. Output Voltage Harmonic Distortion: Less than 2 percent from 0 to 100% load. Less than 3 percent
full non-linear load according to IEC/EN62040-3.
g. Overload Rating:
a) 150 percent for 60 seconds before transfer to bypass.
b) 125 percent for 10 minutes before transfer to bypass.
2) Battery Operation: 125 percent for 30 seconds (up to 10 minutes with fully configured battery
solution)
a) 125 percent continuous at 480 volts.
b) 110 percent continuous at 400 volts
c) 1000 percent for 100 milliseconds.
h. System AC-AC Efficiency:
1) Normal operation greater than 96 percent at 40 percent to 100 percent load.
2) Battery operation greater than 95 percent at 40 percent to 100 percent load.
i. Output Power Factor Rating: 0.5 leading to 0.5 lagging without any derating.
4. Charge current:
a. 20% of charging capacity when the load is less than 90%
b. 10% of charging capacity with 100% load
5. Parallel cabling:
a. The standard cable distance shall be 25 m (81.3 ft)
b. Custom cables of other lengths shall be accommodated.
c. The maximum cable distance shall be 75 m (244 ft) across all UPSs in the installation.
6. Regulatory compliance: The UPS shall comply with the following standards:
a. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1) UL 891, "Standard for Dead-Front Switchboards" (copyrighted by UL, ANSI approved).
2) UL 1558, "Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear."
3) UL 1778, "Standard for Uninterruptible Power Supply Equipment" (copyrighted by UL, ANSI
approved).
07/2016 edition p. 397
4) UL 60950, ―Standard for Information Technology Equipment.‖

5) CSA C22.2 No.107.3-05 Uninterruptible Power Systems
b. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC):
1) IEC 61000-4-2, ―Electromagnetic Compatibility - Testing and Measurement Techniques;
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Test.‖
2) IEC 61000-4-3, ―Electromagnetic Compatibility - Testing and Measurement Techniques; Radiated,
Radio Frequency, Electromagnetic Field Immunity Test.‖
3) IEC 61000-4-4, ―Electromagnetic Compatibility - Testing and Measurement Techniques; Electrical
Fast Transient/Burst Immunity Test.‖
4) IEC 61000-4-5, ―Electromagnetic Compatibility - Testing and Measurement Techniques; Surge
Immunity Test.‖
5) IEC 62040-2, ―Uninterruptible Power Systems - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Requirements,‖
6) IEC 62040-3, ―Uninterruptible Power Systems - Method of Specifying the Performance and Test
Requirements.‖
1.55 SUBMITTALS
following:
detailed in manufacturer’s standard product data, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Installation information, including, but not limited to, weights and dimensions.
1. Submit system single-line operation diagram.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data to include in operation and
maintenance manuals, including, but not limited to, safe and correct operation of UPS functions.
handling, examination, preparation, installation, and start-up of UPS.
instructions.
A. Qualifications:
standards.
Project.
authorities.
1. Where applicable, the UPS shall also be designed in accordance with publications from the following
organizations and committees:
a. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
07/2016 edition p. 398
b. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

c. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
d. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE); ANSI/IEEE 519.
e. ISO 9001
f. ISO 14001
g. IEC 61000-4-2.
1) Performance: Minimum Level 3, Criterion A.
h. IEC 61000-4-3.
i. IEC 61000-4-4.
j. IEC 61000-4-5.
k. IEC 62040-2, UL1778 (CUL), UL60950-1
l. EN50091-2 / IEC62040 (Class A), FCC15A
m. VFI-SS-111 performance level compliance (Voltage and Frequency Independent).
n. VFI-SS-112 protection class (Voltage and Frequency Independent).
A. Environmental Requirements: Do not install solid state UPS until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet
work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and
humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
1. Temperature:
a. Storage Ambient Temperature: -15 °C to 40 °C (5 °F to 104 °F)
b. Storage Ambient Temperature without batteries: –30 °C to 70 °C (–22 °F to 158 °F) without batteries).
c. Operating Ambient Temperature: 32 °F to 104 °F (0 °C to 40 °C)
d. Ideal Operating Ambient Temperature (for most battery types): 25 °C (77 °F)
2. Humidity:
a. Relative Humidity: 0 percent to 95 percent.
b. Operating Relative Humidity: 0 percent to 95 percent non-condensing.
c. Altitude: Maximum installation with no derating of the UPS output shall be 3280 feet (1000 m) above
sea level. The UPS capacity shall be derated for altitude as follows:
1) 4921 feet (1500 m), 95 percent load.
3. Audible Noise (As Measured 3 Feet [914 mm] From Surface):
a. At 480 Volt Operation (at 25 °C [77 °F ]):
1) 54 dBA at 100 percent load.
b. At 400 Volt Operation (at 25 °C [77 °F ]):
1.59 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: The Contractor shall warrant the work of this Section to be in accordance with the Contract
07/2016 edition p. 399
B. Additional Owner Rights: The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under
1.60 MAINTENANCE
system shall be available from the manufacturer. Contract work shall be performed by factory trained service
personnel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.43 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Product specified is ―Symmetra PX 250/500 kW‖ as manufactured by Schneider Electric. Items
specified are to establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, and appearance. Equivalent
products by other manufacturers are acceptable. The Architect/Engineer will be the sole judge of the basis of
what is equivalent.
A. Normal: The PFC input stage and output inverter shall operate in an on-line manner to continuously regulate
power to the critical load. The input and output converters shall be capable of full battery recharge while
simultaneously providing regulated power to the load for all line and load conditions within the range of the UPS
specifications.
B. Battery: Upon failure of the AC input source, the critical load shall continue being supplied by the output inverter,
which shall derive its power from the battery system. There shall be no interruption in power to the critical load
during both transfers to battery operation and retransfers from battery to normal operation. Upon restoration of
utility power to the UPS input, the UPS shall recharge the battery.
C. Static Bypass: The static bypass shall be used to provide controller transfer of critical load from the inverter
output to the bypass source. This transfer, along with its retransfer, shall take place with no power interruption to
the critical load. In the event of a UPS output fault or significant output overload emergency, this transfer shall be
an automatic function. Manual transfer to static bypass (called ―requested bypass‖) shall be available in order to
facilitate a controlled transfer to maintenance bypass. [For parallel systems, the static bypass switches shall be
installed in parallel.]
D. Maintenance Bypass: The system shall be equipped with an optional integrated, bus connected external
maintenance bypass to electrically isolate the UPS during routine maintenance and service of the UPS. The
maintenance bypass shall allow for the completely electrical isolation of the UPS. An option for an external
make-before-break maintenance bypass panel shall be available.
E. Parallel Operation: The system shall have the option to install up to four (4) UPSs in parallel configuration for
redundancy or capacity.
1. The parallel UPS system shall be of the same design, voltage, and frequency. UPS modules of different size ratings
shall be permitted to be paralleled together for purposes of increased capacity or UPS module redundancy. The UPSs
in the parallel configuration shall not be required to have the same load capacity rating.
2. Parallel Capacity: With N+0 system-level redundancy, up to 2MW of load can be supported by the system.
3. Parallel Redundancy: With N+1 system-level redundancy, up to 1.5MW of load can be supported by the
system, and only the UPS being replaced must be isolated from the source (bypass operation is not required
for the entire system during the UPS replacement procedure).
4. Output control: A load sharing circuit shall be incorporated into the parallel control circuits to ensure that under no-
load conditions, no circulating current exists between modules. This feature also allows each UPS to share equal
amounts of the total critical load bus. The output voltage, output frequency, output phase angle, and output
impedance of each module shall operate in uniformity to ensure correct load sharing. This control function shall not
require any additional footprint and shall be an integral function of each UPS. The static bypass switches shall be
connected in parallel.
5. Parallel System Controls: To avoid single points of failure, the UPS system shall have no single dedicated control
system designed to control the operation of the parallel UPS system. Control of and direction of parallel UPSs shall
take place via a master/slave relationship, where the first UPS to receive logic power asserts itself as a master. In the
07/2016 edition p. 400
event of a master failure, a slave UPS shall take the role of master and assume the responsibility of the previous
master UPS. Regardless of which UPS is master or slave, user changes to the system status, such as request for
bypass, can be done from any UPS connected to the bus and all UPS on the bus shall transfer in simultaneously.
6. Communication: Communication between modules shall be connected so that the removal of any single cable shall
not jeopardize the integrity of the parallel communication system. Load sharing communications shall be
galvanically isolated for purposes of fault tolerance between UPS modules. A UPS module's influence over load
sharing shall be inhibited in any mode where the UPS inverter is not supporting its output bus. Transfers to and from
bypass can be initiated from any online UPS in the system.
7. Display: Each UPS multi-color LCD touch screen user interface shall be capable of using an active touch screen
mimic bus to show the quantity of UPS(s) connected to the critical bus, as well as the general status of each UPS,
such as circuit breaker status information. Any touch screen display shall support the configuration of the [entire
parallel] system and shall provide event and alarm data for all UPSs in the parallel configuration. A Virtual Display
Application shall be available for download to the customer’s computer and shall support remote monitoring of a
complete system with up to 4 UPSs in parallel.
8. Battery runtime: Each UPS must have its own battery solution. The battery solution for the entire system
can be a combination of standard and third-party batteries, but each UPS must use only one battery solution
– either standard or third-party batteries.
9. Switchgear: A custom switchgear option shall be required for parallel operation.
F. External Sync: Synchronize the output of the UPS with any other independent source for use with downstream
static transfer switches. The synchronization at the UPS is controlled from an input on the I/O relay board and can
be controlled by a programmable logic controller. The source input is either connected to a terminal in the
maintenance bypass with distribution for a UPS with maintenance bypass or to a terminal in the external
switchgear controller for a UPS without maintenance bypass. (Depending on the desired configuration, additional
PLC hardware and programming may be required and shall be offered separately by Schneider Electric.)
G. MegaTie: The UPS or block of UPSs may have the ability to transfer the load between them without active
load sharing. The Mega Tie mode will be active for 60 seconds after it has been requested from a digital input
on the relay board. The user has 60 seconds to transfer his load from one unit to another. After the 60
seconds, the UPS will automatically transfer back to normal operation. (Depending on the desired configuration,
additional PLC hardware and programming may be required and shall be offered separately by Schneider
Electric.)
H. EcoMode: In bypass operation, an even higher operating efficiency may be achieved without sacrificing
protection when there are good power conditions. Depending on configuration, efficiency can exceed 99%.The
load remains in bypass mode until the input voltage exceeds tolerance levels, and then enters full protection
mode. UPS performance Class B cannot be guaranteed during short circuit error scenarios and other
conditions. This setting is disabled by default and can be configured using the touch screen display.
2.45 PFC INPUT STAGE
A. General: The PFC input stage converters of the system shall be housed within the removable power modules,
and the IGBT converters shall constantly control the power imported from the mains input of the system, to
provide the necessary UPS power for precise regulation of the DC bus voltage, battery charging, and main
inverter regulated output power. These power modules shall be connected in parallel within the UPS frame.
B. Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion: The input current THDI shall be held to less than 5 percent at system
load greater than 50 percent while providing conditioned power to the critical load bus, and charging the batteries
under steady-state operating conditions. This shall be true while supporting both a linear or non-linear load. This
shall be accomplished without the requirement for additional or optional filters, magnetic devices, or other
components.
C. Soft-Start Operation: As a standard feature, the UPS shall contain soft-start functionality, capable of limiting the
input current from 0 percent to 100 percent of the nominal input over a default 10 second period, when returning
to the AC utility source from battery operation. The change in current over the change in time shall take place in
a linear manner throughout the entire operation.
D. Magnetization Inrush Current: The UPS shall exhibit zero inrush current. The default soft-start is 15 seconds.
E. Input Current Limit:
07/2016 edition p. 401

1. The PFC input stage shall control and limit the input current draw from utility to 124 percent of the UPS
output. During conditions where input current limit is active, the UPS shall be able to support 100 percent
load at -15% utility power and no charge power.
2. In cases where the source voltage to the UPS is nominal and the applied UPS load is equal to or less than
100 percent of UPS capacity, input current shall not exceed 116 percent of UPS output current, while
providing full battery recharge power and importing necessary power to account for system losses.
F. Redundancy: The UPS shall be capable of being configured with redundant PFC input stages, each with
semiconductor fusing, and logic-controlled contactors to isolate a failed module from the input bus.
G. Charging:
1. The battery charging shall keep the DC bus float voltage of ±327 volts, ±1 percent.
2. The battery charging circuit shall contain a temperature compensation circuit, which shall regulate the
3. The battery charging circuit shall remain active when in static bypass and in normal operation.
4. The UPS shall be capable of reducing the battery charging current under low input voltage conditions as
long as utility power for the PFC is being provided.
5. Battery charge shall be limited to 10 percent of the system capacity by default (or optionally, 20% with
reduced load).
6. The battery charging circuit will support boost, auto boost and equalization functions
7. An input connection will be provided that will allow the user to inhibit boost charging.
8. The UPS shall be capable of reducing the battery charging current down to zero based on user defined
input.
H. Backfeed Protection: The above mentioned logic-controlled contactor shall also provide the backfeed
protection required by UL 1778.
2.46 OUTPUT INVERTER
A. General: The UPS output inverter shall constantly develop the UPS output voltage waveform by converting the
DC bus voltage to AC voltage through a set of IGBT driven bi-directional power converters. In both normal
input voltage. Input voltage anomalies such as brown-outs, spikes, surges, sags, and outages shall not affect the
amplitude or sinusoidal nature of the output voltage sine wave of the inverters.
B. Overload Capability: The output power converters shall be capable of 230 percent for short circuit clearing.
Steady-state overload conditions of up to 150 percent of system capacity shall be sustained by the inverter for
60 seconds in normal operation. Steady-state overload conditions of up to 125 percent of system capacity shall
be sustained by the inverter for 10 minutes in normal operation. Overloads persisting past the outlined time
limitation the critical load shall be switched to the automatic static bypass output of the UPS.
C. Output Contactor: The output inverter shall be provided with an output mechanical contactor to provide physical
isolation of the inverter from the critical bus. With this feature a failed inverter shall be isolated from the critical
bus.
D. Battery Protection: The inverter shall be provided with monitoring and control circuits to limit the level of
E. Redundancy: The UPS shall be capable of being configured with redundant output inverters, each with
semiconductor fusing, and logic-controlled contactors to remove a failed component from the input, DC, and
output critical bus.
2.47 STATIC BYPASS
A. General: As part of the UPS, a system static bypass module shall be provided. The system static bypass shall
be swappable and provide no break transfer of the critical load from the inverter output to the static bypass input
source during times where maintenance is required, or the inverter cannot support the critical bus. Such times
may be due to prolonged or severe overloads, or UPS failure. The UPS and static bypass module shall constantly
monitor the auxiliary contacts of their respective circuit breakers, as well as the bypass source voltage, and inhibit
potentially unsuccessful transfers to static bypass from taking place.
07/2016 edition p. 402

B. Design: The design of the static switch power path shall consist of silicon-controlled rectifiers (SCR) with a
continuous duty rating of 125 percent of the UPS output rating for 480 V systems and 110% for 400/415 V
systems.
C. Automatic Transfers: An automatic transfer of load to static bypass shall take place whenever the load on the
critical bus exceeds the overload rating of the UPS. Automatic transfers of the critical load from static bypass
back to normal operation shall take place when the overload condition is removed from the critical output bus of
the system. Automatic transfers of load to static bypass shall also take place if for any reason the UPS cannot
support the critical bus.
D. Manual Transfers: Manually initiated transfers to and from static bypass shall be initiated through the UPS
graphical user interface. [For parallel configurations, transfers to and from bypass can be initiated from any online UPS
in the system.]
E. Overloads: For 480V systems, the static bypass shall be rated and capable of handling overloads equal to or
less than 125 percent of the rated system output continuously. For 400/415V systems, the static bypass shall be
rated and capable of handling overloads equal to or less than 110 percent of the rated system output
continuously. For instantaneous overloads caused by inrush current from magnetic devices, or short circuit
conditions, the static bypass shall be capable of sustaining overloads of 1000 percent of system capacity for
periods of up to 100 milliseconds.
F. Modular: The static bypass switch shall be of a modular design.
G. System Protection: As a requirement of UL 1778, backfeed protection in the static bypass circuit shall also be
incorporated in the system design. To achieve backfeed protection, a mechanical contactor in series with the
bypass SCR(s) shall be controlled by the UPS/static switch, to open immediately upon sensing a condition where
backfeeding of the static switch by any source connected to the critical output bus of the system is occurring.
One such condition could be a result of a shorted SCR.
H. Static Switch: For parallel systems, static switch design shall be distributed/integral type. External static switch
cabinets shall not be necessary.
A. Control Logic: The UPS shall be controlled by two fully redundant, owner-replaceable and swappable intelligence
modules (IM). These modules shall have separate, optically isolated, communication paths to the power and static switch
modules. Logic power for the control modules shall be derived from redundant power supplies, each having a separate AC
and DC input and output. The communication of the control modules shall be of controller area network (CAN Bus) and
EIA485. All control functions such as start-up, transfer to bypass, and all parameter changes shall be accessible from the
touch screen user interface. Operations such as start-up will have step by step instructions from the user interface to ensure
correct sequencing of operations. To further minimize user error, the touch screen shall highlight, in green, all functions
that have been completed. The current step in the process shall also be outlined to ensure easy operation. Each UPS
system shall have one such user interface.
B. Graphical User Interface: A microprocessor-controlled user interface/display unit shall be located on the front of
the system. The display shall consist of a 10.4 inch (264 mm) multicolor graphical display with 800 x 600
resolution. The display shall be localized into the following languages:
1. Brazilian Portuguese
2. Chinese
3. French
4. German
5. Korean
6. Russian
7. Spanish
C. Virtual Display: Download the display interface to your laptop or personal computer and monitor a complete
system with up to 4 UPSs in parallel. Alarms and events are linked directly to the specific location shown in a
picture of the actual customer setup. The interface matches the touch screen display interface and supports
the configuration of the following parameters:
1. Battery Test schedule settings and request of battery test
2. Alarm threshold settings
3. NMC settings
07/2016 edition p. 403
4. System settings - names, date and time

5. Predictive Maintenance settings of door filter
D. Metered Data: The following data shall be available on the graphical user interface/display:
1. Input/output voltages, currents, frequencies.
2. Breaker and switch status.
3. Battery status.
4. Event log.
5. Energy measurements.
E. Event Log: The display unit shall allow the Owner to display a time and date stamped log. The event log shall
be capable of holding 1500 entries. The default event log size shall be 400 entries.
F. Alarms: The display unit shall allow the Owner to display a log of active alarms. The following minimum set of
alarm conditions shall be available:
1. Input frequency fault.
2. Bypass voltage error, high voltage.
3. MIM not present.
4. RIM not present.
5. Battery module removed from the system.
6. Battery string disconnected.
7. Power module removed from the system.
8. Power module is disabled.
9. Battery breaker open.
10. Power module redundancy obtained.
11. Battery condition is poor.
12. Battery condition is weak.
13. RIM in control.
14. Batteries are discharging.
15. Overload on UPS.
16. Overload on system.
17. Input voltage error, high voltage.
18. Input voltage error, low voltage.
19. Battery temperature high.
20. Power module fan fault.
21. Battery is below minimum acceptable runtime.
22. Battery module fuse cleared or weak battery.
23. Battery module type support error.
24. Power module error, module has critical error.
25. Power module warning, module is not working properly.
26. MIM heartbeat signal error.
27. RIM heartbeat signal error.
28. Power module redundancy lost.
29. Battery is below minimum acceptable runtime.
30. Load on UPS is above warning level.
31. Load on subfeed is above critical level.
32. Load on subfeed is above warning level.
33. Load on UPS is below warning level.
34. Battery is above minimum acceptable runtime.
35. Bypass input frequency fault.
36. Bypass voltage error, high voltage.
37. Bypass voltage error, low voltage.
38. UPS operation mode - Forced Bypass.
39. Load on UPS is above warning level.
40. UPS operation mode - Forced Bypass.
41. System locked in bypass operation.
42. Breaker Q1 open.
44. Breaker Q3 closed.
47. Battery voltage error - voltage above warning level.
07/2016 edition p. 404
48. Battery voltage error - voltage above shutdown level.

49. Battery voltage error - voltage below shutdown level.
50. Battery voltage error - voltage below warning level.
51. Door in MBwD enclosure open.
52. Door in maintenance bypass panel enclosure open.
53. Parallel unit redundancy lost.
54. MegaTie mode is active.
G. Controls: The following controls or programming functions shall be accomplished by the use of the user
interface/display unit. The touch screen display shall facilitate these operations:
1. Silence audible alarm.
3. Enable or disable the automatic restart feature.
4. Transfer critical load to and from static bypass.
5. Test battery condition on demand.
6. Set intervals for automatic battery tests.
8. Adjustable ramp-in times from 1 to 40 seconds.
9. Potential free (dry) contacts.
H. Potential Free Contacts or Dry Contacts: The following potential free contacts shall be available on the relay
interface board:
1. Normal operation.
2. Battery operation.
3. Bypass operation.
4. Common fault.
5. Low battery.
6. UPS off.
I. Communication Interface Board: A communication interface board shall provide the following communication
ports which shall be able to be used simultaneously:
1. Ethernet.
2. Ethernet interface port for a remote display.
3. Modbus RS485
J. Emergency power off (EPO) (Note: The EPO pushbutton shall include a protective cover to prevent
unintentional operation).
2.49 BATTERY
A. The UPS battery shall support an optional battery plant of modular construction made up of trained-
user-replaceable, swappable, fused, battery modules. Each battery module shall be monitored for voltage and
temperature for use by the UPS battery diagnostic. Battery charging current shall be temperature compensated.
It should also be possible to cyclic charge the batteries with programmable charge and rest time.
B. The battery jars housed within each removable battery module shall be of the valve regulated lead acid (VRLA)
type.
C. The UPS shall incorporate a battery management system to continuously monitor the status of each removable
battery module. This system shall notify the Owner in the event a failed or weak battery module is found.
D. The batteries shall have a design life of 5 to 8 years and a battery service life of 3 to 5 years. The battery casing
shall be flame retardant type.
E. The UPS shall incorporate a battery capacity test that will be capable of determining available runtimes.
2.50 ACCESSORIES
A. Battery Breaker Cabinet: To facilitate third party battery configuration including wet cell batteries, a battery
breaker cabinet in a line-up and match NetShelter enclosure shall be available. Each cabinet shall monitor
breaker status and battery temperature. Each circuit breaker shall be equipped shunt trip mechanisms and
07/2016 edition p. 405
1A/1B auxiliary contacts. The battery breaker cabinet shall accommodate top or bottom entry for cables. The
cell number count shall be adjustable from 138 to 150 from the user display with the default cell count set at 144.
B. Optional Maintenance Bypass:

1. The maintenance bypass shall provide power to the critical load bus from the bypass source, during times
where maintenance or service of the UPS is required. The maintenance bypass shall provide a mechanical
means of complete isolation of the UPS from the electrical wiring of the installation and shall be mounted to
the systems I/O enclosure. As a minimum, the maintenance bypass shall contain the following features and
accessories:
a. Subfeed circuit breakers of the appropriate size, withstand rating (see table), and trip rating for the
system. Other breaker sizes and withstand ratings shall be available as custom options.
Breaker size Interrupt rating
60-100A 22,000AIC
125-400A 25,000AIC
T-1, T-3, and T-5 breakers shall be supported.
b. Minimum 1A/1B auxiliary contacts for the purpose of relaying status information of each circuit
breaker/switch actuator to the UPS and static bypass.
c. Plated copper bus bar (where applicable), braced for the appropriate withstand rating (50 kAIC rating) of
the system.
d. A load test port (not breaker protected)
e. Field configurable such that the maintenance bypass can be located on the left or right side of the
system Input / output cabinet
2. The following minimum options shall also be available for the maintenance bypass:
a. Mimic label with light indications for power flow.
3. The Maintenance bypass shall carry one of the following agency listings:
a. UL 891.
b. UL 1558.
c. UL 1778.
d. UL 60950.
C. Remote Batteries: The modular batteries shall have the capability to be located remote to the UPS. In such
installations, an optional side car shall be used to connect the batteries by cables to the UPS. The battery side car shall
accommodate top or bottom cable entry. The side car shall have overcurrent fuses to protect the cables. The fuse status
shall be monitored by the UPS.
D. Bottom-Feed Enclosure: For installations greater than 250 kW, a bottom-feed enclosure shall provide the mechanical
means necessary to support bottom feeds for specific system configurations.
E. Relay Board: Relay boards shall be provided for Owner connections to external alarms or to activate external Owner
circuits.
F. Software and Connectivity:

1. Network Adaptor: The Network Management Card shall allow one or more network management systems
(NMS) to monitor and manage the UPS in TCP/IP network environments. The management information
base (MIB) shall be provided in DOS and UNIX "tar" formats. The SNMP interface adaptor shall be
connected to the UPS via Ethernet Port.
2. Unattended Shutdown: The UPS, in conjunction with a network interface card, shall be capable of
gracefully shutting down one or more operating systems when the UPS is operating from the battery.
G. Remote UPS Monitoring: The following methods of remote UPS monitoring shall be available:
2. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP): Remote UPS monitoring shall be possible through a
H. Software Compatibility: The UPS manufacturer shall have available software to support graceful shutdown and
remote monitoring with PowerChute Network Shutdown (PCNS) for the following operating system families:
1. Microsoft Windows
2. MAC OS X
3. Hyper-V
4. VMware
5. Linux
6. Unix
07/2016 edition p. 406
The full and updated supported OS compatibility chart can be found here: http://www.apc.com/whitepaper/?um=200
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.40 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: To ensure full warranty coverage, a Schneider Electric certified technician must
perform the start-up service. Examine areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed, and notify the
corrected.
3.41 INSTALLATION

a. Check UPS and external maintenance bypass cabinet internal control wiring connections.
b. Check UPS and external maintenance bypass cabinet internal power wiring connections.
c. Check UPS and external maintenance bypass cabinet terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs for
tightness.
f. Inspect external maintenance bypass switch for proper terminations and phasing.
4. Site Testing:

1. Worldwide Service: The UPS manufacturer shall have a worldwide service organization available, consisting of
factory-trained field service personnel to perform start-up, preventative maintenance, and service of the UPS system
support.
07/2016 edition p. 407

2. Replacement Parts: Parts shall be available through the worldwide service organization 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week, and 365 days a year. The worldwide service organization shall be capable of shipping parts within four
working hours or on the next available flight, so that the parts may be delivered to the Owner within 24 hours.
3.43 DEMONSTRATION
3.44 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 408

Symmetra MW
3/3 Phase 400/600/800/1000/1200/1400/1600 kW
07/2016 edition p. 409

Symmetra MW 3:3 – 400 to 600 kW

APC SYMMETRA MW
400 kW to 600 kW
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
SECTION [26 33 53] [16611]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.61 SUMMARY
specified.
high speed pulse width modulation and shall be constructed of IGBTs.
2. In addition, this Section describes the performance, functionality, and design of the UPS maintenance
bypass cabinet, hereafter referred to as the MBC, the battery system, internal bypass static switch, and
other such electrical distribution as described in this Section.
4. Owner-selected accessories, programming, and miscellaneous components for a fully operational system as
described in this Section shall be supplied as part of the UPS.
1.62 REFERENCES
B. Federal Communications Commission (FCC):

1. FCC 47 CFR Part 15, "Radio Frequency Devices."
C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

D. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC):

1. IEC 60950, ―Information Technology Equipment - Safety.‖
2. IEC 61000, ―Electromagnetic Compatibility.‖
3. IEC 61000-2-2, ―Electromagnetic Compatibility - Compatibility Levels for Low-Frequency Conducted
Disturbances and Signaling in Public Low-Voltage Power Supply Systems.‖
07/2016 edition p. 410

4. IEC 61000-3-5, ―Electromagnetic Compatibility - Limitation of Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker in

Low-Voltage Power Supply Systems for Equipment with Rated Current Greater than 75 A.‖
5. IEC 61000-4-2, ―Electromagnetic Compatibility - Testing and Measurement Techniques; Electrostatic
Discharge Immunity Test.‖
6. IEC 61000-4-3, ―Electromagnetic Compatibility - Testing and Measurement Techniques; Radiated, Radio
Frequency, Electromagnetic Field Immunity Test.‖
7. IEC 61000-4-4, ―Electromagnetic Compatibility - Testing and Measurement Techniques; Electrical Fast
Transient/Burst Immunity Test.‖
8. IEC 61000-4-5, ―Electromagnetic Compatibility - Testing and Measurement Techniques; Surge Immunity
Test.‖
9. IEC 62040, "Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS).‖
10. IEC 62040-1, ―Uninterruptible Power Systems - General and Safety Requirements for UPS.‖
11. IEC 62040-2, ―Uninterruptible Power Systems - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Requirements,‖
12. IEC 62040-3, ―Uninterruptible Power Systems - Method of Specifying the Performance and Test
Requirements.‖
E. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):

2. ISO 14001, ―Environmental Management Systems - Requirements With Guidance for Use.‖

1. UL 891, "Standard for Dead-Front Switchboards" (copyrighted by UL, ANSI approved).
2. UL 1558, "Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear."
3. UL 1778, "Standard for Uninterruptible Power Supply Equipment" (copyrighted by UL, ANSI approved).
INSERT APPLICABLE VALUES IN THREE SUBPARAGRAPHS BELOW.
2. The UPS battery shall be sized for an output of [____] kW at a power factor of [____] for [____] minutes.
1. System Capacity: The system shall be rated for full kW output in the following sizes:
a. 400 kVA/400 kW.
b. 600 kVA/600 kW.
2. Electrical Input:
a. AC Input Nominal Voltage: [____]
INSERT APPLICABLE VALUE FROM THE LIST BELOW:
1) 480 volts, three-phase, 3P+GND, 60 Hz.
2) 400 volts, three-phase, 4-wire 3P+PEN or 5-wire 3P+N+GND, 50Hz
b. AC Input Voltage Window: ±15% of nominal (while providing nominal charging to the battery system).
c. Short Circuit Withstand Rating: 200,000 symmetrical amperes (200 kA).
d. Maximum Frequency Range: ±0.5 to 8% of nominal.
e. Input Power Factor: Approximately ~1 at 100% load and shall not be less than 0.97 at loads greater
than 25% of system rating with no additional filters.
07/2016 edition p. 411

f. Input Current Distortion: Maximum 5% with no requirement for optional additional filters.
g. Soft-Start: Input current shall be linear from 0 to 100% input. This shall take place over a 10 second
default time and values from 1 to 60 seconds shall be programmable. The UPS shall exhibit no
magnetizing inrush current.
3. UPS Electrical Output:
a. AC Output Nominal Output: [____]
1) 480 volts, three-phase, 3P+GND, 60 hertz.
b. AC Output Voltage Regulation:
1) ±1% for 100% balanced linear load.
2) ±3% for 100% unbalanced linear load.
c. Voltage Transient Response:
1) ±3% maximum for 50% load step.
d. Voltage Transient Recovery: Within 50 milliseconds.
e. Output Voltage Harmonic Distortion:
1) 3% THD maximum and 1% single harmonic for a 100% linear load.
2) 5% THD maximum for a 100% non-linear load.
3) UPS shall be able to support unlimited crest factor in normal operation. In battery operation the
crest factor is limited to 2.7.
f. Phase Angle Displacement:
1) 120 degrees, ±0.1 degree for balanced load.
2) 120 degrees, ±0.1 degree for 50% imbalanced load.
3) 120 degrees, ±0.3 degrees for 100% imbalanced load.
g. Overload Rating:
a) 200% for 60 seconds.
b) 125% for 10 minutes.
c) After an overload event that lasts for the full overload duration, the UPS must cool for 20
minutes before a new overload is allowed, and cooling occurs when the load is less than
100%.
2) Battery Operation: 150% for 30 seconds.
a) 125% continuous.
b) 1000% for 500 milliseconds.
h. UPS Efficiency: With nominal voltage and resistive load.
1) The UPS AC-AC efficiency shall be as follows:
a) At 100% Load: 97%.
b) At 75% Load: 97%.
c) At 50% Load: 96%.
d) At 25% Load: 94%.
2) The UPS DC-AC efficiency shall be as follows:
a) At 100% Load: 96%.
b) At 75% Load: 97%.
c) At 50% Load: 97%.
d) At 25% Load: 96%.
i. Output Power Factor Rating: The UPS output shall not require derating for purely resistive loads (PF
of 1). The kW and kVA ratings of the UPS output shall be equal. For loads exhibiting a power factor of
0.9 leading to 0.8 lagging no derating of the UPS shall be required. For loads exhibiting power factors
outside this range, the following derating shall apply:
1) 5% derating of the UPS shall apply for 0.7 PF lagging.
4) 20% derating of the UPS shall apply for a range of 0.4 to 0.1 PF lagging.
07/2016 edition p. 412

4. Design and Construction:

a. Printed Circuit Boards: Card edge connected printed circuit boards shall have mechanical interlocks
to prohibit a board from being plugged into the wrong place.
b. Electromagnetic Interference: Radiated and conducted EMI generated within the system shall be
suppressed to prevent excessive interference with associated nearby electronic equipment. Radio
frequency generating equipment external to the system, such as hand-held portable radios and other
electronic devices, shall not cause a malfunction of the system components when enclosures are shut.
Compliance shall conform to FCC 47 Part 15 Subpart A.10-1.
c. Finish and Painting:
1) External welds shall be ground smooth and sharp corners eliminated.
2) Surfaces shall be clean and smooth and cleared of blemishes before application of the finish.
3) Steel enclosures shall have a finish coat of durable baked enamel. The equipment shall be painted
in accordance with manufacturer's standard procedure.
4) Primers for steel surfaces shall be suitable for the service and operating temperatures to be
encountered during the life of the equipment.
5) Upon request a can of touch-up paint in each color shall be provided.
d. Enclosures: The UPS assemblies shall be constructed in NEMA Type 1 metal enclosures. Enclosures
shall have provisions for forklift handling. The individual enclosures shall be freestanding, capable of
side-by-side or back-to-back installation with front access requirements only.
1.64 SUBMITTALS
following:
instructions.
07/2016 edition p. 413

A. Qualifications:
standards.
authorities.
e. ISO 9001
f. ISO 14001
g. IEC 60950.
h. IEC 61000.
i. IEC 61000-2-2.
j. IEC 61000-3-5.
k. IEC 61000-4-2.
l. IEC 61000-4-3.
m. IEC 61000-4-4.
n. IEC 61000-4-5.
o. IEC 62040.
p. IEC 62040-1.
q. IEC 62040-2.
r. IEC 62040-3.
s. FCC part 15, sub part J, class A
t. UL 1778
u. CE
v. EN50091-1-1
w. EN50091-2
x. IEC-1000-4-5
y. EN50091-2
B. Customer shall provide adequate facility to store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers,
inside a well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
07/2016 edition p. 414

A. Environmental: Do not install solid state UPS until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is
completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions
are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
1. Storage Ambient Temperature: -15 to 40°C (5 to 104°F)
2. Short-term Storage/Transportation Temperature: -50 to 55°C( -58 to 131°F)
3. Operating Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F) (25ºC [77°F] is ideal for most battery types).
4. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95% non-condensing.
5. Altitude: Maximum installation with no derating of the UPS output shall be 3280 feet (1000 m) above sea
level. At higher altitudes the following derating shall apply:
a. 1500 m (4921 feet) derating factor of 0.95.
b. 2000 m (6562 feet) derating factor of 0.91.
c. 2500 m (8202 feet) derating factor of 0.86.
6. Audible UPS noise at 1 meter from the cabinet:
a. 400 kW: 72 dBA
b. 600 kW: 73 dBA
7. Access Requirements:
a. The UPS shall require front access only for installation and field assembly. Servicing of the UPS shall
only require front access for commonly serviced components, such as fuses, power modules, control
circuits, contactors, and active components. No top, side, or back access shall be required for servicing
said components of the UPS.
b. At the Owner’s discretion, power cabling for both the UPS AC and DC shall be top or bottom entry as
standard product and shall be terminated in a designated input/output section of the UPS. It shall be
possible to place this input/output cabinet on either the left or right side of the UPS.
c. Replacement of air filters shall not require the system to be placed into maintenance bypass, nor shall it
require personnel to be subjected to live voltage potential.
1.68 WARRANTY
1.69 MAINTENANCE
system shall be available from the manufacturer. Contract work shall be performed by factory-trained service
personnel.
07/2016 edition p. 415

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.51 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Product specified is ―APC Symmetra MW II‖ as manufactured by APC by Schneider Electric.
Items specified are to establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, and appearance. Equivalent
what is equivalent.
A. Normal:
1. General: The main inverter and delta inverter shall operate in an on-line manner to continuously regulate
and supply power to the critical load. The input power converter and output inverter shall be capable of full
battery recharge while simultaneously providing 100% regulated power to the load bus for all line and load
conditions within the range of the UPS specifications.
2. Recharge: Upon restoration of the utility or on-site electrical generation AC input source, the input power
converter and output inverter shall simultaneously recharge the battery and continue to provide 100%
regulated power to the critical load bus.
3. Auto Restart: The UPS shall have an auto restart function which, when enabled, shall allow the UPS to be
automatically restarted and placed on-line upon the restoration of input power. Should the input power fail to
return within 24 hours, the UPS shall automatically open the battery disconnects to prevent excessive
battery discharge. This feature is available only for single UPS systems.
B. Battery: Upon utility or on-site electrical generation input failure or any out of tolerance condition as defined by
this Section of the electrical AC input source, the critical load bus shall continue being supplied by the main
inverter, which shall derive its’ power from the battery system. There shall be no interruption of power to the
critical load bus during both transitions to battery operation and from battery to normal operation.
C. Static Bypass: The static bypass shall be used to provide a seamless transfer of the critical load bus from the
inverter output to the bypass source. This transfer, along with its retransfer, shall take place with no power
interruption to the critical load bus. A transfer to static bypass may also occur in the event of an extreme overload
condition, inverter output voltage out of tolerance condition or if commanded by the operator. This transfer shall
be an automatic function with the exception of an operator-initiated transfer. The UPS shall automatically return to
normal operation when the overload or out of tolerance condition is cleared.
D. Maintenance Bypass: The UPS system shall be able to support an external MBC to electrically isolate the UPS
during routine maintenance and service of the UPS. The MBC shall completely isolate both the UPS(s) input and
output connections.
2.53 MODULARITY OF DESIGN
A. General: The UPS shall be of modular design and construction consisting of independent 200 kW power
converter sections. Each 200kW inverter section shall consist of three 67 kW independent draw-out modules.
Each power module shall allow easy frontal draw-out accessibility for maintenance or system growth. Each
module shall exhibit independent fault tolerance to other modules and shall allow for continuous system
operation.
B. Redundant Configuration: The UPS internal design shall allow for the selection of one to seven redundant
200 kW power module sections for Owner-selected redundancy level.
07/2016 edition p. 416

C. Fault Protection: The UPS mechanical and electrical design shall combine to form a fault protection design
base. In the unlikely event of an inverter module fault, each module shall be electrically and mechanically
protected from the faulted unit and that the faulted unit shall not influence other modules or system operations.
Each 200 kW power converter section shall incorporate independent time coordinated fusing with mechanical
contactors to facilitate the rapid isolation of a failed section from the input, output, and DC buses, without
sacrificing the critical load output bus.
D. Redundant Power Supply: Each of the three 67 kW power converter modules shall contain a DC power supply
to power the logic and control circuits of each respective 200 kW section. Loss of one DC power supply per
200 kW section shall not influence the performance of its respective 200 kW section. Redundant power supplies
shall be monitored by the UPS’s internal and optional external monitoring system.
E. Redundant UPS Control Power: Two main redundant power supplies shall also be provided for main logic
circuits and interface signals of the UPS. These power supplies shall have multiple channels, each with their own
overcurrent protection to provide fault containment. Each channel shall have tripped indicators to allow for rapid
diagnostics and repair by on-site service personnel. UPS control power shall be monitored by the UPS’s internal
and optional external monitoring system.
F. Redundant Fans: Each 67 kW power module shall contain redundant cooling fans to take in ambient air through
filtered inlets on the front of the UPS. The loss of a fan in any or all of the 67 kW power modules shall not cause a
derating of the ambient operating temperature of the UPS. Each 200 kW section shall contain four cooling fans
and shall operate normally with the failure of any two section fans. Fans shall be monitored by the UPS’s internal
and optional external monitoring system for operation and speed.
G. Scalability: The UPS shall be designed to allow the 200 kW power module sections to be added to
accommodate future increases in load requirements to the maximum UPS frame size.
H. Serviceability: The UPS and external static bypass shall be designed to allow and facilitate field service
personnel to replace a faulty inverter power module or any printed circuit board to a mean-time of 30 minutes or
less. This time assumes on-site personnel with replacement components.
2.54 INPUT POWER CONVERTERS
A. General: The input power converter of the UPS system shall constantly monitor and control the power imported
from the utility or on-site electrical generation mains input. This monitoring and control function shall provide the
necessary UPS power for precise regulation of the DC bus voltage, battery charging, and main inverter output
voltage regulation.
B. Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion: The input current THD shall be held to 5% or less while
simultaneously providing conditioned power to the critical load bus, and charging the batteries under steady state
operating conditions. The 5% maximum THD shall be held while supporting loads of both a linear or non-linear
type, from 0 to 100% of the UPS capacity. The 5% maximum THD shall be accomplished with no additional
filters, magnetic devices, or other components.
input current from 0 to 100% of the nominal input current with no magnetizing inrush currents over a default
10 second period (with settings ranging from 1 second through 60 seconds). The UPS soft-start feature shall
apply from initial UPS start-up and during power protection modes when returning from battery operation.
Soft-start function shall be linear operation, not a step function.
D. Magnetization Inrush Current: For ease of device coordination the UPS shall exhibit no inrush current to the
electrical supply system as a standard product. If provided with an optional isolation transformer, inrush shall be
limited to six times the nominal input current of the transformer.

1. The input converters shall control and limit the input current draw from utility to less than 130% of the UPS
output. During conditions where input current limit is active, the UPS shall be able to support 100% load,
charge batteries at 10% of the UPS output rating, and provide voltage regulation with mains deviation of up
to ±15% of the nominal input voltage.
2. In cases where the source voltage to the UPS is nominal [480V][ 400V] and the applied UPS load is equal to
or less than 100% of UPS capacity, input current shall not exceed 115% of UPS output current, while
providing full battery recharge power.
07/2016 edition p. 417
F. Battery Recharge Current Limit: The UPS shall be capable of limiting the energy sourced from the mains. As
a default setting, the battery charge energy shall be set to 100% of its nominal value. When signaled by a dry
contact (such as from an emergency generator), the UPS shall be capable of limiting the battery charge energy
taken from the mains. This shall take place in Owner-selectable increments of 75%, 50%, 25%, 10%, and 0% of
the nominal charge power. Value selectable selection shall be made from the UPS touch screen user interface.
G. Battery Charge Inhibit: In addition to the battery recharge current limit function, a second set of battery charging
control inputs shall be provided. When signaled by a dry contact, this second set of inputs shall signal the UPS to
turn off battery charging. This option is useful if the UPS is auxiliary powered from a restricted or minimally sized
on-site generator.
2.55 MAIN INVERTER
A. General: The UPS output inverters shall continuously recreate the UPS output voltage wave form by converting
the DC bus voltage to AC voltage through a set of IGBT driven bi-directional power converters. In both normal
input voltage. Input voltage anomalies such as brown-outs, spikes, surges, sags, and outages, shall not affect
B. Overload Capability: The output power converters shall be capable of 240% sub-cycle for short circuit clearing.
Steady state overload conditions, of up to 200% of system capacity, shall be sustained by the inverter for
60 seconds in normal operation. In battery operation the inverter shall be capable of sustaining 150% of system
capacity for 30 seconds. Should overloads persist past the outlined time limitation, the critical load shall be
seamlessly switched to the automatic static bypass output of the UPS.
C. Output Contactor: The UPS shall be constructed to allow each (200 kW inverter to critical bus) connection to be
configured with a mechanical contactor. This will allow for automatic positive physical bus isolation in the event of
an inverter malfunction. Each 200 kW inverter section shall operate as an independent unit regardless of
operational state of other inverters.
D. Fusing: Each modular inverter shall have high speed time and energy coordinated fusing to provide fault
isolation between inverters. Based on this feature, a fault within an individual inverter shall not cause a cascading
failure of any other inverter connected to the critical bus of the UPS.
E. Battery Protection: The UPS inverter shall be provided with monitoring and control circuits to limit the level of
discharge on the battery system. The UPS logic and control circuits shall monitor the discharge constant, and
automatically adjust shutdown level to 1.75 volts per cell for any discharge expected to last longer than
approximately 60 minutes.
07/2016 edition p. 418

2.56 STATIC BYPASS
A. General: As part of the UPS system, a system static bypass shall be provided. The system static bypass shall
provide no break transfer of the critical load from the inverter output to the static bypass input source. This is
beneficial during times when maintenance is required, or the inverter output can not support the critical bus.
Such times may be due to prolonged or severe overloads, or UPS failure, causing an insufficient remaining
number of UPS power converter modules. The UPS(s) and static bypass switch shall constantly monitor the
auxiliary contacts of their respective circuit breakers, as well as the bypass source voltage, and inhibit potentially
unsuccessful transfers to static bypass from taking place.
1. 400kW UPS: A 400kW internal bypass static switch shall be included.
2. 600kW UPS: A 600kW internal bypass static switch shall be included.
3. The bypass static switch input/output shall be [480 volts AC input, 3 wires plus ground][400VAC input, 4-wire
3P+PEN or 5-wire 3P+N+GND].
B. Static Bypass Switch: The 400 kW to 600 kW UPS shall utilize internal static switches integral to the UPS
module. When required, the 400 kW and 600 kW UPS can be configured with an external static bypass switch.
C. Design: The design of the static switch power path shall consist of silicon-controlled rectifiers (SCR) with a
continuous duty rating of 125% of the UPS output rating. Each set of SCRs shall be protected with time and
energy coordinated fuses to limit the I2T to a value less than the I2T rating of the SCR.
D. Automatic Transfers: The UPS shall be designed to allow a seamless automatic transfer of critical load to static
bypass and shall take place whenever the load on the critical bus exceeds the overload rating of the UPS. A
seamless automatic transfer of the critical load from static bypass back to normal operation shall take place when
the overload condition is removed from the critical output bus of the system. The UPS shall be designed to allow
a seamless automatic transfer of critical load to static bypass for any reason the UPS cannot support the critical
bus.
E. Manual Transfers: Manually initiated transfers to and from static bypass shall be initiated through the UPS
touch screen interface.
F. Overloads: The static bypass switch shall be rated and capable of handling continuous overloads equal to or
less than 125% of the rated system output current. For instantaneous overloads caused by inrush current from
magnetic devices, or short circuit conditions, the static bypass shall be capable of sustaining overloads of 1000%
of system capacity for periods of up to 500 milliseconds.
G. System Protection:
1. Each input phase of the static bypass switch shall be protected by both time/energy coordinated fusing and
circuit breakers. Standard circuit breaker protection shall be of a molded case design; options shall be
available for insulated case circuit breakers or draw-out power circuit breakers.
2. As a requirement of UL 1778, back-feed protection in the static bypass circuit shall also be incorporated in
the system design. To achieve back-feed protection, the circuit breaker serving as the input disconnect shall
be controlled by the UPS/static switch, to open immediately upon sensing a condition where back-feeding of
the static switch by any source connected to the critical output bus of the system is occurring.
A. Touch Screen Interface: A multi-color LCD touch screen user interface shall be supplied with the UPS, for the
purposes of retrieving information from the UPS/static switch and providing control functionality. Data shell be
transmitted between the UPS/static switch and the user interface via the system CAN bus.
B. Mimic Bus: The default screen of the touch screen interface shall be a mimic bus of the installation, showing
only those circuit breakers applicable to system operation on the UPS system. The mimic bus shall depict power
flow through the system and shall automatically change status to reflect any change in power flow through normal
operation, static bypass operation, maintenance bypass operation, or battery operation.
1. The mimic bus power flow highlighting shall be color-coded green, for power flow through the UPS power
conversion path, and yellow for static bypass or maintenance bypass operation. Changes in status of circuit
breaker operation shall also be depicted on the mimic bus. The mimic bus shall also provide information
such as power flow, voltage and current for the UPS input, output, bypass and battery.
C. Metered Data: Data shall be available in graphic and alphanumeric form. Input and output voltage and current
wave forms shall be displayed. The following metered data shall be available on the UPS touch screen interface.
1. Input current.
07/2016 edition p. 419
2. Input current total harmonic distortion (THDI).

3. Input crest factor.
4. Input voltage.
5. Input voltage total harmonic distortion (THDV).
6. Input active power per phase.
7. Input apparent power per phase.
8. Total input active power.
9. Total input apparent power.
10. Input power factor.
11. Output current.
12. Output current Total Harmonic Distortion (THDI).
13. Output crest factor.
14. Output voltage.
15. Output voltage total harmonic distortion (THDV).
16. Output active power per phase.
17. Output apparent power per phase.
18. Total output active power.
19. Total output apparent power.
20. Output power factor.
21. Bypass current.
22. Bypass current total harmonic distortion (THDI).
23. Bypass crest factor.
24. Bypass voltage.
25. Bypass voltage total harmonic distortion (THDV).
26. Bypass active power per phase.
27. Bypass apparent power per phase.
28. Total bypass active power.
29. Total bypass apparent power.
30. Bypass power factor.
31. DC voltage.
32. DC current.
33. DC power.
34. Estimated charge time.
35. Estimated charge percentage.
36. Run time.
37. Ambient temperature.
38. Static bypass ambient temperature.
D. Alarms: Alarms shall be visible when active, from the user interface, by one pushbutton sequence on the touch
screen interface. The alarm log shall show each entry with corresponding date and time stamp. The level of
criticality shall also be displayed with each entry and shall be color-coded green, yellow, or red, based on their
respective severity. This information can be transmitted locally via the network management system. The
following minimum set of alarm messages shall be available to depict the status of the UPS/static switch:
1. High battery temperature.
2. Battery grounding error.
3. Positive battery breaker open.
4. Negative battery breaker open.
5. Low battery warning.
6. High battery warning.
7. Low DC shutdown.
8. High DC shutdown.
9. Battery fault.
10. Input power failure.
11. Main static switch fan fault.
12. Input fuse fault.
13. Input power module section fuse fault.
14. Output fault.
15. Output off.
16. Output fuse fault.
17. Output section fuse fault.
18. Bypass synchronization error.
19. Bypass fault.
07/2016 edition p. 420
20. Bypass static switch fan fault.

21. Bypass static switch fuse fault.
22. Bypass static switch thyristor fault.
23. Bypass static switch back-feed protection activated.
24. Bypass static switch power supply fault.
25. Bypass temperature fault.
26. Inverter temperature fault.
27. Overload.
28. Inverter fan fault.
29. Inverter fuse fault.
30. Inverter fault.
31. EPO activated.
32. Output current limiter active.
33. High delta transformer temperature.
34. High switch choke temperature.
35. Power supply fault.
36. DC fuse fault.
37. Parallel communication error.
38. Parallel unit disabled.
39. Master changed.
E. Controls:
1. Control functions such as start-up, transfer to bypass, and parameter changes shall be accessible from the
touch screen user interface. Operations such as start-up shall have step-by-step instructions from the user
interface to ensure correct sequencing of operations. To further minimize operator error, the touch screen
shall highlight, in green, functions that have been completed. The current step in process shall also be
outlined to ensure easy operation. One such user interface shall be part of both the UPS cabinet, and the
static bypass cabinet, each sharing similar functions.
2. Intelligent logic shall also inhibit any state change such as ―transfer to bypass‖ in the event bypass is
unavailable, or a circuit breaker in the event the bypass power path is open. Also available, in addition to the
touch screen user interface, shall be three clearly marked buttons, with a clear plastic hinged cover to
prevent unintentional operation of such buttons. These buttons shall be located on both the UPS cabinet and
the static bypass cabinet. Their functions shall be as follows:
a. Green Button: Shall turn UPS output on.
b. Red Button: Shall turn UPS output off.
c. Yellow Button: Emergency Module Off button. Shall trip AC Input, output, and DC circuit breakers of
that respective UPS.
3. An event log shall record event history that has taken place since the UPS was started, or since the last time
the log was erased by the Owner. This log shall provide a date and time stamp of up to 1024 events which
shall be removed in a first-in, first-out format.
2.58 ACCESSORIES
A. Battery Disconnect Breaker: Each UPS system shall have two, 500 volts DC rated, thermal magnetic trip
molded case circuit breakers. Each circuit breaker shall have a 24 volts DC under voltage release and 2A/2B
auxiliary contacts. The circuit breakers shall be in a separate NEMA 1 enclosure. When open, there shall be no
battery voltage in the UPS enclosure. The UPS system shall be automatically disconnected from the battery by
opening its breakers, should the UPS be subjected to a low battery shutdown state for an extended period of
time, when signaled by a remote emergency power off (EPO) signal, or when the emergency module off button is
pressed on the UPS. The battery disconnect enclosure shall also be equipped with the following minimum
features:
1. Controller area network (CAN) card for sending and receiving information to and from UPS.
2. Lights that illuminate during "OK to Operate" conditions.
B. Maintenance Bypass Cabinet (MBC):

1. The MBC, purchased separately, shall provide power to the critical load bus from the bypass utility or on-site
generation source, during times where maintenance or service of the UPS is required. The MBC shall
provide a mechanical means of complete isolation of the UPS(s) from all sources of AC power. The MBC
shall be constructed in a freestanding NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise stated in this Section.
2. As a minimum, the MBC shall contain the following features and accessories:
07/2016 edition p. 421

a. Circuit breakers of the appropriate frame size, withstand rating (kAIC rating), and trip rating for the
system.
b. Minimum 2A/2B auxiliary contacts for the purpose of relaying status information of each circuit breaker
to each UPS static bypass.
c. CAN Interface circuit card to provide an intelligent interface between the switchboard/switchgear
enclosure and each UPS and static switch.
d. Plated copper bus bar, braced for the appropriate withstand rating of the system.
3. The following minimum options shall also be available for the MBC:
a. Key interlock to prevent out of sequence transfers of MBC from normal operation to bypass operation
and back to normal operations.
b. Solenoid key release unit (SKRU).
c. Mimic bus with light indications for power flow.
d. Electrically operated circuit breakers
4. The MBC shall carry one of the following agency listings:
a. UL 891.
b. UL 1558.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.45 EXAMINATION
corrected.
07/2016 edition p. 422

3.46 INSTALLATION

d. Verify correct electrolyte level of flooded cells (if applicable).
e. Inspect battery cases.
f. Inspect batteries for proper polarity.
g. Verify printed circuit boards are properly configured.
a. Check UPS, external maintenance bypass cabinet, and DC circuit breaker cabinet internal control wiring
connections.
b. Check UPS, external maintenance bypass cabinet, and DC circuit breaker cabinet internal power wiring
connections.
c. Check UPS, external maintenance bypass cabinet, and DC circuit breaker cabinet terminal screws,
nuts, and/or spade lugs for properly seated or torque.
a. Check UPS fuses for continuity.
b. Verify correct input and bypass voltage.
c. Verify correct phase rotation of mains connections.
d. Verify correct UPS control wiring and terminations.
e. Verify correct termination and voltage of battery strings.
f. Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly configured.
g. Inspect external maintenance bypass switch for proper terminations and phasing.
4. Site Testing:
b. Verify proper control functions.
c. Verify proper bypass operation.
d. Verify proper maintenance bypass operation.

support.
week, 365 days a year. The worldwide service organization shall be capable of shipping parts within four working
hours or on the next available flight, so that the parts may be delivered to the Owner within 24 hours.
3.48 DEMONSTRATION
07/2016 edition p. 423
and preventative maintenance.
3.49 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 424


APC SYMMETRA MW
800 kW to 1600 kW
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
SECTION [26 33 53] [16611]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.70 SUMMARY
supply (UPS) as required for the complete performance of the work, and as shown on the Drawings and as
herein specified.
bypass cabinet, hereafter referred to as the MBC, the battery system, and the UPS static bypass cabinet.
2. The UPS and associated equipment shall operate in conjunction with a primary power supply and an output
3. Programming and miscellaneous components for a fully operational system as described in this Section
shall be available as part of the UPS.
1.71 REFERENCES



07/2016 edition p. 425

Test.‖
Requirements.‖


INSERT APPLICABLE VALUES IN SUBPARAGRAPHS ABOVE AND BELOW.
2. The UPS battery shall be sized for [____] kW at a power factor of [____] for [____] minutes.
1. System Capacity: The system shall be rated for full kW output in the following sizes:
a. 800 kVA/800 kW
b. 1000 kVA/1000 kW
c. 1200kVA/1200kW
d. 1400kVA/1400kW
e. 1600kVA/1600kW
2. Input:
1) 480 volts, three-phase, 3P+GND, 60 Hz.
d. Maximum Frequency Range: ±0.5 to 8% of nominal.
e. Input Power Factor: ~1 at 100% load and shall not be less than 0.97 at loads greater than 25% of
system rating with no additional filters.
f. Input Current Distortion: Maximum 5% with no additional filters.
g. Soft-Start: Shall be linear from 0 to 100% input current and shall not exhibit inrush. This shall take
place over a 10 second default time and values from 1 second to 60 seconds shall be programmable.
3. UPS Output:
1) 480 volts, three-phase, 3P+GND, 60 hertz.
2) 400 volts, 3-phase, 4-wire 3P+GND or 5-wire 3P+N+GND, 50Hz
07/2016 edition p. 426

2) 5% THD maximum for a 100% non-linear load (no crest factor limitation).
1) 120 degrees ±0.1 degree for balanced load.
2) 120 degrees ±0.1 degree for 50% imbalanced load.
3) 120 degrees ±0.3 degrees for 100% imbalanced load.
g. Overload Rating:
b) 125% for 10 minutes
100%.
a) 125% continuous.
h. System Efficiency: The system AC-AC efficiency shall be greater than 97% at 100% load, 96% at
50% load, and shall not be lower than 94% at 25% load.
of 1). The potential kW and kVA ratings of the UPS output shall be equal. For loads exhibiting a power
factor of 0.9 leading to 0.8 lagging no derating of the UPS shall be required. For loads exhibiting power
factors outside this range, the following derating shall apply:
4) 20% derating of the UPS shall apply for a range of 0.4 PF to 0.1 PF lagging.
1.73 SUBMITTALS
following:
07/2016 edition p. 427

instructions.
A. Qualifications:
standards.
authorities.
e. ISO 9001
f. ISO 14001
g. UL 1778
h. CE
i. IEC 60950
j. EN50091-1-1
k. EN50091-2
l. IEC62040-3
m. IEC-1000-4-5
n. EN50091-2
o. FCC part 15, sub part J, class A (conducted/radiated)
07/2016 edition p. 428

a. 800 kW: 74 dBA
b. 1000 kW: 74 dBA
c. 1200 kW: 75 dBA
d. 1400 kW: 75 dBA
e. 1600 kW: 76 dBA
b. Replacement of air filters shall not require the system to be placed into maintenance bypass, nor shall it
require personnel to be subjected to live potential.
1.77 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: The Manufacturer shall warrant the work of this Section to be in accordance with the Contract
1.78 MAINTENANCE
personnel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.59 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Product specified is ―APC Symmetra MW II‖ as manufactured by APC by Schneider Electric.
Items specified are to establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, and appearance. Equivalent
what is equivalent.
A. Normal:
07/2016 edition p. 429
3. Auto Restart: The UPS shall have an auto restart function which, when enabled, shall allow the UPS to be
automatically restarted and placed on-line upon the restoration of input power. Should the input power fail to
return within 24 hours, the UPS shall automatically open the battery disconnects to prevent excessive
battery discharge. This feature is available only for single UPS systems.
B. Battery: Upon failure of the AC input source, the critical load shall continue being supplied by the main inverter,
which shall derive its power from the battery system. There shall be no interruption in power to the critical load
during both transfers to battery operation and retransfers from battery to normal operation.
C. Static Bypass: The static bypass shall be used to provide transfer of critical load from the inverter output to the
bypass source. This transfer, along with its retransfer, shall take place with no power interruption to the critical
load. A transfer to static bypass may also occur in the event of an extreme overload condition, inverter output
voltage out of tolerance condition or if commanded by the operator. This transfer shall be an automatic function
with the exception of an operator-initiated transfer. The UPS shall automatically return to normal operation when
the overload or out of tolerance condition is cleared.
during routine maintenance and service of the UPS. The MBC shall completely isolate both the UPS input and
output connections.
converter sections. Each 200kW inverter section shall consist of three 67 kW independent draw-out modules.
Each power module shall allow easy frontal draw-out accessibility for maintenance or system growth. Each
module shall exhibit independent fault tolerance to other modules and shall allow for continuous system
operation.
200 kW section shall not influence the performance of its respective 200 kW section. Redundant power supplies
filtered inlets on the front of the UPS. The loss of a fan in any or all of the 67 kW power modules shall not cause a
derating of the ambient operating temperature of the UPS. Each 200 kW section shall contain four cooling fans
H. Serviceability: The UPS and external static bypass shall be designed to allow and facilitate field service
07/2016 edition p. 430

A. General: The input power converters of the system shall constantly control the power imported from the mains
input of the system, to provide the necessary UPS power for precise regulation of the DC bus voltage, battery
charging, and main inverter output voltage regulation.
B. Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion: The input current THDI shall be held to 5% or less while providing
conditioned power to the critical load bus, and charging the batteries under steady state operating conditions.
This shall be true while supporting loads of both a linear or non-linear type, from 0 to 100% of the UPS capacity.
This shall be accomplished with no additional filters, magnetic devices, or other components.
D. Magnetization Inrush Current: The UPS shall exhibit 0 inrush current as a standard product. If provided with
an optional isolation transformer, inrush shall be limited to six times the nominal input current of the transformer.

output. During conditions where input current limit is active, the UPS shall be able to support 100% load,
charge batteries at 10% of the UPS output rating, and provide voltage regulation with mains deviation of up
to ±15% of the nominal input voltage.
2. In cases where the source voltage to the UPS is nominal [480V][ 400V] and the applied UPS load is equal to
or less than 100% of UPS capacity, input current shall not exceed 115% of UPS output current, while
on-site generator.
2.63 MAIN INVERTER
A. General: The UPS output inverters shall constantly recreate the UPS output voltage waveform by converting the
DC bus voltage to AC voltage through a set of IGBT-driven bi-directional power converters. In both normal
input voltage. Input voltage anomalies such as brown-outs, spikes, surges, sags, and outages shall not affect the
amplitude or sinusoidal nature of the recreated output voltage sine wave of the output inverters.
B. Overload Capability: The output power converters shall be capable of 240% for short circuit clearing. Steady
state overload conditions, of up to 200% of system capacity, shall be sustained by the inverter for 60 seconds in
normal operation. In battery operation the inverter shall be capable of sustaining 150% of system capacity for
30 seconds. Should overloads persist past the outlined time limitation, the critical load shall be switched to the
automatic static bypass output of the UPS.
07/2016 edition p. 431

D. Fusing: Each modular inverter shall have high-speed time and energy coordinated fusing to provide fault
E. Battery Protection: The inverter shall be provided with monitoring and control circuits to limit the level of
discharge on the battery system. These control circuits shall be capable of varying the shutdown level to
accommodate any type of battery recommended for UPS application. These logic and control circuits shall
automatically adjust shutdown level to 1.75 volts per cell for any discharge lasting longer than 60 minutes.
2.64 STATIC BYPASS
A. General: As part of the UPS, a system static bypass cabinet shall be provided. The system static bypass shall
beneficial during times when maintenance is required, or the inverter can not support the critical bus. Such times
may be due to prolonged or severe overloads, or UPS failure. The UPS and static bypass switch shall constantly
monitor the auxiliary contacts of their respective circuit breakers, as well as the bypass source voltage, and inhibit
potentially unsuccessful transfers to static bypass from taking place.
1. The external bypass static switch shall be available in the following sizes:
a. 1000 kW.
b. 2000 kW.
c. 4000 kW.
2. External bypass static switch input/output shall be [480 volts AC input, 3 wires plus ground][400VAC input,
4-wire 3P+PEN or 5-wire 3P+N+GND].
B. Design: The design of the static switch power path shall consist of silicon-controlled rectifiers (SCR) with a
C. Automatic Transfers: An automatic transfer of load to static bypass shall take place whenever the load on the
critical bus exceeds the overload rating of the UPS. Automatic transfers of the critical load from static bypass
back to normal operation shall take place when the overload condition is removed from the critical output bus of
the system. Automatic transfers of load to static bypass shall also take place if for any reason the UPS cannot
support the critical bus.
D. Manual Transfers: Manually initiated transfers to and from static bypass shall be initiated through either the
UPS touch screen interface or the external static bypass touch screen.
E. Overloads: The static bypass shall be rated and capable of handling continuous overloads equal to or less than
125% of the rated system output. For instantaneous overloads caused by inrush current from magnetic devices,
or short circuit conditions, the static bypass shall be capable of sustaining overloads of 1000% of system capacity
for periods of up to 500 milliseconds.
F. System Protection:
1. Each phase of the static switch shall be protected by both time/energy coordinated fusing, and circuit
breakers. Standard circuit breaker protection shall be of a molded case design; options shall be available for
insulated case circuit breakers or draw-out power circuit breakers.
the static switch by any source connected to the critical output bus of the system is occurring. One such
condition could be a result of a shorted SCR.
A. Touch Screen Interface: A multi-color LCD touch screen user interface shall be supplied with the UPS, for the
purposes of retrieving information from the UPS/static switch and providing control functionality. Data shell be
transmitted between the UPS/static switch and the user interface via the system CAN bus.
respective circuit breakers connected to the UPS. The mimic bus shall depict power flow through the system and
automatically change status to reflect any change in power flow through normal operation, static bypass
operation, maintenance bypass operation, or battery operation.
07/2016 edition p. 432
such as power flow, voltage and current for the UPS input, output, bypass, and battery.
C. Metered Data: The following metered data, shall be available on the UPS touch screen interface:
1. Input current.
4. Input voltage.
11. Output current.
14. Output voltage.
21. Bypass current.
24. Bypass voltage.
31. DC voltage.
32. DC current.
33. DC power.
36. Run time.
37. UPS temperature.
38. Static bypass temperature.
respective severity. The following minimum set of alarm messages shall be available to depict the status of the
UPS/static switch:
7. Low DC shutdown.
9. Battery fault.
07/2016 edition p. 433

14. Output fault.
15. Output off.
19. Bypass fault.
27. Overload.
30. Inverter fault.
31. EPO activated.
36. DC fuse fault.
E. Controls:
shall highlight, in green, functions that have been completed, and shall inhibit out of sequence operations
performed by the Owner. The step currently in process shall also be outlined to ensure easy operation.
One such user interface shall be part of both the UPS cabinet, and the static bypass cabinet, each sharing
similar functions.
c. Yellow Button: Emergency module off button. Shall trip respective AC Input, output, and DC circuit
breakers of that respective UPS.
the log was erased by the Owner. This log shall provide a date and time stamp of activities and shall be
removed in a first-in, first-out format.
2.66 ACCESSORIES
A. Battery Disconnect Breaker: Each UPS system shall have two [____] AF/AT, 500 volts DC rated, thermal
magnetic trip molded case circuit breakers. Each circuit breaker shall have a 24 volts DC under-voltage release
and 2A/2B auxiliary contacts. The circuit breakers shall be in a separate NEMA 1 enclosure. When open, there
shall be no battery voltage in the UPS enclosure. The UPS system shall be automatically disconnected from the
battery by opening its breakers, should the UPS be subjected to a low battery shutdown state for an extended
period of time, when signaled by a remote EPO signal, or when the Emergency Module Off (EMO) button is
pressed on the UPS. The battery disconnect enclosure shall also be equipped with the following minimum
features:
2. Lights that illuminate during "safe-to-operate" conditions.
INSERT APPLICABLE VALUE IN SUBPARAGRAPH ABOVE
07/2016 edition p. 434

1. The MBC, purchased separately, shall provide power to the critical load bus from the bypass source, during
times where maintenance or service of the UPS is required. The MBC shall provide a mechanical means of
complete isolation of the UPS from the electrical wiring of the installation. The MBC shall be constructed in a
freestanding NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise stated in this Section.
system.
to the UPS and static bypass.
c. CAN interface circuit card to provide an intelligent interface between the switchboard/switchgear
enclosure.
a. Key interlock to prevent out of sequence transfers of MBC from normal operation to bypass operation.
d. Electrically operated circuit breakers.
e. Load Bank Breaker

a. UL 891.
b. UL 1558.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.50 EXAMINATION
corrected.
3.51 INSTALLATION

connections.
connections.
nuts, and/or spade lugs for tightness.
07/2016 edition p. 435
4. Site Testing:

support.
3.53 DEMONSTRATION
3.54 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 436

Symmetra MW 3:3 –400 to 1600 kW
Multi Module

APC SYMMETRA MW
400 kW to 1600 kW
Multi-Module
WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
SECTION [26 33 53] [16611]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.79 SUMMARY
specified.
high speed pulse width modulation and shall be constructed of IGBTs. The UPS shall be part of a
multi-module system, and function as described in this Section.
bypass cabinet, hereafter referred to as the MBC, the battery system, UPS paralleling gear, external bypass
static switch (EBS), and other such electrical distribution as described in this Section.
4. Owner-selected accessories, programming, and miscellaneous components for a fully operational system as
described in this Section shall be supplied as part of the UPS at no additional cost.
1.80 REFERENCES



07/2016 edition p. 437

Multi Module

Test.‖
Requirements.‖


INSERT APPLICABLE VALUES IN THREE SUBPARAGRAPHS BELOW.
1. The UPS system shall be sized for a total load capacity of [____] kW. Each frame shall be rated for
[____] kW with [____] redundant UPS modules.
2. Each UPS module shall be sized for a load capacity of [____] kW load and quantity of [____] 200 kW
redundant UPS section(s).
3. The UPS battery shall be sized for an output of [____] kW at a power factor of [____] for [____] minutes.
1. Multi-Module UPS Capacity: The system shall be rated for full kW output in the following sizes:
a. 400 kVA/400 kW.
b. 600 kVA/600 kW.
c. 800 kVA/800 kW.
d. 1000 kVA/1000 kW.
e. 1200 kVA/1200 kW.
f. 1400 kVA/1400 kW.
g. 1600 kVA/1600 kW.
2. Electrical Input:
1) 480 volts, three-phase, , 3P+GND, 60 Hz.
d. Maximum Frequency Range: ±0.5% to 8% of nominal.
e. Input Power Factor: Approximately ~1 at 100% load and shall not be less than 0.97 at loads greater
than 25% of system rating with no additional filters.
f. Input Current Distortion: Maximum 5% with no requirement for optional additional filters.
g. Soft-Start: Input current shall be linear from 0 to 100% input. This shall take place over a 10 second
default time and values from 1 to 60 seconds shall be programmable. The UPS shall exhibit no
magnetizing inrush current.
3. UPS Electrical Output:
07/2016 edition p. 438
Multi Module

1) 480 volts, three-phase, , 3P+GND, 60 hertz.
2) 5% THD maximum for a 100% non-linear load.
1) 120 degrees, ±0.1 degree for balanced load.
2) 120 degrees, ±0.1 degree for 50% imbalanced load.
3) 120 degrees, ±0.3 degrees for 100% imbalanced load.
g. Overload Rating:
b) 125% for 10 minutes.
100%.
a) 125% continuous.
h. UPS Efficiency: With nominal voltage and resistive load.
1) The UPS AC-AC efficiency shall be as follows:
a) At 100% Load: 97%.
b) At 75% Load: 97%.
c) At 50% Load: 96%.
d) At 25% Load: 94%.
2) The UPS DC-AC efficiency shall be as follows:
a) At 100% Load: 96%.
b) At 75% Load: 97%.
c) At 50% Load: 97%.
d) At 25% Load: 96%.
of 1). The kW and kVA ratings of the UPS output shall be equal. For loads exhibiting a power factor of
0.9 leading to 0.8 lagging no derating of the UPS shall be required. For loads exhibiting power factors
outside this range, the following derating shall apply:
4) 20% derating of the UPS shall apply for a range of 0.4 to 0.1 PF lagging.
07/2016 edition p. 439

Multi Module
1.82 SUBMITTALS
following:
instructions.
A. Qualifications:
standards.
Project.
authorities.
e. ISO 9001
f. ISO 14001
g. IEC 60950.
h. IEC 61000.
i. IEC 61000-2-2.
j. IEC 61000-3-5.
k. IEC 61000-4-2.
07/2016 edition p. 440
Multi Module

l. IEC 61000-4-3.
m. IEC 61000-4-4.
n. IEC 61000-4-5.
o. IEC 62040.
p. IEC 62040-1.
q. IEC 62040-2.
r. IEC 62040-3.
s. FCC part 15, sub part J, class A
t. UL 1778
u. CE
v. EN50091-1-1
w. EN50091-2
x. IEC-1000-4-5
y. EN50091-2

a. 400 kW: 72 dBA
b. 600 kW: 73 dBA
b. Replacement of air filters shall not require the system to be placed into maintenance bypass, nor shall it
require personnel to be subjected to live voltage potential.
1.86 WARRANTY
07/2016 edition p. 441

Multi Module
1.87 MAINTENANCE
personnel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.67 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Product specified is ―APC Symmetra MW Multi-Module‖ as manufactured by APC by

Schneider Electric. Items specified are to establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, and
appearance. Equivalent products by other manufacturers are acceptable. The Architect/Engineer will be the sole
judge of the basis of what is equivalent.
A. Normal:
B. Battery: Upon utility or on-site electrical generation input failure or any out of tolerance condition as defined by
this Section of the electrical AC input source, the critical load bus shall continue being supplied by the main
inverter, which shall derive its’ power from the battery system. There shall be no interruption of power to the
critical load bus during both transitions to battery operation and from battery to normal operation.
C. Static Bypass: The static bypass shall be used to provide a seamless transfer of the critical load bus from the
inverter output to the bypass source. This transfer, along with its’ retransfer, shall take place with no power
interruption to the critical load bus. A transfer to static bypass may also occur in the event of an extreme overload
condition, inverter output voltage out of tolerance condition or if commanded by the operator. This transfer shall
be an automatic function with the exception of an operator-initiated transfer. The UPS shall automatically return
to normal operation when the overload or out of tolerance condition is cleared.
during routine maintenance and service of the UPS. The MBC shall completely isolate both the UPS(s) input and
output connections.
converter sections configured from 400 kW to 1600 kW. Each power section shall consist of three 67 kW
independent modules. Each power module shall allow easy frontal drawout accessibility for maintenance or
system growth. Each module shall exhibit independent fault tolerance to other modules and shall allow for
continuous system operation.
07/2016 edition p. 442

Multi Module
200 kW section shall not influence the performance of its’ respective 200 kW section. Redundant power supplies
filtered inlets on the front of the UPS. The loss of a fan in any or all of the 67 kW power modules shall not cause
a derating of the ambient operating temperature of the UPS. Each 200 kW section shall contain four cooling fans
H. Proportional Load Sharing: Based upon the modular construction of the system, it shall be possible to parallel
UPSs of different sizes, or UPS frames with different quantities of power modules, creating a ―differential load
sharing system.‖ In this manner of operation, each dissimilar UPS shall deliver to the parallel critical load bus up
to a maximum of 100% of its capacity rating. In the event of a failure of a 200 kW power module section within
the UPS, the UPS shall continue parallel operation and deliver power onto the parallel bus up to the full rating of
the remaining power modules in the UPS.
I. Serviceability: The UPS and external static bypass shall be designed to allow and facilitate field service
A. General: The input power converter of the UPS system shall constantly monitor and control the power imported
from the utility or on-site electrical generation mains input. This monitoring and control function shall provide the
necessary UPS power for precise regulation of the DC bus voltage, battery charging, and main inverter output
voltage regulation.
B. Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion: The input current THD shall be held to 5% or less while
simultaneously providing conditioned power to the critical load bus, and charging the batteries under steady state
operating conditions. The 5% maximum THD shall be held while supporting loads of both a linear or non-linear
type, from 0 to 100% of the UPS capacity. The 5% maximum THD shall be accomplished with no additional
filters, magnetic devices, or other components.
D. Magnetization Inrush Current: For ease of device coordination the UPS shall exhibit no inrush current to the
electrical supply system as a standard product. If provided with an optional isolation transformer, inrush shall be
limited to six times the nominal input current of the transformer.

07/2016 edition p. 443
Multi Module
output rated current whenever the system is in normal operation.
2. In cases where the source voltage to the UPS is nominal [480V][400V] and the applied UPS load is equal to
or less than 100% of UPS capacity, input current shall not exceed 115% of UPS rated output current, while
on-site generator.
2.71 MAIN INVERTER
A. General: The UPS output inverters shall continuously recreate the UPS output voltage wave form by converting
the DC bus voltage to AC voltage through a set of IGBT driven bi-directional power converters. In both normal
input voltage. Input voltage anomalies such as brown-outs, spikes, surges, sags, and outages, shall not affect
B. Overload Capability: The output power converters shall be capable of 240% sub-cycle for short circuit clearing.
Steady state overload conditions, of up to 200% of system capacity, shall be sustained by the inverter for
60 seconds in normal operation. In battery operation the inverter shall be capable of sustaining 150% of system
capacity for 30 seconds. Should overloads persist past the outlined time limitation, the critical load shall be
seamlessly switched to the automatic static bypass output of the UPS.
D. Fusing: Each modular inverter shall have high speed time and energy coordinated fusing to provide fault
E. Battery Protection: The UPS inverter shall be provided with monitoring and control circuits to limit the level of
discharge on the battery system. The UPS logic and control circuits shall monitor the discharge constant, and
automatically adjust shutdown level to 1.75 volts per cell for any discharge expected to last longer than
approximately 60 minutes.
2.72 STATIC BYPASS
A. General: As part of the UPS system, a system static bypass shall be provided. The system static bypass shall
beneficial during times when maintenance is required, or the inverter output can not support the critical bus.
Such times may be due to prolonged or severe overloads, or UPS failure, causing an insufficient remaining
number of UPS power converter modules. The UPS(s) and static bypass switch shall constantly monitor the
auxiliary contacts of their respective circuit breakers, as well as the bypass source voltage, and inhibit potentially
unsuccessful transfers to static bypass from taking place.
1. 400kW UPS: Utilizes an internal bypass static switch rated for the full capacity of the UPS (400kW).
2. 600kW UPS: Utilizes an internal bypass static switch rated for the full capacity of the UPS (600kW).
3. 800 to 1600kW UPS: The external bypass static switch shall be available in the following sizes:
a. 1000 kW.
b. 2000 kW.
c. 4000 kW.
4. External bypass static switch input/output shall be [480 volts AC input, 3 wires plus ground][400VAC input,
4-wire 3P+PEN or 5-wire 3P+N+GND].
07/2016 edition p. 444
Multi Module
B. Static Bypass Switch: The 800 kW to 1600 kW UPS unit shall incorporate freestanding external static bypass
switch. The 400 kW to 600 kW UPS shall utilize internal static switches integral to the UPS module. When
required, the 400 kW and 600 kW UPS can be configured with an external static bypass switch.
C. Design: The design of the static switch power path shall consist of silicon-controlled rectifiers (SCR) with a
D. Automatic Transfers: The UPS shall be designed to allow a seamless automatic transfer of critical load to static
bypass and shall take place whenever the load on the critical bus exceeds the overload rating of the UPS. A
seamless automatic transfer of the critical load from static bypass back to normal operation shall take place when
the overload condition is removed from the critical output bus of the system. The UPS shall be designed to allow
a seamless automatic transfer of critical load to static bypass for any reason the UPS cannot support the critical
bus.
E. Manual Transfers: Manually initiated transfers to and from static bypass shall be initiated through the UPS
touch screen interface or from the external static bypass touch screen (for UPSs with an external static bypass
cabinet).
F. Overloads: The static bypass switch shall be rated and capable of handling continuous overloads equal to or
less than 125% of the rated system output current. For instantaneous overloads caused by inrush current from
magnetic devices, or short circuit conditions, the static bypass shall be capable of sustaining overloads of 1000%
of system capacity for periods of up to 500 milliseconds.
G. System Protection:
1. Each input phase of the static bypass switch shall be protected by both time/energy coordinated fusing, and
circuit breakers. Standard circuit breaker protection shall be of a molded case design; options shall be
available for insulated case circuit breakers or draw-out power circuit breakers.
the static switch by any source connected to the critical output bus of the system is occurring.
2.73 PARALLEL OPERATION
A. General: For purposes of load-sharing, the UPS shall contain as a standard feature, the ability to parallel up to
four UPS modules (where each module does not have to be of equal size and power handling capacity of the
before or after module(s)) plus a system static bypass switch for either increased capacity, redundancy, or both.
When utilizing the internal static bypass, the system shall have the capability of paralleling a total of four UPSs for
capacity. In this mode of operation, the output voltage, output frequency, output phase angle, and output
impedance of each module shall operate in uniformity to ensure correct load sharing. This control function shall
not require any additional footprint and shall be an integral function of each UPS.
B. Multi-Module UPS: Multi-module UPSs shall be of the same design, voltage, and frequency. Multi-module
UPSs of different size ratings shall be permitted to be paralleled together for purposes of increased capacity or
UPS module redundancy.
C. Non-Redundant Operation: In a non-redundant operating mode, all UPS modules shall be required to support
their proportioned load of the critical load on its critical bus. In the event of a failure condition that disables one
UPS module, the critical load shall be transferred to the static bypass feed should the remaining UPS(s) be
overloaded to a level where they can no longer support the critical bus.
D. Redundant Operation: In a redundant operating mode at least one UPS on the critical bus can be removed for
maintenance, while the remaining UPS(s) supply the necessary load on the critical bus. In the event of a UPS
failure, the failed UPS shall isolate itself through the use of input and output contactors, while the remaining
UPS(s) supply load on the critical bus. The UPS system shall not be required to be placed into bypass operation
for the removal/restoration of a redundant module to/from the bus.
E. Fault Tolerant Operation: Based upon the modular design of the UPS(s), failure of a component, such as a
200 kW power module section, shall not require the UPS containing a failure to transfer to bypass unless the
remaining power modules within the UPS are overloaded. The UPS with a failed power module shall still be
07/2016 edition p. 445
Multi Module
capable of supporting load at the level of the remaining power modules on its critical bus. In this manner,
differential load sharing may take place, to allow each UPS module to operate up to its capacity and not have to
share load equally. In this mode of operation the UPS(s) may contribute load up to 100% of the capacity of the
remaining power modules available.
F. Parallel Bus Communications: For purposes of inter-module and static bypass switch communications, parallel
UPS shall communicate with each other via a set of redundant parallel buses (PBUS 1 and PBUS 2). Each
PBUS communication line shall be divided into two paths-one RS-485 and one controller area network (CAN).
Time-critical communications shall be transmitted via the EIA 485 lines at a rate of 1.1 Mbps, and non-time critical
data shall be transmitted via the CAN bus at a rate of 500 kbps. In this configuration, loss of one PBUS
communication line shall not cause loss of system level communications. The parallel bus shall allow each UPS
to exchange synchronization data, operation mode requests, load-sharing, and other such commands.
Monitoring of the CAN lines in parallel bus one and parallel bus two shall detect the lack of communications of a
given UPS or static bypass switch in the parallel installation.
G. Parallel System Controls: To avoid single points of failure, the UPS system shall have no single dedicated
control system designed to control the operation of parallel UPS(s). Control of and direction of parallel UPS shall
take place via a master/slave relationship, where the first UPS to receive logic power asserts itself as a master. In
the event of a master failure, a slave UPS shall take the role of master and assume the responsibility of the
previous master UPS. Regardless of which UPS is master or slave, the owner shall be able to make changes to
the system status (such as request for bypass) from any UPS connected to the bus and all UPSs on the bus shall
transfer simultaneously.
H. Display: Each UPS and external static bypass switch shall utilize a multi-color LCD touch screen display. Via an
active touch screen mimic bus, it shall be capable of showing the quantity of UPS(s) connected to the critical bus,
as well as its general status, such as circuit breaker status information.
A. Touch Screen Interface: A multi-color LCD touch screen user interface shall be supplied with both the UPS and
external static switch cabinets, for the purposes of retrieving information from the UPS/static switch and providing
control functionality. Data shall be transmitted between the UPS/static switch and the user interface via the
system CAN bus.
only those circuit breakers applicable to system operation on the UPS system. The mimic bus shall depict power
flow through the system and shall automatically change status to reflect any change in power flow through normal
operation, static bypass operation, maintenance bypass operation, or battery operation. Parallel modules
connected to the system shall be depicted at the display of each UPS. Specific details of a given UPS can only
be accessed from the touch screen at that UPS.
such as power flow, voltage and current for the UPS input, output, bypass and battery.
C. Metered Data: Data shall be available in graphic and alphanumeric form. Input and output voltage and current
wave forms shall be displayed. The following metered data shall be available on the UPS touch screen interface.
1. Input current.
4. Input voltage.
11. Output current.
14. Output voltage.
07/2016 edition p. 446
Multi Module

21. Bypass current.
24. Bypass voltage.
31. DC voltage.
32. DC current.
33. DC power.
36. Run time.
37. Ambient temperature.
38. Static bypass ambient temperature.
respective severity. This information can be transmitted locally via the network management system. The
following minimum set of alarm messages shall be available to depict the status of the UPS/static switch:
7. Low DC shutdown.
9. Battery fault.
14. Output fault.
15. Output off.
19. Bypass fault.
27. Overload.
30. Inverter fault.
31. EPO activated.
07/2016 edition p. 447
Multi Module

36. DC fuse fault.
37. Parallel communication error.
38. Parallel unit disabled.
39. Master changed.
E. Controls:
shall highlight in green, functions that have been completed. The current step in process shall also be
outlined to ensure easy operation. One such user interface shall be part of both the UPS cabinet, and the
static bypass cabinet, each sharing similar functions.
c. Yellow Button: Emergency module off button. Shall trip AC Input, output, and DC circuit breakers of
that respective UPS.
the log was erased by the Owner. This log shall provide a date and time stamp of up to 1024 events which
shall be removed in a first-in, first-out format.
2.75 ACCESSORIES
A. Battery Disconnect Breaker: Each UPS system shall have two, 500 volts DC rated circuit breakers. Each
circuit breaker shall have a 24 volts DC under voltage release and 2A/2B auxiliary contacts. The circuit breakers
shall be in a separate NEMA 1 enclosure. When open, there shall be no battery voltage in the UPS enclosure.
The UPS system shall be automatically disconnected from the battery by opening its breakers, should the UPS
be subjected to a low battery shutdown state for an extended period of time, when signaled by a remote
emergency power off (EPO) signal, or when the emergency module off button is pressed on the UPS. The
battery disconnect enclosure shall also be equipped with the following minimum features:
2. Lights that illuminate during "OK to Operate" conditions.

1. The MBC, purchased separately, shall provide power to the critical load bus from the bypass utility or on-site
generation source, during times where maintenance or service of the UPS is required. The MBC shall
provide a mechanical means of complete isolation of the UPS(s) from all sources of AC power. The MBC
shall be constructed in a freestanding NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise stated in this Section.
system.
to each UPS static bypass.
c. CAN Interface circuit card to provide an intelligent interface between the switchboard/switchgear
enclosure and each UPS and static switch.
a. Key interlock to prevent out of sequence transfers of MBC from normal operation to bypass operation
and back to normal operations.
d. Electrically operated circuit breakers
a. UL 891.
b. UL 1558.
07/2016 edition p. 448

Multi Module
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.55 EXAMINATION
corrected.
3.56 INSTALLATION

connections.
connections.
nuts, and/or spade lugs for properly seated or torque.
4. Site Testing:
b. Verify proper control functions.
c. Verify proper bypass operation.

support.
07/2016 edition p. 449
Multi Module
3.58 DEMONSTRATION
3.59 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 450

Accusine SWP
20/30/45/60/90/120 A
07/2016 edition p. 451

AccuSine SWP 20 to 480 A
Contents
1 - Installations concerned ............................................................................................................... 2
1.1 - New installations ................................................................................................................. 2
1.2 - Existing installations............................................................................................................ 2
2 - General .......................................................................................................................................... 2
2.1 - Scope.................................................................................................................................. 2
2.2 - Applicable voltage distortion limits ...................................................................................... 2
2.3 - Location of the equipment in the installation ....................................................................... 2
3 - System description ...................................................................................................................... 3
3.1 - Operation principle .............................................................................................................. 3
3.2 - Technology ......................................................................................................................... 3
3.3 - Functions ............................................................................................................................ 3
4 - Normal service conditions .......................................................................................................... 3
4.1 - Conditioned current ......................................................................................................... 3
4.2 - Voltage distortion ................................................................................................................ 3
4.3 - On/off .................................................................................................................................. 3
4.4 - Self-adaptation to the load .................................................................................................. 3
4.5 - Independence with respect to the source .................................................................... 3
5 - Overload conditions..................................................................................................................... 4
6 - Multi-unit configurations ............................................................................................................. 4
6.1 - Active parallel configuration ................................................................................................ 4
6.2 - Cascade configuration ........................................................................................................ 4
6-3 - "Multi-feeder" configuration ................................................................................................. 4
7 - System status and control panel ................................................................................................ 4
7.1 - System status ................................................................................................................... 4
7.2 - System control .................................................................................................................... 4
7.3 - Display panel ...................................................................................................................... 4
8 - Installation and protection .......................................................................................................... 5
8.1 - Point of connection ............................................................................................................. 5
8.2 - Installation........................................................................................................................... 5
8.3 - Installation of current sensors ............................................................................................. 5
8.4 - Active harmonic conditioner protection ............................................................................... 5
9. - AC-source characteristics .......................................................................................................... 5
10 - Environmental conditions ......................................................................................................... 5
11 - Standards and tests ................................................................................................................... 5
11.1 - Compliance with standards ............................................................................................... 5
11.2 - Certification of conformity ................................................................................................. 6
12 - Test procedure and quality system .......................................................................................... 6
13 - Start-up ....................................................................................................................................... 6
14 - Replacement parts ..................................................................................................................... 6
15 - Warranty...................................................................................................................................... 6
16 - Installation Services................................................................................................................... 6
17 - Electrical diagrams .................................................................................................................... 7
Appendix: List of characteristics .................................................................................................... 8
07/2016 edition p. 452

1 - Installations concerned
This specification applies to buildings or industrial sites where the circulation of harmonic currents may disturb electrical installations.
It covers the requirements for electronic equipment specified hereafter aimed at harmonic cancellation, and known as Active
Harmonic Conditioners (or Active Filters).
1.1 - New installations

This specification shall be used to apply a preventive solution, to problems such as voltage distortion (THDU), particularly when long
cables are used, and cable overheating (e.g. neutral conductor).
This solution shall be considered in any new installation where the following equipment shall be used:
 computers (e.g. PC network, etc.),
 lifts (i.e. variable speed drives),
 battery chargers,
 fluorescent tubes,
 TV/radio transmitter-receivers, etc.
Particular attention shall be paid to installations having limited power and a standby generator set (i.e. high sub-transient reactance).
1.2 - Existing installations

This specification shall be used to apply a corrective solution, to installations where the following problems are encountered:
 increase in voltage distortion (THDU) and current distortion (THDI),
 cable overheating (e.g. neutral conductor),
 unexplained tripping of circuit-breakers,
 temperature rise in transformers,
 flicker of fluorescent lighting, etc.
Installations that are particularly sensitive to these phenomena include:
 high-rise commercial buildings where sensitive equipment, such as computers, medical apparatus, etc., are used;
 telecommunications, television and broadcast stations where harmonic currents may affect the quality of
transmission and the reliability of sophisticated electronic equipment,
 certain industrial processes, for example those implementing real time computerized management systems.
2 - General
2.1 - Scope
Active Harmonic Conditioners (AHC), shall be used to eliminate harmonic currents circulating within the electrical
installation. They shall limit the individual harmonic content of designated current harmonics and the voltage total
harmonic distortion (THDU) to a given percentage of the nominal fundamental voltage (voltage at 50 Hz or 60 Hz).
For a precise definition of this percentage, reference shall be made to sensitive equipment specifications (i.e.
acceptable THDU % for trouble-free operation), or to the applicable standards for the point of connection to the public
AC system.
2.2 - Applicable voltage distortion limits

At the design stage, before the equipment has been completely defined, the following values shall be considered as a
maximum for the voltage distortion (THDU):
 computers: < 5%,
 telecommunications bays: < 5%,
 television studios: < 5%,
 general distribution: < 8%,
 industrial equipment: <8%,
 point of connection to the public AC system: < 5 to 8% according to applicable standards.
These values have been taken from standards IEC 61000-2-2 and 61000-2-4 (harmonic compatibility) and EN 50160-
3 (network quality).
2.3 - Location of the equipment in the installation

The Active Harmonic Conditioner shall be installed in parallel with the AC distribution system of the building (shunt
connected), wherever attenuation of harmonic currents is needed.
It shall be located preferably close to those loads generating harmonic currents, in order to avoid circulation of the
currents in the building cables.
3 – System description
3.1 – Operation principle
The Active Harmonic Conditioner shall be of ―shunt‖-type topology, i.e. connected in parallel with the AC line.
It shall analyze continuously the harmonic currents drawn by the load, and inject the same harmonic current with the
appropriate phase. Consequently, the current supplied by the source remains virtually sinusoidal under all operating
conditions.
07/2016 edition p. 453

The Active Harmonic Conditioner shall be compatible with any type of load, and shall guarantee efficient harmonic
conditioning, even when changes are made to the installation.
3.2 - Technology
The Active Harmonic Conditioner shall use an IGBT (Isolated Gate Bipolar Transistor) bridge to inject the proper
harmonic current.
It shall be controlled by a microprocessor-based system, and shall use a DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
microcontroller to monitor the harmonic currents.
3.3 - Functions
As a minimum, the Active Harmonic Conditioner shall include the following functions:
nd th
 conditioning of harmonic currents from H2 (2 harmonic) to H25 (25 harmonic) included,
 conditioning of the phase displacement (cos ).
To guarantee efficient harmonic conditioning, customization of certain parameters shall be possible:
 overall conditioning or conditioning of selected harmonics,
 control parameter for conditioning of the phase displacement (cos ),
 control parameter for the load type: single-phase load, three-phase load, combination of single and three-phase
loads.
4 - Normal service conditions

4.1 - Conditioned current
 The Active Harmonic Conditioner shall be capable of delivering its rated output harmonic current to the point of
connection whatever the load conditions.
 The rated output current shall be indicated in Amperes (rms) per phase.
 In the neutral conductor, the Active Harmonic Conditioner shall also be capable of conditioning a harmonic current
three times greater than the phase current (i.e. condition third-order harmonic currents and multiples), when the
phases are balanced.
4.2 - Voltage distortion

The Active Harmonic Conditioner shall be capable of reducing the Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion (THDU) to a
specified level in % of the fundamental voltage (voltage at 50 Hz or 60 Hz). (See § "General – Applicable voltage
distortion limits" for specified values.)
When used at its rated current (i.e. rms of harmonic currents consumed by the load equal to rms of harmonic current
supplied by the Active Harmonic Conditioner), the Active Harmonic Conditioner shall reduce THDI by a factor of at
least 10.
4.3 - On/off
 It shall be possible to start and stop the Active Harmonic Conditioner manually via pushbuttons. Remote control
shall be also possible.
After an AC source failure, it shall be possible to set the Active Harmonic Conditioner so that it restarts automatically.
4.4 - Self-adaptation to the load

It shall be possible to use the Active Harmonic Conditioner with all types of loads. It shall adapt automatically to any
changes in the harmonic spectrum of the load.
4.5 - Independence with respect to the source

The Active Harmonic Conditioner shall also be compatible with all types of sources and shall in particular operate
independently with respect to the source impedance.
5 - Overload conditions
Should the Active Harmonic Conditioner be overloaded during transient operation of certain loads (e.g. motor start-up,
particular sequences, etc.), or permanently, this shall not affect the reliability of its operation.
In such cases, the Active Harmonic Conditioner shall operate in a current limiting mode, and still deliver to the load its
rated harmonic current.
In this case, harmonic conditioning capacity shall be limited to the following ratio:
Conditioner rating (rms value of harmonic currents delivered) / (rms) load harmonic currents.
For better adaptation to all types of installations, the Active Harmonic Conditioner shall be capable of operating in
association with other harmonic-reduction systems (e.g. LC filters, 12-pulse bridges, etc.).
6 - Multi-unit configurations
To enhance conditioning at a given point in the installation, it shall be possible to connect several Active Harmonic
07/2016 edition p. 454
Conditioners in various configurations:
6.1 - Active parallel configuration

To increase the conditioning capacity, or to increase the dependability, it shall be possible to connect up to 4 units in
parallel, using a single set of current transformers (measurement sensors). In this mode of operation, each Active
Harmonic Conditioner shall produce 1/n of the injected harmonic current, where n conditioners are parallel connected.
6.2 - Cascade configuration

To condition the harmonics at different levels of the distribution system, it shall be possible to connect two Active
Harmonic Conditioners in a series or ―cascade‖ configuration. The downstream conditioner shall condition a specific
load, while the upstream conditioner shall provide overall conditioning.
6.3 - "Multi-feeder" configuration

It shall be possible to condition up to three feeders using three sets of current transformers, one set per feeder,
connected to a single Active Harmonic Conditioner.
7 – System status and control panel

7.1 - System status
As a minimum, the Active Harmonic Conditioner shall include the following indications:
 a green LED to indicate normal operation,
 an orange LED to indicate current limiting,
 a red LED to indicate conditioner shutdown or alarm condition.
Two pushbuttons shall control ON/OFF operation.
7.2 - System control

A complete display panel shall guide the operator to monitor the system properly, and shall provide help for start-up,
maintenance and diagnostics.
7.3 - Display panel

The displayed information shall be available in 5 languages: French, English, German, Italian and Spanish.
The display shall include detailed measurements such as:
 total current distortion (load and source),
 total rms current (load and source),
 harmonic current distortion per order, up to the 13th order.
8 - Installation and protection
8.1 - Point of connection
For best results, conditioning of harmonic currents shall take place at their point of origin, i.e. close to the harmonic-
generating loads.
However, depending of the power-quality objectives (THDU), it shall be possible to connect Active Harmonic
Conditioners anywhere in the installation in configurations described in the "Multi-unit configurations" section.
8.2 - Installation
The Active Harmonic Conditioner shall be as small as possible, so that it can be installed anywhere.
Particularly, it shall be possible to install the conditioner in low voltage switchboards or motor control centers.
Finally, wall mounting shall also be possible in plants or electrical rooms.
8.3 - Installation of current sensors

To facilitate installation of the current sensors, they shall be of the split type.
8.4 - Active harmonic conditioner protection

A three or four pole circuit breaker shall be installed close to the point of connection to the AC system to protect the
connection cables. It shall be selected according to general selection practice for circuit breakers and manufacturer
recommendations.
In addition, the Active Harmonic Conditioner shall include the following protection functions:
 thermal-overload protection;
 internal short-circuit;
 inverter bridge for abnormal operation.
9 - AC-source characteristics
The Active Harmonic Conditioner shall be suitable for connection to an AC electrical installation having the following
07/2016 edition p. 455

characteristics:
 3 phases with or without neutral (3 or 4 wires);
 all types of system earthing arrangements;
 400 V - 20%, + 15%;
 50 Hz or 60 Hz  8%.
10 - Environmental conditions
The Active Harmonic Conditioner enclosure shall provide an IP30 degree of protection as per IEC 60529.
The Active Harmonic Conditioner shall be able to operate without derating under the following ambient conditions:
 continuous temperature 0 to 40° C;
 relative humidity 95% without condensation;
 altitude above sea level: 1000 m maximum.
To allow installation in any location, the Active Harmonic Conditioner shall have a noise level between 55 dBA and 65
dBA (as per ISO 3746) depending on the rating.
11 – Standards and tests

11.1 - Compliance with standards
The Active Harmonic Conditioner shall comply with international standards applicable to this type of equipment and, in
particular, meet the recommendations of the following:
 construction and safety: EN 50091-1,
 design: IEC 60146,
 EMC, conducted and radiated emissions: EN 55011 class A,
 EMC, immunity to electrostatic discharges: IEC 61000-4-2 / level 3,
 EMC, immunity to radiated fields: IEC 61000-4-3 / level 3,
 EMC, immunity to low-energy impulse waves: IEC 61000-4-4 / level 4,
 EMC, immunity to high-energy impulse waves: IEC 61000-4-5 / level 4.
 IEC 439: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies.
 IEC 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
 ISO 3746: Sound power levels.
 CE marking.
What is more, the equipment must comply with environmental-protection standards, with production taking place on
premises certified ISO 14001.11.2 - Certification of conformity
The manufacturer shall provide, on request, a complete qualification file demonstrating compliance with the above
standards.
What is more, the indicated levels of performance shall be confirmed by certification from independent laboratories
(e.g. TÜV or Veritas).
12 - Test procedure and quality system

12.1 - Test procedure
The equipment manufacturer shall provide proof of a stringent Quality Assurance programme. In particular, the main
equipment manufacturing stages shall be sanctioned by appropriate tests such as:
 incoming components inspection, discrete subassembly testing,
 complete functional checks on the final product.
Equipment shall undergo on-load burn-in before leaving the factory.
Final inspection and adjustments shall be documented in a report drawn up by the supplier’s Quality Inspection
department.
ISO 9001 or 9002 certification of the production site shall be compulsory.
12.2 - Quality system

The equipment design procedure shall be covered by an ISO 9001 quality system as well as a dependability study to
13 - Start-up
Equipment start-up on site shall be carried out by the manufacturer or an approved representative.
07/2016 edition p. 456

It shall include on-site acceptance during which a check on system characteristics shall be made.
14 - Replacement parts
The suppler undertakes to provide replacement parts for at least ten years following the date of delivery.
A set of emergency spare parts shall be supplied with the equipment.
15 - Warranty
The equipment shall be guaranteed (parts and labor on site) for one year following the start-up date.
16 - Services
Required services include:
 supply of the Active Harmonic Conditioner and any accessory parts or elements;
 carriage-paid equipment transportation and delivery to the site.
Options:
 equipment handling and installation on the site;
 connection of input cables;
 connection of output cables.
17 - Electrical diagrams
Fig. Active Harmonic Conditioner operating principle
07/2016 edition p. 457

Fig. Example of an Active Harmonic Conditioner (AHC) installation

The characteristics specified for the Active Harmonic Conditioner shall include the following:
Electrical characteristics
Input
 rated voltage 400 V -20 % + 15 %
 rated frequency 50 Hz / 60 Hz +/- 8 %
 number of phases 3 phases without or with neutral (operation possible with
single-phase or unbalanced loads)
 connection type 3 or 4 wires
Features
 conditioning of harmonics overall or selected harmonics
 phase displacement (cos ) conditioning adjustable, up to 0.94
Configurations
 single unit yes
 parallel configuration up to four units
Technical characteristics
 harmonic-conditioning per phase 20 A rms, 30 A rms, 45 A rms, 60 A rms, 90 A rms, 120 A rms
capacity: in the neutral 60 A rms, 90 A rms, 135 A rms, 180 A rms, 270 A rms,
conductor 360 A rms
 harmonic orders conditioned H2 to H25
overall or selective conditioning
 response time < 40 ms
 attenuation ratio THDI load / THDI source > 10 at rated current
THDI = Iharmonic / Ifundamental
 power factor correction up to 1
 overload conditioning limited to nominal rms current, but continuous
operation with overload possible
 inrush current < 2 times the nominal peak current
07/2016 edition p. 458

 losses < 1000 W 20 A 2600 W 60 A

< 1300 W 30 A 4200 W 90 A
< 2100 W 45 A 5200 W 120 A
 ventilation forced air (entry through bottom and exit through top)
 audible noise < 55 dBA 20 A & 30 A
(according to ISO 3746) < 60 dBA 45 A & 60 A
< 65 dBA 90 A & 120 A
Configuration and front panel

Configuration
 languages French, UK English, Italian, Spanish, German, Dutch, US
English
 type of AC system with or without neutral
 current sensor ratings 300/1, 500/1, 600/1, 1000/1, 1500/1, 2000/1, 3000/1, 4000/1
 conditioning of phase displacement (cos ) YES or NO, selectable
 remote control YES or NO, selectable
 selection of harmonic orders to condition YES or NO, selectable
 operation in parallel active parallel or cascade modes; up to 4 units
User interface
 indications green LED : normal operation
red LED : OFF or alarm
orange LED : overload/limitation operation
 7-language alphanumeric display measurements and alarms
start-up assistance
help menu for diagnostics and maintenance
custom menu
 control ON pushbutton
OFF pushbutton
 remote indications 2 x ON / OFF
3 relay contacts 1 x overload/limitation operation
Environment conditions/reference standards

Environment
 ambient temperature < 25° C recommended, 0 to 40° C continuous
 relative humidity < 95% without condensation
 altitude < 1000 m
Reference standards
 construction/safety EN 50091-1
 design IEC 146
 degree of protection IP 30 (IEC 529)
Electromagnetic compatibility
 conducted and radiated emissions EN 55011 class A
 immunity to electrostatic discharges IEC 61000-4-2 level 3
 immunity to radiated fields IEC 61000-4-3 level 3
 immunity to low-energy impulse waves IEC 61000-4-4 level 4
 immunity to high-energy impulse waves IEC 61000-4-5 level 4
07/2016 edition p. 459

Modular Power Distribution
3/3 Phase 144/277 kVA
07/2016 edition p. 460

Modular Power Distribution 144 kW

APC Modular Power Distribution Unit, 300mm, 400A, 144kW, 208V Output
144kW PDU/Distribution
THIS GUIDE SPECIFICATION IS WRITTEN IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS INSTITUTE (CSI) MASTERFORMAT. THIS
SECTION MUST BE CAREFULLY REVIEWED AND EDITED BY THE ARCHITECT OR THE ENGINEER TO MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PROJECT.
COORDINATE THIS SECTION WITH OTHER SPECIFICATION SECTIONS IN THE PROJECT MANUAL AND WITH THE DRAWINGS.
WHERE REFERENCE IS MADE THROUGHOUT THIS SECTION TO “PROVIDE”, “INSTALL”, “SUBMIT”, ETC., IT SHALL MEAN THAT THE CONTRACTOR,
SUBCONTRACTOR, OR CONTRACTOR OF LOWER TIER SHALL “PROVIDE”, “INSTALL”, SUBMIT”, ETC., UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
THIS SECTION IS WRITTEN TO INCLUDE THE 2004 MASTERFORMAT AND THE 1995 MASTERFORMAT VERSIONS. WHERE APPLICABLE, THESE ITEMS
ARE BRACKETED AND, IN EACH CASE, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, THE FIRST CHOICE APPLIES TO THE 2004 MASTERFORMAT AND THE
SECOND CHOICE APPLIES TO THE 1995 MASTERFORMAT.
SECTION [26 26 00]
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Scope: Provide design and engineering, labor, material, equipment, related services, and supervision required, including,
but not limited to, manufacturing, fabrication, erection, and installation for a power distribution unit (PDU) as required for
the complete performance of the work, and as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified.
B. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section includes, but shall not be limited to, requirements for a complete
modular power distribution system for powering IT loads.
1.
This specification describes the operation and functionality of a continuous duty, three-phase Modular Power
Distribution Unit for Data Center and Infrastructure Equipment Room installation, hereafter referred to as the PDU.
2. The PDU shall provide a mechanical means of complete isolation of the input source from the critical output
distribution.
3. The PDU shall contain the appropriate modular distribution panel within a Rack enclosure suitable for installation in
a data center environment. The distribution panel shall be intrinsically finger safe, and shall be suitable for the
installation of single or three phase modular circuit breaker assemblies without the need for hand tools.
4. Each 208V PDU shall be comprised of factory assembled and tested, swappable circuit breaker modules which shall
require no tools to install.
5. All of the above system components are housed in an APC NetShelter™ SX Rack, 300mm (W) x 1070mm (D) x
2000mm (H).
6. The PDU and associated equipment shall operate in conjunction with a primary power supply to provide quality
uninterrupted power for mission critical, electronic equipment load.
7. All programming and miscellaneous components for a fully operational system as described in this Section shall be
available as part of the PDU.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. General: The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are
referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The edition/revision of the referenced publications shall be the latest date
as of the date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise specified.
B. Electronic Industries Association (EIA):

1. EIA 310, "Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment" (copyrighted by EIA, ANSI approved).
C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

1. IEEE 519-1992 Standard Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems.

2. ISO 14001, “Environmental Management Systems - Requirements With Guidance for Use.”
E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. UL 60950, “Standard for Information Technology Equipment.”
2. ULc CSA 60950-1
07/2016 edition p. 461
F. Where applicable, the PDU shall also be designed in accordance with publications from the following organizations and
committees:
1. NFPA- National Fire Protection Associations
2. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration
A. Design Requirements
SELECT OR INSERT APPLICABLE VALUE BELOW.
1. The PDU shall be sized for [____] kVA load.
B. System Characteristics
1. System Capacity: 144kW
The PDPM144F PDU shall support 400A at 208V maximum input and provide 144kW output.
2. Upstream Breaker Protection: Upstream breaker protection rated at 400A is recommended.
3. Input: The system input shall be configurable as single mains derived from a three phase wye source. Standard cable
entry shall be through the top. Bottom cable entry shall also be facilitated.]
a. AC Nominal Input Voltage: 120/208V 3-phase, 400A, 3-Wire+N+G, 60 Hz
b. Maximum Input Current: 400A
c. Short Circuit Withstand Rating: 10kA Symmetrical, 240V maximum
d. Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage (UCC): 4kV
4. Output:
a. Nominal Output: 120/208V 3-phase, 400A maximum, 3-Wire + N + G
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data showing material proposed. Submit sufficient information to determine compliance
with the Drawings and Specifications. Product data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each product and accessory required. Include information not fully detailed in
manufacturer’s standard product data, including, but not limited to, the following:
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams detailing power systems, clearly differentiating between manufacturer-installed
wiring and field-installed wiring, and between components provided by the manufacturer and those provided by others.
1. Submit system single-line diagram.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data to include in operation and maintenance
manuals including, but not limited to, safe and correct operation of PDU functions.
1. Submit an installation manual, which shall include, but shall not be limited to, instructions for storage, handling,
examination, preparation, installation, and start-up of PDU.
2. Submit an operation and maintenance manual, which shall include, but shall not be limited to, operating instructions.
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be a firm engaged in the manufacture of modular PDUs of types
and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for a minimum of 20 years.
a. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified and shall be designed to internationally accepted standards.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations of
Federal, State, and local authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from such authorities.
07/2016 edition p. 462

1. Work shall also be designed in accordance with the following:

a. NFPA 70
2. Where applicable, the UPS shall also be designed in accordance with publications from the following organizations and
committees:
e. ISO 9001
f. ISO 14001
g. FCC
A. Deliver materials to the Project site in supplier’s or manufacturer’s original wrappings and containers, labeled with supplier’s
or manufacturer’s name, material or product brand name, and lot number, if any.
B. The customer shall store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a well-ventilated area
A. Environmental Requirements: Do not install PDUs until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is
completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and
1. Environmental:
a. Storage Ambient Temperature: 0 to +45°C
b. Operating Ambient Temperature: 0 to 30°C (0 to 40°C derated)
c. Relative Humidity: 0 percent to 95 percent, non-condensing.
d. Altitude: 0 – 10,000 m
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: The Contractor shall warrant the work of this Section to be in accordance with the Contract Documents
and free from faults and defects in materials and workmanship for period indicated below. This special warranty shall extend
the one year period of limitations contained in the General Conditions. The special warranty shall be countersigned by the
Installer and the manufacturer.
1. Power Distribution Unit: The PDU shall be covered by a full parts and labor warranty from the manufacturer for a
period of 12 months from date of installation or acceptance by the Owner or 18 months from date of shipment from the
manufacturer, whichever occurs first.
B. Additional Owner Rights: The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. A complete offering of preventative and full service maintenance contracts for the Power Distribution Unit shall be
available from the manufacturer. Contract work shall be performed by factory trained service personnel.
PART 2 – PRODUCT
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Product specified is “APC Modular Power Distribution Unit, 144 kW” as manufactured by APC by
Schneider Electric. Items specified are to establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, and appearance.
As a minimum, the PDU shall contain the following features and accessories:
A. Input voltage: The PDU shall be available for a 208V input.
07/2016 edition p. 463

B. Distribution Board: Also included in the PDU shall be one 72 pole distribution board connected to the output bus of the
PDU to serve as critical load distribution.
C. Enclosure with locking mechanism: The PDU shall also have a full-length hinged front door, with locking mechanism,
to allow access to the panelboard circuits. There shall also be a hinged rear door to allow access to the back of the unit.
D. Testing and quality assurance: All circuit breakers shall be 100% factory tested to ensure the highest quality for the
PDU. In addition the PDU shall be tested with 100% load and all panel circuit breakers shall be 100% tested. The PDU
shall also be Hipot tested per UL 60950-1 guidelines.
2.3 DISPLAYS AND CONTROLS
A. Display unit: For purposes of providing local annunciation of status and alarm messages, the PDU shall have a
microprocessor-controlled display unit located on a hinged door in front of the system. The display shall consist of an
alphanumeric display with pushbutton switches, allowing retrieval of active alarms, system level programming, and event
history of the PDU.
B. Metered Data: The following data shall be available on the alphanumeric display:
2. Output voltage by phase
3. Power distribution module status and manufacturing information
4. Current and power used by the load
5. Load as a percentage of capacity
6. Total energy usage
7. Volt meter
8. Circuit configuration, including idividual load configuration and global alarm configuration
9. Alarms
10. Log
11. Network configuration
12. Help files
C. Event log: The display unit shall allow trained personnel to display a time and date stamped log.
D. Alarms: The display unit shall allow the Owner to display a log of active alarms. The following minimum set of alarm
conditions shall be available:
1. High Module Current
2. High Subfeed Current
3. Low Module Current
4. Low Subfeed Current
5. Maximum Module Current
6. Maximum Subfeed Current
7. Minimum Module Current
8. Minimum Subfeed Current
9. Modular Distribution Communication
10. Module Breaker Open
11. Subfeed Breaker Open
E. Controls: The following controls or programming functions shall be accomplished by the use of the display unit. Push-
button membrane switches shall facilitate these operations:
2.4 OPTIONAL OVERHEAD DISTRIBUTION
A. Flexible Distribution Conductors: For purposes of overhead distribution wiring of datacenter branch circuits, flexible
conductors of DP1 type shall be available as a distribution means. Flexible conductors shall be equipped with NEMA or
IEC style cord caps and shall be agency approved under UL60950 as part of the InfraStruxure system.
B. Cable Ladder: For purposes of routing data and power cables between rows in a datacenter aisle layout, cable ladders
shall be available to span the gap between rows. Cable ladders shall be agency approved under UL60950 as part of the
07/2016 edition p. 464
InfraStruxure system. The use of over head cable management shall minimize the need to run data and power cable
beneath a raised floor, thus minimizing potential air flow obstructions for down-flow type precision cooling solutions.
This means of cable management shall also facilitate ease of installation of power and data cabling in datacenters not
utilizing raised floor. Optional covers shall be available for ladders as a means of adhering to local codes requiring such.
C. Cable Trough: For purposes of routing data and power cable along the length of a row of IT enclosures in a data center
environment, cable troughs shall be available as a means of separating and housing data and power cable. Optional covers
shall be available for troughs as a means of adhering to local codes requiring such. The use of over head cable
management shall minimize the need to run data and power cable beneath a raised floor, thus minimizing potential air
flow obstructions for down-flow type precision cooling solutions. This means of cable management shall also facilitate
ease of installation of power and data cabling in datacenters not utilizing raised floor.
2.5 FLOOR ANCHOR BRACKETS
A. To meet the requirements of NFPA 70 110.13, floor anchor brackets shall be available to solidly connect the PDU to
minimize unintended moving of the equipment.
2.6 REMOTE SYSTEM MONITORING
A. The following methods of remote PDU monitoring shall be available:

1. Web Monitoring: Remote monitoring shall be available via a web browser such as Internet
Explorer.
2. RS232 Monitoring: Remote PDU monitoring shall be possible via RS232 serial port connection.
3. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP): Remote PDU Monitoring shall be possible through a standard MIB
II compliant platform.
2.7 OPTIONS
A. Power Distribution Modules: A variety of Power Distribution Modules shall be available for the Power Distribution
Unit.
B. StruxureWare Data Center Expert: A centralized manager hereafter referred to as StruxureWare Data Center Expert
shall be available for purposes of complete system monitoring and management of all components outlined in this
specification.
1. Monitoring – StruxureWare Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring the PDU through a
network of category 5 cable and a 24 port hub, supplied by the PDU manufacturer. This 24 port hub shall
relay information to Data Center Expert, which in turn shall allow access to this information via the user’s
public network via a single IP address.
2. Monitored Values: StruxureWare Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring alarms, general
status parameters, voltage and current of the PDU.
3. Thresholds: For individualized customer needs, StruxureWare Data Center Expert shall allow for user
configurable thresholds for alarm notification. With this feature StruxureWare Data Center Expert can
notify clients of reaching thresholds for PDU capacity, or branch circuit breaker capacity. Other custom
programmable alarm points for non- APC products shall also be available via dry contact input signal.
4. Public Network Monitoring: StruxureWare Data Center Expert shall also be capable of monitoring other
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor
in writing, with a copy to the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.60 INSTALLATION
07/2016 edition p. 465
B. Factory-Assisted Start-Up: Factory trained service personnel shall perform the following inspections, test procedures, and
on-site training:
b. Verify installation per manufacturer’s instructions.
a. Check all internal control wiring connections.
b. Check all internal power wiring connections.
c. Check all terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs for tightness.
a. Verify correct input voltage.
b. Verify correct phase rotation of all mains connections.
c. Verify correct control wiring and terminations.
d. Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly landed.
4. Site Testing:
c. Verify system set points.
d. Document, sign, and date all test results.
5. On-Site Operational Training: During the factory assisted start-up, operational training for site personnel shall
include keypad operation, LED indicator definitions, start-up and shutdown procedures, AC disconnect operation,
and alarm information.
A. MANUFACTURER FIELD SERVICE
1. Worldwide service: The PDU manufacturer shall have a worldwide service organization available, consisting of
factory trained field service personnel to perform start-up, preventative maintenance, and service of the PDU system
and power equipment. Standard offering is Next Business Day under the original one-year warranty. The service
organization shall offer 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year, 4-hour response time service support.
2. Replacement parts: Parts shall be available through the worldwide service organization 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week, and 365 days a year. The worldwide service organization shall be capable of shipping parts within 4 working
hours or on the next available flight, so that the parts may be delivered to the customer site within 24 hours.
3.62 DEMONSTRATION
A. General: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative of the manufacturer to provide start-up service
and to demonstrate and train the Owner’s personnel at time of startup.
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 466


APC Modular Power Distribution Unit, 300mm, 400A, 277kW, 400V Output
277kW PDU/Distribution
THIS GUIDE SPECIFICATION IS WRITTEN IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS INSTITUTE (CSI) MASTERFORMAT. THIS
SECTION MUST BE CAREFULLY REVIEWED AND EDITED BY THE ARCHITECT OR THE ENGINEER TO MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PROJECT.
COORDINATE THIS SECTION WITH OTHER SPECIFICATION SECTIONS IN THE PROJECT MANUAL AND WITH THE DRAWINGS.
INDICATED.
THIS SECTION IS WRITTEN TO INCLUDE THE 2004 MASTERFORMAT AND THE 1995 MASTERFORMAT VERSIONS. WHERE APPLICABLE, THESE
ITEMS ARE BRACKETED AND, IN EACH CASE, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, THE FIRST CHOICE APPLIES TO THE 2004 MASTERFORMAT AND
THE SECOND CHOICE APPLIES TO THE 1995 MASTERFORMAT.
SECTION [26 26 00]
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.10 SUMMARY
including, but not limited to, manufacturing, fabrication, erection, and installation for a power distribution unit (PDU)
as required for the complete performance of the work, and as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified.
B. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section includes, but shall not be limited to, requirements for a complete
modular power distribution system for powering IT loads.
1.
This specification describes the operation and functionality of a continuous duty, three-phase Modular Power
Distribution Unit for Data Center and Infrastructure Equipment Room installation, hereafter referred to as the
PDU.
2. The PDU shall provide a mechanical means of complete isolation of the input source from the critical output
distribution.
3. The PDU shall contain the appropriate modular distribution panel within a Rack enclosure suitable for installation
in a data center environment. The distribution panel shall be intrinsically finger safe, and shall be suitable for the
installation of single or three phase modular circuit breaker assemblies without the need for hand tools.
4. Distribution for each 400V PDU shall be comprised of factory assembled and tested circuit breakers which shall
require no tools to install.
5. All of the above system components are housed in a NetShelter™ SX Rack, 300mm (W) x 1070mm (D) x
2000mm (H).
6. The PDU and associated equipment shall operate in conjunction with a primary power supply to provide quality
uninterrupted power for mission critical, electronic equipment load.
7. All programming and miscellaneous components for a fully operational system as described in this Section shall be
available as part of the PDU.
1.11 REFERENCES
A. General: The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are
referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The edition/revision of the referenced publications shall be the latest
date as of the date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise specified.
B. Electronic Industries Association (EIA):

1. EIA 310, "Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment" (copyrighted by EIA, ANSI approved).
C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

1. IEEE 519-1992 Standard Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems.

2. ISO 14001, “Environmental Management Systems - Requirements With Guidance for Use.”
E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

07/2016 edition p. 467
1. UL 60950, “Standard for Information Technology Equipment.”

2. ULc CSA 60950-1
F. Where applicable, the PDU shall also be designed in accordance with publications from the following organizations
and committees:
3. NFPA- National Fire Protection Associations
4. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration
A. Design Requirements
SELECT OR INSERT APPLICABLE VALUE BELOW.
1. The PDU shall be sized for [____] kVA load.
B. System Characteristics
1. System Capacity: 277kW

The PDPM277H PDU shall support 400A at 400V maximum input and provide 277kW output.
2. Upstream Breaker Protection: Upstream breaker protection rated at 400A is recommended.
3. Input: The system input shall be configurable as single mains derived from a three phase wye source. Standard
cable entry shall be through the top. Bottom cable entry shall also be facilitated.
a. AC Nominal Input Voltage: 400V/230V 3-phase, 3-Wire+N+G, 60Hz
b. Maximum Input Current: 400A
c. Short Circuit Withstand Rating: 10kA Symmetrical
d. Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage (UCC): 4kV
4. Output:
a. Nominal Output: 277kW, 400V 3-phase, 400A maximum, 3-wire + N + G
1.13 SUBMITTALS
E. Product Data: Submit product data showing material proposed. Submit sufficient information to determine compliance
with the Drawings and Specifications. Product data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
F. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each product and accessory required. Include information not fully detailed
in manufacturer’s standard product data, including, but not limited to, the following:
G. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams detailing power systems, clearly differentiating between
manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring, and between components provided by the manufacturer and those
provided by others.
1. Submit system single-line diagram.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data to include in operation and maintenance
manuals including, but not limited to, safe and correct operation of PDU functions.
1. Submit an installation manual, which shall include, but shall not be limited to, instructions for storage, handling,
examination, preparation, installation, and start-up of PDU.
instructions.
A. Qualifications:
07/2016 edition p. 468

1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be a firm engaged in the manufacture of modular PDUs of types
and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for a minimum of 20 years.
a. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified and shall be designed to internationally accepted standards.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations of
Federal, State, and local authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from such authorities.
1. Work shall also be designed in accordance with the following:
a. NFPA 70
2. Where applicable, the PDU shall also be designed in accordance with publications from the following organizations
and committees:
e. ISO 9001
f. ISO 14001
g. FCC
C. Deliver materials to the Project site in supplier’s or manufacturer’s original wrappings and containers, labeled with
D. The customer shall store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a well-ventilated area
A. Environmental Requirements: Do not install PDUs until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is
completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and
1. Environmental:
a. Storage Ambient Temperature: 0 to +45°C
b. Operating Ambient Temperature: 0 to 30°C (0 to 40°C derated)
c. Relative Humidity: 0 percent to 95 percent, non-condensing.
d. Altitude: 0 – 10,000 m
1.17 WARRANTY
Documents and free from faults and defects in materials and workmanship for period indicated below. This special
warranty shall extend the one year period of limitations contained in the General Conditions. The special warranty shall be
countersigned by the Installer and the manufacturer.
1. Power Distribution Unit: The PDU shall be covered by a full parts and labor warranty from the manufacturer for a
period of 12 months from date of installation or acceptance by the Owner or 18 months from date of shipment from
the manufacturer, whichever occurs first.
B. Additional Owner Rights: The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.18 MAINTENANCE
A. A complete offering of preventative and full service maintenance contracts for the Power Distribution Unit shall be
available from the manufacturer. Contract work shall be performed by factory trained service personnel.
PART 2 – PRODUCT
2.8 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Product specified is “APC Modular Power Distribution Unit, 277kW” as manufactured by APC by
Schneider Electric. Items specified are to establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, and appearance.
07/2016 edition p. 469

As a minimum, the PDU shall contain the following features and accessories:
A. Input voltage: The PDU shall be available for a 400/230Y input.
B. Distribution Board: Also included in the PDU shall be one 72 pole distribution board connected to the output bus of
the PDU to serve as critical load distribution.
C. Enclosure with locking mechanism: The PDU shall also have a full-length hinged front door, with locking
mechanism, to allow access to the panelboard circuits. There shall also be a hinged rear door to allow access to the
back of the unit.
D. Flexible Distribution Conductors: For purposes of overhead distribution wiring of datacenter branch circuits, flexible
conductors of TC-ER, DP-1 type shall be available as a distribution means. Flexible conductors shall be equipped with
NEMA or IEC style cord caps and shall be agency approved under UL60950 as part of the InfraStruxure system.
E. Testing and quality assurance: All circuit breakers shall be 100% factory tested to ensure the highest quality for the
PDU. In addition the PDU shall be tested with 100% load and all panel circuit breakers shall be 100% tested. The PDU
shall also be Hipot tested per UL 60950-1 guidelines.
2.10 DISPLAYS AND CONTROLS
A. Display unit: For purposes of providing local annunciation of status and alarm messages, the PDU shall have a
microprocessor-controlled display unit located on a hinged door in front of the system. The display shall consist of an
alphanumeric display with pushbutton switches, allowing retrieval of active alarms, system level programming, and
event history of the PDU.
B. Metered Data: The following data shall be available on the alphanumeric display:
14. Output voltage by phase
15. Power distribution module status and manufacturing information
16. Current and power used by the load
17. Load as a percentage of capacity
18. Total energy usage
19. Volt meter
20. Circuit configuration, including idividual load configuration and global alarm configuration
21. Alarms
22. Log
23. Network configuration
24. Help files
C. Event log: The display unit shall allow trained personnel to display a time and date stamped log.
D. Alarms: The display unit shall allow the Owner to display a log of active alarms. The following minimum set of alarm
conditions shall be available:
1. High Module Current
2. High Subfeed Current
3. Low Module Current
4. Low Subfeed Current
5. Maximum Module Current
6. Maximum Subfeed Current
7. Minimum Module Current
8. Minimum Subfeed Current
9. Modular Distribution Communication
10. Module Breaker Open
11. Subfeed Breaker Open
E. Controls: The following controls or programming functions shall be accomplished by the use of the display unit.
Push-button membrane switches shall facilitate these operations:
07/2016 edition p. 470
2.11 REMOTE SYSTEM MONITORING
A. The following methods of remote PDU monitoring shall be available:

1. Web Monitoring: Remote monitoring shall be available via a web browser such as
Internet Explorer.
2. RS232 Monitoring: Remote PDU monitoring shall be possible via RS232 serial port connection.
3. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP): Remote PDU Monitoring shall be possible through a standard
MIB II compliant platform.
2.12 OPTIONS
A. Power Distribution Modules: A variety of Power Distribution Modules shall be available for the Power Distribution
Unit.
B. Floor Anchor Brackets:To meet the requirements of NFPA 70 110.13, floor anchor brackets shall be available to
solidly connect the PDU to minimize unintended moving of the equipment.
C. Seismic Anchor Brackets: To meet the requirements of OSHPD pre-approval, seismic brackets shall be available to
solidly connect the PDU to minimize unintended moving of the equipment during seismic activity.
D. Cable Ladder: For purposes of routing data and power cables between rows in a datacenter aisle layout, cable ladders
shall be available to span the gap between rows. Cable ladders shall be agency approved under UL60950 as part of the
InfraStruxure system. The use of over head cable management shall minimize the need to run data and power cable
beneath a raised floor, thus minimizing potential air flow obstructions for down-flow type precision cooling solutions.
This means of cable management shall also facilitate ease of installation of power and data cabling in datacenters not
utilizing raised floor. Optional covers shall be available for ladders as a means of adhering to local codes requiring
such.
E. Cable Trough: For purposes of routing data and power cable along the length of a row of IT enclosures in a data
center environment, cable troughs shall be available as a means of separating and housing data and power cable.
Optional covers shall be available for troughs as a means of adhering to local codes requiring such. The use of over
head cable management shall minimize the need to run data and power cable beneath a raised floor, thus minimizing
potential air flow obstructions for down-flow type precision cooling solutions. This means of cable management shall
also facilitate ease of installation of power and data cabling in datacenters not utilizing raised floor.
F. StruxureWare Data Center Expert: A centralized infrastructure management platform hereafter referred to as Data
Center Expert shall be available for purposes of complete system monitoring and management of all components
outlined in this specification used as a single solution for small IT or part of the StruxureWare software stack providing
data to systems such as Data Center Operation.
1. Monitoring - Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring a PDU through a network of Cat 5 cable and a
hub, supplied by the PDU manufacturer. This hub shall relay information to Data Center Expert, which in turn
2. Monitored Values: Data Center Expert shall be capable of monitoring alarms, general status parameters, voltage
and current of the PDU.
3. Thresholds: For individualized customer needs, Data Center Expert shall allow for user configurable thresholds
for alarm notification. With this feature, Data Center Expert can notify clients of reaching thresholds for PDU
capacity, or branch circuit breaker capacity. Other custom programmable alarm points for non- APC products
shall also be available via dry contact input signal.
4. Public Network Monitoring: Data Center Expert shall also be capable of monitoring other APC devices that are
connected to the client’s public network.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.2 EXAMINATION
07/2016 edition p. 471

B. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed, and notify the
Contractor in writing, with a copy to the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, of any conditions detrimental to the proper
and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.63 INSTALLATION
B. Factory-Assisted Start-Up: Factory trained service personnel shall perform the following inspections, test procedures,
and on-site training:
b. Verify installation per manufacturer’s instructions.
a. Check all internal control wiring connections.
b. Check all internal power wiring connections.
c. Check all terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs for tightness.
a. Verify correct input voltage.
b. Verify correct phase rotation of all mains connections.
c. Verify correct control wiring and terminations.
d. Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly landed.
4. Site Testing:
c. Verify system set points.
d. Document, sign, and date all test results.
5. On-Site Operational Training: During the factory assisted start-up, operational training for site personnel shall
include keypad operation, LED indicator definitions, start-up and shutdown procedures, AC disconnect operation,
and alarm information.
A. MANUFACTURER FIELD SERVICE
1. Worldwide service: The PDU manufacturer shall have a worldwide service organization available, consisting of
factory trained field service personnel to perform start-up, preventative maintenance, and service of the PDU
system and power equipment. Standard offering is Next Business Day under the original one-year warranty. The
service organization shall offer 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year, 4-hour response time service
support.
2. Replacement parts: Parts shall be available through the worldwide service organization 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week, and 365 days a year. The worldwide service organization shall be capable of shipping parts within 4
working hours or on the next available flight, so that the parts may be delivered to the customer site within 24
hours.
3.65 DEMONSTRATION
A. General: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative of the manufacturer to provide start-up
service and to demonstrate and train the Owner’s personnel at time of startup.
END OF SECTION
07/2016 edition p. 472

STS Upsilon
3/3 Phase - 30/60/100/160/250/400/600/800/1200/1600 A
07/2016 edition p. 473

STS Upsilon
Contents
1 - Purpose of the STS ..................................................................................................................... 475
2 - Description .................................................................................................................................. 475
2.1 - Operating principles ............................................................................................................ 475
2.2 – Technology................................................................... ...................................................... 475
2.3 - Operation, maintenance...................................................................................................... 476
3 - Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 476
3.1 - Transfer conditions ............................................................................................................. 476
3.2 - Transfer modes ................................................................................................................... 477
3.3 - Transfer time....................................................................................................................... 477
3.4 - Transfer with out-of-phase sources .................................................................................... 477
3.5 - Transfer disablement .......................................................................................................... 478
4 - Protection against internal faults ............................................................................................... 478
4.1 - Fault-tolerant design ........................................................................................................... 478
4.2 - SCR monitoring .................................................................................................................. 478
4.3 - Overtemperature detection ................................................................................................. 478
4.4 - Redundant supplies with alarm ........................................................................................... 478
4.5 - Self-monitoring and redundancy of the control electronics ................................................. 478
4.6 - Physical separation of the static switches ........................................................................... 478
4.7 - Thermal margin of the semi-conductors.............................................................................. 479
5 - Electrical characteristics ............................................................................................................. 479
5.1 - Input characteristics ............................................................................................................ 479
5.2 - Output characteristics ......................................................................................................... 479
6 - Mechanical characteristics .......................................................................................................... 479
6.1 - Modular design ................................................................................................................... 479
6.2 - Wiring and cables ............................................................................................................... 479
6.3 - Monitoring of circuits ........................................................................................................... 480
6.4 - Materials used .................................................................................................................... 480
6.5 - Short-circuit withstand capacity .......................................................................................... 480
6.6 - Switchgear and controlgear ................................................................................................ 480
6.7 - Ventilation and cooling ........................................................................................................ 480
7 - User interface and communications........................................................................................... 480
7.1 - User interface ..................................................................................................................... 481
7.2 - Communication ................................................................................................................... 481
8 - Configuration ................................................................................................................................ 482
9 - Environment conditions .............................................................................................................. 482
10 - Standards and tests .................................................................................................................. 483
10.1 - Standards ......................................................................................................................... 483
10.2 - Certification of conformity ................................................................................................. 483
11 - Test procedures and quality system ........................................................................................ 483
12 - Start-up ....................................................................................................................................... 483
13 - Replacement parts .................................................................................................................... 483
14 - Warranty...................................................................................................................................... 483
15 - Services ...................................................................................................................................... 484
16 - Electrical diagram ...................................................................................................................... 484
07/2016 edition p. 474

STS Upsilon
1 - Purpose of the STS

The static transfer switch (STS) shall be of static design and used to transfer, automatically or manually, one or more three-phase
loads from one power source (Source 1) to another (Source 2) and back, without interruption. If the source supplying the loads fails,
transfer to the other source shall be automatic.
The STS shall provide an effective solution to the following needs:
 complete separation of the two sources and of the associated distribution systems;
 source redundancy with no-break transfer of the loads, in existing installations;
 separation of loads to avoid mutual disturbances.
The STS thus improves the availability of energy, while facilitating operation and maintenance, in installations
supplying sensitive loads.
2 - Description
2.1 - Operating principles
2.1.1 - Transfer between two sources
The static transfer switch shall comprise two inputs, called Source 1 and Source 2, supplied by two power sources. The first shall be
termed the Preferred source and the second the Alternate source.
The STS output shall be connected to a critical load. In the event of a power failure, the STS shall automatically transfer from one
source to the other in less than a quarter cycle (5 ms). Transfer may be of the three-pole or four-pole type, depending on the
applicable standards for the installation and the system earthing arrangement.
2.1.2 - Symmetrical operation

STS architecture and operation shall be totally symmetrical, i.e. it shall be possible to select Source 1 as either the Preferred source
(with Source 2 as the Alternate source) or the Alternate source (with Source 2 as the Preferred source), with modification of this
order at any time.
Selection shall be possible:
 locally via the control and monitoring panel;
 remotely using remote-control functions.
2.1.3 - Reversibility of transfers

Depending on installation operating conditions, the STS shall also allow automatic return transfer from the Alternate source to the
Preferred source under the same conditions.
Independent with respect to the power sources
The STS shall be capable of operating with all types of power sources (AC distribution systems, UPSs, engine-generator sets).
However, to ensure proper operation of the power supply system as a whole (sources, STS, loads), sources must normally be
balanced as regards voltage, synchronized and in phase, either naturally or by means of a specific synchronization device (installed
at source level), as indicated in section 3.1.4).
2.2 - Technology
2.2.1 - Static technology

The static transfer switch (STS) shall consist of 2 three-phase static switches, one on the Source 1 path, the other on the Source 2
path.
Each static switch (SS) is made up of 3 pairs of reverse connected Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCR). The static switches must be
capable of supporting the entire load.
For four-pole breaking, in addition to the static switch, double commutation of the neutral shall be ensured by an
electromechanical contactor to make transfer more secure.
2.2.2 - Break Before Make switching technology

The switching technology shall be of the "Break Before Make" type.
This technology checks, phase by phase, the extinction of the SCRs in the static switch to be opened before triggering the SCRs of
the other static switch. In this manner, the two power sources are never connected in parallel. It shall therefore be possible to use
the STS for transfers between sources of different types, impedances, voltage levels, frequencies and phases, and nonetheless
prevent propagation of faults from one source to the other.
2.2.3 - Individual SCR monitoring technology

The static transfer switch shall include an SCR monitoring system that continuously polls each SCR so as to prevent the exchange
of current between the two sources, preventing any risk of fault propagation.
07/2016 edition p. 475

STS Upsilon
2.3 - Operation, maintenance
2.3.1 - Mimic panel

On the front panel, a complete mimic panel shall group the control devices and visualize the various statuses of the sources and
loads (see section 7 "User interface and communications").
2.3.2 - Bypass of the static switches

To allow maintenance and troubleshooting operations to be performed, the STS shall be equipped with 3 switches for isolation of the
static switches as well as 2 bypass switches, provided with a mechanical interlocking device. The switches shall be accessible from
the front of the cabinet.
3 - Operation
3.1 - Transfer conditions
3.1.1 - Monitoring the power sources and transfer conditions

The STS shall comprise an electronic system to monitor the two upstream sources, phase by phase, for overvoltage and
undervoltage, frequency and presence of faults.
This system shall permanently carry out the following checks which constitute the "transfer conditions":
 source voltages (Preferred and Alternate) are present and levels are within the authorized (adjustable) tolerances (see section
3.1.2 "Voltage-range setting");
 phase angle between the Preferred source voltages and the Alternate source voltages is within the authorized tolerances (see
section 3.1.3 "Phase-angle setting");
 frequency of each source is within the authorized (adjustable) tolerances, (see section 3.1.4 "Frequency-range setting");
 no overload or downstream short-circuit.
To enhance the availability of energy, certain voltage, phase-angle and frequency values shall result in a "downgraded" operating
mode that does not inhibit transfer, but is signalled to the user.
3.1.2 - Voltage-range setting

The monitoring system for the Preferred and Alternate sources shall include a check on the voltage and enable the user to set two
adjustable tolerance thresholds:
 overvoltage detection threshold: adjustable from + 5% to + 20%, in 1% steps, with respect to the rated voltage. Below the set
value, the source shall be deemed "within tolerance" and above "out of tolerance";
 undervoltage detection threshold: adjustable from - 5% to - 20%, in 1% steps, with respect to the rated voltage. Within the set
value, the source shall be deemed "within tolerance". Beyond the set value, the source shall be deemed "downgraded" to a
minimum value (e.g. - 32%), set with respect to the rated voltage. Beyond the set minimum value, the source shall be deemed "out
of tolerance".
3.1.3 - Phase-angle setting

The monitoring system for the Preferred and Alternate sources shall include a check on the phase deviation and enable the user to
set an adjustable tolerance threshold from 1 to  45 degrees, in 1 degree steps. Within the selected range, which must be included
in the maximum range of - 45° and + 45°, the sources shall be considered within phase tolerances. Otherwise, the sources shall be
deemed "out of tolerance" and the transfer shall be disabled.
3.1.4 - Frequency-range setting

The monitoring system for the Preferred and Alternate sources shall include a check on the frequency and enable the user to set an
adjustable tolerance threshold from 1 to  10% with respect to the rated frequency. If the frequency value exceeds the tolerance
level, the source shall be deemed "downgraded".
3.1.5 - Synchronization module (option)

To increase the availability of the sources for transfer, they may be synchronized by a synchronization module having the following
main characteristics:
 the module shall monitor the phase deviation between the sources (UPSs from APC by Schneider Electric);
 the module shall include a synchronization function that, when activated, reduces the phase deviation and maintains it within the
range specified in section 3.1.3);
 the synchronization function shall be activated when the module detects a phase deviation between the sources
exceeding the specified range, otherwise it shall be on standby;
 the synchronization function shall operate in two modes:
- automatic: in this mode, the module shall automatically determine which source controls the other, depending on the
operating conditions (availability and stability of the two sources);
- manual: in this mode, the user shall determine which source controls the other.
07/2016 edition p. 476

STS Upsilon
3.2 - Transfer modes
3.2.1 - Transfer in automatic mode

Automatic transfer
 During normal operation, the load shall be supplied by the Preferred source. If one of the voltage or frequency
parameters for the Preferred source is "out of tolerance" and if the phase angle between the sources is within
tolerances, the STS shall automatically transfer the load to the Alternate source.
 If the two sources are downgraded, the control electronics shall favor the source most suitable to supply the load.
In this case, only the voltage-amplitude parameters shall be taken into account in the effort to maintain supply to the
load and ensure its protection (overvoltages).
Automatic retransfer
Following an automatic transfer, the Alternate source is active. As soon as the Preferred source is again considered
within tolerances, the order for retransfer to the Preferred source shall be issued after an adjustable time delay.
Retransfer shall be possible only if the "automatic retransfer enabled" mode is selected.
Manual retransfer
If the "automatic retransfer disabled" mode is selected, transfer shall require manual action.
3.2.2 - Transfer in manual mode

Simple manual transfer
The user may voluntarily choose to transfer the load to the Alternate source manually. This is essentially the same as
changing the Preferred-source assignment. Instantaneous manual transfers shall be authorized only if the two
sources are within tolerances.
Manual transfer with out-of-phase sources - Rolling Synch sequence
In manual mode, transfer shall be possible even if the sources are desynchronized and slipping with respect to one
another, using a "Rolling Synch" type sequence (transfer at the moment when the zero crossover of the two voltage
waves coincides).
Manual transfers shall be authorized only when the phase angle between the sources is within the ± 45° setting range.
Transfer orders stored in memory
If an order for manual transfer is issued when the transfer conditions are not satisfactory, the order shall be stored in
memory. If, after a set time (0 to 30 minutes), the conditions are still not satisfactory and the order could not be
executed, the order shall be cancelled and the system shall return to the original condition.
3.2.3 - Transfer in "protected" manual mode under unsatisfactory phase conditions

If the phase conditions between the two sources are not correct and if the two sources cannot be synchronized (i.e.
brought to within the ± 45° phase-angle tolerances, see section 3.1.3), transfer shall nonetheless be possible
manually by the user via the control panel (this function is password protected). Transfer shall take place with an
adjustable break (0 to 3 seconds) in the supply of power to the load.
3.2.4 - Transfer in "forced" manual mode

If transfer has been disabled, it shall nonetheless be possible to force transfer manually by authorized persons via a
software tool. Transfer shall take place with an adjustable break (0 to 3 seconds) in the supply of power to the load,
irrespective of the status of the loads.
3.3 - Transfer time
The transfer time is defined as the total length of time between the occurrence of the event initializing the transfer and the moment
when the three phases of the load are fully switched to the Alternate source.
Under normal operating conditions (sources synchronized before the event) and when supplying computer type or slightly inductive
loads, transfer time shall be less than 2 ms.
This value may be exceeded in the case of specific installations and faults such as a real short-circuit on the Preferred source line
upstream of the STS with a highly inductive load, but shall never exceed 5 ms (one quarter of a period).
3.4 - Transfer with out-of-phase sources

If the phase condition between Preferred source and Alternate source voltages is not respected (phase deviation outside authorized
tolerances), the transfer shall be:
 either performed with a voluntary load supply interrupt of a few periods;
 or initiated instantly without taking the phase deviation into account (choice made by operator during configuration of the unit), if
this is accepted by the type of load supplied.
As long as the phase deviation between the two power sources is greater than the set tolerance, manual transfer or retransfer shall
not be possible.
07/2016 edition p. 477

STS Upsilon
3.5 - Transfer disablement

3.5.1 - Transfer disabled on a downstream fault
If an overload or downstream short-circuit is detected, the transfer is disabled.
3.5.2 - Voluntary disabling of a transfer

An input intended for connection to a volt-free remote control contact shall be used to disable transfers of any kind.
This function is particularly used for installations containing several STSs and a single Alternate source with a power
rating lower than total installed power. It shall prevent transfer of the other STS units as soon as one of them has
transferred its load to the Alternate source (thus making it unavailable to the other loads).
4 - Protection against internal faults

4.1 - Fault-tolerant design
The STS shall by design be fault tolerant. In the event of failure of an internal component, the STS shall be switched
to the operating status (transfer initiated or disabled) which best ensures availability of the power supply to the load,
while an alarm signal shall be triggered to alert the operator.
4.2 - SCR monitoring

A specific device shall permanently monitor correct operation of each static switch SCR (detection of SCR short-circuit fault, open
circuit fault, or gate control circuit failure).
On detection of a fault, the STS shall switch to the best operation mode to ensure the safety of the power supply to the load,
following the sequences below:
 manual transfer to and locking on the Alternate source:
- if a "Preferred" SCR open circuit is detected;
- if an "Alternate" SCR short-circuit is detected, the Preferred source shall be isolated by shunt tripping of the isolating circuit-breaker
of the Preferred static switch.
 definitive disablement of transfer and locking on the Preferred source:
- if a "Preferred" SCR short-circuit is detected, the Alternate source shall be isolated by shunt tripping of the isolating circuit-breaker
of the Alternate static switch;
- if an "Alternate" SCR open circuit is detected.
4.3 - Overtemperature detection

With the same aim of ensuring availability of the power supply to the load, internal overtemperature detection is tripled.
One internal overtemperature detection shall cause an alarm to be tripped, but shall not cause the unit to stop. This shall occur only
when a second overtemperature is detected.
4.4 - Redundant supplies with alarm

The STS control electronics shall have redundant logic electrical power supplies such that a failure on one shall:
 not result in the interruption of power to the load;
 trip an alarm.
4.5 - Self-monitoring and redundancy of the control electronics

The control electronics shall continuously monitor all parameters (sources, load, static switches) and control the static switches. This
system for control and monitoring shall be made up a number of boards combining logic and digital techniques, thus enabling board
self-tests and avoiding all settings using potentiometers.
The boards shall also include different levels of redundancy and operation in downgraded mode to ensure maximum continuity of
service.
4.6 - Physical separation of the static switches

Even though the two STS static switches never operate simultaneously, the cooling system (radiator and ventilation) is doubled to
enable separation and a physical distance between the modules, thus enhancing system availability by avoid fault propagation
(thermal and electric shock).
07/2016 edition p. 478

STS Upsilon
4.7 - Thermal margin of the semi-conductors

The semi-conductors shall have suitable inverse peak-voltage and junction-temperature values. To enhance reliability, they shall
have a thermal margin with respect to the junction temperature, for a maximum load current, of at least 25°C below the maximum
temperature in a 40°C operating environment.
5 - Electrical characteristics
The main electrical characteristics shall be those listed below.
5.1 - Input characteristics
The Source 1 and 2 inputs shall have the following characteristics:

 rated voltage: 400 V rms
 voltage range: 380 V rms -10% to 415 V rms + 10%
 rated frequency: 50 Hz / 60 Hz +/- 5%
 number of phases:
- 3 phases + neutral,
- 3 phases switched, 3 phases + neutral interrupted
 type of connection: 4 wires + earth
5.2 - Output characteristics
The following output characteristics shall apply for linear loads:

 ratings: 30 -60 - 100 - 160 - 250 - 400 - 600 - 800 - 1200 - 1600 A rms
 overload capacity:
- 105% continuous
- 110% for 15 minutes
- 200% for 20 seconds
- 600% for 1 second
- 2 000% for 20 ms
 efficiency:  99% at rated current
 transfer time:  3 ms typical.
6 - Mechanical characteristics
6.1 - Modular design
The STS shall be modular in design. It shall be mounted in metal cabinets, placed or anchored to the floor, meeting the
requirements of protection index IP20, in compliance with standard IEC 60529.
The mechanical structure of each cabinet shall be sufficiently strong and rigid to withstand handling and installation operations
without risk.
The cabinets shall be divided into sections where all electromechanical devices (circuit breakers and switches) shall be separated
from all electronic assemblies and PC-boards, to make maintenance on the electronic devices possible after isolating the various
parts.
Subassemblies shall be designed to facilitate access and replacement of parts. The system shall be mounted such that each
electrical component may be replaced without having to solder or use special tools.
6.2 - Wiring and cables

Entry of upstream and downstream power cables, as well as any auxiliary cables, shall be possible at the bottom, or through the
bottom for a false floor.
Installation shall be facilitated by clear marking of connection terminals. Connections shall be made through the front of the cabinet.
All connections shall be directly accessible, without having to undo other connections.
Internal conductors shall be grouped to form cables or bundles of conductors, then securely joined together. All wires and cables
shall be clearly identified using suitable labels, a color code or stamped.
The low-voltage control and monitoring wires shall be maintained at distance from all power sources to avoid any risks of
disturbances. The system shall be equipped with an earth-circuit connector, in compliance with the standards listed in the "standards
and tests" section.
07/2016 edition p. 479

STS Upsilon
6.3 - Monitoring of circuits

LEDs shall indicate critical operation on a panel to facilitate maintenance and servicing in the event of a breakdown.
6.4 - Materials used

All materials and parts used in the STS shall be new, recently manufactured and of superior quality, without faults and imperfections,
and shall not have already been used, unless as requested for testing purposes in the factory. Manufacturing techniques shall be
superior in quality.
6.5 - Short-circuit withstand capacity

The components used and their assembly shall guarantee the announced short-circuit withstand capacity of the STS (including all
electromechanical and electronic devices, interconnections, cables and busbars).
6.6 - Switchgear and controlgear

The circuit breakers ensuring maintenance safety and the bypass input/output switches shall be connected such that they may be
easily removed for replacement, calibration or tests, without interrupting the supply of power to the critical load.
Mechanical interlocks between the two maintenance bypass circuit breakers (switches) shall prohibit simultaneous closing by users.
Logical protection circuits shall ensure that if the user closes the maintenance bypass circuit breaker on the opposite side (i.e.
instead of the circuit breaker on the active path), the STS automatically switches to the closed side.
The purpose shall be to avoid an inadvertent connection of both sources by the user.
6.7 - Ventilation and cooling

A suitable ventilation system shall ensure operation of components at the rated temperature. The system shall be sufficient to
enable the STS to operate at full load, taking into account overload capacities as well.
A sufficient number of fans shall be installed to ensure cooling during operation on one or the other source alone. The number of
fans shall be sufficient to provide redundancy. The STS shall be capable of continuing to operate with up to two fans out of order. All
fan faults shall be indicated by a visible alarm.
The ventilation system shall be designed such that the STS can continuously operate at an ambient temperature of 40° C and at a
relative humidity of 95%.
The fans shall be easily accessible and replaceable without disturbing system operation. Fans shall have a service life of at least ten
years.
7 - User interface and communications
7.1 - User interface

7.1.1 - Control panel and graphic display
The STS control panel shall be located on the front of the unit. It shall comprise:
 the standard controls and status indicators in a single-line mimic panel presenting all STS electrical functions;
 a multilingual, graphic display with a menu and customer password to control access, capable of displaying all
indications on STS status:
- transfer;
- alarms;
- status information;
- measurements;
- settings;
- maintenance.
To facilitate understanding, it shall be possible to personalize the names of the sources.
The manufacturer shall provide at least the controls and alarms (visual and audio) mentioned in the sections below.
07/2016 edition p. 480

STS Upsilon
7.1.2 - Alarms and status indicators

The alarms and indicators shall provide clear information on the following situations:
 availability and status (within tolerances or downgraded) of Source 1;
 availability and status (within tolerances or downgraded) of Source 2;
 phase deviation between Sources 1 and 2 within tolerances;
 Source 1 selected as Preferred source;
 Source 2 selected as Preferred source;
 Source 1 active (SS 1 ON);
 Source 2 active (SS 2 ON);
 load supplied with power;
 alarm (general);
 automatic retransfer enabled (selected);
 automatic retransfer disabled (not selected);
 transfer to Source 1 disabled;
 transfer to Source 2 disabled.
7.1.3 - Controls
Controls shall be implemented by pushbuttons for the following actions:
 selection of Source 1 as Preferred source (= manual transfer to Source 1);
 selection of Source 2 as Preferred source (= manual transfer to Source 2);
 selection of the retransfer mode;
 alarm reset;
 lamp test.
7.1.4 - Measurements
The graphic display shall make available the values listed below:
 current on the three phases and on the neutral;
 phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase voltages on the three phases;
 frequency and phase deviation;
 power factor;
 crest factor;
 percent load;
 apparent power S;
 active power P;
 other measurements.
7.2 - Communication
The STS shall be equipped with remote-control functions using:
 a remote-indications I/O terminal block with isolated volt-free contacts;
 an RS485 ModBus serial-link port.
7.2.1 - Remote-indications I/O terminal block

 Outputs
The following output information shall be available on O/C isolated volt-free contacts (24 V DC, 1 A relay) for
remoting:
- fault (downgraded or outside tolerances) on Sources 1 and 2;
- phase deviation between Sources 1 and 2 outside tolerances;
- Source (1 or 2) selected as Preferred source;
- Source 1 active (SS 1 ON);
- Source 2 active (SS 2 ON);
- load supplied with power;
- alarm (general);
- automatic retransfer enabled (ON).
 Inputs
The STS shall be capable of receiving the following commands:
- selection of Source 1 as Preferred source (= manual transfer to Source 1);
- selection of retransfer mode;
- alarm reset;
- transfer disablement.
07/2016 edition p. 481

STS Upsilon
7.2.2 - Serial link

The STS shall have an 9 600 baud RS485 communications port. The protocol shall be a subset of the MODBUS
protocol. Communication shall be of the master/slave type, where STS is the slave.
The intended user configuration shall be a multi-point network capable of addressing up to 255 devices. The
impedance at each end of the line shall be 120 Ohms. The port shall consist of an RJ9 telephone jack installed on the
main control and monitoring board.
 Status information
The information available via the serial link shall be the same as that available on the I/O terminal block.
 Controls
The commands transmitted via the serial link shall be the following:
- selection of retransfer mode;
- alarm reset.
8. - Configuration
STS configuration shall be possible via a PC microcomputer connected to the parameter-setting port and using the system-
customizing software. It shall be possible to set the parameters listed below.
Configurable parameters and setting ranges
parameter range default comments

setting
 Rated source voltage 380 or 400 or 415
 Rated source frequency 50 or 60 Hz
 Retransfer mode (return to the Manual or automatic Automatic
Preferred source after transfer)
 Overvoltage detection threshold +5% to +20% of Un in 10% "source outside tolerances"
1% steps detection
 Undervoltage detection -5% to -20% of Un in -10%
threshold 1% steps
 Phase tolerances ±1° to ±45° in 1° steps ±15 phase deviation between sources
 Overvoltage and undervoltage 0 - 6% of the set value 3%
detection hysteresis
 Retransfer time delay 1 - 255 seconds 15 s length of "source OK" check
 Interrupt transfer time 0 - 3 seconds 300 ms for out-of-phase automatic
break transfers
9 - Environment conditions
The environment conditions shall be the following:
 ambient temperature: 0°C to 40°C
 storage temperature: -40°C to +70°C
 ventilation: forced air (entry through bottom, exit through top)
 relative humidity: 0 to 95%, without condensation
 altitude: 0 to 1 000 meters (derating above 1 000 meters)
 noise level (as per ISO 3746) < 55 dBA or < 59 dBA depending on the rating
 degree of protection: IP 20.
07/2016 edition p. 482

STS Upsilon
10 - Standards and tests

10.1 - Standards
The STS shall comply with all applicable international standards and in particular with the following standards:
 construction and safety: EN 50091-1;
 design: IEC 60146.
The STS shall also meet all applicable electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) standards to avoid any disturbances with
respect to nearby electronic devices. Compatibility shall be ensured for both conducted and radiated susceptibility.
Consequently, the STS shall comply with the following standards in particular:
 European directive 89/336/CEE;
 EN 55011;
 EN 61000-4-3 / IEC 1000-4-3.
The STS shall also comply with the following standards:
 ISO 3746: measurement of acoustic noise;
 CE marking.
What is more, the equipment must comply with environmental-protection standards, with production taking place on
premises certified ISO 14001.
10.2 - Certification of conformity

The manufacturer shall provide, on request, a complete qualification file demonstrating compliance with the above
standards.
What is more, the indicated levels of performance shall be confirmed by certification from independent laboratories
(e.g. TÜV or Veritas).
11 - Test procedures and quality system

11.1 - Test procedures
The UPS manufacturer shall provide proof of a stringent Quality Assurance programme.
In particular, the main equipment manufacturing stages shall be sanctioned by appropriate tests such as:
 incoming components inspection, discrete subassembly testing;
 complete functional checks on the final product.
Equipment shall undergo on-load burn-in before leaving the factory.
Final inspection and adjustments shall be documented in a report drawn up by the supplier’s Quality Inspection
department.
ISO 9001 or 9002 certification of the production site is compulsory.
11.2 - Quality system

The UPS design procedure shall be covered by an ISO 9001 quality system as well as a dependability study to ensure
12 - Start-up
UPS start-up on site shall be carried out by the manufacturer or an approved representative.
It shall include on-site acceptance during which a check on system characteristics shall be made.
13 - Replacement parts
The suppler undertakes to provide replacement parts for at least ten years following the date of delivery.
A set of emergency spare parts shall be supplied with the STS.
14 - Warranty
The equipment shall be guaranteed (parts and labour on site) for one year following the start-up date.
07/2016 edition p. 483

STS Upsilon
15 - Services
Required services include:
 supply of the STS and any accessory parts or elements;
 carriage-paid UPS transportation and delivery to the site.
Options:
 handling and installation on the site;
 connection of the sources to the STS;
 connection of the load cables to the STS.
16 - Electrical diagrams
Fig. Configuration example for a static transfer switch (STS) system.
Source 1 Source 2
Upsilon STS
control
electronics
Q1 Q2
Q1BP Q3 Q2BP
loads
Fig. STS simplified diagram.
07/2016 edition p. 484

Glossary
Glossary
07/2016 edition p. 485

Glossary
Active harmonic conditioner

Active harmonic conditioners (AHC) are used to eliminate the harmonic currents
flowing in an electrical installation and consequently limit voltage and current
distortion (THDU and THDI respectively) to a given percentage. The conditioner
continuously analyses the harmonic current drawn by the load and injects, on a real-
time basis, an identical current with the appropriate phase. The current supplied by
the source remains virtually sinusoidal, whatever the operating conditions.
The conditioner automatically adapts to changes in the installation and covers the
entire low-frequency harmonic spectrum (H2 through to H25). Active harmonic
conditioners are also called active filters.
ANSI
(American National Standards Institute)
U.S. organisation in charge of standardisation. Traditionally, it is assisted in this task
by scientific organisations such as the IEEE (Institute of Electronics and Electrical
Engineers).
Availability of an electrical installation

Availability is the probability that the installation will be capable of supplying energy
with the level of quality required by the supplied loads.
MTTR
Availability (%) = (1 ) x 100
MTBF
Practically speaking, the lower the MTTR (fast repair) and the higher the MTBF (time
without failure), the higher the availability.
Backup time
Time during which the UPS can supply the rated load with power from its battery
under nominal conditions when the normal AC source fails. This time depends on the
battery. Typical backup times are 6, 8, 10, 15 or 30 minutes.
Battery circuit breaker

DC circuit breaker that protects the battery circuit of a UPS.
Battery, recombination
Battery with a gas recombination rate at least equal to 95%. No water need be
added over battery life, which is why such batteries are commonly referred to as
"maintenance free" batteries.
BMS (Building Management System)

System used to control and monitor all building utilities and systems from a central
location. It is generally composed of sensors, actuators and programmable
controllers connected to a central computer (or several computers) equipped with
specific software.
Charger
Device associated with the rectifier and used to supply the battery with the electrical
power (DC current) required to recharge and/or float charge the battery, thus
ensuring the availability of backup power.
Cos 
A measure of the phase displacement between the current wave and the voltage
wave observed at the terminals of a linear load.
Cos 1
A measure of the phase displacement between the fundamental current wave and
the fundamental voltage wave observed at the terminals of a non-linear load.
Crest factor (Fc)

The ratio between the peak value of a current and its rms value.
I peak
Fc 
I rms
07/2016 edition p. 486

Glossary
Discrimination
System whereby a fault trips the protection device of the faulty load circuit only.
Protection devices on neighbouring circuits and upstream are not tripped.
Distortion factor ()

Factor measuring the effect of harmonics on the power factor at the terminals of a
load supplied with AC power.


cos1
 : power factor
cos 1 : cos  of the fundamental
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Possibility of a device to operate normally when installed near other devices, given
the disturbances emitted by each device and their mutual sensitivities.
EN (European Normalisation)
Label used for European standards. These standards are issued by CENELEC.
Following acceptance by the member countries, these standards enter into force and
replace the national standards.
Fault tolerance
A fault-tolerant system can continue to operate following a fault, but in a down-
graded mode.
Down-graded operation is generally accompanied by an alarm to signal the fault(s). It
is generally possible to repair the system rapidly and return to normal operation,
without shutting down the system. UPS operation on the static bypass is a type of
fault-tolerant operation.
Float current
DC current that maintains the battery at nominal charge, corresponding to the float
voltage. This current compensates for open-circuit losses.
Float voltage
DC voltage applied to the battery to maintain its charge level. This voltage depends
on the type of battery, the number of cells and the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Fourier theorem
Theorem stating that any non-sinusoidal periodic function (of frequency f) may be
represented as a sum of terms (series) made up of:
 a sinusoidal term with frequency f, called the fundamental frequency,
 sinusoidal terms with frequencies that are whole-number multiples of the
fundamental frequency, i.e. the harmonics,
 a DC component, where applicable.
The series may be expressed, where n is a whole number, as:

Y( t )  Y0  Y
n 1
n 2 sin(nt  n)
n = 1 corresponds to the fundamental,

n > 1 corresponds to the nth harmonic.
Free-frequency chopping
Chopping technique where the frequency increases or decreases depending on the
variation of a reference value. Contrary to fixed-frequency chopping, this technique
increases regulation during major variations and reduces it when variation is low.
This improves regulation with respect to the reference value.
07/2016 edition p. 487

Glossary
Harmonic
Sinusoidal term of the Fourier series expansion of a periodic function.
The harmonic (or harmonic component) of the nth order is characterised by:
Hn(t )  Hn 2 sin(nt  n)
Hn is the rms value of the given harmonic component,
  is the angular frequency of the fundamental, related to the fundamental
frequency by  = 2f,
 n is the phase displacement of the given harmonic component at t = 0.
Harmonic distortion, individual
Ratio between the rms value of an nth order harmonic and the rms value of the
fundamental.
Yn
Hn% 100
Y1
Harmonic distortion, total (THD)

Ratio between the rms value of all harmonics of a non-sinusoidal alternating periodic
value and that of the fundamental.

Y
n 2
n
2
D %  100
Y1
This value may also be expressed as a function of the individual distortion of each
harmonic Hn = Yn /Y1 by:

D %  100 H
n 2
n
2
For current and voltage, these values are called THDI and THDU respectively.
Harmonics, current and voltage

Any periodic current (frequency f) that is not sinusoidal is made up of a set of
sinusoidal currents (see Fourier), including a fundamental (frequency f) and
harmonics at various frequencies nf (where n is a whole number). A voltage
harmonic corresponds to each current harmonic. The instantaneous and rms values
are related by Ohm's law, where the terms are both sinusoidal.
If Zsn is the voltage source output impedance at frequency nf (angular frequency n),
then Un = Zsn x In. Consequently, for each current harmonic, there is a voltage
harmonic that depends on the source output impedance at the corresponding
frequency.
HF interference
High-frequency parasitic current that is either conducted (electrostatic origin) or
radiated (electromagnetic origin) by a device.
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. Assists ANSI (American National
Standards Institute) in defining standards for electric and electronic equipment.
IIK
A protection index indicating the degree of protection against mechanical shocks as
defined by European standard EN 50102. The IK code includes 11 values from IK01
to IK10, corresponding to different energy levels expressed in Joules. This code is
complementary to the IP code.
Inrush current
Transient currents observed in an electrical installation when devices are energised.
These currents are generally due to the magnetic circuits of the devices. The effect is
measured by the current’s maximum peak value and the rms current value it
generates during the time it lasts.
07/2016 edition p. 488

Glossary
Inverter
UPS subassembly that recomposes a sine-wave output (regulated and without
breaks) using the DC current supplied by the rectifier/charger or the battery. The
main elements of the inverter are the DC/AC converter, a regulation system and an
output filter.
IP (International Protection)
A protection index defining the ability of electrical equipment to withstand certain
environmental conditions. It is composed of two digits (e.g. IP 20) defined by
standard IEC 529 and included in standard EN60529. Each digit corresponds to a
certain degree of protection with respect to a given external influence.
 first digit (0 to 6): degree of protection against penetration of solid bodies.
 second digit (0 to 7): degree of protection against penetration of liquids.
 additional letter (A to D): safety of persons.
The IP code may receive an additional letter (A to D) when the protection provided
persons against dangerous parts is better than that indicated by the first digit. A -
protection against access by the back of the hand, B - protection against access
using a finger, C - using a tool with a diameter of 2.5 mm, D - using a tool with a
diameter of 1 mm. When the protection of persons is the only relevant factor, the two
IP digits may be replaced by "X" (e.g. IP XXB).
Example. IP 30D
3 = protection against solid bodies larger than 2.5 mm.
0 = no protection against water.
D = protection against access using a tool with a diameter of 1 mm.
ISO 9000
Standard defining procedures and systems used to attain an internationally
recognised level of production quality. ISO 9000 certification is recognition that the
quality system effectively complies with the standard. Certification is carried out by
an official organisation (e.g. AFAQ), unaffiliated with either clients or suppliers or the
company itself. The certificate is valid for a three-year period with yearly audits and
checks.
IT system
System earthing arrangement in which the neutral is isolated from the earth or
connected to the earth via a high impedance and the various exposed conductive
parts are connected to the earth via individual earthing circuits. An alarm (generally
an insulation-monitoring device IMD) must signal the appearance of a first insulation
fault.
The installation must be de-energized immediately in the event of a second
insulation fault.
Load, linear
Load for which the input voltage and current are both sinusoidal, with possible phase
displacement (inductive and/or capacitive loads). Linear loads include only
resistances, inductors or capacitors.
The Ohm law applies to both the instantaneous and the rms values. U = Z I, where Z
is the equivalent impedance of the load (constant during each period).
Examples of linear loads: lighting systems, motors, transformers.
Load, non-linear
Load drawing an input current that is periodical, but not sinusoidal, with a harmonic
component. For this reason, the input voltage is also distorted by harmonics.
Generally speaking, non-linear loads comprise active electronic components that
vary the load impedance over each period. The Ohm law applies to the
instantaneous values, but the equivalent impedance of the load is variable. As a
result, there is no simple law for the rms values, as is the case for linear loads.
Examples of non-linear loads: switch-mode power supplies for computers, rectifier
bridges using SCRs, variable-speed drives, fluorescent lighting.
Load power
Apparent power Su (kVA) that a UPS inverter supplies under given load conditions. It
is less than or equal to the rated output Sn (kVA).
The ratio Su/Sn defines the percent load of the inverter.
07/2016 edition p. 489

Glossary
Magnetic-susceptibility level
Level of electromagnetic emission starting at which a nearby device or system
malfunctions.
Management-Pac™ (software)
Intended for network administrators, this totally SNMP-compatible software can
manage and supervise an entire park of UPSs.
Micro-outage
Total absence of power for a duration of less than one half cycle (< 10 ms at 50 Hz).
MLVS (Main low-voltage switchboard)

The low-voltage switchgear assembly used to distribute power immediately
downstream of the HV/LV transformer.
MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures)

Expected value of the duration (expressed in hours) of normal operation of a
repairable device between failures. The MTBF is an indication on the reliability of a
device.
MTTF (Mean Time To Failure)

Expected value of the duration (expressed in hours) of normal operation of a non-
repairable device (i.e. one for which an MTBF cannot be calculated). The MTTF is an
indication on the reliability of a device.
MTTR (Mean Time To Repair)

Expected value (or statistical average if available) of the time required to repair a
device. This includes the time required to detect the cause of the failure, repair it and
start the system up again.
Noise level
Acoustic decibel level (dBA) representing the sound power of a source measured
according to standard ISO 3746.
Off-line
See UPS operating in passive-standby mode.
On-line
See UPS operating in double-conversion mode.
Percent load
The ratio Su (kVA) / Sn (kVA) between the load power Su and the rated power Sn of
a UPS.
PFC (rectifier)
PFC (Power Factor Correction) is an electronic regulation device for the UPS input
rectifier that maintains the input current sinusoidal and in phase with the utility
voltage. It avoids drawing harmonic currents upstream of the rectifier and thus the
need for a filter.
Power factor ()

Ratio between the active power P (kW) supplied to a load and the apparent power S
(kVA) supplied to said load by an AC power supply.
P

S
Power, primary
Power normally continuously available which is usually supplied by an electrical
utility company, but sometimes by the user's own generation. Primary power is
connected to the normal AC input of the UPS.
Power, rated
Apparent power Sn (kVA) that a UPS can deliver under given load conditions defined
for cos  = 0.8.
07/2016 edition p. 490

Glossary
Power, standby
Power intended to replace the primary power in the event of primary-power failure.
When standby power is available, it is connected to the bypass AC input of the UPS.
PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)

A high-frequency chopping technique for UPS inverters using a means of regulation
enabling rapid modification of pulse widths over a single period. It is thus possible to
maintain the inverter output voltage within tolerances, even for non-linear loads.
Pulse Width Modulation

See PWM (Pulse Width Modulation).
Rectifier/charger
UPS component that draws utility power to supply the inverter and to float charge or
recharge the battery. The alternating input current is rectified and then distributed to
the inverter and the battery.
Redundancy, active redundancy N+1, N+2, etc.

Parallel UPS configuration in which several UPS units (N+1, N+2, etc.) with equal
outputs are parallel connected and share the load. In the event one UPS unit (N+1
redundancy) or more fail (N+2, N+3, etc.), the other units pick up its share without
any interruption in the supply of power to the load. The remaining units are sufficient
to continue supplying the load as long as there are at least N units.
Redundancy, isolated
UPS configuration in which one or several UPS units operate on stand-by, with no
load or only a partial load, and can immediately back up a faulty UPS unit by no-
break transfer of the load, carried out by a static switch.
Reliability
Probability that a device will accomplish a required function under given conditions
over a given period of time.
Short-circuit voltage of a transformer (Uscx %)

Relative measurement (%) of the internal impedance of a transformer. This short-
circuit impedance is commonly called the short-circuit voltage because it is
measured during a short-circuit test (shorted secondary winding subjected to a
current set to In). For most common three-phase transformers, the value ranges
between 3 and 6%.
Source impedance
It is possible to consider that a load is supplied by a perfect voltage generator Uo, in
series with an internal impedance Zs, where:
 Uo is the voltage measured across the load terminals, if the load is equal to zero
(load terminals in an open circuit),
 Zs is the source impedance, i.e. the equivalent impedance as seen from the load
terminals (open circuit), obtained by short-circuiting the upstream voltage
generator(s).
Static switch
Power-electronics device that can be used to switch from one source to another
without interruption in the supply of power. In a UPS, transfer is from normal AC
power to bypass AC power and back. Transfer without interruption is possible due to
the fact that there are no mechanical parts and the ultra-fast switching capabilities of
the electronic components.
Static Transfer Switch (STS)

An STS carries out transfer, automatically or manually, of one or more three-phase
loads, from a preferred source to an alternate or reserve source without interruption.
If the preferred source fails, transfer is automatic. See Upsilon STS.
Subtransient reactance of a generator set (Uscx %)

Relative measurement (%) of the internal impedance of an AC generator during
harmonic phenomena. This reactance, also called the longitudinal subtransient
reactance of the generator, is sometimes identified as X"d.
07/2016 edition p. 491
Glossary
For most common generators, the value ranges between 15 and 20%. It can drop to
12% for optimised systems and to 6% for special devices.
System earthing arrangements (SEA)

Standardised system for the interconnection and earthing of exposed conductive
parts and the neutral of a low-voltage electrical installation. There are three
standardised arrangements:
 TN system, with the TN-C and TN-S versions (exposed conductive parts
connected to the neutral),
 TT system (earthed neutral),
 IT system (isolated neutral).
THDI
THD for Total Harmonic Distortion and I for current. This is the ratio between the rms
value of current harmonics and the rms value of the fundamental.

I
n 2
n
2
THDI%  100
I1
This value may also be expressed in terms of the individual harmonics,
e.g. Ihn = In / I1 using the equation:

THDI%  100  Ih
n 2
n
2
THDU
THD for Total Harmonic Distortion and U for voltage. This is the ratio between the
rms value of the voltage harmonics and the rms value of the fundamental.

U
n 2
n
2
THDU%  100
U1
This value may also be expressed in terms of the individual harmonics,
e.g. Uhn = Un / U1 using the equation:

THDU%  100  Uh
n 2
n
2
Tolerances (%)
Permissible limits to the variation of a quantity around its nominal or rated value,
expressed as a percentage.
TN system
System earthing arrangement in which the exposed conductive parts are
interconnected and connected to the neutral, the latter being connected to the earth.
The installation must be de-energized immediately in the event of an insulation fault.
There are two TN systems, TN-S in which the neutral (N) and the protective
conductor (PE) are separate, and TN-C in which the two conductors are combined to
form a single conductor (PEN).
TT system
System earthing arrangement in which the neutral and the exposed conductive parts
are directly earthed via individual earthing circuits.
The installation must be de-energized immediately in the event of an insulation fault.
Ultracapacitors
An ultracapacitor (double-layer electrochemical capacitor) is made up of two porous,
metal-carbon electrodes placed in a non-aqueous organic electrolyte.
This technology offers very high capacitances (> 1 000 farads).
07/2016 edition p. 492

Glossary
UPS (Uninterruptible Power System)

An electrical device providing an interface between the normal source of power,
usually the utility, and an electrical installation generally including sensitive loads
(computers, instrumentation, etc.).
The UPS supplies sinusoidal AC power free of disturbances and within strict
amplitude and frequency tolerances.
It is generally made up of a rectifier/ charger, an inverter, a battery for backup power
in the event of utility outages, a static bypass and a maintenance bypass. The
bypasses make it possible to supply the load directly with standby power, bypassing
the rectifier/charger and inverter line.
Transfer to the static bypass is automatic and without a break in power to the load if
the inverter fails or a downstream overload exceeds UPS capacity. Transfer to the
maintenance bypass is carried out using manual switches.
UPS operating in double-conversion mode

A UPS in which the inverter is connected in series between the normal AC source
and the load. All power supplied to the load flows through the inverter which
completely regenerates the voltage and isolates the load from disturbances on the
utility. This type of UPS can also supply the load with utility power directly via a static
bypass following no-break transfer to a separate AC input. This function ensures the
continuity of supply if an internal fault occurs. What is more, this type of UPS is
systematically equipped with a maintenance bypass. For all the above reasons, it is
the only configuration used for high power ratings. This type of UPS is also called
"on-line".
UPS operating in line-interactive mode

A UPS in which the inverter is connected in parallel to the AC input and also charges
the battery (interactive operation in reversible mode). This technique is rarely used
for high power ratings because the load is not completely isolated from the source
and frequency regulation is not possible.
UPS operating in passive-standby mode

The UPS is connected in parallel to the normal AC source to provide a standby
power source.
This configuration, a cost-saving compromise, is used only for low power ratings
( 3 kVA) because it does not isolate the load from the source and lets through
inrush currents. What is more, it requires a relatively high transfer time ( 10 ms) to
inverter power in the event of a power outage or a major disturbance on the utility.
07/2016 edition p. 493

Bibliography
07/2016 edition p. 494

Bibliography
White papers
WP -1 V5 The different types of UPS systems
There is much confusion in the marketplace about the different types of UPS
systems and their characteristics. Each of these UPS types is defined, practical
applications of each are discussed, and advantages and disadvantages are listed.
With this information, an educated decision can be made as to the appropriate UPS
topology for a given need.
WP -15 V0 Watts and Volt-Amps: Powerful Confusion

This note helps explain the differences between Watts and VA and explains how the
terms are correctly and incorrectly used in specifying power protection equipment.
WP -17 V0 Understanding Power Factor, Crest Factor, and Surge Factor

This White paper explains the technical terms of Power Factor, Crest Factor, and
Surge Factor. The use of these terms in specifying UPS is explained.
WP -18 V0 The Seven Types of Power Problems

Many of the mysteries of equipment failure, downtime, software and data corruption,
are often the result of a problematic supply of power. There is also a common
problem with describing power problems in a standard way. This white paper will
describe the most common types of power disturbances, what can cause them, what
they can do to your critical equipment, and how to safeguard your equipment, using
the IEEE standards for describing power quality problems.
WP -26 V0 Hazards of Harmonics and Neutral Overloads

This document provides an overview of problems related to harmonic currents, with a
specific focus on Information Technology equipment. The way that international
regulations solved these problems is described.
WP -30 V11Battery Technology for Data Centers and Network Rooms: Lead-Acid
Battery Options
The lead-acid battery is the predominant choice for Uninterruptible Power Supply
(UPS) energy storage. Over 10 million UPSs are presently installed utilizing Flooded,
Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA), and High Density Modular Battery Cartridges
(HDBCMBC) systems. This paper discusses the advantages and disadvantages of
these three battery technologies.
WP -32 V6 Battery Technology for Data Centers and Network Rooms:

Environmental Regulations
Some lead-acid batteries located in data centers are subject to government
environmental compliance regulations. While most commercial battery back-up
systems fall below required reporting levels, very large UPS and DC plant batteries
may have to comply. Failure to comply can result in costly penalties. Environmental
compliance regulations focus on the amount of sulfuric acid and lead in a given
location. This paper offers a high level summary of the regulations and provides a list
of environmental compliance information resources.
WP -33 V3 Battery Technology for Data Centers and Network Rooms: Site Planning
The site requirements and costs for protecting information technology and network
environments are impacted by the choice of UPS battery technology. This paper will
discuss how battery technologies impact site requirements.
07/2016 edition p. 495

Bibliography
WP -34 V1 Battery Technology for Data Centers and Network Rooms:Ventilation

Lead-acid batteries are the most widely used method of energy reserve. Ventilation
systems must address health and safety as well as performance of the battery and
other equipment in a room. Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA) batteries and modular
battery cartridges (MBC) do not require special battery rooms and are suitable for use
in an office environment. Air changes designed for human occupancy normally exceed
the requirements for VRLA and MBC ventilation. Vented (flooded) batteries, which
release hydrogen gas continuously, require a dedicated battery room with ventilation
separate from the rest of the building. This paper summarizes some of the factors and
codes to consider when selecting and sizing a ventilation system for a facility in which
stationary batteries are installed.
WP -35 V2 Battery Technology for Data Centers and Network Rooms: Lifecycle Costs
The lifecycle cost of different UPS battery technologies is compared. The costs
associated with the purchase of batteries, the infrastructure costs, and the costs
associated with inflexibility to meet changing requirements are discussed and
quantified.
WP -38 V0 Harmonic Currents in the Data Center: A Case Study

This document provides an overview of how problems related to harmonic neutral
currents are mitigated by load diversity, with specific focus on Information Technology
data center environments. Detailed measurements of an actual operating data center
are presented. This case study illustrates the way that load diversity mitigates harmonic
current levels, lowers shared neutral current in multi-wire feeders and branch circuits,
and improves total circuit power factor.
WP -39 V1 Battery Technology for Data Centers and Network Rooms: VRLA Reliability
and Safety
The Valve Regulated lead-Acid (VRLA) battery is the predominant choice for small and
medium-sized Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) energy storage. This white paper
explores how the technology affects overall battery life and system reliability. It will
examine the expected performance, life cycle factors, and failure mechanisms of VRLA
batteries.
WP -52 V0 Four Steps to Determine When a Standby Generator is Needed for Small
Data Centers and Network Rooms
Small data centers and network rooms vary dramatically in regard to the amount of
UPS runtime commonly deployed. This paper describes a rational framework for
establishing backup time requirements. Tradeoffs between supplemental UPS batteries
and standby generators are discussed, including a total cost of ownership (TCO)
analysis to help identify which solution makes the most economic sense. The analysis
illustrates that the runtime at which generators become more cost effective than
batteries varies dramatically with kW and ranges from approximately 20 minutes to over
10 hours.
WP -64 V1 Alternative Power Generation Technologies for Data Centers and Network
Rooms
Fuel Cells and Micro Turbines are new technology alternatives for power generation for
data centers and network rooms. This paper discusses the various modes of operation
of these systems and examines benefits and drawbacks of the technologies when
contrasted with conventional alternatives such as standby generators.
WP - 65 V1 Comparing Data Center Batteries, Flywheels, and Ultracapacitors

Most data center professionals choose lead-acid batteries as their preferred method of
energy storage. However, alternatives to lead-acid batteries are attracting more
attention as raw material and energy costs continue to increase and as governments
become more vigilant regarding environmental and waste disposal issues. This paper
compares several popular classes of batteries, compares batteries to both flywheels
and ultracapacitors, and briefly discusses fuel cells.
07/2016 edition p. 496

Bibliography
WP -75 V1 Comparing UPS System Design Configurations

There are five main UPS system design configurations that distribute power from the
utility source of a building to the critical loads of a data center. The selection of the
appropriate configuration for a particular application is determined by the availability
needs, risk tolerance, types of loads in the data center, budgets, and existing
infrastructure. The five configurations are explained, and advantages and
disadvantages of each are discussed. The impact on availability is addressed for each
configuration and guidelines are provided for choosing the appropriate design.
WP -79 V0 Technical comparison of On-line vs. Line-interactive UPS designs

UPS systems below 5000VA are available in two basic designs: line-interactive or
double-conversion on-line. This paper describes the advantages and disadvantages of
each topology and addresses some common misconceptions about real-world
application requirements.
WP -85 V0 Data Line Transient Protection

Electrical transients (surges) on data lines can destroy computing equipment both in the
business and home office environments. Many users appreciate the risk of power
surges but overlook data line surges. This white paper explains how transients are
created, how they can have devastating effects on electrical equipment, and how surge
suppression devices work to help protect against them.
WP -90 V0 Essential Standby Generator System Requirements for Next Generation

Data Centers
Effective standby generator system installations must address the known problems and
challenges relating to current and past designs. This paper presents a categorized and
prioritized overview of generator system challenges and the requirements needed to
overcome them.
WP -92 V1 Comparison of Static and Rotary UPS

Much confusion exists among data center professionals when deciding whether to
deploy static or rotary Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) in their data centers. This
paper defines both static and rotary UPS architectures, points out similarities and
differences, and analyzes the advantages and disadvantages of each in data center
environments.
WP 98- V0 The Elimination of Isolation Transformers in Data Center Power Systems

Isolation transformers are being eliminated in data center power systems. The benefits
include efficiency improvements, reduction in weight, reduction in consumption of raw
materials, savings of space, and reduction of cost. However, many data center users
and specifiers are concerned over this trend because they believed that the
transformers provided a variety of important technical benefits. In some cases,
transformers are unnecessarily being specified as part of a UPS or as an additional
component. This paper considers the various beliefs about the role of isolation
transformers and shows why they can be eliminated in most cases, providing the known
benefits without any negative consequences.
WP -109 V0Reliability Analysis of the APC Symmetra MW Power System

This paper is a quantitaive reliability analysis of the APC Symmetra MW UPS
performed by MTechnology, Inc. (MTech). In contrast to common MTBF calculations
based on summing component failure rates, this study used techniques of Probabilistic
Risk Assessment (PRA) to calculate the likelihood of over 680,000 potential failure
modes. The mathematical method accounts for uncertainty in failure rates and
component performance, and provides detailed guidance as to the contribution of each
system component to the overall risk of failure. The study included an exhaustive
analysis of the system’s architecture, component selection, control system,
manufacturing practices, and response to internal and external faults. The study also
included a detailed review of APC’s delta conversion online topology.
07/2016 edition p. 497

Bibliography
Schneider Electric Cahier Technique publications

Approche industrielle de la sûreté de fonctionnement.
Schneider Electric Cahier Technique no. 134 - H. Krotoff.
Electrical disturbances in low voltage.

Schneider Electric Cahier Technique no. 141 - R. Calvas.
Electromagnetic compatibility.
Schneider Electric Cahier Technique no. 149 - F. Vaillant.
Harmonics: convertisseurs propres et compensateurs actifs.

Schneider Electric Cahier Technique no. 147 - E. Koenig.
Harmonic disturbances in networks and their treatment.

Schneider Electric Cahier Technique no. 152 - P. Roccia / N.Quillon.
Inverters and harmonics (case studies of non-linear loads).

Schneider Electric Cahier Technique no. 159 - J.N. Fiorina.
Uninterruptible static power supplies and the protection of persons.

Schneider Electric Cahier Technique no. 129 - J.N. Fiorina.
Standards
 IEC 60529 / EN 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP index).
 IEC 60417: Graphical symbols for diagrams.
 IEC 60742: Isolating transformers and safety isolating transformers.
 IEC 60947: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear.
 IEC 60950-1 / EN 60950-1
Information technology equipment - Safety - Part 1: General requirements.
 IEC 62040-1/ EN 62040-1

Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) - Part 1: General and safety requirements for
UPS.
 IEC 62040-2/ EN 62040-2

Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) - Part 2: Electromagnetic compatibility
requirements.
 IEC 62040-3 / EN 1000-3

Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) - Part 3: Method of specifying the test and
performance requirements.
 IEC 61000-2-2 / EN 610002-2:

Compatibility levels for low-frequency conducted disturbances and signalling in public
 IEC 61000-3-2 / EN 61000-3-2:

Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current  16 A per phase).
 IEC 61000-3-4 / EN 61000-3-4:

Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current > 16 A per phase).
 IEC 61000-3-5 / EN 61000-3-5:

Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker.
07/2016 edition p. 498

Bibliography
 EN 50091-2: UPS - Electromagnetic compatibility.

 EN 50160: Voltage characteristics of public networks.
 IEEE 519
Recommended practices and requirements for harmonic control in electrical power
systems.
 EMC Directive 2004/108/EC

For equipment liable to cause or be affected by electromagnetic disturbances.
 European LV directive: 2006/95/EC

 ISO 3746: Determination of sound power levels of noise sources.
 ISO 7779 / EN 27779: Measurement of airborne noise emitted by computer and

business equipment.
07/2016 edition p. 499

Schneider Electric
140 avenue Jean Kuntzmann

38334 St Ismer Cedex
Phone: + 33 (0) 4 76 18 30 13
www.schneider-electric.com
Document date 07/2016
©2015 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

All trademarks are owned by Schneider Electric Industries SAS or its affiliated companies. This document has been
printed on recycled paper

Schneider Electric UPS

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Schneider Electric UPS

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Specifier’s

Application Chapters ...................................................... 3

Specification guides ....................................................... 167

Bibliography .................................................................... 494

Dear Designer, Specifier, Consulting or Prescription Engineer,

Thank you for considering Schneider Electric. We are pleased to provide

In this engineering binder, you will find information on Schneider

CONTENTS AND DRAWINGS MAY BE REVISED FROM TIME TO TIME.

TO ENSURE YOU ARE USING THE LATEST INFORMATION, PLEASE VISIT

OR INQUIRE WITH YOUR SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC REPRESENTATIVE.

Growing needs for high-quality and high-availability power

Schneider Electric - a complete solution covering all needs

A guide to assist professionals dealing with electrical

Structure of this document

Information may be located in a number of ways:

Finally, to facilitate the preparation of projects:

Refererences to technical articles (White Papers - WP) are indicated by the

Chap. 1: Key factors in UPS installation

Power protection solutions

Fig. 1.1. Schneider Electric products.

Schneider Electric 07/2012 edition p. 7

Accompanying software and services

Fig. 1.2. Schneider Electric software and services.

Schneider Electric 07/2016 edition p. 8

Function of each component in the installation

Fig. 1.3. Functions of the components in installations with UPSs.

Schneider Electric 07/2016 edition p. 9

Sources of information in setting up installation specifications

Choices Purpose See Additional information See

Schneider Electric 07/2016 edition p. 10

Need for high-quality

Requirements of sensitive loads

Costs incurred by the quality of electrical power

Examples of hourly costs of failures

Schneider Electric 07/2016 edition p. 11

Supply systems with Purpose of UPSs

Double-conversion static UPSs

Schneider Electric 07/2016 edition p. 12

Fig. 1.6.1. Double-conversion static UPS

Fig. 1.6.2. ECOnversion mode principle

ECO mode in static UPSs

Fig. 1.6.3. ECO Mode principle

Power quality of UPSs

By design, double-conversion solid-state UPSs supply to the connected loads a

Voltage quality for linear loads

Examples of linear loads

UPSs and linear loads

Purely resistive load Load with inductor and/or capacitor

Voltage quality for non-linear loads

Examples of non-linear loads

Voltage and current drawn by a single-phase

Schneider Electric 07/2016 edition p. 14

Harmonic spectrum of the current drawn by a non-linear load

Voltage and current harmonic distortion

Harmonic distortion levels

THDI = 35% (see calculation ch. 5, p. 41)

 Non-linear loads, see "Elimination of harmonics in installations" and

UPSs and non-linear loads

Limiting the distortion of the output voltage

Schneider Electric 07/2016 edition p. 15

UPS power availability What is meant by availability?

Fig. 1.10. MTTR and MTBF.

What is the practical signification of availability?

What are the factors contributing to availability?